Forgotten History: US Bankers Financing US Enemies - And Why It Is Important Now January 14 2026 | From: JonRappoport / Various
In 1971, Gary Allen published his book, None Dare Call it Conspiracy. It quickly became an unofficial best seller. Over the years, several million copies have been sold.
Allen’s thesis was stark: super-rich American capitalists were financing socialism. This bizarre paradox was resolved when socialism was properly understood - not as “power to the people” - but as elite power over the people. In other words, as a hoax.
These days, the socialist hoax is still unknown to most of the population. Cloak a global power grab as progress for all of humanity.
Here, from chapter six of None Dare Call it Conspiracy, “The Rockefellers and the Reds,” is a devastating passage commenting on the period just after the Russian Revolution of 1917:
“The Rockefellers assigned their public relations agent, Ivy Lee, to sell the American public the idea that the Bolsheviks were merely misunderstood idealists who were actually kind benefactors of mankind.”
“’Quite predictably…[Ivy] Lee concludes that the communist problem is merely psychological. By this time he is talking about “Russians” (not Communists) and concludes “they are all right.”
He suggests the United States should not engage in propaganda; makes a plea for peaceful coexistence; and suggests the United States would find it sound policy to recognize the USSR and advance credits [give loans].’ (Antony Sutton, Western Technology and Soviet Economic Development, 1917-1930, Hoover Institution on War, Revolution and Peace, Stanford University, Calif., 1968, p.292)”
“After the Bolshevik Revolution, Standard [Oil] of New Jersey [Rockefeller] bought 50 per cent of the Nobel’s huge Caucasus oil fields even though the property had theoretically been nationalized [by Russia]. (O’Connor, Harvey, The Empire Of Oil, Monthly Review Press, New York, 1955, p.270.)”
“In 1927, Standard Oil of New York [Rockefeller] built a refinery in Russia, thereby helping the Bolsheviks put their economy back on its feet. Professor Sutton states: ‘This was the first United States investment in Russia since the Revolution.’ (Ibid, Vol.1, p.38)”
“Shortly thereafter Standard Oil of New York and its subsidiary, Vacuum Oil Company [Rockefeller], concluded a deal to market Soviet oil in European countries and it was reported that a loan of $75,009,000 to the Bolsheviks was arranged. (National Republic, Sept.1927.)”
“…Wherever Standard Oil would go, Chase National Bank was sure to follow. (The Rockefeller’s Chase Bank was later merged with the Warburg’s Manhattan Bank to form the present Chase Manhattan Bank.) In order to rescue the Bolsheviks, who were supposedly an archenemy, the Chase National Bank was instrumental in establishing the American-Russian Chamber of Commerce in 1922.
President of the Chamber was Reeve Schley, a vice-president of Chase National Bank. (Ibid, Vol.11, p.288) According to Professor Sutton: ‘In 1925, negotiations between Chase and [Russian] Prombank extended beyond the finance of raw materials and mapped out a complete program for financing Soviet raw material exports to the U. S. and imports of U. S. cotton and machinery.’ (Ibid, Vol.11, p.226) Sutton also reports that ‘Chase National Bank and the Equitable Trust Company were leaders in the Soviet credit business.’ (Ibid, p.277)”
“The Rockefeller’s Chase National Bank also was involved in selling Bolshevik bonds in the United States in 1928. Patriotic organizations denounced the Chase as an ‘international fence.’ Chase was called ‘a disgrace to America… They will go to any lengths for a few dollars profits.’ (Ibid, Vol.11, p.291) Congressman Louis McFadden, chairman of the House Banking Committee, maintained in a speech to his fellow Congressmen:”
“’The Soviet government has been given United States Treasury funds by the Federal Reserve Board and the Federal Reserve Banks acting through the Chase Bank and the Guaranty Trust Company and other banks in New York City.”
“’Open up the books of Amtorg, the trading organization of the Soviet government in New York, and of Gostorg, the general office of the Soviet Trade Organization, and of the State Bank of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics and you will be staggered to see how much American money has been taken from the United States’ Treasury for the benefit of Russia.
Find out what business has been transacted for the State Bank of Soviet Russia by its correspondent, the Chase Bank of New York’. (Congressional Record, June 15, 1933.)”
“But the Rockefellers apparently were not alone in financing the Communist arm of the Insiders’ conspiracy. According to Professor Sutton ‘… there is a report in the State Department files that names Kuhn, Loeb & Co. (the long established and important financial house in New York) as the financier of the [Russians’] First Five Year Plan. See U. S. State Dept. Decimal File, 811.51/3711 and 861.50 FIVE YEAR PLAN/236.’ (Sutton, op. cit., Vol. II, p. 340n.)”
“Professor Sutton proves conclusively in his three volume history of Soviet technological development that the Soviet Union was almost literally manufactured by the U.S.A…”
“…Sutton shows that there is hardly a segment of the Soviet economy which is not a result of the transference of Western, particularly American, technology.”
“This cannot be wholly the result of accident. For fifty years the Federal Reserve-CFR-Rockefeller-lnsider crowd has advocated and carried out policies aimed at increasing the power of their satellite, the Soviet Union. Meanwhile, America spends $75 billion a year on defense to protect itself from the enemy the Insiders are building up.”
NOTE: The descendants of these bankers are now doing everything they can to build up the story that Donald Trump won the presidency by colluding with Russians. To call this an irony, in view of the above information, would be a vast understatement.
However, the motives of these men are clear: regardless of whether Trump meant to keep his promises to destroy Globalism (aka worldwide socialism), his mere mention of Globalism as the enemy, during the presidential campaign, and his declared opposition to Globalist “free trade” treaties, was sufficient to warrant an all-out attack on him.
The whole idea of nationalism as preferable to Globalism could act as a contagious germ spreading to the people of other countries - so Trump as the face and symbol of such sentiments had to be defamed and crushed.
Through various front organizations, cutouts, dupes, brainwashed useful idiots, and violent hired thugs, that operation to crush Trump is well underway.
Again - and this point must be understood - IT DOESN’T MATTER WHETHER TRUMP EVER MEANT TO KEEP HIS PROMISE TO BURY GLOBALISM. THE MERE MENTION OF GLOBALISM AS THE ENEMY WAS AND IS SUFFICIENT TO WARRANT UNCEASING ATTACKS AGAINST HIM.
Many, many of Trump’s supporters want to see Globalism buried.
Ultimately, they are the real target of the Globalists, who want to neutralize and disperse them and make them passive and demoralized.
Bilderberg On Steroids - Meet The Secret CIA-Funded Group Behind The ‘War On Terror’ January 13 2026 | From: TheFreeThoughtProject / Various
A foreign policy think tank more secretive than Bilderberg has included both instrumental architects of the "War of Terror" and accusations of CIA funding.
Bilderberg has gained a reputation as the world’s most secretive group of billionaires and political leaders who conspire to impact global events - but reports indicate that they don’t hold a candle to another group that includes a host of war criminals responsible for the “War on Terror.”
The group is named Le Cercle. In a report dated Sept. 13, 1982, the German publication Der Spiegel describes it as a “legal cartel” made up of “loyal Bundesnachrichtendienst agents, foreign intelligence agents, reactionary politicians and ultra-right journalists” who played a crucial role in the 1980 election.
The existence of the group was revealed by Bavarian constitutional protector Hans Langemann. According to the report, he described the group as:
“In the case of CERCLE, which is clearly defamatory,” as far as my earlier knowledge of the BND “and my present knowledge are concerned, a “loose” “concentration “about two times a year and at various” places of conservative- anti-Communist politician,” “publicists, bankers, and VIPs of other professions,” “which originated in the former French Prime Minister Antoine PINAY, and the circle to which guests are invited continues to this day..”
Former U.S. Defense Secretary and President of the World Bank Paul Wolfowitz, former Iraqi Coalition Provisional Authority Leader Paul Bremer, former Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld and former Chairman of the Defense Department’s Defense Policy Board Richard Perle - some of the most notable neoconservative architects of the Iraq War - are all reportedly members.
Other reported American members of Le Cercle include former U.S. Secretary of State Henry Kissinger, former Directors of Central Intelligence Bill Casey and William Colby, and former President Richard Nixon after he left the White House.
In a report from The Independent dated June 28, 1997, the “exclusive think-tank said to be funded by the CIA” is mentioned because its chairman at the time, former Member of Parliament Jonathan Aitken, was reportedly going to be removed over a libel trial that ultimately sent him to prison for perjury.
Accusations that Le Cercle receives funding from the CIA have been made by Robin Ramsay, editor of Lobster Magazine; and by John E Lewis, author of “The Mammoth Book of Cover-Ups.”
As the report noted, “the group’s existence is only occasionally disclosed” following its creation in the 1950s:
“Cercle was intended to cement Franco-German relations, as a buffer to Soviet aggression during the Cold War. Down the years, however, it has become much more, advocating right-wing causes round the world and growing into a confidential talking shop for about 70 politicians, businessmen, polemicists and personnel from the diplomatic and security services.
Members are invited to attend its meetings; they cannot ask to be admitted, and as a condition of attending they agree to keep all sessions secret. It meets twice a year, once in Washington DC in the autumn and once in the early part of the year in an ‘overseas’ venue.”
The Independent described senior member Brian Crozier as an “author and well-known Cold-Warrior with close ties to MI6 and the CIA” who wrote a “planning paper” for Le Cercle in 1979.
In addition to securing changes of government in Germany and the United Kingdom (where Margaret Thatcher became Prime Minister in 1979), the agenda included objectives such as:
“Undercover financial transactions for political aims”
“International campaigns aiming to discredit hostile personalities or events”
“Creation of a (private) intelligence service specializing in a selective point of view”
“Establishment of offices under suitable cover each run by a coordinator from the central office. Current plans cover London, Washington, Paris, Munich and Madrid”
In a report on the history of Le Cercle, British news source True Publica noted that the 1982 Langemann Papers were “the first significant leak to expose the activities of Le Cercle, confirming that the group was actively involved in influencing Western European elections.”
“Its purpose is to subvert the democratic principles and processes of individual countries and are by nature ideologically ‘hawkish’ – distributing propaganda, stoking fear of communist plots from Russia, vote rigging and hacking the accounts of politicians and prominent global figures.
Promoting the ‘war on terror’ has been a major factor in their activities of recent years and in so doing broker weapons deals and setting up false flag operations the world over to suit its own agenda.”
While the majority of the information surrounding Le Cercle is covert and secretive - especially regarding its activity in recent years - one of the most important things to remember about the think tank is that its presence is well-documented, its members include influential U.S. politicians, there have been accusations of funding by the CIA, and yet mainstream media in the United States has ignored its existence and influence for decades.
Energy Depletion In A Human Being January 12 2026 | From: NoMoreFakeNews / Various
Energy. As in: energy depletion. Without energy, the individual feels trapped. In that state, he / she seeks to conform, fit in, survive long enough to die of old age.
Body and mind deploy various feedback mechanisms to inform a person about his “available supply of energy,” and when these signals are taken as absolute truth, trouble comes.
“I can sense my energy is dwindling. So I have to…settle for less, or see a doctor, or give up, or accept that I’m getting older, or change my values, or tune up a victim-story, or join a group, or…”
On and on it goes. In this twilight zone, the individual is unwilling to consider solutions that could restore his vitality. He’s already opted for a lower level of life. In particular, he’s unwilling to explore the one aspect of his capability that works like magic: Imagination.
That’s out. No dice. Preposterous. Absurd. After all, imagination is just that spring rain he felt as a child, that unknown space that held all the promise in the world. That was then; this is now.
Now is sober reflection. Now is routine. Now is habit. Now is empty.
Once upon a time, he read a science fiction novel and, at the end of it, he felt as if he were standing, triumphant, in deep space at the crossroad of a hundred solar systems. Now he knows there is no such place. Now he is intelligent. And now he has no energy. The light that once flared is gone.
The idea that his own imagination could lead him to discoveries beyond anything he knows is fool’s gold. Yes, once when he was twenty, he woke up in the middle of the night and walked to his window and looked out over a city and knew he was on the cusp of an endless future…but what can he do about that now? There is no returning.
So his imagination waits. It idles. Yet…if he took a chance, if he began to dream again, if he started up the engine, if he considered offloading the interlocking systems that have become his daily life, what might happen? What layers of dead thought might peel away?
What abiding convictions might dissolve? What energies might be restored?
Is there a huge space beyond his common neurological impulses and rigid survival habits, where vision can be played out on a vast scale? Is there a different kind of life he can enter?
Can he take a route around the banners and facades of his former reality after opening the door to his imagination?
There is, in fact, a silent channel that winds through the entire time-scale of the human race.
History does not officially record it, because history is written by winners for losers, and this silent channel has nothing to do with pedestrian notions of victory or defeat.
The route of imagination has no truck with conventional space or time. It invents its own, and eventually introduces them into the world.
How many stories are there about journeying knights who cross the boundary from ordinary events into a realm of magic? The stories are messages…sent to ourselves, to remember. This place, this day, this moment is a platform from which to embark.
How You Were Tricked To Live In The Land Of The Legally Dead January 11 2026 | From: WakingTimes / Various
The current reality of man is heavily controlled by words. As a result of that, words play a big role in shaping the reality and culture of man.
Besides shaping the reality and culture of man, words also play an important role in trade. Some of the most important words used in the business of trading goods and services are related to the name.
Your name plays a very important role in your life because it allows others to identify you and communicate with you. Furthermore, it allows you to operate in the realm of commerce and fiction, making it easier for you to trade goods and services with people not living close to you.
Having a name can be a wonderful thing but if you do not know how to use it wisely, it can be a curse and prevent you from living a happy life. One of the ways that your name can curse you is when you allow it to bond to your mind too deeply, causing you to think that your name is who you really are.
Your name has the power to trick your mind because it is made up of sigils (letters). Because of this, it is important to use your name wisely, so you do not become a victim of your name.
When you do not know how to use your name wisely, the Dark Magicians or the Elite can use it to imprison your body, mind and soul in the "land" of the legally DEAD.
The best time to trick you to "live" in the land of the legally dead or the "sea" of the legally dead is on the day your mother gave "birth" to you.
How You Were Tricked to Live in the Land of the Legally Dead
It is interesting to know that when you look up the word birth in A Dictionary of Law (1889), it tells you to "see Abandon, 2 (2)". The word abandon in section 2 (2) is defined by A Dictionary of Law (1889) using these exact words: "The act of a parent in exposing an infant of tender years (usually under seven) in any place, with intent wholly to desert it."
Based on the definition in the previous paragraph, when your mother gave birth to you and your parents signed the birth certificate with your name on it, they unknowingly agreed to abandon you.
This allowed the State to claim "you" as its property and ship "you" to the land of the legally dead (legal fiction).
Be aware that the word birth sounds almost identical to the word berth. Because they sound nearly identical, a judge or government agent can use them to trick you to think that he is talking about birth when he is actually talking about berth and vice versa. The word berth is defined as "sufficient space for a vessel to maneuver; sea room" or "a space for a vessel to dock or anchor".
"When a ship is in the process of being docked, it is being guided to come to berth. The word berth is defined as “a space for a vessel to dock or anchor”.33 Based on this information, when a product is unloaded onto the dock, it just went through the berthing process, which is the process of delivering the product from the vessel/ship onto the dock.
Phonetically, the word berth sounds like the word birth. This is why when a woman is in the process of giving birth, she is said to be delivering a baby. The birthing process of a baby is related to the process of delivering a product on a ship. Every woman has a body.
Another word for body is vessel. A vessel can also be called a ship. The words body, vessel, and ship can all mean the same thing and be used to represent a woman’s body. This is why a ship is often referred to as “she” and the main ship is often called the “mother ship”.
To connect the dots, the process of a woman giving birth can also be defined as the process of delivering or berthing a product of a ship. Metaphorically speaking, the product is the baby and the ship is the woman’s body.
When you compare all the information that you just read about commerce and the sea business to the process of birthing a baby, you will see a strong connection between the berthing process of a ship and the birthing process of a baby.
By spelling the words berth and birth slightly different and making them sound almost the same, the Dark Forces and their minions (the Dark Magicians) can trick you to agree to be a product of a ship, so that they can have jurisdiction over you.
They know that they can not have jurisdiction over the real you (the living, breathing man or woman made of flesh and blood), which is why they need you to consent to be an artificial person, so that they can treat you like a product and make money by selling you on the stock market."
The process of tricking you to agree to be an artificial person is mostly done through the legal system, which is the system that deals with the DEAD.
The legal system is controlled by the Vatican of the Holy Roman Empire, one of the biggest practitioners of magic spells.
The legal system is obsessed with magic spells, because certain magic spells have the power to summon the dead.
This is why before a judge (also known as a magistrate/magi-strate, which is a magician) demands you to appear in court, a court agent needs to serve you a summons letter.
When a court agent serves you a summons letter, the first question he asks you is often related to your legal name, which 99 percent of the time is written in all capital letters on legal documents. For example, the court agent may ask you the question "are you JOHN DOE?"
If you were to answer yes to being your legal name and accept the summons letter, you would basically agree to play the role of a dead character. This occurs because the legal name is not living; instead it is a fictitious entity that has no life force of its own. As a result of that, it is as dead as a fictional character in a storybook.
The summons letter is used to summon the dead using you (the living man or woman) as the medium. This is why a court agent has to serve you a summons letter with your legal name on it before a judge can demand you to appear in court.
To connect the dots, when you accept a summons letter, whether you realize it or not, you agree to raise the dead so you can play the role of a dead character. In other words, you agree to be a zombie. This is why it is called a summons letter. What do witches do when they want to communicate with dead spirits? They summon them using certain magic spells.
Have you seen the TV series The Walking Dead? In this TV series, the zombies represent the sheeple who do not even realize that they are legally dead. In other words, from the perspective of the the Dark Magicians, you are the walking dead, get it?
The zombie apocalypse is not something that could happen in the future. It is already here because the people are, in a sense, the walking dead!
To learn how to free yourself from the land or sea of the legally dead, you need to learn how to use words wisely. Furthermore, you need to learn how to use the power of Natural Law to exercise your natural rights. To learn how to do these things, visit my website EsotericKnowledge.me and become a member.
Imperial Narrative Control Has Five Distinct Elements January 10 2026 | From: CaitlinJohnstone / Various
All of our world’s worst problems are created by the powerful. The powerful will keep creating those problems until ordinary people use their superior numbers to make them stop.
Ordinary people don’t use their superior numbers to stop the powerful because the powerful are continuously manipulating people’s understanding of what’s going on.
Humans are storytelling creatures. If you can control the stories humans are telling themselves about the world, you control the humans, and you control the world.
Mental narrative plays a hugely prominent role in human experience; if you’ve ever tried to still your mind in meditation you know exactly what I’m talking about.
Babbling thought stories dominate our experience of reality. It makes sense then that if you can influence those stories, you’re effectively influencing someone’s experience of reality.
The powerful manipulate the dominant narratives of our society in approximately five major ways: propaganda, censorship, Silicon Valley algorithm manipulation, government secrecy, and the war on journalism.
Like the fingers on a hand they are distinct from each other and each play their own role, but they’re all part of the same thing and work together toward the same goal. They’re all just different aspects of the US-centralized empire’s narrative control system.
1. Propaganda
Everyone's Anti-War Until The War Propaganda Starts
"Nobody thinks of themselves as a warmonger, but then the spin machine gets going and before you know it they're spouting the slogans they've been programmed to spout"https://t.co/lLnPVlfyfK
Propaganda is the empire’s narrative creation system. While the other four elements of imperial narrative control are geared mostly toward preventing inconvenient narratives from circulating, propaganda is the means by which the empire generates narratives which benefit it.
That foreign leader is a dictator and needs to be removed. That inconvenient politician is sinister in some way and must not be permitted to lead.
Your government loves human rights and all its wars are humanitarian. Voting works. Capitalism is great. You can trust us, we’re the good guys.
The wealthy media-owning class protects its own class interests by hiring media executives whose worldview matches its own, and those executives hire underlings with the same worldview, who hire their own underlings with the same worldview, and before you know it you’re looking at a media conglomerate full of people who all support the status quo politics of the media-owning class whose kingdoms are built upon that status quo.
In fact these giant media institutions are so invested in protecting the status quo that they have a very large degree of overlap with other institutions responsible for maintaining the imperial status quo, like the US intelligence cartel.
News punditry is now full of “former” intelligence officials, and anytime there’s a narrative an intelligence agency wants printed it simply has an officer or a proxy whisper it to a mainstream news reporter who then uncritically repeats that narrative disguised as a news story.
Reporters within this system are not explicitly told to generate propaganda to protect status quo power. Rather, they develop a sense for what kind of reporting will get published and earn them attaboys in the newsroom and what will get spiked and cause their career to stagnate.
If they fail to learn to navigate the system in this way, you simply never hear about them, because their careers peter out.
2. Censorship
More Escalations In Online Censorship
"YouTube has been deleting videos disputing the US government narrative about Russian war crimes in Bucha"https://t.co/M7zupF8AMa
Propaganda is geared toward putting narratives favorable to the oligarchic empire in front of people, while censorship is all about keeping unfavorable narratives away from public vision.
We’ve long seen this expressed in the way the mass media simply refuse to give any platform or voice to critics of capitalism and imperialism, but imperial narrative management has required a whole new order of censorship since internet access became widely available.
Because the widespread ability to share ideas and information poses a major threat to imperial narrative control, empire managers have been working toward normalizing and expanding censorship on internet platforms like Google / YouTube, Meta / Facebook / Instagram, and Twitter.
Any online space where a large number of people gather will find itself pressured by the US government to remove a wider and wider spectrum of content in the name of public safety, election security, containing a virus, or just keeping people from thinking wrong thoughts about a war.
Every few months since the US election in 2016 we’ve been fed a new reason why more internet censorship is needed, which is always followed by a giant purge of the newly-banned content and the accounts which created it.
This trend has escalateddramatically with the Ukraine war, where for the first time there’s no pretense being made that content is being censored to protect the public interest; it’s just being censored because it disagrees with what western government and media institutions tell us.
3. Silicon Valley Algorithm Manipulation
Silicon Valley Algorithm Manipulation Is The Only Thing Keeping Mainstream Media Alive
Recent statements by YouTube's CEO highlight the way Silicon Valley tech giants use algorithms to boost mainstream media propaganda and suppress independent content.https://t.co/rJRkSmydUG
This one relates to both propaganda and censorship, because it facilitates both.
Silicon Valley officials have admitted to manipulating their algorithms to make sure that independent media doesn’t get seen very much while artificially elevating the online publications of mass media outlets on the basis that they are “authoritative sources” of information, despite the fact that those “authoritative sources” have lied to us about every war.
Silicon Valley algorithm manipulation does more damage than overt forms of online censorship, because its consequences are much more far-reaching and because people don’t even know it’s happening.
When Google changed its algorithms to ensure that leftist and antiwar media outlets ranked much lower in search results than they used to, it influenced the way millions of people gather information about the most important issues in the world.
If it weren’t for tech giants artificially directing traffic toward empire-approved media outlets, those outlets probably would have shut down by now.
We saw a clear illustration of how disdainful the public is of mass media outlets when the paid streaming service CNN+ was forced to shut down just 30 days after its launch when it failed to maintain even ten thousand daily viewers.
People don’t consume mainstream news media unless it is foisted upon them.
4. Government Secrecy
The Only Obstacle To A Healthy World Is Government Secrecy And Propaganda
"If people in power were no longer able to hide secrets and spin lies about what’s going on in the world, all of our major problems would come to an end."https://t.co/NIWdBpY4Jn
Like censorship, government secrecy is another way the empire prevents inconvenient narratives from entering public awareness.
By classifying information on the basis of “national security”, the empire prevents unauthorized narratives before they even get off the ground. As Julian Assange once said;
"The overwhelming majority of information is classified to protect political security, not national security.”
The amount of power you have should be inversely proportional to the amount of privacy you get.
In a healthy society, ordinary people would have full privacy from the government while government officials should have to be fully transparent about their lives, finances and behavior.
In our society it’s exactly reversed: the people are surveilled and monitored while those in power hide vast troves of information behind walls of government opacity.
They hide everything they’re doing from the view of the public, then when people start taking educated guesses about what they might be up to behind the veil of government secrecy they get called “conspiracy theorists”.
There would be no need to form theories about conspiracies if there was complete transparency for the powerful, but of course this would greatly hinder the ability of the powerful to conspire.
They claim they need government secrecy to avoid giving an advantage to the enemy in times of war and conflict, but really they need government secrecy to start wars and conflicts.
5. The War on Journalism
Assange Is Doing His Most Important Work Yet
As important as his WikiLeaks publications are, none of them exposed the depravity of the empire as much as forcing them to look us in the eye and tell us they'll extradite a journalist for telling the truth.https://t.co/Qr3KVqH0TP
The goal of the Assange case is to establish a legal precedent for extraditing any journalist or publisher anywhere in the world who tries to get around US government secrecy.
Once a precedent has been set and consent has been manufactured, the war on journalism can really get going.
All of these five points are used to control the way people see, think about, and talk about their world, thereby controlling how they act and how they vote at mass scale.
This enables the powerful to maintain an entirely enslaved populace which never tries to escape its enslavement, because it thinks it is already free.
Financial Fraud: Easy Money Corrupts The Monetary System January 9 2026 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various
Virtual Money: “Money” is virtual, a mental concept, an accounting system. Our currency is like a coupon, in other words, money is a medium of exchange. The Central Banking Cartel creates it out of thin air, as a debt to itself, something our government could do interest and debt-free.
But our governments belongs to a small group of elites, not to us. The aim of the New World Order is to expand this racket into a global political, cultural and economic monopoly.
The freezing of accounts that took place in Greece is only a taste of what’s to come. Right now the highest levels of government and the banking system are locked in a desperate last stand against a disturbing monetary shock, one that will make what happened in Greece seem mild by comparison.
And it could disrupt people’s lives in ways you never thought possible. You will suddenly be locked out of your bank account, unable to withdraw cash or deposit a check. Your stocks will swing wildly out of control. Your government-controlled payments will stop.
Remember: media disinformation serves the interests of global banks and institutional speculators, which use their command over the financial and commodity markets to amass vast amounts of monetary wealth. The corporate establishment, including the speculators, controls the corridors of governments.
Meanwhile, the “bank bailouts”, presented to the public as a requisite for economic recovery, have facilitated and legitimised a further process of appropriation of people’s wealth.
Vast amounts of monetary wealth are acquired through market manipulation and deceit.
With inside-information and foreknowledge, major financial actors, using the instruments of speculative trade, have the ability to fiddle and rig market movements to their advantage, precipitate the collapse of a competitor, or even the system itself, and wreak havoc in the economies and societies of developing countries.
Take the Greek’s valuable lessons to heart, and let other people know that the upcoming crash will cause the world to descend into chaos, as planned by the RK Mafia, to rob people blind and bring them to their knees so that they will accept the New World Order without any revolt.
It is the long time phenomenon, their well-orchestrated Problem – Reaction – Solution.
Since it is very likely that things may get out of control even for the RK Mafia, you had better use the coming few months for the preparation of your survival.
Governments Can Seize Your Property Without Having to Convict You of a Crime:
Governments are trying to abolish cash. Leading economists are pushing for it to be banned, too. Limits on cash use are already in place in many countries.
Having a large amount of cash is already considered “suspicious,” subject to forfeiture without due process – thanks to civil forfeiture laws, governments can seize your property without having to convict you of a crime.
"Mandrel Stuart, a 35-year-old African American owner of a small barbecue restaurant in Staunton, Va., was stunned when police took $17,550 from him during a stop in 2012 for a minor traffic violation on the Interstate 66 in Fairfax. He rejected a settlement with the government for half of his money and demanded a jury trial.
He eventually got his money back but lost his business because he didn’t have the cash to pay his overheads. – “I paid taxes on that money. I worked for that money,” Stuart said. “Why should I give them my money?”
As the Washington Post reported here, police have made 61,998 cash seizures – totalling $2.5 billion since 9/11 – without search warrants or indictments.
Why do governments want to eliminate cash? Isn’t it obvious? They want to control you and your money. Where did you get it? They’ll want to know everything. What will you do with it?
They’ll want a say. Could you not be planning to use it for something “bad”? – You might support “terrorists” – evade taxes – or buy a pack of illegal cigarettes. The possibilities are too vast to ignore. And the arguments are too persuasive to stop the Witch Hunt.
Easy Money Corrupts the Monetary System:
The system is corrupt and dangerously dysfunctional. But why does no one say anything? Central Bankers have, since the 1980s, been fighting credit corrections – being themselves the originators of the credit bubbles.
And for the last six years, the Central Bankers have been so actively and aggressively defending the past that the future doesn’t have a chance. Their easy money has corrupted the entire system. So, there can never be a true recovery of the economy.
Zero Hedge summarizes the “pros”: Enhance the tax base, as most, if not all transactions in the economy can now be traced by the government. – Substantially constrain the parallel economy, particularly in illicit activities. Force people to squander their savings on consumption and/or convert them into investments, thereby providing a boost to GDP and employment!
The United Nations Agenda 21 Program:
The Archon bloodlines want us to accept their Agenda 21 program. Unfortunately for the people of the world, so far everything is going according to the New World Order Plan.
Agenda 21 is so-called as it is the ‘the agenda for the 21st century’ and that constitutes global fascism/communism. Here is a summary of what Agenda 21 includes: ‘Sustainable’ development – don’t use more than can be replaced – sounds sensible enough at first, until it is realised what this and ‘biodiversity’ really means in the context of the conspiracy.
As, ‘Sustainable Development’ and ‘Biodiversity’ is seeking to impose the following:
Termination of national sovereignty
State planning and management of all land resources, ecosystems, deserts, forest, mountains, oceans, and fresh water; agriculture; rural development; biotechnology; and ensuring ‘equality’ e.: equal enslavement
The State defines the role of business and financial resources Abolition of private property – as it is not ‘sustainable’
‘Restructuring’ the family unit
Children raised by the State
Telling people what their job will be and where to live
Major restrictions on the movement of people
Creation of ‘human settlement zones’
Mass resettlement as people are forced to vacate their land; homes, where they currently live
Dumbing down education-form – achieved, in effect.
Mass global depopulation in pursuit of all of the above.
Agenda 21, the term coined already over two hundred years ago – implies the goal for the completion phase lies in this century.
The secret plan of the New World Order is to reduce the world’s population to a “sustainable” level “in perpetual balance with nature” by a ruthless Population Control Agenda via Population and Reproduction Control.
A Mass Culling of the People is accomplished via Planned Parenthood, toxic adulteration of water and food supplies, the release of weaponised, man-made viruses – like AIDS, EBOLA, etc. – man-made pandemics, mass vaccination programs and the planned Third World War.
Then, Agenda 21 will impose upon the drastically reduced world population, a global feudal-fascist state with ‘one’ World Government, World Religion, World Army, World Central Bank, World Currency and a micro-chipped population for optimal control.
In short, they plan to kill 90% of the world’s population in order to control all aspects of human life and thus rule over everyone, everywhere from the cradle to the grave.
WAKE UP PEOPLE – Research everything while we can still join forces to overthrow these Criminal Mafioso that control every government in the world, as all are governed by corrupt politicians, most, if not all them being RKM bought puppets. They have literally sold their souls to the devil and they know they won’t survive if they don’t obey RKM orders.
Not only the monetary system, but also the whole geopolitical system is corrupted. We will very soon have no freedom anymore, unless we wake up and join forces. We are currently enslaved through the tax system through our birth certificates. People have become assets to exploit and earn money off of.
Related: The Vatican Is A Criminal Hornets’ Nest Our tax money is deposited in the RKM controlled Vatican bank. Things are getting worse by the day. The point of no return is rapidly approaching and soon it will be too late. We have only very little time left to come to our own defence by waking up and joining forces.
If you do nothing you deserve what you’re going to get.
The Truth About Our Civilisation and You:
This video clearly explains in a nutshell how deeply we, the people are caught up in the network that has been continuously functioning since the year1860. In this system you are not whom you think you are, because a legal person owns his DNA, but at birth your DNA was stolen.
Our oppressors created from every person a corporation with his name in Capital letters, that’s why your name on all official documents is written in capital letters, which does NOT represent the physical you. Check your driver’s licence for confirmation. Only a birth certificate supported by its DNA is evidently a person or citizen.
The Crown in the City of London backs all these corporations, which in reality represents the Vatican. Meanwhile countless Lawyers worldwide are working on the reclamation of DNA, as soon as more progress is made it will be published, as it is in everyone’s interest to break-up the diabolical system in which we live.
By owning your DNA, they own you, your money, your property; they can create a bank holiday to steal your money, as it is not yours as a person, but theirs as the owner of the company that bears your name in CAPITAL letters! You are living under Admiralty Law, you neither have natural rights, nor Civil Rights. YOU ARE A SLAVE!
After controlling the monetary system, and stealing your civil rights, other Archon bloodline (RKM) Agenda 21 implementations are nearing completion, such as the total control of the food supply, weather, water, pharmaceuticals, energy, in order to render people in dire economic straits with no way out.
And so it has come to pass that the unelected EU government in 2013 proposed, rubberstamped and implemented new laws, making it illegal to grow your own food, reproduce or trade any ‘untested’ vegetables, awaiting approval by the Orwellian ‘EU Plant Variety Agency’, which charges a fee for each registration – ever-increasing payments for our food and for our own prison.
The ‘Plant Reproduction Material Law’ will make home gardening with non-regulated seeds a criminal act. This law will stop the professional development of vegetable varieties for home gardening, organic growers, and small-market farmers.
All these new laws do, is to create a whole new raft of EU civil servants who will be paid to move mountains of paper around all day long, while killing off the seed supply to home gardeners and interfering with the right of farmers to grow what they want.
It is also very disturbing that they have given themselves the power to regulate and license any plant species of all sorts in the future – not just agricultural plants, but grasses, mosses, flowers, absolutely everything – without having to bring it back to the Council to vote.
The Global Fascist / Communist Structure:
This is all connected to the plan to ban the population from growing their own food, destroy seed-diversity and allow the Archon food and biotech corporations to monopolise the global food supply – ‘Growing food can hereby be banned by simply stating that it isn’t safe, and then big RKM corporations would control all the food production of the entire planet.’
The global fascist/communist structure would subsequently decide what you should eat and if you are permitted to eat; and what you eat would invariably be full of chemical cocktails beyond anything consumed today to control the masses mentally, emotionally and physically.
The water supply would also be drugged so that people would end up ‘loving their servitude’ as Aldous Huxley wrote in his book the Brave New World.
If you ate, would depend on whether you were a good little mindless slave or not. No acquiescence, no food, and no water – the supply and distribution of food would be monitored so that no-one could give food to a fugitive of the system, as Dr Day put it in his lecture in 1969.
A terrible future prospect for all of us, but – for not too long – the power is still with the people if only we would come together in mutual support and if only international publicity and response to this would steadily lead to opposing and rejecting these horrible laws relating to growing our own food.
The bloodline families are terrified that the people will unite, that’s why ‘dividing and conquering us’ is their top priority.
It’s important to understand the reasoning of our Archon bloodline tyrants. They have no empathy, no compassion – they are narcissistic, psychopathic, sociopaths.
They have falsely invented the global warming scam – with the climate change narrative as their argument to depopulate, to cull the world’s populace from seven billion at present to 500 million by 2050.
Dr Richard Day, the Rockefeller insider and weather manipulator during WW2, said in 1969: 'The weather will be modified and used as a weapon of war to create drought or famine.’
Producing record-breaking snow in the mountains and constant heavy rains to flood the Missouri and the Mississippi is easy with the technology at the Archon bloodlines’ disposal – especially HAARP, in Alaska and various other locations worldwide, that transmits high-powered radio waves to the upper atmosphere, the ionosphere, heating it up and eventually bouncing back to earth.
Ken O’Keefe Exposes Jesuits, World Bankers, Illuminati, Reptilians, Freemasons:
Honouring The Trailblazers January 8 2026 | From: WakeUpWorld
We are in the midst of a massive shift in consciousness that is sweeping our sweet little planet. So why not take a moment and honour all of the brave souls, the “unsung heroes” who came here before us to assist with this shift and make it happen?
The empaths, the sensitives, lightworkers, wayshowers, and all those who were holding light and transmuting the dense energies long before the rest of us, so that others may awaken as well. They were the ones who were “awake” before the word “awake” ever had a deeper, more profound meaning. For many years, they have been the souls on the “front lines” of this awakening.
Some trailblazers were very aware of their role and courageously used their voice and called “bullshit” on the injustices and dishonesty of others, as they were able to see through it all with crystal clear vision.
They were often the activists and the leaders of social movements. They were those ahead of their time, who established newsletters and platforms such as this one, intended to help awaken the masses.
For many, they remained out of the spotlight and the world stage, choosing to personally guide those closest to them. And others, either aware of it or not, they went about their trailblazing in a more subtle fashion, choosing to show the way for others by simply living their lives as the example.
You know, the ones who were eating organic before eating organic became a trend, before it was even called “organic”, and before there were countless studies to prove that organic eating is indeed healthier for us.
They were the ones who took risks and followed their intuition. They were the ones who, in spite of all logical reasoning, sold everything they had and moved across the globe simply because their soul was calling them there, only to discover the many synchronicities, growth opportunities and reasons for this choice.
They were the people who were not satisfied with conformity and the status quo of getting a job that didn’t fulfill them just to pay the bills and buy things they don’t need, and then hope to one day retire and enjoy life, if there’s anything left of it.
They snuck puppies into care homes just to see the faces of the residents light up with joy.
They usually avoided or were very uncomfortable with organized religion.
Were often deemed as “lazy” or weirdos because of their lack of ambition or drive for monetary goals.
Their bodies were some of the first to reveal the damaging effects of our toxic food chain and vaccines, such as leaky gut and gluten intolerance, diabetes, thyroid problems, cancer and alzheimer’s disease.
They were the ones who refused to accept ill health as their destiny, and just a side effect of “growing old.”
They were the dreamers who knew that their dreams were important. They understood that peace and freedom are a right, not a privilege.
They were often exposed to trauma, abuse, and other challenging life situations.
They were the ones who refused to be a victim and instead chose to accept responsibility for their life and learn the lessons that were intended for them to learn.
They are the ones for whom experience did not harden their hearts, but instead, they chose to transcend and help others with their lessons.
They have a genuine love and affection for all of humanity, regardless of culture or skin colour.
Chances are, you likely recognize many of these examples either in yourself, or in others that you know. I have been blessed to have trailblazers in my life and to call them my friends. I honestly don’t know what I would do without their wisdom and support.
They have a strength and an unwavering nerve that comes with experience. They know exactly what they are capable of and there isn’t a whole lot that can surprise them.
One really has to appreciate those who were doing this great work at a time when the energies were so very dense. They were working with the limited tools, opportunities, support and knowledge that they had at the time, before the internet allowed information to flow freely, and before the term “the Shift” was even coined.
It could be said that they had to learn “the hard way”. (My own mother endured health issues for many years until, thanks to the vast amount of information on the internet, she finally discovered her health problems were all symptoms triggered by the mercury fillings in her mouth.)
At 32 years old myself, I realize that I am not speaking with decades upon decades of experience, but I can feel and see the effects of this Shift. There is such a greater acceptance of other ideas and concepts that were quite taboo only a short time ago, even from when I took my first level of Reiki training in 2010.
It is nothing now to hear people speaking of energy work and mindfulness as though they are everyday topics. But it wasn’t always this way…
I am in deep gratitude for all of those who came before me, and bravely lit the way so that I could step into who I really am.
Beyond Your Comfort Zone
While the trailblazers certainly had their hefty share of challenges, my generation is, of course, facing challenges as well. We are learning to play in a new arena.
The energies are changing quickly and our sensibilities and our bodies are trying to keep up. We are living within a higher dimension but still dealing with people and the limited concepts of the third dimension.
These are the days when we can become tired, or fed up with the world. When our expanded awareness threatens to become too much for our sensibilities to handle. We understand how it might be nice to live in ignorance, to not be so aware and feel so responsible.
And these are the days when a trailblazer will swoop into our life, our unassuming angels, to comfort and remind us of how amazing we are and of the great work we are doing. They restore our energy and tell us, “don’t give up, you’ve come so far. There are greater things ahead of you if you push beyond your comfort zone.”
The trailblazers have taught me compassion, patience, humility, and when I needed it, tough love. They have been there to assure me, “no, you’re not crazy”, or else, “this isn’t easy, but it is worth it.” They have reminded me that change is necessary and that there is vast potential that awaits within uncertainty.
Sometimes they have come into my life to stay, others have passed through, or were there only for a short time when I really needed them. On occasion, it was just a chance encounter or conversation in the line up of a grocery store.
And as you read this, no matter your age or where you feel you are at on this path, take a moment to honour yourself. Because the truth is, we are all trailblazers in our own, unique way.
We all have gifts to share with the rest of the world. And for every moment that we are living in our truth, or expressing our authentic selves, we are lighting the way and lending a hand for the next person to do the same.
No matter what “hat” we are wearing in this lifetime, absolutely everything that we do makes a difference. And every time that we are true to who we are and express our authentic selves, we light the way for another soul to do the same.
It is absolutely no accident that you are here at this time.
And that is something that every trailblazer will tell you; you are doing more than you can possibly know right now, but one day, it will be easy for you to see.
Nuggets of Wisdom from the Trailblazers
I would like to leave you with a few nuggets of wisdom and advice for this particular time that we are in that have recently been shared with me from my friends, “the trailblazers”;
Right now, it is of utmost importance to listen to your body. These energies are intense. In fact, the most intense that they have ever felt. This is huge work we are doing, and if you don’t get the much needed rest that your body is requiring, you will get burn out and end up needing to take a lot of time to recover.
So if you are feeling like you need more sleep even though your mind is telling you that you shouldn’t, tell your mind very gently to f*#k off!
Not everything that you feel is actually yours. You are transmuting dense energies for so many souls other than yourself, so honour the importance of that by listening to your body.
Do what ever it takes to stay grounded and balanced, be it taking regular nature walks, spending time with loved ones, meditating, simply sharing healing time with a pet by stroking their fur, going for a swim, or watching a sunset.
Listen to your soul and pay attention to what fills you with a sense of peace and contentment.
The other evening I sat on my deck and gazed into the setting sun. There was a magical glow cast upon my yard, and as I sat there, I allowed my eyes to lose focus and simply see the “light” that seemed to be glowing from within everything around me. It was then that I heard a gentle voice say, “now you are seeing the love that is in all things.”
They understand what we are going through right now, and you will feel your energy lighten considerably in their presence. I prefer to hug them or climb up into their limbs and wrap my arms around them for full effect.
Eat healthy and drink lots of water. Again, this is about honouring our bodies with proper fuel.
If you have fear, learn from it, integrate it. But do not let it stop you. We are here for self-actualization. It is wise to be wary, and to practice discernment, but try not to live in fear.
This is when our vibration drops and we are left feeling powerless. Fear is there to teach us something, so focus on what that lesson may be, not the fear itself.
Check in with yourself often. Just a simple question such as “Am I on the right track?” It is simply to confirm that you are aware of why you do what you are doing and for what reasons.
Follow the guidance of your heart as our brains can’t keep up to this shift. They always need to “know” what is going to happen and what the outcome will be. This is not how we operate on this level.
As I’ve been told, “we are in a new arena. The rules are changing.” I had a message similiar to this pop into my awareness as I was enjoying an evening bike ride, “I am not of this world, I don’t play by these rules.”
I felt as though it was a reminder from my higher self to not get caught up in the drama and anxiety of the third dimension and all of the “shoulds” that we feel we have to surrender to to feel happy and successful.
Stay humble. Just when you think you have it all figured out, your awareness will expand and you will realize just how much you didn’t know. We can only grow so much at one time, because if we tried to keep going and going, our bodies could never handle it. This is where the burn out comes in.
So remember that if you feel as though you have plateaud, this is simply a lookout point to your next stage of awareness. As long as you are willing, you will continue to grow, but trust that it cannot happen too quickly.
And above all, you can do this. Trust yourself. There is always help available, and you have many guides that are working with you. Not to mention, the Universe is on your side. Just think about the grand scope of that for a moment. The entire Universe which is capable of all things is on our side.
Meet the Universe halfway, and expect to be helped in magical ways that you would never expect.
Lastly, I would like to extend my deep appreciation to all of the trailblazers of the world, those who I have had the pleasure to meet and to talk to across the miles, and for the countless souls that I haven’t. Thank you.
The Rothschild Bloodline: Financial Wizards & Wealthy Cults January 7 2026 | From: Omnithought / BibliotecaPleyades The content of the following article gives the impression that the Rothschild bloodline is the wealthiest and most powerful family on Earth. The wealthiest and most powerful families on Earth are the people who hide in the shadows. In this lifetime, the chance of you hearing their names is near zero percent. You have a better chance of winner a million dollar lottery jackpot than hearing or seeing their names on the news or internet. – Pao Chang
Two neighbor horse farmers came together one day to talk business. The first farmer sold his horse to the second for a quarter million dollars, and then bought it back for about $20 more. He could now advertise his horse (actually worth $20), as a horse he that he had paid over a quarter of a million dollars for.
We can laugh over such schemes. And perhaps we should laugh at ourselves for having been fooled, for if there is one area in life that exceeds the religious in deception, and touches all of us it is the financial.
What else can we do about it except laugh? The famous poet Lord Byron describes the archtype of our two farmers in 1823, Who keeps the world, both old and new, in pain Or pleasure? Who makes politics run glibber all? The shade of Bonaparte’s noble daring?
Jew Rothschild and his fellow-Christian, Baring. You’ll learn about some other ,,neighbor horse traders” in this chapter too.
Lord Rothschild in his book The Shadow of a Great Man quotes a letter sent from Davidson on June 24, 1814 to Nathan Rothschild:
“As long as a house is like yours, and as long as you work together with your brothers, not a house in the world will be able to compete with you, to cause you harm or to take advantage of you, for together you can undertake and perform more than any house in the world.”
The closeness of the Rothschild brothers is seen in a letter from Saloman (Salmon) Rothschild to his brother Nathan on Feb. 28, 1815, “We are like the mechanism of a watch: each part is essential.
This closeness is further seen in that of the 18 marriages made by Mayer Amschel Rothschild’s grandchildren 16 were contracted between first cousins.
Visiting the Nation the Rothschilds Built
In 1974, in the summer after the Yom Kippur War this Author toured Israel, and got the chance to personally visit many of the buildings like the Knesset that the Rothschild’s money has built.
The Knesset is the Israeli equivalent to the US Congress’s Capitol building. One of the Rothschilds in his will left money for ongoing building projects in Israel, and the Rothschilds are honored with a Street named after them in Jerusalem.
The people of Germany and Turkey have been very close. I can recall meeting Turkish “Gastarbeiter” (guestworkers) in Germany.
The reader will remember that Turkey fought on Germany’s side in W.W. I. A few powerful Jews, including the Rothschilds were responsible for the wording of the Treaty imposed on Germany that ended W.W. I.
The treaty gave the Rothschilds the German owned railway rights in Palestine (which had been part of the Turkish Ottoman Empire), thus paving the way for the Rothschilds to have a sure leverage to dictate policy concerning Palestine.
The Rothschilds had made loans to Turkey which amounted to almost one hundred million pounds. When the Turkish government collapsed after W.W. I because they were on the losing side, the Rothschilds had a claim on Palestine because of those unpaid Turkish loans.
The British government followed the dictates of the Rothschilds. The British were given a mandate over Palestine, and the Rothschilds were able to through their proxies in the British government, to create the steps that led to the nation of Israel.
The Rothchilds as Prophets
One item stands out as a person listens to the International Bankers and reads their books. They believe money is what makes the world go round. If you have money, you can do anything.
Money is “God”, and it is worshipped and served. Even after these families accumulate more than can be spent, these devotees continue selling their souls for this false but powerful god.
The great poet-philosopher Heinrich Heine (a Banker’s son) said, “Money is the god of our time, and Rothschild is his prophet.” Following the cue of the Rothschilds, Heinrich Heme, a Jew, signed his name by drawing a Seal of Solomon.
Amschel Rothschild is reported to have said, “Give me control of the economics of a country; and I care not who makes her laws. Today his descendents meet twice daily in London to dictate to the world what the world price of gold will be. They also dictate what the “Federal Reserve System” will do with America’s finances.
Another God Too
According to eye-witnesses, who were prominent enough to visit one of the British Rothschild homes, the Rothschilds worship yet another god too, Satan. They set a place for him at their table.(8a) The Rothschilds have been Satanists for many generations.
The Rothschilds are an important part of the history of the Seal of Solomon (also known as hexagram, Magen David, six-pointed star, Star of David.) The Seal of Solomon, the hexagram, was not considered a Jewish symbol before the Rothschilds began using it.
Throughout the Middle Ages the Seal of Solomon had been used by Arab Magicians, Cabalist Magicians, Druid witches and Satanists. One of the few ancient uses of the symbol was on the floor of a 1,200 year old Moslem Mosque found where Tel Aviv is today.
In the twelve century an Ashkenazic Jew Menahem ben Duji, who thought he was the Messiah, used the magical symbol. Because the Rothschilds were Satanists they adopted this powerful magic symbol in 1822 for their coat- of-arms.
The name they adopted for their family actually comes from the fact that in the 17th century Mayer Amschel Bauer began hanging out a red hexagram in front of their house to identify it. Mayer Amschel then decided to take the name red-schield (Rothschild in German) after the red Seal of Solomon that they used.
Alice Bailey in A Treatise On White Magic, p. 412, claims that the Hierarchy has a special group which she calls “the financial group” ,,controlling all that can be converted into energy, and constituting a dictatorship over all modes of intercourse, commerce and exchange.”
According the Luciferian Alice Bailey, the “financial group” is the latest group directed by the Hierarchy. In 1836 Zevi Hirsch Kalischer approached Rothschild and proposed Rothschild buy all of Erez Israel. It took many years for the Rothschilds to finally create Israel.
The Ultra-orthodox Jews in Israel will not serve in the Israeli army because they know that Almighty God was not behind the creation of modern Israel, but rather the rich ungodly apostate Jews.
They refuse to serve the ungodly. They are more wiser than men like Jerry Falwell who run around proclaiming Israel is God’s nation. Men like Falwell are the type that this Author finds reference to repeatedly in Jewish documents that speak of their power within the Fundamentalists.
God is ultimately in charge, he has allowed Hitler to come to power, Stalin to come to power, and the Rothschilds to come to power. In the same sense that God rules over and blessed Stalin’s Russia, he rules over America and Israel.
To twist scriptures about God seating the rulers and then to apply them to bless one Satanic secular communist nation and not another is inconsistent and not correctly using the Word of Truth. Some people object that the conspiracy of Power is labelled Jewish rather than Satanic by certain concerned citizens.
This objection is valid - however, will these objectors then take the obvious next step and admit the nation of Israel which the Rothschild’s created is Satanic and not Jewish? But then who knows precisely why people do what they do?
If you ask someone why he does something, he will give you one answer today, another tomorrow, and another the next day. Does he do what he does for a real reason, or a single motive? Perhaps to label the Power as only Satanic or only Jewish or only Masonic is to neglect the personal human dimension.
This personal human dimension is godless. Being godless it fills that void, by pretending its men are gods. This brings us right back to the Gnostic religions and Satan. Most Jewish people do not concern themselves with learning the occultic significance to their treasured Magen David (Star of David).
King David did not have anything to do with the hexagram, although his son Solomon did when he began worshipping Ashtoreth (star, also known as Astarte, Chiun, Kaiwan, Remphan, and Saturn). Solomon built altars to Star (Astarte, aka Ashtoreth).
The god Saturn is associated with the Star but both Saturn and Astarte also been identified with a number of other names. Saturn is an important key to understanding the long heritage this conspiracy has back to antiquity.
The city of Rome was originally known as Saturnia or City of Saturn. The Roman Catholic church retains much of the Saturn worship in its ritual.
Saturn also relates to Lucifer. In various occult dictionaries Saturn is associated with evil. Saturn was important to the religion of Mithra, and also the Druids.
Charles T. Russell, in a 1891 letter to Baron (Lord) Rothschild, mailed from Palestine, outlined possible courses of action that could be taken to establish the Jews in Palestine.
Russell’s letters praised the Rothschild’s money which established Jewish colonies in Palestine. Russell writes Rothschild,
“What is needed here, therefore, next to water and cleanliness, is a good government which will protect the poor from the ravenous and the wealthy. Banking institutions on sound bases, and doing business honorably, are also greatly needed", Russell continues:
“May the God of Jacob direct you, my dear Sir, and all interested with you in the deliverance and prosperity of Israel, and blessed will they be who, to any extent, yield themselves as his servants in fulfilling his will as predicted.”
When the Mormon Church needed financing in the late 19th century, they went to Kuhn, Loeb Co. To explain the Rothschild’s control of Kuhn, Loeb Co. here is some background information. The method that the House of Rothschild used to gain influence, was the same that Royalty had used for centuries, marriage.
The Rothschild children, girls and boys, have had their spouses chosen on the basis of alliances that would benefit the House of Rothschild, but since consolidating world power they generally have married cousins these last two centuries.’
Jacob Schiff grew up in the house that the Rothschild’s had at 148 Judengasse, Frankfurt. Jacob Schiff came to the United States with Rothschild capital and took over control of a small jewish banking concern founded by two Cincinnati dry goods merchants Abraham Kuhn and Solomon Loeb. He even married Soloman’s daughter.
In 1885, Loeb retired, and Schiff ran the Kuhn, Loeb Co. for the Rothschilds until 1920 when he died. During Russell’s and Brigham Young’s day, Lord Rothschild was considered the “lay leader of world Jewry.”
Edmund Rothschild was President of the Jewish Colonization Assoc, which was a major Zionist group. Amselm Rothschild indicated that his grandfather Amschel Mayer Rothschild had insisted in Clause 15 of his will to his children, “may they and their descendants remain constantly true to their ancestral Jewish faith.”
However, the will has been secret and there is no way of knowing what it says.
The Rothschilds have not remained true to the Orthodox faith. If this was actually what Clause 15 said then something is amiss.
The Jewish world has showered the Rothschilds with praises:
“The Rothschilds govern a Christian world. Not a cabinet moves without their advice. They stretch their hand, with equal ease, from Petersburg to Vienna, from Vienna to Paris, from Paris to London, from London to Washington.
Baron Rothschild, the head of the house, is the true king of Judah, the prince of the captivity, the Messiah so long looked for by this extraordinary people… .The lion of the tribe of Judah, Baron Rothschild, possesses more real force than David–more wisdom than Solomon.”
The Prieure de Sion-the Elders of Sion also relates to the Rothschilds who are reported to serve on a jewish council of Elders of Sion. The Rothschilds have “helped” the Jewish people the Rothschild’s own way.
For those who admire stingyness, the Rothschilds will be greatly looked up to. For instance, the extent of James Rothschild’s charity in France to poor Jews was 5 francs (the equivalent of $1). Their dynasty has destroyed honest Jews along with Christians. Today, few dare criticize the Rothschilds.
Co-Masters of the World: Connections to Secret Societies
The Rothschilds had played a major role in the Bavarian Illuminati, and it is known that a least one of the sons of Amsel was a member.
As the reader remembers, Amsel placed his sons in the major European capitals, where they each set up the principal banking houses.
By their own secret intelligence service and their own news network they could outmanouver any European government. The large amounts of voluminous correspondence by Rothschild couriers attracted attention, but no one ever stopped their personal intelligence and mail services.
After the Bavarian illuminati were exposed, the central occult power over the European secret societies shifted to Carbonarism a.k.a. the Alta Vendita, led by another powerful Rothschild, Karl Rothschild, son of Amschel.
In 1818, Karl participated in a secret document that was sent out to the head-quarters of Masonry from the Alta Vendita.
The Masons were quite distressed when a copy of this was lost, and offered rewards to anyone who could return the lost copy. It was originally written in Italian. Its title translates “Permanent Instructions, or Practical Code of Rules; Guide for the Heads of the Highest Grades of Masonry.”
The Masonic reference book 10,000 Famous Freemasons, Vol. 4, p.74, indicates two other sons of Amschel were Masons, James Meyer Rothschild, and his brother Nathan Meyer Rothschild. James Rothschild in Paris was a 33 degree Scottish Rite Mason, and his brother Nathan in London was a member of the Lodge of Emulation.
And Jewish Freemason Katz indicates Solomon Meir Rothschild, a third member of the five brothers, was initiated into Freemasonry on June 14, 1809. The Rothschilds became powerful within Freemasonry.
We find the Saint-Simonians, the occult religious millenialist forerunners of communism, praising Baron de Rothschild in their magazine Le Globe:
“There is no one today who better represents the triumph of equality and work in the nineteenth century than M. le Baron de Rothschild…
Was this Jew born a millionaire? No, he was born poor, and if only you knew what genius, patience, and hard work were required to construct that European edifice called the House of Rothschild, you would admire rather than insult it.”
Lionel de Rothschild (the de was added by the French Rothschilds) was involved with the first communist Internationale. The Mason Mazzini who helped start communism praised Rothschild, “Rothschild could be King of France if he so desired.”
Adoiphe Cremieux, was a french Jewish Mason (see chap. 1.4 for his credentials). The Rothschilds gave at least £ i ,000 to Cremieux to go to Damascus with Salomon Munk, and Sir Moses Montefiore to win the release of Jews imprisoned there, and to convince the Turkish Sultan to declare the charges of ritual murder false.
According to the three Jewish authors of Dope, Inc. the B’nai B’rith was a spin-off of the Order of Zion and was organized as a “covert intelligence front” for the House of Rothschild.
It is highly probable that the B’nai B’rith was used as a Rothschild intelligence cover. The Rothschilds are prominent in the Bilderbergers too. The Rothschilds were closely related to the Council of Foreign Relations (CFR).
Although many people today would not view the CFR as a secret society it was originally set up as part of a secret society and it was kept secret for many years, in spite of its awesome power.
Carroll Quigley, professor of International Relations at the Jesuit Georgetown University, exposed the Round Table Group with his book Tragedy and Hope. The Rothschilds supported Rhodes to form De Beers.
Later, Rhodes made seven wills which established a secret society modelled after the Jesuits and Masons to help bring in a One-World- Government centered upon Britain, and the Rhodes Scholarships. The inner group was established in Mar.
1891 and consisted of Rhodes, Stead, Lord Esher (Brett), and 33* Mason Alfred Milner.(33bb) A secondary circle of “potential members of the Circle of Initiates” consisted of the Jew Lord Balfour, Sir Harry Johnson, Lord Rothschild, Lord Grey and others.
Initially, Lord Rothschild was part of the inner group of Rhode’s secret society, but was replaced by his son-in-law Lord Rosebury who wasn’t as conspicuous. The Fabian Socialists dominated the staff at Oxford when the Rhodes Scholars began arriving.
These scholars then received indoctrination and preparation to become part of an international socialist New World Order. The Round Table Group developed from the inner executive circle of Rhode’s secret society.
The outer circle was established after the start of the 20th century. The Round Table Group was extended after W.W. I by organizing a front organization the Royal Institute of International Affairs.
The Council of Foreign Relations was the American part of this front. The inner circle continues to direct the outer circle and its two front organizations RIIA and CFR. The CER in turn set up a number of fronts including the Institute of Pacific Relations (IPR).
Co-Masters of the World: Management of the Catholic and Czars’ Wealth and the Capture of the Orthodox Church’s Wealth.
Early in the 19th century the Pope came to the Rothschilds to borrow money. The Rothschilds were very friendly with the Pope, causing one journalist to sarcasticly say “Rothschild has kissed the hand of the Pope… Order has at last been re-established.”
The Rothschilds in fact over time were entrusted with the bulk of the Vatican’s wealth. The Jewish Ency., Vol. 2, p.497 states,
“It is a somewhat curious sequel to the attempt to set up a Catholic competitor to the Rothschilds that at the present time (1905) the latter are the guardians of the papal treasure.”
Researcher Eustice Mullins writes that the Rothschilds took over all the financial operations of the worldwide Catholic Church in 1823.
Today the large banking and financial business of the Catholic Church is an extensive system interlocked with the Rothschilds and the rest of the International Banking system.
The great wealth of the Russian Czars was entrusted to the Rothschilds, $35 million with the Rothschild’s Bank of England, and $80 million in the Rothschild’s Paris bank.
The Rothschilds financed the Russian Revolution which confiscated vast portions of the Orthodox Church’s wealth. They have been able to prevent (due to their power) the legitimate heirs of the Czars fortune to withdraw a penny of the millions deposited in a variety of their banks.
The Mountbattans, who are related to the Rothschilds, led the court battles to prevent the claimants from withdrawing any of the fortune.
In other words, the money they invested in the Russian Revolution, was not only paid back directly by the Bolshevists in millions of dollar of gold, but by grabbing the hugh deposits of the Czars’ wealth, the Rothschilds gained what is now worth over $50 Billion.
Co-Masters of the World: Control Over Satanism and Witchcraft
Chapter 2.11 gives the names of a Witchcraft Council of 13 which is under Rothschild control and in turn issue orders to various groups. One of the purest form of Satanism can be traced to the Jewish Sabbatain sect and its Frankist spinoff.
The leaders of this up to the Rothschilds were:
Sabbatai Zevi (1626-1676)
Nathan of Gaza (16??-?)
Jacob Frank (1726-1791)
Rothschilds - Three Connections Between Satanism, Evil, and Money
Money naturally attracts itself to evil. For instance, if a woman prostitutes herself she may receive a great sum of money, but who will pay her for keeping her virginity or her dignity?
If you are a hit man a large amount of money is yours if you kill your target, who will pay you if you would miss your target?
Second, evil men believe in where there is a will there is a way, and they are willing to sell their souls for their God money. They will employ evil to gain money.
While most people are quite aware of these last two connections, a third may likely have escaped their attention.
Thirdly, the principle group of men who cranked up International Banking were Satanists from the beginning.
Just having total control over the supply of U.S. paper money almost gives them leverage over the world’s finances, without mentioning they control the world bank.
It is no accident then, that once they established world financial control, they would do all in their power to divide and conquer and destroy both the Christian and the Moslem faith in God.
These powerful Bankers relate to faith in God as Cain related to his brother Abel. That they may be related to the Jewish people, does not mean they have the Jewish people’s best interest at heart. Initially Sabbetai Zevi was rejected by many Jews.
His sect gained momentum in second half of the seventeenth century in southeastern Poland.
In 1759-60, 500 Jewish Sabbateans “converted” to Christianity. In 1715, 109 of the 415 Jewish families in Frankfurt were engaged in moneylending. The rest were merchants of various kinds. The concepts that Satanism holds to were a natural shoe in to justify for many of these Jewish bankers the type of behavior they were engaged in.”
Long Story Short
Many divisions and battles between religious elements in the world have been encouraged and supported by the Power’s wealth. Unfortunately, many have been fooled into thinking that being devout and faithful to God is the source of religious fighting.
In some areas of the world, Moslems, Christians, and others have gotten along fine for centuries.
Religious tensions do spring to some degree from within the religions themselves, but the fuel to keep those fires burning and to light up conflicts often come from the Power’s wealth. An obvious example is the Iran-Iraq war.
Co-Masters of the World: Control Over WWI Treaty
When Germany fell, not only did Rothschild agents draft the treaty, prepare the idea of the League of Nations, but Max Rothschild was one of 11 men who took control over Bavaria. Max Rothschild was a Freemason in Lodge No. 11, Munich, Germany.
Co-Masters of the World: Connections to MI5, Rockefellers, J.P. Morgan, CFR et.al.
Victor Rothschild, who worked for J.P. Morgan & Co., and was an important part of MI5 (British Intelligence). Victor Rothschild was also a communist and member of the Apostles Club at Cambridge.
Lord Rothschild was one of the original members of Rhode’s Round Table group which developed into the CFR. It was the Rothschilds who had financed Cecil Rhodes, beginning in Africa.
The Rothschilds’ have several agents which their money got started and who still serve them well, the Morgans and the Rockefellers. The Rockefellers were Marrano Jews. The original Rockefeller made his money selling narcotics, (they weren’t illegal then).
After acquiring a little capital he branched out in oil. But it was the Rothschild capital that made the Rockefeller’s so powerful. “They also financed the activities of Edward Harriman (railroads) and Andrew Carnegie Steel.”
Co-Masters of the World: Power Within Christendom
The Rothschilds also wielded much influence and power not only in Secret Societies, but also in Christendom’s churches. The Salvation Army under the suggestion of the Rothschilds adopted the Red Shield (Roth-red Schild-shield) for their logo.
“The Rothschilds had rapidly propelled themselves into a position of immense financial power and political influence. They were an independent force in the life of Europe, accountable to no one and, to a large extent, reliant on no one. Popular lampoons depicted them as the real rulers of Christendom…”
Some of the Rothschilds have been involved in the campaign to loosen public morals. The first executive Secretary of the National Student Forum was John Rothschild. This National Student Forum changed its name like articles of clothing.
Speaking about clothing, one of the aims of this Socialist group was to promote public nudity, and free love. This organization had the following constituent groups Radcliffe Liberal Club, Union Theological Seminary Contemporary Club, Yale Liberal Club” to name just a few.
A further development of this was the Youth Peace Federation which consisted of the League of Youth of Community Church, Methodist Epworth League, NY District, Young Judea, and Young People’s Fellowship of St. Phillip’s Parish to name a few.
American religious men have ties to the Rothschilds especially through their various agents.
Harry Emerson Fosdick, who was Pastor of Rockefeller’s church was also among the Presidents of the Rockefeller Foundation. John Foster Dulles, CFR, was chairman of the board of the Rockefeller Foundation, and married a Rockefeller, Janet Pomeroy Avery.
Remember John Foster Dulles was an important Federal Council of Churches of Christ official
Every road leads back to the Rothschilds. There are more items than what have been mentioned above linking the Rothschilds to the various tenticles.
Each of the various tenticles that conspiracy theorists have put forth, - the Jews, the Masons, the Intelligence Communities, the International Bankers, the Prieure de Sion, the Catholics, the Trilateral commission, the CFR, the New Age, the Cults - each ties back to the Rothschild’s power.
Extent of Rothschild Power
According to one source “it was estimated that they controlled half the wealth of the world.” The Federal Reserve Bank of New York was controlled by five banks which owned 53% of its stock.
These five banks were controlled by Nathan M. Rothschild & Sons of London. Control over the U.S. Fed is basically control over the world’s money. That fact alone shows how immense the Rothschild Power is.
If one examines who has been appointed to head the Fed, and to run it, the connections of the “Federal” Reserve System to the Rothschilds can further be seen. Another private enterprise using the name Federal that the Rothschilds also direct is Federal Express.
Any one else might be taken to court for making their businesses sound like their are government, not the Rothschilds. It is appropriate for them to appropriate the name of Federal, because by way of MI6 via the CIA they instruct the U.S. government.
Senators are bought and paid off by their system, as investigators of the BCCI discovered. The Rothschilds have been intimately involved in witchcraft and the Illuminati since its early known history.
The Kaiser of Germany seems to refer to them when he said, “the magic powers of money as wielded by the Lord of Lucre are powers of Black Magic at its blackest."
If only half of the wealth is controlled by the Rothschilds, it indicates that if they are to be part of the world’s rulership, they must have allies.
The Rothschilds and Rockefellers are only two of thirteen controlling families of the Illuminati. Two Jewish families that appear to be prominent are the Oppenheims and the Oppenheimers.
A. Oppenheim was situated in Cologne. The Oppenheimers were early members of the Bavarian Illuminati. The Bund der Gerechten (League of the Just) was an illuminati front run mainly by Jews who were Satanists.
This Bund financed in part by the Rothschilds paid the Satanist and Mason Karl Marx to write the Communist Manefesto. The Jew Gumpel Oppenheim was in the inner circle of the Bund.
His relative Heinrich Oppenheim masterminded the communist revolution of 1848 in Germany. The Communist Party’s official histories even accept the Bund as the predecessor of Communism.
The Oppenheimers apparently are close to the Rothschilds. J. Robert Oppenheimer of the CFR was exposed as a communist.
Harry Oppenheimer, an international banker, is chairman of the Jewish De Beers world-wide diamond monopoly, and chairman of the Anglo-American Corp. Oppenheimers can be found in important financial positions in the U.S. They help run around 10 large foundations, including the Oppenheimer Haas Trust of NY for the care of needy Jewish children.
The Jewish Ency. Vol. 2, p. 496 indicates other Jewish families “adopted the Rothschild plan.” These were the Lazards, Sterns, Speyers, and Seligmans. The Rothschild plan was to place family members in the 5 largest European capitals to coordinate their activities.
One of Germany’s largest magazines is the Stern, and Ernst Stern is second-in-command of the World Bank.”
The Jewish families that established the Frankfurt Judenloge (this was the Masonic lodge the Rothschilds belonged to in Frankfurt) included the Adlers, Speyers, Reisses, Sichels, Ellisons, Hanaus, Geisenheimers, and Goldschmidts.
Isaac Hildesheim, a Jew who changed his name to Justus Hiller is credited as being the founder of this Frankfurt lodge. Michael Hess, principal of the Reformed Jewish school Philanthropin was an important figure in the lodge too, as was Dr. Ludwig Baruch (later Borne) who joined in 1808.
Most of these Frankfurt Jewish Freemasons engaged in commerce. Those Freemasons from 1817-1842 were the leaders of the Frankfurt Jewish community.
A gentile Mason in Frankfurt Johann Christian Ehrmann began warning the German people that the Frankfurt Jewish Masons wanted a world republic based on humanism.
In 1816 he came out with a warning pamphlet Das Judenthum in der M[aurere]y (The Jews in Masonry). A powerful ally of the world’s jewry can be seen beginning with men like Oliver Cromwell, who was considered a Mason.
Cromwell was financed by Jews, and helped the Jews gain power in England. Cromwell was willing to go along with the Jews, because he became convinced of British Israelism. Since the core of the conspiracy of power is Jewish, the attitude of those allied with it hinges on their attitude toward the Jewish people.
The religious idea that the British people are descended from the tribes of Israel doesn’t automatically place people into the camp of the conspiracy. Some of the British-Israelites realize that the so called Jewish people in general have no claim over the promises of God.
For that reason, they realize that it is not the Christian duty to bow and scrape at their every move. When Christians can be arrested in Israel and abused, and Christians will not even stand up for their own kind, we can see how much hold the idea of the “Chosen Race” theory has over Christendom.
Some of the British Israelites such as the Mormons, the old New England wealthy families such as make up the Order, some Masons and New Agers, and the non-Jewish members of the Priuere de Sion are collaborating with the One-World-Power. The anglican church which is run by the Freemasons is strongly British Israelistic.
Sorting Out the Various Identity Groups
In contrast, a hodge-podge of groups which are opposed to the conspiracy like some Neo-Nazi groups, and various Churches unrelated with them are also believers in British Israelism.
These various groups are sometimes all lumped together as the “Identity” movement, which is misleading because of their vast differences.
It is important to diferentiate between those groups that are trying to approach things from a Christian perspective and place themselves under the authority of God, and those who are setting themselves up under the New Order’s authority, or under their own authority.
Co-Masters of the World: The Media
Eustice Mullins has published his research in his book Who Owns the TV Networks showing that the Rothschilds have control of all three U.S. Networks, plus other aspects of the recording and mass media industry.
It can be added that they control Reuters too. From other sources it appears CNN, which began as an independent challenge to the Jewish Network monopoly, ran into repeated trickery, and ended up part of the system.
Money from B.C.C.I., (B.C.C.I. has been one of the New World Orders financial systems for doing its dirty business such as controlling Congressmen, and is involved with INSLA, the Iran-Contra Scandal, Centrust, and other recent scandals) which has tainted so many aspects of public power in the U.S. has also been behind CNN.
Perhaps nothing dominates the life of some Americans as does the television. Americans sit themselves before the television set and simply absorb what it projects to them.
On a day to day basis the biggest way the Rothschilds touch the lives of Americans are the three major networks which are under Rothschild direction.
The Telltale Signs The Western Oligarchs Are Doomed January 6 2026 | From: JournalNeo / Various Everyone hates sore losers, so why do the globalists and their puppet media still exist? Reading today’s headlines, listening to failed politicians sputtering and stuttering around the world, I’m constantly dismayed by the apathy and ignorance of the world’s populations. Isn’t it abundantly clear by now, Vladimir Putin and Russia hold the winning cards?
Comment: This article is shared because it contains some interesting observations - however it should be noted that the author is clearly unaware of the Alliance (which Trump is working with) that is actually working to take the Cabal down. This is why there is a constant media onslaught against him.
[ From the Archives] Before I go on, let’s get something straight. I am a patriotic American who loves his country and her people. Nobody on God’s Earth can prove otherwise. Now that this is settled, let me make something else abundantly clear. America has no positive future without the kinship and partnership of Russia.
If the globalists elite who’ve admittedly set themselves up as the new world order (See leaders from Obama to Trump admitting same) remain on the present geo-policy course, then war or certain economic collapse will ensue.
Many of the world’s leaders already know this and are making moves to side with Russia should the inevitable happen suddenly. But before I go on, let’s look at some sore loser media headlines.
The western world’s most famous “fake news” tabloid these days, Newsweek continues its unending tabloid Russophobia with “Putin’s Birthday: Protests Call for his Exit as he Hits Retirement Age Under Russian Law”.
I’ll not get into how or why Newsweek became a media whore for the globalists, this Pew Research analysis of the magazine industry should explain this succinctly. The fact there is virtually no dissent aimed at Vladimir Putin inside Russia shows once again the Russian leader’s winning ways.
I can almost hear the average Newsweek policy genius reader glowing with agreement, “Hey, that’s right, it’s illegal for Putin to be president anymore!” As if the universe will turn over, and America will elect Hillary Clinton and become truly great again of Putin is gone!
Next in the sequence of news delivered by Google, I guess the Washington Post and the New York Times bombardment this morning was not harsh enough for the NSA’s favorite tool, and AFP bit parroted by The Times of India was highlighted for me. “Russia is not Putin’s says Pussy Riot’s Alekhina” stands out as a total waste of digital news space.
Once again, the mainstream and the elites running media in the west lost – this woman is a nobody, and nobody cares. Another desperation grab at attention, that´s all AFP is trying to do here. Enter what we know about CNN and admitted traffic sensationalism.
The typical Times of India readr chimes in in broken English, “Oooh, who, who, dat pooseee riot is a riot man! Dey some crazeee beaches” Give the world a break AFP.
Over at CNN the news network most in need of viewers even let’s US President Donald Trump off the hook for a day to paint a picture of Russia’s Putin alongside North Korean’s Kim wringing their hands at America’s most recent tragedy, which Trump is supposed to be distracted by.
“As Trump deals with tragedy, Putin and Kim regroup” is a fabrication, a propaganda tidbit meant for total idiots, and insult to intelligent life forms.
The story attempts to cement together all America’s justifiable and unreasonable fears into one comfortable globalist narrative – everything is Putin’s fault, and anything that is not can be solved by bombing North Korea to hell. Las Vegas gunman Stephen Paddock ends up aiding and abetting evil tyrants Putin and Kim in this fairytale.
Finally, the grand mucky muck of news, financial “go to” Bloomberg proclaims, “As Putin Turns 65, His Power is Slowly Waning”. I had to take a moment or two to stop laughing at seeing the ultimate loser, nobody Russian blogger Alexei Navalny in the feature photograph of this major Bloomberg story.
If this nincompoop western oligarch patsy is the best the Rothschilds and the American deep state can come up with to foil Vladimir Putin, they need to pack up and run for their lives.
The typical big chested banker idiot reading Bloomberg chimes in, “Thank God Putin’s on the way out, maybe my energy stocks can finally split when Israel annexes the West Bank for good!” Yeah, American investors don’t give a damn about dead soldiers or babies. ROI is the name of the Wall Street game.
I could go on and on, but the point of this report is to show the mediocrity I reveal in my upcoming book on this media war, the pitiful essence of failed democracy and capitalism – or the bred mediocrity of the elites who’ve lost the Great Game.
The bas sportsmanship and loser ethics you see in news against Putin every day, play out in my work “Putin’s Praetorians: The Top Kremlin Trolls Confess”, which is out this month.
The reason for my plug here is to frame the reality that Vladimir Putin has won at every turn not simply because of his or his team’s genius, but because of the losers they have faced.
Let’s take a brief look at what Vladimir Putin has done versus this elite world order and its trillion dollar media machine.
Even if we examine Putin’s efforts the last few years from a western globalist’s perspective, his strategies seems flawless. When the EU and NATO threatened Russia’s doorstep Ukraine, the Russian leader simply secured the frontiers by ensuring the naval base at Sevastopol remained secure, and that the Donbass would serve as a literal “no man’s land” should Kiev choose to arm up with NATO.
Take note, this is not actually what Putin did, but from the Washington think tank and Pentagon perspective, the event amount to a win for Putin. Next, in a bid to weaken Putin and Russia, the western oligarchs imposed massive sanctions that only ended up making Putin’s country and his position stronger.
Again, a win for Putin without hardly trying. In the meanwhile, as western media and politicians turned up the heat on the Russian leader, American and its coalition elevated the proxy war in Syria to thwart and Israeli enemy, and to cut off Putin’s South Stream pipeline plan.
Turkey was leveraged to shoot down Russia’s airmen, and the west threatened with a wider regional conflict. Again, Putin outmaneuvered western strategists and ended up in full alliance with Erdogan and Turkey.
Through the efficient use of military force against ISIL and “moderate” terrorists propped up by the US, the Saudis, and Israel, Russia’s leader made absolute fools of Washington and its satraps in London, Brussels, and Berlin.
As it stands now, with the mediocre losers in the west pounding out the same idiotic tune in media, Vladimir Putin is on the cusp of creating a grand coalition of his own, one that could end US dominance on the world stage forever. Putin’s meetings with Turkey’s Erdogan, with the Saudi King, and with Iran’s leadership show a polar shift in global influence.
For me, the inevitable emergence of Russia as a leader on the global stage is happening no matter what. While Trump stomps about threatening at the UN, Putin does not even waste the time attending. Instead, Russia’s leader leverages wins in Syria and elsewhere, along with the trend away from dollar dominance, to forge new friendships and possibilities.
The “loser” mentality American and European dinosaurs have adopted, it leaves them looking like fools who simply scramble to keep up, or to keep afloat at all. And the “loser” narrative in their media is the clearest indicator. Look at what Washington is trying to do to Russia’s RT in America.
It’s pitiful to see a tiny by comparison media effort, so feared by the trillion dollar ad network the western oligarchs created. Now they have Google, Twitter, Facebook, the US Senate, cyberwarfare companies, the technocrats, universities, and God knows who else – all attempting to mitigate the tiny voices of dissent. It’s pitiful.
What A Coincidence: Greta Thunberg Is A Blood Relative Of The Rothschild Clan & The “Great Zero Carbon” Conspiracy And The WEF’s “Great Reset” January 5 2025 | From: EuropeRenaissance / Electroverse / GlobalResearch / Various
The house of the Rothschild bankers reluctantly confirms the undeniable. Greta Thunberg is a blood relative of the notorious Rothschild chain of nation-buyers.
Behind Greta – Luigi Di Maio (born 6 July 1986) is an Italian politician serving as Minister of Foreign Affairs since 5 September 2019
It explains much about the precocious adolescent’s celebrity status drooled over by presidents and prime ministers – and, of course, the slobbering ‘on-message’ media barons of the Western swamps.
By the way, the net worth of Greta’s parents is estimated at $3 million – that we know about.
Not bad for a modestly successful opera musician and her stage actor husband.
Greta Thunberg will return to Davos, despite the fact that last year she ended up disappointed. The young Swedish activist will meet with various political leaders, including the Swiss federal president, the socialist Simonetta Sommaruga. Greta Thunberg with Christine Lagarde, last year in Davos
The media became interested in the alleged kinship after a source at the large Swedish bank Handelsbanken stated that the Thunberg family had received transfers from the Rothschild Foundation to their accounts.
Despite this information appearing in the tabloid press, the bank was so zealous to find the source of the leak that it raised suspicions.
After two weeks of research, it turned out that the pubescent activist’s great-grandfather Joachim Thunberg was the son of Lionel Rothschild, who was illegitimate but was recognised in 1928.
As his mother brought him up alone for the first two years, he was given her surname.
Joachim was then adopted by his biological father, and from the age of 12, he moved to France. There he received his education and then studied additionally in London.
At the age of 26, Joachim Rothschild-Thunberg became one of the most successful bankers in Sweden. His success lasted until 1957 when he sold the bank, donated most of his capital to certain ‘foundations’ and retired.
According to the Rothschild family, Greta Thunberg is indeed the great-great-granddaughter of one of their most famous representatives, but her environmental activities, they assured, are not related to her origins and are not financed by the house in any way.
Of course not; her spectacular international celebrity status that propelled giant corporations to make billions in environmental pursuits is purely coincidental.
The fact of the transfers to the Thunberg family was neither confirmed nor denied in the announcement.
German Professor: Climate Change Is Delusional Nonsense
One of Germany’s most distinguished atmospheric scientists, Professor Hermann Harde, has slammed his nation’s politicians for being duped into “believing they can save the world”.
The vast majority of the published studies and “horror scenarios” are not based on a secure physical foundation, said Harde, “but rather represent computer games that reflect what was fed in”.
The idea that humans can control the climate with their CO2 emissions is an “absolute delusion”.
There is considerable doubt over the “scientifically untenable thesis” of human-caused climate change, continued the Professor, “and it is completely wrong to assume that 97% of climate scientists, or even more, would assume only anthropogenic warming”.
Climate and energy policy need to be based on reliable knowledge, “and not on speculations or belief”.
For years now, Germany’s politicians have been placating the ‘green movement’ by closing nuclear and coal power stations and banning exploration for fossil fuels. At the same time, the country started importing large quantities of oil and gas from Russia.
For a nation happy to spend €100b a year on defense, handing your energy security over to a foreign, nuclear-armed superpower should be all the proof you need that politicians follow the gravy and the fad, and not what’s actually best for their country.
In Harde’s view, the extreme ‘climate emergency’ policies we’re all suffering with today (the main cause of inflation) are driven by competition between different research groups trying to outdo each other in predicting the most hair-raising horror scenarios.
These alarming, click-baity predictions attracted media attention, unsurprisingly; it then got an ill-informed public involved, “and our decision-makers felt obliged to quickly react”.
Cheap energy has been under attack for decades now. But it is absolutely clear, noted Harde, that without a reliable and sufficient energy supply, “Germany and many other countries that take such a path will end in anarchy”.
Or is that the goal?
So-called ‘journalism’ today isn’t designed to seek truth, it is rather a mechanism for the elites to propagandize their ideologies to a trusting and compliant population.
This is visible in the data: the vast majority of mass media journalists come from the exact same schools and neighborhoods as the elites and politicians they purport to be holding to account – which wasn’t always the case.
This is a deliberate move, of course, and results in the MSM sharing the same world-views as those in power, views that have little appeal to the general population; however, because the ideologies are promoted everywhere you turn – newspapers/TV/internet – it is assumed that this is the way to think, and so the sheeple blindly follow-along without question.
When a question is raised, however, and a sheep reaches in vain for a logical answer — bam! — it can feel like a sledgehammer to the head.
I, personally, can remember that moment vividly, and I also recall the crucial decision that follows:
"You take the blue pill, the story ends, you wake up in your bed and believe whatever you want to believe.
You take the red pill, you stay in wonderland, and I show you how deep the rabbit hole goes.”
I’m sure the majority of those reading Electroverse are, by now, riving in the deepest, darkest reaches of the rabbit hole; but truth is approaching, and along with it will come light and redemption for those of us branded ‘deniers’, ‘anti’-whatevers, and ‘heretics’.
Serving as another example: those who have avoided ‘the vaccine’ up until now have ‘won’. This is particularly true given the fresh revelations that all the vaccines are doing is keeping the virus in circulation; forcing it to mutate but never actually eradicating it.
It is proposed, by some scientists (see video here), that when the strain finally ‘breaks’ the vaccines’ resistance, which Mother Nature is currently aiding it in doing, it will be far more destructive to the vaccinated than the unvaccinated as the immune systems of the jabbed wouldn’t of been exposed to all the prior, steadily mutating ‘versions’.
Evolution really sorted this out for us: vaccines are a money-making ploy, a political power trip - they are not necessary.
Professor Harde’s research leads him to state that the UN’s Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change overestimates by five times the thermal effect of doubling carbon dioxide in the atmosphere.
He points to the “highly overlapping and saturated absorption bands” of CO2 and water vapor, and the significant reduced effect of greenhouses gases under cloud cover.
Harde goes on to state that the recent increase in CO2 has caused warming of less than 0.3°C over the last century.
Only about 15% of the global CO2 increase is of man-made origin. After doing a little math –15% of 0.3°C– the warming attributed to humans can only be 0.05, at most.
In view of this insignificant contribution, it is absurd to think that a ban on fossil fuels could even remotely impact Earth’s climate. Climatic changes are caused by grand natural forcings and interactions that exceed our human influence by orders of magnitude.
In Professor Hande’s opinion, modern climate science has developed more as an ideology and world view, rather than a serious science.
Scientists who question or point to inconsistencies in the global warming hypothesis are “publicly discredited” and excluded from research funds; research contributions in journals are suppressed; and in a reference to the recent Professor Peter Ridd case, scientists placed on leave or dismissed from their university.
What we call truths, continued Harde, depends to a large extent on our state of knowledge. He suggests that climate science requires a fundamental review of the hypotheses and a shift away from the widely established climate industry.
Science must not be misled by commerce, politics or ideology, he said. It is the genuine task of universities and state-funded research institutions “to investigate contradictory issues and to ensure independent, free research that gives us honest answers, even when these answers are often complex and do not fit into a desired political context”.
Harde concludes by warning politicians that it would be an irresponsible environmental and energy policy to continue to ignore serious peer-reviewed scientific publications that show a much smaller human impact on the climate than previously thought.
It is also irresponsible to shut down a reliable, adequate and affordable energy supply, to be replaced by millions of wind turbines, “that destroy our nature and shred trillions of birds and insects”.
Professor Hermann Harde retired a few years ago from Helmut Schmidt University in Hamburg as Professor of Experimental Physics after a long career in science academia.
This is the main reason he is able to speak out: his career isn’t on the line.
The “Great Zero Carbon” Conspiracy And The WEF’s “Great Reset”
The globalist Davos World Economic Forum is proclaiming the necessity of reaching a worldwide goal of “net zero carbon” by 2050. This for most sounds far in the future and hence largely ignored.
Yet transformations underway from Germany to the USA, to countless other economies, are setting the stage for creation of what in the 1970’s was called the New International Economic Order.
In reality it is a blueprint for a global technocratic totalitarian corporativism, one that promises huge unemployment, deindustrialization and economic collapse by design. Consider some background.
Klaus Schwab’s World Economic Forum (WEF) is currently promoting his favorite theme, the Great Reset of the world economy. The key to it all is understanding what the globalists mean by Net Zero Carbon by 2050.
The EU is leading the race, with a bold plan to become the world’s first “carbon neutral” continent by 2050 and reduce its CO2 emissions by at least 55% by 2030.
In an August, 2020 post on his blog, self-appointed global vaccine czar Bill Gates wrote about the coming crisis in climate:
“As awful as this pandemic is, climate change could be worse… The relatively small decline in emissions this year makes one thing clear: We cannot get to zero emissions simply - or even mostly - by flying and driving less.”
With a virtual monopoly on mainstream media as well as social media, the Global Warming lobby has been able to lead much of the world into assuming that the best for mankind is to eliminate hydrocarbons including petroleum, natural gas, coal and even the “carbon free” nuclear electricity by 2050, that we hopefully might avoid a 1.5 to 2 degree Centigrade rise in average world temperature.
There is only one problem with this. It’s cover for a diabolical ulterior agenda.
Many have forgotten the original scientific thesis put forward to justify a radical shift in our energy sources. It was not “climate change.” Earth climate is constantly changing, correlated to changes in the emission of solar flares or sunspot cycles affecting Earth climate.
Around the turn of the millennium as the previous solar-led warming cycle was no longer evident, Al Gore and others shifted the narrative in a linguistic sleight-of-hand to “Climate Change,” from Global Warming.
Now the fear narrative has gotten so absurd that every freak weather event is treated as “climate crisis.” Every hurricane or winter storm is claimed as proof that the Climate Gods are punishing us sinful CO2 emitting humans.
But wait. The entire reason for the transition to alternative energy sources such as solar or wind, and abandoning carbon energy sources, is their claim that CO2 is a greenhouse gas that somehow goes up to the atmosphere where it forms a blanket that supposedly warms the Earth below - Global Warming.
Greenhouse gas emissions according to the US Environmental Protection Agency come mostly from CO2. Hence the focus on “carbon footprints.”
What is almost never said is that CO2 cannot soar up into the atmosphere from car exhaust or coal plants or other manmade origins.
Carbon dioxide is not carbon or soot. It is an invisible, odorless gas essential to plant photosynthesis and all life forms on earth, including us. CO2 has a molecular weight of just over 44 while air (mainly oxygen and nitrogen) has a molecular weight of only 29.
The specific gravity of CO2 is some 1.5 times greater than air. That would suggest that CO2 exhaust gases from vehicles or power plants do not rise into the atmosphere some 12 miles or more above Earth to form the feared greenhouse effect.
Maurice Strong
To appreciate what criminal action is unfolding today around Gates, Schwab and advocates of an alleged “sustainable” world economy, we must go back to 1968 when David Rockefeller and friends created a movement around the idea that human consumption and population growth were the major world problem.
Rockefeller, whose wealth was based on oil, created the neo-Malthusian Club of Rome at the Rockefeller villa in Bellagio, Italy. Their first project was to fund a junk study at MIT called Limits to Growth in 1972.
A key organizer of Rockefeller’s ‘zero growth’ agenda in the early 1970s was his longtime friend, a Canadian oilman named Maurice Strong, also a Club of Rome member.
In 1971 Strong was named Undersecretary of the United Nations and Secretary General of the June 1972 Stockholm Earth Day conference. He was also a trustee of the Rockefeller Foundation.
Maurice Strong was a key early propagator of the scientifically unfounded theory that man-made emissions from transportation vehicles, coal plants and agriculture caused a dramatic and accelerating global temperature rise which threatens civilization, so-called Global Warming.
He invented the elastic term “sustainable development.”
As chairman of the 1972 Earth Day UN Stockholm Conference, Strong promoted population reduction and lowering of living standards around the world to “save the environment.” Some years later the same Strong stated:
"Isn’t the only hope for the planet that the industrialized civilizations collapse? Isn’t it our responsibility to bring that about?”
This is the agenda today known as the Great Reset or UN Agenda 2030.
Strong went on to create the UN Inter-governmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), a political body which advances the unproven claim that manmade CO2 emissions were about to tip our world into irreversible ecological catastrophe.
Co-founder of the Club of Rome, Dr Alexander King, admitted the essential fraud of their environmental agenda some years later in his book, The First Global Revolution. He stated:
"In searching for a new enemy to unite us, we came up with the idea that pollution, the threat of global warming, water shortages, famine and the like would fit the bill …
All these dangers are caused by human intervention and it is only through changed attitudes and behaviour that they can be overcome. The real enemy, then, is humanity itself..”
King admitted that the “threat of global warming” was merely a ploy to justify an attack on “humanity itself.” This is now is being rolled out as the Great Reset and the Net Zero Carbon ruse.
In 2011, acting on the advice of Joachim Schnellnhuber, of the Potsdam Institute for Climate Impact Research (PIK), Angela Merkel and the German government imposed a total ban on nuclear electricity by 2022, as part of a 2001 government strategy called the Energiewende or Energy Turn, to rely on solar and wind and other “renewables.”
The aim was to make Germany the first industrial nation to be “carbon neutral.”
The strategy has been an economic catastrophe. Going from having one of the industrial world’s most stable low-cost and reliable electric generation grids, today Germany has become the world’s most expensive electric generator.
According to the German energy industry association BDEW, at the latest by 2023 when the last nuclear plant closes, Germany will face electricity shortfalls.
At the same time coal, the largest source of electric power, is being phased out to reach Net Zero Carbon. Traditional energy-intensive industries such as steel, glass production, basic chemicals, paper and cement manufacturing, are facing soaring costs and shutdowns or offshoring and loss of millions of skilled jobs.
The energy inefficient wind and solar, today costs some 7 to 9 times more than gas.
Germany has little sun compared with tropical countries, so wind is seen as the major source for green power. There is a huge input of concrete and aluminum needed to produce solar or wind farms.
That needs cheap energy - gas or coal or nuclear - to produce. As that is phased out, cost becomes prohibitive, even with no added “carbon taxes.”
Germany already has some 30,000 wind turbines, more than anywhere else in the EU. The gigantic wind turbines have serious problems of noise or infrasound health hazards for residents nearby the huge structures and weather and bird damage.
By 2025 an estimated 25% of existing German windmills will need replacement and waste disposal is a colossal problem. The companies are being sued as the citizens realize what a disaster they are.
To reach targets by 2030 Deutsche Bank recently admitted the state will need to create an “eco dictatorship.”
At the same time the German push to end gasoline or diesel transport by 2035 in favor of e-vehicles is on course to destroy Germany’s largest and most profitable industry, the auto sector, and take down millions of jobs.
The lithium-ion battery-powered vehicles have a total “carbon footprint” when the effects of mining lithium and producing all parts are included, that is worse than diesel autos.
And the amount of added electricity needed for a zero carbon Germany by 2050 would be far more than today, as millions of battery chargers will need grid electricity with reliable power.
Now Germany and the EU begin to impose new “carbon taxes,” allegedly to finance the transition to zero carbon. The taxes will only make electric power and energy even more expensive, insuring the faster collapse of German industry.
Depopulation
According to those advancing the Zero Carbon agenda, it is just what they desire: The deindustrialization of the most advanced economies, a calculated decades-long strategy as Maurice Strong said, to bring about the collapse of industrialized civilizations.
To turn the present world industrial economy backward to a wood-burning, windmill turning dystopia where blackouts become the norm as now in California, is an essential part of a Great Reset transformation under the Agenda 2030: UN Global Compact for Sustainability.
Merkel climateadviser, Joachim Schnellnhuber, in 2015 presented the radical green agenda of Pope Francis, the encyclical letter, Laudato Si , as Francis’ appointee to the Pontifical Academy of Science.
And he advised the EU on its green agenda. In a 2015 interview, Schnellnhuber declared that “science” has now determined that the maximum carrying capacity of a “sustainable” human population was some six billion fewer people:
"In a very cynical way, it’s a triumph for science because at last we have stabilized something - namely the estimates for the carrying capacity of the planet, namely below 1 billion people.”
To do that the industrialized world must be dismantled.
Christiana Figueres, a World Economic Forum Agenda Contributor and former executive secretary of the UN’s Framework Convention on Climate Change, revealed the true aim of the UN climate agenda in a February 2015 Brussels press conference where she stated, “This is the first time in human history that we are setting ourselves the task of intentionally changing the economic development model that has reigned since the Industrial Revolution.”
Figueres’ 2015 remarks are echoed today by French President Macron at the January 2021 World Economic Forum’s “Davos Agenda” where he claimed that “under the current circumstances, the capitalist model and open economy are no longer feasible.”
Macron, a former Rothschild banker, claimed that the “only way to get out of this epidemic is to create an economy that is more focused on eliminating the gap between the rich and the poor"."
Merkel, Macron, Gates, Schwab and friends will do so by bringing living standards in Germany and the OECD down to levels of Ethiopia or Sudan.
This is their zero carbon dystopia. Severely limit air travel, car travel, people movement, closing “polluting” industry, all to reduce CO2.
Uncanny how conveniently the coronavirus pandemic sets the stage for the Great Reset and UN Agenda 2030 Net Zero Carbon.
Finally, the mainstream media is reporting that a coup is underway in New Zealand – by the Maori tribal elite. [ Historical but ongoing and relevant ]
Admittedly that observation was penned by former Labour Minister and ACT Party leader Richard Prebble in an opinion piece for the Herald – but the newspaper published it and RadioNZ reported it.
The on-line Herald headline read, “Three Waters is a coup - an attack on democracy”.
That bold and compelling headline, however, didn’t last. It was changed to remove the words “a coup” and now reads: “Three Waters is an attack on democracy”.
The obvious question is why?
A clue comes from an article written last year by political journalist Andrea Vance, about Jacinda Ardern’s PR machine:
"The Government’s iron grip on the control of information has tightened. At every level, the Government manipulates the flow of information."
She then explained;
"And the prime minister’s office makes sure its audience is captured, starting the week and cementing the agenda with a conference call with political editors.”
So, did a member of the Prime Minister’s Office contact the Herald and ask them to change the headline?
Richard Prebble: Three Waters is a Government Coup
The Prime Minister has recently attempted to discredit her critics as “keyboard warriors”. But she can’t dismiss Richard Prebble that lightly. As a former member of Labour’s Cabinet, he has a unique political insight and his views carry weight.
Richard explains that New Zealand is a “liberal democracy”, and as such:
"individual rights and freedoms are officially recognised and protected… by the rule of law.” Governments are therefore “accountable to the people by a system of one person, one vote”.
That means, “Liberal democracy is incompatible with co-government by tribes.”
Richard believes that while there is some logic to the use of co-governance as a pragmatic solution to Treaty claims for the ownership of public assets such as national parks, there is none for Three Waters:
"Applying it to assets which iwi have no claim to is confiscation… It is ratepayers – Maori and non-Maori – who paid for the pipes, dams, stormwater drains and sewage plants.”
He concludes:
"The Government’s Three Waters legislation is a coup. It is replacing liberal democracy with co-government with iwi.”
In fact, it can be argued that Three Waters is much more than co-governance.
The way the Local Government Minister Nanaia Mahuta has structured the legislation – ostensibly to fulfil the fictitious Treaty “partnership” obligations of central government – iwi will gain ultimate control of water services at every level: from the Water Regulator – through the Maori Advisory Board; to Regional Representation Groups – giving iwi a disproportionate 50 percent control and veto rights; to Water Entity Boards – requiring members with “expertise in accessing matauranga Maori, tikanga Maori and Te Ao Maori knowledge”; to local Te Mana o te Wai directives to Water Entity Boards – that can be issued by any iwi member on any aspect of water services.
Kaipara Mayor Dr Jason Smith, who was a member of Minister Mahuta’s working group described Three Waters as “a Trojan Horse for ending democratic rights”.
And, after extensive investigation, journalist Graham Adams has concluded it is a “giant stitch-up” – “a coup hiding in plain sight”.
Counterspin Media, along with a handful of other freedom groups and individuals, was dead centre of major government funded media attack.
The lavishly funded 'Stuff circuit' hit piece 'Fire and Fury' spectacularly failed to hit its mark. Instead, the attempt to demonise various individuals and organizations within the 'Freedom movement' become more of a 'fizzer and flop'.
Nothing more that gutter journalism in a designer dress.
The iwi elite driving the takeover are seeking tribal rule by 2040. The plan to achieve this goal – He Puapua – was mapped out by the Government in 2019, under the guise of enacting the United Nations Declaration of the Rights of Indigenous Peoples.
Knowing how explosive this agenda was, Jacinda Ardern kept it hidden – so well hidden that even her Deputy Prime Minister Winston Peters knew nothing about it. Nor was it mentioned in Labour’s 2020 Election Manifesto – she only revealed it after winning the election.
But as the 1986 Royal Commission into New Zealand’s Electoral System warned:
“Our Governments have great powers and great responsibilities. Their exercise of those powers and fulfilment of those responsibilities is legitimate only because it arises from the consent of the people.”
By failing to gain the consent of voters for her plan for tribal rule, Jacinda Ardern has no mandate for her He Puapua co-governance agenda – it is illegitimate.
The Government’s Office for Maori Crown Relations clarifies on their website where this tribal ‘partnership’ agenda is leading:
“Maori decide and the Crown assists in implementing the decision made by Maori. The Crown’s role is as enabler and implementer not decision-maker.”
Hiding in plain sight, this Government website confirms that the ultimate goal of this so-called ‘co-governance’ partnership agenda is tribal rule.
To understand the mechanisms being used, we need to look back to 2019 when Jacinda Ardern boasted to the Bill Gates Foundation about how she was implementing the radical objectives of the United Nations:
In another address that same year to the World Economic Forum, she explained her reforms were designed to lead to permanent change:
“One of the biggest threats we have … are political cycles.
This needs to be something that we embed in our national cycles, in our political cycles, and in our actions and it needs to endure beyond us as individuals.”
Using this same approach, the Prime Minister is embedding tribal rule into our regulatory and legislative framework.
Enabling iwi to control health required new legislation to abolish the country’s 20 health boards; and giving them control of water involves a bill to confiscate water infrastructure and services from all 67 councils.
When it came to the Public Service, new legislation was also needed with the PM’s tribal rule provisions included in the Public Service Legislation Bill that was passed into law just before the 2020 election – again, hiding in plain sight.
The Public Service Commission’s Factsheet 3 outlines the requirements. Under the new Act, The Public Service Commissioner and Chief Executives are accountable to their Minister for “strengthening the Crown’s relationship with Maori”.
This means not only ensuring staff ‘engage’ appropriately with Maori, but also that a Maori World View dominates the way they operate – including using the Maori language, adopting Maori customs, and applying the Treaty “day-to-day”.
And when it comes to employment decisions, they are required to “recognise the need for greater involvement of Maori in the Public Service”.
Back in 2018, when the Office for Maori Crown Relations was being established, iwi leaders demanded status in official Government decision-making. Through the appointment of specialist iwi advisors in key state sector agencies, their influence is now widespread.
As a result, Maori supremacists are not only changing the culture of the public service and other government agencies, but of the country itself.
The 2021 Annual Report of the Office for Maori Crown Relations confirms the mission of their 180 staff:
“Is all about embedding the Treaty into policy and lifting capability across the Crown… In practical terms, we get involved across the full range of the government’s reform agenda.
We help agencies consider the Treaty in policy design and implementation… Maori rights and interests are built into the design.”
"Maori are NOT the indigenous people of Aotearoa New Zealand. There were many other races already living here long before Kupe arrived. I am his direct descendant and I know of our oral history passed down 44 generations." – David Rankin
Among the many ‘training’ resources available on their website, one explains their goal is “a significant culture change across the public service.”
Another suggests hiring more Maori, paying them more, and providing “paid leave to fulfil iwi responsibilities.” Yet another requires staff to “demonstrate a commitment to tikanga Maori, speak te reo, and participate in kapa hake groups.”
An overarching requirement is indoctrination in ‘institutional racism’ and the ‘impact of colonisation’.
To assess the competency of public sector agencies in supporting “the Maori-Crown relationship” a survey has been devised which questions staff over such things as whether “I feel confident in my ability to: introduce myself in te reo; converse in te reo; pronounce te reo words correctly; or sing two waiata from memory.”
It asks whether they would be confident to “work in partnership and share decision-making with a Maori group”, and it also seeks their feedback on whether their agency “may inadvertently disadvantage Maori.”
By encouraging public service staff to provide feedback on the progress of their agencies in adopting the Prime Minister’s tribal rule agenda, implementing a Maori World View is now dominating the government sector.
With increasing pressure on the Public Services Commissioner and Chief Executives to deliver on the objectives of the iwi elite, is it any wonder that real service delivery and performance is in decline?
Has it all gone so far, that policy development has now reached the point where, for instance, the Government’s inadequate response to the country’s critical workforce shortage is, in fact, being influenced by the opposition of iwi leaders to immigration?
Tribal control is now replacing our Kiwi culture within the heart of Government by ensuring Maori rights and interests dominate the agenda.
And it doesn’t just stop with the core public service either. In the best totalitarian tradition, everyone in ‘official’ positions is being targeted including teachers, school trustees, doctors, nurses, firefighters, Police, military, and local authority employees.
The scale and speed of this cultural takeover is breath-taking, and its effect is the reshaping of democracy as we know it.
This week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator is Professor Elizabeth Rata, the Director of Knowledge in Education at Auckland University, who outlined the threat posed by this tribal coup in a recent address entitled “In Defence of Democracy”:
“I want to talk about democracy – about what it is we are in danger of losing and what we need to do to retain our nation’s remarkable 170 year legacy of democratic governance…
The question we must ask is this: How has a small group of individuals, both Maori and non-Maori, managed to install a racialised ideology into our democracy?
The corporate tribes have already acquired considerable governance entitlements – the next and final step is tribal sovereignty.
It’s a coup d’etat in all but name, accomplished not by force but by ideology – enabled by a compliant media.
Given the enormous success of retribalism is it too late to reclaim New Zealand from the relentless march to blood and soil ethno-nationalism?
That depends upon our willingness to understand, value, and restore democracy.”
Professor Rata paints a bleak picture of the future – unless New Zealanders wake up and fight back.
The reality is that because ordinary Kiwis are allowing it to happen, as a country, we are sleepwalking our way to apartheid – in our case the tyranny of a minority over a majority.
But, just as Jacinda Ardern embedded her racist tribal rule agenda throughout our statutory framework, so too it can all be repealed.
As Professor Rata has recommended, removing all references to the Treaty and its principles from legislation and public institutions – including universities – is the key.
We also need to do more to remind New Zealanders that the principles of democracy should not be tampered with nor altered to suit the selfish power-hungry motives of an aggressive minority.
Fortunately, people like Richard Prebble, Jason Smith, Graham Adams, and Elizabeth Rata are calling out the transformational change Jacinda Ardern promised for what it is – a coup against democracy.
Generations before us have fought and died for the democracy New Zealand had, before she became our Prime Minister.
We owe it to them, and to our future generations, to take a stand and defend our democracy against this attack.
Our collective goal must be to save New Zealand – and our democratic Kiwi way of life – and in this mission, we cannot allow ourselves to fail!
How Consumerism Is Ruining Our Lives And The World January 3 2026 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit Our economic system is based on consumption: The more stuff we buy, the more money moves in the economy, and hence the more the economy grows.
If we stopped consuming, the economy would collapse and result in unemployment, poverty and violence.
Not surprisingly, we believe that consumerism is good for us, and there’s even an entire industry - the advertising industry - dedicated to making us want to consume without end.
Yet, as I explain in the video below, consumerism is actually ruining our lives and the world, and unless we change our way of living, we’re soon going to face the tremendously negative impacts of our consumer behavior.
A Biologist Believes That Trees Speak A Language We Can Learn January 2 2026 | From: QZ / Various I’m in a redwood forest in Santa Cruz, California, taking dictation for the trees outside my cabin. They speak constantly, even if quietly, communicating above - and underground using sound, scents, signals, and vibes.
Biologists, ecologists, foresters, and naturalists increasingly argue that trees speak, and that humans can learn to hear this language.
Many people struggle with this concept because they can’t perceive that trees are interconnected, argues biologist George David Haskell in his 2017 book The Songs of Trees. Connection in a network, Haskell says, necessitates communication and breeds languages; understanding that nature is a network is the first step in hearing trees talk.
For the average global citizen, living far from the forest, that probably seems abstract to the point of absurdity. Haskell points readers to the Amazon rainforest in Ecuador for practical guidance.
To the Waorani people living there, nature’s networked character and the idea of communication among all living things seems obvious. In fact, the relationships between trees and other lifeforms are reflected in Waorani language.
In Waorani, things are described not only by their general type, but also by the other beings surrounding them. So, for example, any one ceibo tree isn’t a “ceibo tree” but is “the ivy-wrapped ceibo,” and another is “the mossy ceibo with black mushrooms.”
In fact, anthropologists trying to classify and translate Waorani words into English struggle because, Haskell writes, “when pressed by interviewers, Waorani ‘could not bring themselves’ to give individual names for what Westerners call ‘tree species’ without describing ecological context such as the composition of the surrounding vegetation.”
Because they relate to the trees as live beings with intimate ties to surrounding people and other creatures, the Waorani aren’t alarmed by the notion that a tree might scream when cut, or surprised that harming a tree should cause trouble for humans.
The lesson city-dwellers should take from the Waorani, Haskell says, is that “dogmas of separation fragment the community of life; they wall humans in a lonely room. We must ask the question: ‘can we find an ethic of full earthly belonging?’”
There’s room at the Redwood Inn
Haskell points out that throughout literary and musical history there are references to the songs of trees, and the way they speak: whispering pines, falling branches, crackling leaves, the steady hum buzzing through the forest. Human artists have always known on a fundamental level that trees talk, even if they don’t quite say they have a “language.”
Redefining Communication
Tree language is a totally obvious concept to ecologist Suzanne Simard, who has spent 30 years studying forests. In June 2016, she gave a Ted Talk (which now has nearly 2.5 million views), called “How Trees Talk to Each Other.”
Simard grew up in the forests of British Columbia in Canada, studied forestry, and worked in the logging industry. She felt conflicted about cutting down trees, and decided to return to school to study the science of tree communication.
Now, Simard teaches ecology at the University of British Columbia-Vancouver and researches “below-ground fungal networks that connect trees and facilitate underground inter-tree communication and interaction,” she says. As she explained to her Ted Talk audience:
"I want to change the way you think about forests. You see, underground there is this other world, a world of infinite biological pathways that connect trees and allow them to communicate and allow the forest to behave as though it’s a single organism. It might remind you of a sort of intelligence.”
Trees exchange chemicals with fungus, and send seeds - essentially information packets - with wind, birds, bats, and other visitors for delivery around the world. Simard specializes in the underground relationships of trees. Her research shows that below the earth are vast networks of roots working with fungi to move water, carbon, and nutrients among trees of all species.
These complex, symbiotic networks mimic human neural and social networks. They even have mother trees at various centers, managing information flow, and the interconnectedness helps a slew of live things fight disease and survive together.
Simard argues that this exchange is communication, albeit in a language alien to us. And there’s a lesson to be learned from how forests relate, she says. There’s a lot of cooperation, rather than just competition among and between species as was previously believed.
Peter Wohlleben came to a similar realization while working his job managing an ancient birch forest in Germany. He told the Guardian he started noticing trees had complex social lives after stumbling upon an old stump still living after about 500 years, with no leaves.
“Every living being needs nutrition,” Wohlleben said. “The only explanation was that it was supported by the neighbor trees via the roots with a sugar solution. As a forester, I learned that trees are competitors that struggle against each other, for light, for space, and there I saw that it’s just [the opposite].
Trees are very interested in keeping every member of this community alive.” He believes that they, like humans, have family lives in addition to relationships with other species. The discovery led him to write a book, The Hidden Life of Trees.
By being aware of all living things’ inter-reliance, Simard argues, humans can be wiser about maintaining mother trees who pass on wisdom from one tree generation to the next.
She believes it could lead to a more sustainable commercial-wood industry: in a forest, a mother tree is connected to hundreds of other trees, sending excess carbon through delicate networks to seeds below ground, ensuring much greater seedling survival rates.
Seedling survival is important to human beings because we need trees. “The contributions of forests to the well-being of humankind are extraordinarily vast and far-reaching,” according to the United Nations Food and Agriculture Organization 2016 report on world forests (pdf).
David Wilcock explains the science researc h behind plant communication in his book "Source Field Investigations"
Forests are key to combating rural poverty, ensuring food security, providing livelihoods, supplying clean air and water, maintaining biodiversity, and mitigating climate change, the FAO says. The agency reports that progress is being made toward better worldwide forest conservation but more must be done, given the importance of forests to human survival.
Most scientists - and trees - would no doubt agree that conservation is key.
Haskell believes that ecologically friendly policies would naturally become a priority for people if we’d recognize that trees are masters of connection and communication, managing complex networks that include us.
He calls trees “biology’s philosophers,” dialoguing over the ages, and offering up a quiet wisdom. We should listen, the biologist says, because they know what they’re talking about.
Haskell writes, “Because they are not mobile, to thrive they must know their particular locus on the Earth far better than any wandering animal.”
The Dire Predictions And Cryptic Symbols On The Economist’s 2026 “The World Ahead” Edition January 1 2026 | From: VigilantCitizen / Various
The cover of The Economist’s “The World Ahead 2026” is filled with imagery predicting disastrous events, combined with enigmatic symbols alluding to ancient rituals and even mind control.
At the end of every year, the renowned publication The Economist releases its “The World Ahead” edition, in which it predicts trends and events for the coming year. And, nearly every time, the issue’s cover is replete with intricate, highly enigmatic, and often dire symbols.
While usually, there is no reason to pay much attention to the contents of a magazine cover, The Economist is different.
The main reason: The Economist is linked directly to those who can make “predictions” a reality, especially in the topics featured on its covers.
For instance, the current Editor-in-Chief of the Economist, Zanny Minton Beddoes, attended the 2025 Bilderberg meeting – the “invitation-only conference for political leaders, experts, and industry leaders to have informal, secret discussions on major world issues.”
In other words, this is where the elite gather to decide their agenda for the coming years.
"Zanny Minton Beddoes attended the Bilderberg 2025 meeting, which was held from June 12–15 in Stockholm, Sweden. She was listed among the participants, identified by her role as Editor-in-Chief of The Economist.
The meeting included 121 participants from 23 countries, and its focus was an informal, secret discussion of global issues under the Chatham House Rule.”
None of this should be a surprise: The Economist, which was founded in the 19th century, has been attached to powerful elite families, including the Rothschilds.
Aside from the Agnelli family, smaller shareholders in the company include Cadbury, Rothschild (21%), Schroder, Layton and other family interests as well as a number of staff and former staff shareholders.
A board of trustees formally appoints the editor, who cannot be removed without its permission. The Economist Newspaper Limited is a wholly owned subsidiary of The Economist Group. Sir Evelyn Robert de Rothschild was chairman of the company from 1972 to 1989.
In other words, The Economist is linked directly with people who wield the power and influence to make agendas a reality. So the “predictions” made by The Economist are not guesses; they’re a warning.
The events that are predicted are not necessarily due to happen immediately – they’re often long-term plans.
To illustrate this fact, let’s look back at The Economist’s cover from 2012. Many have been looking back at it and asking “how did they know?”
Take a minute to fully soak in the symbolic significance of this cover from 2012
The issue titled “A Rough Guide to Hell” and the imagery on its cover are quite evocative. Centered around the theme of the Deadly Sins, the illustration depicts numerous world leaders doing the devil’s bidding.
Most of them are controlled and manipulated by “lesser demons” who push them towards hell.
For instance, towards the top of the cover, a member of Hamas faces Benjamin Netayahou with the word “wrath” between them. Both of them are flying using paragliders powered by devils, symbolically indicating they are, ultimately, motivated by the same “force” (as explained in my article about Gaza).
The hellish chaos on this cover is overseen by a single figure, and everything about it is symbolic.
The main devil figure stands next to a “Climate Change” lever
The implications of the image above are astounding. It implies that “climate change” is an artificial, remote-controlled event that is controlled by the devil himself. And, quite amazingly, the devil is holding that very issue of The Economist, as if it were the “master plan.”
In short, the 2012 cover depicts the world as a great big stage, where the chaos and confusion are overlooked by the devil himself, who holds an issue of The Economist, suggesting they’re all in cahoots.
This year again, The Economist released its The World Ahead 2026 edition, and, of course, it is full of messages of all kinds. And many of them are pretty dire.
The World Ahead 2026
On the 2026 edition, the world is on a soccer ball – a reference to the 2026 FIFA World Cup. On a symbolic level, it conveys the idea that “all the world’s a stage.”
At this stage, numerous props and characters take part in grand, worldwide narratives. And most of them are rather negative, if not downright catastrophic, for the masses.
The “anxious” feeling exuded by that cover is heightened by the multitude of drones and satellites, which convey a sense of constant surveillance.
Prominently positioned at the center of the image is this collection of highly symbolic images
The cake in front of the American flag most likely refers to the United States’ 250th anniversary. That’s because the United States was founded in 1776. Do you know what else was founded in 1776? The Bavarian Illuminati.
Are they celebrating that as well? Because, although the United States has cause for celebration, everything about the cover celebrates the occult elite prevailing in its anti-nation and pro-globalist agenda.
The cake is connected to a raised fist in handcuffs, alluding to an uprising being repressed. Will the coming year bring about social unrest that will dampen the patriotism of the United States’ 250th anniversary?
Lower is a gavel cracking its base, indicating that the justic system is broken or corrupted. Who will suffer injustices?
Around the American flag (and at other places on the globe), missiles are launching, hinting at a new nuclear weapons race. The prominence of tanks and other weaponry on this cover points to the inevitability of war in 2026.
Clearly, The Economist is not very optimistic about the coming year.
Underneath the cake is an odd image: A human brain that is connected to a video game controller. In other words, it is a mind … being controlled. While this can represent technology capable of controlling a brain on a biological level, it can refer to the programming of the masses on a broader scale, using the events depicted on this cover.
While weapons are scattered across the cover, the imagery under the cake alludes to another kind of war
The red line of the graph shows something reaching a historic low. Does it represent the value of the US Dollar (there are pennies around the graph), the stock market, or the economy in general?
The two swords above the chart suggest that the negative numbers may be due to trade wars. On each side of that graph are heads of state such as Xi Jinping and Trump, who all appear to be on shaky ground and struggling to remain standing.
A ship carrying cargo is hiding guns and is shooting right at the birthday cake
Does this represent a sneak attack from a trade partner? The ship is flying a black flag which is usually associated with pirates. All of these points point to a shady affair – maybe a false flag event?
On the other side of the cake, there’s another ship, and it is even more perplexing.
Contrasting with the high-tech dystopia of the cover is a sailboat from ancient times
Some visual clues point to the boat being a trimeme from an ancient Mediterranean civilization, such as ancient Sumeria or Phoenicia. These cultures often adorned their boats with eyes to ward off evil and to endow them with a supernatural consciousness to avoid danger.
One man on the boat carries a large red urn – another enigmatic symbol. Considering that this image is entirely anachronistic with the rest of the cover, it is clearly not meant to be taken literally. It alludes to something taking place on a symbolic, historic, and, as the urn might indicate, a ritualistic level.
Peppered around these images of war, conflict, and surveillance are numerous images pointing to other elite agendas – and nearly all of them seek to control the masses further.
This portion of the cover points to numerous agendas the elite want to see realized
There are two giant syringes on the cover. In both cases, they stand right next to missiles, indicating they can be weaponized. On a related note, the entire cover is filled with an enormous number of pills of all kinds, conveying the fact that the general population is witnessing this chaos from a highly medicated haze.
These images combined represent the ever-increasing power of pharmaceutical corporations in society.
Robots can also be weaponized. The close-up above depicts a particularly creepy type of robot that can eventually become extremely deadly.
China’s military showed off a robot dog with an automatic rifle mounted on its back during recent military drills with Cambodia. Is this the future of warfare?
Finally, the cover features a couple of ice cubes melting. Those most likely refer to global warming, another panic-inducing agenda used by the elite to control the masses, justify unpopular policies, and limit personal freedoms … which brings us back to The Economist’s 2012 cover.
The “climate change” lever is used whenever they need to scare people into new policies
True to tradition, The Economist’s “The World Ahead 2026” cover is a mix of dire predictions and cryptic symbols, all pointing to a turbulent future. While America’s 250th anniversary, the winter Olympics, and the FIFA World Cup should be cause for fun and celebration, they appear trivial compared to the armed conflicts, economic turmoils, and environmental disasters that are being predicted.
As seen in previous articles about The Economist, this highly connected publication loves to predict terrible things that do not necessarily happen in the months that follow. However, the path is definitely being laid for these things to happen in the coming years.
Like most media outlets, the goal of The Economist is not to provide the masses with accurate information; it is to tell people what they us want to hear.
Right now, they want us to be stressed and fearful. They want fun occasions and important celebrations to be constantly dampened by divisive and anxiety-inducing issues.
More importantly, they are clearly identifying the “tools” they like to use to control the masses: War, the economy, technology, big pharma, and climate change. It’s all there. And it is used as a blueprint by the devil himself, as the elite is paving a road to hell.
Cash is simply a currency, a medium of exchange that is used to purchase something that has value, namely an asset or service. The word currency is derived from the word current – electricity – a current must move or else it will die. A currency does not store value in itself. Rather, it is a medium to transfer value from one asset to another.
Money has, unlike currency, value within itself. Money is always a currency in that it can be used to purchase other items that have value, however currency is not always money as explained above; it doesn’t have intrinsic value. The basic definition of money is; income-energy received for energy given.
The following statement illustrates this definition. The rectangle of paper representing a one-hundred-euro bill is not worth one hundred euros!
The piece of paper [debt note] represents the value of one hundred euros that is stored somewhere else, waiting to be purchased; the fact that a rectangle of paper, or currency, represents value in and of itself, was true only in the past, when the world was on a gold standard.
Today every bill is backed by nothing other than air or what commonly is called ‘good faith’ and the credit worthiness of the ‘issuer’ the Central Bank. In other words, authorities have the ability to create money at will without anything to back it up, in plain language money-printing or counterfeiting, but governments call it fiscal policy, and this together is called ‘fiat currency’, which is not money.
So, money is not what people think it is. Nowadays money is ‘currency’ invented and created by Governments or for that matter, the Central Banks, to steal from the people, by taxation without approval of parliament, by means of inflating the currency and consequently reducing people’s purchasing power by lowering the nominated ‘intrinsic’ value.
Money Has Value of its Own, Currency Doesn’t:
The abstract viewpoint is; Currency is a metaphysical technology that facilitates the development of trust, which in essence is what money is.
Trust that exists between two or more individuals is the true source of all wealth, allowing everyone to create on his/her own and naturally transpiring through the environment.
In other words; Wealth, in all its forms, is something of value created by people in unison with nature.
Currency, in this sense, is a social lubricant that enables two or more people to work together on some project, objective, or agenda. The objective might not be intrinsically valuable to the people involved - they might not be willing to cooperate merely to accomplish the purpose alone - but the motivation arises by offering them money, which gives them a valuable stake in the business.
Generally speaking, people tend to participate in things they find valuable, which is money, as an effective motivator.
Thus, even with respect to debt-based money, which is money “printed out of thin air” it is people’s faith and trust that gives any monetary system power. If people don’t derive some kind of value from the use of money, they won’t use it.
But what makes a society benevolent is that the people within it have a genuine interest in placing their trust solely in honourable projects. On the flipside of the coin, when morality, ethics, and justice are lost, people can be bribed into malevolence through the promise of money.
And this is essentially where the world is today. The powers that be, the elite, use us like cogs in a wheel to keep the systems of control alive, which we willingly participate in, mainly through the use of their created money.
Wealth is by Nature Valuable:
Personal wealth is by nature valuable for an individual and potentially for others. For example, a musician plays a piece of music that is inherently valuable to the musician but also valuable to others who listen to it, because in some way it is beautiful, inspiring, or expressive.
In nature, wealth needs to be tamed or refined, often through the collective works of individuals. When a group of people mutually agree that they value something, like farming food for their community, they can work together to bring that value into existence. The formal process for creating a mutually agreed model of value is called trust.
Money is a symbol of trust; people in a nation trust in the money the nation employs, enabling them to exchange these symbols amongst themselves.
Because money is a symbol of value that can be traded for other things, people can be encouraged into group projects by offering them money. If someone doesn’t see the value of doing something innately, simply for the act of doing so, they can nevertheless be motivated to participate and “rewarded” for their efforts with money. Value is measured by what people really want and freely choose, it will not make the world poorer.
5,000 years ago gold was introduced as a money. It is money people could trust. Not a promise by someone, as it is today. This “gold money” was something very different. It was something people could count on.
It made it easy to settle a transaction right on the spot. No need to remember who owed what to whom. No need to speak the same language or worship the same religion. This “gold money” was worth something in itself; intrinsically.
Gold is True Global Money:
Gold, as opposed to paper currency, is a proven form of sound money. People have bought and sold goods and services with it for thousands of years.
It has survived every kind of financial crisis. And it has survived countless paper currencies. Gold’s value and by the same token silver’s value are stable.
They are not going to plunge 25% or more over the course of a few days. There also isn’t a central authority in the world that controls PHYSICAL GOLD’S price or its supply. It’s a truly global currency. That’s why gold is still the best way to protect yourself from reckless governments and central banksters.
What is Real Wealth?
Money, right? Currency, gold, silver, you name it. Money is only real wealth because you can use it to buy whatever you want. Money in any form is in actual fact only the means to acquire real wealth. It is the instrument for opportunity and time to pursue your goal.
The conventional view that wealth is money and leisure is upside down. Let’s imagine the owner of a vault has conventional treasures: jewels, gold coins, etc. If the “wealth” stays in the vault, what’s the point of owning this “wealth”? The secret satisfaction of being “wealthy”?
If “wealth” is only an internal state, then let’s measure friendship and being needed/wanted with the metrics of “wealth.” Do you see the point; if “wealth” is merely an internal state of satisfaction, then a vault full of “money” is a poor metric.
What money buys is what real wealth truly is, which is freedom and the control over one’s life. This control over one’s life is called action. Action is defined as “the capacity of an actor to act in a given environment.” This may not seem like a profound concept, but another way to describe action is that action is the opposite of helplessness.
Forms of Wealth:
People with activity or drive define themselves and their identity. They shape the world they inhabit, rather than passively awaiting whatever circumstances may be delivered.
In the real world, people with drive are driven. They move on when things no longer work for them in a particular situation.
Action is not just the opposite of of helplessness; it’s also the opposite of victimhood, i.e. the state of being in which others are held responsible for all of one’s trials and tribulations.
Action and auto responsibility are two sides of the same coin: each manifests the other.
Opportunity is a form of wealth - and so is the ability to take opportunities that arise. Though there is a random element to opportunity – i.e. getting lucky. However, the ability to take the opportunity is not a matter of luck. It requires a specific appetite for risk, perseverance, the ability to discern how best to use the opportunity, and access to the capital required to exploit the opportunity.
Capital is a type of wealth that isn’t limited to “money”: Character traits are capital, social networks are capital, experience is capital, knowledge is capital. All of these forms of capital are often more important than “money” capital.
As for “money” buying leisure; Leisure in abundance is a disaster for the vast majority of people. Humans are designed to be needed by others, to be part of something greater than themselves, and to gain dignity and pride by doing useful work – whether they are paid “money” for this work or not.
This is why so many of those with the “money” to have endless leisure are miserable. Their lives are an endless treadmill of frivolous consumerism, neurotic pettiness, hypochondria, expressing their infinite heartaches to counsellors, and saddest of all, medications in abundance to relieve the ennui and the deadweight of their purposeless existence.
“Money” is only useful if it is a means to acquire real wealth, which is the activity, opportunity and time to pursue your ideals.
There are many people who can spend $600,000 a year on various things, i.e. their “lifestyle”, who don’t feel “wealthy” – and if they don’t have activity and time for work which is meaningful to them, they aren’t wealthy: They’re as impoverished as the person earning a fraction of their income.
Real Wealth Doesn’t Need Much Money:
Real wealth doesn’t actually require a vast horde of “money.” It requires some money, but how much depends on the cost of activity, opportunity and time.
For those with few needs and the right priorities, the cost is minimal.
As for acquiring capital – the most important types of capital don’t require much money; determination, self-discipline, organisation, a voracious appetite for knowledge and work, an insatiable curiosity, a generous heart, a knack for friendship, the purposeful pursuit of goals – these are the tools to acquiring real wealth.
Money Can’t Solve the Core Problems of Humanity:
People, through no direct fault of their own, accept the mistrust of the government as an unchangeable fact; “This is just the way things work!” It is assumed that governments can be nothing but corrupt, and as such, people don’t realise they can be forces of change to address this problem of trust.
As each one takes on the burden of self-education in law and trust, they become a single unit of honesty that can one day unite with others to form a truly honest and fair society.
In short, just because human history has been plagued by tyrannies and corrupt governments this doesn’t in the least prevent us from forming truly benevolent governments.
Such a benevolent body, should be built from the ground up, it should be anarchically founded on a population of educated and vigilant people, who know how to form trusting relationships as individuals and as a collective.
Our world is plagued by dishonesty, unfairness, and wholesale rejection of the truth; the founding principle of life.
In our world today Might is right, it’s the order of the day; lawlessness; where the law of the jungle and survival of the “fittest” are the primary criteria for oppression and success. And yet, despite the poverty stricken status of the human realms of trust, there is nothing stopping us from turning the ship of civilisation around and righting our course toward prosperity and abundance.
All the money in the world can’t solve the core problem humanity faces; the destruction of social trust and the capacity for individuals to restore the greater human family.
Restore the Trust:
The Cabal, for all their power through technology, their abundance of monetary wealth, and their seemingly limitless capacity to pollute and distort the minds of humans are practically powerless without the trust of their subordinates.
Even they, in their ivory towers of splendour and opulence, need a population of trusting serfs – puppets – to act as pawns for their games of domination and control.
The powers that should not be know that trust is the blood that flows through the veins of the entire social enterprise and as a result, they have worked tirelessly to ensure that we, the people never restore trust amongst ourselves.
Since we cannot trust each other, we end up placing our trust in the corrupt power structure, growing increasingly dependent on the very people who have destroyed our trust.
This is why history has been marked by the endless divisive movements, religions, creeds, sexuality and wars, all designed to destroy the human family and social trust.
The most dangerous thing to these morally void fools who have managed to climb the pillars of egocentric personal power, is an awakened individual and their potential to restore honour, relationship, and trust with others of like mind.
One of the best weapons against tyranny is the love of truth, and the willingness to work in trust with others.
Trust, honour, and respect are what make all relationships work. In this sense, good faith is what money really is. If trust is broken with someone, they likely won’t want to work with them in the future.
Humanity, on the whole, betrays trust, acts dishonourably and is pathologically disrespectful, making cooperation very difficult.
To solve this problem, a false form of trust is needed, a kind of forced cooperation, otherwise known as debt. That is why all money today is debt-based.
Restore trust, honour, and respect, and credit-based ‘money’ can return; otherwise known as the love of faith in one’s fellowman.
The Consequences of Scarcity Are All Around Us
We are deprived of physical affection from birth, leading to lifelong personality pathology and longing for emotional acceptance.
We are materially deprived of healthy food and clean products.
We are intellectually deprived of the truth and the self-empowerment that comes therefrom. And,
We are spiritually deprived of the healing power of fellowship, the restorative bestowment of genuine human interaction, and the transcendent joy of exploring cosmic meanings and values as a unified people.
Each Human Being Has Been Effectively Reduced to a Starving Rat
We spend our modern technologically enhanced lives in overcrowded towns and cities, connected to thousands of people through social media, all the while feeling more alone, disconnected and destitute than ever before.
We chase dreams of perfect romantic love; as portrayed in movies, TV shows, and books, to compensate for the profound state of loneliness, deprivation of intimacy and chronic feelings of
We yearn for true meaning in life and personal attainment, indulging in entertainment laden with cosmological archetypes and spiritual overtones, all the while denying the spiritual nature of existence.
We fulminate against anyone labelled as the enemy by social engineers in the mainstream media, feeling a sense of righteous empowerment as a result.
The result of these seemingly endless cycles of lack and dependence is the effectiveness of the elite’s divide and conquer - the destruction of the human family.
The elephant in the room isn’t that the Cabal or the globalists exist. It’s not that extra-terrestrials or spiritual forces are here and are likely trying to help us. It’s not even that fraud, deception, and lies are the backbone of our broken civilisation.
It’s that we, the people continue to allow their programs of division and self-disempowerment to run our lives. We continue to act without trust, honour and righteousness, even within the awakening community.
The Real Source of Wealth:
But this seems to be coming to an end, as more and more people rediscover the source of true wealth: love, trust, righteousness, good health and fellowship.
The desire for material wealth in most people reflects the fact that our basic human needs aren’t being met. But if we can, as a people, come together to solve this problem and build trust in the process, we’ll become immune to the rat-in-the-trap social program. We will transcend the Rat Race!
The Fall And Rise Of Truth, Trust And Society’s Capacity For Wisdom December 30 2025 | From: TomatLee / Various
What does it mean to live in a “post-truth era? Is there a broader history and context feeding that phenomenon than just Trump and the Russians? How do we address it at a deep level to serve our collective capacity to generate wisdom for our public affairs?
“Truth” shares the same Indo-European root as “trust” and “tree”.* It’s like trust and truth are grounded in the solidity and dependability that we associate with great oaks, redwoods, cedars and baobobs.
We might also reflect that trees – and, metaphorically, trust and truth – are living things that can thrive and grow – or be damaged and die.
We are in a period that is sometimes called the “post-truth era”, with a disturbing subtext that it might also be post-trust. Where do we turn for people, information, institutions that we can fully trust, that are dependably truthful – especially for ALL of us diverse people who find ourselves sharing public spaces and challenges with others we don’t understand and may even detest or fear as driven by evil designs and deranged narratives?
Dimensions of Our Predicament
Logic, reason, facts, compassion – all these seem distorted or missing in action. And lately even “reality” has become challenged.
From post-modern relativism, “false memory” research and the surreality of quantum physics to our growing technological capacity to engineer convincing apparancies (e.g., Photoshop, computer-generated imagery, virtual reality, dubbed-in voices in real time, etc.) and the generation and spread of “fake news” and “alternative facts”, it is becoming increasingly hard to know what is real and what is not – and sometimes even to be confident that reality is buried somewhere behind all the illusions!
All this is shaking up the worlds of social media and journalism. It turns out that even efforts to fact-check and identify fake news may ultimately backfire. But even traditionally reliable news media are often distorted by confirmation bias (favoring facts that justify what we already believe), advertising dollars, herd mentality, self-censorship to gain access, and undue focus on conflict, controversy and scandal – all of which undermine journalism’s ideal democratic role and stature.
And while it is true that some media are more biased and deceitful than others, reporting that is consistently and truly fair, honest and useful is increasingly hard to find.
Even science – once the undisputed arbiter of testable truth – is being undermined both by attacks from anti-science ideologues and exposés showing its foundational methods and trustability are more subject to hidden distortions than we realized.
Human fallibility, ego, greed, groupthink, systemic biases and outright manipulation can play outsized roles in published results**, adding to the frustrating tendency for asserted scientific “facts” to be replaced by new studies with totally different conclusions.
This last dynamic – which would be an unadulterated strength of ever-evolving scientific knowledge, were it not for the other factors mentioned – unfortunately doesn’t help the public turn to science for solid truths to depend on.
In addition to all that, more people are becoming aware that expertise is often used to assert social control by delegitimating people’s experience and undermining their judgment and capacity to form bonds of common interest based on common experience.
We’re being told we cannot trust ourselves but should follow (and pay for) experts in every aspect of our lives – diet, politics, child care, education, whatever. This strengthens elite power and versions of meritocracy that make it hard for us ordinary people to gain control of our lives, individually and collectively. (See, for example, Listen, Liberal or Whatever Happened to the Party of the People? by Thomas Frank)
In the face of all this, is it any wonder that so many people retreat into the comfort and tribal muscle of sectarian narratives and pundits, reinforced by social conformity, physical and informational migration into polarized like-minded silos, and the cognitive comfort of confirmation bias?
The implications for democracy and the generation of collective wisdom are profound. How do we make collective decisions when we can’t trust our information sources, ourselves, or each other – or when we place our trust in incompatible sources and ways of thinking whose primary goals are to invalidate and defeat each other.
A). Diverse views are, in fact, facets of a more complex reality, the whole of which we need to better comprehend if we wish to make wise decisions that will actually work in the real world.
This applies even to views that are demonstrably false, because belief in them arises from that more complex reality and plays a role in how it unfolds. So those factors are deeply relevant and vital to take into account if we want to make real progress.
B). Diverse people bring diverse gifts to understanding the whole situation and bringing about wholesome outcomes in our shared lives. They bring different values, different perspectives, different experiences, different cognitive styles and ways of solving problems, different aptitudes and skills, different connections and resources – all of which we can use – if we are discerning, welcoming and creative enough – to help make life better for all of us.
The trick is to help people engage creatively with their diversity – and with any disturbances that come along with it – in ways that enhance our collective comprehension and capacity.
Fortunately, there are thousands of resources to help us do that. Hundreds of them are explored in the wise democracy pattern language.
The current spirit of partisanship and the renewed effort to empower a political “center” are all fine, as part of the complex reality in which we find ourselves.
But ultimately we need to see all these stances and perspectives as resources for something far more inclusive and wise, and to build among us the capacity to access that more embracive collective wisdom to sustain our collective well-being.
How To Spot A Media Psy-Op December 29 2025 | From: YogaEsoteric / Various
I enjoy a good conspiracy theory as much as the next peddler of anti-establishment vitriol. If you can hold them loosely, conspiracy theories can keep you conceptually and ideologically fluid so you don’t settle into any single set of perceptual or cognitive habits with this political stuff, and as an added bonus they tend to consistently infuriate all the worst kinds of people at all the right times.
But this article is not about conspiracy theory. What I’ll be sharing with you here are verifiable matters of public record which I encourage you to independently investigate if anything you read here is new to you.
I emphasize this not because I want you to believe me, but because we need as many eyes on this stuff as possible.
The American [Western] political establishment appears to have settled into an aggressive disinformation campaign against its own citizens as a result of the way it lost control of the narrative in 2016, and that campaign is only escalating.
In 2005, President George W. Bush admitted in a televised press conference that the US government creates its own “news” videos to give to the press, who often air those stories with no disclaimers informing viewers that they are watching government-generated media. In 2013, the US government implemented the negation of a 1948 law which had made it illegal for it to conduct psychological operations (psy-ops) on its citizens.
The 2017 NDAA allots a portion of the defense budget to a new State Department-run “counter-propaganda” program to fight certain types of information Americans are getting from the internet.
So when I tell you that the American government is known to actively use the media to psychologically manipulate the American people, that isn’t some wacky conspiracy theory, it’s a fact. These people have been legalizing and legislating psy-ops campaigns because they want to use them.
A lot of my readers probably tuned out from mainstream media long ago, as did I, but as the manipulators of the political establishment become more desperate their movements are becoming a lot more obvious, and they’ve been giving us a lot of valuable information lately.
I encourage you to tune back in as much as you feel inclined to, because when they really overextend, these mouthpieces of the oligarchy actually tell us where they don’t want us to look. Here are a few things you can watch out for to spot their manipulations:
Whenever you hear all the talking heads on TV suddenly start using the same phrase at the same time, you are hearing a slogan, a marketing ploy cooked up by a political think tank in the same way corporate think tanks come up with slogans for their products like “I’m lovin’ it” or “Silly rabbit, Trix are for kids!” Only political slogans aren’t geared to manipulate you into buying a product, they’re geared to manipulate you into buying into an idea.
In 2003 while the corporate media was manufacturing consent for the Iraq invasion, everyone suddenly started using the phrase “Support our troops.” It was everywhere. “Support our troops, support our troops!” You couldn’t watch the news without hearing it frequently peppered into the conversation, which is bizarre because taken on its own the phrase is essentially meaningless.
The opposition to the Iraq war wasn’t rooted in a lack of “support” for the individuals in the armed forces, it was opposition to the invasion itself and the decision to do so made by politicians in DC.
But all at once corporate media began slamming the American psyche with the absurd subconscious notion that if you didn’t support the invasion you must therefore hate soldiers and marines.
Following Hillary Clinton’s loss due to counter-establishment ideas and information being circulated largely via alternative media outlets, we began seeing the phrase “fake news” being constantly bleated with very broad brush strokes in a transparent attempt to lump dissenting alternative media outlets in with Macedonian clickbait and Russian propaganda.
And it was fairly successful at first; for weeks every single one of my opinion articles was getting comments calling them “fake news” despite being neither fake nor news.
Alternative media was getting slammed with this deliberate government psy-op, and luckily there was a strong pushback against it wherein every time CNN or the Washington Post published an unsubstantiated and inflammatory claim there was widespread use of their own slogan against them.
WaPo recently announced that it’s “time to retire the term fake news” since it’s been co-opted by the political right, and it’s true; you now hear that term being used more often on right-leaning mainstream media than on the left. By hijacking the term, they broke the spell, causing it to become an ineffective psy-op.
Pay close attention to when establishment shills interject a phrase that doesn’t seem to really “fit” with the rest of their words. Whenever you see the CIA-funded Washington Post arbitrarily start babbling about Pizzagate in the middle of an article about something or someone who opposes the political establishment, even when the hard substance of the report has nothing whatsoever to do with Pizzagate, you are seeing this psy-op at work.
CNN’s Chris Cuomo is an absolute wizard with this trick. The son of a former Democratic New York Governor and brother of a current Democratic New York Governor, Cuomo is political establishment royalty, and he appears to have been groomed for his job.
Cuomo went to law school instead of studying journalism, but has been given a prominent spot on the media juggernaut Clinton News Network, where he routinely inserts ideas into his commentary that are designed to fly below the radar and bury themselves deep in America’s subconscious.
My readers might remember Cuomo as the guy who casually slipped the absurd notion that it’s illegal for Americans to read WikiLeaks into his report, which to me is less notable for how blatantly manipulative it is than for the way Americans finally caught him in the act.
It was a very brief insertion, just a few seconds long, but some alert viewers were able to isolate it and go “Hey! What did you just do there? You’re tricking us!”
Which is great, but this was the only time Cuomo has really been caught in a big way. Whenever you see a pundit word-salading, it’s probably because they’re slipping a toxic idea into what they’re serving you.
It looks weirder written down, since he works his magic with such confidence; here’s a transcript from CNN if you want to see it in writing.
You can see a more overt example here in his interview with Rep. Tulsi Gabbard, where he somehow manages to force the adamant assertion “Assad is a tyrant, that he is an oppressor of his people and he needs to be taken out in the name of democracy” into the form of a question to help inoculate viewers from Gabbard’s anti-establishment message involving Syria.
It’s a magic trick. I don’t know where he learned it or why he relentlessly uses it on the American public, but the technique he’s using is called neuro-linguistic programming and it’s well-known among magicians. Check out UK magician Derren Brown who uses it extensively in his act to manipulate people into doing what he wants so he can appear to be psychic.
During his show, he sprinkles subconscious messages throughout his patter so his “predictions” come true at the end. These words and phrases that are so odd and out of context that they should jump out at you, but the mind smooths it over and moves on to the next thing he says. These tiny weird little phrases don’t even need to be repeated that often for them to work.
And work, they do. He can get any three people from the audience to collaborate to select a word of his choosing out of a possible 1.6 million words, seemingly at random to the participants.
The only difference with Brown is that it’s a part of his reveal at the end, and he walks you through how he manipulated everyone. Watch here to see him walk an audience through how he got them to choose that one word from 1.6 million for him, complete with video clips of each insertion.
I guarantee you Chris Cuomo has made a study of neuro-linguistic programming or something similar as part of his establishment grooming. His quick, rhythmic delivery and seamless insertions are the hallmark of a genius-level NLP practitioner.
This psy-op is designed to forcefully marry two unrelated ideas in the minds of the audience for the benefit of the political establishment. Half a year after the Iraq invasion, a poll by USA Today found that 70 percent of Americans still believed that Saddam Hussein was responsible for 9/11.
This wasn’t because reporters were directly saying this; they never could have gotten away with such blatant falsehoods.
What they could get away with was consistently making sure they mentioned Saddam Hussein in the same breath as the September 11th attacks over and over again, and I remember them doing this frequently.
They’d mention the “intelligence” which said Saddam had weapons of mass destruction, and then they’d say something about the possibility of another attack similar to 9/11.
They did this on purpose as part of corporate media’s well-documented participation in manufacturing consent for the invasion, and it worked.
A poll at the time found that 50 percent of Hillary Clinton voters believe that the Russian government tampered with vote tallies to help Donald Trump win the presidential election.
This is because media outlets, nearly all of which are owned by just five powerful companies in the US, have been deliberately using phrases like “election hacking” and “hacked the election” instead of phrases like “hacked the DNC emails” or “spearphishing John Podesta’s emails” which would have been an infinitely more accurate reflection of the actual substance of their reports.
People were tricked into marrying those two ideas, and now half the Democrats you meet will likely believe that Putin was involved in hacking actual election booths or vote tallies.
A few days ago we saw the same thing when Donald Trump lashed out at Rep. John Lewis for saying he didn’t consider him a legitimate President; the overwhelming majority of the headlines from liberal corporate media used words like “civil rights hero” and “civil rights icon” when referring to Lewis and “attack” and “smear” when referring to Trump’s response to him.
In reality Trump was just returning fire initiated by a Congressman in the opposing party, but I guarantee you there are millions of Americans who now think of Trump as someone who attacks civil rights leaders because he hates civil rights, for the same exact reason people think Russia hacked polling booths and thought Saddam was responsible for 9/11.
Just the whole entire Washington Post. The entire thing is one gigantic government psy-op. Its owner Jeff Bezos has collected many hundreds of millions of dollars directly from the CIA (a conflict of interest WaPo never mentions when reporting on US intelligence agencies), and his rag has consistently been the most unapologetic promulgator of the establishment narrative.
To list just a very few examples, WaPo ran sixteen negative articles about Bernie Sanders in the span of sixteen hours during the most hotly contested point in the presidential primaries, published a story which blacklisted hundreds of dissenting alternative media outlets as “Russian propaganda”, reported that Russians had hacked America’s electrical grid when nothing of the sort had happened and then covertly and unapologetically edited their article as their lies became exposed after millions of Americans had consumed their false narrative, and have been among the most aggressive peddlers of the aforementioned “Russia hacked the election” forced association psy-op.
WaPo is a great resource for all clear-eyed rebels, because it can be used as a daily memo of what the CIA and the political establishment it supports want the American public to believe.
Jeff Bezos is the second wealthiest person on the planet and prior to his purchase of WaPo he had already obstructed WikiLeaks via his company Amazon, so he’s unquestionably got a vested interest in propping up the oligarchy. Paying attention to his publication tells us where we aren’t meant to look.
One of the first things I noticed before any campaigning had even started in the recent Democratic primary was when Hillary Clinton got caught buying millions of fake “zombie” accounts to bolster her numbers on Twitter and Facebook.
They’re called zombie accounts because they’re not real people. You can buy followers pretty inexpensively it turns out, but they’re only shell accounts. They will never retweet you, they just make your numbers look better.
It was the beginning of the largest and most outrageous astroturfing of a campaign we’ve ever seen. Astroturf is so called because it seeks to mimic the growth of a natural grassroots campaign.
You buy followers, pay people to turn up to your rallies, offer incentives to wear your stickers and badges, pay people to go online and defend you, hand out signs at rallies that look home-made, pay celebrities to endorse you, pay your marketing campaign to make memes for you, stage “spontaneous” photo-ops with “fans" - in short, you use money to pay for the appearance of what burgeoned from the Bernie Sander’s campaign organically because there was genuine and growing enthusiasm for the candidate. Astroturfing seeks to mimic that kind of virality.
These strategies are usually used by advertising companies to generate interest for a product. Check out this Ted talk by Sharyl Attkisson for a little tour. It’s well-known in the trade that word-of-mouth is by far the best salesman, so those sneaky bastards have dreamed up ways of mimicking that.
What the Clinton campaign did went way beyond hiring a few shills to inject positive messages about their candidate and into the realm of mass psychological abuse, using real-life disrupters, social media shills, and the mainstream media to demonize Trump and his supporters to the point where the nation is still showing symptoms of post-traumatic stress disorder.
Here’s the thing though - we can only prove that the Clinton campaign did that because of the email leaks and the fact that the FEC enforces some transparency on the activities and budgets of the campaign and its superPACS. If we didn’t have those two things, we wouldn’t have proof that it occurred.
Post-campaign, you can still hire a company to shill for you online, on whatever issue you please, and you don’t have to report it to anyone. It’s relatively inexpensive and it’s a very effective way of controlling the narrative and disrupting natural healthy collaboration between normal humans.
This is just a taster but according to this amazing article from Double G, I mean, Glenn Greenwald, the key tactics boil down to the four D’s - Deny, disrupt, degrade, deceive.
So just because the campaign bunting has been taken down, don’t think that there aren’t regular assaults occurring on the hearts and minds of average Westerners, but the good news is, they are getting easier and easier to spot.
The World’s Best Economist December 28 2025 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various
If you want to learn real economics instead of neoliberal junk economics, read Michael Hudson’s books.
What you will learn is that neoliberal economics is an apology for the rentier class and the large banks that have succeeded in financializing the economy, shifting consumer spending power from the purchase of goods and services that drive the real economy to the payment of interest and fees to banks.
His book J is for Junk Economics is written in the form of a dictionary, but the definitions give you the precise meaning of economic terms, the history of economic concepts, and describe the transformation of economics from classical economics, where the emphasis was on taxing incomes that are not the product of the production of goods and services, to neoliberal economics, which rests on the taxation of labor and production.
This is an important difference that is not easy to understand. Classical economists defined “unearned income” as “economic rent.”
This is not the rent that you pay for your apartment. Economic rent is an income stream that has no counterpart in cost incurred by the receipient of the income stream.
For example, when a public authority, say the city of Alexandria, Virginia, decides to connect Alexandria with Washington, D.C., and with itself, with a subway paid for with public money, the owners of property along the subway line experience a rise in property values.
They owe their increased wealth and their increased incomes from the rental values of their properties to the expenditure of taxpayer dollars. If these gains were taxed away, the subway line could have been financed without taxpayers’ money.
It is these gains in value produced by the subway, or by a taxpayer-financed road across property, or by having beachfront property instead of property off the beach, or by having property on the sunny side of the street in a business area that are “economic rents.” Monopoly profits due to a unique positioning are also economic rents.
Hudson adds to these rents the interest that governments pay to bondholders when governments can avoid the issuance of bonds by printing money instead of bonds.
When governments allow private banks to create the money with which to purchase the government’s bonds, the governments create liabilities for taxpayers than are easily avoidable if, instead, government created the money themselves to finance their projects.
The buildup of public debt is entirely unnecessary. No less money is created by the banks that buy government bonds than would be created if the government printed money instead of bonds.
The inability of neoliberal economics to differentiate income streams that are economic rents with no cost of production from produced output makes the National Income and Product Accounts, the main source of data on economic activity in the US, extremely misleading. The economy can be said to be growing because public debt-financed investment projects raise the rents along subway lines.
“Free market” economists today are different from the classical free market economists.
Classical economists, such as Adam Smith, understood a free market to be one in which taxation freed the economy from untaxed economic rents. In neoliberal economics, Hudson explains, “free market” means freedom for rent extraction free of government taxation and regulation. This is a huge difference.
Consequently, today the US economy is focused by policymakers including the Federal Reserve on maximizing rentier income at the expense of the growth in the real economy. Rentier income has the productive economy in a death grip.
The economy cannot grow, because consumer income is siphoned off into payment of interest and fees to banks, and is not available for increased purchases of real goods and services.
Independently I arrived at Hudson’s conclusion that neoliberal economics is a device for ripping off workers and producers in order to convey awards to the rentier class.
Neoliberal economics is a predatory device that justifies the exorbitant incomes of the One Percent while blaming rising debt on those forced into debt-peonage in order to survive.
Hudson’s virtue is that he explains the historical development of debt-peonage and makes it clear that this is the status that the One Percent intends for the 99 Percent. He resurrects classical economics and reformulates economic theory in keeping with the facts on the ground instead of rentier interests.
Hudson is a coauthor of mine. In former times it would have been inappropriate for me to review the work of a colleague.
However, the neoliberal apologists for the One Percent are not going to confront themselves with Hudson’s facts. As I do not think that my integrity or Hudson’s is in question, I have no qualms about introducing you to this major work.
Buy the book. Read and study the book. Learn to rise far above corrupt neoliberal economics.
NWO Control System Vs. The Awakening - Which Will Win? December 27 2025 | From: HumansAreFree
At this pivotal time in history, the era of our awakening through truth and transparency, it has never been more amazing to be alive.
A number of us know that the stakes are high in the fight for our freedom: On one side, we have an increasingly destructive parasitic control system; a well-oiled machine coldly designed by the ruling elite and associates to screw us all over with its false and limiting paradigms.
Then, on the other hand, we are undergoing a mass awakening with changes in consciousness having the potential to co-create a transformed planet.
So, which one will win, the ruling elite’s control system or our awakening? – A very open-ended question that could give many different responses, I realize, but here’s my response, coming from the heart perspective.
The Control System
All things are energy. Every aspect of the parasitic control system serves to destroy our heart energy. It serves to disconnect us from our powerful intuitive heart intelligence. Put simply, the ruling elite want us to be like them, heartless.
They have had us programmed and brainwashed into believing many falsehoods so that we can be left to our own accords to demonstrate our heartlessness to each other.
Take for example, the case of fighting their secretly manufactured wars for power, profit and political gains. In these never-ending wars, the only real enemy, the only ‘us’ versus ‘them’ is we-the-people against the ruling elite, everything else is merely an illusion.
-The same can be said about other secretly manufactured conflicts such as those involving civil unrest, race wars and the spoils of economic disruption...
From cradle to grave our intuitive heart energy takes a hammering by the narrow, deeply stifling education system curriculum and then the workplace: In both cases we’ve been programmed and brainwashed into the profit worshiping, self-serving corporate/banker greed-driven systems with the consumerist ‘he who dies with the most toys wins’ and the ‘survival of the fittest’ attitudes.
Then there’s the ruling elite’s owned and controlled mainstream media. Entertainment is entrainment: The mainstream media is designed to affect our behaviour after watching endless hours of TV/movies where people treat each other horribly, while we are made to become desensitised.
Not to forget the highly deceptive fear-inducing fake news; selling secret sponsored false terrorism with its outsider demons or false bogeymen…
Occultism
Another assault on the heart exists in the form of occultism. The ruling elite secretly meet up in rooms said to have the right geometry/symmetry conducive to holding their negative energy rituals.
Their negative energy rituals or occult symbolism as for example in corporate logos is designed to have counterproductive effects on humanity through affecting our psyche in the morphogenetic field.
Transhumanism
Our human qualities are seriously under threat by the transhumanism agenda. With the use of its technologies such as nano-technology, genetic engineering, drugs, robotics and bionics… to ‘enhance’ us, we are in grave danger of losing our heart connectivity and thus getting rendered powerless to do anything about the ruling elite’s control system. 7 Reasons Why Transhumanism is the Greatest Threat to the Human Species
Earth and our energetic disconnection
Our heart energies extend to an energetic connection with Earth. It’s no coincidence that EARTH is an anagram for HEART.
The ruling elite are destroying planet Heart’s energy by polluting the land, air, food and water through geo-engineering, fracking, chemical pollution, radiation, genetic modification… as we blindly partake.
The recent protests over the laying down of oil pipeline at Standing Rock, Dakota is a stand for the heart energy: Here we have a situation where on one side there are protesters honouring a piece of land as a God-given sacred living entity, providing fertile soil and fresh water…
On the other side, a number of heartless individuals; bribed politicians representing greed-driven corporations, an over-the-top, intimidating and known to be brutal militarized police force to deal with the peaceful protesters should they impede the land-spoiling pipeline construction…
Our Awakening
In this age of truth and transparency, in our awakening, having chosen the ‘service to others’ pathway, more than ever, we need to demonstrate gratitude, compassion, empathy, generosity, kindness and caring for each other as a way of staying in the heart.
Self-acceptance, finding peace with yourself allows staying in the heart, a place where the parasitic control system cannot find a way of attaching itself in order to use you.
Not only for survival and supporting each other, but also for our transformation, I’ve always believed that the answer lies in forming local communities.
Each community must have unity, self-sufficiency and discernment to survive and thrive. A community-based living that would focus on an even distribution of wealth rather than concentrating it to the hands of a select few…
We need to redefine the education system with theory and practice that goes beyond the current paradigm. Besides openness, we need to demonstrate more honesty and integrity in our approaches.
We, as a species, got ourselves into this mess essentially by blindly accepting the general consensus of the masses and the opinions of so-called experts, now it’s up to us to consciously co-create our way out of it. Consciousness is the key to world change.
It’s a lot simpler than some might imagine. We will make this turnaround through feeling, thinking and acting from the heart.
Although traumatizing to the collective consciousness we need to experience this current reality to transform. It will allow us to align our mass conscious intention to create a new paradigm experience, a world that makes a difference for everyone.
It will allow us to have the profound realization that I am YOU and YOU are me, so why lie, cheat and hurt yourself?
Our awakening will win:The shift in mass consciousness towards the heart energy will bring about the manifested reality necessary to defeat the control system.
Megalithic New Zealand: Pyramids, Rabbits, And Megaliths Of Upper World And Underworld December 26 2025 | From: Priscilla Rawiri-Steele
Pyramids and megalithic monuments are everywhere in New Zealand, so often eroded or utterly huge they may, and have been explained away as natural rock formations, so people tend to fail to see them.
‘Little Pyramid’ Okia, Victory Beach, Otago Peninsula New Zealand
It is only in old photos like the one below of the Gorge du Fier in France, it is possible to see the men are looking down upon an enormous face of a pagan deity which has subsequently been carefully smoothed, as has protractedly occurred in New Zealand.
It is only in old photos like this one of the Gorge du Fier in France, it is possible to see the men are looking down upon an enormous face of a pagan deity which has subsequently been carefully smoothed, as has protractedly occurred in New Zealand.
Gorge du Fier at d'Annecy France – the yellow box contains the face that the men are looking down upon; sourced from an old post card in my personal collection
Little pyramid at Okia, Victory Beach Otago, in the South Island of New Zealand has long since been vandalized. Next to it is a half-buried sphinx; its face has been cut away. Why intentionally hide an ancient civilization by disguise / disfigurement / damnatio memoriae and then present the wreck of it to future generations as mysterious: Cui Bono?
Low tide reveals an ancient wall at Achilles Point Ladies Bay / St. Heliers, Auckland, NZ. This is clearly a construction - not a natural formation
Wall at Machu Picchu, Peru. The construction technique is an example of the dimensional knockover technique as decribed by David Wilcock in his research / writings
Elephant Megalith Heimaey Island south Iceland
Cape Brett, New Zealand carving of an African Elephant
Cape Brett, where the tourist ships pass through was long ago carved into the shape of a massive African Elephant. Like these massive carvings, black basalt columns with hexagonal / pentagonal tops were carefully explained away as natural rock carvings as early as 1772, by Sir Joseph Banks.
Having noticed them in New Zealand upon the Otago Peninsular, Banks hurried to Staffa Island to compare the black basalt columns there with the The Giants’ Causeway in Ireland, and to obscure their true nature and meaning by explaining them away as miraculous and natural rock formations (The Extreme Earth, Caves by Jeanne K. Hanson, and Geoffrey H. Nash p. 70 Staffa Island).
Canto XLi Ludovico Ariosto’s Orlando Furioso as translated by (Hieronymus)Jiminez de Urrea
Why would Sir Joseph Banks do such a thing? Honey bees make hexagonal cells in their hives, and the honey bee is the emblem of Minoans. Ubiquitous hexagon causeways, and pillar designs are an important key to understanding that, like a honey thief pillaging the hive for honey, the gold and riches stored in the castles / temples / pyramids of Minoans had been violently and protractedly extracted.
Ancient wall at Owairaka, New Zealand
At Don Heads Coles beach Devonport Tasmania are the same worn hexagonal / pentagonal rocks, and by 1802-4 the Tasmanian Aboriginal had been eradicated from the face of the Earth.
Was Banks covering up archaeological monumental clues? Was Banks complimenting with his dismissal of man-made edifices and megaliths, the damnatio memoriae practiced by academics over the last four centuries so that today, Hyperborea mentioned in my modern edition of Orlando Furioso, is referred to by just one short line stating that Hyperborea is a land that lies “in the extreme north”?
Lion Rock, Piha, West coast, Auckland,m New Zealand.
It is hard to escape the question: what would drive academics to so deface an original work so they might change the location of a whole country / domain spanning at least three continents, from south to north?
Photo below, imputed to portray Machu Picchu as it was found by the son of a Protestant missionary, Hiram Bingham. Under sphinx (with ancient ghostly outline of face cut away and lying crumped on left paw?
The same sawing marks are on this sphinx head, as on the cut away head at one of the two sphinx at Piha pictured above, on Auckland’s west coast) 1912. Overleaf are two photos of Paritutu, or what is called today Sugar Loaf at New Plymouth. Despite all the foliage and erosion, the sphinx face and flaring Egyptian crown is evident to the naked eye. In the water, paws may yet be discerned.
Machu Picchu, 1912
Why pyramids and Megaliths in New Zealand? Due to the towering stature of remains found, Flinders Petrie hypothesized that the first dynasty of Egypt came from Pa Swenet (Pwenet, Punt).
After the Reformation, those once clandestinely Humanist, but subsequent to and during the Reformation, openly Protestant countries, undoubtedly took what became known as the Flemish and or German Giant Rabbit, off the abodes they destroyed, at what is today called Auckland. I believe our rabbit of Pa Swenet (Pwenet or Punt) went on to carry his time piece, and run in haste before Alice in Dis.
Paritutu New Plymouth, New Zealand
Fairly central to The Triumph of Death, did Bruegel the Elder depict next to our beloved honey bee depicted as flying fecal matter, our beautifully preserved and treasured vases being lowered from our castles?
Today these ancient masterpieces are held in great Museums of the world such as The Getty and are given pertinent or profound attributions such as The Underworld Painter and too, bogus attributions like The Baltimore Painter.
Paritutu New Plymouth, New Zealand
In the late 18th century, the light bulb was also stolen from the Pa at what is today called Auckland, a place which The Royal (Naval) Society explorative scientists vouched was the receptacle of all the treasures and secrets of The Herculaneum (as mentioned in the Third Edition of my second book citing The Enlightenment and Why it Still Matters by Anthony Pagden).
Bruegel The Elder The Triumph of Death
Terrain for comparison with Bruegel’s The Triumph of Death from a View of Auckland from Mount Eden circa 1910 as sourced from a Post card marked Tourist Series B026 Printed in Great Britain. The zigzag of dark greenery follows the old canal
This almost two and a half thousand year old Red Figure Vase is attributed to The Underworld Painter, so does it form part of loot taken from Te Totara (said by the Ancient Greeks Tartaros – The Underworld)?
Francesco del Cossa (1430 – 1477) The Triumph of Venus painting held in Palazzo Schifanoia, Ferrara
The rubbing out of archaeological sites was carried out and recorded over centuries. At the beginning of the 20th Century, Ōwairaka Pa (later called Mount Albert) was forcibly taken down by half its mass. In the photo below, the quarry pictured is noticeably on the same proportions as Bruegel’s Tower of Babel.
Pieter Bruegel the Elder 1525 – 1569 Painting called The Tower of Babel
The beautiful Auaunga (Au as it is today, is short for Latin Aurum or gold) stream canal has been covered. (“….Quarrying stopped suddenly in 1928. The height of the mountain was reduced from 148 metres to 135 metres and most of the Maori terraces were destroyed. Today, less than half the original land mass remains.
Men posing on a ‘quarry’ at Auckland ca. 1900. Photograph originally sourced from Auckland War Memorial Museum
The ballast pit was levelled off to make the archery field and in 1961, the inside surfaces of the cone were smoothed off further removing archeological traces”. As sourced from ‘Destruction of the Mountain’ at Ōwairaka Mount Albert Heritage Walks, Neighbourhood Walks at Aucklandcouncil.gov.nz).
A rock climber at the base of the citadel Mount Eden 1967
Did the Hyperboreans survive the last Ice Age, and are those ghostly straight lines really the outline of pyramids hiding there under snow and ice in Antarctica?
Are there undiscovered pyramids in New Zealand filled with untold treasure? If these matters which stir every adventurer’s heart would be answered by the truth coming out about the fate of the Hyperboreans, it is also pertinent to ask; what is the long term social and political and moral legacy of covering up the truth about what happened to the Minoans of Hyperborea?
Philomel passing before Pyramid Coromandel 1946
Here, the twins with the Minoan flower central to the Phaistos disc are beautifully painted in Augustus Earle’s observation about the fate of the founders of the First Dynasty of Egypt. Are future generations of academics really going to allow the raft of lies and manipulation of truth to continue, and ultimately, at what cost to Humanity?
Megalithomania 2008: Hamish Miller - The Stone People of New Zealand
Published on Jun 26, 2012 The 2016 Megalithomania Conference is on 7th-8th May in Glastonbury, UK, with a top line-up of ancient mysteries authors and researchers including Julian Richards, Brien Foerster, Hugh Newman and more. Details here: megalithomania.co.uk.
Filmed at the Megalithomania Conference, Glastonbury, 17th - 18th May 2008. (Also available on a high-quality DVD from megalithomania.co.uk. An account of the extraordinary manifestations of the energy of the earth at sacred places in New Zealand, looking at many ancient pre-Maori megalithic sites.
Hamish co-authored 'In Search of the Southern Serpent' with Barry Brailsford about the pre-historic sites and earth energies of New Zealand and updates us on his research at Megalithomania. He discussed the cathartic communication through the Stone People which led to the creation of his new project, the Parallel Community 9includes 6 minute preview of the new DVD).
Hamish Miller is a dowser, metal sculptor and author. He read engineering at Edinburgh and through his books, talks and workshops his work on earth energies has earned him an international reputation. Book titles include The Sun and the Serpent, It's Not Too Late,
The Dance of the Dragon, The Definitive Wee Book on Dowsing, and In Search of the Southern Serpent (published in May 2006).
A new DVD, Hamish on The Parallel Community was released in November 2007 and is now available. Hamish has lectured widely in Britain, America, Australia, South Africa and New Zealand and has appeared in television programmes in Britain, Sweden, Holland, America, Australia and South Africa.
Currently working with the rapidly expanding Parallel Community (inspired by his cathartic 'meeting' with the ancestors in New Zealand), Hamish lives with his wife Ba, physiotherapist, dowser and researcher, on twelve acres of rough bracken, gorse and granite where they spend their spare time planting trees and trying to stop rabbits from eating them. Related:Russian Scientists Build And Study Pyramids: What They Found Could Change The World
The Occult Origins Of Christmas December 25 2025 | From: OmniThought / Various
What most people do not know about Christmas is that it is a ritual contract created by the Dark Forces to trick people to give them their consent.
What you need to know about rituals is that they have energetic binding forces attached to them.
These binding forces are not dependent upon personal knowledge or beliefs. By simply taking the ACTION to perform the ritual, the effects and results are achieved, and therefore the people who performed the ritual are bound to whatever the ritual is designed to do.
Christmas is saturated with occult symbolism linked to dark magic that is designed to bind you to the Christmas contract. This contract is used by the Dark Forces to drain your energy and enslave your soul.
However, when you become aware of it and remove your consent and stop performing the ritual known as Christmas, the magic spells of the Christmas contract cannot harm you anymore. Be aware that magic can be used for good or evil purposes.
If you have a hard time believing that magic is real, read my informative article titled How Words Can Be Used as Magic Spells. This article gives you a short introduction to how magic works. If you plan to celebrate Christmas, it would be wise to mediate before doing so.
During meditation, tell the Universe that you refuse to give your consent to the Dark Forces. Furthermore, tell the Universe that you are getting together on December 25th to spend time with your family and friends, not to celebrate Christmas.
When you say these things, your mind generates energy signatures and then projects them out into the Universe. These energy signatures tell the Dark Forces that you are aware of their Christmas contract and refuse to give them your consent.
If the Dark Forces do not honor your decision and harm you, they would violate your free will and therefore would have to face the consequences for their actions. All thoughts, intentions, and actions are known by the Universe and there is no escaping its laws.
I will be writing my own article about the hidden secrets of Christmas in about a week, so if you are interested in the occult version of Christmas, keep an eye out for it. - PL Chang
Is Christmas really magic mushroom, sun and Saturn worship in disguise?
Christmas has come around again, and as we all scurry about hanging lights and stars everywhere, and adorning our trees with red and white ornaments, how many of us reflect on the occult origins of Christmas? How many of us realize that this merry festival has roots, in fact, in ancient traditions of magic mushrooms, Saturn worship and sun worship?
Jesus again pictured in religious artwork with magic mushrooms [beneath his feet]
Today’s Christmas is truly a hodgepodge of ancient rituals and celebrations, with roots as far back as 4000 years to the Mesopotamians. This is not surprising, for Christianity itself is a borrowed religion, built on top of previous Coptic (Egyptian), Mesopotamian and Babylonian religions.
Christmas really has nothing to do with the alleged historical birthday of a human called Jesus. Let’s take a look at some of the traditions which have formed Christmas, so we can gain a deeper understanding of its symbolism.
The Christmas-Magic Mushroom Connection
John Allegro was a free-thinking Dead Sea Scrolls scholar and archeologist. In 1970 he wrote a fascinating and highly controversial book entitled The Sacred Mushroom and the Cross, whose subtitle was A Study of the Nature and Origins of Christianity within the Fertility Cults of the Ancient Near East. In it he put forth the unique idea that Christianity was an expression of an ancient cult which worshipped sex and mushrooms.
To straight-laced scholars and prim-and-proper Christian apologists, this idea was simply too much for them to contemplate, but Allegro (left) provided an impressive amount of evidence to back his claims.
He showed how the mushroom – specifically the red-and-white magic mushroom Amanita muscaria – came up again and again in Christian art.
He explained how the Eucharist – where Christians believe the bread wafer is transformed into the body of Christ – is a re-enactment of the sacred ceremony of ingesting the flesh of the Amanita magic mushroom.
Allegro argued that the entire story of the Jesus in the Gospels was a code for the ancient journey of conscious self-exploration, the hallucinogenic “trip”.
You can imagine how the majority of people reacted to his “sex-and-mushroom cult” theory in 1970 in England!
Yet his ideas have merit. James Arthur and others after Allegro further developed the idea of the Christmas-magic mushroom connection.
Amanitas are also linked to fertility and sex; they have a sexual appearance, representing both the male and female. At different stages of their growth life cycle, they resemble a phallus, breast and yoni.
It is interesting to note that Jesus pictured in religious artwork with amanita mushrooms around him. Is the red-and-white Santa Claus or St. Nicholas a modern representation of the village shaman who had the knowledge of pharmacopeia? Is the holy grail actually the mature Amanita with its edges curled up?
Is the Amanita magic mushroom the fabled Holy Grail?
Were Amanitas the source of power and insight for the old ruling class of priests? And perhaps most importantly, what part does the Amanita play in humanity’s origins and the extraterrestrial Annunaki who were mining for “gold”? These are interesting questions to ponder as you decorate your tree in red-and-white with mushroom ornaments this year.
Note: Masonic and other insider have stated that the 'Holy Grail' actually has nothing to do with a cup or grail, that it is a veiled reference to the 'Royal Bloodlines'.
The Christmas-Sun Worship Connection
Thanks to groundbreaking research of investigators like Jordan Maxwell (whose work was the basis of one major segment of the hit movie Zeitgeist), people have begun to become aware of the link between Christmas and sun worship.
At its core, the Illuminati and secret societies that run the world are deeply into black magic, which, defined, is the use of mostly unseen and unknown forces to gain power and control over others. The Illuminati are black magicians.
They utilize certain powers and then, through their control of the media and academia, put out disinformation and lies to prevent people from believing in and accessing those very powers, lest their power base be eroded.
A typical Christian art interpretation of Jesus. Note the sun cross at the back
Christmas is all about the birth of the “son”. But what if it is actually the birth or rebirth of the “sun”? A sun that goes through a “spring”, ascends to a height (summer solstice), then goes through a “fall” (autumn)? Christianity tells us that Jesus the son is our savior. Yet literally speaking the “sun” is our savior; without the sun there would be little or no life on Earth.
So it is only natural that sun worship was practiced by early cultures all over the world, especially in the keys days following the winter solstice, when the sun disappears over the horizon in northern latitudes for 3 days. Jesus was dead for the 3 days. Is this the symbolic “death” of the sun?
December 25th is the first day when the son or sun makes his triumphant return. Many people make fun of early religions and brand them as primitive, without actually realizing that Christianity itself has either stolen or built upon (depending on your viewpoint) these exact traditions.
Is it purely a coincidence that the date of Christmas is always December 25th every year, exactly 3 days after the 22nd (or night of the 21st), the date of winter solstice? Is it another coincidence that Jesus is pictured everywhere throughout Christian art on top of a sun cross, showing the sun’s journey through the 4 seasons every year? Is Christmas an elaborate ritual to lure back the “prodigal sun” from death?
The Christmas-Saturn Worship Connection
Finally, we come to the Saturn connection. The Christmas-Saturn connection is far from the only connection Saturn has with many modern (dark) activities. Saturn is the ancient roman god of time, harvest, law, tyranny and death. In the ancient Greek pantheon he was Chronos, meaning time, and from which we get words like chronological.
Saturnalia was an ancient Roman festival in honour of the deity Saturn, held on 17 December of the Julian calendar and later expanded with festivities through to 23 December. The holiday was celebrated with a sacrifice at the Temple of Saturn, in the Roman Forum, and a public banquet, followed by private gift-giving, continual partying, and a carnival atmosphere that overturned Roman social norms: gambling was permitted, and masters provided table service for their slaves.[1] The poet Catullus called it "the best of days."
For those investigating the global conspiracy, Saturn has particular significance. Why? Because Saturn – and what it represents – is the object of worship of some of the secret societies that are running the planet today. Indeed, the worship of Saturn is a theme running through the priest, the lawyer and the academic classes, as can be seen by the use of gowns and square mortarboards in the color of black – Saturn’s color.
To quote Jordan Maxwell:
“When you graduate from high school you come out processionally with a black robe … and wear the square mortarboard on top of your head. The square mortarboards are, of course, used by the Freemasons for their plaster, so that is why you wear a square mortarboard when you graduate, ultimately becoming an Alumni. It all has to do with Freemasonry; it all has to do with the control of education in this country.”
In the early first centuries A.D., Saturn had a very strong presence in the most powerful city in the world: Rome. Every year from December 17th to 25th, there was a wild, licentious festival in his honor, named Saturnalia.
For these 8 days of the year, people would cut loose in a period of utter lawlessness; Roman courts were closed and Roman law dictated that no one could be punished for damaging property or injuring people during the festival.
There was widespread intoxication, people running around naked, rape and orgies. There was even human sacrifice – a theme that continues to underly some of the strange, dark rituals practiced by today’s ruling elite at places like Bohemian Grove.
According to some sources, Christmas was invented to compete with the pagan celebrations like Saturnalia, because it was just so popular. It was a successful strategy. Over time, the Church adopted many pagan rituals in their attempt to make Christianity more attractive to converts.
What Does Christmas Mean to You?
Ultimately, we all imbue our lives and activities with our own sense of meaning. You can decide what Christmas means to you.
However, it is always good to be aware of the occult origins and hidden symbolism of traditions and events, for as Confucius said, the world is ruled by signs and symbols, not words or law. Symbols communicate directly with our subconscious and guide our lives from behind the scenes, so choose consciously to which things you give your attention and energy.
Why Are People Falling Ill And Dying In Record Numbers & The Normalisation Of Sudden Death Drags On December 24 2025 | From: HatchardReport / NZDSOS / NexusNewsfeed / Various
Excess all-cause mortality in New Zealand is running at record levels. About 100 people are dying each day in New Zealand (pop. 5 million).
A few times during the last couple of months, we have asked a key question: what are people dying of?
Ministry of Health data records that about 7 people are dying each day with Covid, but only about a maximum of 3 of these per day because of Covid.That is just 3% of deaths.
Occupancy of ICU beds with Covid hovers around 3-5%. Therefore it is not Covid that is overwhelming our hospitals, so what is?
The Ministry of Health and mainstream media have been talking vaguely about a bad flu season, but a quick check of the FluTracking website reveals that the 2022 flu season is not even as bad as 2019.
My plumber called in on a job last week and complained about staff falling ill continuously. Sick leave among teachers is up by 80%. The newspapers are also reporting kiwi businesses are closing because of staff shortages exacerbated by ‘winter illness’, but as the incidence flu is not that high what could be going on?
An in depth article in Stuff this morning contains an important hint:
Te Whatu Ora Taranaki hospital emergency department clinical nurse manager Therese Manning said, while there had not been much change to the number of presentations to ED in the last five years, the acuity of the patients is higher.
"This means we are seeing patients presenting with more severe illnesses and injuries…So there are more patients that need to be seen within 10 minutes of arriving….This demonstrates patients are more unwell and therefore likely to stay in hospital longer”.
Acute presentations at ED are increasing, but what are they ill with? We aren’t being told and may never be if our health czars are allowed to continue to deny access to information.
This week it has been widely reported (correctly) that six Canadian doctors died suddenly (at least three of them immediately after receiving their mandatory 4th shot), but hospitals refused to release the cause of death or vaccination status citing privacy concerns.
The authorities have vehemently denied that the deaths could be related to mRNA vaccination. See this article for a summary.
I don’t know if you have noticed, but stories about sudden death incidents seem to have dropped off the MSM radar.
Three years ago a sudden unexplained death might have made the headlines, but today if they are reported at all, they only remain on the visible online page for a very short time. You might have missed this one.
Yet as the Taranaki Hospital ED data and the all cause mortality data reveal:
Acute illness and sudden death are at an all time high. Life insurance data from the USA paints a similar picture.
So have our newspapers ceased to care or are they, like the hospitals and emergency services, too inundated to cope? Having heavily promoted mRNA vaccination for eighteen months, are they too embarrassed to ask questions?
Not Everyone is Keeping Silent
Professor Shmuel C. Shapira, long time Head of the Israeli Institute of Biological Research, has been speaking out about the failure of the Israeli mRNA Pfizer vaccination programme, describing it as a house of cards about to come tumbling down that will bury us all.
He tweeted:
"I am not against vaccines, I am against stupidity, false science and management that is not professional and ignores matters-of-fact.”
Dr. Clare Craig, former UK NHS diagnostic pathologist, is also raising her voice. Speaking on GB news she analysed the official German Government data. This shows that 1 in every 5,000 doses causes a serious reaction to Covid vaccines, but it doesn’t stop there.
The German government is never one to shrink from data collection, so they also conducted a survey of more than half a million vaccine recipients and found that 1 in 500 reported a serious reaction after an mRNA dose (more than ten times the underreported official count).
If you are worried that lightly affected Germans are inflating the figures, stop worrying. The definition of a serious adverse reaction requires that a person be hospitalised or suffer a permanently life changing event.
Dr. Craig invited us to step back from the modelling and government guidance about efficacy and safety and consider that Covid data from around the world does not show that mRNA vaccination leads to any reduction in deaths.
Most illustrative are comparisons between comparable countries with high and low vaccination rates.
For example Israel with close to 100% vaccinated (and most boosted with four doses) compared to Palestine with just 40% double vaccinated. Israel has 1,204 Covid related deaths per million population and Palestine 1,182 deaths per million population roughly the same. It becomes apparent that mRNA vaccination does not reduce the Covid death rate.
A group of international lawyers, top level experts, and renowned scientists present the evidence before a Grand Jury that the COVID-19 pandemic is a criminal operation, with the purpose of installing a world dictatorship.
Among the expert witnesses are World Health Organization advisors, a United Nations official, members of British Intelligence Services, former officers from the U.S. and U.K. military, an expert from the Center for Disease Control, a former vice-president from Pfizer, a Nobel prize winner for medicine, and many other high-level witnesses.
Just remember that analysis of Covid death data does not include rising all-cause deaths unrelated to Covid infection, the evidence points to reduced immunity as a result of mRNA vaccination.
Dr. Craig reported that the general public in the UK are voting with their feet and failing to come in for boosters (and they are stopping bringing in their children for this dangerous jab).
Aren’t we all in sympathy? We are waiting for our doctors to speak up and our courts to do the math.
The words “sudden” and “unexpected” in the nation’s obituary pages continue to assault the eye and the heart.
Despite the New Zealand Herald’s risible attempt to suggest otherwise, we have put out much work to show that an excess of people young and old are being crushed to death by an elephant in a room – the jabs.
We are living through an apparent crime – doggedly uninvestigated by Police and Medsafe as documented at www.nzdsos.com – so monstrous that it defies belief.
Except that we know propaganda works. People have been relentlessly lied to. We are truly sick of it, and many others are waking up and sniffing the air too.
Change is in the wind, and not before time. Information is power, and we present some more anonymised deaths below, in addition to those already listed in our prior article Deaths Following C-19 Vaccination.
Whilst state funded media would have the country – and the world – believe that sudden death of the young and fit, and / or otherwise healthy is a normal occurrence, it is in fact a highly unusual occurrence which began happening last year at alarming rates.
River of Freedom - A Feature Documentary
River of Freedom is a feature documentary about Convoy NZ and the Parliament Protest during February and March 2022. It tells the story of who the people were, why they were protesting, and what happened.
Thank you to everyone who shared their stories with us. Ngā mihi nui. Noho ora mai Aotearoa New Zealand.
The Cardiac Inherited Diseases Group state that around 90 New Zealanders between one year to 40 years of age, experience sudden death each year.
About a third are unexplained. A registry was developed in 2008 by Waikato Clinical School at Auckland University with the aim to “detect and protect young people at risk from SADS”.
Reading the above Herald article and researching the cases featured, shows most are not exactly young and otherwise healthy, compared to the literally hundreds of young New Zealanders dead since the rollouts.
Yearly excess mortality data is available as a visual interactive at the Human Mortality Database, with New Zealand data taken from StatsNZ since 2010.
The pale blue line in the graph shows average mortality across the years 2010-2019. In no prior year does New Zealand’s excess mortality trend so consistently above the average as it has throughout 2022.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
As the government attempts to portray this excess death as being due to Covid-19 disease, proper data analysis shows that this is not the case.
Pharmaceutical products instructing the body to produce spike protein are being deliberately injected into the population, despite some terrible effects.
“Risk of SADS can be lowered by avoiding certain activities such as drinking alcohol and other preventive measures” – but surely including not being injected with a substance which causes direct damage to the heart muscle and creates inflammatory responses in a number of organs including blood vessels.
An Article in a Local Paper Describes How Much Money Was Spent on Incentives to Get People to Get Vaccinated in Hawkes Bay
Over $900,000 was spent in the region coercing citizens to get an injection (that still has only provisional consent and for which the clinical trial is not yet complete) that many neither wanted nor needed.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Swathes of freebies (not really free, our tax money was used) including overseas holidays were offered to citizens! How is this remotely appropriate?
This is the antithesis of ethical medicine. It is practising medicine by bribery and corruption. This is not even the practice of medicine. It is frankly despicable.
The prescription and administration of pharmaceutical medicine should only occur in the context of a personal doctor-patient relationship without bribery or the interference of government. Is it too late to reclaim ethical medicine?
Watch: Excess Death Data Contradicts Normalisation of Sudden Death
This video discusses increased excess deaths in New Zealand up to June 2022, using data from the New Zealand government’s own StatsNZ website. For those who find graphs difficult to interpret, the researcher talks it through clearly.
The highest excess mortality appears to be occurring in the 60+ age group, although all groups are affected. Numbers are increasing over time, particularly since February 2022.
We asked NZ statistics researcher Grant Dixon to check out the work, and he confirms it is correct. Grant says the very latest figures are worse still, with a 30% excess mortality.
The presenter also talks of possible motive. It seems relevant to question why those expressing concerns about overpopulation are now central to a “public health” intervention which, rather than offering improvements in health outcomes, appear to be contributing to excess harm and death.
"An extremely concerning trend where more and more people are dying, especially in 2022 … Why is it that this year, we are starting to see a big explosion in deaths?”
Why are all these deaths occurring? Well, NZ researchers and others have found abnormalities down the microscope but frankly there any number of possible reasons since no clinical trials were done to see what might happen with these untried and unknown ingredients.
Below are some more unexpected and sudden deaths of New Zealanders since May 2022. These are in addition to those listed in our prior article. The names are fictional.
We repeat yet again, that these deaths must be investigated to determine whether any link to the novel gene therapy injections exists. We say it does. How many more will have to die before authorities investigate?
Les, 60yo. Fire Chief, several hours after his booster. Suffered aortic rupture.
Richard, 44yo. Bad headaches then died following jab. Supposedly compensation was paid.
Rosie, 12yo. Suddenly collapsed at athletics, parents did CPR. Died at hospital.
Louis, 64yo. Holidaying overseas. “Sudden medical event” while swimming. Needed vaccines to attend all of his disabled son’s activities.
Kerry, 53yo. Sudden medical event. Yeah, he died. Mandated at supermarket.
Joanne, 32yo. Medical worker. Her mother found her dead in bed after severe headaches, the evening after a booster. Single mother, was concerned booster would harm her. Coroner kept her phone.
Whetu, 40s. Sudden death playing basketball with his son, their favourite activity together.
Simon, 50s. Died overseas after sudden short illness. Worked for an airline so fully jabbed up.
George, 62yo. Fit man, grew vegetables. Sudden death after being sent home from ED.
Dionne, 59yo. Mandated teacher. Sudden death at home.
Malua, 14yo. Double-jabbed. Sudden cardiac arrest at home, died 2 days later in ICU.
Marlon, 30yo. Off-duty police constable. Died in single car crash.
Jenny, 30yo. NHS worker, died overseas. Death labelled as Sudden Adult Death Syndrome.
Dr. Michael Yeadon: The Most Important Single Message I’ve Ever Written
Dear everyone, who is nervously looking around and is asking “What the hell is going on?”
I hope this isn’t too controversial. It’s certainly frightening, but I believe we are still on the right side of disaster & if enough of us become aware of what is happening here & everywhere in the democratic world, we can recover the situation.
We really don’t have long. I believe it’s likely things will change irretrievably over this coming winter [Northern Hemisphere]. Hence this urgent and unusual request.
Everything that’s happened and is happening becomes much simpler and it all makes sense, only when you force yourself to think the impossible.
If you experimentally adopt the position that OUR GOVERNMENT IS ACTIVELY WORKING TO HARM US, TO DISMANTLE MODERN SOCIETY & ENSLAVE ALL PEOPLE IN A DIGITALLY CONTROLLED TOTALITARIAN WORLD, it all fits.
Even if your immediate response is that this is absurd, please try it for a day or so.
I ask you further to adopt the experimental position that the media, controlled by just six global corporations, all allied to a single global organization you’ve all heard of, is relentlessly lying to you and has been doing so for over 2.5 years.
Same for the internet, controlled by fewer global corporations, also all allied to that same global organization.
Because I am certain it’s true. I am certain because this all started with a scientific fraud relating to a virus, augmented it with a relentless campaign of fear, imposed measures known to be useless, which wrecked the economy and smashed civil society, then coerced most to accept useless, unnecessary, ineffective and deliberately dangerous injections.
Obviously, this is an odious crime. Nothing like it has ever happened.
I’ve been 41 years in life sciences from training to successful biotech CEO and was worldwide research head and Vice President of Pfizer’s respiratory unit (1995-2011). I have absolutely no incentive to say any of this if I wasn’t certain.
Many have asked why people didn’t resist tyrants in the past. Partly it is fear. But it’s more than that. It’s that normal people, like you and me, simply cannot imagine being so evil. We trust in humanity.
And so we should. Most people are good. Few are truly terrifyingly horrible. But some are. It’s the inability to believe it’s happening that really stopped people objecting when they should, when the evidence was unmistakable but had not yet quite reached their door, their family.
They are coming for you and your children. It is happening again. There’s ample evidence emerging of long-term, patient planning. I’m so sorry.
It’s now up to you. I genuinely don’t see what else I can do.
Houston Anthropologist Reveals Irrefutable Proof That Recorded History Is Wrong December 23 2025 | From: WakingTimes / Various
Evidence Found Across the Globe of Highly Evolved Human Species from before the Ice Age, Demand Scientific Recognition of our Past that Depicts Societies of Advanced Technology and Culture.
Does this look super advanced or what?
Houston anthropologist, Dr. Semir Osmanagich, founder of the Bosnian Archaeology Park, the most active archaeology site in the world, declares that irrefutable scientific evidence exists of ancient civilizations with advanced technology that leaves us no choice but to change our recorded history.
An examination of the age of structures across the earth reveals conclusively that they were built by advanced civilizations from over 29,000 years ago.
“Acknowledging that we are witness to fundamental proof of advanced civilizations dating back over 29,000 years and an examination of their societal structures forces the World to reconsider its understanding of the development of civilization and history,” explains Dr. Semir Osmanagich.
“Conclusive data at the Bosnian Pyramid site revealed in 2008 and confirmed this year by several independent labs who conducted radio carbon testing dates the site at 29,400 +/-400 years minimum.”
The radiocarbon dating tests of 29,200 years +/- 400 years was done by Radiocarbon Lab from Kiew, Ukraine, on organic material found at the Bosnian Pyramid site. Physicist Dr. Anna Pazdur of Poland’s Silesian University first announced the news at a Press Conference in Sarajevo in August of 2008.
Professor of Classical Archaeology from the University of Alexandria Dr. Mona Haggag called this discovery “writing new pages in European and World history.”
The C14 date of 29,000 years at the Bosnian Archaeological Park was obtained from a piece of organic material retrieved from a clay layer inside the outer casing to the pyramid. It follows a sample date obtained during the 2012 dig season on material located above the concrete at 24,800 years, meaning this structure has a construction profile stretching back almost 30,000 years.
“The ancient people who built these pyramids knew the secrets of frequency and energy. They used these natural resources to develop technologies and undertake construction on scales we have never witnessed on earth,” said Dr. Osmanagich.
Evidence clearly shows that the pyramids were built as ancient energy machines aligned with the earth’s energy grid, providing energy for healing as well as power.
Ancient historians in the US have news just as astonishing as anything found in the far corners of the globe. For instance, the Rockwall discovery outside of Dallas, Texas, is only one example of how we are now re-examining ancient mysteries to reveal more about our past, right in the United States.
H2 (History 2) popular series Unearthing Ancient America recently filmed an episode about the Rockwall that will air later this year. The Texas site is a complex and massive wall ten miles in diameter built over 20,000 years ago and covered by soil seven stories below the ground.
The question is by whom was this structure built and for what purpose and, most importantly, how can knowledge left by these past civilizations help shape our future?
Newly-revealed or rediscovered traces of ancient civilizations have ignited an innate curiosity about human origins as reflected by recent coverage in mainstream media and TV. The November 2013 issue of National Geographic: 100 Greatest Mysteries Revealed-Ancient Civilizations Unearthed says;
“Sometimes cultures leave behind mysteries that baffle those who come after them, from standing stones to coded manuscripts, indications that ancient people indeed had a profound purpose.”
Forward-thinking scientists continue to pursue knowledge from our past that is useful to determine a better future. Renowned author Michal Cremo in his book Forbidden Archeology theorizes that knowledge of advanced Homo-sapiens has been suppressed or ignored by the scientific establishment because it contradicts the current views of human origins that don’t agree with the dominant paradigm.
Cremo’s body of work has been described as “a useful teaching resource, raising a wide range of issues covering aspects of knowledge transfer, sure to be provocative in the classroom.” It has been reviewed with widespread appraisal by hundreds of academic journals.
Gobekli Tepe in Eastern Turkey
Results clearly indicate that similar advanced civilizations of humans were present all across the globe at that time in history. For example, Gobekli Tepe located in Eastern Turkey, is a vast complex of enormous megalithic stone circles with a radius of between 10 and 20 meters, much larger than the well-known Stonehenge in Great Britain.
Excavations at Gobekli Tepe that began there in 1995 revealed radio carbon dating at least 11,600 years. German archaeologist Dr. Klaus Schmidt from the German Archaeological Institute, Berlin, Germany, with the support of ArchaeoNova Institute from Heidelberg, Germany, has led the excavation of these recently-discovered pre-historic megalithic circles at the Turkey location.
“Gobekli Tepe is one of the most fascinating Neolithic locations in the world,” Dr. Klaus Schmidt claims. But as he explains in a recent report, to understand the new finds, archaeologists need to work closely with specialists in comparative religion, architectural and art theory, cognitive and evolutionary psychology, sociologists using social network theory, and others.
“It is the complex story of the earliest, large settled communities, their extensive networking, and their communal understanding of their world, perhaps even the first organized religions and their symbolic representations of the cosmos,” as reported by Klaus Schmidt.
In addition to the megalithic structures, figures and carvings have been discovered, depicting animals of pre historic nature such as dinosaurs and other wild life. Since excavations started in 1995, four of the circles have been partially cleaned, but it is thought that there are a total of up to 50 circles hidden underground.
These vast monoliths, soaring seven meters in height and 25 tons in mass at Gobekli Tepe, are situated right in the heart of what we perceive as the origin of civilization. This find offers new guidance to the true history of earth and our ancient civilizations.
“Our archaeological research goal is not to simply uncover all of the megalithic circles but to try to figure out their purpose,” adds Schmidt.
Bosnian Pyramid Now in Eighth Year: Proof of Advanced Civilizations from over 30,000 years ago
The Bosnian Valley of the Pyramids now in the eighth year of excavation spans six square kilometers in the Visoko River Basin 40km northwest of Sarajevo. Comprised of four ancient pyramids almost three times the size of Giza and an extensive subterranean pyramid tunnel complex, new discoveries each year continue to reveal proof of a much different history of mankind on earth.
The central pyramid of the Sun rises a colossal 420 meters in to the air and has a mass of millions of tons. By comparison the Great pyramid of Cheops (Khufu) in the Giza plateau is 146 meters high, making the Bosnian Pyramids the largest and oldest known pyramids on the planet.
Since research began at the Bosnian site, Dr. Osmanagich has amazed the scientific and archaeological community by gathering a team of interdisciplinary engineers, physicists and researchers from around the world to conduct open and transparent investigation of the site to try and discover the true nature and purpose of this pyramidal complex.
“This is an unknown culture presenting highly-advanced arts and sciences, technology capable of forming truly massive structures and we believe in that process demonstrating an ability to harness pure energy resources,” comments Tim Moon, who has recently joined Osmanagich as lead archeologist at the Bosnian site.
The archaeological project delivered another significant finding this year in the pyramid tunnel complex known as Ravine. Tunneling deep into a ridge line leading toward the Pyramid of the Sun the team has unearthed several megalith stones.
Oh yeah, that one was definitely made with ropes and pulleys too. Sigh.
We are locating foundation walls around its perimeter and cut stone blocks.” Large quantities of artifacts have been recovered from the associated tunnels leading to the site, including effigies painted on stone, art objects and a series of hieroglyphics or ancient texts carved into the tunnel walls.
Dr. Osmangich stresses that it is time for open sharing of knowledge so we can understand and learn from our past.
“It is time for us to open our minds to the true nature of our origin and destruction of each other as a civilization on this planet. Our mission here is to realign science with spirituality in order to progress as a species, and this demands a clear path of shared knowledge.”
Visitors are welcome to the Bosnian Valley of the Pyramids and its Foundation offers a volunteer program each dig season, running June to September.
To hear Dr. Sam’s interview on Lost Knowledge go here.
For more on the Bosnian Pyramids go to www.icbp.ba.
Good Hearts, Fooled Minds: Four Fallacies Of The (Hijacked) Environmental Movement December 22 2025 | From: WakeUpWorld / Various
The hijacked environmental movement is a symptom of the current general, collective state of humanity: good hearted but ignorant.
Many people in the environmental movement are in it for the right reasons: they see the ongoing poisoning and destruction of the planet, led by corporations, and are determined to defend and speak out for the Earth.
Yet, in spite of their good intentions, they have unwittingly allowed themselves to be channeled in a direction that is not really going to help the Earth, unintentionally supporting the very forces that are responsible for the pillaging of it.
By continuing to push notions that carbon dioxide is a poison, that global warming exists and all of mankind is responsible for it, that we need a worldwide carbon tax and that we require Agenda 21-style global governance, these people are unknowingly promoting the New World Order program – and unwittingly placing elite controllers in power who don’t care about the environment and view it merely as a resource to be exploited.
It has even gotten to the point where those opposing popular beliefs about climate change (another Rothschild-Rockefeller creation) are being treated like criminal extremists – there have even been calls in the US for Obama to prosecute them!
Welcome to Planet Earth. If your opinion diverges too much from the mainstream, you could get locked up for thinking “wrongly”.
With the current focus being on the outcomes of the 2015 UN Summit, the hackneyed buzzword of sustainability is being thrown around like there’s no tomorrow. In this context, it’s worth revisiting how the environmental movement came to be so hijacked and co-opted.
Basis for the Hijack: Conspiracy Reports from The Iron Mountain and The Club of Rome
The basis for the hijacked environment movement lies within formerly secret military reports, and one of the elite Round Table groups that run the world: the Club of Rome.
The Club of Rome meeting in Salzburg in 1972. "The Club of Rome, the prestigious think tank founded in 1968, is for the first time meeting in the Dutch capital Amsterdam. Key guest is former Russian President Mikhail Gorbachov, who is to speak on Monday. Other guests include Queen Beatrix, former Dutch Prime Minister Ruud Lubbers and Environment Minister Jacqueline Cramer.The think tank, which comprises economists, scientists, politicians and business people, meets once a year to discuss environmental pollution, the depletion of natural resources and the growth of the world population." As pointed out by an astute reader, the man fifth from the left is the Prime Minister of Canada - Joseph Philippe Pierre Yves Elliot Trudeau.
I wonder if those who believe in AGW (Anthropogenic Global Warming) or Manmade Global Warming have any idea that the elite came up with the idea of using mankind itself as the global threat against which we are all supposed to gather behind a One World Government?
The 1966 Report from the Iron Mountain was commissioned by John F. Kennedy and considered by Lyndon B. Johnson as too dangerous to reveal to the public at the time when it was completed. This excerpt from it discusses how a global government could be imposed without war, and suggests the threat could instead be environmental pollution:
“The possibility of war provides the sense of external necessity without which no government can long remain in power… An effective political substitute for war would require “alternate enemies,” some of which might seem equally farfetched in the context of the current war system.
It may be, for instance, that gross pollution of the environment can eventually replace the possibility of mass destruction by nuclear weapons as the principal apparent threat to the survival of the species.
Poisoning of the air, and of the principal sources of food and water supply, is already well advanced, and at first glance would seem promising in this respect; it constitutes a threat that can be dealt with only through social organization and political power.
But from present indications it will be a generation to a generation and a half before environmental pollution, however severe, will be sufficiently menacing, on a global scale, to offer a possible basis… [however] the rate of pollution could be increased selectively for this purpose”.
The Club of Rome’s 1991 document entitled The First Global Revolution? contains this passage:
“In searching for a common enemy against whom we can unite, we came up with the idea that pollution, the threat of global warming, water shortages, famine and the like, would fit the bill. In their totality and their interactions these phenomena do constitute a common threat which must be confronted by everyone together …
all these dangers are caused by human intervention in natural processes, and it is only through changed attitudes and behavior that they can be overcome.
The real enemy then is humanity itself.”
Are You Being ‘Green Washed’?
The current environmental movement we see today was hijacked a long time ago. Let’s take a look at the top 4 fallacies the NWO conspirators have managed to get ‘greenies’ to believe.
Comment: And Before You Have a Cry About Pollution:
There are some who will say, "well come on - all of this aside, humans should not be polluting the planet."
Duh. Do yah think?
Without an understanding of how the globalist systems have been put into place to effectively rape all natural resources and with no regard to the resulting effects - how do you expect a fix within that system?
Unnecessary use of oil, et al, supression of clean energy technologies, packaging made out of pretrochemical shit? And the people are all to blame? Follow the money.
And where do you think all of the govenmental and corporate recycling initiatives came from?
Wake up. If it is part of a large system within this paradigm - the establishment runs it.
Do the best you can within how you live your life - but until this cabal system falls - we are not going to be able to properly address all of the envoronmental shitfuckery that they have concocted.
If this
still doesn't make sense to you then take a journey around this website, and many other websites that have been sharing related information; such that we may be able to help the sheeple wake up on not only this - but all fronts.
The Hijacked Environmental Movement Fallacy #1: Carbon Dioxide is a Poison
Let’s start with the basics: carbon dioxide (CO2) is a nutrient, not a poison. We breathe out carbon dioxide every breath, but we also take some of it in on the inbreath. According to the IPCC (Interplanetary Panel on Climate Change), we are therefore poisoning ourselves every breath!
Think about it – if CO2 were really a poison, why does it help plants grow so much?
Why is it a key part of the fundamental equation of biology: sugar + oxygen = carbon dioxide + water + heat?
How is it that those in the environmental movement are ignorant of basic biology?
As the website PlantsNeedCO2.org states, the more CO2 around, the better plants grow:
“In Idso and Idso’s (1994) analysis of soil nutrient limitations, the percentage growth enhancement due to a 300-ppm rise in the air’s CO2 content actually did exhibit a slight (but statistically non-significant) decline, dropping from 51% to 45% when nutrients went from non-growth-limiting to limiting in a group of 70 experiments.
But when the atmospheric CO2 enrichment was 600 ppm, this slight negative trend reversed itself, going from a CO2-induced growth stimulation of 43% when nutrients were present in abundance to a 52% enhancement when their supply was sub-optimal.
And for a 1200-ppm increase in atmospheric CO2, the percentage growth enhancement jumped from 60% when the soil nutrient supply was adequate to 207% when it was less-than-adequate.”
It’s a simple equation: the more CO2 you have, the more the plants like it, and the faster they will grow.
The demonization of carbon dioxide is not about helping the environment.
The NWO idea has always been to attach the worsening condition of the environment to an individual’s energy usage – and even his or her breathing – so as to introduce a carbon tax.The Government literally wants to tax you for breathing – for merely being alive.
The Hijacked Environmental Movement Fallacy #2: The Manmade Global Warming Hoax
That is why the term global warming got changed to climate change – this way, no matter what happens with the weather, the IPCC can say the climate is changing. But climate change is a slick truism – you can’t argue against it. Of course the climate is changing. When has it not changed?
The Hijacked Environmental Movement Fallacy #3: The Carbon Tax and Global Governance as Eco-Solutions
As pointed out above, all this focus on carbon is for one reason: taxation. The whole scheme to get people and corporations fixated on their carbon footprint – rather than how much actual benefit or harm they are doing the environment – is to pave the way for more taxation and centralization of power.
To have a worldwide carbon tax, of course, you need a One World Government to enforce and collect it. The UN, ICLEI and its other subdivisions are constantly talking about global governance for this very reason.
In this context, “global governance” means centralizing vast amounts of power into a body destined to become the World Government, under the pretext of fighting man-made global warming or climate change.
It also means extending the reach of the United Nations so that local bodies such as local councils and municipalities that belong to ICLEI, (the International Council for Local Environmental Initiatives, created in 1990 as a non-governmental spin-off of the United Nations) can implement its global directives and make it look ‘grassroots’, or like it was locally decided.
For further information on this topic, check out George Hunt’s work in exposing how Evelyn Rothschild and David Rockefeller were cooking up the cap-and-trade scheme in the 1980s. Hunt was present at some of the meetings where the carbon tax was first being discussed.
The Hijacked Environmental Movement Fallacy #4: Overpopulation
Mahatma Gandhi once said: “Earth provides enough to satisfy every man’s need, but not every man’s greed.” There is no doubt that rising populations can put a strain on resources, yet where is the proof that the Earth cannot support 7 billion people? Or 9 billion people? Is it really population that is the problem here, or is it rather self-centered greed and destructive environmental practices and technologies?
We can accept the world’s rising population not as a threat or a reason to justify killing (which goes by the euphemism of depopulation) but rather as a challenge. It can propel us into living more from the heart, to having more compassion for those less well off than us, to doing a better job of sharing, of distributing resources equitably.
It can stimulate us into better modes of efficiency. Could the rising population help a critical mass of people awake to the truth of free energy, and the fact that free energy or over unity devices already exist which provide practically unlimited energy for free or very cheaply?
It has been known in many countries for a long time that as you increase education, you decrease population, naturally. There is no need for stealth sterilization programs, introducing contraceptives through vaccines or other depopulation murder programs.
When people gain a higher education, they organically choose to have less kids. If the conspirators really cared about the planet’s population, why not use their money to help everyone access better education? The answer is, of course, that they don’t.
Underpinning the propaganda of overpopulation is eugenics. It’s the idea that some humans are superior to others, and that some humans don’t deserve to be here.
This is really the philosophical and spiritual basis of the hijacking. As they have confessed, the conspirators in their delusions view the rest of the population as a virus that must be rid from the planet. Yet, the real virus is the fear mindset that runs the show in the brains of the elite controllers.
“In the event that I am reincarnated, I would like to return as a deadly virus, in order to contribute something to solve overpopulation.”
What does any of this have to do with climate change or carbon? These 2 terms are a huge distraction and a deliberate way to trick people who genuinely care for the environment.
Last year, in September 2014, around 400,000 people turned up in New York for the People’s Climate March – but what is the point of this activism if it gets diverted?
Some of the most powerful and wealthiest environmental organizations have… led the climate movement down various dead ends: carbon trading, carbon offsets, natural gas as a “bridge fuel” - what these policies all held in common is that they created the illusion of progress while allowing the fossil fuel companies to keep mining, drilling and fracking with abandon.
We always knew that the groups pushing hardest for these false solutions took donations from, and formed corporate partnerships with, the big emitters. But this was explained away as an attempt at constructive engagement - using the power of the market to fix market failures. Now it turns out that some green groups are literally part owners of the industry causing the crisis they are purportedly trying to solve.
When it comes to our environment, as David Icke says, we need streetwise spirituality.
We need to have our hearts in the right places, but also put our thinking caps on, otherwise we will easily by led astray by tricksters.
Only once the leaders of the environmental movement have their hearts and brains in alignment can we effect real change on the ecosystems of Planet Earth.
Willful Ignorance: Why We Stay Oblivious To Facts That Threaten Our Health And The Planet December 21 2025 | From: WakingTimes / Various
How many times have you read or heard that refined sugar and processed meats are bad for you? Or how many pictures have you seen that show plastic pollution pervading the oceans?
But yet, many of us remain willfully blind to these fundamental facts. We make very little changes in our lifestyle even though our habits may be destroying our bodies and planet. Why does this happen?
In her book Willful Blindness, Margaret Hefferman argues that it is our human nature to willingly ignore the facts, even if they are destructive.
“Failing to see – or admit to ourselves or our colleagues – the issues and problems in plain sight can ruin private lives and bring down corporations."
- Margaret Hefferman
Willful Ignorance is Just Easy
Each one of us has constructed our own specific set of beliefs. We base them on our past experiences, ideas and relationships with others.
Your beliefs are hard-wired into your brain. Thus, instead of taking the time to assess contradictions and form doubts, you willfully rationalize your beliefs.
Let’s be honest. It’s easy to block out uncomfortable realities (like prevalence of the herbicide glyphosate in food products marketed to children…or the fact that seven million tons of plastic end up in the oceans each year.)
These facts can be scary and difficult to digest. Truly accepting them would require thought and action, and who has time for that!
No one wants to be called dramatic, or Debbie-downer, or conspiracy theorist. Frankly, we just want to be accepted by our peers.
Conformity often trumps rationale. Take a moment and think: how often do you use your culture, social norms or identity to justify your point of view or action? I’m definitely guilty of it.
Cognitive psychologist, Albert Bandura, states:
“…people transform harmful practices into worthy ones, coming up with social justification, distancing themselves with euphemisms and numbers, ignoring the long-term consequences of their actions.”
I would guess we’re all guilty of rejecting contradictions to our beliefs about what lifestyle is acceptable, especially if they make us uncomfortable.
Basically, we have to make ourselves disbelieve our initial belief. That, my friends, takes effort. Many of us are not willing to put in that effort.
Hence, we’re back to willful ignorance.
Hefferman states:
“People are about twice as likely to seek information that supports their own point of view as they are to consider an opposing idea.”
The Influencers of our Beliefs
What’s concerning is that many of our beliefs are shaped by corporations and media.
We do not give this much thought, because very few people are willing to talk about subliminal programming. (This is a perfect example of willful ignorance!)
Yet, most generations living today grew up in front of the TV. Newscasters, Hollywood producers, and advertisers have been feeling ideas of what is rights, what is acceptable and what should be ridiculed.
The problem is surmounted with the influence of religions, educators and governments. Most of these have their own agendas, unbeknownst to us during our childhood and young adulthood.
It’s OK to Change Your Mind
What’s exciting is that we now live is a completely different world than even 20 years ago. We have access to massive amounts of information. It is all at our fingertips.
Social psychologists, activists, and thought leaders, such as Hefferman, are able to share their knowledge, experience and wisdom with the masses.
Where the challenge lies is in our willingness to give thought to contradictions. It’s ok to consider information that oppose the official story you were fed in school or the marketing pitch of massive corporations. It’s ok to change your mind.
Perhaps milk “Does not do A Body Good.” When you’re drinking a Coke, you don’t “Catch the Wave”…instead you pollute the wave.
Maybe, just maybe, it’s not weird but smart to homeschool, opt out of politics, and stop reading/watching the news.
Ms. Hefferman writes in the book:
“Whether individual or collective, willful blindness doesn’t have a single driver, but many. It is a human phenomenon to which we all succumb in matters little and large. We can’t notice and know everything: the cognitive limits of our brain simply won’t let us.
That means we have to filter or edit what we take in. So what we choose to let through and to leave out is crucial. We mostly admit the information that makes us feel great about ourselves, while conveniently filtering whatever unsettles our fragile egos and most vital beliefs..”
It may be beneficial to reflect on what you’re filtering out because it intimidates your ego.
Next time something contradicts one of your beliefs, it may be a noteworthy practice to give these new ideas some thought.
Scientific American Writer Exposes The Tribal Cultist Arrogance And Dogmatic Lunacy Of Science 'Skeptics' December 20 2025 | From: NaturalNews/ Various
In his article, Horgan rightly points out that today's so-called "science skeptics" are little more than dogmatic tribal cultists (my words, not Horgan's) who celebrate "skeptical" thinking concerning their selected philosophical targets while vehemently denying anyone's right to question their own beliefs on things like breast cancer screening, vaccine safety, global warming and genetically engineered foods.
Related: How ‘Science’ Is Used To Deceive The Public
As Horgan eloquently explains in his piece, real skeptics are skeptical of everything, not just selected topics that are targeted by the madness of status quo science crowds (i.e. the "cult of scientism").
Real Skepticism Means Questioning Everything... Especially the Status Quo
A real skeptic, in other words, would bring critical thinking to all of our science narratives and cultural beliefs, including those that cover the origin of the universe (cosmology), the origin of the human species, the nature of consciousness, the long history of indigenous botanical medicine, the cancer industry and mammography, homeopathy, antidepressant drugs, water filters, the existence of God and everything else imaginable.
But far too many of today's infamous "skeptics" (such as Richard Dawkins) are really just cultists who labor under the false banner of "science."
And they're offensive to real critical thinkers, it turns out.
"I don’t hang out with people who self-identify as capital-S Skeptics. Or Atheists. Or Rationalists," explains Horgan. "When people like this get together, they become tribal.
They pat each other on the back and tell each other how smart they are compared to those outside the tribe. But belonging to a tribe often makes you dumber."
I've seen this myself, on both ends of the medicine spectrum. I've seen insanely stupid pharmacology experts swear that statin drugs are such miraculous chemicals that they should be dripped into the public water supply. But I've also seen "raw foodies" at festivals swearing that their "water vortexer machines" could levitate water in defiance of the laws of gravity.
In both cases, my critical thinking alarms go haywire, and I shake my head in disbelief that so many people are so gullible, regardless of their level of academic education or technical mastery of certain subjects.
A highly trained doctor with an IQ of 200 can be just as functionally stupid as a high school dropout, I've observed. In fact, when it comes to medicine and health, many so-called "experts" are so ignorant of reality that they almost seem cognitively retarded.
My Experience as a Food Research Scientist Has Taught Me to Distrust Everything by Default
As a food scientist and lab science director of CWC Labs where I conduct food analysis via ICP-MS, LC/MS-TOF and other instruments, I've become even more skeptical of the mainstream natural products industry over the last few years.
Take note of the massive scam of commercial almond milk sold in grocery stores. Such products contain almost no almonds at all. Instead, they're thickened with carageenan and made to look milky white by the addition of an inorganic mineral compound called calcium carbonate - ground up rocks!
This calcium carbonate, when consumed in large quantities, can cause extreme bone pain, kidney calcification and may even contribute to the calcification of arteries. Yet it's added to a so-called "natural" health product that people are drinking in huge quantities while thinking they're being smart about their health. Truth be told, you'd be far better off drinking raw, unpasteurized cow's milk than commercial almond milk.
I've also seen so much pollution in "natural" products - including toxic heavy metals and alarming quantities of pesticides and herbicides in supposedly "clean" products - that I've reached the point where my own food manufacturing operation now rejects 80% of the raw material lots we test. (See my upcoming book Food Forensics for detailed ICP-MS analysis revealing the heavy metals concentrations in over 800 foods, supplements and spices.)
Similarly, I find myself rejecting 80% of the total B.S. science nonsense reported by the scientifically illiterate mainstream media... (and sometimes even the "science" media).
I've literally seen seemingly credible reports in the mainstream media that claim the most ludicrous science nonsense, including claims that cars can be "powered" by air and that cell phones can be "powered" by water. The air powered cars stories always neglect to mention that the air must be pressurized by some other energy source; usually coal-generated electricity that's used to power the compressors in the first place.
I've also seen the Associated Press falsely report that all mercury has been removed from all vaccines in America (blatantly false), and I've seen the obedient Monsanto-puppet media (i.e. Forbes.com, a propaganda rag steeped in utterly false journalism) report ridiculous claims such as asserting that glyphosate disintegrates quickly in the food supply.
In truth, this cancer-causing weed killer survives food processing and human digestion, showing up in both urine and breast milk, fully intact in its original molecular form.
So why is there no skepticism among "skeptics" about the food chain persistence of pesticides? The false diagnosis hoax of mammography? The lunatic quack medicine diagnosis of "psychiatric disorders" that are treated with mind-bending psychiatric drugs? Or even the scientifically proven fact that some children are seriously harmed by certain vaccines, most notably HPV vaccines?
As Horgan writes in Scientific American:
"The Science Delusion” is common among Capital-S Skeptics. You don’t apply your skepticism equally. You are extremely critical of belief in God, ghosts, heaven, ESP, astrology, homeopathy and Bigfoot. You also attack disbelief in global warming, vaccines and genetically modified food...
Meanwhile, you neglect what I call hard targets. These are dubious and even harmful claims promoted by major scientists and institutions. In the rest of this talk, I’ll give you examples of hard targets from physics, medicine and biology. I’ll wrap up with a rant about war, the hardest target of all."
What Horgan is doing is, dare we say, exercising REAL scientific skepticism. He's refusing to sign up for the "cult of scientism" that all the other closed-minded skeptics obediently follow as their dogmatic mental prison.
Horgan understands that legitimate science is a process, not a belief system. "Science" isn't belief in vaccines, GMOs, chemotherapy and global warming. Those are conclusions, not processes.
Real science is a process of discovery; and that process must be subjected to questioning and criticism, or it isn't science at all.
Let me repeat that for emphasis: Real science is a PROCESS, not a set of conclusions. Any "scientific" belief system which rejects critical questioning isn't based in real science at all. It's just dogma.
This explains why the entire vaccine industry - as it is fraudulently promoted today - isn't scientific at all.
Vaccine propaganda is founded in a dogmatic belief system that demands absolute obedience to political vaccine narratives while rejecting even the slightest questions or criticisms about vaccine ingredients, vaccine safety, vaccine adverse events or vaccine efficacy.
For example, merely asking the question of why flu shots still contain over 50,000 ppb mercury -- that's over 25,000 times the EPA limit of mercury in drinking water -- earns you widespread ridicule and condemnation. And yet the mercury is still being injected into children. Yet the entire vaccine propaganda establishment rejects even the hint of discussion of mercury in vaccines, pretending it doesn't exist.
By the way, how do I know for sure that flu shots still contain over 50,000 ppb mercury? Because I tested flu shots myself via ICP-MS. How accuracy is my testing via ICP-MS? My lab was recently awarded a certificate of excellence for producing extremely accurate results in a blind water contamination proficiency test involving 323 laboratories.
The vaccine establishment, as Natural News readers well know, is practicing delusional thinking masquerading as science. It's just as delusional as so-called "psychic surgeons" who claim to pull diseased liver parts out of a patient's body (which later turn out to be chicken livers, go figure...).
Any real skeptic, upon observing the quackery, propaganda and blatant deception of the vaccine industry, would have to conclude that the way vaccines are formulated, approved and promoted today makes a mockery of science.
More "Science" B.S. is Readily Found in the Fields of Physics and Medicine, Too
Speaking on the subject of computing and AI systems, Horgan explains;
"The Singularity is an apocalyptic cult, with science substituted for God. When high-status scientists promote flaky ideas like the Singularity and multiverse, they hurt science. They undermine its credibility on issues like global warming."
Of course, Horgan may not yet understand that belief in man-made global warming as the primary cause for rising CO2 levels is also based on a politicized science cult. But that's not even the point. I don't expect other scientists to arrive at the same conclusions I've reached.
What I do expect, however, is that scientists should honor the process of critical scientific thinking. If they honor the process, they will eventually reach the correct conclusions on subjects such as man-made global warming, vaccine safety problems, the total con job of statin drugs and so on.
On medicine, Horgan nails it. He gets the fact that today's medical screening system is largely a fraud:
"Over the past half-century, physicians and hospitals have introduced increasingly sophisticated, expensive tests. They assure us that early detection of disease will lead to better health.
But tests often do more harm than good. For every woman whose life is extended because a mammogram detected a tumor, up to 33 receive unnecessary treatment, including biopsies, surgery, radiation and chemotherapy. For men diagnosed with prostate cancer after a PSA test, the ratio is 47 to one. Similar data are emerging on colonoscopies and other tests."
He's also right on the mark when it comes to psychiatric drugs and their fraudulent marketing:
"Over the last few decades, American psychiatry has morphed into a marketing branch of Big Pharma. I started critiquing medications for mental illness more than 20 years ago, pointing out that antidepressants like Prozac are scarcely more effective than placebos.
In retrospect, my criticism was too mild. Psychiatric drugs help some people in the short term, but over time, in the aggregate, they make people sicker.
He also exposes the total fraud of so-called "gene discoveries" that ridiculously claim genes have been discovered for things like gay-ness or intelligence:
Another hard target that needs your attention is behavioral genetics, which seeks the genes that make us tick. I call it gene-whiz science, because the media and the public love it.
Over the past several decades, geneticists have announced the discovery of "genes for" virtually every trait or disorder. We’ve had the God gene, gay gene, alcoholism gene, warrior gene, liberal gene, intelligence gene, schizophrenia gene, and on and on.
None of these linkages of single genes to complex traits or disorders has been confirmed. None!"
Much of What You'reTold Today Under the Banner of "Science" is Complete Bullshit
Horgan has come to the same conclusion that I've reached through a different path: Much of what we are taught today under the banner of "science" is complete bunk. Some of it is sheer hucksterism, and a lot of it qualifies as criminal fraud.
Check out my recent video compilation:
The 12 Biggest SCIENCE LIES You've Been Told by Corporations, Government and the Corrupt Media
At the top of that list of science frauds is, of course, vaccines. As I've exhaustively documented here on Natural News, many popular vaccines (flu shots, measles, mumps) simply don't work at all. Shockingly, outright admissions of a complete lack of scientific testing of the efficacy of such vaccines is admitted on their insert sheets.
Yet despite these extraordinary admissions of lack of efficacy, vaccine research fraud and the known toxicity of vaccine ingredients (which still include formaldehyde, mercury, aluminum and MSG), the systematic rejection of such evidence by vaccine promoting "science skeptics" borders on the fringe of mental illness.
These are not scientists at all... they are con artists and criminals - like Poul Thorsen, a fugitive from justice who was once a CDC researcher - pretending to be scientists.
As a real scientist, I've dared to ask 21 questions we're never allowed to ask about vaccines. Such questions are based on reason and rationality. They include commonsense questions such as, "If measles vaccines confer measles immunity, then why do already-vaccinated children have anything to fear from a measles outbreak?"
The government tells us that lead in water is bad, but mercury in vaccines is good...
It is notable that the entire vaccine establishment not only refuses to answer such questions; they consider the mere act of questioning vaccine dogma to be blasphemy. The demand for absolute obedience to the false narratives surrounding vaccines has reached such a fever pitch that anyone can now see it's no longer based in science at all.
It is a kind of religious fervor put on by deranged zealots who claim an intellectual monopoly over all things related to vaccines. This phenomenon is, in a very real way, a "scientific dictatorship" - an apt oxymoron to describe today's juxtaposition of conformist demands and so-called "scientific evidence."
Hint: If you aren't allowed to ask questions about the evidence, it isn't evidence at all. It's dogma, plain and simple. Vaccine proponents, as they operate today, are faith-based dogmatists who don't need any legitimate evidence because they BELIEVE in vaccines. Their belief is so strong that it outweighs all evidence contrary to their current beliefs. And in case you didn't notice, what I've just described here is a cult, not a science.
Vaccine "Science" is a Massive Con Job
The other huge con job found in vaccines is described thusly: Vaccines only "work" on those who don't need them. In other words, when vaccines do work, they do so by initiating an immune response to a weakened virus that's introduced into the body.
This response requires an active and complex immune system that's functioning well... the same kind of immune system, in other words, that could ward off an infection of a live virus encountered in the wild.
Meanwhile, people who have suppressed immune systems and are therefore extremely vulnerable to infections in the wild also happen to have extremely poor (and sometimes completely nullified) responses to vaccines. They don't build antibodies, in other words, so the vaccines don't work for them (they are non-efficacious).
In order to make vaccines "work" better on those with weakened immune systems, vaccine manufacturers add adjuvant chemicals that are irritants which cause excessive inflammation in the hope of eliciting a stronger immune response. While this may help some people, it also carries a very real risk of causing inflammatory damage to the neurology of some children who receive these vaccines.
The results, as borne out by the vaccine adverse events databases and Vaccine Injury Compensation Program, is a growing number of children who are maimed, neurological damaged, put into comas or even killed by vaccines.
The entire "skeptics" cult of modern medicine denies any of this is happening, and that's one reason why the skeptics are increasingly seen as high-functioning idiots who are possibly vaccine damaged themselves.
Zealotous hate-bloggers like Doctor David Gorski - a psychopathic, mentally ill vaccine promoter who also carries out cancer surgery on African-American victims in Detroit - now characterize the skeptics cult, a cabal of mentally deranged lunatics and gay sex fetish seekers like James Randi who was caught on tape soliciting sex from a young man.
Richard Dawkins, for his part, is also an anti-consciousness cultist who believes in the irrational dualism that no other humans on this planet are conscious beings other than himself. Everybody else, he claims, is an unconscious biological robot suffering under the illusion of self awareness.
Meet Three Real Scientists We Need to Empower to Ask More Questions of the Scientific Establishment
What kind of people do we really need to see more of in the realm of scientific skepticism? People like Rupert Sheldrake, author of Science Set Free. Sheldrake's work is transformative, as it challenges the underlying non-scientific assumptions of modern science.
We also need more people like Gilbert Welch, author of Less Medicine, More Health. This book challenges the seven false assumptions of modern medicine.
Dr. Lewis was maliciously attacked, discredited and ultimately thrown out of the government-funded scientific establishment for the simple reason that he questioned the safety of toxic biosludge -- recycled human and industrial waste that's sold as "organic fertilizer" to be spread on home gardens, childrens' playgrounds and city parks.
(I am currently investigating biosludge in my laboratory and will have some truly shocking, mind-blowing results to share with everyone this summer... you won't believe what's in this crap...) Check out Dr. Lewis's recent post entitled Inspector General dismantled scientific integrity at EPA.
The other thing we need, quite frankly, is independent scientists like myself who are conducting cutting edge, truly independent science, without any financial ties to governments, corporations or academia.
My science lab, which has now passed our ISO 17025 accreditation audit, is free to pursue precisely the kind of scientific analysis of food and medicine that is blackballed or censored in the government-funded scientific community.
Other scientists would lose their jobs if they pursued the kind of science I'm pursuing on a daily basis with absolute freedom.
Notably, this makes me a rare practitioner of real, independent science and a protector of the very kind of independent skepticism and scientific analysis that should be embraced by any system of knowledge that's based on legitimate science.
Yet the science I'm conducting is widely considered a threat to the scientific establishment, precisely because I'm willing to analyze vaccines for heavy metals and organic chemicals, for example.
Such research is simply not allowed by the cult of scientism (the vaccine zealots) because they depend on widespread ignorance of vaccine composition to continue parlaying their fraudulent lies about vaccine safety.
I Honor Scientists Who Pursue a Rigorous Process of Critical Thinking... and I Despise Obedient Status Quo Cultists
John Horgan might not yet be aware of the full story on vaccines, so he might disagree with me on such conclusions. But that's not the point. I honor Horgan's commitment to asking big questions. In fact, I honor those who vehemently disagree with me as long as they are following a process of authentic inquiry and open-minded skepticism.
What I despise is science cultists, dogmatic science propagandists and the worship of the "high priests" of science such as Neil DeGrasse Tyson, who can only be described as a "sciency" sleight-of-mind huckster who has more in common with stage illusionist David Copperfield than, say, Richard Feynman.
Tyson, like Dawkins, is a cultist. He has zero intellectual integrity and has sold out to the tribal dogmatists who spin tall tales of irrational mysticism that currently pass for "accepted science."
For my part, I don't claim to have all the answers - no human mind can possibly dare to claim a full understanding of the mysteries of nature (or the mind of God, for that matter).
But as a real scientist, I'm willing to skeptically explore the evidence on just about anything.
I don't reject entire fields of scientific inquiry merely because they are taboo. It doesn't mean I'm a sucker for silly claims, just that I'm intelligent and humble enough to realize that nature is far more mysterious than any human mind can possibly grasp. And we have much more to learn... many more scientific discoveries to make in the years ahead.
For example, psychic phenomena are often called "paranormal." But what if they are so commonplace that they're actually normal? Why can't we study things like pets somehow anticipating the random arrivals of their owners many minutes in advance? Or mothers having a seemingly intuitive emotional connection to their children even when separated by distance? Why can't we study dream premonition?
Consciousness after biological death? Or even the possibility that the brain is a "quantum antenna" that can receive information transmitted from other conscious sources, transmitted by a quantum entanglement mechanism that Einstein described as "spooky action at a distance?"
If we are true scientists, we must at least BE CURIOUS about the nature of the universe and the apparent consciousness we seem to experience inside that universe. The minute we lose curiosity and decide we have all the answers, we cease being scientists at all.
At that point, we just become mentally incapacitated dogmatic fools... like Dawkins and Randi, two people whom history will judge as being not just unwise hucksters, but even for slowing the progress of human knowledge into realms of understanding that are viciously attacked by "skeptics" today.
I often wonder just how many people have died needlessly due to the malicious "skepticism" of info-terrorist David Gorski or the Quackwatch propagandist Stephen Barrett.
How many cases of cancer could have been prevented or reversed by natural and complementary medicine?
How many studies might have been conducted in the pursuit of natural cures if not for the vicious, aggressive assaults on scientific curiosity being waged by "cult of scientism" intellectual bigots?
We'll never know the answer to that question, but at least a few people like John Horgan are willing to start asking some legitimate questions about the false assumptions of "skeptics." Have no doubt that Horgan himself will be maliciously slandered, attacked, defamed, censored and lied about for daring to ask such questions.
The one thing today's bullshit scientific establishment cannot tolerate is actual skepticism. It threatens the cultist beliefs of the faithful "scientism" worshippers, you see...
Science Is Broken, And The Peer-Review Process Produces “Utter Bulls##t” Parading Around As Real Science December 19 2025 | From: NaturalNews / Various
Much of what gets published in so-called “science journals” or “medical journals” is actually complete “bulls##t,” warn many observers.
In recent years the defects in the peer review system have been the subject of a profusion of critical editorials and studies in the literature. It is high time that the world took heed of what the critics are saying, not least of all because of the medical and health ramifications.
The notion of peer review has long occupied special territory in the world of science. However, investigation of suppressed innovations, inventions, treatments, cures, and so on, rapidly reveals that the peer review system is arguably better at one thing above all others: censorship.
This can mean censorship of everything from contrarian viewpoints to innovations that render favored dogmas, products, or services obsolete (economic threats).
The problem is endemic, as many scientists have learned the hard way.
In truth, the systemic failure of peer review is one of science’s major, embarrassing open secrets.
As Dr David Kaplan tells us, “Peer review is known to engender bias, incompetence, excessive expense, ineffectiveness, and corruption. A surfeit of publications has documented the deficiencies of this system.”
Australian physicist Brian Martin elaborates in his excellent article Strategies for Dissenting Scientists:
"Certain sorts of innovation are welcome in science, when they fall within established frameworks and do not threaten vested interests. But aside from this sort of routine innovation, science has many similarities to systems of dogma. Dissenters are not welcome. They are ignored, rejected, and sometimes attacked."
Electric universe researcher and Big Bang critic Wal Thornhill (a REAL scientist) stated plainly in our GFM Media interview that the peer review system amounts to censorship. Fellow independent scientist Gary Novak agrees scathingly:
"Peer review is a form of censorship, which is tyranny over the mind. Censorship does not purify; it corrupts… There is a lot of junk science and trash that goes through the peer review process."
Brian Martin asks us rhetorically:
"What do [scientists] have to gain by spending time helping an outsider? Most likely, the alleged discovery will turn out to be pointless or wrong from the standard point of view.
If the outsider has made a genuine discovery, that means the outsider would win rewards at the expense of those already in the field who have invested years of effort in the conventional ideas."
Herein lies the problem in moving science forward and shifting paradigms. A paradigm is only as malleable (or mutable) as the minds and egos invested in it.
The Problem of “Experts”
The reality is (as any real scientist will tell you) that scientists are prone - just like lay people - to being cathected to their pet theories and opinions, especially if they have been visibly rewarded or publicly obtained accolades or financial remuneration as a result.
Scientists, like laypeople, have susceptible emotional bodies and often fairly hefty egos - partially due to their “expertise” and academic titles, qualifications, theories, etc.
Once those hefty egos - belonging to people generally known as “experts” - rise to positions of power and/or influence, they can calcify the flow of scientific progress as well as the understanding of new discoveries or theories - particularly if they end up acting as “peer reviewers” at high levels in prestigious publications.
In that capacity, too many become mere gatekeepers and seek not to facilitate innovation or vital new Copernican-scale revelations, but to maintain the status quo which got them there in the first place.
Dr Malcolm Kendrick comments in his excellent book Doctoring Data that, “by definition, anyone who is an ‘expert’ in an area of medicine will be a supporter of whatever dogma holds sway.” Close study of power dynamics in medicine bears this out.
The players with the deepest pockets have the funds to buy all of the “experts” they need to sell a bogus product or ideology to an unsuspecting public.
Consider the following words from The Lancet’s editor Richard Horton (pictured below):
"The mistake, of course, is to have thought that peer review was any more than a crude means of discovering the acceptability - not the validity - of a new finding… We portray peer review to the public as a quasi-sacred process that helps to make science our most objective truth teller.
But we know that the system of peer review is biased, unjust, unaccountable, incomplete, easily fixed, often insulting, usually ignorant, occasionally foolish, and frequently wrong."
Peer review, as a “quasi-sacred” process that somehow supposedly transcends the foibles and follies human nature has taken on sacred ritual status. Has the paper been blessed by the Peer Review Priest?
Peer review is held to be more than just pragmatically useful and functional (which clearly it is not, generally speaking) - it is held as a transcendent, almost magical, organizing force occurring in the heavenly ivory towers of Science, which somehow avoids falling prey to human weaknesses by virtue of those humans’ lofty qualifications as “scientists” or “experts.”
Scientists, of course, aren’t quite human - they are something more, something pure, something that the layman can never be. Students undergo a magical alchemical process as they proceed through educational institutions and emerge transformed from their chrysalis with their doctorates, masters, stethoscopes and equations.
They are the Chosen Ones, the purified, the holy, the redeemed, the righteous. They do not have to answer to the lowly non-scientific peasantry – let alone unbelieving heretics.
It is clear, however, that not only is the popular view of peer review misleading, but the most prestigious publications are some of the very worst offenders. Significant scientific publications - for example, the journal Nature - have a well documented history of prejudice against findings or hypotheses that run contrary to established scientific dogma.
Writing in the British Medical Journal (BMJ) in May 2000, Canadian-based researcher, David Sackett, said that he would “never again lecture, write, or referee anything to do with evidence based clinical practice,” over his concern that “experts” are stifling new ideas. He wants the retirement of experts to be made compulsory and I think it’s a brilliant proposition.
Sackett says that “…progress towards the truth is impaired in the presence of an expert.”
Trusting “experts” in oncology, for example, is generally a very good way to artificially speed one’s trip to the grave, particularly if one has metastatic cancer (allopathic medicine is notoriously ineffective in that realm). And yet “experts” are now on a rarified level that perhaps only popes and celebrities can understand - they are virtually demigods today.
In the main, “experts” are those people in the establishment who espouse the mainstream dogma and reify the politically correct belief structures. “Experts” are lionized because the world that made them experts promotes and validates them when they affirm the already established (and profitable) beliefs - and the media is complicit in this.
If you want to be horribly misled on any number of important issues, just head straight to just about any mainstream news media outlet and listen to the establishment’s “experts.”
Is it not time to get the crusty, rigidified, and corrupt Old Guard out of the way so we can let science move forward?
Harvard Medical School’s Dr. Marcia Angell is the former Editor-in-Chief at the New England Journal of Medicine, where she spent twenty years poring over scientific papers, saturated in the dubious practices that pervade the world of medical research. She states bluntly:
"It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines. I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor of The New England Journal of Medicine."
Most “experts” in medicine are, psychologically speaking, simply engaged in well-paid groupthink and confirmation bias exercises, vigorously affirming and defending their ego’s (lucrative) construction of the world. To paraphrase physicist Max Planck, medicine, like science, “advances one funeral at a time.”
Once the public has accepted the scientific establishment’s truths, narratives, and designated “experts” then researchers who yield findings deviating from the accepted norm can be immediately branded as crackpots, lunatics, fringe nuts, pseudo-scientists and so on, regardless of how meticulous their methods, and irrefutable their results.
The media is crucial in this control dynamic because it sells the establishment’s reality.
Thus is the politically correct status quo maintained.
Peer “Review” Lets Garbage Through - and Lots of it!
“Peer review” censorship exemplifies the neophobia in the world of science which serves to protect the status quo rather than improve knowledge by weeding out dubious epistemologies and results, as it is meant to.
This supposed mechanism of “quality control” has resulted not only in the dismissal of much important and credible research, but it has also let fraudulent research - and lots of it! - be published at the same time. Papers that appear to support fashionable ideas or entrenched dogmas are likely to fare well, even if they are badly flawed - or outright rubbish!
David Kaplan, a professor of pathology at the Case Western Reserve University School of Medicine in Cleveland, has stated that;
"Peer review is broken. It needs to be overhauled, not just tinkered with. The incentives should be changed so that: authors are more satisfied and more likely to produce better work, the reviewing is more transparent and honest, and journals do not have to manage an unwieldy and corrupt system that produces disaffection and misses out on innovation."
Is it any wonder that John Ionnidis reported in his famous 2005 paper that, “Most research findings are false for most research designs and for most fields”? Given the already outlined problems, is it really surprising that, in Ionnidis words, “Claimed research findings may often be simply accurate measures of the prevailing bias”?
Dr. Marc Girard, a mathematician and physician who serves on the editorial board of Medicine Veritas (The Journal of Medical Truth), has written;
"The reason for this disaster is too clear: the power of money. In academic institutions, the current dynamics of research is more favourable to the ability of getting grants - collecting money and spending it - than to scientific imagination or creativity."
In general, peer reviewers - generally not time-rich - don’t try to replicate experiments and rarely even request the raw data supporting a paper’s conclusions. Who has the time for all that? Thus, peer review is, according to Richard Smith writing in Peer review in health sciences;
"Thought to be slow, expensive, profligate of academic time, highly subjective, prone to bias, easily abused, poor at detecting gross defects, and almost useless for detecting fraud."
What about fake peer review? This is where the corrupt and abysmal becomes the theatre of the absurd. For example, Berlin-based Springer Nature, who publishes the aforementioned Nature journal announced the retraction of 64 articles in 10 journals in an August 18th statement in 2015. This followed an internal investigation which found fabricated peer-review write-ups linked to the articles.
The purge followed similar discoveries of “fake peer review” by several other major publishers, including London-based BioMed Central, an arm of Springer, which began retracting 43 articles in March citing “reviews from fabricated reviewers”.
Yes, that means reviewers that don’t exist - recommended as “reviewers” by the people submitting their work for review.
Imagine writing a paper and being able to nominate a non-existent person to review your work, and the contact email supplied to the publisher for this purpose is actually one you made up, which routes the paper back to you (unbeknownst to the publisher), so that you can then secretly carry out a (favourable) review of your own work under a pseudonym!
It’s being done, folks, this is not a joke.
In response to fake peer review some publishers have actually ended the practice of author-suggested reviewers.
And now for the Conceptual Penis…
Recently two scientists performed a brilliant Sokal-style hoax on the journal Cogent Social Sciences. Under the pen names “Jamie Lindsay” and “Peter Boyle,” and writing for the fictitious “Southeast Independent Social Research Group,” Peter Boghossian and James Lindsay wrote a deliberately absurd paper loosely composed in the style of “post-structuralist discursive gender theory” - what exactly that is they made no attempt to find out.
The authors tell us:
"The paper was ridiculous by intention, essentially arguing that penises shouldn’t be thought of as male genital organs but as damaging social constructions…
We assumed that if we were merely clear in our moral implications that maleness is intrinsically bad and that the penis is somehow at the root of it, we could get the paper published in a respectable journal."
And they did. After completing the paper, and being unable to identify what it was actually about, it was deemed a success and ready for submission, which went ahead in April 2017.
It was published the next month after some editorial feedback and additional tweaking. To illustrate how deliberately absurd the paper is, a quote is in order:
"We conclude that penises are not best understood as the male sexual organ, or as a male reproductive organ, but instead as an enacted social construct that is both damaging and problematic for society and future generations… and is the conceptual driver behind much of climate change."
In plain English, they (seemingly) argued here that a penis is not a male sexual organ but a social construct; the “conceptual penis” is problematic for “gender (and reproductive) identity,” as well as being the “conceptual” driver of climate change. No, really. How this ever got published is something to ponder. The paper is filled with meaningless jargon, arrant nonsense, and references to fake papers and authors.
As part of the hoax, none of the sources that were cited were even read by the hoaxers. As Boghossian and Lindsay point out, it never should have been published. No one - not even Boghossian and Lindsay - knows what it is actually saying.
Almost a third of the sources cited in the original version of the paper point to fake sources, such as created by Postmodern Generator, making mock of how absurdly easy it is to execute this kind of hoax, especially, the authors add, in “‘academic’ fields corrupted by postmodernism.” (emphasis added)
The Spectacular Success of Hoax Papers and Non-existent Authors
In April 2010, Cyril Labbé of Joseph Fourier University in Grenoble, France, used a computer program called SCIgen to create 102 fake papers under the pseudonym of Ike Antkare. SCIgen was created in 2005 by researchers at MIT in Cambridge in order to demonstrate that conferences would accept such nonsense…as well as to amuse themselves.
Labbé added the bogus papers to the Google Scholar database, which boosted Ike Antkare’s h-index, a measure of published output, to 94 - at the time, making Antkare the world’s 21st most highly cited scientist. (emphasis added)
So a non-existent scientist has achieved the distinction of being one of the world’s most highly cited authors - while “authoring” papers consisting of utter gibberish. Congratulations are certainly in order. In February 2014 it was reported that Springer and the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), were removing over 120 such bogus papers from their subscription services after Labbe identified them using his own software.
Going back at least as far as 1996 journalists and researchers have been getting spoof papers published in conferences or journals to deliberately expose weaknesses in academic quality controls.
“Physicist Alan Sokal (of the famous Sokal Affair) succeeded in the journal Social Text in 1996,” while Harvard science journalist John Bohannon revealed in a 2013 issue of Science that he had duped over 150 open-access journals into publishing “a deliberately flawed study.”
Bohannon organized submission of the flawed study (technically, many different but very similar variations of the study) to 304 open access journals worldwide over a period of 10 months. 255 went through the whole editing process to the point of either acceptance or rejection.
He wrote:
"Any reviewer with more than a high-school knowledge of chemistry and the ability to understand a basic data plot should have spotted the paper’s shortcomings immediately. Its experiments are so hopelessly flawed that the results are meaningless."
The hoax paper was accepted by a whopping 157 of the journals and rejected by only 98. Of the 106 journals that did conduct “peer review,” fully 70% accepted the paper.
If peer review was a transparent and accountable process, according to Gary Novak;
"There might be a small chance of correcting some of the corruptions through truth and criticism; but the process is cloaked in the darkness of anonymity…Due to the exploitive and corrupt process, nearly everything in science has official errors within it… A culture of protecting and exploiting the errors creates an official reality which cannot be opposed."
Returning specifically to the arena of (mainstream) medicine, a quote in PLoS Medicine, states:
"Journals have devolved into information laundering operations for the pharmaceutical industry”, wrote Richard Horton, editor of the Lancet, in March 2004.
In the same year, Marcia Angell, former editor of the New England Journal of Medicine, lambasted the industry for becoming “primarily a marketing machine” and co-opting “every institution that might stand in its way”…
Jerry Kassirer, another former editor of the New England Journal of Medicine, argues that the industry has deflected the moral compasses of many physicians, and the editors of PLoS Medicine have declared that they will not become “part of the cycle of dependency…between journals and the pharmaceutical industry”.
In the words of John Ionnidis, “Most scientific studies are wrong, and they are wrong because scientists are interested in funding and careers rather than truth.”
If most studies are wrong, and most scientists are more interested in their own careers and funding than getting at the truth - while journals daily allow bogus and flawed pharmaceutical research to be published and promoted - then why would anyone in their right mind believe the claims made by doctors about the efficacy of products based upon “peer review” or pharmaceutical “studies”?
What does a term like “safe and effective” even mean in this world of deception and subterfuge?
Clearly the problem of corruption and conflicts of interest have been increasingly on the radar of professional academics for some time now, so much so that it has been the subject of an increasing number of harshly critical articles and editorials. Conveying the depth and breadth of deception to the “uninitiated,” however, presents a unique challenge.
And it isn’t just conflict of interest and corruption to blame for the failure of peer review, there is human bias, shoddy review work, fake reviewers and fraud, and varying other human interests to factor in.
At the very least we need to cease indoctrinating students into the dogma that all good things have been peer reviewed, and the converse: anything that has not been peer reviewed is clearly blasphemous and crafted by the unholy hands of sinners.
In the meantime, the public needs to be warned: peer review is largely a sham and will not protect you or your family from medical pseudo-science or dangerous pharmaceutical products.
Your doctor’s word should not be blindly trusted, especially when we know that doctors rely absurdly heavily on information (read: propaganda) provided by the pharmaceutical industry itself (can you say “conflicted”?!) in developing their views and opinions.
I can’t help but cringe when I hear people ask if a study has been “peer-reviewed.” The response this question most often deserves is simply, “Who cares?”
"The case against science is straightforward: much of the scientific literature, perhaps half, may simply be untrue. Afflicted by studies with small sample sizes, tiny effects, invalid exploratory analyses, and flagrant conflicts of interest, together with an obsession for pursuing fashionable trends of dubious importance, science has taken a turn towards darkness."
- Richard Horton, Offline: What is medicine’s 5 sigma? The Lancet, 11 April 2015, thelancet.com (Horton is editor of The Lancet)
Do You Know What We Are Breathing In From Weather Geoengineering Efforts? December 18 2025 | From: ActivistPost/ Various
Air is one of the primary elements of life; without it for about three minutes, we cannot survive. If air is such an important biological and functional life component, why are weather geoengineers messing around with it?
Well, think again, since many independent and non-cabal-financially-sponsored “non-consensus scientists” are finding STUFF in the air we breathe that should not be there unless placed for nefarious reasons. What a mouthful! Is there any documentation to substantiate what I say? But of course! Would I say it, if there were none?
Well, I’m going to explain some things readers may find doubtful, interesting and even frightful, but cannot deny once you stop playing around with your iPhones, etc. and look up and study the sky, which no longer is the crystal clear gorgeous blue it used to be in my youth, since I was born during the Depression years.
“Nano particles and Smart Dust [is] being absorbed by all of us via inhalation of chemtrail fallout and from contaminated grocery store food (including organically grown food) where the crops pick up and absorb the same Nano particles and Smart Dust that we are breathing in.
In addition, food sources are intentionally being sprayed with Nano technology. I first became aware of “nanobots” as a component of chemtrails in 2005 when the topic of Morgellons first surfaced on the internet.
These nanobots were somehow integrating themselves with biological functions inside people’s bodies producing these colored fibers and wire-like threads that would ooze out of lesions on the skin.
I had no idea why some people produced the fibers and had the sensation of insects crawling under their skin, while other people had no symptoms at all.”
According to Tony Pantalleresco:
“[W]e’ve been breathing in Nano particles in the atmosphere since the 1960s and they’ve been adding Nano particles to food since the 1970s. The expresion [sic] “Nano particles” refers to the size of the particles.
A particle 1 micron wide is equivalent to one millionth of one meter, while 1 Nano is equivalent to one billionth of one meter. Our bodies can handle particles in the micron range, but Nano size particles in the 1-100 Nano range especially, cause a great deal of damage to the bodyl.”
Tony should know; he’s been making videos about them.
“He explains that many thousands of Nano particles are now residing in EACH human cell of all human beings (including you) and are integrating themselves with our biological functions to re-program our body (and our DNA) into an Android-like hybrid, that is part human biology and part Artificial Intelligence robotics.
These Nano particles inside our bodies are activated by (and programmable from a distance) using radio frequencies (microwaves) and ELF waves.
That means we are ALL being set up for a 21st Century version of enslavement employing electronic mind-control and body-control coercion harassment (which is what Targeted Individuals who call into the Ella Free podcasts are experiencing and talking about). l.”
1962: “He Who Controls The Weather, Will Control The World” (LBJ)
There’s an amazing, astounding and seemingly unbelievable indication of what Tony contends, as a result of his research, being found in human bodies, and he demonstrates that using his arm and a special Anti-Nano Concoction protocol he created.
“Towards the end of the video, he immerses his arm in the anti-Nano bucket (after first adding vinegar, distilled water, salt, DMSO and a capful of olive oil) and following a few minutes, you can see the Nano metal dust particles coming out of the skin and sticking to the floating oil globules.
Jump ahead to 1:22 to see the Nano particles coming out of his skin.”
The video referenced above, which I have watched in full and taken notes on, must be considered very seriously, as it deals with emerging protocols to counter Nano technology, which very few individuals know anything about, but all of us are exposed to and compromised by.
After watching more than an hour of his creating the electro-field bucket, Tony discusses the ‘recipe’ for the anti-Nano soaking mixture around 1 hour 12 minutes, more or less.
The mixture includes cheap white vinegar, distilled water, salt, DMSO and oil, either olive or almond. The exact measurements are given.
At 1 hour 24 minutes “results” (Nano-dust particulates) start showing up emerging from Tony’s arm soaking in the anti-Nano mixture. Tony recommends soaking your feet, but with certain precautions.
PRECAUTIONS
If you have any electrical device implanted in your body, DO NOT use this method; it is NOT FOR YOU!
If you have a heart condition or pacemaker, this is NOT FOR YOU!
Tattoos use Nano-inks, which get into the bloodstream. The younger generations, who have gone bonkers over tats, are playing right into the NWO artificial intelligence agenda. Can that be why tattoos are not government regulated? Tattoo inks are neither regulated nor tested by the federal government and are considered a health risk [2]. However, most states regulate “body art studios.”
“The American Red Cross requires someone who has had a tattoo to wait a year before donating blood if the tattoo was applied in Georgia, Idaho, Maryland, Massachusetts, Nevada, New Hampshire, New York, Pennsylvania, Utah, Wyoming or the District - jurisdictions that do not regulate tattoo facilities.”
Nano-dust and particulates make all human bodies receivers and transmitters, a necessary component for control of humans because we can be controlled by microwaves transmitted to those frequency receivers residing within our bodies. Hard to believe, isn’t it?
Furthermore, it’s my understanding that special “matching” frequencies even can be “designed” for those who have given DNA and body tissues sample, e.g., blood tests, which have been collected by certain ‘vested interest’ agencies doing such AI/transhumanism technology work.
It’s part-and-parcel of global weather geoengineering or “chemtrails,” which literally rain down 43 known chemicals and metals, especially aluminum - the key “tagging” mineral/element, which also is a constituent in most, if not all, vaccines.
The Global Fascist State: Physical Control Of The Global Population Is Impossible December 17 2025 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various
Centralised, controlled Global fascist state:The momentum for the completion of the New World Order (NWO) through centralised control of global politics, business, banking, military and media is gaining pace by the day, and is clearly evident through the large scale spying upon us.
Whenever a hidden agenda is about to be implemented, something occurs to scare the people, justifying the action for implementation. Our world is more and more becoming a recurrence of fascist Nazi Germany, before WWII. This is, in accordance with the plans of the Deep State Brotherhood, the new world that awaits the global population.
The Council on Foreign Relations (CFR), and multinational corporations already control most Governments;promoting the one world government through their control of the media, foundation grants, and education; with power exerted over all issues of the day; they already control almost all avenues; they have the financial power to promote the “New World Order”.
The key to their success is the control and manipulation bythe international bankers of the money systems of almost every nation, while making it appear as though they are controlled by the government.
If you wish to live in a world that is “urbane” enough to be run by a world government, managed by the Brotherhood of the élite and global bankers, then by all means, continue to follow the mainstream media to get all your information.
If, however, the idea of a select coterie of a global intellectual-financial elites running the world does not sound like the ideal society for humanity’s future, then it is time to come into action.
By battling the tide of misinformation and by helping to expose the dangers of the ‘New World Order.’
People have neither the slightest idea, nor the insight of the restrain that is going to be put on them. They would rather ignore the obvious and go into denial of the truth that has already become reality. Instead, people prefer assuring each other that they would never take people’s freedoms away and make us serfs of the elite.
Humanity has on a large scale given away its mind and its responsibility – it is advisable to consider the broader consequences of this behaviour for human existence.
When we give away our mind and responsibility, we give away our freedom and hence, our lives.
If enough people do it, we give the world away, and that is precisely what has been done throughout history. We’re now entering a fascist society, as was the case before WWII. The leaders of this era, such as Benito Mussolini in Italy and Adolf Hitler in Germany embodied the state and they claimed indisputable power, transforming countries into fascist states.
Now history is repeating itself and soon the world will become a fascist society all over again. The only difference is that this time, a few families, alias – the elite – are manipulating the entire planet, through the globalisation of business, banking and communications.
The primary goal of their control is to keep the people in ignorance, fear and at war. Divide, rule and conquer and keep the most important information secret.
Those who have applied these methods to control humanity for thousands of years are members of the same force, following a long-term Brotherhood Agenda, which now is reaching its point of completion.
So, the global fascist state is upon us. People must wake up now – and see this as their “final wake up call” – to mobilise and organise themselves to rebel against this injustice, as the real power is still with the many of us, and not with the few of the elites!
Infinite Power is Within Every Individual:
Infinite power is within each and every individual. The reason we are controlled is not because we don’t have the power to decide our own destiny, it is that we unknowingly give that power away when we don’t take responsibility for our destiny on all fronts.
When something happens that we don’t like, we look for someone else to blame. When there is a problem, people think first what are they, our so-called leaders going to do about it.
But remember it is they who have secretly created most problems, and they consequently respond to people’s demands by offering a ‘solution’ that always entails more centralisation of power and erosion of our freedom.
Man Sends Audition Tape To Globalists To Be Crisis Actor in Next False Flag Hilarious Satire Skit
If you want to give more power to the police, security agencies and military, that is exactly what they want the public to ask for, then they ensure there is more crime, more violence and more terrorism, and so they increasingly get exactly what they want, ever-increasing control and power.
Once people are in fear of being attacked by terrorists, they will demand to have their freedoms taken away, to protect them from what they have been manipulated to become – ‘fearful’.
As Benjamin Franklin once so typically stated:
“Those who would give up essential liberty, to purchase a little temporary safety, deserve neither liberty nor safety.”
The 9/11 Twin Tower destruction in New York in 2001 and the Global warming meme are both classic examples of ‘Problem - Reaction - Solution’ manipulations.
Physical Control of the Global Population is Impossible:
In short it is a technique of ‘problem - reaction - solution’. Create the problem; encourage the reaction that something has to be done about, and then offer the solution, their solution. In other words:
Create chaos and then offer a solution to restore order on people’s request, a solution which serves their agenda.
The masses are herded and directed by emotional and mental control. This is the only way their rules can be implemented. However, the few elites cannot control billions of people physically, unless a large number of people are involved.
So physical control of the global population is impossible. But when you can manipulate the way people feel and think to the point that they decide to do what they want us to do, by demanding to introduce regulations that they want to have implemented, then the door is set open for Centralised Global Control, by making people believe that it is their own idea.
Consequently, humanity becomes mind-controlled.
People are Mind Controlled:
The question is not how many people are mind-controlled, but how few are not. When you believe the news stories in the media, and allow these to affect your perception of events, your mind is controlled.
The answer to freedom of thought and perception is to take your mind back to conclude and decide for yourself.
The choice of interpretations is yours and not someone else’s. Remember they always want to have your mind, because once they have it, they have you. So keep your mind objective under all circumstances.
Think for yourself and don’t allow others to think for you, and if we All do this, their Agenda will not be able to be implemented and we will keep our freedoms, it’s as simple as that. Come into action now in the interest of our children, future generations, and in our own interest.
Remember; the secret Agenda is a conspiracy of minds, of people and events to ensure that the plans of the elite are employed. They conspire to put their people into positions of power, with hidden, stringent instructions to make the agenda happen, by conspiring to create events which will make the public demand the Agenda be implemented in complete ignorance of the devastating consequences.
It is frightening that we have entered the world George Orwell envisioned and wrote about in 1984 of mass surveillance, as portrayed in the movie ‘The Truman Show’.
Stick Your New World Order Up Your Arse!
Recently numerous scandals have revealed the surveillance state of the West and put it up for show. Whistleblowers have been warning about this for years!
But saying you were right won’t help you in the long run. Now we know that the government is listening, recording, and duplicating everything we do online or over the phone, it’s time to start taking action. It’s time to take back our right to privacy.
Although we may not fear Chinese tanks rolling through our streets, make no mistake; our most basic rights are under attack: reporters are being investigated and suspended by Government officials for exposing scandals, legislation is designed to water down our privacy rights and the NSA acts like it was nothing more than a necessity to crack down on terrorists, while presenting the matter as though they have the authority to do so.
Watch the powerful explanation of Snowden; it’s a lot easier, as was put forth by him, to change this intrusion on civilisation as has been laid out in the above writing: Be objective and make up your own mind; deciding for yourself.
How Rockefeller Founded Big Pharma And Waged War On Natural Cures December 16 2025 | From: PoliticalVelCraft/ Various
Western medicine has some good points, and is great in an emergency, but it’s high time people realized that today’s mainstream medicine (western medicine or allopathy), with its focus on drugs, drugs, radiation, drugs, surgery, drugs and more drugs, is at its foundation a money spinning Rockefeller creation.
Much like anything else, politics and money have been used to warp people’s minds and encourage them to embrace what is bad for them.
It all began with John D. Rockefeller (1839 – 1937) who was an oil magnate, a robber baron, America’s first billionaire, and a natural-born monopolist.
By the turn on the 20th century, he controlled 90% of all oil refineries in the U.S. through his oil company, Standard Oil, which was later on broken up to become Chevron, Exxon, Mobil etc.
World Affairs reports: At the same time, around 1900, scientists discovered “petrochemicals” and the ability to create all kinds of chemicals from oil.
For example, the first plastic - called Bakelite - was made from oil in 1907. Scientists were discovering various vitamins and guessed that many pharmaceutical drugs could be made from oil.
This was a wonderful opportunity for Rockefeller who saw the ability to monopolize the oil, chemical and the medical industries at the same time!
The best thing about petrochemicals was that everything could be patented and sold for high profits.
But there was one problem with Rockefeller’s plan for the medical industry: natural/herbal medicines were very popular in America at that time. Almost half the doctors and medical colleges in the U.S. were practicing holistic medicine, using knowledge from Europe and Native Americans.
Rockefeller, the monopolist, had to figure out a way to get rid of his biggest competition. So he used the classic strategy of “problem-reaction-solution.” That is, create a problem and scare people, and then offer a (pre-planned) solution. (Similar to terrorism scare, followed by the “Patriot Act”).
He went to his buddy Andrew Carnegie – another plutocrat who made his money from monopolizing the steel industry – who devised a scheme. From the prestigious Carnegie Foundation, they sent a man named Abraham Flexner to travel around the country and report on the status of medical colleges and hospitals around the country.
This led to the Flexner Report, which gave birth to the modern medicine as we know it.
Needless to say, the report talked about the need for revamping and centralizing our medical institutions. Based on this report, more than half of all medical colleges were soon closed.
Homeopathy and natural medicines were mocked and demonized; and doctors were even jailed.
To help with the transition and change the minds of other doctors and scientists, Rockefeller gave more than $100 million to colleges, hospitals and founded a philanthropic front group called “General Education Board” (GEB). This is the classic carrot and stick approach.
In a very short time, medical colleges were all streamlined and homogenized. All the students were learning the same thing, and medicine was all about using patented drugs.
Scientists received huge grants to study how plants cured diseases, but their goal was to first identify which chemicals in the plant were effective, and then recreate a similar chemical – but not identical – in the lab that could be patented.
A pill for an ill became the mantra for modern medicine.
So, now we are, 100 years later, churning out doctors who know nothing about the benefits of nutrition or herbs or any holistic practices. We have an entire society that is enslaved to corporations for its well-being.
America spends 15% of its GDP on healthcare, which should be really called “sick care.” It is focused not on cure, but only on symptoms, thus creating repeat customers. There is no cure for cancer, diabetes, autism, asthma, or even flu.
Why would there be real cures? This is a system founded by oligarchs and plutocrats, not by doctors.
As for cancer, oh yeah, the American Cancer Society was founded by none other than Rockefeller in 1913.
In this month of breast cancer awareness, it is sad to see people being brainwashed about chemotherapy, radiation and surgery. That’s another topic - but here is a quote from John D. Rockefeller that summarizes his New World Order vision for America…
There is nothing sadder and more pathetic, than a notorious liar shouting, spitting saliva, insulting normal people left and right, while terrorizing those who are telling the truth.
It doesn’t even hide its intentions, anymore. The intentions are clear: to destroy all of its opponents, be they in Russia, China, Iran or in any other patriotic and independent-minded state.
To silence all the media outlets that are speaking the truth; not the truth as it is defined in London, Washington, Paris or Berlin, but the truth as it is perceived in Moscow, Beijing, Caracas or Teheran; the truth that simply serves the people, not the fake, pseudo-truth fabricated in order to uphold the supremacy of the Western Empire.
Huge funds are now being allocated for the mortal propaganda onslaught, originating predominantly in both London and Washington.
Millions of pounds and dollars have been allocated and spent, officially and openly, in order to ‘counter’ the voices of Russian, Chinese, Arab, Iranian and Latin American people; voices that are finally reaching ‘the Others’ – the desolate inhabitants of the ‘global south’, the dwellers of the colonies and neo-colonies; the modern-day slaves living in the ‘client’ states.
The mask is falling down and the gangrenous face of Western propaganda is being exposed. It is awful, frightening, but at least it is what it is, for everyone to see.
No more suspense, no surprises. It is all suddenly out in the open. It is frightening but honest. This is our world. This is how low our humanity has sunk. This is the so-called world order, or more precisely, neo-colonialism.
The West knows how to slaughter millions, and it knows how to manipulate masses. Its propaganda has always been tough (and repeated a thousand times, not unlike corporate advertisements or the WWII fascist indoctrination campaigns) when it originates in the United States, or brilliantly Machiavellian and lethally effective when coming from the United Kingdom.
Let us never forget: the U.K. has been murdering and enslaving hundreds of millions of innocent and much more advanced human beings, for many long centuries and all over the world.
Due to its talent in brainwashing and manipulating the masses, Great Britain has been getting away with countless genocides, robberies and even managing to convince the world that it should be respected and allowed to retain both a moral mandate and the seat at the U.N. Security Council.
The Western regime knows how to lie, shamelessly but professionally, and above all, perpetually. There are thousands of lies piling up on top of each other, delivered with perfect upper-class ‘educated’ accents: lies about Salisbury, about Communism, Russia, China, Iran, Venezuela, Cuba, North Korea, Syria, Yugoslavia, Rwanda, South Africa, Libya, refugees. There are lies about the past, present and even about the future.
Nobody is laughing, seeing such imperialist thugs like the U.K. and France preaching, all over the world and with straight face, about both freedom and human rights. Not laughing, yet. But many are slowly getting outraged.
People in the Middle East, Africa, Asia and Latin America are beginning to realize that they have been fooled, cheated, lied to; that the so called ‘education’ and ‘information’ coming from the West have been nothing else other than shameless indoctrination campaigns.
For years I worked on all continents, compiling stories and testimonies about the crimes of imperialism, and about the awakening of the world, ‘summarized’ in my 840-page book: “Exposing Lies Of The Empire”.
Millions can now see, for the first time, that media outlets such as BBC, DW, CNN, Voice of America, Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty, have been encoding them mercilessly and thoroughly, for years and decades.
Reuters, AP, AFP and several other Western press agencies, have managed to create a uniformed narrative for the entire planet, with local newspapers everywhere in the world now publishing identical fabrications that originate from Washington, London, Paris and other Western capitals.
Totally false pictures about such important subjects as the Soviet Union, Communism, China, but also freedom and democracy, have been engraved into billions of human brains.
The main reason for the opening of the eyes of people of the world which is still oppressed by Western imperialism, is, the relentless work of media outlets such as the Russian-based New Eastern Outlook (NEO), RT and Sputnik, as China-based CGTN, China Radio International and China Daily, Venezuela-based TeleSur, Lebanese Al-Mayadeen, and Iranian Press TV.
Of course, there are many other proud and determined anti-imperialist media outlets in various parts of the world, but the above-mentioned ones are the most important vehicles of the counter-propaganda coming from the countries that fought for their freedom and simply refused to be conquered, colonized, prostituted and brainwashed by the West.
One mighty anti-imperialist coalition of truly independent states has been forming and solidifying. It is now inspiring billions of oppressed human beings everywhere on Earth, giving them hope, promising a better, optimistic and just future. Standing at the vanguard of many positive changes and expectations is the ‘new media’.
And the West is watching, horrified, desperate and increasingly vitriolic. It is willing to destroy, to kill and to crush, just in order to stop this wave of ‘dangerous optimism’ and strive for true independence and freedom.
There are now constant attacks against the new media of the free world. In the West, RT is being threatened with expulsion, brilliant and increasingly popular New Eastern Outlook (NEO) came just recently under vicious cyber-attack from, most likely, professional Western hackers.
TeleSur is periodically crippled by sanctions shamefully unleashed against Venezuela, and the same banditry is targeting Iranian Press TV.
You see, the West may be responsible for billions of ruined lives everywhere in the world, but it is still faces no sanctions, no punitive actions.
While countries like Russia, Iran, China, Cuba, DPRK or Venezuela have to ‘face consequences’ mainly in the form of embargos, sanctions, propaganda, direct intimidation, even military bullying, simply for refusing to accept the insane Western global dictatorship, and for choosing their own form of the government and political as well as economic system.
The West simply doesn’t seem to be able to tolerate dissent. It requires full and unconditional obedience, an absolute submission. It acts as both religious fundamentalist and a global thug. And to make things worse, its citizens appear to be so programmed or so indifferent or both, that they are not capable of comprehending what their countries and their ‘culture’ are doing to the rest of the world.
When being interviewed, I am often asked: “is the world facing real danger of WWIII?”
I always reply “yes”. It is because it appears that both North America and Europe are unable to stop forcing the world into obedience and to virtual slavery. They appear to be unwilling to accept any rational and democratic arrangement on our Planet. Would they sacrifice one, tens or hundreds of millions of human beings, just in order to retain control over the universe? Definitely they would!
They already have, on several occasions, without thinking twice, with no regret and no mercy.
The gamble of the Western fundamentalists is that the rest of the world is so much more decent and much less brutal, that it could not stomach yet another war, another carnage, another bloodbath; that it rather surrenders, rather gives up all its dreams for a much better future, instead of fighting and defending itself against what increasingly appears to be an inevitable Western military attack.
Such calculations and ‘hopes’ of the Western fanatics are false. Countries that are now being confronted and intimidated are well aware what to expect if they give up and surrender to Western insanity and imperialist designs.
People know, they remember what it is like to be enslaved.
Russia under Yeltsin, collapsed, being plundered by Western corporations, being spat at, in the face, by the European and North American governments; its life expectancy dropped to sub-Saharan African levels.
China survived unimaginable agony of “humiliation period’, being ransacked, plundered and divided by French, British and the U.S. invaders.
Iran robbed of its legitimate and socialist government, having to live under a sadistic maniac, the Western puppet, the Shah.
The entire ‘Latin’ America, with its open veins, with ruined culture, with Western religion forced down its throat; with literally all democratically-elected socialist and Communist governments and leaders either overthrown, or directly murdered, or at least manipulated out of power by Washington and its lackeys.
North Korea, survivor of a beastly genocide against its civilians, committed by the U.S. and its allies in the so-called Korean War.
Vietnam and Laos, raped and humiliated by the French, and then bombed to the stone ages by the U.S. and its allies.
South Africa… East Timor… Cambodia…
There are living carcasses, decomposing horrid wrecks, left after the Western deadly ‘liberating’ embraces: Libya and Iraq, Afghanistan and Honduras, Indonesia and the Democratic Republic of Congo, to name just a few. These are serving as warnings to those who still have some illusions left about the Western ‘good will’ and spirit of justice!
Syria… Oh Syria! Just look what the West has done to a proud and beautiful country which refused to fall on its knees and lick Washington’s and London’s feet. But also, look how strong, how determined those who truly love their country can be.
Against all odds, Syria stood up, it fought foreign-backed terrorists, and it won, surrounded and supported by the great internationalist coalition!
The West thought it was triggering yet another Libyan scenario, but instead, it encountered an iron fist, nerves of steel, another Stalingrad. Fascism was identified, confronted and stopped. At an enormous cost, but stopped!
The entire Middle East is watching. The entire world is watching.
People now see and they remember. They are beginning to remember clearly what happened to them. They are starting to understand. They are emboldened. They clearly comprehend that slavery is not the only way to live their lives.
The Anti-Western or more precisely, anti-imperialist coalition is now solid like steel. Because it is one great coalition of victims, of people who know what rape is and what plunder is, and what thorough destruction is.
They know precisely what is administered by the self-proclaimed champions of freedom and democracy – by the Western cultural and economic fundamentalism.
This coalition of independent and proud nations is here to protect itself, to protect each other, as well as the rest of the world.
It will never surrender, never back up. Because the people have spoken and they are sending clear messages to their leaders:
“Never again! Do not capitulate. Do not yield to the Western intimidations. We will fight if attacked. And we will stand, proudly, on our own feet, no matter what, no matter what brutal force we have to face.
Never on our knees, comrades! We will never again fall to our knees in front of those who are spreading terror!”
And the media in these wonderful countries that are resisting Western imperialism and terror is spreading countless optimistic and brave messages.
And the Western establishing is watching and shaking and soiling its pants.
It knows the end of its brutal rule over the world is approaching. It knows those days of impunity are ending. It knows the world will soon judge the West, for the centuries of crimes it has been committing against humanity.
It knows that the media war will be won by ‘us’, not by ‘them’.
The battlefield is being defined. With some bright exceptions, the Westerners and their media outlets are closing ranks, sticking to their masters. Like several other writers, I had been unceremoniously kicked out from Counterpunch, one of the increasingly anti-Communist, anti-Russian, anti-Syrian and anti-Chinese U.S.-based publications.
From their point of view, I was writing for several ‘wrong’ publications. I am actually proud that they stopped publishing me. I am fine where I am: facing them, as I am facing other mass-circulation media outlets of the West.
The extent of Western ideological control of the world is degenerate, truly perverse. Its media and ‘educational’ outlets are fully at the service of the regime.
But the world is waking up and confronting this deadly cultural and political fundamentalism.
A great ideological battle is on. These are exciting, bright times. Nothing could be worse than slavery. Chains are being broken. From now on, there will be no impunity for those who have been torturing the world for centuries.
Their lies, as well as their armor, will be confronted and stopped!
Taking shape in the United States and throughout the world in recent history is the gradual transformation of how media, particularly journalism, is created and distributed. Independent media companies have been folded into larger corporations, and virtually all “local” television stations have been purchased by giant corporations.
The end result is hundreds upon hundreds of entities suffering from a troubling lack of autonomy.
Ben Swann - an Emmy-winning investigative journalist and the founder of Truth In Media and Reality Check series - is fully aware of this transformation, as he has spent the majority of his career devoted to remaining a completely independent journalist not bound to any influence or higher authority.
Over the last 20 years across multiple stations, Swann amassed awards for his investigative reports, yet found himself at odds with executive leadership seeking to maintain more routine reporting.
This clash was particularly apparent when Swann began a series called Reality Check that discussed current US and international events while providing critical context missing from traditional mainstream media reports on those same issues.
For example, during the early years of Reality Check Swann covered the 2012 Republican Presidential primary and opted to scrutinize issues in the US electoral process and the methods used by mainstream media to gloss over overlooked aspects of the system.
Also during the early stages of Reality Check, Swann took unprecedented action as a journalist by directly confronting President Barack Obama about the Constitutionality of his little-known “kill list,” and went on to grill Mitt Romney about using coercion on delegates during the 2012 Republican National Convention.
Despite being advised to take a conventional approach to reporting, Swann continued to stay true to his principles and founded the Truth In Media Project in 2013, where he created two seasons of episodes that closely examined the Federal Reserve, police militarization, crony capitalism, the origin of ISIS, the government’s grip on cannabis, the conflict in Syria, and more.
Along with continued Reality Check episodes and a network of additional independent journalists creating content for the Truth In Media Project, Swann has attracted an audience of tens of millions of people spanning the political, geographical and social spectrum.
In early 2017, his commitment to sovereign reporting clashed with limitations handed down to him in his “day job” as a news anchor; by February of 2017, Ben’s independent endeavors ground to a halt. For the remainder of the year, Swann sought and ultimately discovered the key to true independence: decentralization and an organization known as a DAO.
Decentralization means that there is no single person, or group of people, that has control over an organization. A DAO is a decentralized autonomous organization; in a DAO, an organization operates within a set of guidelines but is free from any ruler or group of rulers, and operates with all aspects of the organization funded by the network itself.
A DAO is the antithesis of a centralized corporation that is often suppressed by layers upon layers of bureaucracy. The DAO of Dash, a revolutionary digital currency, features a treasury in which a network of participants may vote to allocate portions to a number of projects submitted through a proposal process.
The structure is similar to a sponsorship, but the key distinction of a DAO is that there’s no central authority to mandate terms. The Dash DAO has funded numerous proposals, with Swann’s Reality Check Series and Truth In Media Project being among the most significant proposal in Dash’s history.
Independent media is often incredibly difficult to pull off successfully, especially when reporting on issues that powerful conglomerates don’t want discussed.
There is no doubt that Swann has always aimed for disruptive, informative journalism, which is embraced by citizens yet often unwelcome in most media corporations.
As Swann has aimed to disrupt the media, the Dash DAO has disrupted the financial industry. The unique harmony between the Dash DAO and Swann has eliminated journalistic constraints previously laid out by corporate media, and is the world’s most detailed illustration of how decentralization is able to put the power back into the hands of the creator.
Decentralization is an immensely powerful element, and it’s not limited to the financial sector. It can be applied to virtually any industry, and the Dash DAO is responsible for a historic, revolutionary transformation in media with Swann becoming the first journalist in the world to be powered by decentralization.
Who Runs The World? BlackRock And Vanguard December 14 2025 | From: LewRockwell / Various
If you’ve been wondering how the world economy has been hijacked and humanity has been kidnapped by a completely bogus narrative, look no further than this video by Dutch creator, Covid Lie.
What she uncovers is that the stock of the world’s largest corporations are owned by the same institutional investors. They all own each other.
This means that “competing” brands, like Coke and Pepsi aren’t really competitors, at all, since their stock is owned by exactly the same investment companies, investment funds, insurance companies, banks and in some cases, governments.
This is the case, across all industries. As she says: The smaller investors are owned by larger investors. Those are owned by even bigger investors. The visible top of this pyramid shows only two companies whose names we have often seen…
They are Vanguard and BlackRock.
The power of these two companies is beyond your imagination. Not only do they own a large part of the stocks of nearly all big companies but also the stocks of the investors in those companies. This gives them a complete monopoly.
A Bloomberg report states that both these companies in the year 2028, together will have investments in the amount of 20 trillion dollars.That means that they will own almost everything.
Bloomberg calls BlackRock “The fourth branch of government”, because it’s the only private agency that closely works with the central banks. BlackRock lends money to the central bank but it’s also the advisor.
It also develops the software the central bank uses. Many BlackRock employees were in the White House with Bush and Obama.
Its CEO, Larry Fink can count on a warm welcome from leaders and politicians. Not so strange, if you know that he is the front man of the ruling company but Larry Fink does not pull the strings himself.
BlackRock, itself is also owned by shareholders. Who are those shareholders? We come to a strange conclusion. The biggest shareholder is Vanguard. But now he gets murky. [See this as referenced below if you want to see just how murky it gets NZ International Ownership of New Zealand Banks]
Vanguard is a private company and we cannot see who the shareholders are. The elite who own Vanguard apparently do not like being in the spotlight but of course they cannot hide from who is willing to dig.
Reports from Oxfam and Bloomberg say that 1% of the world, together owns more money than the other 99%. Even worse, Oxfam says that 82% of all earned money in 2017 went to this 1%.
In other words, these two investment companies, Vanguard and BlackRock hold a monopoly in all industries in the world and they, in turn are owned by the richest families in the world, some of whom are royalty and who have been very rich since before the Industrial Revolution.
Why doesn’t everybody know this? Why aren’t there movies and documentaries about this? Why isn’t it in the news? Because 90% of the international media is owned by nine media conglomerates.
Covid Lie asks;
"Who sponsors the organization and press agencies that produce our news? With Project Syndicate, we see the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, the Open Society Foundation and the European Journalism Centre.
The organizations that bring the news get paid by non-profit organizations, of the same elite that also owns the entire media but also a part of taxpayers money is used to pay them.”
So when Lynn Forester de Rothschild wants the United States to be a one-party country (like China) and doesn’t want voter ID laws passed in the US, so that more election fraud can be perpetrated to achieve that end,what does she do?
She holds a conference call with the world’s top 100 CEOs and tells them to publicly decry as “Jim Crow” Georgia’s passing of an anti-corruption law and she orders her dutiful CEOs to boycott the State of Georgia, like we saw with Coca-Cola and Major League Baseball and even Hollywood star, Will Smith. In this conference call, we see shades of the Great Reset, Agenda 2030, the New World Order.
The UN wants to make sure, as does Schwab that in 2030, poverty, hunger, pollution and disease no longer plague the Earth.
To achieve this, the UN wants taxes from Western countries to be split by the mega corporations of the elite to create a brand new society. For this project, the UN says we need a world government – namely the UN, itself.
And it is clear that the “pandemic” was orchestrated in order to bring this about. This video does an incredible job of explaining how it is all being done.
Transcript
As you are watching millions fall into poverty because of the corona measures of the past year, even if the greatest economic crisis in history has not affected you yet, it will only be a matter of time until the rippling effects will hit you, as well
This is not fear-mongering but it’s a harsh reality. I also think we might mitigate the damage and may even do better, provided we are informed correctly about our situation.
This is why I would like to show you a few facts you can easily check facts that are of crucial importance.
Less than a handful of big corporations dominate every aspect of our lives. That may seem exaggerated but from the breakfast we eat to the mattress we sleep on and everything we wear and consume in between is largely dependent on these corporations.
Those are huge investment companies that determine the course of money flow. They are the main characters of the play that we are witnessing. I know your time is valuable, so I summarize the most important data.
How does it work?
The Food Industry
Let’s take Pepsico as an example. It is the parent company of many soda companies and snack companies. The so-called competitive brands are from factories from a few corporations who monopolize the entire industry.
In the packaged food industry, there are a few big companies, like Unilever, the Coca-Cola Company, Mondelez and Nestlé.
In the picture, you see that most brands in the food industry belong to one of these corporations. The big companies are on the stock market and have the big shareholders in the board of directors.
On sources like Yahoo Finance, we can see detailed company info, such as who the biggest shareholders actually are. Let’s take Pepsico again, as an example.
We see about 72% of stock is owned by no less than 3,155 institutional investors. These are investment companies, investment funds, insurance companies, banks and in some cases, governments.
Who are the biggest institutional investors of Pepsico? As you can see, only 10 of the investors own together nearly one third of the stock.
The top 10 of investors together amount to a value of $59 billion dollars but out of those ten, only three own more stock than the other seven. Let’s remember them and look up who owns the most stocks of the Coca-Cola Company, the biggest competitor of Pepsi.
The biggest lump of stock is again owned by institutional investors. Let’s look at the top 10 and start at the bottom six of them. Four of these institutional investors we also saw at the bottom six of Pepsico.
These are Northern Trust, JPMorgan-Chase, Geode Capital Management and Wellington Management. Now, let’s look at the four biggest stock owners.
They are BlackRock, Vanguard and State Street. These are the world’s biggest investment firms, so Pepsico and Coca-Cola are not competitors, at all.
The other big companies that own a myriad of brand names, like Unilever, Mondelez and Nestlé are from the same small group of investors. But it’s not only in the food industry that their names come up. Let’s find out on Wikipedia, which are the biggest tech companies.
Facebook is the owner of Whatsapp and Instagram. Together with Twitter, they form the most popular social media platforms.
Alphabet is the parent of all Google companies, like YouTube and Gmail but they are also the biggest investor in Android, one of the two operating systems for nearly all smartphones and tablets.
The other operating system is Apple’s IOS. If we add Microsoft, we see four companies making the software for nearly all computers, tablets and smartphones in the world.
Let’s see who are the biggest shareholders of these companies. Take Facebook: we see that 80% of the stock is owned by institutional investors.
These are the same names that came up in the food industry; the same investors are in the top three. Next, is Twitter. It forms with Facebook and Instagram the top three.
Surprisingly, this company is in the hands of the same investors, as well. We see them again, with Apple and even with their biggest competitor, Microsoft.
Also, if we look at other big companies in the tech industry that develop and make our computers, TVs, phones and home appliances, we see the same big investors, that together own the majority of the stock.
It’s true for all industries. I’m not exaggerating.
The Travel Industry (And Energy & Mining)
One last example, let’s book a holiday on a computer or smartphone. We search for a flight to a sunny country on Skyscanner or Expedia.
Both are from the same small group of investors. We fly with one of the many airlines. Many of which are in the hands of the same investors and of governments, as is the case with Air France, KLM.
The plane we board is, in most cases a Boeing or an Airbus, also owned by the same names. We book through Booking.com or AirBnB and when we arrive we go out for dinner and place a comment on Tripadvisor.
The same big investors show up in every aspect of our trip and their power is even bigger, because of the kerosene is from their oil companies or refineries.
The steel from which the plane is made comes from their mining companies. This small group of investment firms and funds and banks are namely also the biggest investors in the industry that dig for raw materials.
Wikipedia shows that the biggest mining companies have the same big investors that we see everywhere.
Also, the big agricultural businesses, on which the entire food industry depends; they own Bayer, the parent company of Monsanto, the biggest seed producer in the world but they are also the shareholders of the big textile industry.
And even many popular fashion brands who make the clothing out of the cotton are owned by the same investors. Whether we look at the world’s biggest solar panel companies or oil refineries, the stocks are in the hands of the same companies.
They own the tobacco companies that produce all the popular tobacco brands but they also own all big pharmaceutical companies and the scientific institutions that produce medicine.
They own the companies that produce our metals and also the entire car, plane and weapons industry, where a great deal of the metals and raw materials are used.
They own the companies that build our electronics, they own the big warehouses and online markets and even the means of payments we use to buy their products.
To make this video as short as possible, I only showed you the tip of the iceberg.
If you decide to research this with the sources I just showed you, then you will see that most popular insurance companies, banks, construction companies, telephone companies restaurant chains and cosmetics are owned by the same institutional investors we have just seen.
Blackrock & Vanguard
These institutional investors are mainly investment firms banks and insurance companies. In turn, they, themselves are owned by shareholders and the most surprising thing is that they own each other’s stocks
Together, they form an immense network comparable to a pyramid. The smaller investors are owned by larger investors. Those are owned by even bigger investors.
The visible top of this pyramid shows only two companies whose names we have often seen by now. They are Vanguard and BlackRock.
The power of these two companies is beyond your imagination. Not only do they own a large part of the stocks of nearly all big companies but also the stocks of the investors in those companies. This gives them a complete monopoly.
A Bloomberg report states that both these companies in the year 2028, together will have investments in the amount of 20 trillion dollars. That means that they will own almost anything.
Bloomberg calls BlackRock “The fourth branch of government”, because it’s the only private agency that closely works with the central banks. BlackRock lends money to the central bank but it’s also the advisor.
It also develops the software the central bank uses. Many BlackRock employees were in the White House with Bush and Obama. Its CEO, Larry Fink can count on a warm welcome from leaders and politicians.
Not so strange, if you know that he is the front man of the ruling company. But Larry Fink does not pull the strings, himself.
BlackRock, itself is also owned by shareholders. Who are those shareholders? We come to a strange conclusion. The biggest shareholder is Vanguard. But now he gets murky.
Vanguard is a private company and we cannot see who the shareholders are. The elite who own Vanguard apparently do not like being in the spotlight but of course they cannot hide from who is willing to dig.
Reports from Oxfam and Bloomberg say that 1% of the world, together owns more money than the other 99%. Even worse, Oxfam says that 82% of all earned money in 2017 went to this 1%.
Insider Economist Reveals COVID-19 Cashless Society Takeover Plan
Alex Jones is joined by banking industry expert Catherine Austin Fitts, who explains how the aim of the global financial structure is to merge the worst aspects of crony capitalism with communism in a neo-feudalistic model of financial dictatorship.
Forbes, the most famous business magazine says that in March 2020, there were 2,095 billionaires in the world. This means that Vanguard is owned by the richest families in the world.
If we research their history, we see that they have always been the wealthiest. Some of them, even before the start of the Industrial Revolution, because their history is so interesting and extensive, I will make a sequel.
For now, I just want to say that these families of whom many are in royalty are the founders of our banking system and of every industry in the world, these families have never lost power but due to an increasing population, they had to hide behind firms, like Vanguard, which the stockholders are the private funds and non-profits of these families.
NGOs and Foundations and Their Ownership of Big Pharma
To clarify the picture, I have to explain briefly what non-profits actually are.
These appear to be the link between companies, politics and media. This conceals the conflicts of interests a bit.
Non-profits, also called “foundations” are dependent on donations they do not have to disclose who their donors are they can invest the money in the way they see fit and do not pay taxes as long as the profits are invested again in new projects.
In this way, non-profits keep hundreds of billions of dollars among themselves according to the Australian government, non-profits are an ideal way of financing terrorists and of massive money-laundering.
The foundations and funds of the families that are the richest stay in the background as much as possible. For issues that get much attention, the foundation of philanthropists are used that are lower in rank but very rich.
I want to keep it short, so I will show you the three most important ones that connect all industries in the world.
They are the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, the Open Society Foundation of the controversial multi-billionaire, Soros and the Clinton Foundation. I will give you a very short introduction to show you their power.
According to the website of the World Economic Forum, the Gates Foundation is the biggest sponsor of the WHO. That was after Donald Trump quit USA financial support to the WHO in 2020.
So the Gates Foundation is one of the most influential entities in everything that concerns our health. The Gates Foundation works closely with the biggest pharma companies, among which are Pfizer, AstraZeneca, Johnson & Johnson, Biontech and Bayer.
And we have just seen who their biggest shareholders are. Bill Gates was not a poor computer nerd who miraculously became very rich. He’s from a philanthropist’s family that works for the absolute elite.
His Microsoft is owned by Vanguard, BlackRock and Berkshire Hathaway. But the Gates Foundation, after BlackRock and Vanguard is the biggest shareholder in Berkshire Hathaway. He was even the member of the board there.
We would need hours if we wanted to uncover everything in which Gates, the Open Society Foundation of Soros and the Clinton Foundation are involved. They form a bridge to the current situation, so I had to introduce them.
We need to start the next topic with a question. Someone like me, who never makes videos can, with an old laptop objectively show that only two companies hold a monopoly in all industries in the world. My question is, why is this never talked about in the media?
We can choose daily between all sorts of documentaries and TV programs but none of them cover this subject.
Is it not interesting enough or are there other interests at play? Wikipedia, again gives us the answer. They say that about 90% of the international media is owned by nine media conglomerates.
Whether we take the monopolist Netflix and Amazon Prime or enormous concerns that own many daughter companies, like Time-Warner, the Walt Disney Company, Comcast, Fox Corporation, Bertelsmann and Viacom, CBS, we see that the same names own stocks.
These corporations not only make all the programs, movies and documentaries but also own the channels on which those are broadcast. So, not only the industries but also the information is owned by the elite.
I will show you briefly how this works in the Netherlands. To start with, all the Dutch mainstream media are owned by three companies. The first one is De PersGroep [DPG Media], the parent company of the following brands (Apart from the many newspapers and magazines, they also own Sanoma, the parent company of some of the big commercial Dutch channels. Many media outlets from abroad, like VTM are also owned by the De PersGroep.)
The second one is Mediahuis, one of Europe’s biggest media concerns. In the Netherlands, Mediahuis owns the following brands. Until 2017, also Sky Radio and Radio Veronica were owned by Mediahuis, as were Radio 538 and radio 10.
And then there is Bertelsmann, which is one of the 9 biggest media firms. This company owns RTL, that owns 45 television stations and 32 radio stations in 11 countries. But Bertelsmann is also co-owner of the world’s biggest book publisher, Penguin Random House.
The stocks of these companies are owned by private funds of three families. Those are the Belgian Van Thillo family, the Belgian Leysen family and the German Bertelsmann-Mohn family. All three families sided with the Nazis in the War.
According to Wikipedia, for this reason, the Telegraaf, the Leysen newspaper was temporarily forbidden in the Netherlands after the war.
To complete this overview, look at where the news comes from. The daily news of all these media outlets the diverse news media do not produce news. They use information and footage from the press agencies, APN and Reuters.
These agencies are not independent. APN is owned by Talpa, John de Mol. Thomson-Reuters is owned by the powerful Canadian Thomson family.
The most important journalists and editors working for these agencies are members of a journalism agency, like the European Journalism Centre.
These are one of the biggest European sponsors of media-related projects. They educatejournalists, publish study books, provide training spaces and press agencies and work closely together with the big corporations, Google and Facebook.
For journalistic analysis and views, the big media use Project Syndicate. This is the most powerful organization in the field. Project Syndicate and organizations like I mentioned are together with the press agencies.
The link between all worldwide media outlets when news anchors reap from their autocues [teleprompters], chances are that the text stems from one of these organizations. That is the reason that worldwide media shows synchronicity in their reporting.
And look at the European journalism center, itself. Again, the Gates Foundation and the Open Society Foundation. They are also heavily-sponsored by Facebook, Google, the Ministry of Education and Science and the Ministry of Foreign Affairs.
The organizations that bring the news get paid by non-profit organizations, of the same elite that also owns the entire media but also a part of taxpayers money is used to pay them.
In Belgium, there are protests regularly, since Mediahuis and De Persgroep receive millions of euros from the government, while many are abroad…
The Danger We Are in Now
Well, this was a lot to chew on and I tried to make it as short as I could. I only used examples that I thought were necessary to create a clear overview. This helps to better understand our current situation, that can shed new light on past events
There will be enough time to dive into the past, but now let’s talk about today but my goal is to inform you about the danger we are in now.
The elite governs every aspect of our lives, also, the information we get and they depend on a coordination, cooperation to connect all industries in the world to serve their interests. This is done through the World Economic Forum, among others, a very important organization.
Every year in Davos, the CEOs of big corporations meet national leaders, politicians and other influential parties, like UNICEF and Greenpeace.
On the supervisory board of the WEF is former Vice President, Al Gore, our own minister, Sigrid Kaag, Feike Sijbesma, Chairman of the Royal Dutch State Mines and the Commissioner of the Dutch bank, Christine Lagarde, the Chairwoman of the European Central Bank. Also, politician, Ferdinand Grapperhaus’ son works for the WEF.
Wikipedia says that the annual fee for members is 35,000 euros “but over half of our budget comes from partners who pay the cost for politicians who otherwise could not afford membership.”
According to critics, the WEF is for rich businesses to do business with other businesses or with politicians. For most members, the WEF would support personal gain instead of being a means to solve the world’s problems.
Why would there be many world problems if the industry leaders, bankers and politicians from 1971 onwards have gathered every year to solve the world’s problems?
Isn’t it illogical, that after 50 years of meetings between environmentalists and the CEOs of the most polluting companies, nature is gradually doing worse, not better; that those critics are right, it’s clear, when we look at the main partners that together make up more than half of the budget of the WEF.
Because these are BlackRock, the Open Society foundation, the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation and many big companies, from which Vanguard and BlackRock own the stocks.
Chairman and founder of the WEF is Klaus Schwab, a Swiss professor and businessman. In his book, The Great Reset, he writes about the plans of his organization.
The coronavirus is, according to him a great “opportunity” to reset our societies. He calls it “Build Back Better”. The slogan is now on the lips of all Globalist politicians in the world.
Our old society must switch to a new one, says Schwab. The people own nothing but work for the state to have their primary needs met. The WEF says it’s necessary for the consumption society the elite forced upon us is not sustainable anymore.
Schwab says in his book that we will never return to the old normal and the WEF published a video recently to make clear that by 2030, we will own nothing but we will be happy.
You probably heard of the New World Order. The media wants us to believe that this is a conspiracy theory, yet it has been talked about by leaders for decades.
The UN presented in 2015 their controversial Agenda 2030. It is almost identical to the Great Reset of Klaus Schwab. The UN wants to make sure, as does Schwab that in 2030, poverty, hunger, pollution and disease no longer plague the Earth.
Sounds nice but wait till you read the small print. The plan is that Agenda 2030 will be paid by us, the citizens. Just like they ask of us now to give away our rights for public health, they will ask us to give away our wealth to battle poverty.
These are no conspiracy theories. It is on their official website. It comes down to this: The UN wants taxes from Western countries to be split by the mega corporations of the elite to create a brand new society.
The new infrastructure, because fossil fuels are gone in 2030.
For this project, the UN says we need a world government, namely the UN, itself.
The UN agrees with Schwab that a pandemic is a golden chance to accelerate the implementation of Agenda 2030.
It is worrisome that the WEF and the UN openly admit that pandemics and other catastrophes can be used to reshape society. We must not think lightly about this and do thorough research.
If You Limit ANY Free Speech, This Is What You Get December 13 2025 | From: ActivistPost / Various
The law originally targeted the KKK. Now it has been used to arrest people protesting against white supremacists. And that is why free speech is so important.
Plenty of people would love to see new laws to stop white supremacists from exercising their–albeit offensive–free speech.
"Faced with hundreds of demonstrators rallying against a crowd of neo-Nazis in Newnan, local and state authorities turned to a little-known Georgia law adopted in 1951 to combat the Ku Klux Klan.
The law, which makes it illegal to wear a mask at most public events, was cited in several of the arrests of counterdemonstrators who joined a protest Saturday against white supremacists.
And the irony was not lost upon the organizers of the counterdemonstration, who were fuming Sunday that a law aimed at weakening white supremacists was used to arrest protesters who opposed a neo-Nazi rally.”
There are so many problems with this law. Why are masks not protected forms of expression? What about hats, hoods, and sunglasses? At what point do those fit the definition of a mask?
Have you ever threatened to shoot someone with a rifle because they had a mask on? Me neither. Police are a different breed.
"A video posted on social media by freelance journalist Daniel Shular appeared to show authorities scuffling with counterdemonstrators. Authorities demanded that the counterprotesters remove their masks, and the footage showed an officer raising his rifle at demonstrators.”
This is another good reminder that police will enforce any law handed down on high from politicians - even dead politicians who passed the law in 1951. The only actual violence at the rally was committed by police, in the name of the law.
But free speech, the very First Amendment in the blueprint for this country’s government, is not so important to law enforcement.
Police have no problem throwing people to the ground, handcuffing them, using pepper spray, billy clubs, and aiming deadly weapons at peaceful protesters because they wear a piece of cloth obscuring their faces.
And any other anti-free speech laws will be enforced with equal vigor.
Hate speech. Offensive displays. Fake news. Laws aimed at combating these will absolutely limit free speech. Maybe, maybe, at first they will only be used against the neo-Nazis and the white supremacists, just like this anti-mask law was at first only used against the KKK.
But it is only a matter of time until innocent people find themselves in the crosshairs of these freedom crushing laws.
"State law bans the wearing of masks, hoods or other devices that conceal a person’s identity if they’re on public property or on private property where the owner has not consented. It includes exceptions for holidays, theatrical productions, civil emergencies and sporting events.
The laws have been adopted by about a dozen states, most aimed at weakening the KKK in the middle of the 20th century. The Georgia Supreme Court in 1990 upheld the state’s ban after a Klansman donned a hood on the Lawrenceville Square, citing his First Amendment rights."
This is just one of many laws in the arsenal of the police state. There are enough laws that you can be arrested for basically anything. It gives an official appearance to entirely arbitrary policing. You can be arrested on any officer’s whim, and then he will be able to find an excuse.
Other counter-protesters were arrested for “resisting arrest,” a classic joke of a charge. How can you be charged with only resisting arrest? It means there was no reason for them to be arresting you, and only once they illegally tried to arrest you did you commit a crime.
A blot of ink on a 70-year-old piece of paper would not protect these cops from charges that they threw people to the ground without provocation, that they chained and kidnapped people, that they aimed loaded guns at people who had done nothing aggressive or threatening.
Make no mistake, ANY anti-free speech law will be used against innocent, non-violent, peaceful people. And the Western police states will enforce those laws on its victims with glee.
The Crown Of England Is Owned And Operated By The Vatican December 12 2025 | From: OmniThought / Various
The Vatican is one of the most powerful corporations in the world. It is powerful because it controls the Crown of England and nearly every church in the world, especially Catholic churches.
Furthermore, the Vatican operates under Roman law and controls most of the Western courts and some Eastern courts.
In the USA today, nearly every U.S. court is controlled by the Crown Temple, a corporation controlled by the Vatican. This is why there is always a Crown agent in the courtroom during a trial. Any country that has Crown agents running its legal system is controlled by the Vatican / Rome to a large degree.
This means that the United States, Canada, United Kingdom, Australia, New Zealand, and “countries” that are operating under the Western legal system are all Roman “colonies”.
The Vatican is a religious corporation run by religious leaders who are loyal to the Roman Empire. In other words, Rome still rules the world! It rules the world through the Crown of England, the Roman Catholic Church and the Vatican.
They did not call it the ROMAN Catholic Church for no reason. It is right in your face and hidden in plain sight!
According to an article published by BBC.com, there are an estimated 1.2 billion Roman Catholics in the world. This means that the Vatican/Rome has about 1.2 billion “citizens”, or more accurately slaves.
Because nearly every Christian church is controlled by the Vatican to a certain degree, the Vatican/Rome has more than 1.2 billion slaves to exploit and sell. Do you innerstand now why Rome still rules the world?
The Crown is Owned and Operated by the Roman Cult, and Has Been Since 1213
The Definitive Treaty of Peace of 1783 says that King George was the Arch Treasurer and Prince Elector of the Holy Roman Empire and the United States of America.
This video goes through how the Roman Cult orchestrated the slave trade, then the War of Independence, then the War of 1812, then the Civil War, then WW1, WW2, and now they are building up to WW3 [which will not take place].
All warfare is commerce, and all commerce is warfare. All fictitious entities operate under Roman Law.
How Greece Became A Guinea Pig For A Cashless And Controlled Society December 11 2025 | From: MintPressNews / Various
As Greece moves closer to becoming a cashless society, it is clear that the country’s attitude towards cash is reckless and dangerous. The supposed convenience of switching to a cash-free system comes with a great deal of risk, including needless overreach by the state.
Day by day, we’re moving towards a brave new world where every transaction is tracked, every purchase is recorded, the habits and preferences of everyone noted and analyzed. What I am describing is the “cashless society,” where plastic and electronic money are king, while banknotes and coins are abolished.
“Progress” is, after all, deemed to be a great thing. In a recent discussion, I observed on an online message board regarding gentrification in my former neighborhood of residence in Queens, New York, the closure of yet another longtime local business was met by one user with a virtual shrug: “Who needs stores when you have Amazon?”
This last quote is, of course, indicative of the brick-and-mortar store, at least in its familiar form. In December 2016, Amazon launched a checkout-free convenience store in Seattle - largely free of employees, but also free of cash transactions, as purchases are automatically charged to one’s Amazon account.
“Progress” is therefore cast as the abolition of currency, and the elimination of even more jobs, all in the name of technological progress and the “convenience” of saving a few minutes of waiting at the checkout counter.
Still insist on being old-fashioned and stuck behind the times, preferring to visit brick-and-mortar stores and paying in cash? You may very well be a terrorist! Pay for your coffee or your visit to an internet cafe with cash?
Potential terrorist, according to the FBI. Indeed, insisting on paying with cash is, according to the United States Department of Homeland Security, “suspicious and weird.”
The European Union, ever a force for positive change and progress, also seems to agree. The non-elected European Commission’s “Inception Impact Assessment” warns that the anonymity of cash transactions facilitates “money laundering” and “terrorist financing activities.”
This point of view is shared by such economists as the thoroughly discredited proponent of austerity Kenneth Rogoff, Lawrence Summer (a famed deregulator, as well as eulogizer of the “godfather” of austerity Milton Friedman), and supposed anti-austerity crusader Joseph Stiglitz, who told fawning participants at the World Economic Forum in Davos earlier this year that the United States should do away with all currency.
Logically, of course, the next step is to punish law-abiding citizens for the actions of a very small criminal population and for the failures of law enforcement to curb such activities. The EU plans to accomplish this through the exploration of upper limits on cash payments, while it has already taken the step of abolishing the 500-euro banknote.
The International Monetary Fund (IMF), which day after day is busy “saving” economically suffering countries such as Greece, also happens to agree with this brave new worldview. In a working paper titled “The Macroeconomics of De-Cashing,” which the IMF claims does not necessarily represent its official views, the fund nevertheless provides a blueprint with which governments around the world could begin to phase out cash.
This process would commence with “initial and largely uncontested steps” (such as the phasing out of large-denomination bills or the placement of upper limits on cash transactions). This process would then be furthered largely by the private sector, providing cashless payment options for people’s “convenience,” rather than risk popular objections to policy-led decashing.
The IMF, which certainly has a sterling track record of sticking up for the poor and vulnerable in society, comforts us by saying that these policies should be implemented in ways that would augment “economic and social benefits.”
The IMF’s Greek Experiment in Austerity
These suggestions, which of course the IMF does not necessarily officially agree with, have already begun to be implemented to a significant extent in the IMF debt colony known officially as Greece, where the IMF has been implementing “socially fair and just” austerity policies since 2010, which have resulted, during this period, in a GDP decline of over 25 percent, unemployment levels exceeding 28 percent, repeated cuts to what are now poverty-level salaries and pensions, and a “brain drain” of over 500,000 people - largely young and university-educated - migrating out of Greece.
Protesters against new austerity measures hold a placard depicting Labour Minister George Katrougalos as the movie character Edward Scissorhands during a protest outside Zappeion Hall in Athens, Friday, Sept. 16, 2016. The placard reads in Greek”Katrougalos Scissorhands”
Indeed, it could be said that Greece is being used as a guinea pig not just for a grand neoliberal experiment in both austerity, but de-cashing as well. The examples are many, and they have found fertile ground in a country whose populace remains shell-shocked by eight years of economic depression.
A new law that came into effect on January 1 incentivizes going cashless by setting a minimum threshold of spending at least 10 percent of one’s income via credit, debit, or prepaid card in order to attain a somewhat higher tax-free threshold.
Beginning July 27, dozens of categories of businesses in Greece will be required to install aptly-acronymized “POS” (point-of-sale) card readers and to accept payments by card. Businesses are also required to post a notice, typically by the entrance or point of sale, stating whether card payments are accepted or not.
Another new piece of legislation, in effect as of June 1, requires salaries to be paid via direct electronic transfers to bank accounts. Furthermore, cash transactions of over 500 euros have been outlawed.
In Greece, where in the eyes of the state citizens are guilty even if proven innocent, capital controls have been implemented preventing ATM cash withdrawals of over 840 euros every two weeks. These capital controls, in varying forms, have been in place for two years with no end in sight, choking small businesses that are already suffering.
Citizens have, at various times, been asked to collect every last receipt of their expenditures, in order to prove their income and expenses - otherwise, tax evasion is assumed, just as ownership of a car (even if purchased a decade or two ago) or an apartment (even if inherited) is considered proof of wealth and a “hidden income” that is not being declared.
The “heroic” former Finance Minister Yanis Varoufakis had previously proposed a cap of cash transactions at 50 or 70 euros on Greek islands that are popular tourist destinations, while also putting forth an asinine plan to hire tourists to work as “tax snitches,” reporting businesses that “evade taxes” by not providing receipts even for the smallest transactions.
All of these measures, of course, are for the Greeks’ own good and are in the best interest of the country and its economy, combating supposedly rampant “tax evasion” (while letting the biggest tax evaders off the hook), fighting the “black market” (over selling cheese pies without issuing a receipt, apparently), and of course, nipping “terrorism” in the bud.
As with the previous discussion I observed about Amazon being a satisfactory replacement for the endangered brick-and-mortar business, one learns a lot from observing everyday conversations amongst ordinary citizens. A recent conversation I personally overheard while paying a bill at a public utility revealed just how successful the initial and largely uncontested steps enacted in Greece have been.
In the line ahead of me, an elderly man announced that he was paying his water bill by debit card, “in order to build towards the tax-free threshold.”
When it was suggested to him that the true purpose of encouraging cashless payments was to track every transaction, even for a stick of gum, and to transfer all money into the banking system, he and one other elderly gentleman threw a fit, claiming “there is no other way to combat tax evasion.”
The irony that they were paying by card to avoid taxation themselves was lost on them—as is the fact that the otherwise fiscally responsible Germany, whose government never misses an opportunity to lecture the “spendthrift” and “irresponsible” Greeks, has the largest black market in Europe (exceeding 100 billion euros annually), ranks first in Europe in financial fraud, is the eighth-largest tax haven worldwide, and one of the top tax-evading countries in Europe.
Also lost on these otherwise elderly gentlemen was a fact not included in the official propaganda campaign: Germans happen to love their cash, as evidenced by the fierce opposition that met a government plan to outlaw cash payments of 5,000 euros or more.
In addition, about 80 percent of transactions in Germany are still conducted in cash. The German tabloid Bild went as far as to publish an op-ed titled “Hands off our cash” in response to the proposed measure.
Global Powers Jumping on Cashless Bandwagon
Nevertheless, a host of other countries across Europe and worldwide have shunned Germany’s example, instead siding with the IMF and Stiglitz. India, one of the most cash-reliant countries on earth, recently eliminated 86 percent of its currency practically overnight, with the claimed goal, of course, of targeting terrorism and the “black market.”
Indians stand in line to deposit discontinued notes in a bank in Jammu and Kashmir, India,, Dec. 30, 2016. India yanked most of its currency bills from circulation without warning on Nov. 8, delivering a jolt to the country’s high-performing economy and leaving countless citizens scrambling for cash. (AP/Channi Anand)
Iceland, a country that stands as an admirable example of standing up to the IMF-global banking cartel in terms of its response to the country’s financial meltdown of 2008, nevertheless has long embraced cashlessness.
Practically all transactions, even the most minute, are conducted electronically, while “progressive” tourists extol the benefits of not being inconvenienced by the many seconds it would take to withdraw funds from an ATM or exchange currency upon arrival.
Oddly enough, Iceland was already largely cashless prior to its financial collapse in 2008 - proving that this move towards “progress” did nothing to prevent an economic meltdown or to stop its perpetrators: the very same banks being entrusted with nearly all of the money supply.
Other examples of cashlessness abound in Europe. Cash transactions in Sweden represent just 3 percent of the national economy, and most banks no longer hold banknotes. Similarly, many Norwegian banks no longer issue cash, while the country’s largest bank, DNB, has called upon the public to cease using cash. Denmark has announced a goal of eliminating banknotes by 2030.
Belgium has introduced a 3,000-euro limit on cash transactions and 93 percent of transactions are cashless. In France, the respective percentage is 92 percent, and cash transactions have been limited to 1,000 euros, just as in Spain.
Outside of Europe, cash is being eliminated even in countries such as Somalia and Kenya, while South Korea - itself no stranger to IMF intervention in its economy - has, similarly to Greece, implemented preferential tax policies for consumers who make payments using cards.
Aside from policy changes, practical everyday examples also exist in abundance. Just try to purchase an airline ticket with cash, for instance. It remains possible - but is also said to raise red flags. In many cases, renting an automobile or booking a hotel room with cash is simply not possible.
The aforementioned Department of Homeland Security manual considers any payment with cash to be “suspicious behavior” - as one clearly has something to hide if they do not wish to be tracked via electronic payment methods. Ownership of gold makes the list of suspicious activities as well.
Just as the irony of Germany being a largely cash-based society while pushing cashless policies in its Greek protectorate is lost on many Greeks, what is lost on seemingly almost everyone is this: something that is new doesn’t necessarily represent progress, nor does something different.
Something that is seemingly easier, or more convenient, is not necessarily progress either. But for many, “technological progress,” just like “scientific innovation” in all its forms and without exception, has attained an aura of infallibility, revered with religious-like fervor.
People queue in front of a bank for an ATM as a man lies on the ground begging for change, in Athens. (AP/Thanassis Stavrakis)
Combating purported tax evasion is also treated with a religious-like fervor, even while ordinary citizens - such as the two aforementioned gentlemen in Greece - typically seek to minimize their outlays to the tax offices.
Moreover, while such measures essentially enact a collective punishment regardless of guilt or innocence, corporations and oligarchs who utilize tax loopholes and offshore havens go unpunished and are wholly unaffected by a switch to a cashless economy in the supposed battle against tax evasion.
This is evident, for instance, in the case of “LuxLeaks,” which revealed the names of dozens of corporations benefiting from favorable tax rulings and tax avoidance schemes in Luxembourg, one of the original founding members of the EU.
European Commission President Jean-Claude Juncker, formerly the prime minister of Luxembourg, has faced repeated accusations of impeding EU investigations into corporate tax avoidance scandals during his 18-year term as prime minister. Juncker has defended Luxembourg’s tax arrangements as legal.
He has not hesitated to unabashedly intervene in Greek electoral contests, calling on Greeks to avoid the “wrong outcome” in the January 2015 elections (where the supposedly anti-austerity SYRIZA, which has since proven to be boldly pro-austerity, were elected).
He also urged the Greek electorate to vote “yes” (in favor of more EU-proposed austerity) in the July 2015 referendum - where the overwhelming result in favor of “no” was itself overturned by SYRIZA within a matter of days. In the European Union today, if there’s something that can be counted on, it’s the blatant hypocrisy of its leaders.
Nevertheless, proving that old habits of collaborationism die hard in Greece, the rector of the law school of the state-owned Aristotle University in Thessaloniki awarded Juncker with an honorary doctorate for his contribution to European political and legal values.
Cashless Policies Bode Poorly for the Future
Where does all this lead though? What does a cashless economy actually mean and why are global elites pushing so fervently for it?
Consider the following: in a cashless economy without coins or banknotes, every transaction is tracked. Buying and spending habits are monitored, and it is not unheard of for credit card companies to cancel an individual’s credit or to lower their credit rating based on real or perceived risks ranging from shopping at discount stores to purchasing alcoholic beverages. Indeed, this is understood to be common practice.
Other players are entering the game too: in late May, Google announced plans to track credit and debit card transactions.
Claudia Lombana, PayPal’s shopping specialist, stamps a guest’s passport as he visits the travel section of PayPal’s Cashless Utopia in New York (Victoria Will/AP)
More to the point though, a cashless economy doesn’t just mean that financial institutions, large corporations, or the state itself can monitor all transactions that are occurring. It also means that the entirety of the money supply - itself now existing only in “virtual” form - will belong to the banking system.
Not one cent will exist outside of the banking system, as physical currency will simply not be in circulation. The banking system - and others - will be aware not just of every transaction, but will be in possession of all of our society’s money supply, and will even have the ability to receive a percentage of every transaction that is taking place.
So what happens if your spending habits or your choice of travel destinations raises “red flags”? What happens if you run into hard times economically and miss a few payments? What happens if you are deemed to be a political dissident or liability – perhaps an “enemy of the state”?
Freezing a bank account or confiscating funds from accounts can take place almost instantaneously. Users of eBay and PayPal, for instance, are quite aware of the ease with which PayPal can confiscate funds from a user’s account based simply on a claim filed against that individual.
Simply forgetting one’s password to an online account can set off an aggravating flurry of calls in order to prove that your money is your own - and that’s without considering the risks of phishing and of online databases being compromised.
Many responsible credit card holders found that their credit cards were suddenly canceled in the aftermath of the “Great Recession” simply due to perceived risk. And if you happen to be an individual deemed to be “dangerous,” you can be effectively and easily frozen out of the economy.
Those thinking that the “cashless revolution” will also herald the return of old-style bartering and other communal economic schemes might also wish to reconsider that line of thinking. In the United States, for instance, bartering transactions are considered taxable by the Internal Revenue Service.
As more and more economic activity of all sorts takes place online, the tax collector will have an easier time detecting such activity. Thinking of teaching your child to be responsible with finances? That too will have a cost, as even lemonade stands have been targeted for “operating without a permit.” It’s not far-fetched to imagine that particularly overzealous government authorities could also target such activity for “tax evasion.”
In Greece, while oligarchs get to shift their money to offshore tax havens without repercussion and former Finance Minister Gikas Hardouvelis has been acquitted for failure to submit a declaration of assets, where major television and radio stations operate with impunity without a valid license while no new players can enter the marketplace and where ordinary households and small businesses are literally being taxed to death, police in August 2016 arrested a father of three with an unemployed spouse for selling donuts without a license and fined him 5,000 euros. In another incident, an elderly man selling roasted chestnuts in Thessaloniki was surrounded by 15 police officers and arrested for operating without a license.
Amidst this blatant hypocrisy, governments and financial institutions love electronic money for another reason, aside from the sheer control that it affords them.
But ultimately, the elephant in the room is whether the banking system even should be entrusted with the entirety of the monetary supply. The past decade has seen the financial collapse of 2008, the crumbling of financial institutions such as Lehman Brothers in the United States and a continent-wide banking crisis in Europe, which was the true objective behind the “bailouts” of countries such as Greece - saving European and American banks exposed to “toxic” bonds from these nations.
Italy’s banking system is currently teetering on dangerous ground, while the Greek banking system, already recapitalized three times since the onset of the country’s economic crisis, may need yet another taxpayer-funded recapitalization. Even the virtual elimination of cash in Iceland did not prevent the country’s banking meltdown in 2008.
Should we entrust the entirety of the money supply to these institutions? What happens if the banking system experiences another systemic failure? Who do you trust more: yourself or institutions that have proven to be wholly irresponsible and unaccountable in their actions?
The answer to that question should help guide the debate as to whether society should go cashless.
The Monetary System Is Collapsing: The Most Insidious Form Of Theft December 10 2025 | From: FinalWakeupCall / Various
Lack of logical foundation: President Richard M. Nixon announced on August 15, 1971, that the U.S. would no longer officially exchange dollars for gold and many are still referring to that decision as one of the biggest mistakes ever.
Nixon, for one, thought gold-price stability was bogus. It has since become clear why he went off the gold standard.
A good controlling factor over the monetary system would be the price of gold. The implications; conduct monetary and fiscal policy such that the gold markets are content to sit tight, and marvel at the economic results. Do otherwise, and the ordeal of the 1970s will be repeated today.
Rarely in the history of political economy have choices been so stark, so obvious. One wonders whether it is being done on purpose. Which as we know is actually the truth.
The USD has no logical foundation behind it with regards to any sustainable value due to a lack of hard asset collateral. It’s just air! That means all people’s money, in their checking, savings, investment and retirement accounts is simply not real! And since 1971 never has been!
When the new gold backed USN is forced into play, money will obtain real value, and matters are going to change very fast. This dramatic event for change will start happening sooner than anyone realises, while the great illusion of western dominance will end.
Three quarters of a century of military dominance will be gone in the blink of an eye. No more grace periods to extend. No more meetings to renegotiate treaties and implement international bankruptcy rulings.
It is clear, that the new global financial system has evolved to a higher standard. It will prevent many forms of fraud and allow for unrestricted movement of funds from place to place as needed, instead of delays or freezes or holds due to compliance issues.
Unimpeded movement of funds is important to the wellbeing of society. The timely arrival of funds according to budgetary needs is critical to the survival of businesses.
Today’s end of the line situation is far grimmer than anyone is being told. Only the implementation of RV followed by GESARA will deliver the fiscal remedy for folks who must now live in this new reality. By the way, only Americans enjoyed the continuing endless supply of currency being forced upon them by the holders of all global debt, known as The Chinese Elders.
The Weakness of Paper Money:
Precisely this non-backing of currency is the inherent weakness of “paper money” – governments have the power to declare paper to be “legal tender” – but they do not have the power to give that money value. This is something that no one, especially not politicians will tell you.
All Central Banks should be abolished.
The average citizen doesn’t have a clue how dangerous and corrupt the Central Banking System and their governments really are. Please read here how we the people can help to abolish all Central Banks.
The world over, governments have embarked on an out-of-control experiment with debt money, that they could alternatively have issued as ‘debt-free-money’, without interest. –In today’s world, credit money is printed in absurd quantities out of thin air, and so much of it is borrowed that it can never ever be paid back in full to the creditors.
It took the USA “216 years to rack up $8.5 trillion in debt… and then just 8 more years to double that amount.” – Governments won’t be able to do a single thing about this crisis, as they themselves have knowingly created it!
When governments tap out their ability to increase their tax revenue and their debts become too mountainous to maintain; they have one last way they can take what they need, and it is the most insidious. They can print the currency they need to pay for whatever they want.
The Most Insidious Form of Theft
The Central Banks’ balance sheet – which represents the total amount of currency in circulation or in central bank’s reserves – has the USD blown up from $1.1 trillion in 2008 to nearly $4 trillion in 2017.
Not many people understand the misconception of these actions or their inevitable failure. The great advantage of paper money is purportedly its flexibility.
They can, in theory, print more of it when they need it to facilitate economic growth or forestall a crisis. But that doesn’t really work. Printing money doesn’t create wealth or stimulatethe economy. Instead, it simply makes each unit in circulation less valuable and leads to higher prices, a monetary phenomenon that is called inflation.
It is an insidious form of stealing. People feel wealthier as the numbers on their pay checks and bank balances rise. As nominal stock prices rise, people feel as though things are going well. But they don’t notice the value of each unit is eroding steadily.
Worse still, it provides incentives for going into debt. People who borrow today will repay those obligations in the future with units that are worth much less.
Inflation has been so prevalent for so long, most people don’t even know it’s not part of a normal economic system. Data on consumer prices from 1596-1971 in Great Britain prove that during gold-standard periods, commodity prices remain stable – even over hundreds of years – during periods of massive economic growth and soaring populations.
The most important test of paper money is whether it facilitates real, per-capita economic growth. And on that score, the evidence is overwhelmingly negative. When money is sound and reliable, it doesn’t lose value over time.
The Name of the Game is the ‘Race to Debase’ Purchasing Power
Today’s monetary system, however, isn’t sound or reliable. Politicians fool around with the money supply constantly. Sometimes, they increase the amount of money by huge amounts in response to demands from powerful groups, especially banks.
As a result, the products you need to live a regular life – like gasoline, milk, housing, and medical care – constantly increase in price. And these prices go up, year after year, even when wages don’t.
Paper money works great for the rich, who can hedge their exposure to the currency and whose access to fixed-rate credit allows huge asset purchases. But it is horrible for the middle class.
When the US-dollar as the reserve currency was taken off gold, it allowed the central banks to continuously debase their currency, while the wages paid in the same currency no longer kept pace with inflation.
Any reasonable study of paper-money systems versus gold-backed monetary systems demonstrates the superiority of gold straightaway. So, why does almost every modern government choose paper?
The answer is because paper money allows the wealthy and powerful vested interests in the economy to manipulate interest rates, prices, the money supply, and credit to their exclusive advantage.
Today’s monetary system dooms every average worker to poverty and almost guarantees that the rich and powerful will become richer. And it is this massive gap that is ultimately fuelling the problems the world faces today.
The Problem with Paper Assets
Wealth is either physical, by for example owning a big house or a Rembrandt painting, or it is paper wealth.
All paper assets are a claim against tangible goods and services. No more goods and services can be obtained than the economy can produce. Since the economy of 2008-13 produced only a fraction as much real wealth as the claims against it, those claims will have to be applied to future output.
The Debt
The IMF has just reported that total global debt is now at a staggering $164 trillion, which amounts to 225% of total global GDP. Every person on this planet could turn over everything they produce for the next two to three years and the world will still be in debt.
The number is so astronomically high that it is impossible to pay off, and so there really is no point in even trying. In fact, governments are not at all concerned with paying off the debt because they know the number has lost it’s meaning in the face of such cartoonish proportions.
Currency is created by private institutions who create as much money as banks and governments desire. This money is created out of thin air, literally by punching a few keys on a computer keyboard and sending tiny currents of electricity to a screen which displays whatever number the private corporation wants.
It is not backed by anything of value, yet these private institutions charge interest to governments and private sector borrowers.
For every unit created and loaned, the magical money-lenders demand that unit back with interest. Since the lender is demanding more than was created, it is mathematically impossible to ever pay off debt, because the currency units to pay for interest simply don’t exist.
The modern-day debt system maintains a tragic if not dramatic tension in the world, and on a planet with such abundant resources, you have to wonder with a global debt number so high, do people of the planet owe money to each other, or are they really in debt to some type of institution?
It definitely does not make sense for the human race to enslave itself with such an insane system. Theoretically the debt is owed to the central banks that created the units out of nothing. So actually there is no debt owed to anybody!
Corruption of Debt
The only way the government can give away something is by first taking it from someone else. This is critical. The governments are taking what they want, and this is exactly what has created today’s crisis.
Taxes are the most obvious way governments take for redistribution. But governments are now reaching the limits of what they can generate from new or higher taxes. When governments realise they can’t take any more from you through taxes, they use debt instruments to take from your children and grandchildren.
Governments have taken advantage of that option to a historic degree; the U.S. and EU government owe more than $20 trillion each. The number is so large, it’s meaningless. No one can comprehend how much money $20 trillion really is. A better way to think about it is to say; each taxpayer owes roughly $175,000. That’s like a whole additional mortgage for most people.
This massive amount of national debt cannot be financed at any real rate of interest. If governments have to pay even 6% interest on their debt, it would cost roughly $1.2 trillion a year. And that’s just to pay the interest on the debt. The entire government brings in about $3.3 trillion a year in taxes.
This debt addiction has filtered into four critical areas of the economy. Instead of learning from the mistakes that crippled the economy in 2008 when the mortgage bubble burst, they have created three new bubbles that could soon blow up.
1.
The largest threat is the corporate bond market, particularly junk bonds.
Over the past 10 years, students, most of whom have virtually no income, have racked up enormous debts. As of 2017, student debt totals more than $1.5 trillion, the second-largest source of household debt after home mortgages.
All the signs show that the debt piled on our youth will become another catastrophic bubble in the western economy.
Most people have no idea how pervasive subprime loans have become in auto lending. Over 90% of cars sold are financed by loans of leases.
4.
The housing bubble trouble
The housing bubble is going to repeat itself with even more unsold and unfinished houses. Spain in 2008 was stuck throughout the country with over 3,5 million unsold houses. That number is set to grow again as about half of the houses ‘sold’ were bought by speculators that cannot resell. So, expect more new and unfinished properties in this upcoming crash, than ten years ago.
How is this substantiated? It’s simple. Historically, “junk” bonds – aka high-yield bonds issued by less-creditworthy companies – have never yielded less than 5% annually. But they hit that low in mid-2014, and today, they’re not much higher than that.
Likewise, in 2014, the difference between the yields on junk bonds and the yields on investment-grade bonds had almost never been lower. That means credit was more available than almost ever before for small, less-than-investment-grade companies. The last time credit was that widely available – and at such low costs – was in 2007. And that ended badly.
Throughout 2015, the spread between low-quality corporate bonds and high-quality corporate bonds began rising. That indicated a growing fear in the market as people reduced the amount of risk in their portfolios and shifted to higher-quality and higher-rated assets.
During the first half of 2016, the high-yield spread began declining. It’s now close to the post-crisis lows of 2014, indicating complacency in the high-yield debt market. But it won’t last. It never does.
Most investors don’t know anything about the Central Banks quietly reversing course. They have started draining the system of reserves. In October 2017, they began to “run off” their balance sheet by about $13 billion a month.
That is, as the bonds they hold mature, these assets won’t “roll” into new securities. And so, for the last seven months, their balance sheets have shrunk by $10 billion a month in bond securities and $3 billion a month in mortgage securities.
It took the speculative bubble a long time to reach negative interest rates on junk bonds. It likewise will take a shorter time for this to fundamentally change the financial markets, hurting sentiment and securities prices. But make no mistake, the tide is going out. And the tide is going to get more powerful as it moves on.
The coming collapse in the bond market also will be far worse than it was last time. The Federal Reserve’s twin policies of keeping interest rates near zero and buying tens of billions of dollars in Treasury securities and mortgage-backed debt have driven the huge bull market in bonds and properties.
As the Central Banks buy bonds, they push bond rates down and force the other buyers of bonds to buy riskier debt that historically offers much higher yields.
The Real Panic in the Corporate Bond Market Could Arrive Soon
Expect the average price of non-investment debt – junk bonds – to fall by 50%. Investment-grade bonds will fall substantially too, by an estimated 25%. This is going to wipe out a huge amount of capital, which is almost 100% guaranteed to happen.
Junk-bond guru Martin Fridson has projected $1.6 trillion of bonds and loans will default. That means three times as many debt issuers will default than in the last recession.
This would have happened already, according to Fridson, but the government has kept interest rates artificially low, making it possible for many at-risk debt-issuers to refinance their debt at a lower interest rate. This delayed an inevitable wave of defaults in the junk-bond industry, but only temporarily. The government can’t keep interest rates low forever. The obvious question is:
Why on Earth did so many people borrow so much money they have no hope of ever repaying?
Because it is impossible to pay off the debts that have been accumulated. Society is fast approaching the point where the government cannot even afford to pay the interest on this debt and that leaves it with one last tool to extend its power over we, the people.
Consumer Society
We have been left with a heavily indebted economy that’s still being fuelled by consumption. The system rewards debtors and punishes savers. It makes long-term capital investments nearly impossible because of economic volatility and financial risks caused by inflation.
Worst of all, the system requires everyone to become a speculator because there’s no other way to safeguard savings.
What the gold standard would really do would be to ensure a level playing field for all economic actors – borrowers, lenders, and even governments.
That’s why bankers – who are always highly leveraged, media barons – who constantly borrow to buy more properties, and governments – which can never balance their budgets, all hate gold. To maintain their power, they all need paper money. The system and those who profit from it would not survive a transition back to the gold standard.
The little-known reality of a paper money system is that it robs the people of purchasing power.
That means the average person works harder and produces more, but cannot buy as much as he has been used to. Meanwhile, asset prices soar.
The wealthy become wealthier as the value of everything they own becomes inflated along with the currency.
This explains why the wealth gap has grown so much since 2000. And it explains why the wealth gap will continue to grow, so long as governments continue their corrupt policies of quantitative easing, corporate bailouts, overspending, and over-taxation.
Simply working harder – or working smarter – isn’t benefiting employees anymore. On the other hand, People who own assets and businesses have seen their wealth soar over the last 40 years.
This system dooms every average worker to poverty and almost guarantees that the rich and powerful will stay that way. And it is this massive gap that is ultimately fuelling today’s problems.
An Invisible Form Of Oppression: Our Food System December 9 2025 | From: Sott / Various
On April 4, 2018, the 50th anniversary of Martin Luther King Jr.'s death, I was honored to be asked to speak at Riverside Church in Harlem, the church where 51 years ago to the day MLK Jr. spoke out about the injustice of the Vietnam War. From that same pulpit, I gave a talk about the role of our food system and the food industry in deliberately subverting public health and targeting the poor and minorities.
The day was focused on MLK Jr's fight for civil rights and social justice for the minorities and poor. The harm of the food system, however, affects all of us. This is the transcript of the speech I gave on that auspicious night.
As a doctor, I took an oath to do no harm. Today, I stand here because there is harm being done to millions and I must speak out. We know all too well the visible forms of racism in our society. We know the inequities in income and opportunity.
We know the brutal violence and discrimination of the police. We know the shooting of black children. We know the name of Tamir Rice. We know the name of unarmed black men shot in the back. We know the name of Stephon Clark.
But we don't know the names of millions of African Americans [or anyone for that matter] killed every year by an invisible form of racism, a silent and insidious injustice.
This is an often-internalized force of racism and oppression that disproportionately affects the poor and African American communities.
We do know that 1.3% of all deaths are caused by gun violence. And it is real and tragic and needs to end.
But we may not know that 70% of deaths are caused by chronic disease - mostly the result of our toxic food system.
More African Americans are killed by bad food than anything else.
The science is clear - our processed, sugary, starchy diet is the single biggest cause of disease and death-type 2 diabetes, obesity, heart disease, stroke, high blood pressure, cancer, and even dementia.
Our food system is the deadliest weapon used against the poor and minorities- keeping them poor, sick and fat, hijacking their brains and biology.
We are told that it is our personal choice, that being fat results from eating too much and not exercising enough. That blames the victim - the subliminal message is that it's your fault you are fat and sick.
We may think that what we eat is a personal choice that is rooted in our cultural heritage and family customs.
But we know that the food industry designs our food to be addictive, that they hire craving experts who work in taste institutes to design what they call the bliss point of food - all with the purpose of creating heavy users. These are their internal corporate terms.
What if I told you that the food industry specifically targets the poor and minorities? It is easy to get someone who is already drinking a 20-ounce soda to buy a 2 liter bottle of soda.
What if I told you that sugar and processed foods were more addictive than cocaine, that the food industry has hijacked our brain chemistry, our taste buds, our metabolism, our bodies and our minds?
When our foods are biologically addictive the notion of personal choice is a fiction. It blames the victims for their choices.
How can we take care of our communities, when 23 million Americans live in food deserts? Where the only food available is processed junk from convenience stores, fast food outlets, and the closest grocery store is more than a mile away. And where it's hard to find fresh fruits and vegetables or healthy food.
It is food swamps - communities filled with fast food chains and bodegas plying highly processed addictive foods. They sell gallon cups of soda, and other sugar-loaded beverages, and there are fast-food chains peddling burgers, fries, and fried chicken on almost every street corner.
We know that your zip code is more important than your genetic code in determining your risk of disease and death.
And what about our kids? Forty percent of them are overweight. We now see 3 year olds with type 2 diabetes - which we used to call adult onset diabetes.
We are told that kids' behavior problems results from bad parenting. The research shows that African Americans are far less likely to graduate from high school or go to college.
But if our children go to school with a breakfast of Coke or colored sugar water and Doritos or Flaming Hot chips how can we expect them to focus or pay attention?
These are not foods. They are food-like substances with no nutritional benefit.
This diet creates an "achievement gap" because kids are too sick to learn - and affects far more kids of color than any other group. These kids are less likely to go to college, earn good incomes, and more likely to get sick and die young.
One in 10 of our kids are on ADD medication. And the science shows the junk our kids eat is a big part of the cause.
The food industry spends $10 billion on marketing junk food to our kids every year. The average kid sees over 6,000 ads for junk food and soda on TV and even more through social media. And minorities and African American kids are targeted more aggressively. These companies are junk food pushers.
Do you really think it was a coincidence that Paula Abdul and all the judges on American Idol had a 24 -ounce container of Coke in front of them at every show?
Top sports stars receive tens of millions of dollars from soda and fast food giants to promote their products to our children who idolize them.
Charter schools in the poorest most disadvantaged communities of color who feed the kids two to three healthy meals a day find that the kids are more likely to go to college than go to jail.
And we incarcerate African Americans at five times the rate of white Americans. Much of that is the result of racial targeting by the police and judicial system.
But it could be that much violent crime is also the result of our diet that robs us of our minds, affects our thinking, judgement, and ability to make good choices.
You may think that's too far-fetched. But studies have shown feeding violent prisoners healthy diets in prisons can reduce crime by 56%. When adding a multivitamin - because they're all so nutritionally deficient - violent crime goes down by 80%. We know that the task of ending mass incarceration and the New Jim Crow is complex and urgent.
We know that the task of building a just food system is also complex and urgent. We have to build a new food system together. Part of this task is listening to the voices of those directly affected by our toxic food system.
I once received a letter from a prison, from a murderer who changed his diet in prison and realized that his whole life of eating junk had made him violent and eating real food transformed him into a different person.
The food industry employs nefarious tactics to prevent change. They buy friends, silence critics, and sweeten their profits.
I was part of a documentary called Fed Up - a movie about how our food system makes us sick and fat with addictive sugary, starchy products.
I met with Bernice King, Martin Luther King Jr.'s daughter, and she explained to me to that non-violence also includes non-violence to ourselves. She was excited about showing Fed Up at the King Center in Atlanta.
But a few days later I got a call that the we couldn't show the film. Why, I asked? The answer: Coca-Cola funds the King Center.
The Dean of Spelman College in Atlanta told me that 50% of the entering class of African American freshman women had a chronic disease - type 2 diabetes, hypertension, or obesity.
Is it any surprise the NAACP and Hispanic groups oppose a soda tax?
We cannot stand for this. Martin Luther King Jr. once said, "Our lives begin to end the day we become silent about things that matter."
We can no longer be silent about this.
If you are African American you are 80% more likely to be diagnosed with type 2 diabetes, over 4 times as likely to have kidney failure, and 3.5 times as likely to suffer amputations as whites.
Yet we remain silent about the role of the food system killing millions of Americans. They tell us it is all personal choice.
Nonsense. Big food corrupts public health and advocacy groups. They fund hunger groups like the Food Research and Action Center and Feeding America.
These hunger groups strongly oppose limiting the use of food stamps or SNAP to buy soda, despite the fact the single biggest item of our food stamp bill (over $7 billion a year) is soda, or 20 billion servings a year to the poor.
Soda and sugar-sweetened beverages are the single biggest cause of obesity and type 2 diabetes.
Our bodies, our health, our children, our communities have been taken from us.
It is time we take them back.
It is time we say no to big food and institutionalized food injustice that is causing this slow-motion genocide.
It is time to free ourselves from corporate interests that privatize the profits and socialize the costs of their products.
Taking back our food and our food system is a revolutionary act.
There are things we can't change as individuals. But we all eat. We vote three times a day with our fork.
The single biggest political act and the single biggest act of self-love, of rebuilding our communities, is to choose real food.
So, what is real food? It's pretty simple. Next time you pick up something to eat, ask yourself this question: Did God make this or did man make this?
Did God make Doritos or a Coke? No. Did God make an egg or broccoli? Yes. We can teach our kids and teach ourselves how to choose and eat food that brings life not death.
Big Food would have you believe that it is expensive, that it is difficult, that it takes too much time. Don't believe them. It is not true.
We need to educate our kids, ourselves, and our communities. We have to do this together. In fact, we can only do this together. Black lives matter. Yes. And black health matters, too!
The harm done by the global food industry affects nearly all humans on the planet in some way.
This must stop. We can stop it with our fork, the most powerful weapon we have to change our health, our communities, our economy and the health the of the planet.
Poll Shows Americans Waking Up, Majority Now Suspects Unelected Shadow Government In Charge [2018] December 8 2025 | From: TheFreeThoughtProject
According to a Monmouth University Poll that was released this week, the majority of Americans believes that a group of unelected government and military officials secretly manipulate the United State government from behind the scenes.
According to the poll, both democrats and republicans feel that there is a “deep state” faction that works in secrecy and exists to shape policy as well as spy on American citizens.
“A majority of the American public believe that the U.S. government engages in widespread monitoring of its own citizens and worry that the U.S. government could be invading their own privacy. The Monmouth University Poll also finds a large bipartisan majority who feel that national policy is being manipulated or directed by a “Deep State” of unelected government officials.
Americans of color on the center and left and NRA members on the right are among those most worried about the reach of government prying into average citizens’ lives.”
Not only do the majority assert that there is indeed a deep state, but they also readily admit that they think the US government is actively engaged in surveillance against its own citizens. Again, illustrating the ominous nature of such a notion, party lines did not matter. The suspicion of the government violating the rights of its own citizens is bipartisan.
“Fully 8-in-10 believe that the U.S. government currently monitors or spies on the activities of American citizens, including a majority (53%) who say this activity is widespread and another 29% who say such monitoring happens but is not widespread. Just 14% say this monitoring does not happen at all. There are no substantial partisan differences in these results..”
“This is a worrisome finding. The strength of our government relies on public faith in protecting our freedoms, which is not particularly robust. And it’s not a Democratic or Republican issue. These concerns span the political spectrum,” said Patrick Murray, director of the independent Monmouth University Polling Institute.
What’s more, only a small fraction of the people who were polled believe that this widespread 1984-style police state is justified. According to the poll, only 18% of Americans are asleep enough to believe that Uncle Sam watching their every move is warranted - a heartening statistic indeed.
This brings us to the question of why so many Americans [Westerners] feel that they are being spied on and controlled by shadow government officials who operate in secret?
The answer is quite simple: because it’s true!
As the torrent of Podesta emails from WikiLeaks exposed the crimes of the Clinton dynasty in 2016, the FBI followed up by releasing their own documents that were just as damning.
Buried inside 100 pages of heavily redacted interview summaries from the FBI’s investigation into Clinton, Americans were exposed to a series of allegations that were nothing short of bombshell - documenting an ultra-secret, high-level group within the government, who were actually referred to as “The Shadow Government.”
This Shadow Government has long been kept in the dark realms of conspiracy theory. However, thanks to the efforts of WikiLeaks and the push by Americans for more transparency, the truth has now become stranger and even more corrupt than fiction.
With every action recorded, phone tapped, innocent family surveilled, right stripped, and citizen killed by their government, the term “Freedom” has become a mere symbolic representation of the brittle shell of America left behind after being gutted by unelected operatives in the deep state hell bent on total control and perpetual war.
Those who thought electing Donald Trump could somehow change this paradigm are slowly figuring out that no matter what puppet resides at 1600 Pennsylvania Avenue, those who lurk behind the scenes are the ones shaping US policy. [Coment: WRONG. If you are not aware of the Alliance working to take down the Cabal then you should catch up on David Wilcock's work.].
No matter how much you may disagree or even like Donald Trump, the idea of a secret and unelected government forcing change without the public’s consent behind the scenes should shock the conscience.
DASH cryptocurrency and The Free Thought Project have formed a partnership that will continue to spread the ideas of peace and freedom while simultaneously teaching people how to operate outside of the establishment systems of control like using cryptocurrency instead of dollars.
Winning this battle is as simple as choosing to abstain from the violent corrupt old system and participating in the new and peaceful system that hands the power back to the people. DASH is this system.
DASH digital cash takes the control the banking elite has over money and gives it back to the people. It is the ultimate weapon in the battle against the money changers and information controllers.
If you'd like to start your own DASH wallet and be a part of this change and battle for peace and freedom, you can start right here. DASH is already accepted by vendors all across the world so you can begin using it immediately.
Is Wikipedia An Establishment Psyop? December 7 2025 | From: CaitlinJohnstone / Various
If you haven’t been living in a hole in a cave with both fingers plugged into your ears, you may have noticed that an awful lot of fuss gets made about Russian propaganda and disinformation these days.
Here’s one published today titled “Border guards detain Russian over ‘information war’ on Poland“, about a woman who is to be expelled from that country on the grounds that she “worked to consolidate pro-Russian groups in Poland in order to challenge Polish government policy on historical issues and replace it with a Russian narrative” in order to “destabilize Polish society and politics.”
Here’s one entitled “Marines get new information warfare leader“, about a US Major General’s appointment to a new leadership position created “to better compete in a 21st century world.”
This notion that the US and its allies are fighting against Russian “hybrid warfare” (by which they typically mean hackers and disinformation campaigns) has taken such deep root among think tanks, DC elites and intelligence/defense circles that it often gets unquestioningly passed on as fact by mass media establishment stenographers who are immersed in and chummy with those groups.
The notion that these things present a real threat to the public is taken for granted to such an extent that they seldom bother to even attempt to explain to their audiences why we’re meant to be so worried about this new threat and what makes it a threat in the first place.
Which is, to put it mildly, really weird. Normally when the establishment cooks up a new Official Bad Guy they spell out exactly why we’re meant to be afraid of them.
Marijuana will give us reefer madness and ruin our communities. Terrorists will come to where we live and kill us because they hate our freedom. Saddam Hussein has Weapons of Mass Destruction which can be used to perpetrate another 9/11. Kim Jong Un might nuke Hawaii any second now.
With this new “Russian hybrid warfare” scare, we’re not getting any of that. This notion that Russians are scheming to give westerners the wrong kinds of political opinions is presented as though having those political opinions is an inherent, intrinsic threat all on its own.
The closest they typically ever get to explaining to us what makes “Russian disinformation” so threatening is that it makes us “lose trust in our institutions,” as though distrusting the CIA or the US State Department is somehow harmful and not the most logical position anyone could possibly have toward historically untrustworthy institutions.
Beyond that we’re never given a specific explanation as to why this “Russian disinformation” thing is so dangerous that we need our governments to rescue us from it.
The reason we are not given a straight answer as to why we’re meant to want our institutions fighting an information war on our behalf (instead of allowing us to sort out fact from fiction on our own like adults) is because the answer is ugly.
As we discussed last time, the only real power in this world is the ability to control the dominant narrative about what’s going on. The only reason government works the way it works, money operates the way it operates, and authority rests where it rests is because everyone has agreed to pretend that that’s how things are.
In actuality, government, money and authority are all man-made conceptual constructs and the collective can choose to change them whenever it wants.
The only reason this hasn’t happened in our deeply dysfunctional society yet is because the plutocrats who rule us have been successful in controlling the narrative.
Whoever controls the narrative controls the world. This has always been the case. In many societies throughout history a guy who made alliances with the biggest, baddest group of armed thugs could take control of the narrative by killing people until the dominant narrative was switched to “That guy is our leader now; whatever he says goes.”
In modern western society, the real leaders are less obvious, and the narrative is controlled by propaganda.
Propaganda is what keeps Americans [Westerners] accepting things like the fake two-party system, growing wealth inequality, medicine money being spent on bombs to be dropped on strangers in stupid immoral wars, and a government which simultaneously creates steadily increasing secrecy privileges for itself and steadily decreasing privacy rights for its citizenry.
It’s also what keeps people accepting that a dollar is worth what it’s worth, that personal property works the way it works, that the people on Capitol Hill write the rules, and that you need to behave a certain way around a police officer or he can legally kill you.
And therein lies the answer to the question. You are not being protected from “disinformation” by a compassionate government who is deeply troubled to see you believing erroneous beliefs, you are being herded back toward the official narrative by a power establishment which understands that losing control of the narrative means losing power.
It has nothing to do with Russia, and it has nothing to do with truth. It’s about power, and the unexpected trouble that existing power structures are having dealing with the public’s newfound ability to network and share information about what is going on in the world.
Until recently I haven’t been closely following the controversy between Wikipedia and popular anti-imperialist activists like John Pilger, George Galloway, Craig Murray, Neil Clark, Media Lens, Tim Hayward and Piers Robinson.
Wikipedia has always been biased in favor of mainstream CNN/CIA narratives, but until recently I hadn’t seen much evidence that this was due to anything other than the fact that Wikipedia is a crowdsourced project and most people believe establishment-friendly narratives. That all changed when I read this article by Craig Murray, which is primarily what I’m interested in directing people’s attention to here.
The article, and this one which prompted it by Five Filters, are definitely worth reading in their entirety, because their contents are jaw-dropping. In short there is an account which has been making edits to Wikipedia entries for many years called Philip Cross.
In the last five years this account’s operator has not taken a single day off–no weekends, holidays, nothing–and according to their time log they work extremely long hours adhering to a very strict, clockwork schedule of edits throughout the day as an ostensibly unpaid volunteer.
This is bizarre enough, but the fact that this account is undeniably focusing with malicious intent on anti-imperialist activists who question establishment narratives and the fact that its behavior is being aggressively defended by Wikipedia founder Jimmy Wales means that there’s some serious fuckery afoot.
“Philip Cross”, whoever or whatever that is, is absolutely head-over-heels for depraved Blairite war whore Oliver Kamm, whom Cross mentioned as a voice of authority no fewer than twelve times in an entry about the media analysis duo known collectively as Media Lens.
Cross harbors a special hatred for British politician and broadcaster George Galloway, who opposed the Iraq invasion as aggressively as Oliver Kamm cheered for it, and on whose Wikipedia entry Cross has made an astonishing 1,800 edits.
Despite the overwhelming evidence of constant malicious editing, as well as outright admissions of bias by the Twitter account linked to Philip Cross, Jimmy Wales has been extremely and conspicuously defensive of the account’s legitimacy while ignoring evidence provided to him.
“Or, just maybe, you’re wrong,” Wales said to a Twitter user inquiring about the controversy the other day. “Show me the diffs or any evidence of any kind. The whole claim appears so far to be completely ludicrous.”
“Riiiiight,” said the totally not-triggered Wales in another response. “You are really very very far from the facts of reality here. You might start with even one tiny shred of some kind of evidence, rather than just making up allegations out of thin air. But you won’t because… trolling.”
“You clearly have very very little idea how it works,” Wales tweeted in another response. “If your worldview is shaped by idiotic conspiracy sites, you will have a hard time grasping reality.”
As outlined in the articles by Murray and Five Filters, the evidence is there in abundance. Five Filters lays out “diffs” (editing changes) in black and white showing clear bias by the Philip Cross account, a very slanted perspective is clearly and undeniably documented, and yet Wales denies and aggressively ridicules any suggestion that something shady could be afoot.
This likely means that Wales is in on whatever game the Philip Cross account is playing. Which means the entire site is likely involved in some sort of psyop by a party which stands to benefit from keeping the dominant narrative slanted in a pro-establishment direction.
A 2016 Pew Research Center report found that Wikipedia was getting some 18 billion page views per month. Billion with a ‘b’. Youtube recently announced that it’s going to be showing text from Wikipedia articles on videos about conspiracy theories to help “curb fake news”.
Plainly the site is extremely important in the battle for control of the narrative about what’s going on in the world. Plainly its leadership fights on one side of that battle, which happens to be the side that favors western oligarchs and intelligence agencies.
How many other “Philip Cross”-like accounts are there on Wikipedia? Has the site always functioned as an establishment psyop designed to manipulate public perception of existing power structures, or did that start later?
I don’t know. Right now all I know is that an agenda very beneficial to the intelligence agencies, war profiteers and plutocrats of the western empire is clearly and undeniably being advanced on the site, and its founder is telling us it’s nothing.
The Language Of Symbolism: How To Recognize These Three Symbols Hidden In Plain Sight December 6 2025 | From: TheMindUnleashed / Various
On the path of trying to figure out what this world is really about, many people ease into the study of symbolism.
When one recognizes the deliberate nature of power, and the characteristics power displays in various activities, they can begin to recognize deeper, more subtle layers of truth about power.
For example a government being the power, participating in psychological warfare against its own people, the government being composed of people who have histories with fraternal orders and secret societies who value symbolism, ect.
This video explores connections between fraternal orders and secret societies to high levels of power: an extremely thorough examination, well past the well known ones such as Skull and Bones at Yale.
Understanding the cult-like behavior of people in power, from royal bloodlines, to banks and corporations, to governments, one can reasonably deduce that their choice of symbolism is often well thought out. Symbols have historically been very important to people in power.
Symbols almost always have multiple layers of meaning: one layer of symbolism may be explained as a simple thing to the public, when it actually alludes to something deeper that only initiates to the symbol can recognize.
Understanding how symbols are deliberate and purposeful, suddenly meaning can be recognized in all kinds of things we see every day. Of course, they are also prone to being misunderstood, or having false meaning attributed to them. Certainty can be scarce in the study of symbolism.
Logos of different corporations and businesses, government flags, emblems, and more are rich with symbolism that speaks a language only those who pay close attention can understand.
Here’s an example I always think of: why do so many flags in the world display 5 pointed stars? Other symbols such as crosses, 6 pointed stars, 7 pointed stars, crescent moons, and more also appear on flags across the world.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Why would so many various factions of power across the world all unanimously decide that a 5 pointed star would best represent them on their flag?
Why do countries (China and the US) that appear to conflict with each other both have 5 pointed stars featured prominently on their flags?
It’s like an inside joke: there must be something that common civilian populations do not understand about the significance of the 5 pointed star. I don’t think so many governments and corporations unanimously decided a 5 pointed star is aesthetically pleasing for a flag.
It has to mean something more than we know.
It’s not difficult to make the case that some natural shapes and geometric formations are used as symbols simply because they look good. However, I think there are many more layers.
I believe shapes such as squares, octagons, triangles, and others are astrotheological references: references to the angles that planets make in the sky, and a system of esoteric knowledge that has been successfully hidden from most people. It is through understanding astrology and its significance to these people in power that I’ve come to this conclusion.
Some videos online can be found about astrotheological symbolism (essentially astrology related symbolism).
One video in particular examined symbolism in the auto-industry. Aries the Ram on the Dodge Ram logo, a Ford Taurus, a Mercury, the Mars symbol on Volvo: the astrotheological references are endless.
In addition, Marty Leeds explored what may be a reference to Pi (3.14), symbolism about the mathematics of creation in auto-industry logos.
To understand the 5 pointed star as an astrotheological reference, one would have to look at an unusual astrology aspect that seems to have been hidden from mainstream astrologers: the quintile, a 72 or 144 degree angle between two planets.
If 5 planets were locked into quintiles, that would make a pentagram in the sky.
There may be some hidden esoteric information in this 5 pointed star, but as of right now, I haven’t figured it out at all. People say the 5 pointed star represents the 4 elements (fire, air, earth, water) and spirit, but I don’t think that’s where the rabbit hole ends. There must be deeper layers of meaning to this strange symbol that appears everywhere.
However, the symbols that have my attention the most are probably the symbols that seem to represent slavery. The octagon, the 8 pointed star of Inanna, the oblong square, the hypercube: these symbols are said to represent slavery, being boxed in and trapped, never-ending loops, and things of that nature.
It would make sense to me, considering the malefic aspects in astrology are squares and oppositions. When planets make squares to each other, bad things happen, to sum it up briefly.
Trines and sextiles, multiples of the 6 pointed star are functional, positive aspects in astrology: and I’m starting to believe that’s why the 6 pointed star is chosen for some business logos and flags. Perhaps it’s a symbol of their effort succeeding or coming to fruition with ease.
In Stanley Kubrick’s final film Eyes Wide Shut, which is essentially about a psychopathic ruling class of people, the 8 pointed star is featured prominently in the first scenes of the movie.
Kubrick was known for his meticulous attention to detail: we know for sure the placement of this symbol was not an accident.
The Square, or Oblong Square, Hyper-Cube
The oblong square is a square that is positioned sideways like a diamond. It appears on many corporate logos, and all over architecture and things we see in every day life. It is said that it’s a symbol of boxing people in and trapping them at base consciousness.
However, it’s nearly impossible to have certainty recognizing the oblong square as a symbol meant to depict this. It’s everywhere, so differentiating coincidence from intentful symbolic representation is very difficult.
Over time, a person looking into symbolism can begin to make this distinction. It seems obvious for example, in the Chase Bank logo because it’s a square inside an octogon, making a sort of swastika shape.
The hypercube is thought to represent a never-ending loop, a prison of consciousness. Researchers such as Mark Passio have presented this theory.
The 6 Pointed Star, or Triangle
While for some reason, certain governmental, corporate, or institutional entities choose seemingly negative symbolism, such as the squares that seem to represent people being boxed in, other entities choose symbols that point to a focus on success.
From the Wal-Mart logo to the 6 pointed “Star of David” found on the Israeli flag (which is of course a symbol older than we could ever know), this symbol can be found everywhere.
Some claim that it represents a cube, since a cube looks like a hexagon if you look at it from an angle.
Theories about symbolism depicting the “Black Cube of Saturn” have circulated widely, and I think they are credible because something certainly is being represented by all these monuments in the picture below.
One of Saturn’s poles has a hexagonal storm on it, depicted below. However, somehow Saturn symbolism involving a black cube has been around for longer than the public has known Saturn has a hexagonal storm on it.
What do these symbols actually do to people? I’m not completely sure. Perhaps they work against our subconscious in a way we don’t understand. Perhaps they don’t do much to us, and people in power just have a belief that they do.
Whatever the reason, this much is clear: people in power care very much about symbolism, and meaning can be found in it that tells us about the world we live in.
How To Protect Yourself From WEF Davos Man& New Zealand Prime Minister Calls For A Global Censorship System[ Historical But Relevant ] December 5 2025 | From: BombThrower / JonathanTurley / Various
Read this if you don’t want your human rights ‘recalibrated.’
The pandemic is clearly in the rear-view mirror, no matter how badly the our elites wish it wasn’t so.
The window on the World Economic Forum’s self-proclaimed “opportunity” for transformative change is quickly closing. Yet, billions of plebes are still dragging their knuckles around, thinking for themselves.
This three part piece takes us through what we’re dealing with, why it’s actually impossible for it to succeed, and what you can personally do to secure your own future regardless.
#1. Know What You’re Dealing With
The Davos Club are at their core, Malthusians and Marxists. By Malthusian I mean that they think there are too many useless eaters in the world taking up space and resources. You’re one of them. They’re not.
By Marxist I mean the true outcome of socialism: a two tier society. Ostensibly, Marxism is about class struggle and equality for all, but in reality it’s about about eliminating the middle class and the reduction of the class structure to only two:
1. Them, a thin scab of elites who sit atop the cap table of the world, who own everything and make all the rules.
2. Everybody else, who own nothing and have no human or civil rights.
Class structure, now and future - Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Anything that comes out of Davos, no matter how noble it sounds is really just veneer to get enough useful idiots to convince enough useless eaters to accept the narrative that what is being done to them is for their own good.
This year took aim at individual carbon footprints.
Funded by the UK government’s UK Research and Innovation, along with “an active and growing industrial consortium”, their plan is to eliminate all carbon emissions by 2050. All of them.
This includes:
Elimination of air travel by 2050
Elimination of shipping (there are no electrically powered ships)
The phasing out of beef and lamb for food (replaced by vegetarian food)
Radical reduction of steel manufacturing and all blast furnaces
Elimination of cement (expand use of clay, “think up something else”, literally)
60% fewer cars, or 60% smaller in size
It’s an epic 60-page report that has it all figured out, most importantly how everybody else is going to live.
But if there’s one thing you can bet on it is this:
In 2050, the Royal Family, members of the government, billionaires and industrialists will all still be flying around in private jets or sailing somewhere aboard super-yachts, eating grass fed beef, lamb, bison, and being chauffeured around in 25-foot limos between their multiple 10,000 to 25,000 square foot residences.
Some people are angered by these machinations of our self-appointed betters.
The idea that the people who come up with these schemes will get to retain all the trappings of a modern, luxurious lifestyle while taking them all away from the rest of us in the name of “climate justice” or “equity” seems, somehow… unfair.
To put it lightly.
But when you fall into the trap of getting triggered by these plans, these high minded “roadmaps” and all encompassing agendas you’re actually falling into a type of mental trap that will compromise your own ability to mitigate these machinations.
One of the most sanity preserving mental tools I’ve ever discovered is what I call “Embracing the recipriversexcluson“.
The term was invented by Douglas Adams in his satirical classic “Hitchhikers Guide To the Galaxy”. It means: a number whose value can be anything but itself.
His example was the stated hour of a dinner party is the one moment in time when it is impossible for any of the guests to arrive.
In this world of management by technocrats and expert authorities, we are immersed in recipriversexclusons:
If the most wizened technocrats say “sub-prime is contained”, it isn’t.
The future inflation targets are the one value inflation can never have
GDP estimates, CPI, PPI, money velocity, all of it, aren’t predictions, they’re exclusions
There is a kind of ontological structure to why this is the case: Knowledge of the future (predictions) never occur in a vacuum.
Putting the prediction into the world (planning) by that very act creates reinforcement and opposition. However both forces reduce the odds of the outcome matching the prediction.
The reason why can be understood by looking at something called the Three Body Problem. It’s a physics concept which states that it is impossible to create an algorithm that describes the movement of three disparate objects in space.
Without getting too long-winded about it, I’ll distill it down to this:
The World Economic Forum could not successfully execute a plan for total world domination, even if the entire world consisted of only three inanimate objects.
I’m oversimplifying. But the upshot is that central planning is futile. Whether it’s Soviet-era Five-Year Plans or FOMC models for transitory inflation, the Three Body Problem suggests that there are simply too many moving parts in the world to be able to plan and control macro outcomes.
If there is no solution to calculating the trajectory of three independent entities even five minutes from now, never-mind trying to control the outcome of the entire global economy (or the planet’s climate) out past 2050.
What can happen though, and frequently does, is you can cause a lot of damage via central planning.
You can screw up everybody else’s plans, even the individual ones that would have otherwise landed in the ballpark.
The idea of the Great Reset derives from the New World Order which is still alive in the minds of the establishment or who we can call the globalists from people like Henry Kissinger to Joe Biden.
Of course there are many others on the top levels of the pyramid whose ideas range from establishing a police state, to implanting microchips the day we are born to track and trace us, to depopulating the planet. I know it all sounds insane but that’s what the globalists have planned for us for a very long time. Continue reading...
So for interim periods of time, central planning can appear to be omnipotent, but if you look closely, none of those plans actually succeeded at anything other than derailing everybody else’s lives (COVID, lockdowns, vaccines, etc).
Any time central planning or technocratic impulses appear to be in control of anything, it’s, as a rule never what was intended. More often it’s a train wreck of unintended consequences.
If that wasn’t the case, we wouldn’t have runaway inflation, we’d have had a soft-landing in the rate hikes, 100% vaccine compliance, Russia wouldn’t be Ukraine, the supply-chain would be humming along, oil wouldn’t be over $100/barrel and Bitcoin would be a zero.
#3. What You Actually Do About It
"There is a great difference between resisting evil and renouncing it. When you resist evil, you give it your attention; you continue to make it real.
When you renounce evil, you take your attention away from it and give your attention to what you want.
Now is the time to control your imagination and give your energy to what you want.”
- Neville Goddard
This quote provides a nice encapsulation for the decentralized revolution and the emergence of Bitcoin. This movement is not a full frontal assault against globalism, nor is it a fear-based reaction to any impending attempts at tyranny.
It is a worldwide, unstoppable opt-out. People are putting their energy literally into what they want. Non-state, neutral, digital bearer instruments, absolute property rights, and self-sovereign autonomy.
That’s what I want. That’s what many of you want. I really don’t give a rat’s ass what Klaus Schwab, Justin Trudeau or any of the collectivist eggheads who authored Absolute Zero 2050 want.
The reality is nobody is control, and for both the elites, and the NPCs who love to to have their lives ordered by them, that is terrifying.
We live in an out-of-control world, and yet each one of us are bestowed with a few super-powers that give us the ability to rise above any adversity or undesirable circumstances.
Those super-powers are the ability to adapt, learn and our ability to think creatively. Individually, any single person can rise above their circumstances. In parallel, we can upend entire empires.
A 2009 op-ed published by the United Nations, which is now removed from its website, heralds hunger as “the foundation of wealth” and a means to bolster the world economy.
In order to be able to live your life irrespective of how Davos Man thinks you should, you have to be independently wealthy. That may not be ideal or fair, but that’s how it is.
If you aren’t independently wealthy as we go through this Fourth Turning of history, then there’s high likelihood you’ll be a neo-Feudal serf, trapped within a social credit system, living on stimmies (CDBCs), and doing what you’re told.
By independently wealthy, I mean not reliant on single external entities, and especially not on government entitlements. If you live in a trailer on a plot of land that you own free and clear and have a viable niche in your community, you’re independent.
You’re in better shape than the mid-level investment banker whose bonus is $750K but he’s several million in debt over and above his assets.
If you aren’t where you want to be financially now (and it’s not because you’re still in school or otherwise laying the foundation for your future), then there’s one step you have to do first, which clears the path toward financial independence.
You have to identify your one crippling barrier to being who you want to be, and get rid of that obstacle. You probably already know what The Great Barrier is in your life, because you spend a lot of your mental energy pretending it’s not there or not a problem.
At the end of February 2020, the global village began to shake on its foundations. The world was presented with a foreboding crisis, the consequences of which were incalculable.
In a matter of weeks, everyone was gripped by the story of a virus - a story that was undoubtedly based on facts. But on which ones?
Maybe it’s drugs, booze, negative thinking, sex, porn, co-dependancy, television, Youtube, who the hell knows these days. Being a Karen.
Whatever it is, just stop it (for years I’ve been trying to figure out who wrote this book, but if you’re at this stage where you need to deal with your Great Barrier, then get it and read it, it’s under $3 for chrissake).
At the age of 30 I was broke, in debt, an alcoholic, alone and suffering from depression and crippling anxiety. Now I’m not. My Great Barrier was the booze. So I stopped drinking.
It’s hard to believe that was only 22 years ago, because I’ve come a long way since, and risen to comparatively dizzying heights. I am not especially gifted nor talented. If I can do it, so can you.
Become Financially Independent
After you smash through your Great Barrier, the first job if you’re not financially independent, is to do that. Become that. Yes, it’s that simple.
You make the decision and then you go out and do it. If your Great Barrier was an addiction, you’ll actually have so much extra time and money it will feel positively pink cloud-ish.
Use that lift to get up to speed on financial literacy and then the way you get there is through starting or owning a business. Even one on the side.
In an interview with Dr. Joseph Mercola, Edward Dowd, a former equity portfolio manager for BlackRock, explained why he believes the global financial system will collapse within the next six to 24 months.
Social media – massive curation will required here
All politicians
Expert authorities
You have to start paying attention to what’s going on in your head most of the time, and then ask yourself if it’s something put there by an external influence or if you’re actually expending brainpower on your own plans, goals and relationships.
People can waste their entire day on whatever Twitter puts in the “What’s Trending” bar. They can get caught up ruminating on external events, people and behaviours they have no control over and will almost never impact them.
Have a goal. Come up with a plan. Spend as much of your mental energy thinking about your goals and your own plan.
Think Napoleon:
"I see only the goal. The obstacle must give way.”
- Napoleon
Or the other Napoleon:
"Choose your goals. Work toward them. Direct your thoughts. Control your emotions. Get into action… and you ordain your Destiny”
Human rights defender + holocaust survivor Vera Sharav gives a stark warning about the dangers of ‘The Great Reset’ + its attempts to break down democracy. Will you be a part of the mass that stops them?
Once you’re the captain of your own ship, you’ll still have to navigate the machinations of innumerable external authorities who think they have moral claim over your life.
You do that by cultivating optionality. A wizened lawyer once told me, “he who has the most options, usually wins”.
When you’re on a single paycheque, over your head in debt or reliant on government stimmies, you have no choices.
Basically you live at the whim of your circumstances.
Are we hardwired to categorize each other into ‘Us vs Them?’ Simply put, yes. But this hardwiring is remarkably easy to break. It’s time we equip ourselves with the knowledge and tools to do so.
Why? Well, anything from powerful governments to mainstream and alternative media is consistently trying to divide us by focusing aggressively on our differences.
Imagine an insurance policy that covered you against being absolutely, totally wrong about something as important as the future of the global monetary system. What would that be worth to you?
$5? $10? If that’s all you’d be willing to concede that you might be proven wrong about Bitcoin, then take that five or ten dollar bill down to the nearest Bitcoin ATM and buy a few sats of Bitcoin.
Then do it again next week. Do it every time you’re at the store pissing away the rest of your money on lotto tickets and cigarettes and in due course you’ll have a cushion that could make all the difference in the world if the Bitcoin thesis plays out.
Be Ready
Being a Sovereign Individual (this is basically what we’ve been laying out herein) requires commitment and preparation.
You don’t have to do it, but just understand that if you don’t, we’re headed into a world where you’re probably going to spend the rest of your life doing what you’re told instead of what you want.
We’re in an air pocket now, the job is resiliency, because we’re transitioning out of an existing system that is no longer functional, and into a new one. Nobody really knows how it looks yet.
The tension between Davos Man and the Sovereign Individual is that the former wants to keep the old system going as a linear extension into the future: More centralization, more top down control, more confiscation of any remaining wealth.
The latter may not know what the future looks like but we know what it won’t look like: it won’t be a digitized linear extrapolation of the Industrial Age.
Aside from that, all bets are off, so we we need all manner of resiliency. Backup generators. Medical Supplies. Tools. Food. Lawyers, guns & money
We also have to connect with each other and create our own support structures because the government, the experts, the Davos crowd, they are not coming in to save us. My guess is in the not-so-distant future their primary concern will be outrunning the pitchforks and torches. So be it.
In Bitcoin circles there is a meme: WAGMI. I’ll leave it to the reader to find out what that means if they don’t already.
Many people believe that Davos Man controls the world and is steering everybody into a technocratic authoritarianism. Davos Man assuredly aspires toward this.
The laser-eyes, those who think WAGMI have their own designs on how things will play out. It is largely a global opt-out as incumbent institutions lose credibility, and their authority and importance in world affairs goes into secular decline.
Either way, they are both correct. It will be largely self-selecting.
New Zealand Prime Minister Calls For A Global Censorship System
New Zealand Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern is the latest liberal leader to call for an international alliance to censor speech.
Unsatisfied with the unprecedented corporate censorship of social media companies, leaders like Hillary Clinton have turned from private censorship to good old-fashioned state censorship.
Speech regulation has become an article of faith on the left. Ardern used her speech this week to the United Nations General Assembly to call for censorship on a global scale.
Ardern lashed out at “disinformation” and called for a global coalition to control speech. After nodding toward free speech, she proceeded to lay out a plan for its demise through government regulation:
"But what if that lie, told repeatedly, and across many platforms, prompts, inspires, or motivates others to take up arms. To threaten the security of others. To turn a blind eye to atrocities, or worse, to become complicit in them. What then?
This is no longer a hypothetical. The weapons of war have changed, they are upon us and require the same level of action and activity that we put into the weapons of old.
We recognized the threats that the old weapons created. We came together as communities to minimize these threats. We created international rules, norms and expectations. We never saw that as a threat to our individual liberties – rather, it was a preservation of them. The same must apply now as we take on these new challenges.”
Ardern noted how extremists use speech to spread lies without noting that non-extremists use the same free speech to counter such views.
To answer her question on “how do you tackle climate change if people do not believe it exists” is that you convince people using the same free speech. Instead, Ardern appears to want to silence those who have doubts.
Globalists are anxious to control little people in New Zealand and stave off any original and constructive thoughts they might entertain. Control of information is a vital part of the process. Our government has uncritically facilitated this.
While referring to a global censorship coalition as a “light-touch approach to disinformation,” Ardern revealed how sweeping such a system would likely be.
She defended the need for such global censorship on having to combat those who question climate change and the need to stop “hateful and dangerous rhetoric and ideology.”
"After all, how do you successfully end a war if people are led to believe the reason for its existence is not only legal but noble?
How do you tackle climate change if people do not believe it exists? How do you ensure the human rights of others are upheld, when they are subjected to hateful and dangerous rhetoric and ideology?”
That is the same rationale used by authoritarian countries like China, Iran, and Russia to censor dissidents, minority groups, and political rivals.
What is “hateful” and “dangerous” is a fluid concept that government have historically used to silence critics or dissenters.
Ardern is the smiling face of the new generation of censors.
At least the old generation of censors like the Iranians do not pretend to support free speech and openly admit that they are crushing dissent.
How The Dairy Industry Tricked Humans Into Believing They Need Milk December 4 2025 | From: TrueActivist / Various
Despite the fact that one can get their daily recommendation of calcium, potassium, and protein from fruits and vegetables, the dairy industry has spent billions of dollars to convince consumers otherwise.
Got Milk? We sure hope not. Despite being a somewhat tasty addition to coffee, tea, and delectable treats, the ingredient – when pasteurized – is highly toxic to the human body.
In fact, physicians such as Dr. Willet, who has conducted many studies and reviewed the research on the topic, believe milk to be more of a detriment to the human body than an aid.
This is because despite popular belief, the food has never been shown to reduce fracture risk. In fact, according to the Nurses’ Health Study, dairy may increase risk of fractures by 50%!
This concerning finding is supported by the fact that countries with lowest rates of dairy and calcium consumption (like those in Africa and Asia) have the lowest rates of osteoporosis.
Considering that approximately 3/4 of the world’s population is unable to digest milk and other dairy products, it seems clear the food is not an ideal substance for consumption.
However, the average consumer doesn’t know this.
From celebrity endorsements to advertisements by the dairy industry, most have been taught to believe that dairy is an ideal food for optimum health.
Because there’s so much misinformation surrounding the subject, Vox recently created a video which illustrates the facade of the dairy industry.
One of the points made is that despite the fact that consumers can get the daily recommendation of calcium, potassium, and protein from [properly organic] fruits and vegetables, the dairy industry has spent billions of dollars to convince the populace otherwise.
If you were taught that one must drink milk to grow up “big and strong,” you’re not alone. However, now is the time to get educated on the facts.
Because milk is very mucus-forming in the human body, it is believed to contribute to allergies, ear infections, Type 1 diabetes, anemia, and even constipation. In addition, the food may contribute to various types of cancers as consumption of the product increases the body’s level of insulin-like growth factor-1 (IGF-1).
‘Milks’ from rice, almonds, cashew, hemp, and even coconut can be found in most grocery stores, and some companies even sell dairy-free ice cream – such as Ben & Jerry’s!
In fact, the non-dairy milk market has surged within the past few years. Almond milk sales, in particular, have increased by 250 percent from 2000-2015 to almost $895 million. [Avoid Soy milk as it is not good for you and often GMO].
How To Live Simply In A Complicated World December 3 2025 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various
The world we humans have created and live in is unbelievably complicated, and this is reflected in the way we’re living.
Consider how most people live: Day in and day out they are fighting with one another, are endlessly busy doing things they deep down hate doing, their attention is constantly being distracted by superfluous things, and their minds are filled with an endless stream of conflicting thoughts - in a few words, their hearts and souls are being sucked into the vortex we call “modern living”.
Inhabiting such a complicated world, it’s impossible not to be influenced by it. But through our thoughts, actions and attitude we can choose to simplify our lives and be more detached from its chaotic ways. If you’d like to learn to live more simply so that you can improve your well-being, but you don’t know how, the following tips might prove helpful.
Declutter your work and living space. Reducing the amount of unimportant stuff you’ve collected over the years can do wonders to help reduce your stress levels and keep your life simple.
By living in an uncluttered environment you’ll be able to focus on what’s truly important to you and won’t be led away by constant distractions. In addition, you won’t have to maintain and worry over things that you don’t actually need and don’t contribute in any way to your happiness.
Limit your media time. Most people spend an enormous part of their lives watching TV or mindlessly surfing the internet. They then complain that life is short and wonder why they can’t find joy in it.
Although the media can be good if used carefully with measure, it can also turn into a harsh tyrant if we become addicted to it and let it enslave us in a virtual world that prevents us from living up to our fullest potential.
Get rid of unnecessary costs. Entrapped in the web of consumerism, a lot of us choose to waste our hard-earned money buying things that we don’t need and which only complicate our lives.
From now on, simplify your life by not throwing your money around and instead spend it on things that actually matter. Helpful tips: ditch your credit cards and say no to taking loans to avoid getting into debt.
Focus on what you love. When you do what you enjoy doing, life becomes simple. On the contrary, when you dislike what you do, life becomes a sheer drudgery. Unfortunately, from a very young age most of us have been conditioned to focus our attention on things that we hate doing, and so it’s no wonder that we are experiencingX so much suffering.
From today, make it a conscious choice to expend your energy on what you love rather than what you don’t and your life will be completely transformed.
Take good care of your body. Life becomes extremely complicated when we don’t love and look after our bodies. Suffering from disease is extremely uncomfortable and turns everyday life into a torture, so, as long as we live, we better learn how to keep ourselves healthy. Here’s how to do so: eat a variety of fresh, organic, plant-based foods, be physically active throughout the day, and rest well when you feel tired.
Reconnect with nature. Whenever possible, take a walk in nature, away from the hustle and bustle of the concrete jungle you most probably are living in.
Relax your soul listening to the sounds of birds, explore the beauty of trees, animals and the sea, take some deep breaths of fresh air, and find inner peace by immersing yourself in the harmony of the natural world.
Develop a non-judgmental attitude. We use much of our time and energy judging others, and our judgmental attitude is tremendously complicating our lives: it separates us from one another, which in turn creates interpersonal conflict and emotional pain. By learning to place ourselves in the shoes of others and empathize with them, we can form better relationships with each other that will make us feel more at peace with the world around us.
Offer your help to others. Our well-being depends to a great extent on the well-being of others. Therefore, by helping others to be healthy and happy, we’re helping ourselves, and, in a sense, the entire world.
Whenever you can, offer a helping hand to those in need so as to alleviate their pain. Of course, beware not to help others at the expense of yourself (except, perhaps, in rare occasions) - helping is one thing, sacrificing is another.
Show kindness. Another obvious yet often neglected way to simplify your life is to just be kinder to your fellow human beings. Having been brought up in a competitive society, most of us are constantly fighting against one another, which immensely complicates our everyday life, by further alienating us and creating even more suffering.
By behaving in a more kind way, you’ll spread the seeds of kindness, and soon you’ll come to see those around you behaving more kindly towards you as well.
Complain less. Life is filled with obstacles that we have to overcome. However, constantly complaining about the obstacles we encounter does nothing to help us deal with them.
On the contrary, it distracts us from finding out how to go beyond them, and so we never actually take concrete action to achieve that. Instead of wasting your time and energy complaining about the problems you’re facing, seek to discover the root causes of your problems and then do your best to remove them from your life.
Practice mindfulness. The mind is good as a servant, but bad as a master. When our minds are filled with myriads of thoughts, life gets immensely complicated, resulting in tremendous stress and suffering.
A great way to achieve a more peaceful state of mind and bring more levity into your life is the practice of mindful awareness.
Starting today, spend at least thirty minutes every day practicing a meditation technique that you prefer. Doing so, will do wonders to help relieve yourself of the countless, chaotic thoughts that at times might be driving your mind crazy.
Cultivate gratitude. Unless we appreciate the wonder-full gift of life that we’ve been offered freely by existence, we’ll never be able to find contentment. Most of us are in a continuous struggle to acquire or achieve more in the future, forgetting to enjoy what we’ve been offered in this very moment, so it’s no wonder that life seems like a constant struggle.
Although it’s great to set new goals and make plans for tomorrow, we need to realize that it’s only the present that we really have, and that we can enjoy ourselves only by being grateful for the little things that we’re fortunate to experience in the here and now.
Build genuine friendships. As social beings that we all are, we deeply need to feel connected with others. In the sick society that we live in, however, we feel disconnected and alienated from our fellow human beings. People are afraid of intimacy and heart-to-heart relationships lest they get hurt, so they choose to become isolated from those around them.
This, however, only results in feelings of loneliness, insecurity, and discontentment. If you want to let go of all these burdens that keep you from living in peaceful joy with the world, learn to open up your heart and befriend others. By forming genuine friendships, you’ll be able to give and receive loving affection, which is going to nourish your soul and enrich your life in multiple ways.
Listen to your inner voice. Since we were born, most of us were taught not to accept ourselves as we are and to continuously strive to become different so as to feel accepted by society.
Slowly slowly, thinking that there’s something very wrong with ourselves, we stopped trusting our inner voice and following what our heart is dictating us. Rather, we’ve been conditioned to follow what authority tells us is good and right, which is a sure-fire way to stress and misery.
The truth is that no one can know what is better for you except yourself. So if you’ve been conforming and following orders, it’s time to stop - now. Instead, start using your critical thinking and paying attention to your emotional world, both of which will guide you towards a much simpler and better life.
Life can be lived simply, and yet we insist on complicating it. Now that you know, what keeps you from keeping it simple?
Quantum Vacuum & Zero Point Energy: Is “Free Energy” For All Actually Possible? & Invention Secrecy: On Suppressed And Censored "Free Energy" Technologies December 2 2025 | From: ThePulse / JordanSather / Various
The idea that the space around us contains 'stuff' or 'energy' is moving from theory to reality. Inventors and scientists are trying to determine whether energy can be 'extracted' from this space and used. Inventor Paramahamsa Tewari demonstrates his energy device that apparently does just that.
Why is such little focus put on devices like this if they have the potential to change almost every aspect of human society and life for the better? Are they being suppressed by governments?
‘Free energy’ is a term that is tossed around a lot in new energy communities. But to be fair to the many professionals we’ve interviewed in the new energy sector, it’s not a term that many within they like to use.
That’s because it’s not really ‘free,’ or what we perceive ‘free’ to be. It’s not like the power source for generating the energy to run these machines (discussed below in this article) is coming from ‘nowhere.’
In some cases, the energy can come from clever magnetic configurations, in other cases it’s forms of perpetual motion. But in cases that garner perhaps the most attention, the energy is said to be coming from the quantum vacuum.
This ‘void’ seems provide potentially unlimited quantities, given the fact that it’s the invisible ‘stuff’ that makes up our known entire universe. Bottom line, it seems there is enough to go around.
Sure some will say outdated methods like solar, wind, and other ‘clean energy’ initiatives are the way to go, and even “the future,” but truthfully these technologies are primitive in terms of what our team has seen first hand over the years.
The challenge we have today is government is pushing humanity in a direction of these primitive technologies, and culture is grasping on as if it’s “the best way”, but fact is there are many more advanced ways to generate clean energy that could revolutionize our world and end government’s control over the population via energy cost and production.
"Much to my surprise, these concepts have been proven in hundreds of laboratories around the world, but have not really seen the light of day.”
Long ago, physicists discovered that what we call ‘space’ is not empty, that there is energy in space, and that it’s full of ‘stuff’ not visible to the human eye.
This is exactly what an atom is made up of, spinning and vibrating bits of energy, once perceived to be completely void and empty. Turns out, it’s probably the ‘invisible’ that governs the ‘visible’ matter we see everyday.
"No point is more central than this, that space is not empty, it is the seat of the most violent physics.”
This was further illustrated in what’s known as “The Casimir Effect,” which demonstrates zero-point energy.
The implications of this are far reaching and have been written about extensively within theoretical physics by researchers all over the world. Today, we are beginning to see that these concepts are not just theoretical, but instead, very practical. (Source)
In simple terms, this energy in space is in fact there, but the next question is: how much of this energy can be ‘tapped’ and how much power generation can it provide us with?
Below is a video of Nassim Haramein, who currently leads a teams of physicists, electrical engineers, mathematicians and other scientists to explore the frontier of unification principles and their implications. In it, he goes into more detail.
The Connected Universe | Nassim Haramein
"Space is actually not empty and it’s full of energy…
The energy in space is not trivial there’s a lot of it and we can actually calculate how much energy there is in that space and that reality might actually come out of it. Everything we see is actually emerging from that space.”
-
Nassim Haramein
One paper titled “Extracting Energy and Heat from the Vacuum” in Physical Review by Daniel C. Cole, Ph.D. and Associate Professor at Boston University in the Department of Mechanical Engineering, and Physicist Harold E. Puthoff shows that:
"Relatively recent proposals have been made in the literature for extracting energy and heat from electromagnetic zero-point radiation via the use of the Casimir force.
The basic thermodynamics involved in these proposals is analyzed and clarified here, with the conclusion that yes, in principle, these proposals are correct.”
Given what Haramein is suggesting, along with the academics mentioned above, we can begin to put a lot of weight in the fact that these concepts are not only true in principle, but are no longer just theoretical.
So why is it considered ‘nonsense’ in the mainstream world? Why are we putting so much money, energy and time into outdated technologies if this is truly the forefront?
"These are not just fringe scientists with science fiction ideas. They are mainstream ideas being published in mainstream physics journals and being taken seriously by mainstream military and NASA type funders.”
Theodor C. Loder, III, Professor Emeritus at the Institute for the Study of Earth, Oceans and Space at the University of New Hampshire puts it best:
"There are technologies presently being repressed, that are real and could replace the present fossil fuel usage with appropriate investment in research necessary to bring them online…
There are scientists ready to testify at a Senate hearing on the realities of these issues.”
"While the world has been distracted by hula hoops, pet rocks, dot coms, fiber optics and the latest new App to to hypnotize the masses, engineers, and inventors have quietly been at work trying to understand what Tesla meant when he said,
‘Ere many generations pass, our machinery will be driven by a power obtainable at any point in the universe.’”
Below is a video discussing an energy device invented by Paramahamsa Tewari.
The video discusses some of the challenges we face with exploring new energy technologies, and it shows the ‘over-unity’ tests results done by Tewari and his team as well as results replicated by another factory.
You can learn more about Tewari and follow his work here.
While thinking about these concepts, it is important to acknowledge the world of secrecy.
There are multiple inventors utilizing these concepts, and unfortunately the trail leads towards the secret space program, and the powerful people that might have to take a big hit if they do not have control of these technologies.
It’s also important to note that ever since the “Invention Secrecy Act” was brought into effect in 1951, over 5000 inventions alone were issued secrecy orders at the end of 2014. (Source)
As Steven Aftergood from the Federation of American Scientists reports:
"The 1971 list indicates that patents for solar photovoltaic generators were subject to review and possible restriction if the photovoltaics were more than 20% efficient.
Energy conversion systems were likewise subject to review and possible restriction if they offered conversion efficiencies in ‘excess of 70-80%.’”
"Ere many generations pass, our machinery will be driven by a power obtainable at any point in the universe. This idea is not novel…
We find it in the delightful myth of Antheus, who derives power from the earth; we find it among subtle speculations of one of your splendid mathematicians….
Throughout space there is energy. Is this energy static, or kinetic? If static our hopes are in vain; if kinetic – and this we know it is, for certain – then it is a mere question of time when men will succeed in attaching their machinery to the very wheel work of nature.”
This is a tough question to ask as why should some suggest humans are not ready for something? Who could say such a thing?
Well, this is an important question to consider when looking at these energy technologies and putting them in the context of our current society.
These technologies leave no aspect of humanity and our society untouched. Our way of life, minds, values and beliefs would adjust as we acknowledge what these devices are doing and can do.
Are we open to having mysterious questions perhaps answered? Are we willing to change the way we live and relate to one another? Are we willing to forgo the limitations our current societal systems and infrastructures have thrust upon us?
Invention Secrecy: On Suppressed And Censored "Free Energy" Technologies
"Today's scientists have substituted mathematics for experiments, and they wander off through equation after equation, and eventually build a structure which has no relation to reality." - Nikola Tesla
We sit here in the middle of 2022, constantly told about the “Miracles of Modern Science”, constantly fed the idea that humanity is more advanced now than it has ever been, yet we’re still using controlled explosions to meet our electricity and propulsion needs the same way we’ve been doing for over a century.
Our cars might have computer chips and cup holders these days, but the combustion engine is the same. Our airplanes are glorified bullets - aerodynamic projectiles hurled through the air by burning a combustible behind them.
As for “alternative” energy, solar cells don’t exactly work at night time or on heavily cloudy days, and the ugly, giant fans scattered across the countryside only produce electricity if it’s windy.
It may appear that we are so advanced, but have we really progressed that far? Or are we the hamster running his wheel in circles, thinking we’re moving because we’re putting in work, when really we are going nowhere fast?
How far along could we technologically, scientifically, and most importantly spiritually if our societal growth had not been hindered and manipulated by a certain group of secret society elites over the last century?
Where are these technologies, what sciences are they based on, and why are they so vehemently suppressed?
Scarcity-Based Centralization
Don’t get me wrong, humanity’s capacity to extract oil and natural gas from the Earth, synthesize it, and use these resources to power industry and transportation has revolutionized society, and we owe many of our comforts of modern living to this ingenuity.
I like being able to drive to the store, fly across the country, and flip on the lights in the middle of the night. We have it easy compared to our great great-grandfathers, let alone our ancient ancestors.
The problem is that all of our energy needs are owned and controlled by a centralized group with a never-ending thirst for power. In a previous Substack article, I wrote about the nature of centralization, how these New World Order folk maintain their control with this method, and how we can and must to take our power back through the decentralization of energy, media, education, and the other pivotal areas of society.
Specifically when it comes to energy and propulsion, the “Oil Baron Families”, Big Oil if you will, have exerted their control over the industry for a century+.
These are your Rockefellers, Carnegies, and many of the families instrumental in creating the Federal Reserve, as well. Imagine if we were able to figure out a way to produce electricity that does not require being hooked up on a grid, and was incredibly cheap, if not free?
You could imagine that some of these globalist powers would be very upset with that.
They do not want humanity living in a state of abundance with technologies like zero-point energy that could provide cheap limitless electricity - to maintain their control, they must keep us on a system of scarcity.
“Gas supplies are dwindling!”, they tell us as they jack up the prices to $8 per gallon. Granted, I do believe there is far more gas and oil in and on planet Earth than we’re led to believe, but the simple fact that a small group control the infrastructure, and the fact that we need to hook ourselves up to a centralized grid and pay money for electricity, is stifling our progression as a civilization.
By design.
The Green Energy Bamboozle
Ah, yes. “Green” Energy is the future!.. so we’re told. We must invest trillions of dollars into solar power and wind farms to save the Earth and reduce climate change! Don’t forget to pay your carbon taxes.
The main cause if that giant ball of plasma that rises and sets in our skies everyday, but that’s a debate for another time.
Based upon this propagandized disinfo-science, our governments are frantically working to push these “alternative energy” technologies upon us.
The problem is that these technologies are incredibly expensive, ironically still destroy the environment with how much mining needs to be done to make them (plus disposal), and are very much still centralized.
Comment:
Does anybody remember how photosynthesis works? Sunlight, water and Carbon Dioxide. Animals and humans expel carbon dioxide. The more CO2, the more plants will grow.
Between solar activity and volcanic activity alone there is little if any room for humans to have any discernible impact on the environment - save for pollution. And again, pollutants are engendered by the 'elite' globalist systems. Another convenient target to slap upon and blame on the masses.
Wake the fuck up. These people are taking you for a monumental ride. And it is intended to end without you.
Enormous oil companies who suppress actual clean 'free energy' technologies - force us to pay to use their products - which is another method of control - while blame shifting the supposed negative effects of "fossil fuels" (which was a term invented by the Rockefellers) onto the consumers of their products - and it's all our fault.
After the 2010 BP
oil spill disaster in the Gulf of Mexico the PR monsters came up with the "personal carbon footprint" narrative.
This was directly intended to shift the blame from the globalist oil companies (who have systematically suppressed more 'green' and sustainable alternative energy sources) directly to the consumers - whom they force to use their products.
WHO is to blame and what is behind it all?
Oil is not a fossil fuel - that is a lie. Peak oil is a lie. The planet continuously produces oil, oil fields abandoned because they were thought to be 'empty' have been found to be full again 20 years later.
And then we have the idiocy of electric vehicles. Have you seen pictures of the strip mines where the lithium and other rare earth minerals are extracted? Talk about planetary decimation.
Not to mention the third world countries doing this with forced child labour and all facilitated using diesel machinery!
And where do you think the electricity comes from to power your 'zero emission' clean green car? Mostly from coal-burning power plants.
The component parts from those EV's have been shipped around the world four times before they even get fully assembled. By massive ships powered by huge diesel engines.
Not to mention that the batteries that power these cars are good for about 10 years before they need to be replaced - and they cannot be recycled. Much like the blades on wind turbines.
They are of a type of plastic that cannot be recycled and as with the electric vehicle batteries - have to be buried in landfills.
This is not about sustainability and environmental friendliness - it is about stupid humans buying into a massive lie in order that they subjugate themselves into further slavery and control. One of the biggest problems, and what has led us to the upside down fucked up state that the world is in now - is that people have been indoctrinated out of thinking for themselves.
Posit: If there existed a worldwide group who wanted to leverage and control everything, everywhere - and had been incrementally working on their plan for a very long time - and did so under the radar to the point where you had no idea what was going on until it was too late... Well. It was never a theory.
The 'elites' and their agendas must be exposed to all in order that we can actually get technologies unleashed that work for all of our people and that do not cause harm to our mother earth.
The solutions have existed for over 100 years. We do not need the half-arsed control-driven bullshit offerings of vested interests.
This means that whether it’s fossil fuel or wind turbines, you still need to hook up to the grid, get metered, and pay the big corporations dollars for the watts.
What if there were inventions and technologies based on more realistic scientific models that would give us the ability to generate clean, limitless energy?
And we didn’t need to be hooked up to a centralized grid to benefit from them? What if these technologies would be cheap to develop? What if they have already been developed?
It may sound like a grand conspiracy, but that’s because by the literal definition of that word, it is.
Censored Scientists, Tesla & Others
Nikola Tesla. This famous inventor is very well known in the mainstream world for his contribution to the field of electrical engineering.
He is also well known in the conspiracy subculture, with many believing that some of his inventions involved wireless energy transmission and “free energy” electricity creation.
It is also no secret that the oil baron-banking families like the Morgans and Rockefellers did not like the idea of his free energy based inventions and worked to undermine Tesla’s ability to bring these to the world.
Unbeknownst to many, though, is that Tesla was not the first to work on “free energy” or “zero-point energy” inventions, nor was he the last.
There have been a variety of inventors from all around the world who stepped outside the bounds of the Standard Model of Physics and made an effort to bring disruptive technologies to market.
In the late 1800’s, John Keely made an effort to tap the "luminiferous aether" with his handmade magnetic devices in order to produce clean, cheap electricity. Same story with him as with Tesla, the oil baron families move in to take a controlling interest.
In the 1940’s, Thomas Townsend Brown figured out that high voltage, electrostatic charge pumped into metallic discs would make them levitate. This came to be known as the “Biefield-Brown Effect”. It is up for debate whether he was threatened, paid-off, or allowed the U.S. Navy to classify his research.
Stanley Meyer invented a car that ran on water in the 1980’s. It’s rumored that government officials poisoned him before the could get his invention to market.
Those are a few examples among dozens and dozens more that I could offer of suppressed researchers who attempted to build some incredible stuff. Unfortunately, they did now know the powers and principalities they were up against.
On February 1, 1952, a body of federal law was passed by the U.S. Congress called the Invention Secrecy Act that stated certain branches of government, like the Navy, National Security Agency, Department of State, even NASA or the DOJ, could prevent the disclosure of new inventions or technologies if the opinion of said branch was that these technologies could “present a possible threat to National Security."
Hm, where have we heard that excuse before? The issue, of course, is that such a vague excuse can and is easily taken advantage of to arbitrarily strike information secret. According to the Federation of American Scientists, “as of 2010 there were 5,135 inventions that were under secrecy orders”.
That number typically ranges between 5,000 and 6,000, with come patents becoming unclassified and new ones getting classified any given year.
A 1971 FOIA request into this issue of invention secrecy found that “energy conversion systems were likewise subject to review and possible restriction if they offered conversion efficiencies “in excess of 70-80%.”
Keep in mind, these details are just what’s admitted publicly. Another thing to keep in mind are all the inventions that get censored and suppressed before they’re able to make it to the patenting stage.
That 5-6,000 number could be a drop in the bucket.
What’s curious about the timeframe that the Invention Secrecy Act was created, the early 1950’s, is that this coincides with when many of the alternative tech inventors were gaining prominence and popularity.
This is just a few year after Tesla died, and the 1950’s was when T. Townsend Brown was developing his electro-gravitic understandings.
Not to mention this was when a score of Nazi scientists were brought into the U.S. under Operation Paperclip. The CIA, NASA, and the National Science Foundation was created just a few years prior to the Invention Secrecy Act. Also not to mention the rumors of recovered extraterrestrial saucers of Roswell (1947) and the “Battle of L.A.” incident (1943).
This seemed to be a very volatile time in the discovery and acquisition of sciences and technologies that the Powers That Be wanted to keep under wraps. These events together may explain the timing and nature of our Invention Secrecy Act.
The “Disclosure” Conundrum
Some within the “truth movement” are desperate for “Disclosure” from our government and authoritative institutions, calling for the Disclosure of UFO secrets, hidden technologies, and other information pertaining to these subjects.
But I wonder, why would we expect the people who have been lying to us all these years, to all of a sudden come clean? Makes sense.
A deeper layer to this issue involves the levels of secrecy and ways in which classifications are kept. Due to the compartmentalization, most people within our government, intelligence agencies, and elsewhere legitimately don’t know what is going on with these subjects.
They haven’t been read-in on the deepest levels of need-to-know intelligence, even if they think they have.
Due to this fractured nature of secrecy and compartmented info, it’s foolish to expect our government to admit what they’ve hidden from us, let alone even know all of what they’ve hidden.
A much better way to think of “Disclosure” is with another D word, Discovery. We should not be sitting on our asses waiting for the government to admit what it won’t and can’t, but we should be actively hunting for new, deeper understandings on our own.
We should be actively pursuing new sciences while breaking down the false, antiquated beliefs of the past. Imagine the potential for humanity if thousands and million of young children making their way into grade school weren’t brainwashed with fake science, but had their minds open to new ways of learning and understanding.
Any of these children, your child, could be the next Tesla, the next Keely, the next Brown.
How much has our civilization been held back because those with the talent and potential, were never able to find their true power because of their limited belief systems?
The worldwide revolution our civilization wants and desperately needs starts in the mind.
The process of awakening our consciousness and ridding ourselves of the false-base beliefs will lead us into this Age of Discovery.
The Vatican Is A Criminal Hornets’ Nest December 1 2025 | From: FinalWakeupCall / Various
The Jesuits and the Roman Church, dictate to the world:
The Vatican: The Holy See and the Vatican have been instrumental in converting all national governments on the planet into national corporations, deceitfully, with the same name in capital letters, operating under the international jurisdiction of the sea and the Roman Curia, that have forged all these fraudulent manipulations into a legal, fictional reality.
Now, it is the sole responsibility of the Holy See and Pope Francis to correct this breach of trust, and to stop the deliberate mismanagement of all corporate nations, as they are first and foremost responsible for their monstrous creation.
They pretend that we the living people are responsible for paying off our debts to them, while they created corporations by deception, while simultaneously creating a Trust with the same name in capital letters, to be plundered by the banking cartels.
The truth is that those that have created this mess are responsible for it. They are simply deceptively using similar names and holding positions in what appears to be public office for their private benefit.
Complex Fraud Scheme:
The Federal Reserve and central banks, are running the incorporated nations, as a bankrupt pass-through to purposefully advance vast sums of credit, based on people’s assets and their respective earthly nations, and use this fraud scheme to establish covert bonds against us the people.
Our property and assets serve as security, as part of the overall fraud, designed to usurp people’s assets and credit to the benefit of the cabal criminals.
For this scheme they literally stole people’s identities, by using our names for the creation of companies in a claim to ownership and control of each individual person.
They made the fraud scheme complex, and long term, hidden by deceptive covers of shamming, creating lucrative fraud schemes carried out over decades and even centuries on a mindboggling scale.
The Federal Reserve and central banks, unlawfully converted private accounts of millions of people into corporate accounts, technically belonging to corporate contractors, simply named after living people.
This facilitates the seizure of these accounts that banks unlawfully convert into accounts belonging to the central banks, without the disclosure hereof.
Eventually these fraudulently acquired accounts are converted into assets of the IMF, all of this being executed without people’s knowledge or consent.
Fortunately, the Germans are beginning to understand, that their country is not sovereign as it should be, but instead, a corporate vassal state of Washington DC and that their chancellor Angela Merkel serves these crooks, their financial interests and the interests of the Roman Curia at large and certainly not the interests of the Germans.
The Holy See:
The abuse of the corporations continue, and has reached legendary proportions, while still there is no comprehensive statement from the Holy See revealing the fictitious nature of these entities that have been spawned under its auspices and without public denunciation of criminality, and there is no visible undertaking to punish, regulate, or liquidate them.
The Holy See has officially been informed for about a decade of the illegal and immoral actions against humanity and against humanity’s lawful governments, which has been ongoing since the 1800’s, as all these covert goals have been accomplished by fraud and deceit.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
All these illegally established corporations must be liquidated, without harming the millions of innocents who have been misrepresented, and mischaracterised by them, as willing contractors.
Unfortunately, many people still don’t have a clue what has been done in their names and assets, and have never had the opportunity to respond.
It is at the Pope’s discretion, that these evil men continue their actions unopposed, and each day drag more innocent people into the web as accomplices-after-the-fact and still many others fall victim to this system of lies.
The Jesuits are the Real Spiritual Potentates:
The Jesuit controlled Vatican, is the sole owner of all western corporate countries: Satan, through the Freemasons, owns the Vatican, while the Pope is his slave. Catholicism will be eradicated forever, probably sooner than later in the course of this decennium. Throughout history, the Satanic Luciferian Jesuit Order has been tied together with war and genocide.
The Jesuits were formally removed from many countries, including France and England, but are still widely present in Spain and Italy.
Researchers claim that the Jesuits are the real spiritual potentates of the New World Order. Their choice for President of The United States was Paul Ryan, which is why the Pope demanded he become inserted as Speaker of the House in October of 2015, as the Vatican was the sole owner of the United States of America Inc., which defaulted on it’s credit facility – the Federal Reserve Bank – in December of 2012 and came out of international bankruptcy in August of 2015.
All Nation-corporations are created by the Roman Curia. It is no problem to trace this back to the Pope. At the same time; virtually all governments and their agencies in the world are corporations and are tied to, and ultimately under the control of the Holy See.
Puppet-Pope Francis, a Jesuit and selected by the cabal as Roman Pontiff and leader of the Holy See, basically owns and operates worldwide all these “governments” and their sub-corporations. The Pope is the CEO in charge of this whole criminal fraudulent system.
The Jesuits and the Roman Church:
The Jesuits and the Roman Church have altered history and hidden the rest by fabricating fairy tales about the earth’s real history.
One such lie was about Mary Magdalene, who was in truth, the wife of Jesus, and bore him two sons with the names Jesus II Justus, and Joseph, along with a daughter named Tamar.
This has been suppressed by the Roman Church. The Church began the procedure of killing scientists in 1600, to change the narrative to serve their goals.
The Holy Grail or Sangreal (Grail) is all about the blood of Jesus, and about the truth of who is a descendant of whom. Many have made false claims to certain Bloodlines, including the Rothschilds and the Monarchs.
Some believe that RH Negative blood comes from the Christ, and that a large portion of the Basques, have this blood type. Jesus was one of the few messengers sent to mankind to enlighten us about what and who we really are, and that if we are to grow in spirit, we must understand this information and drive out the negativity on the planet.
Major changes are occurring now to restore our standing, and teach us about what has been done to us by the Crime Cabal, which includes Draco Reptilians, Grays, and other creatures from a universe that has been intentionally hidden from us by these dark beings. Pope Francis preached recently that his god is Lucifer.
On earth the light workers have restored much of the truth, and it has rectified the Sangreal treaty of 300 A.D. proclaiming that all of earth’s people are sovereign, and should be treated as such.
This will be the end of the Phony Elites and their Slave-Scam that they have been running to the detriment of the people of the world for many centuries. – Scientists know that there were nuclear wars thousands of years ago, and that radiation still exists in small quantities in the Middle East as a result thereof.
Movies like “Close Encounters of the 3rd Kind” are true stories along with the alien abductions and the existence of multidimensional creatures, like Bigfoot and its ancestry, whose planet Marduk was obliterated and now forms our asteroid belt.
The cabal uses the Divide and Conquer strategy to get groups to fight each other, by creating a problem, like today’s bashing of Russia, hoping to spawn the destruction of humanity with WW3.
Fortunately, many of their plans have been thwarted, like the nuking of Charleston South Carolina in 2013, and the recent attempts to open a wormhole (CERN) propelling earth into this funnel.
Many will be stunned when the truth of our history is revealed in the near future. Stay tuned.
They hold office in the Vatican, the City of London, Washington District of Columbia, and the United Nations City State – located in New York City.
This information was received from an insider who, for obvious reasons, wishes to remain anonymous:
All those in positions of absolute power like the Queen of England, The Rothschilds, The Bushes, The Clintons, The Rockefellers, The Pope, the hidden Jesuit Hierarchy, etc. they are all ONE big happy blood family. They are all cousins, nephews, uncles and nieces to each other. I know some of these people so don’t let them fool you!
They are like Medusa, one single but intricate brain with many little serpent heads attached. The main figures are not even in the public eye.
The top of the pyramid is known as the black nobility – the Ancient Egyptian Ptolemaic Dynasty Rulers; The Saturnalia brotherhood, “The Real 13 Zoroastrian Bloodlines of the Illuminati”
The crime families are in total control of the company of Jesus – Jesuits, High Grey Council of Ten, the Black Pope, the White Pope, and everything else often talked about including all kingdoms around the globe.
These are the families that make up the intricate brain/head of the serpent. The self-designated Luciferian Demi-Gods who rule over their own G.O.D. (Gold-Oil-Drugs):
The Rothschilds were supposedly appointed by the Vatican, and that’s how it started. There are of course other powerful crime families like the Maximus Family, The Pallavicini – Maria Camila Pallavicini is more powerful than Queen Elizabeth.
Yes, indeed Queen Elizabeth is a subordinate to these people. The most powerful man in the world is The Grey Pope, his name is Pepe Orsini and he lives somewhere in Italy, most likely in Venice and The Vatican. He controls the Black and White Popes who are now both commoners. The Grey Pope always remains unseen!
The Knights of Malta, ostensibly a charitable organisation, are the oldest military order in the Catholic Church, and the fascist faction of that order has been secretly responsible for controlling world leaders through a combination of bribery, threats and murder.
In other words, they have been one of the main enforcement arms of the secret world government. They have also exercised strong influence over the US military, as many top brass are Knights of Malta.
Many of these top people now live in Asia, mainly China, India, Japan, Singapore, Indonesia and the Philippines. What does that tell you? Is this to create a New NWO with Asia at the helm? This is perhaps why they slowly moved all the US manufacturing infrastructure to Asia and China over the years.
In reality, the Black Pope is the President of this world, and the Bourbon King of Spain is the Monarch of the world – Not Queen Elizabeth as most believe. The King of Spain controls the Vatican through the Jesuits -The Spanish Borgia’s created the Jesuits.
The King of Spain is also known as the King of Jerusalem. What does this reveal about who secretly rules the Zionist-Khazarians’ state of Israel? The Grey Pope is the “designated” Ruler of it all!
If you are wondering why it is always the Italians and not the Spaniards who rule the Vatican City, it is because their modus operandi is always to run the show from behind the scenes, without any publicity, or public acclaim and so as to not arouse the 500+ age- old Italian hatred for the Spanish.
For details of this, see the history of the terrible reign of Pope Alexander VI and also The Divorce of Henry VIII of England- from Catherine of Aragon – Spain. – This short video, the Pyramid of Death, will enhance your insight about what is happening behind the scenes.
We need to stop looking at Countries as enemies and start tracking down these bloodlines and their foot soldiers such as the Committee of 300, the Bilderbergers, Trilateral Commission, etc. as the true enemies not only of the human race but of all life upon this planet!
If we really want to create the Power vacuum we need at the top of the Pyramid of power, to effectively start implementing some real changes, we need to make a move on these diabolic, malevolent people.
Now That You’ve Awakened, How Do You Help Awaken Others? November 30 2025 | From: WakeUpWorld / Various
So you see the ‘big picture.’ You’ve awakened to the realization that the planet has been hijacked - You know about their agenda - You know humanity can rise above it - You want to do something positive about it.
So, you start spreading the word to awaken others, telling them what’s really happening in the world.
The greater the number of awakened individuals spreading the word, the quicker we as a race can reach that critical mass of consciously awakened individuals needed to prevent the doom and gloom and co-create a turnaround for planetary transformation.
And this change in mass consciousness for planetary transformation has to be done, especially with a sense of urgency - it’s a do-or-die-situation for humanity.
However, learning how to effectively spread the word to the un-awakened can be quite a difficult task at times, and is a subject, I feel, that is not addressed enough in the alternative media community. Over the years, I have learnt a number of effective ways to do it that avoid many pitfalls. Here are some of those ways to help spread the word and play your part in our mass awakening and planetary change:
Keep it Simple
Share your revelations on an increasingly steady gradient over time (don’t get heavy), so that people will grasp more easily where you’re coming from and be more accepting of what you say along the way.
Distinguish the Nay-Sayers
No matter how eloquent you may be, how knowledgeable, good at communication, dealing with people’s idiosyncrasies etc., there are some people who just won’t get it and I doubt if they ever will.
These people will invalidate you without ever investigating your claims. The sooner you can distinguish these Nay-Sayers, limited by their self-imposed bubble of existence and belief, the sooner you can move on to spread the word to others who are more open-minded and receptive.
‘Gauge the Person’
If you want to make a difference then try to ‘gauge the person.’ That is, find out if they are open to what you have to say, and establish where they are at with their own awakening (if this is the case). Then you can speak to them on a level that they will gain further understanding.
Pick an Area
Many people began their awakening in a particular area of understanding. For example, my awakening began with health. If you can share a common ground with someone who somehow feels that things are not right in a particular subject area, then this indeed is the subject to discuss with them.
Do you have a specialist area of knowledge you could share?
Set an Example
As the saying goes, be that change you want to see in the world. Express your individuality. Walk the walk, talk the talk. For instance, if you’re campaigning for health then practice what you preach by living healthily. Be authentic. Others will follow.
Be Courageous… But Do it Lovingly!
You may well have something worth saying. However, if you come across somewhat angrily or in a huff, then the person / persons listening may not hear what you’re saying, not matter how well you justified it. They will only get angry with your anger or huffy with your huffiness. So, basically, do indeed be courageous if needed, but try to spread the word lovingly.
Remember, You Haven’t Anything to Sell…
For me, the way I see it is like this. I haven’t got anything to sell: I’m not out to change the world. I couldn’t change one person if I tried. People don’t change people.
All we can ever do is present an opportunity to someone. It is up to that person to take and make something out of that opportunity and then change them self.
Sow a seed in their mind.Too much information for someone unprepared for it will only push them away and alienate you. Ask a question. Don't you find it strange that...
Questions Are Answers
One way of spreading the word, getting someone interested and aware is to give them questions.Giving someone questions not only encourages inquiry but also avoids confrontation.Instead of you being head-on confronted, the person is more likely to confront the question. Thus, questions indirectly serve as answers.
Know Thy Stuff!
Be prepared to give knowledgeable responses when challenged! A good knowledgeable response breeds confidence and courage. (Conversely, it can be counterproductive to talk about topics you don’t really understand. - Editor.)
Spread the Written Word
There are many free or cheap and easy-to-run blog sites you can use for spreading the word. There are also many excellent free article submission websites to get your voice heard.
Or how about creating an email list or setting up a social media page? Or you could give a slide-show presentation to your family and friends… Can you think of other ways?
Final Thoughts…
That concludes some of the many ways we can help to awaken others. I hope that this has encouraged and inspired you!
And remember: Know that you can make a difference. Insignificance is an illusion.
When You Realise "A Bugs Life" Was Trying to Tell You Something...
The Khazarian Bankster Cult That Hijacked The World & Worthless Pieces Of Paper - Interest On Fake Money Is Confiscating Your Freedom November 29 2025 | From: VeteransToday / FinalWakeUpCall / Various
Heinrich Heine: “No one does more to further the revolution than the Rothschilds themselves… and, though it may sound even more strange, these Rothschilds, the bankers of kings, these princely pursestring-holders, whose European-state system, nevertheless carry in their minds a consciousness of their revolutionary mission.”
During the Revolution of 1848, Karl Marx wrote that “the Jew, who in Vienna, for example, is only tolerated, determines the fate of the whole Empire by his financial power. The Jew, who may have no rights in the smallest German states, decides the fate of Europe."
Comment: It could be construed from the way this author writes that he has a broblem with any and all Jews. It should be noted however that the real source of the problem the world faces today are in fact the Khazarian Zionists, the Luciferians who hide within Jewry using Judaism as cover, that are the problem.
"This is not an isolated fact. The Jew has emancipated himself in a Jewish manner, not only because he has acquired financial power, but also because…money has become a world power and the practical Jewish spirit has become the practical spirit of the Christian nations.” Marx had the Rothschilds in mind when he wrote this.
He went on to say that the only solution to the problem is for society to abolish “the empirical essence of Judaism,” and only then will “the Jew…become impossible”[1] in fomenting subversive activity.
Jacob Rothschild is the current head of the family
Heinrich Heine likewise noted, “No one does more to further the revolution than the Rothschilds themselves…and, though it may sound even more strange, these Rothschilds, the bankers of kings, these princely pursestring-holders, whose European-state system, nevertheless carry in their minds a consciousness of their revolutionary mission.”[2]
According to Heine:
“The Rothschild ‘system’ is also potentially revolutionary in itself” because since it “possesses the moral force or power which religion has lost, it can act as a surrogate for religion - indeed, it is a new religion, and when the old religion [Christianity] finally goes under it will provide substitutes for its practical blessings strangely enough, it is once again the Jews who invented this new religion.”[3]
Heine saw James Rothschild as “a powerful destroyer of patrician privilege, and the founder of a new democracy.”[4]
British philo-Semitic historian Niall Ferguson noted that “not only had the Rothschilds replaced the old aristocracy; they also represented a new materialist religion. ‘Money is the god of our time,’ declared Heine in March 1841, ‘and Rothschild is his prophet.’”[5]
Heine saw this as dangerous. Marx saw it too. The “new materialist religion” was Mammon, which came in the form of capitalism.
But if we peel the historical onion, we see the same pattern in the early centuries. In fact, Mammon was a major issue in Poland during the 1660s. During that time, scholarship for the Jews was primarily drawn from two main currents: the Talmud and rabbinical literature.[6] Jewish historiographer Heinrich Graetz tells us:
“The study of the Talmud in Poland, established by Shachna, Solomon Lurya, and Moses Isserles, reached a pitch attained at no previous time, nor in any other country. The demand for copies of the Talmud was so great that in less than twenty years three editions had to be printed, no doubt in thousands of copies…"
“The cultivation of a single faculty, that of hairsplitting judgment, at the cost of the rest, narrowed the imagination, hence not a single literary product appeared in Poland deserving the name of poetry. All the productions of the Polish school bore the Talmudic stamps, as the school regarded everything from the Talmudical point of view."
“The disciples of this school looked down almost with contempt on Scripture and its simple grandeur, or rather it did not exist for them…They knew something of the Bible from the extracts read in the synagogues, and those occasionally quoted in the Talmud…"
“A love of twisting, distorting, ingenious quibbling, and a foregone antipathy to what did not lie within their field of vision, constituted the character of the Polish Jews. Pride in their knowledge of the Talmud and a spirit of dogmatism attached even to the best rabbis, and undermined their moral sense…
Integrity and right-mindedness they had lost as completely as simplicity and the sense of truth. The vulgar acquired the quibbling method of the schools, and employed it to outwit the less cunning.
“They found pleasure and a sort of triumphant delight in deception and cheating against members of their own race; cunning could not well be employed, because they were sharp-witted; but the non-Jewish world with which they came into contact experienced to its disadavantage the superiority of the Talmudical spirit of the Polish Jews.”[7]
This energized an anti-Jewish spirit among the Poles, for they knew that they were being cheated. This quickly led to violence among the Gentiles, who in 1638 “slew 200 Jews, and destroyed several synagogues.”
Ten years later, Jews clung to the book of Zohar for Messianic revolution, and this again caused “bloody retribution,” during which both innocent and guilty Jews were slain.[8] Because of this, both Jews and gentiles died by the thousands in the same year.
Within the next three years, anti-Jewish resistance led again to a bloody war that took the lives of thousands of Jews, and caused many others to move to places like the Netherlands, Bohemia, Austria, Italy, and Hungary.
Wherever they went, however, they took the study of the Talmud with them, bearing the same attitudes towards Gentiles.
“Far from giving up their own method in a foreign country, they demanded that all the world should be regulated by them, and they gained their point.”[9]
Yet despite all of that, historian Israel Abrahams declares that for Jews in the Middle Ages “to cheat a non-Jew was a double crime: it was an act of robbery, and it involved a profanation of God’s holiness. The prices that they charged their co-religionists were higher than the prices they charged Gentiles.
That it was a greater offense against Judaism to cheat a Christian than to cheat a Jew is the constant burden of the Jewish moral books of the middle ages. I cannot remember a moral book of those times from which this doctrine is absent”[10]
Nothing could be further from the truth. Since Abrahams cannot support this historically or Talmudically, it is almost certainly for ideological purposes that he presented these views.
If he actually believed the statement above, then Abrahams loses whatever credibility he had as a reputable historian - though he quotes the Talmud extensively, he avoids passages which specifically deal with the goyim.[11] History contains too many instances of usury for us to be able to believe the assertions of one man.
Jewish historian Max I. Dimont likewise declared:
“The Talmud forbids usury in today’s sense of the word - that is, the taking of excessive interest rate - and it compares usurers to murderers. The Talmud was as sensible two thousand years ago as ethical Christian bankers are today.”[12]
Yet Jewish authorities such as Rabbi Akiva tell us the opposite:
“It was a positive commandment to burden the gentile with interest ‘because one should not benefit an idolator… and cause him as much damage as possible without deviating from righteousness’; others took this line.”[13]
Why did Dimont and others fail to tell us where the Talmud teaches these virtues? In the spirit of almost a thousand years of history, Dimont declared, “In actuality, in medieval days, it was not the rabbis who set the rates of lending money to Christians, but the Pope himself, or else the emperor or prince…
The Church used the money of the Jews to build new cathedrals, to commission new murals, to finance new monasteries.”[14]
This falsification of history cannot be allowed to go unchallenged.[15] It is even more incredible that Dimont provides no sources to back up his assertions. Yet this thesis has become the bedrock upon which many Jewish writers have built their careers.
In the seventeenth century, capitalism fell in the hands of the Jews. French historian Fernand Braudel called this “the ‘age’ of great Jewish merchants,”[16] during which they were involved in “lucrative areas of commerce” such as piracy “in which these Jewish merchants specialized.
Questions of morality did not apply - Jewish merchants were the brains behind the brawn - financing, advising, and sometimes leading the Caribbean’s emerging fighting force: a ragtag crew of misfits of every nation that coalesced as the dreaded pirates of the Spanish Main.”[17]
Eventually in the 1660s, “the pirate capital acquired a reputation as the world’s ‘wickedest city.’”[18]
By the time that the Rothschilds came on the political scene, much of Europe found itself under the guiding principle of the Khazarian Bankster Cult.
Carroll Quigley claimed that the Rothschilds, among other bankers, were secretly misleading governments and people; he says that Mirabaud and the Rothschilds became the dominant financial system between 1871 and 1900. British economist J. A. Hobson declared in 1902 that nothing could be pursued:
“By any European state…if the house of Rothschild…set their face against it.”[19]
The Rothschilds ended up making a fortune during the Napoleonic Wars.[20]
Austrian-born Jewish writer Frederic Morton (born Fritz Mandelbaum) declared that the Rothschilds “conquered the world more thoroughly, more cunningly, and much more lastingly than all the Caesars before or all the Hitlers after them.”[21]
Morton’s assertion is corroborated by biographer Derek Wilson, who declared that the Rothschilds were so financially and politically powerful that even royal governments and political leaders were afraid of them.[22] Their influence was so covert that Wilson moves on to say that:
“Clandestinity was and remained a feature of Rothschild political activity… Yet all the while they were helping to shape the major events of the day: by granting or withholding funds; by providing statesmen with an unofficial diplomatic service; by influencing appointments to high office; and by an almost daily intercourse with the great decision makers.”[23]
Wilson later argued that their clandestine ways were justifiable since they feared that they would be misrepresented by the press; whether Wilson is right is hard to justify.
But the Rothschilds made an enormous profit from the Napoleonic wars; after the dust settled, the Rothschilds “emerged from the war as millionaires and celebrities.”[24] One of the Rothschilds, Nathan, “was widely believed to have made extortionate profit from official contracts.”[25]
The simple questions is this: Is the Khazarian Bankster Cult still with us? Are the people in this cult still trying to manipulate the economy and political affairs? Are they still trying to buy politicians for their own political gain? Are they still trying to magically create money out of thin air?
Worthless Pieces Of Paper - Interest On Fake Money Is Confiscating Your Freedom
False and rigged economy: The economy is no longer based on education, hard work, and free market principles - the pricing and accountability that real free markets impose.
Instead, the economy is based on the manipulation of prices, speculative control of commodities, support of the dollar by Washington’s puppet states, manipulated and falsified official statistics, propaganda from the financial media, and inactivity by countries, such as Russia and China, who are directly harmed, both economically and politically by the US-dollar payments system.
The ‘hidden powers that be’ dictate policies and events on behalf of the House of Rothschild that control the global financial system; they have accumulated their power and wealth by theft and exploitation. Their whole system is based on a gigantic fraud because there is no money, as people perceive it.
The money you’ve earned is backed by nothing. The value is only the value that people can be persuaded it has. They are worthless pieces of paper and metal coins, or numbers on a computer screen that people are tricked into taking seriously.
Money is brought into circulation through what is called ‘credit’ from money, which is the belief that is upheld. Banks are not lending anything, but people are paying fortunes to borrow.
The Rothschilds have controlled banking and governments for centuries, and they have been able to dictate laws for the financial system and introduce ‘fractional reserve lending’.
This allows the banks to lend ten times what they have on deposit. In other words, they lend ‘money’ they don’t have and that doesn’t exist – called credit – while charging interest on it. So the banking system is a fantastic business, they lend money they don’t have and charge the borrower interest on it. Invented by Mayer Amschel Rothschild.
Mr. Rothschild loaned promissory notes – which are worthless – to governments and individuals. When the economy became buoyant, then he made money scarce, by tightening the control of the system, and collecting the collateral through the obligation of contracts.
On their decision this cycle was repeated – by applying pressure to ignite a war, as recently in Syria and the Ukraine. Then they control the availability of currency to determine which side will win the war. The governments, which agree to give them control of their economic system, are supported. Collection is guaranteed by economic aid to the enemy of the debtor.
The profits derived from this economic methodology have made the Rothschilds all the wealthier. They discovered that public greed would allow currency to be printed by government order beyond the limit of the backing with precious metals – inflating the production of goods and services to grow GDP.
Interest on Fake Money is Confiscating Your Freedom:
There is another vital aspect to be understood about interest on money; when a loan is taken out, the bank creates the money but not the interest with which all loans must be paid back.
The created money therefore excludes the amount owed in interest. This means there is never enough money in circulation to pay back all the outstanding loans plus interest.
This is a fatal flaw with regard to human freedom and it has been done purposely to ensure that bankruptcy and loss of property and possessions in favour of the banks is built into the system.
It is all part of the Rothschilds energy-construct that flows the wealth and energy of the people in their direction. A fantastic amount of taxpayers’ money goes straight to private banks to pay back interest on the money that the government could create itself, interest free.
‘Privatisation’ is the selling of state assets in response to bank-created debt. The world’s poorest countries are handing over control of their land and resources to the Rothschild banks when they are unable to pay back loans made specifically to ensnare them into this situation.
Third World debt was created to replace physical occupation of resource-rich or strategically situated countries with today’s financial occupation.
The Rothschild’s modus operandi is always the same: create chaos, preferably in the form of war – this is most profitable for them. Their purpose is to create major headaches for governments and people. The next step is to “offer solutions” to end the chaos.
Their solutions always entail gaining more control as part of the cost for the “rescue”. In short the standard method is: create the problem, wait for the reaction, and then offer the solution to be implemented as originally envisioned.
For the same reason 9/11 was created with the subsequent war on terror to get the Home Security Office founded, with the sole purpose of controlling the movement of people, and commencing wars in Afghanistan and Iraq.
In this same manner today’s global economic crisis is being created: Quoted from a secret document from the CFR in 1950:
“We shall have a World Government, whether people like it or not. The only question is whether the World Government will be achieved by conquest or consent.”
A summary of what the protocols say, which were later denounced as being false:
They describe a secret conspiracy for Jewish [Khazarian] world domination.
They describe bringing the Gentile world under a single government, eliminating all rival nations, governments, religions, and economic systems.
Actual domination of the world – through violence, preparation through subtle sabotage of existing systems (internet?). Stressed in the protocols is the importance and need for the masses to welcome their enslavement.
Effectuated by:
Use loans and moneylending to bankrupt and control states.
Use mass media to control the minds of the masses.
Artificial creation of discord, war and economic depression.
Establishment of governments.
The protocols refer to the carrying out of the directives of the conspiracy, as well as to an enormous cache of gold that is at their disposal. This Gold belongs to the people of the World. The protocols also refer to the Jesuits, with secret societies such as freemasons as a front for their covert operations.
What the public in general doesn’t understand is that the force covertly behind the manufactured problem is the same force offering the solutions, which just happens to advance the agenda of the centralisation of power and control.
All Presidents except for Lincoln and Kennedy – both were killed in office – were ultimately under the control of this secret cabal.
When their orders were disobeyed, a fatal accident occurred to make place for the desired change of power. The same people for example ultimately controlled Bush and Obama, as with all the presidents of the Central Banks, meaning it doesn’t matter who the Frontman is in the Whitehouse or Brussels.
The World Economy is Controlled by the Issuance of Fake Money:
By controlling the issuance of money through credit, the Rothschilds control the entire world economy. They can expand it or crash it at will. The depression that began in 2008 is yet another Rothschild creation to further their agenda of centralised global finance and to introduce the long-planned world central bank.
They have been engineering booms and busts for centuries to advance their goals. Simple to do once you receive interest on money and control the creation of money. The difference between a boom and bust is the amount of money in circulation and its perceived value. They dictate both.
They decide how much money will be issued and circulated through their control of banks and governments. Stimulating a boom by making credit easy – more money in circulation, and this stimulates the population to become deeply indebted during economic good times. Then the economy is crashed, by finding an excuse to take money out of circulation, making credit harder to get.
Businesses and people cannot repay their loans because there is not enough money in circulation to generate economic activity, and the Rothschilds take the rewards, seizing all the collateral that was pledged when the loans were taken out. That reduces the number of businesses dramatically.
Their products and markets are taken over by Rothschild corporations to further centralise their global economic power. The same occurs with governments, when a depression decimates government revenues they seek still more loans to maintain spending, while the Rothschild control of government continues to expand.
In fact, at the very least, many governments including the US, UK, and EU have been in a state of bankruptcy to the cabal since the 1930s resp. since the EU’s inception.
The recent Boom and Bust followed by the crash of 2008 with the subsequent credit crunch was all the work of the Rothschilds and their henchmen like Greenspan, Bernanke, and now Yellen.
The Rothschilds have engineered these cycles for hundreds of years, including the crash of 1929 and the great depression of the 1930s.
Most economist have no idea what really is going on, they suggest that booms and busts are all part of economic cycles, which they are not. It is purely systematic manipulation to steal the real wealth from the people.
A study of Princeton and Northwestern universities proves the correctness of the above evidence that indeed the elite cabal runs this show.
"Oligarchy is a form of government in which power is vested in a dominant class and a small group exercises control over the general population.
It concluded that the US government represents not the interests of the majority of citizens but those of the rich and powerful (the cabal). The resulting data empirically verifies that the economic elite determines US policies.
… Economic elites and organized groups representing business interests have substantial independent impacts on US government policy, while mass-based interest groups and average citizens have little or no independent influence,” says the peer-reviewed study.
Nigel Farage: I Hope Taxpayers All Over Europe Listen to this:
The Violence-Inducing Effects Of Psychiatric Medication & The Psychiatric Agenda Destroys Creative Children November 28 2025 | From: KellyBroganMD / JonRappoport / Various
On May 17, 2017, we learned that Chris Cornell of Soundgarden had reportedly committed suicide by hanging.
His family reports knowing a different Chris than one who would make this fatal decision, and suspect his anti-anxiety prescription in the altered state he was witnessed to be in the night he died.
Perhaps an “addict turned psychiatric patient”, like so many, Chris Cornell seemed to have left the frying pan of substance abuse for the fire of psychiatric medication risks.
For reasons that remain mysterious, those under the influence of psychiatric medication often specifically choose to hang themselves in their moment of peak impulsivity.
Some, like Kim’s husband Woody who was never depressed a day in his life but prescribed Zoloft by his internist, even verbalize a felt experience of his head coming apart from his body in the days before he was found hanged in his garage.
Then there’s 14 year old Naika, a foster child in Florida who hanged herself on a FB livestream after being treated with 50mg of Vyvanse, a drug treatment for ADHD that leads to a domino effect of diagnoses and psychiatric meds including a 13 fold increase in likelihood of being prescribed an antipsychotic medication and 4 fold increase in antidepressant medications than controls.
Are these just rare anecdotes? Is this just the cost of treatment that is helpful for most? Are we blaming medication for what might have been severe mental illness that was undertreated and/or undiagnosed?
Informed Consent: the Premise of Ethical Medicine
I believe first and foremost in informed consent. If you are informed of the risks, benefits, and alternatives to a given treatment, you will be empowered to make the best decision for yourself based on your personal, family, philosophical, and religious life context.
But the truth is that prescribers are not in a position to share the known risks of medications because we learn only of their purported benefits with a short-tagline of dismissively rare risks that are thought to be invariably outweighed by the presenting clinical concern.
But what about serious risks – including impulsive suicide and homicide – surely we are informing patients of that possibility, right?
Wrong.
In fact, the FDA and the pharmaceutical industry have gone to great lengths to conceal multiple signals of harm so we certainly can’t expect your average prescriber to have done the investigative work required to get at the truth.
In fact, from 1999-2013, US psychiatric medication prescriptions have increased by a whopping 117% concurrent with a 240% increase in death rates from these medications.
So let’s review some of the evidence that suggests that it may not be in your best interest or the best interest of those around you for you to travel the path of medication-based psychiatry.
Because, after all, if we don’t screen for risk factors – if we don’t know who will become the next victim of psych-med-induced violence – then how can we justify a single prescription?
Are we at a point in the history of medicine where random acts of personal and public violence are defensible risks of treatment for stress, anxiety, depression, inattention, psychosocial distress, irritable bowel syndrome, chronic fatigue, and even stress incontinence?
Let the Science Speak
Suicide
Prescribed specifically to “prevent” suicide, antidepressants now come with a black box warning label of suicide risk since 2010.
Multi-billion dollar lawsuits like the settlement of Study 329 have been necessary to unlock the cabinet drawers of an industry that cares more about profit than human lives.
A reanalysis of study 329 which initially served as a landmark study in 2001 supporting the prescription of antidepressants to children, has now demonstrated that these medications are ineffective in this population and play a causal role in suicidal behavior.
Concealing and manipulating data that shows this signal of harm, including a doubling of risk of suicide with antidepressant treatment, has generated seeming confusion around this incomprehensibly unacceptable risk profile.
In fact, a reanalysis of an influential US National Institute of Mental Health 2007 study, revealed a four-fold increase in suicide despite the fact that the initial publication claimed no increased risk relative to placebo.
According to available data – 3 large meta-analyses – more psychiatric treatment means more suicide. Well, that might seem a hazard of the field, right? Where blaming medications for suicide would be like saying that umbrellas cause the rain.
That’s why studies in non-suicidal subjects and even healthy volunteers who went on to experience suicidality after taking antidepressants are so compelling.
Benzodiazepines (like what Cornell was taking) and hypnotics (sleep and anxiety medications) also have a documented potential to increase risk of completed and attempted suicide and have been implicated in impulsive self-harm including self-inflicted stab wounds during changes to dosage.
We also find the documented possibility that suicidality could emerge in patients who are treated with this class of medications even when they are not suicidal with recent research stating:
“Benzodiazepine receptor agonist hypnotics can cause parasomnias, which in rare cases may lead to suicidal ideation or suicidal behavior in persons who were not known to be suicidal”.
And, of course, these medications themselves provide the means and the method with a known lethal poisoning profile.
Homicide
Clearly murderers are mentally ill, right? What if I told you that the science supports the concern that we are medicating innocent civilians into states of murderous impulsivity?
When Andrew Thibault began to research the safety of a stimulant drug recommended to his son, he entered a rabbit hole he has yet to emerge from.
After literally teaching himself code to decrypt the data on the FDA Adverse Event Reporting System website, he was able to cull 2,000 pediatric fatalities from psychotropic medications, and 700 homicides.
A Freedom of Information Act and a lawsuit later, he continues to struggle with redacted and suppressed information around 24 homicides directly connected to the use of psychotropics including the homicide by a 10 year old treated with Vyvanse of an infant.
Another case, ultimately recovered, involved statements from a 35 year old perpetrator / patient, who murdered her own daughter, as directly implicating as:
“When I took nortriptyline, I immediately wanted to kill myself. I’d never had thoughts like that before”.
To begin to scientifically explore the risk of violence induced by psychotropic medication, a study sample needs to be representative, the reason for taking the drug needs to be taken into consideration, the effect needs to be controlled for, as do any other intoxicants.
Professor Jari Tiihonen’s research group analysed the use of prescription drugs of 959 persons convicted of a homicide in Finland and found that pre-crime prescription of benzodiazepines and opiates resulted in the highest risk (223% increase) of committing homicide.
Relatedly, eleven antidepressants, six sedative/hypnotics and three drugs for attention deficit hyperactivity disorder represented the bulk of 31 medications associated with violence reported to the FDA.
Now an international problem, a Swedish registry study identified a statistically significant increase in violence in males and females under 25 years old prescribed antidepressants.
Implicated in school shootings, stabbings, and even the Germanwings flight crash, prescribing of psychotropics prior to these incidences has been catalogued on ssristories.org leading me to suspect psychiatric prescribing as the most likely cause in any and all reports of unusually violent behavior in the public sphere.
Is Association Really Causation?
Beyond the cases where violence to self or others was induced in a non-violent, non-depressed, non-psychotic individual, what other evidence is there that speaks to how this could possibly be happening?
The most seminal paper in this regard, in my opinion, was published in 2011 by Lucire and Crotty. Ten cases of extreme violence were committed by patients who were prescribed antidepressants – not for major mental illness or even for depression – but for psychosocial distress (i.e. work stress, dog died, divorce).
What these authors identified was that these ten subjects had variants to liver enzymes responsible for drug metabolism exacerbated by co-administration of other drugs and substances including herbs. All returned to their baseline personalities when the antidepressant was discontinued.
Now referred to as akathisia-induced impulsivity, the genetic risk factors for this Russian Roulette of violence are not screened for prior to psychotropic prescribing.
Akathisia is a state of severe restlessness associated with thoughts of suicide and homicide.
Many patients describe it as a feeling-less state of apathy – and what I would describe as a disconnection from their own souls, their own experience of human connection, and any measure of self-reflection.
The genetic underpinnings of this kind of medication-induced vulnerability are just beginning to be explored with identification of precursor symptoms to violence including severe agitation.
In a randomized, placebo-controlled trial, healthy volunteers exhibited an almost 2 fold increased risk of symptoms that can lead to violence.
A 4-5 fold increased risk was noted in patients prescribed a generic version of the antidepressant Cymbalta, off-label, for stress urinary incontinence (a non-psychiatric indication).
There is Another Way
Perhaps it’s as if we are offering the blade edge of a knife to those falling off the cliff of struggle and suffering. Because the idea of managing a chemical imbalance with chemicals seems to make sense.
We live in a cultural context that makes no room for the relevance, meaning, and significance of symptoms – symptoms are simply bad and scary and they must be managed. We don’t make room for patients to ask why they are not ok.
In fact, every woman I have ever tapered off of psychiatric drugs into experiences of total vitality once believed that she would be a medicated psychiatric patient for life.
If you knew that radical self-healing potential lies within each and every one of us, if you only knew that was possible, you might start that journey today. It’s side effect free…
The Psychiatric Agenda Destroys Creative Children
“Take a child who wants to invent something out of thin air, and instead of saying no, tell him he has a problem with his brain, and then stand back and watch what happens. In particular, watch what happens when you give him a toxic drug to fix his brain. You have to be a certain kind of person to do that to a child. You have to be, for various reasons, crazy and a career criminal.” - The Underground, Jon Rappoport
First, here are a few facts that should give you pause:
According to NAMI (National Alliance on Mental Illness);
“More than 25 percent of [US] college students have been diagnosed or treated by a professional for a mental health condition within the past year.”
NAMI: “One in four young adults between the ages of 18 and 24 have [we claim] a diagnosable mental illness.”
According to healthline.com, 6.4 million American children between the ages of 4 and 17 have been diagnosed with ADHD. The average age for the child’s diagnosis is 7.
BMJ 2016;352:i1457: “The number of UK children and adolescents treated with antidepressants rose by over 50% from 2005 to 2012, a study of five Western countries published in European Neuropsychopharmacology has found.”
Children are being diagnosed and dosed with toxic drugs at a staggering rate. But, as I have shown in many past articles, NO so-called mental disorder is based on a lab test.
No blood, saliva, genetic, brain test. ALL 300 or so official mental disorders are defined by menus of behaviors concocted by committees of psychiatrists.
On that foundation, the diagnoses and the drugs are handed out.
Let’s look at just one of the drugs: Ritalin (or any similar ADHD medicine). After a creative child is seen fidgeting in class, looking bored, studying what he wants to study, ignoring classroom assignments, focusing on what interests him, he is diagnosed with ADHD. Then comes the drug.
In 1986, The International Journal of the Addictions published an important literature review by Richard Scarnati. It was called “An Outline of Hazardous Side Effects of Ritalin (Methylphenidate)” [v.21, pp. 837-841].
Scarnati listed a large number of adverse effects of Ritalin and cited published journal articles which reported each of these symptoms.
For every one of the following (selected and quoted verbatim) Ritalin effects, there is at least one confirming source in the medical literature:
Paranoid delusions
Paranoid psychosis
Hypomanic and manic symptoms, amphetamine-like psychosis
Activation of psychotic symptoms
Toxic psychosis
Visual hallucinations
Auditory hallucinations
Can surpass LSD in producing bizarre experiences
Effects pathological thought processes
Extreme withdrawal
Terrified affect
Started screaming
Aggressiveness
Insomnia
Since Ritalin is considered an amphetamine-type drug, expect amphetamine-like effects
Psychic dependence
High-abuse potential DEA Schedule II Drug
Decreased REM sleep
When used with antidepressants one may see dangerous reactions including hypertension, seizures and hypothermia
Convulsions
Brain damage may be seen with amphetamine abuse.
Under this chemical assault on the brain, what are the chances that a creative child will go on in life to become an innovator, rather than a victim of psychiatric drugging?
Make a list of your favorite innovators. Imagine them as bored distracted children sitting in classrooms… and then diagnosed, and then hammered with drugs prescribed by a doctor.
This is happening now. The institution of psychiatry is making it happen. What about the consequences of diagnosing clinical depression in larger numbers of young children? What about the antidepressant drugs?
Here is just a sprinkling of information about antidepressants, from a huge body of literature:
Psychiatrist Peter Breggin: February 1990 American Journal of Psychiatry (Teicher et al, v.147:207-210) reports on:
“Six depressed patients, previously free of recent suicidal ideation, who developed `intense, violent suicidal preoccupations after 2-7 weeks of fluoxetine [Prozac] treatment.'
The suicidal preoccupations lasted from three days to three months after termination of the treatment. The report estimates that 3.5 percent of Prozac users were at risk.
While denying the validity of the study, Dista Products, a division of Eli Lilly, put out a brochure for doctors dated August 31, 1990, stating that it was adding `suicidal ideation’ to the adverse events section of its Prozac product information.”
An earlier study, from the September 1989 Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, by Joseph Lipiniski, Jr., indicates that in five examined cases people on Prozac developed what is called akathesia.
Symptoms include intense anxiety, inability to sleep, the “jerking of extremities,” and “bicycling in bed or just turning around and around.”
"May also contribute to the drug’s tendency to cause self-destructive or violent tendencies … Akathesia can become the equivalent of biochemical torture and could possibly tip someone over the edge into self-destructive or violent behavior.
The June 1990 Health Newsletter, produced by the Public Citizen Research Group, reports, ‘Akathesia, or symptoms of restlessness, constant pacing, and purposeless movements of the feet and legs, may occur in 10-25 percent of patients on Prozac.’”
The well-known publication, California Lawyer, in a December 1998 article called “Protecting Prozac,” details some of the suspect maneuvers of Eli Lilly in its handling of suits against Prozac.
California Lawyer also mentions other highly qualified critics of the drug:
"David Healy, MD, an internationally renowned psychopharmacologist, has stated in sworn deposition that `contrary to Lilly’s view, there is a plausible cause-and-effect relationship between Prozac’ and suicidal-homicidal events.
An epidemiological study published in 1995 by the British Medical Journal also links Prozac to increased suicide risk.”
When pressed, proponents of these SSRI antidepressant drugs (Prozac, Zoloft, Paxil, etc.) sometimes say, “Well, the benefits for the general population far outweigh the risk.”
But the issue of benefits will not go away on that basis.
A shocking review-study published in The Journal of Nervous and Mental Diseases (1996, v.184, no.2), written by Rhoda L. Fisher and Seymour Fisher, called “Antidepressants for Children,” concludes:
“Despite unanimous literature of double-blind studies indicating that antidepressants are no more effective than placebos in treating depression in children and adolescents, such medications continue to be in wide use.”
In wide use. This despite such contrary information and the negative, dangerous effects of these drugs.
There are other studies: “Emergence of self-destructive phenomena in children and adolescents during fluoxetine treatment,” published in the Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry (1991, vol.30), written by RA King, RA Riddle, et al.
It reports self-destructive phenomena in 14% (6/42) of children and adolescents (10-17 years old) who had treatment with fluoxetine (Prozac) for obsessive-compulsive disorder.
July, 1991. Journal of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Hisako Koizumi, MD, describes a thirteen-year-old boy who was on Prozac: “full of energy,” “hyperactive,” “clown-like.”
All this devolved into sudden violent actions which were “totally unlike him.”
September, 1991. The Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Author Laurence Jerome reports the case of a ten-year old who moves with his family to a new location. Becoming depressed, the boy is put on Prozac by a doctor.
The boy is then “hyperactive, agitated … irritable.” He makes a “somewhat grandiose assessment of his own abilities.”
Then he calls a stranger on the phone and says he is going to kill him. The Prozac is stopped, and the symptoms disappear.
For money, for profit, for status, for control, there exists a professional class called psychiatrists. They approach children - particularly creative children who refuse to fall into lock-step with a regimented program of learning - as outliers, as ill, as strange, as maladjusted, as threats to the system.
And this professional class takes action. Diagnose the children, drug them, bring them back into line, make them “normal,” reduce their curiosity and independence and drive and will power.
Instead of using overt physical force, they use relatively invisible chemical force.
Under the banner of caring, they perform, on the young, a scientific ritual of sacrifice, a rite of passage into the dead world where they, the elite rulers, exist.
Geoengineering And Weather Modification Exposed November 27 2025 | From: ClimateViewer / Various
The most extensive research on Geoengineering and Weather Modification experiments worldwide, with articles, maps, and timelines to fully expose the hidden world of Weather Control.
This page is a table of contents for Jim Lee’s research on Geoengineering. All of the information on this page is backed up by references, feared by trolls and geoengineering lobbyists alike, and is the most accurate literature on who’s controlling your weather, why they are doing it, and where.
For the uninitiated, prepare yourself to be shocked. For you veterans of the Climate Engineering activism world, our articles, maps, and timelines will answer many of your burning questions and help you connect the dots.
As the media distributes pro-geoengineering propaganda in a political climate ruled by fear, the Lord’s of Weather (geoengineering lobbyist’s) are suggesting coating our skies with sulfur, aluminum, titanium, and diamond dust to block the sun and cool our planet.
While acknowledging that Geoengineering Solar Radiation Management will alter rainfall patterns worldwide and likely kill people, the Lord’s of Weather ignore the cold hard facts: after 60 years of cloud-seeding, nobody has ever produced any proof of its efficacy.
Billions of dollars are spent worldwide altering clouds with silver iodide and other chemical nano-particles despite the fact that cloud seeding likely does not work. Even worse, all of the separate cloud seeding programs worldwide could be altering our weather in dangerous ways where the butterfly effects of aggravated clouds destroy property and end lives, even the CIA is worried about weather warfare.
Despite numerous lawsuits over weather modification activities, most losses are blamed on “nature” as there is little transparency or accountability. With a cloud-seeding’s terrible track record, how could anyone support geoengineering SRM’s uncontrolled global weather manipulations.
Geoengineering the sky has been a worldwide phenomenon since the start of commercial aviation. Ships and jet aircraft are covering our skies in man-made clouds.
Despite 60 years of jet planes making clouds, aviation-induced cloudiness, persistent contrails, contrail cirrus, and aerosol-cloud interaction are barely understood with today’s best supercomputers and are not properly accounted for in IPCC models.
This active experiment goes on everyday, over your heads, with over 100,000 flights a day worldwide and zero accountability.
Space Weather Modification is also gaining more publicity. When upper atmospheric nuclear explosions were banned back in the 1950’s, the U.S. military still hell bent on replacing our fickle ionosphere with something more reliable decided to dump millions of needles in space to create their own.
Despite these dire warnings, the practice of heating chemical releases in space is just “a conspiracy theory.”
This page is an effort to raise awareness of atmospheric experimentation and to lobby for transparency in the geoengineering and weather modification industries, and hopefully to see an end to weather control efforts, both intentional and unintentional, in hopes that one day my child will see natural weather.
Let one thing in nature stay natural, hand’s off our sky.
Tell people about this page and share with your friends!
Spread the word about our solution, “The Clarity Clause” and help us make this law a reality!
Please watch and download the PowerPoint of my explosive presentation given at the Freedom Force International’s 3rd Congress in Phoenix, Arizona. December 3, 2016:
Geoengineering, Weather Modification, and Weaponizing Nature
Geoengineer Ken Caldeira Gets Caught Lying *Loses Temper*
After lying about weaponizing the weather, has audio played back to him to prove it, then lies again. After being confronted yet again about this fact, he completely loses it and tells the interviewer to shut the f*** up!
Pineal Gland: How To Detox The Part Of Your Brain That Controls Sleep, Aging And Your State Of Mind November 26 2026 | From: HealthyCures / Various
The importance of the detoxification of the pineal gland is he, even though you might not be aware of it.
This little gland is located in the middle of the brain, and its function is related to our physical and mental well-being, due to which it is often called “the third eye”.
Unfortunately, this gland is bombarded with numerous toxins due to the modern lifestyles we lead, the unhealthy foods we consume, and the stress we are daily exposed to. Therefore, it becomes hardened, calcified, and its function is impeded.
However, if you detoxify it, you will restore its function completely.
The pineal gland has the size of a pea and is located in the center of the brain. Its shape is similar to a small Pinecone. Its role is to secrete Melatonin, a chemical whose function is to regulate our sleeping patterns.
Yet, this strong antioxidant also slows down aging. Additionally, the pineal gland also secretes another hormone, serotonin, which is a neurotransmitter which maintains a balance of the mind and keeps us happy.
Scientists have still not confirmed this, but people claim that melatonin supplements create elevated feelings of empathy. Also, it has been hypothesized that the pineal gland produces DMT, a chemical linked to creativity, dreams, and hallucination. This explains its nickname “Third Eye”.
Decalcify the Pineal Gland
The pineal gland gets calcified as a result of the accumulation of toxins. The main culprit is Sodium Fluoride, which is found in most drinking water, and many kinds of toothpaste.
Other causes of calcification of the pineal gland include:
Refined sugar
Most processed foods
Alcohol
Caffeine
Dietary hormones
Mercury (found in most fish)
Tobacco
Yet, these are the most effective ways to detoxify the pineal gland:
Activator X (Vitamin K1/K2)
This vitamin is manifested in two ways- K1 and K2. The first one is found in green leafy vegetables, while K2 is created by microflora in the intestines, and is found in foods like eggs yolks, chicken or goose livers, dairy from organically reared cows, fish roe, sauerkraut, fish oils (omega 3), and shellfish.
In a combination with vitamins A and D3, it eliminates calcium from arteries and the pineal gland and transfers it into the bones instead.
Iodine
Studies have shown that iodine eliminates sodium fluoride through the urine. Yet, many people are deficient in it, so you should eat more iodine-rich foods, like seaweed, Yet, make sure you also consume calcium as it lowers its levels.
Garlic
Garlic is one of the most powerful natural antibiotics, and it also detoxifies the pineal gland by dissolving calcium.
You should consume half a bulb every 2 days, and if its odor is too strong for you, soak it in some freshly squeezed lemon juice, or apple cider vinegar.
Apple Cider Vinegar
Raw apple cider vinegar is high in malic acid which detoxifies this gland, so you can add it to salads and enjoy its benefits.
Boron
Boron is another potent pineal gland detoxifier, and It removes fluoride from the body system, preventing further calcification.
Distilled Water
Distilled water is the purest water form, so it washes away toxins and calcium deposits.
Yet, make sure you also consume minerals during this method.
Tamarind
Tamarind is commonly used in the Ayurveda, and it is made from the bark of the Tamarind Tree. It effectively eliminates fluoride through the urine. Tamarind is often added to some curries for its sweet/sour flavor and used in the preparation of teas and tinctures by steeping in hot water for 2/3 minutes.
The health of the pineal gland is of high importance for the overall health, as it improves the feelings of well-being and the sleep patterns.
You should perform a 4-5 day detox to cleanse it and support its function and make sure you reduce the intake of fluoride as much as possible.
Every day, in meetings at all levels of government, representatives of Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs), planning groups, and federal agents surround elected representatives and insist that their policies have nothing to do with international agendas.
They regularly publish reports and rail against anyone even mentioning the names Agenda 21 or the new Agenda 2030. “No, no, no,” they insist. “Those people are just crazy conspiracy theorists. Ours is just a local plan for our community.”
Elected Representatives are often confused. Issues and policies suddenly appear in front of them with sample, ready-made legislation. And then the unending pressure begins for them to pass it.
There is confusion, uncertainty and there is the herd mentality to pass legislation. And it’s passed without knowledge of its origins, its purpose, and especially a lack of understanding of its consequences. “Just do it,” goes the mantra.
What most of these legislators fail to understand is the direct relationship much of this legislation has with a much larger agenda. Most legislation interconnects with other pieces and parts contained in other legislation.
Like the children’s song goes…”the toe bone’s connected to the ankle bone…” And it’s done so well, wrapped in innocent-sounding, positive wrapping, so that most elected representatives will argue vigorously that they passed no such thing. And most of all, they will answer, Agenda 21, never heard of it. Just local. Just local. Just local.
Well, let me show you how it works and how the toe bone gets connected to the ankle bone ending up with the Frankenstein monster.
Here are six issues that are rarely connected to Agenda 21 and Sustainable Development (especially when we are assured that Agenda 21 has nothing to do with local, state or federal government policy).
However, these seemingly unrelated policies, once implemented, help enforce the stated Agenda 21 goal of “reorganizing human society.”
Issue 1: Global Warming / Climate Change
It has been so discredited in the true scientific community that proponents have become almost hysterical in their continued attempts to enforce Climate Change policy.
Most recently the USJustice Department is considering legal action against “deniers.”
Why don’t they stop, even to question if their science is sound? They instead use great energy to attack any scientist who does dare ask questions or finds data contrary to the “official” line.
Why is it so vitally important that they continue to promote something that clearly is, to say the least, questionable?
It’s because all of Agenda 21 policy is built on the premise that man is destroying the Earth. Climate Change is their “proof.” To eliminate that premise is to remove all credibility and purpose for their entire agenda.
They are willing to go to any length, even lies, to keep the climate change foot on our throats.
On the local level this translates into planning policy that controls energy use and the efforts to cut down on the use of cars, enforcement of the building of expensive light rail train systems and bike paths and installation of smart meters, etc.
But don’t take my word for it. I’ll let them speak for themselves:
“No matter if the science of global warming is all phony… climate change provides the greatest opportunity to bring about justice and equality in the world.”
-
Christine Stewart (Former Canadian Minister of the Environment)
“We’ve got to ride this global warming issue. Even if the theory of global warming is wrong, we will be doing the right thing in terms of economic and environmental policy.”
-
Timothy Wirth (President, UN Foundation)
“It doesn’t matter what is true. It only matters what people believe is true.”
-
Paul Watson (Co-Founder of Green Peace)
Issue 2: Fear of Over Population
This
is the central driving force behind nearly every Sustainable policy initiative. It’s the real force behind Stack and Pack Smart Growth cities.
The fact is, in developed nations populations are actually going down. The only real growth in the US population in recent years has been from immigration, legal or otherwise. Open border immigration policy is actually implementation of Agenda 21 as part of the drive to destroy national sovereignty and “nation states.”
Environmentalists insist that the borders must be open to allow as many to immigrate here as possible. They argue that the U.S. has a greater ability to control them and protect the environment than if we left them in third world countries. That’s because the Greens already have a stranglehold over our nation’s industry through massive environmental regulations.
In the face of their fear of overpopulation, however, studies have shown that there is no world wide over population crisis. In fact one study insists that we could put the entire population of the world in an area the size of Texas with a population density of Paris, France.
Over population, and its accompanying environmental degradation, is a problem primarily in countries where the poor are deprived by government to improve their conditions. Nations that refuse to legalize private property ownership for the masses, for example, are a primary reason for growing poverty.
Meanwhile, Sustainablists work to keep these nations from developing or increasing energy use, thereby keeping them poor. Green regulations stop the building of infrastructure. They panic at the idea of increased energy use in developing nations.
Instead of working to solve the real problems – the root of poverty- they exploit the excuse of over population and advocate enforcing polices to drastically reduce populations. China’s brutal one child policy of forced abortions and sterilization has become their model.
Do you think I’m joking? Then consider these quotes from the Sustainablists:
“Childbearing should be a punishable crime against society, unless the parents hold a government license. All potential parents should be required to use contraceptive chemicals, the government issuing antidotes to citizens chosen for childbearing.”
-
David Brower (Sierra Club)
“A reasonable estimate for an industrialized world society at the present North American material standard of living would be 1 billion. At a more frugal European standard of living, 2 to 3 billion would be possible.”
-
United Nations Global Biodiversity Assessment.
Issue 3: The Destruction of the Free Market System
We have heard statement after statement from the UN; from members of Congress; the news media; and from Hollywood, all deriding the free market system as evil, corrupt and a tool of the rich to hold down the poor.
So now, after deciding that the poor are expendable for the sake of stopping overpopulation, suddenly the planners are worried about them – if it leads to their ability to raid our bank accounts.
So are they really worried about protecting the environment – or are they actually honoring the tactics of Jesse James?
Redistribution of wealth is behind every policy that comes out of the UN, and the Obama Administration as well. The EPA is the attack dog to shut down entire industries like coal. It has become very difficult to operate a manufacturing business in the US, and nearly impossible to start a new one.
Environmental protection is always the excuse, even when Obama’s own State Department said the Keystone Pipeline was not an environmental threat.
A couple of years ago, radical greens, wielding torches, demonstrated outside the home of the head of the Keystone pipeline company. Visions of the terror of the Dark Agenda?
At the UN’s Rio + 20 Summit held in 2012, the idea of “Zero Economic Growth” was advocated – just to keep things fair.
It was stated that even the building of new roads upsets the status quo and disrupts a well ordered society. Such idiotic ideas are the driving force behind Sustainable Development. Again, images of the Dark Ages come to mind.
Yet, consider “local” planning programs that cut off access roads, and again, discourage cars. What about the EPA’s war on industry. Pretty hard to have economic growth without industry. The timber industry is killed and communities die.
Dams are torn down and farmers disappear. Zero Economic Growth in the making. Just local?
Again, not my words, let them tell you themselves:
“We must make this an insecure and inhospitable place for capitalists and their projects. We must reclaim the roads and plowed lands, halt dam construction, tear down existing dams, free shackled rivers and return to wilderness millions of acres of presently settled land.”
-
Dave Foreman, (Earth First)
“Global sustainability requires the deliberate quest of poverty, reduced resource consumption and set levels of mortality control”
-
Professor Maurice King (Population Control Advocate)
“We believe planning should be a tool for allocating resources…and eliminating the great inequalities of wealth and power in our society… because the free market has proven itself incapable of doing this.”
-
Plannersnetwork.org Statement of Principles. the American Planning Association is a member and supporter of these principles.
Issue 4: Cheap Energy is the Enemy of the Earth
To the average person the drive to stop any ability to obtain cheap energy makes no sense. People are hurting economically. Jobs are lost.
Energy costs are skyrocketing. Yet the government spends billions of dollars on “alternative energy” such as wind and solar, which provides less than 3% of our energy needs. Why? What is the motivation to put such shackles on the economic engine?
The excuse is that energy use drives up CO2 emissions and accelerates global warming – the excuse necessary to “harmonize” the US into the socialist, Sustainable global noose.
Many current state and local policies now are moving to increase taxes at the gas pump to keep energy costs high. In addition, Obama issued an Executive Order to ban any off shore drilling of oil.
So, just as the consumer started to get a break at the pump, higher taxes and Obama’s action forced prices back up. As the prices rise the “planners” will insist that the only solution is to enforce the building of expensive public transportation.
But, according to some anti-energy advocates, the fear of cheap energy goes beyond environmental protection – energy availability helps build wealth for individuals and removes them from the rolls of the dependent – the opposite goal of sustainable policy.
“Giving society cheap, abundant energy is the worst thing that could ever happen to the planet.”
-
Proffessor Paul Ehrlich (Professor of Population Studies, Stanford University)
“Complex technology of any sort is an assault on human dignity. It would be little short of disastrous for us to discover a source of clean, cheap, abundant energy, because of what we might do with it.”
-
Amory Lovins (Rocky Mountain Institute)
“The prospect of cheap fusion energy is the worst thing that could happen to the planet.”
-
Jeremy Rifkin (Greenhouse Crisis Foundation)
Issue 5: Common Core
Many people see the reorganization of the public school issue as separate from Agenda 21. It’s not.
Those who are promoting what they call the Agenda for the 21st Century understand that it is going to be a long drawn out process.
To “reform” a nation created on the ideals of limited government, free enterprise and individual liberty into one that unquestioningly accepts government top down control will take time and a determined effort.
There’s no room in a Sustainablist society for those who believe that we were born with our rights and that government’s job is to protect those rights. The sustainable system says government will grant us our rights.
To enforce such a radical turn around of our society requires that the children be indoctrinated to accept it. The effort started in earnest in the 1990s under the Clinton Administration through the massive growth of the Department of Education in such programs as Goals 2000, School To Work and Workforce Development Boards.
The original American education system effectively provided an overall academic education from which students could choose their own futures. No longer.
Today, the new curriculum has morphed into what is called Common Core. It’s a State run central curriculum that revamps schools into little more than job training and indoctrination centers [and it is now being spread worldwide by the UN.]
Because, you see, today’s public education system is also designed to strip the children of their attitudes, values and beliefs that parents may have instilled, and indoctrinate them into accepting global values – global citizenship and a global economy based on the sustainable agenda.
Little of American civics and history are taught in today’s classroom. But text books contain whole chapters on the Five Pillars of Islam, while ignoring the 10 Commandments of Christianity.
The children are fed an unending diet of the evils of capitalism; the selfishness of individualism, and the social justice of redistribution of wealth.
It punishes students for possessing individuality and is designed to eliminate such natural human tendencies. That is the “common” in Common Core. Common values, common goals, common future. Don’t rock the boat of a well ordered society.
Common Core is the nationally dictated curriculum necessary for the acceptance and implementation of Agenda 21. Of course, we still elect local school boards pretending they have some say over the curriculum. It makes us all feel safer for our children.
How, then do we explain the surge of Bernie Sanders and the Tsunami of Socialism? Well, today nearly every adult up to the age of 40 has gone thought this indoctrination, trained to accept a future chosen for them by someone else.
The education system was fully outlined in a very detailed letter to Hillary Clinton from Marc Tucker of the National Center on Education and the Economy in November, 1992, immediately after Bill. Clinton was elected President.
"First, a vision of the kind of national – not federal – human resources development system the nation could have. This is interwoven with a new approach to governing that should inform that vision.
What is essential is that we create a seamless web of opportunities to develop one’s skills that literally extends from cradle to grave and is the same system for everyone…” coordinated by “a system of labor market boards at the local, state, and federal levels” where curriculum and “job matching” will be handled by counselors “accessing the integrated computer-based program.”
Issue 6: Healthcare
How is healthcare connected to Agenda 21? Simply Google “Sustainable Medicine” and you will find more than 5,850,000 English language references to the subject. Read through the ideas expressed there and you will find nearly every provision of Obamacare.
An expert on Sustainable Medicine, the late Dr. Madeleine Cosman, put it this way: “Sustainable Medicine + Sustainable Development = Duty to Die.”
Sustainable medicine makes decisions through visioning councils that determine what shall be done or not done to each body in its group in its native habitat. Sustainable medicine experts do not refer to citizens in sovereign nations, but to “humans” in their “settlements.”
Sustainable medicine is the pivot around which all other Sustainable Development revolves. Principle #1 of the Rio Declaration that introduced Agenda 21 is that all humans must live in harmony with nature.
The translation means rationing healthcare, low technology for health care treatment and emphasis on medical care not cure. And that, of course, will lead to population reduction, as called for in Agenda 21.
These are the issues that are not usually discussed or connected to Agenda 21. Yet they are being implemented, step by step, by local planners in policies that are approved by befuddled elected representatives. It’s all driven through pressure from private NGO groups and funded by federal grants.
That’s how it’s done, constantly driven a little bit with each innocent sounding idea. Then, without warning, Frankenstein rises from behind the smokescreen, toe bones and anklebones fully operational.
People must understand and connect these dots to everyday issues so they can clearly see the root and long term goals of these policies that are affecting our personal lives.
Elected representatives at every level of government must come to understand that legislative actions have consequences far beyond their understanding.
Agenda 21 is the “common core” and it has already invaded every level of our society. Our battle cry must be to stop this monster or watch freedom perish.
Myth Busters: Introducing Agenda 2030
Agenda 2030 - Save the earth not you. Isn't it what is happening? Will you support it?
Agenda 21 escalated to 2030 with the Pope as the main protagonist.
Seventeen goals and targets that will stimulate action over the next fifteen years in areas of critical importance for humanity and the planet:
Goal 1: End Poverty in all its Forms Everywhere
Translation: Continually engineer boom/bust and other financial crisis; centralize all ‘private banks’ – IMF, World Bank, Fed/BOE etc to control all finances via a digital world currencies; a cashless society administered via personal RFID chips(in phones and banking cards).
Continue to encourage and Increase dependence on personal debt by continually raising inflation/prices above earnings; make interest rates negative and then ‘charge’ for keeping balances in the black; make it impossible to function in society without digital beast system i.e. no access to work, food, healthcare, buying and selling, transport etc
Goal 2: End Hunger, Achieve Food Security and Improved Nutrition and Promote Sustainable Agriculture
Translation: Codex Alimentarius (opens in this window); full corporate control over the supply and production of only poor quality GMO (Frankenstein) food – causing cancer and genetic abnormalities leading to population reduction.
Encourage and promote vegetarianism with high consumption of GMO crops; make meat eating increasingly unacceptable by continually pushing the environmental damage and cancer causing message
Goal 3: Ensure Healthy Lives and Promote Well-Being for all at All Ages
Translation: Full government control and rationing of poor quality health care; compulsory health destroying vaccinations; legalize and advocate euthanasia.
Sexualization of children and minors; legalize and enable taxation of all drugs plus promote their widespread use
Goal 4: Ensure Inclusive and Equitable Quality Education and Promote Lifelong Learning Opportunities for All
Translation: UN propaganda, constant and relentless brainwashing delivered through all forms of media and compulsory ‘education’ from cradle to grave.
Use famous celebrities, actors, musicians and role models (that the elite control) to directly influence public opinion; label anyone who questions the status quo and refuses to conform, as mentally ill and incarcerate them indefinitely for their ‘own safety’; utilize political correctness as a weapon against free and analytical thinking
Goal 5: Achieve Gender Equality and Empower all Women and Girls
Translation: Population control through forced “Family Planning”; promote ‘alternative lifestyles’; destroy family and societal cohesion; ‘normalize’ all sexual orientations; feminize, ridicule and diminish traditional male roles
Goal 6: Ensure Availability and Sustainable Management of Water and Sanitation for All
Smart grid with smart meters on everything; peak pricing; personal carbon rationing through RFID; draconian punishments for ‘excessive’ and ‘irresponsible’ usage
Goal 8: Promote Sustained, Inclusive and Sustainable Economic Growth, Full and Productive Employment and Decent Work for All
Translation: TPP; free trade zones that favor mega corporate interests; excessive taxation and red tape leading to eventual bankruptcy for all small/medium ‘non-corporate’ (elite owned) businesses.
Endless global and regional conflicts / terrorism / war leading to ‘job creation’ for the young by enforcing conscription into the security/armed services; vast labor factories, expansion of service sector and government assigned ‘non jobs’ with no upper age limit or retirement prospects for ‘workers’
Goal 9: Build Resilient Infrastructure, Promote Inclusive and Sustainable Industrialization and Foster Innovation
Translation: Promote and expand public transit; remove free/subsidized travel; apply environmental restrictions on personal travel; introduce a pay per mile/km auto tax and expand toll roads.
Build and maintain privately owned infrastructure using public funds by increasing levels of personal/carbon taxation
Goal 10: Reduce Inequality Within and Among Countries
Translation: Replace current systems of governance with one based on socialism and corporate control; introduce even more regional government bureaucracy and intrusion like a mutant octopus; open borders with unlimited and unchecked migration from Islamic countries causing widespread racial and religious wars/conflict/terrorism (thus population reduction on a grand scale).
Promote, normalize and enforce diversity with extensive and relentless media campaigns plus impose restrictive and punitive race/equality laws to silence any objection
Goal 11: Make Cities and Human Settlements Inclusive, Safe, Resilient and Sustainable
Translation: Big brother big data surveillance state with cameras watching everything 24/7; destroy rural communities; encourage city occupation.
Promote the affordability and environmental benefits of living in ‘sustainable’ compact micro units controlled and connected to the ‘smart grid’; restrict personal movement through RFID tracking/logging and no go zones
Goal 12: Ensure Sustainable Consumption and Production Patterns
Translation: Forced austerity; limit availability and ration purchases of essential goods with RFID based cashless society; wipe out the ‘useless eaters’ then maintain the worlds population at under 500,000,000
Goal 13: Take Urgent Action to Combat Climate Change and its Impacts
Translation: Cap and Trade; carbon taxes/credits; footprint taxes; direct RFID credit/cash deductions for personal carbon usage; aggressively promote climate change as the ‘new religion’ and sanction ‘deniers‘; set-up eco-courts to enforce global and local climate laws and to punish ‘eco-crime’
Goal 14: Conserve and Sustainably Use the Oceans, Seas and Marine Resources for Sustainable Development
Translation: Environmental restrictions; control all oceans including mineral rights from ocean floors.
Restrict public access to coastal areas and criminalize all unauthorized and unlawful infractions
Goal 15: Protect, Restore and Promote Sustainable Use of Terrestrial Ecosystems, Sustainably Manage Forests, Combat Decertification, and Halt and Reverse Land Degradation and Halt Biodiversity Loss
Translation: More environmental restrictions; more controlling of resources and mineral rights; restricted public access to vast areas of open space and woodlands etc with harsh penalties for all unauthorized and unlawful infractions
Goal 16: Promote Peaceful and Inclusive Societies for Sustainable Development, Provide Access to Justice for All and Build Effective, Accountable and Inclusive Institutions at all Levels
Translation: Use the NATO alliance and UN “peacekeeping” missions/proxy armies along with the International Court of (subjective) Justice, to force regime change on uncooperative nations and join desperate people together via fake refugee and other engineered crises; mediate with more “UN peacekeeping” and gain full control over regions and counties when tension breaks out.
Incrementally remove the 2nd Amendment in the USA using false flag events to sway public opinion in tandem with restrictive executive orders to bypass congress, provoke patriots into defending their rights and send all surviving dissenters to ‘re-education’ camps
Goal 17: Strengthen the Means of Implementation and Revitalize the Global Partnership for Sustainable Development
Translation: Promote and expand globalism and a bloated Orwellian bureaucratic state under the ‘authority” of the UN (by initiating world war if necessary) with direction from The (unelected) Council on Foreign Relations and The Trilateral Commission; implementation of a ‘one world government‘ with open borders and removal of national sovereignty worldwide; implement a fully biometric/RFID human control network
The last line of the agenda document (opens in this window) reads:
"We reaffirm our unwavering commitment to achieving this Agenda and utilizing it to the full to transform our world for the better by 2030."
Translation: We, as in the UN (the unelected de facto world government), are going to force this on the worlds population whether they like it or not, although we have absolutely no democratic mandate to do so.
UN Agenda 2030 = Total Enslavement For Anyone Left Standing! Of course the elite would not be affected by this.
"Under The Carpet" New Zealand Hidden History Documentary November 24 2025 | From: MatthewApplegate
The 'powers that be' do all they can to hide real history using the New Zealand equivalent of the US Smithsonian.
All evidence contrary to 'established fact' is ignored, debunked, destroyed, or hidden away. This pattern is repeated all over the world. The Vatican hides her library of treasures. The Egyptians claim the Great Pyramids were built by slaves pulling ropes. Noah's Ark is 'just an old myth'.
The quest for the earliest inhabitants of New Zealand continues with Gabi Plumm’s search under the layers of lava, volcanic ash, sand and embargoes to discover the truth about discarded history, destroyed archaeological records and hidden data that show just howmuch information is being kept from New Zealand’s people.
And who is doing the hiding?
This fascinating documentary takes us back to our planet’s oldest people: their origins and their incredible voyages across oceans and seas, the natural catastrophes that have wiped out whole nations leaving barren earth barely fit for habitation, the dogged survival techniques of people forced to become warriors to protect their families, and the resulting archaeological discoveries that remain to tell the tale.
But this history is being hidden from New Zealanders, they are not taught about their ancient ancestry; decisions have been made to keep the truth hidden and write only what suits a political agenda.
But, Gabi has uncovered information that can no longer be suppressed, will she be allowed to share it with the world, or will it, too, be removed from the shelves and filed under ’fiction’?
There is a world beyond what the history books tell us, and Gabi is determined to find out what should have been written and what has been left out.
The Individual Versus Globalism November 23 2025 | From: JonRappoport / Various
“Global solution” means the individual is cut out of the equation, he doesn’t count, he doesn’t mean anything in the larger scheme of things, he’s just another pawn and cipher to move around on the board.
This is purposeful. This is the script for the future: create problems whose only solution appears to be collective.
Psychologically, mentally, emotionally, and spiritually divert the individual’s attention from his own vision, his own profound desires, his own imagination - and place it within The Group (“all of humanity”).
Propagandize the idea that, if the individual concerns himself with anything other than The Group, he is selfish, greedy, inhumane. He is a criminal.
More and more, this is how the young are being trained these days.
The grand “we” is being sold to them like a cheap street drug. They buy in. They believe this “we” is real, instead of a hollow con designed to drag them into a Globalist framework owned and operated by mega-corporations, banks, foundations, governments, and ubiquitous Rockefeller interests.
And what of the individual, his mind, his unique perception, his independent ideas, his originality, his life-force? Swept away in the rush toward “a better world.”
I have breaking news. Earth is not a spaceship and we are not crew members. If Earth is a spaceship, it has serious design flaws, because it keeps making the same trip around the same sun every year. Each one of us does not have a specified function, as a crew member would.
Going back as far as you want to in history, shortage and scarcity in the world that engendered a crisis was either created by some elite or maintained by them, for the purpose of eradicating dissent and fomenting a collectivist solution. Meaning a solution that came from the top. Meaning a solution that reduced individual freedom.
In recent human history, a different idea emerged: establish severely hamstrung government, in order to protect the individual against it. This idea has had a very tough time. Collectivists have fought it every step of the way.
But regardless of circumstances, the individual can author his own freedom and what it implies. He can discover, within himself, extraordinary possibilities. He can contemplate what it means to create reality that expresses his most profound desires.
And then he can begin a voyage that no one and no group can stop. Civilizations come and go, rise and fall; the individual remains.
The word “imagination,” when properly understood, indicates that the individual can envision and then create futures that never were, and never would be, unless he invented them.
Imagination is the opposite of “provincial,” “restricted,” “well-known,” “familiar,” “accepted.."
That is its challenge to the status quo.
That is the true threat the individual poses to all predictive systems. Therefore, “it’s all just information” is a psyop code-phrase. Ideas, thoughts - nothing is original, nothing is new; we all “share” information floating in the collective consciousness; the individual invents nothing.
Which is the opposite of the truth. The individual invents everything.
He can’t be predicted when he is himself. He is not a pattern. He is not a system.
He is not anyone else.
He thrives on his own inspiration.
He is the ultimate riverboat gambler. He bets the house on his own as-yet uncreated future.
He is not a piece of universe.
He is not a humble servant of Order.
He invents the space and time of his own time to come.
As early as 1961, a brilliant healer, Richard Jenkins, whom I write about in my book, The Secret Behind Secret Societies (part of the Exit From The Matrix collection), explained what was to come. He wrote me a note, which I’m paraphrasing from memory:
“People are confusing their own empathy for others with some inflated idea about group-identity. They aren’t the same. People are becoming afraid of their own unique and distinct existence.
This is a social fear. A new social contract is being foisted on the population. Either you belong, or you have no rights. This is a totalitarian concept. It’s coming in through the back door.”
Well, now, it’s right there at the front door. The individual still has a choice. But he has to make it.
Explore his own power, or give it away for nothing more than an illusion of belonging. Stoke the fires within, or form a diluted image of self, and bow down to The Group.
The “I” is not isolated. He can reach out to others whenever and however he wants to. The question is, is he moving on the ground of his own independence, or is he searching for a group life raft, to which he will attach himself without thought or hesitation?
Beyond economics or politics, Globalism is a system that offers a life raft which is heading toward a machine-future.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like Putin?
Disembark and find the great We, a construct of integrated parts, each of which is an individual, in a state of spiritual amnesia. Happiness there is function and sedation, shadowless, wiped clean of distinctions.
This is the elitist end-game of social justice and equality. It’s a fake culture.
“Negative Hallucination” Hypnosis Experiment Demonstration Video
& The Weaponisation Of History And Journalism November 22 2025 | From: NaturalNews / PaulCraigRoberts
In this mind-boggling short video, you can experiment firsthand how the mainstream media puts America under the SPELL of mass hypnosis, using a psychological phenomenon known as “negative hallucination.”
I covered this in great detail in this Natural News article that provides visual examples of both positive and negative hallucinations now in full effect across the American masses.
Watch the video and follow the instructions. In mere seconds, your mind will be controlled via “negative hallucination,” and you won’t believe how easily you have been manipulated.
This video is based on the psychology research of Daniel J. Simons, whose YouTube channel is found at this link. Once you become familiar with this research and how it works, you will begin to see through the lies of the mainstream media while understanding exactly how your perceptions, thoughts and beliefs are being expertly manipulated - even “engineered” - by the media narrative puppet masters.
Watch the video yourself and prepare to be amazed:
The Weaponisation Of History And Journalism
In the West, facts, an important element of truth, are not important. They are not important in the media, politics, universities, historical explanations, or the courtroom.
Non-factual explanations of the collapse of three World Trade Center buildings are served up as the official explanation. Facts have been politicized, emotionalized, weaponized and simply ignored.
As David Irving has shown, Anglo-American histories of World War 2 are, for the most part, feel-good histories, as are “civil war” histories as Thomas DiLorenzo and others have demonstrated. Of course, they are feel good only for the victors. Their emotional purpose means that inconvenient facts are unpalatable and ignored.
Writing the truth is no way to succeed as an author. Only a small percentage of readers are interested in the truth. Most want their biases or brainwashing vindicated. They want to read what they already believe. It is comforting, reassuring. When their ignorance is confronted, they become angry.
The way to be successful as a writer is to pick a group and give them what they want. There is always a market for romance novels and for histories that uphold a country’s myths.
On the Internet successful sites are those that play to one ideology or another, to one emotion or the other, or to one interest group or another.
The single rule for success is to confine truth to what the readership group you serve believes.
Today we have a large variety of truths: truths for feminists, truths for blacks, Muslims, Hispanics, homosexuals, transgendered, truths for the foreign policy community that serves the military/security complex, truths for the neocons, truths for the One Percent that control the economy and the economists who serve them, truths for “white supremacists,” itself a truth term for their opponents.
You can add to the list. The “truth” in these “truths” is that they are self-serving of the group that expresses them. Their actual relation to truth is of no consequence to those espousing the “truths.”
Woe to you if you don’t go along with someone’s or some group’s truth. Not even famous film-maker Oliver Stone is immune. Recently, Stone expressed his frustration with the “False Flag War Against Russia.”
Little doubt that Stone is frustrated with taunts and accusations from completely ignorant media talking heads in response to his documentary, Putin, based on many hours of interviews over two years. Stone came under fire, because instead of demonizing Putin and Russia, thus confirming the official story, he showed us glimpses of the truth.
The organization, Veteran Intelligence Professionals for Sanity, published a report that completely destroyed the false accusations about Trump/Russian hacking of the US presidential election.
The Nation published an objective article about the report and was assaulted by writers, contributors, and readers for publishing information that weakens the case, which the liberal/progressive/left in conjunction with the military/security complex, is orchestrating against Trump.
The magazine’s audience felt that the magazine had an obligation not to truth but to getting Trump out of office. Reportedly, the editor is considering whether to recall the article.
So here we have left-leaning Oliver Stone and leftwing magazine, The Nation, under fire for making information available that is out of step with the self-serving “truth” to which the liberal/progressive/left and their ally, the military/security complex, are committed.
When a country has a population among whom there are no truths except group-specific truths, the country is so divided as to be over and done with. “A house divided against itself cannot stand.” The white liberal/progressive/left leaders of divisive Identity Politics have little, if any, comprehension of where the movement they think they lead is headed.
At the moment the hate is focused on the “alt-right,” which has become “white nationalists,” which has become “white supremacists.” These “white supremacists” have become epitomized by statues of Confederate soldiers and generals.
All over the South, if local governments are not removing the statues, violent crazed thugs consumed by hate attempt to destroy them. In New Orleans someone with money bused in thugs from outside flying banners that apparently are derived from a communist flag to confront locals protesting the departure of their history down the Orwellian Memory Hole.
What happens when all the monuments are gone? Where does the hate turn next? Once non-whites are taught to hate whites, not even self-hating whites are safe. How do those taught hate tell a good white from a bad white? They can’t and they won’t.
By definition by Identity Politics, whites, for now white heterosexual males, are the victimizers and everyone else is their victim. The absurdity of this concept is apparent, yet the concept is unshaken by its absurdity. White heterosexual males are the only ones without the privilege of quotas.
They and only they can be put at the back of the bus for university admissions, employment, promotion, and only their speech is regulated. They, and only they, can be fired for using “gender specific terms,” for using race specific terms, for unknowingly offending some preferred group member by using a word that is no longer permissible.
They can be called every name in the book, beginning with racist, misogynist, and escalating, and no one is punished for the offense.
Recently, a professor in the business school of a major university told me that he used the word, girls, in a marketing discussion. A young womyn was offended. The result was he received a dressing down from the dean. Another professor told me that at his university there was a growing list of blacklisted words.
It wasn’t clear whether the list was official or unofficial, simply professors trying to stay up with Identity Politics and avoid words that could lead to their dismissal. Power, they tell me, is elsewhere than in the white male, the true victimized class.
For years commentators have recognized the shrinking arena of free speech in the United States. Any speech that offends anyone but a white male can be curtailed by punishment. Recently, John Whitehead, constitutional attorney who heads the Rutherford Institute, wrote that it is now dangerous just to defend free speech.
Reference to the First Amendment suffices to bring denunciation and threats of violence. Ron Unz notes that any website that can be demonized as “controversial” can find itself disappeared by Internet companies and PayPal. They simply terminate free speech by cutting off service.
It must be difficult to teach some subjects, such as the “civil war” for example. How would it be possible to describe the actual facts? For example, for decades prior to the Union’s invasion of the Confederacy North/South political conflict was over tariffs, not over slavery.
The fight over which new states created from former “Indian” territories would be “slave” and which “free” was a fight over keeping the protectionist (North) vs. free trade (South) balance in Congress equal so that the budding industrial north could not impose a tariff regime.
Two days before Lincoln’s inaugural address, a stiff tariff was signed into law. That same day in an effort to have the South accept the tariff and remain in or return to the Union - some southern states had seceded, some had not - Congress passed the Corwin amendment that provided constitutional protection to slavery. The amendment prohibited the federal government from abolishing slavery.
Two days later in his inaugural address, which seems to be aimed at the South, Lincoln said:
“I have no purpose, directly or indirectly, to interfere with the institution of slavery in the States where it exists. I believe I have no lawful right to do so, and I have no inclination to do so.”
Lincoln’s beef with the South was not over slavery or the Fugitive Slave Act. Lincoln did not accept the secessions and still intended to collect the tariff that now was law. Under the Constitution slavery was up to the states, but the Constitution gave the federal government to right to levy a tariff.
Lincoln said that “there needs to be no bloodshed or violence” over collecting the tariff. Lincoln said he will use the government’s power only “to collect the duties and imposts,” and that “there will be no invasion, no using of force against or among the people anywhere.”
Here is Lincoln, “the Great Emancipator,” telling the South that they can have slavery if they will pay the duties and imposts on imports. How many black students and whites brainwashed by Identity Politics are going to sit there and listen to such a tale and not strongly protest the racist professor justifying white supremacy and slavery?
So what happens to history when you can’t tell it as it is, but instead have to refashion it to fit the preconceived beliefs formed by Identity Politics? The so-called “civil war,” of course, is far from the only example.
In its document of secession, South Carolina made a case that the Constitutional contract had been broken by some of the northern states breaking faith with Article IV of the Constitution.
This is true. However, it is also true that the Southern states had no inclination to abide by Section 8 of Article I, which says that “Congress shall have power to lay and collect taxes, duties, imposts and excises.” So, also the South by not accepting the tariff was not constitutionally pure.
Before history became politicized, historians understood that the North intended for the South to bear costs of the North’s development of industry and manufacturing. The agricultural South preferred the lower priced goods from England.
The South understood that a tariff on British goods would push import prices above the high northern prices and lower the South’s living standards in the interest of raising living standards in the North.
The conflict was entirely economic and had nothing whatsoever to do with slavery, which also had existed in the North. Indeed, some northern states had “exclusion ordinances” and anti-immigration provisions in their state constitutions that prohibited the immigration of blacks into northern states.
If freeing slaves were important to the North and avoiding tariffs was important to the South, one can imagine some possible compromises. For example, the North could have committed to building factories in the South.
As the South became industrialized, new centers of wealth would arise independently from the agricultural plantations that produced cotton exports. The labor force would adjust with the economy, and slavery would have evolved into free labor.
Unfortunately, there were too many hot heads. And so, too, today.
In America there is nothing on the horizon but hate. Everywhere you look in America you see nothing but hate.
Putin is hated. Russia is hated. Muslims are hated. Venezuela is hated. Assad is hated. Iran is hated. Julian Assange is hated. Edward Snowden is hated. White heterosexual males are hated. Confederate monuments are hated. Truth-tellers are hated. “Conspiracy theorists” are hated. No one escapes being hated.
Hate groups are proliferating, especially on the liberal/progressive/left. For example, RootsAction has discovered a statue of Robert E. Lee in the U.S. Capitol and urges all good people to demand its removal. Whether the level of ignorance that RootsAction personifies is real or just a fund-raising ploy, I do not know.
Robert Edward Lee was an American general known for commanding the Confederate Army of Northern Virginia in the American Civil War from 1862 until his surrender in 1865
But clearly RootsAction is relying on public ignorance in order to get the response that they want. In former times when the US had an educated population, everyone understood that there was a great effort to reconcile the North and South and that reconciliation would not come from the kind of hate-mongering that now infects RootsAction and most of the action groups and websites of the liberal/progressive/left.
Today our country is far more divided that it was in 1860. Identity Politics has taught Americans to hate each other, but, nevertheless, the zionist neoconservatives assure us that we are “the indispensable, exceptional people.”
We, a totally divided people, are said to have the right to rule the world and to bomb every country that doesn’t accept our will into the stone age.
In turn the world hates America. Washington has told too many lies about other countries and used those lies to destroy them. Iraq, Libya, Yemen, Afghanistan, Somalia, and large chunks of Syria and Pakistan are in ruins. Washington intends yet more ruin with Venezuela in the cross hairs.
Years ago Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez resonated with many peoples when he said in his UN speech:
“Yesterday at this very podium stood Satan himself [Bush], speaking as if he owned the world; you can still smell the sulphur.”
It is difficult to avoid the conclusion that [cabal-run] America is a font for hatred both at home and abroad.
Socialism: Thick Lipstick On A Global Pig November 21 2025 | From: JonRappoport/ Various
To give you an idea of the deception inherent in socialism, here is a quote from none other than Andrew Carnegie, once one of the richest men in America:
“I believe Socialism is the grandest theory ever presented, and I am sure it will someday rule the world. Then we will have attained the Millennium…Then men will be content to work for the general welfare and share their riches with their neighbors.” (The New York Times, 1 January 1885, “A Millionaire Socialist”)
Carnegie, of course, like several of his ultra-rich compatriots, devised a method to give away his riches while keeping them: the non-profit foundation.
The last thing on Carnegie’s bloated mind was becoming “equal” with the great unwashed.
He was a liar of the first order. He recognized that, when you win the game of free enterprise, your most corrupt bet is to turn around and find every possible way to block others from winning. Then, you stand at the top of the heap, unchallenged.
That is exactly what he had in mind. That’s what socialism actually meant to him.
Let’s see socialism for what it is. Not in the abstract, but in reality.
Socialism is:
The taking of money (taxes) from some people who work for it and giving it to others who don’t work for it. On a grand scale.
The vast expansion of freebies doled out by central government. In order to create and sustain dependence.
The government protection of favored persons and corporations, permitting them and aiding them to expand their fortunes without limit, regardless of what crimes they commit in the process. (Monsanto would be a fine example.)
The squeezing out of those who would compete with the favored persons and corporations.
The dictatorship by and for the very wealthy, pretending to be the servant of the masses.
The lie that the dictatorship is being run by the masses.
The gradual lowering of the standard of living for the overwhelming number of people.
The propaganda claiming socialism is the path to a better world for all.
In other words, socialism is a protection racket and a long con and a heartless system of elite control, posing as the greatest good.
Except in the specifics of its updated lies, it is just another form of top-down tyranny - as old as the hills.
A year or two ago, a person living in Europe told me that the European Union was not a problem, because it was just another layer of socialism placed over the existing socialist governments of European nations, and no one really noticed the existence of the EU.
As if blindness were a reason not to worry. As you can see from the elements of socialism I’ve listed above, America [the West] is moving more and more into the socialist orbit.
Protesting that America is, instead, a system of greed and inequality is merely saying that the central government is protecting certain corporations and favored persons.
The real and true definition of socialism accounts for that favoritism and protection.
SOCIALISM WAS NEVER ABOUT UNIVERSAL EQUALITY AND UNIVERSAL SHARING.
THERE IS NO SUCH THING AS UNIVERSAL AND COMPLETE EQUALITY AND SHARING, ONLY A FAKE VERSION DICTATED FROM ABOVE.
Socialism is, in the minds of most people who advocate it, a vague sentiment about people being kinder to each other. Consider this fatuous and ludicrous statement, uttered by the mob boss of bosses of the Soviet Union, Nikita Khrushchev, in 1961:
“The socialist economy has become so strong, so vigorous that from the summits we have reached we can issue an open challenge of peaceful economic competition to the most powerful capitalist country - the United States of America.”
“Bankrolled and given vital technology by a few elites from the West, our vast society of socialist slave workers is now able to engage in capitalist competition with America.”
The raving of a madman.Today’s youth who push and protest and riot and censor, on behalf of socialism, are working for the ultra-rich whom they despise.
That’s the long and short of “the glorious revolution.”
The Carnegies and Rockefellers of today (including a miniature Rockefeller named George Soros) have engaged the young as foot soldiers, and they know the young are willing dupes for socialism, because they created, for the young, an education system that makes them clueless and mindless.
The Carnegies and Rockefellers of today are saying:
“Bring on the new world, the better world, the more just world, the happier world - whatever you want to call it - so we can run it from the top and show you what we really think of you. Make every conceivable lever of power ours, and then we’ll reveal what we really have planned for you.”
Here is a relevant backgrounder I recently wrote about private property:
Once private property is abolished, the socialist crime bosses win. They build their heaven on earth, which means they can take what they want and run civilization, top-down. They can keep saying nobody owns anything, but in fact they own it all.
They execute this squeeze play as if they were messiahs eradicating the prime evil: private ownership. This is such a preposterous stage play that, in a sane society, it would close down after one night.
Newsflash: There is a difference between an idea and the way that idea is applied in practice.
For example, certain groups will take the idea of freedom and interpret it to mean,“We have the freedom to steal everything we can.”
Based on this practice, many people will claim freedom was always a failed and corrupt idea at the core. This is wrong, absurd, and dim. Very dim.
In the same way, the idea of private property can certainly be twisted to mean,“I, an elite banker, will steal what you have, make it my own, and then declare it is my property, over which I have control.”
But the idea of private property remains independent of what people will do to distort it. A child used to be able to see this.
Centuries of struggle resulted in a shift from monarchs and priest classes owning all available land, to individuals having the right to own land. Once that principle was firmly established, groups immediately tried to modify the principle to their advantage.
In 1776, a group called the Illuminati declared its existence in Bavaria. One of its guiding ideas was: the abolition of all private property. That concept traveled down to Karl Marx and the Communist agenda.
Private property was called an inherent crime. Instead, the people/everybody would own all property. This garbled incoherent pronouncement would be backed up by the ruling government, who would act as stewards for the masses - meaning the government would take control of all property until such time as the people evolved to the point where the State was unnecessary.
As a straight con, it was very weak. A two-bit hustler on a street corner with a folding table and three cards could see through it in a second.
The people evolving? The State withering away on its own? Equality defined as everybody owning everything?
Of course, if people injected their own utopian fantasies into the mix, if people assumed the government was a beneficent force for good, if people assumed there was an “everybody” operating unanimously, if people fantasized about a history of peaceful tribes (who fought wars against each other) gracefully abdicating the whole notion of individual property…well then, yes, the abolition of private property became a marvelous proposition.
In the light of day, however, with a clear mind, the idea was terrible. It was quite insane. It signaled a transfer of property from the individual to power-mad lunatics.
Needless to say, this idea of no-private-property is alive and well on planet Earth today. We are in another round of fantasy-drenched propaganda.
In a nutshell, the threat of pure private property is: it establishes individual rights that stand against the unchecked force of the government-corporate-banking nexus. It implies the individual is free, independent, and the ruler of what he owns.
To which the addled mind replies: “But suppose a person is polluting his land and the poison is running beyond his borders and endangering others?”
Well, that is called a crime. It should be prosecuted. It should be stopped. The fact that it is often ignored doesn’t negate the whole assumption of private property. It points to the corruption of public officials who refuse to prosecute the protected and favored offender.
Here is utopia laid bare: the government and its partners, who are doing everything they can to limit, squash, and outlaw the individual right to own property, are the same force that is acting as the wondrous representative of all the people.
Surrender to this force; give it power to appropriate all property and hold it in trust, for that day when the population has risen to enlightenment, when the open sharing of “everything” is a natural impulse. Then victory will be ours.
Not the iron fist. The open helping hand. Not the hammer. The smiling guide. Not the monarch. The servant of humanity.
If you buy that one, I have waterfront condos for sale on Jupiter’s four moons. No terms. Cash up front. Construction begins in 2058. Promise.
The Homeowners Association actually owns the condos and the land. They are a subsidiary of the Jupiter Government Authority. There are rules. No flags of any kind flying from porches. No privately owned electricity generators. No growing of vegetables or fruit on the land. No weapons.
Domiciles must be shared with migrants arriving from Earth. The migrants are given beds, meals, and clothing. Possessions are shared. The prime directive: everything belongs to everybody.
Power to the people.
Any alert mind blows apart this delusional nightmare in a minute.
All The World’s A Cult November 20 2025 | From: ZenGardner / Various
It’s funny how people get all self righteous about not being religious or belonging to some group and condemn anyone who they think is or has been.
Naturally most people attempt to be careful about what they align themselves with, but do we really see what all of society is made up of and what we’ve each unwittingly participated in to varying degrees?
Religions don’t have a corner on the market. Perhaps all of us have been cult-ivated in some way.
Cult-ure is called just that for a reason. It’s pretty blatant nomenclature. Merriam-Webster defines culture as the following:
Simple Definition of culture
The beliefs, customs, arts, etc., of a particular society, group, place, or time
A particular society that has its own beliefs, ways of life, art, etc.
A way of thinking, behaving, or working that exists in a place or organization (such as a business)
That just about includes every societal behavior or activity. So-called cults, the word derived from the Latin colere meaning to cultivate, are mere start-ups of new and old ideas of group conformity for some objective.
In the 60’s these were everywhere as groups and individuals attempted to harvest the spiritual awakening and longings of an entire generation looking for alternatives to the mad military industrial complex-bound world around them.
Some were labeled cults by the orthodox minded, but these included a wide range of groups, organizations, alternative learning centers, spiritual fellowships, institutes, break away churches or other so-called “new religious movements” as they preferred to be called.
And the followers were enthusiastic, the word enthusiastic derived from “spirit, or god within us”. Just about any alternative was deemed good, or at least an effort to break free from the system, so there was a lot of experimentation going on.
Some of those groups still exist today. Many have been absorbed by the New Age amoeba and yet others grew into powerful organizations.
Mind cotroll experimentation was rife at this time as well as the deliberate introduction of mind altering drugs and manipulated music in an effort to scramble society, diffuse dissent, and make it malleable for further indoctrination.
Little did we know. But now we do.
Cults and More Cults
When you finally become awakened and grow detached from this massive matrix ensnaring the world you begin to realize it’s all cults.They’ve simply externalized the idea so we don’t recognize the cults we’re already in.
Cult of the personality for example, where sycophantic adoration towards an individual takes place.
There are the obvious cases as in showbiz and the media and charismatic religious or social leaders, but this is much more prevalent than people would like to realize.
It could be anyone in our lives we’re overly enamored with to the point we relinquish our rational thought.
And even worse, our autonomy and individualism, to the charismatic or domineering authority of another, resulting in great devotion to whatever the object and their eventual unquestioned control and spiritual and even physical abuse.
These are all forms of disempowerment or containment, the symptoms to look out for. I’ve written about religion and belief systems quite a bit in this regard, but few realize how social and spiritual pressures are brought to bear via many seemingly innocuous relationships, especially with groups and even loose associations.
Think about school and all the pressures we felt to conform and survive in that packaging facility. That’s a cult, a carefully structured one with a very clear purpose – entrainment and uniformity.
How about clubs, fraternities and sororities, or the whole sports scene, never mind the military.
The even more obvious examples are business organizations and “work” relationships. Then there are the guys at the bar, or the ladies’ coffee cliques. Speaking of cliques, remember those from your school days? They still exist not only in school environments but in adult social circles.
Then you get to the source – the oc-cult cultivators. They are the ones that set the imprint. They are all avid adherents to cult control of the very worst and most insidious sort. They may seem to act autonomously or as having authority, but they aren’t and they don’t. They’re under heavier control than any of us could imagine.
It’s a blood agreement and they’ve sold their souls to move up the pyramid of control, both in this world and other realms. This is a big subject covered extensively in many books as well as other articles by myself and other researchers.
Cultivating Culture – The Open Hidden Hand
The media, corporations and government have a field day playing on this weakness for group think and the need for acceptance, to the extent they’ve created a society that’s complete mush, with the intent that big corp and the nanny state can be the lead dogs in everyone’s life.
When you think about how many people are glued to the boob-toob today it’s easy to understand why the masses behave as they do, dress as they do, and eat and drug themselves as they do.
It’s learned. And there is a lot of direct as well as implied pressure to fit in, or else you’ll be mocked, marginalized and excluded, to the extent that any seemingly “anti-social” behavior is now considered suspicious and to be reported, the fear of terrorism coursing through their programmed neurons like molten nano metal.
Most of us are aware of these traps and devices, but the vast majority have no idea. They’re swayed like sickened seaweed in an artificially rippled pond of liquified sewage.
Detachment – The Only Way to Live Fully Free
This may sound like some vague concept but it really isn’t. If you’re not invested in their sticky entrapping webbery you can live outside of it. Sure, we all have to interact with this engineered madness but we don’t have to give it our energy and obeisance.
But it will take some sacrifices and dealing with our own shadow work seeing how we’ve succumbed to this in our past.
Each of us have to deal with our own entanglements. Besides religious and belief systems, there are financial interactions with the beast, social obligations we think we have to submit to or endure, or employment entrapments we’d rather have nothing to do with.
Do what you can, but get free, in mind, body and spirit, even if you’re still in it. Some costs will not be comfortable. Old stuck in the mud friends who only bring you down and sap your energy, living or working circumstances that make you curse your situation and absently long for freedom, or how you portray yourself on a daily basis.
This is perhaps the most important. Are we being who we truly are? Do we respond honestly, or has the cult-ure of our micro environment, usually hinged on the macro, force us to compromise our convictions and water down what we know to be true, honest and loving?
Do you like yourself when you’re forced into artificial social situations and to compromise for the sake of momentary convenience? We all face these situations.
These are questions we all ask ourselves, consciously and definitely subconsciously. They need answers. And appropriate action, or inaction, needs to be taken.
The hour is late. It always is when it comes to snapping out of the matrix of deceit. Otherwise it will kill you – spiritually and physically.
Something to think about. Time to bust out of the cult of everything. It’s not the real world, it’s fabricated, and often with our permission and subservient compliance.
Stop empowering it. Break out and change the world by being your authentic self. Wisely and lovingly, and with centered conviction. This is the stand we each need to make.
Western Propaganda - So Simple But So Effective November 19 2025 | From: JournalNeo / Various
When some time ago Noam Chomsky and I met at MIT, in order to write a book “On Western Terrorism: From Hiroshima to Drone Warfare” and to produce a film with the same title together, the topic we mainly aimed at discussing was that of the countless genocides the West has committed all over the world since the end of the WWII. The second topic was impunity.
But no matter what atrocities we re-visited, our conversation kept slipping towards one crucial theme: the propaganda that has been manufactured in media centers like New York, Paris, London and other North American and European cities; the propaganda created in order to twist both the past and the present.
Without such brainwashing and the almost total indoctrination of the Western general public and the ‘elites’ in all of the ‘client’ states, no imperialist and neo-colonialist policies would have become truly successful.
We spoke about US commercial advertising and its influence on German Nazi propaganda, and about Nazi propaganda influencing by return both the US and European propaganda-makers.
Noam kept asking me about my childhood in socialist Czechoslovakia, and I explained to him, honestly, how indoctrinated I was as a teenager: not by the Communist dogmas, but by the BBC, the Voice of America and the Radio Free Europe – all of them relentlessly spreading the Western political and market gospel to all corners of the socialist world.
Both Noam and I have created dozens of essays on the topic, as well as several books. My latest one, basically written about all the corners of the world where the Empire is spreading destruction and followed by indoctrination, has more than 800 pages, and is called “Exposing Lies of the Empire”.
And I always feel that even this massive book just touches the tip of the iceberg, that it is only a beginning!
Western propaganda is actually a perfect apparatus! It is effective and it is almost fully ‘bulletproof’. It ‘works’! European empires have been refining it for many long centuries, and the European offspring – the United States – has elevated it to almost total perfection.
One precondition for its success is, of course, that the Western political and economic regime owns almost all the major media channels and distribution outlets of the world.
Diversity can never be tolerated. It could smash the idiocy! Once this prerequisite is completed, things get relatively relaxed and cozy for the demagogues in Washington, London and Paris.
Here is just an example of how easy it is to smear a world leader who resists the imperialist designs of the Empire:
Imagine that one sunny morning, some 10 major newspapers and television stations declare that various anonymous but highly reliable sources in Moscow have informed them that the Russian President Vladimir Putin is a vampire!
This ‘news’ would fly all over the world. Many readers and viewers would at first roll around on the floor laughing, but some would not. And even several of those who found the information thoroughly bizarre and unbelievable would at some point realize that seeds of doubt were beginning to grow inside their brains: “OK, it is absurd, of course, but what if? What if? How awful that would be!”
But how can one really prove that he or she is not a vampire? Or how can one prove that he or she has not been visited by some evil extra-terrestrial flying saucers on several occasions?
At some point, the Russian President would feel that he had enough of the charade. He’d go to the best university clinic in Moscow, and ask for a certificate that clearly stated that he is not a vampire. Several leading academics and doctors would get involved and produce a complex and thorough scientific conclusion, resolutely stating that President Putin is not a vampire.
Shocked by and reacting to the vulgarity demonstrated by the Western propaganda tsars, most of the Russian media outlets would offer some commonsense and logic:
"Can’t we all see clearly that he cannot be a vampire? All his teeth are of approximately equal length, he socialized during the day, he does not sleep in a coffin, he eats garlic and he is not scared of crosses; be they Orthodox, Protestant or Catholic ones!”
Others would argue that there are actually no real vampires inhabiting our Planet.
This is when the Western mass media would go into overdrive. Sarcastically it would declare that the Russian academia, Russian doctors and Russian media cannot be trusted – they are all under the heel of the state, and on top of it they have been infiltrated by nation’s secret services and former KGB agents.
"And doesn’t ‘Vlad’ sound somehow similar to ‘Bran’, which is the castle in Romania, which in turn used to be the home base of the commander-in-chief of all militant vampires - Count Dracula?”
There would still be some rational resistance: “No, ‘Vlad’ does not really sound like ‘Bran’, and anyway, nobody in Russia calls Mr. Putin ‘Vlad’ – only the Western media does.” But such voices of reason would never reach the general public all over the world! And on it goes.
In the end, a few billions of human brains would register and subconsciously store the ‘vampire theory’, and they would never again look at the President of Russia, or at his country, with the same eyes!
Of course the Russian leadership is not the only one that the West is targeting. There is a relentless flow of ‘shocking’ rumors and derogatory remarks made by the mainstream media against the President of China, of Byelorussia, against the leadership of Iran, South Africa, Eritrea, Zimbabwe, Syria, and North Korea as well as against all the left-wing governments of Latin America.
After being repeated hundreds of times, the rumors, at least for many people, get confused with facts, and get accepted as facts.
When still leading Cuba, Fidel Castro was constantly ‘dying’ or ‘disappearing’. The North Korean government has been relentlessly portrayed as a desperate gang of bloodthirsty sexual maniacs, executing and raping all that moves.
The ANC and especially President Zuma have done ‘nothing to close that staggering social divide in South Africa’. In South America, the pro-Western media outlets invented and then perfected a new lucrative industry: manufacturing corruption scandals and implicating in them virtually all of the popular socialist leaders.
Nihilism, darkest ‘news’, and scenarios have been force-fed to the public, in order to eradicate all zeal and optimism that comes when one is building a great independent and egalitarian nation.
"I never forget that day,” an Eritrean cameraman exclaimed, during my visit to his country. “I had just finished an assignment inside the Presidential Palace. Then I met my friends and we were having coffee in front of the main gate. Suddenly the Western networks began broadcasting that ‘there is a coup in Asmara’.
Social media went bananas. It was the “Breaking News” story everywhere. And here we were, right there, on a lazy sunny afternoon, in front of the Palace… I had just seen the President…. All was quiet!
They just invented it, in order to get people out onto the streets! They were trying to manufacture a coup via their media outlets.”
It is mainly fear, implanted into the brains of its subjects and slaves; fear that allows the Empire to control almost the entire Planet. Often it is subconscious fear, but it is fear nevertheless. Fear can be that of the Empire as a whole, or of its might and brutality, or even of the alternatives, portrayed in the most unsavory and frightening colors by the propaganda.
In order to rule unopposed, one has to be feared! And one has to smear the alternatives. The task to spread fear, slander diversity and dissent, was given to the official media, academia and ‘artists’.
Of course the biggest ‘threat’ to the Empire has been the two sisters who were born under the same star, from the same mother called Humanism.
Their names are Communism and Socialism. And I am not only talking about the Western Marxist concept. There are many great concepts that put life and the well-being of the people first, all over the world!
In fact, a few decades ago, it was becoming crystal clear that Western colonialism, imperialism and capitalism were finished. Their time was up! Socialism was the natural and logical way forward for most of humanity.
But then the West and its Empire fought back. They employed extreme violence and brutality, as well as cunning ‘divide and rule’ tactics. Tens of millions died, and progress was stopped, although hopefully, only for a limited period of time. And not everywhere!
One of many reasons why Russia is perceived as a great ‘threat’ is because it inherited the humanist and internationalist foreign policy of the Soviet Union. But, also because it itself is actually becoming socialist again (although it is moving in that direction by taking extremely short steps). Russia is recovering irreversibly from those dark days of the free marketer and West’s lackey, Boris Yeltsin.
Russia is also hated because it is setting the ‘wrong example’; proving to the world that one can develop and prosper without taking orders from the West, without serving its governments and corporations. Or more precisely: it can do it exactly because it broke itself free!
The demonization of Russia is relentless. Every little negative detail is multiplied and magnified by the mainstream media and film industry. The world’s public is being nourished by bizarre stereotypes and fabrications. And so one of the most compassionate, deep, artistic and passionate nations on Earth, Russia, is depicted as being cold, robotic, heartless and inherently evil.
Massive NATO military forces are now dispatched along Russia’s western border, and they include German troops. Periodically there are maneuvers and exercises, not far from the borderline.
It is clearly a provocation, and it all brings back the horrific memories of the years right before World War II, the war in which the Russian nation lost between 25 and 30 million lives. A few hundred kilometers south, an old ally, in fact a Slavic sister, Ukraine, is being forced to confront Russia by its Western handlers, something that is being done against the will of the great majority of the Ukrainian people.
The US is heavily involved in the destabilizing of Central Asia, including a group of nations that used to form part of the Soviet Union. But thanks to Machiavellian Western propaganda, it is actually Russia that is being portrayed as the aggressor and a danger to world peace!
And it is China [CCP], which is being depicted as some kind of a ruthless and unpredictable monster that is now ready to swallow the world!
In fact China is an extremely predictable country, and any unbiased student of world history would clearly see how peacefully it has been behaving, for centuries!
But to ‘prove’ that China is not a Communist country, anymore, and at the same time that it is one of the greatest threats to world peace and ‘stability’ (read: to Western control of the World), is one of the most important tasks given to the Western media, academia and propaganda tsars by the Empire.
And they are succeeding! Indoctrination tactics are working flawlessly. The Western pubic is by now thoroughly brainwashed (at worst) or confused (at best) when it comes to China.
In recent years I engaged hundreds of French, Italian, Spanish, German, British and Czech people in discussions about China, just to receive (with extremely few exceptions) a barrage of standardized, patronizing, mass-produced ‘opinions’.
It often felt like talking to the people who were forced to live for decades under the Taliban or under the ‘spiritual guidance’ of some fundamentalist evangelical Protestant sect.
In fact, China is both Communist (Communism or Socialism, but with Chinese characteristics) as it is breathtakingly successful! Analyzing this marvelous country, together with my China-based colleagues and comrades, I am coming to the conclusion that Beijing often uses “capitalist means in order to achieve socialist goals” (to borrow a quote from Jeff J Brown, which is actually the sub-title’ of his latest book).
And an enormous, independent, successful Communist or Socialist country – that is absolutely the worst nightmare for the Empire! It is something that has to be stopped, derailed, destroyed, isolated and demonized by all means! China’s Communist success…
You would never hear about that on CNN, BBC or Fox TV! Just as you would never hear that Indonesia, India, Rwanda and any of the other Empire’s allies and client nations, are in fact the most brutal fascist ‘failed’ states, and that the genocides in Papua, Kashmir and the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) are the bloodiest extermination campaigns anywhere in the world.
I have worked in all these countries, intensively, I can testify. As this is being written, the people of Kashmir are being murdered and tortured. Right at this moment! I am wondering how many of my readers are aware of it?
Perhaps I’m obsessed with “exposing lies of the Empire”. A second volume will soon follow my 820-page long book. I cannot stop travelling, investigating and amassing the evidence. Because I am shocked; because I am outraged and because there are so few, so desperately few people that are actually working in the most desperate parts of the world!
Virtually all stereotypes about the world that have been domesticated in the West are wrong, terribly wrong.
The story of the Russian Revolution is told in the most twisted way, and so is the story of the Ukrainian famine and of the gulags. Not everything is wrong, of course, but the facts and numbers are twisted. I will soon resume my work in the Russian Far East, to write on this subject.
The story of China is grotesquely wrong, from the Great March to the present day!
The story of Cambodia’s “Commie slaughter” under the Khmer Rouge is a thoroughly idiotic manipulation! The slaughter was there, but more people died from the US carpet-bombing, and then from being displaced from their farms by US mines and cluster ‘bombies’, than from Pol Pot’s atrocities.
The great majority of Khmer Rouge men and women had nothing to do with Communism. They were just settling scores with the capital, which they saw as responsible for selling the country to the US, and for the bombing of the countryside. In the jungle, I recently met Pol Pot’s personal guard.
He told me frankly that he was simply pissed off (the bombing killed his relatives), and had no clue what Communism was:
“Pol Pot came and said ‘Communism! Let’s fight the traitors!’ And we did. How could someone call us a Communist country if we did not even know what Communism was?”
What we hardly ever hear is the most important story of mankind: the story of Western colonial plunders, of imposed slavery, genocides that lasted for centuries, of British-triggered famines that killed tens of millions in the Sub-Continent, of virtually the entire Europe and Christianity systematically committing global holocaust.
We are not told that it actually happened, and that it is still going on and on and on! In order to ‘shelter’ the Western public from the horrendous truth about the past and the present of their countries and culture, new and newer stories about those “evil others” are being invented and circulated.
Perhaps, soon, we will be really told that Mr. Putin is a vampire, or that Kim Jong Un is eating Korean virgins for breakfast. We may not be far from such a new wave of propaganda zeal. It all makes sense: the more evil the Empire becomes; the more it has to smear its adversaries.
The mass media and Hollywood are asked to perform. And they do! Reality and fiction are now being systematically mixed, and everything gets blurred and finally the great confusion and intellectual chaos are managing to overwhelm both reason and logic.
The Empire is killing millions and destroying countries and continents. But California is falling off a cliff, and clouds of huge insects are invading the entire North America. While millions of alien terrorists are now engulfing the ‘tolerant’ and ‘democratic’ Europe! So what is more terrible?
Plus there are those sinister monsters like Count Vlad and Comrade Kim, waiting with their daggers behind a corner! Therefore, The Empire and its people have to ‘protect’ themselves. They have to be tough, even tougher than before! And to put their interests first! America (North America) first! Germany first! France first!
Primitive? Does it all sound primitive? Yes, certainly. But it works! At least for the Europeans and North Americans [Westerners] it does. And the rulers don’t give a damn what works or doesn’t for the rest of the Planet.
Hollywood Sci-Fi Filmmakers Dramatise Fictional Climate Change To Scare Everybody Into Voting For Climate Totalitarians November 18 2025 | From: NaturalNews / Various
I'm almost rolling with laughter watching all this unfold: Because democrats refuse to face the real threats facing America - Islamic terrorism, debt spending, illegal immigration and job-crushing federal mandates like Obamacare - they have to invent their own fake emergencies to try to win the votes of people who don't have any clue about the real world.
So-called "climate change" - previously known as "global warming" but renamed after the data revealed no warming trend at all - is entirely rooted in false mythologies, official narratives and creative storytelling.
That's precisely why democrats had to hire James Cameron, Arnold Schwarzenegger and Sigourney Weaver to present a climate change scary in a new short film. These are the very same people whose films depict time-traveling Terminator robots, interplanetary aliens with green acid blood, and poltergeists that could be captured with vacuum cleaners (the original "Ghostbusters" movie... the one that didn't suck).
If you believe in time-traveling robots from the future, you might also believe in the climate change narrative, too.
That narrative is based entirely on ridiculous, absurd, make-believe notions such as:
The hilariously ignorant idea that polar bears can't swim (or even that their numbers are plummeting). In truth, polar bears are champion swimmers, and their population numbers are on the rise.
The scientifically illiterate notion that carbon dioxide is bad for the planet. In reality, it's the No. 1 nutrient source of all forests, food crops, herbal plants and green zones across the planet. CO2 reforests deserts and amplifies food production.
It's also impossible for humans alone to raise CO2 levels much at all for the simple reason that plants are starving for it and keep consuming it as fast as we can make it. (This is Botany Science 101.)
The laughably anti-science narrative that says oceans are going to rise so quickly, they'll drown out coastal cities and devastate human civilization. In reality, even during warming periods of Earth's history, oceans barely creep up at the pace of only about 1-2mm per year. That's about 1-2 DECADES for a single inch of ocean level rise. (Yep, not exactly the tidal wave apocalypse depicted in climate change scare films, is it?)
You have hopefully realized by now that everything the democrats invoke in their political campaigning is based on lies. Man made climate change is a cult science myth rooted in a convenient political narrative, not scientific facts.
That's why their climate change scare film had to be made: to stir up the imagination of climate change and make it seem visually real even though it is scientifically false. It sort of reminds me of the original "Reefer Madness" film which was also created as a propaganda political film to scare people away from medical marijuana.
That film was also based on quack science hysteria, just like the climate change films being made today.
Yep, you heard me right: There is no legitimate scientific evidence whatsoever to support their climate change narrative. The data that have been presented to the public are all "corrected" (i.e. fraudulent altered) to artificially insert new "data points" that fit the political narrative we're all being spoon fed by the corrupt democrats.
Remember: The climate changing pushing politicians are all exactly the same people who lie to us all about vaccines, GMOs, fluoride, government debt and antidepressant drugs.
Why on Earth would anyone believe they are magically and selectively telling the truth only about climate change when we all know they are constantly lying about everything else?
The pro climate change position is truly just climate superstition masquerading as science. It should be obvious at this point, but everything the democratic establishment insists is TRUE is almost certainly FALSE.
It states, "Climate alarmists are no different from 16th century Europeans who burned 15,000 witches for 'cooking the weather.' They observe ordinary events, and convince themselves that it is unprecedented and somebody's fault."
"Planetary temperatures have remained largely stable throughout the past several decades, according to new data released by the Remote Sensing Systems (RSS) satellite.
Mean temperatures gauged across multiple measurement platforms including GISS, HadCRUt4, NCDC, UAH and RSS definitively show that the planet has not been warming for nearly 18 years, taking the wind out of the sails of the global warming fallacy.”
"The US government's Global Historical Climate Network reversed the results of temperature recordings to suggest that the temperature was rising through 60 years of research. These recordings were amplified by two official surface records.
The Goddard Institute for Space Studies and the National Climate Data Center amplified surface records to estimate temperatures across entire regions of the Earth where temperatures aren't even recorded. By falsifying records and then amplifying the data, these large data centers misrepresented temperatures records across an entire region of the earth.”
"Now, in what might be the largest scientific fraud ever uncovered, NASA and the NOAA have been caught red-handed altering historical temperature data to produce a "climate change narrative" that defies reality.
We now know that historical temperature data for the continental United States were deliberately altered by NASA and NOAA scientists in a politically-motivated attempt to rewrite history and claim global warming is causing U.S. temperatures to trend upward.
The data actually show that we are in a cooling trend, not a warming trend (see charts below).
This story is starting to break worldwide right now across the media, with The Telegraph now reporting, "NOAA's US Historical Climatology Network (USHCN) has been 'adjusting' its record by replacing real temperatures with data 'fabricated' by computer models."
Because the actual historical temperature record doesn't fit the frenzied, doomsday narrative of global warming being fronted today on the political stage, the data were simply altered using "computer models" and then published as fact.”
And here is the EPA's own chart depicting heat waves throughout U.S. history. Notice that the heat waves were far, far worse in the 1930's than they are today?
How to Counter the Climate Change Narrative With Actual Logic and Real Data
From RealClimateScience.com (go there to see all the graphs and charts that accompany this text):
1) There is no 97% consensus of scientists. In a 2013 survey of the professional members of the American Meteorological Society, only 52% believed that global warming was primarily man-made – much less dangerous. No group in the survey came anywhere close to reaching 97%.
2) Heatwaves are not getting worse. According to the EPA, the worst heatwaves in the US (by far) occurred during the 1930's - when the Midwest commonly saw temperatures over 110 degrees, and as high as 120 degrees.
3) Droughts are not getting worse. According to NOAA, the US has been getting steadily wetter over the past century. In the 1930's, drought covered 80% of the US, as poignantly described by John Steinbeck in "The Grapes of Wrath."
4)Scientists say that California has had much more severe droughts in the past, lasting as long as 200 years. The past 100 years was the wettest century on record in California.
5) Hurricanes are not getting worse. The US is experiencing a record quiet period for hurricanes.
6) According to the Danish Meteorological Institute, the Arctic Ocean is full of thick ice. There is more ice on the Russian side than there has been in years, and a group of global warming sailors are currently blocked by impenetrable ice in the Northeast Passage.
7) Polar Bear populations are not decreasing. (They are steadily rising, year after year.)
8) Sea level has been rising for 20,000 years, since the end of the last ice age. Most of that time much faster than now. It has nothing to do with humans.
9) According to NOAA, sea level is only rising 1.7 to 1.8 mm/year. At that rate, it will take thousands of years for Manhattan to drown.
10) According to NOAA, sea level at Manhattan has been rising at about the same rate (2.8 mm/year) since the 1850's. There is no indication that humans are affecting the rate of sea level rise.
11) Glaciers have been melting for a very long time. In 1879, John Muir (founder of the Sierra Club) found that Alaska's largest glacier had retreated 48 miles since 1794. Twenty thousand years ago, Chicago was buried under a mile of glacial ice.
12) Forest fires are not getting worse over the long term. According to USDA, the US had five times as much burn acreage in the 1930's as we do now. The New York Times confirmed this.
13) Climate models have failed, and greatly over-predict warming.
14) Our most accurate systems for measuring global temperature, satellites, show that this year is no warmer than 1998.
15) NASA shows that global surface temperatures have fallen 0.54 degrees C over the last four months. The largest drop on record in such a short time.
Sites to visit where you can get educated about climate change:
Five Damaging Lies Advertisements Desperately Want You To Believe November 17 2025 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various
Every single day we are bombarded with thousands of advertisements, whether we realize it or not.
Being accustomed to their constant presence, we don’t consciously pay attention to them and can’t realize the tremendous negative impact they have on us and the world.
Below are five quite damaging lies that advertisements want you to believe and which you should be aware of so as to avoid falling into their trap.
1. You are incomplete. Advertisements do their best to convince you that you are not enough as you are. Once they achieve to make you feel bad about yourself, they provide you with a solution to make you feel well again: that of buying the products they sell.
2. Everything you need is on sale. Advertisements want to persuade you to think that anything you desire can be bought. Do you want to feel confident? Then buy this shiny car! Do you feel you’re not attractive to the opposite sex? Then get yourselves some hip shoes! Are you stressed? Then consume these magic pills!
3. Material possessions are all that matters in life. Another damaging lie promoted through advertising is that acquiring material things is the key to living well. You needn’t search anywhere else for happiness and fulfillment, such as in pursuing your passions or building healthy relationships with people - there’s always a product that can substitute for all those things.
4. Success is measured by the stuff you own. Advertisements try to fool you into believing that if you have less and worse stuff than those around you, then you are a person to be looked down upon, and that the only way to prove your importance is to get more and better stuff than others.
Thus advertisements are urging you to constantly compare yourself to others and compete with them.
5. Consuming without end is normal. Lastly yet perhaps most importantly, advertisements are trying to convince you that your purpose in life is to consume, and that only by doing so will you fit in society.
As a result, they can immensely complicate your life by stressing you to constantly hunt for the next best thing, regardless of how wasteful that behavior is and the negative consequences it has on the planet.
As you can understand, the sole purpose of advertisements is to sell you stuff so that companies and corporations can make an economic gain, and the tactics they use to achieve that are hideous and deceptive.
The quicker you realize this fact and stop buying into their lies, the more you’ll be able to live free, without feeling the constant pressure to mindlessly waste your time, energy, and the earth’s finite resources to satisfy your artificial needs.
Are You A Mind-Controlled CIA Stooge? + The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories November 16 2025 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various
Do you smirk when you hear someone question the official stories of Orlando, San Bernardino, Paris or Nice? Do you feel superior to 2,500 architects and engineers, to firefighters, commercial and military pilots, physicists and chemists, and former high government officials who have raised doubts about 9/11?
If so, you reflect the profile of a mind-controlled CIA stooge.
The CIA used its friends in the media to launch a campaign to make suspicion of the Warren Commission report a target of ridicule and hostility. This campaign was “one of the most successful propaganda initiatives of all time.”
So writes political science professor Lance deHaven-Smith, who in his peer-reviewed book, Conspiracy Theory in America, published by the University of Texas Press, tells the story of how the CIA succeeded in creating in the public mind reflexive, automatic, stigmatization of those who challenge government explanations.
This is an extremely important and readable book, one of those rare books with the power to break you out of The Matrix.
Professor deHaven-Smith is able to write this book because the original CIA Dispatch #1035-960, which sets out the CIA plot, was obtained through a Freedom of Information Act request. Apparently, the bureaucracy did not regard a document this old as being of any importance.
The document is marked “Destroy when no longer needed,” but somehow wasn’t. CIA Dispatch #1035-960 is reproduced in the book.
The success that the CIA has had in stigmatizing skepticism of government explanations has made it difficult to investigate State Crimes Against Democracy (SCAD) such as 9/11.
With the public mind programmed to ridicule “conspiracy kooks,” even in the case of suspicious events such as 9/11 the government can destroy evidence, ignore prescribed procedures, delay an investigation, and then form a political committee to put its imprimatur on the official story.
Professor deHaven-Smith notes that in such events as Kennedy’s assassination and 9/11 official police and prosecutorial investigations are never employed.
The event is handed off to a political commission.
Professor deHaven-Smith’s book supports what I have told my readers: the government controls the story from the beginning by having the official explanation ready the moment a SCAD occurs. This makes any other explanation a “conspiracy theory.” This is the way Professor deHaven-Smith puts it:
“A SCAD approach to memes assumes further that the CIA and other possibly participating agencies are formulating memes well in advance of operations, and therefore SCAD memes appear and are popularized very quickly before any competing concepts are on the scene.”
The CIA’s success in controlling public perception of what the Founding Fathers would have regarded as suspicious events involving the government enables those in power positions within government to orchestrate events that serve hidden agendas.
The events of September 11 2001 created the new paradigm of endless war in behalf of a Washington-dominated world.
The CIA’s success in controlling public perceptions has made it impossible to investigate elite political crimes.
Consequently, it is now possible for treason to be official US government policy.
Professor deHaven-Smith’s book will tell you the story of the assassination of President Kennedy by elements of the US military, CIA, and Secret Service. Just as the Warren Commission covered up the State Crime Against Democracy, Professor deHaven-Smith shows why we should doubt the official 9/11 story. And anything else that the government tells us.
Read this book. It is short. It is affordable. It is reality preparation. It will innoculate you against being a dumbshit, insouciant, brainwashed American. I am surprised that the CIA has not purchased the entire print run and burned the books.
Perhaps the CIA feels secure from its success in brainwashing the public and does not believe that American democracy and accountable government can be restored.
The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories
The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented by the CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief of Official Government Stories
Ron Unz reports on the cold shoulder given to an extensively researched book that concludes that World War II hero General George Patton was murdered by the CIA because he became a powerful critic of Washington.
The book was ignored because the US media and public have been programmed to regard the US government as a truth-teller and those who expose government crimes as “conspiracy theorists.”
In 2013 Professor Lance Dehaven-Smith in a peer-reviewed book published by the University of Texas Press showed that the term “conspiracy theory” was developed by the CIA as a means of undercutting critics of the Warren Commission’s report that President Kennedy was killed by Oswald. The use of this term was heavily promoted in the media by the CIA.
It is ironic that the American [Western] left is a major enforcer of the CIA’s strategy to shut up skeptics by branding them conspiracy theorists.
Fifty Small Ways To Increase Your Happiness November 15 2025 | From: HuffingtonPost / Various
Would you love to get happier but you’re feeling busy or overwhelmed?
Making a few small changes to your daily routine and attitude can add up to positive results for your life and happiness. Here are 50 small ways to increase your happiness.
1. Choose a simple mantra for the day to keep your thoughts positive and empowering (for example: I am enough. Today I choose happiness. I am thankful for the good in my life.)
2. Meditate for 3-5 minutes each day.
3. Switch your jarring morning alarm tone for an inspiring song.
4. Start a gratitude practice by writing down 3 things you are grateful for.
5. Take a few moments each morning to notice the sun has risen and feel appreciation for the new day ahead.
12. Decide how you most want to feel (e.g. free, inspired, abundant, relaxed) and consciously cultivate these feelings in your being as you go about your day.
13. Read a few pages of an inspiring book to feed your mind.
14. Have a short dance break to get you out of your head and back in your body.
15. Write down a list of your current goals and desires and what they mean to you.
16. Perform small acts of kindness and see how amazing it feels to help others.
17. Take a new route or try a new coffee shop or hobby - mixing up your routine can shake you out of autopilot mode and get you back in the present moment where beauty and joy exist.
25. Place your hand on your heart and wish yourself well.
26. End the day by reflecting on everything good that happened.
27. Let your creativity flow through writing, painting or making art.
28. Do something that scares you - tapping into courage is hugely satisfying.
29. Write a list of people and memories you are willing to forgive and let your past pain go.
30. Cultivate an abundance mindset by noticing everything you have in your life - you might have an abundance of freedom, fresh air, food, friends or inspiring ideas.
31. Take small steps towards an important or meaningful goal you have.
32. Ask your soul and the Universe for more miracles and magic in your life.
33. Soak up and savour the simple pleasures - like your morning coffee, sunshine on your back or the comfort of fresh sheets in your bed.
34. Spend a few moments thinking about what a privilege it is to be alive and having an adventure on planet earth — the odds of you being born at this time to your parents are about one in four hundred trillion. You and your life are a miracle.
35. Write a list of your gifts, passions and interests - having clarity on these things can help you bring more meaning into your life.
36. Practice accepting the things you cannot change and spending your energy on the things you can.
37. Believe in yourself a little more by telling yourself often: I can do this. I’ve got this.
38. Feel your feelings instead of numbing them - if you sit and feel what’s going on in your emotional body without adding a mental story, your pain will soon dissolve and you will feel whole because you are reconnecting with yourself.
39. Mentally sending blessings to the people you encounter during your day.
40. Feel gratitude and excitement for your dreams - your appreciation will call them into your life faster.
41. Think of a way to use your gifts today - you have been given them for a reason.
42. Be led by love, not fear. As you make daily decisions, ask yourself: What would love do here?
43. Drop comparison and competing with others for a new goal: being the best you.
44. Decide to be a light of love and inspiration for others. As the poet Rumi wrote: “Be a lamp, or a lifeboat, or a ladder. Help someone’s soul heal. Walk out of your house like a shepherd.”
45. Quiet your mind for a moment and listen to what your soul or intuition is guiding you to do.
46. Surround yourself with people who are positive, loving and bring out your best.
47. Know your values (e.g. connection, creativity, adventure) and incorporate them into your life.
48. Remember your inherent worth and remind yourself often that you are enough.
49. Celebrate the light in others instead of judging them for their human imperfections.
50. Energy flows where attention goes so make a daily commitment to focus on the things you like about yourself and your life - and watch how you flourish as a result.
Tesla’s Anti-Gravity Research In Use In Dozens Of Secretive Military Projects
November 14 2025 | From: WakingTimes / Various Doctor Richard Boylan, and numerous others have already let the cat out of the bag when it comes to anti-gravity space flight, so why do Boeing and Lockheed, two of America’s largest military industrial contractors, and the recipient of trillions in tax payer ‘black budget’ dollars still hide that they are operating at least 12 anti-gravity aerospace platforms?
It seems that Boeing hides this advanced aerospace technology because it would prove what many free energy enthusiasts have said about Nikola Tesla – that he discovered anti-gravity, and learned how to utilize it as an abundant, if not free, energy source.
Objects can even be levitated easily with anti-gravity, and its numerous applications are just beginning to be understood by the public at large.
The late genius and inventor even explained the fact prior to his death. William R. Lynewrites in Occult Ether Physics (Creatopia Productions), that a lecture Tesla prepared for the Institute of Immigrant Welfare (May. 12, 1938), dealt with his Dynamic Theory of Gravity.
Tesla said in his lecture that he had developed, “one of two far-reaching discoveries, which I worked out in all details in the years 1893 and 1894.”
Indeed, Tesla held a patent in 1928, for a flying machine which resembled both a helicopter and an airplane and is thought to have run with the benefit of anti-gravity.
Boeing has loosely revealed that they have already developed this technology in a veiled admittance that “it is working on experimental anti-gravity projects that could overturn a century of conventional aerospace propulsion technology.”
And Ben Rich, once the CEO of Lockheed Martin, admitted on his deathbed that “aliens were real,” and the “US military already travels to the stars, ”explaining where this technology could have been sourced, aside from terrestrial beings like Tesla.
This means that for more than 130 years we have been kept in the dark about a known free energy source so that the powers-that-be can profit from our ignorance. Every time you see a ‘rocket ship’ go up in space, it is essentially no different from the false flag attempts orchestrated by six media companies controlling the media to alter your perception of reality.
So Where Did All that Research Go?
Theodore C. Loder, PhD, posits in one paper that since the 1950’s (known to some as the brain drain era) almost all research into anti-gravity seems to have disappeared.
None other than Professor Hermann Oberth, considered by some to be one of the fathers of the space age (and who later worked in the US with Wernher von Braun, the Army Ballistic Missile Agency and NASA), stated the following in 1954: “It is my thesis that flying saucers are real and that they are space ships from another solar system.”
Perhaps of more interest to our present discussion on the secrets Boeing and Lockheed have kept, Oberth states:
“They are flying by the means of artificial fields of gravity. . . . They produce high-tension electric charges in order to push the air out of their paths, so it does not start glowing, and strong magnetic fields to influence the ionized air at higher altitudes. First, this would explain their luminosity . . . Secondly, it would explain the noiselessness of UFO flight.”
Indeed, you can see the crumbs of government contractor’s special operatives at work when you look into the work of John Hutchison.
He discovered, “highly-anomalous electromagnetic effect which causes the jellification of metals, spontaneous levitation of common substances, and other effects,” which echo Tesla’s findings. These strange effects were later dubbed the Hutchison effect.
As is usually the case when silencing the curious, a Vancouver businessman, George Hathaway heard of the Hutchison effect around 1980, and hired an engineer from Boeing Aerospace to work with the Canadian government to form a company that would promote technology developed from the effect. They called this company Pharos’ Technology. You likely haven’t heard of what they have created since then.
12 Special Aerospace Platforms Incorporating Anti-Gravity Technology
Dr. Boylan explains:
“At this time, I am aware of the existence of 12 kinds of special-technology advanced aerospace platforms [mil-speak for craft], all incorporating antigravity technology in some form.
These 12 are: the Northrop Grumman B-2 Spirit Stealth Bomber, the F-22 Raptor advanced stealth fighter, and its successor, the F-35 Lightning II advanced stealth fighter; the Aurora, Lockheed-Martin’s X-33A, the Lockheed X-22A two-man antigravity disc fighter, Boeing and Airbus Industries’ Nautilus, the TR3-A Pumpkinseed, the TR3-B Triangle , Northrop’s “Great Pumpkin” disc, Teledyne Ryan Aeronautical’s XH-75D Shark antigravity helicopter, and the Northrop Quantum Teleportation Disc.”
Since at least 1956, the press has been trying to manage public awareness by staying hush-hush about anti-gravity research, or discounting those who attempted to show that it was real. However, a trade press magazine, the Aviation Report, made numerous references to anti-gravity projects, and listed many of the companies pursuing research into anti-gravity technologies.
Quotes from the Aviation Report listed in the Aviation Studies (International) Ltd. report are suggestive of what was truly going on at Boeing, Lockheed and other agencies despite what the public was being told.
What Anti-Gravity Means to the World at Large
Anti-gravity, first and foremost would make petrol-guzzling cars, crumbling electric grids, and other outdated and dirty fuels a total waste of time. Anti-gravity, as Nikola Tesla made clear, would make space flight to other heavenly bodies as simple as driving your car to a nearby city, today.
It would also turn Einstein’s E=MC2 theory on its head, and it also suggests, as Tesla explained, that the ether is given to us to use responsibly by a life-giving creative force.
Electronic Torture + 21st-Century Bio-Hacking And Bio-Robotizing
November 13 2025 | From: ElectronicTorture / Various
Electromagnetic torture, Microwave torture, Electronic murder, Electromagnetic murder, Microwave murder, Organized murder, Cooked alive, Electronic mind control, Electronic mind reading, Brain zapping, People zapper.
What is electronic harassment / electronic torture / electronic murder? In short - "soft kill" techniques to interfere with and kill, by the Cabal and their minions - those who get in their way.
Electronic harassment / electronic torture / electronic murder is about harrasment, torture and murder using electronic weapons based on radio waves.These weapons have been very refined and can cause effects comparable to many illnesses and/or injuries.
These weapons are not science-fiction but used today illegally by your national secret services on mostly random innocent victims not knowing what is being done to them.
Mark Rich, known for his website Thehiddenevil has put up a new site with much more background information www.NewWorldWar.org.
Must read for targets and people who are seeking the truth: SurveillanceIssues
What is Electronic Mind Control / Electronic Mind Reading / Brain Zapping / Synthetic Telepathy / Remote Neural Monitoring?
Electronic mind control is about forcing thoughts into your brain using invisible radio waves (this can be done long range). Your attackers can make you think about a certain person at a certain moment, force a song into your brain (so you will start humming / singing it).
Your attackers can also make you stand up and walk to your kitchen. If you do not know about this then you will be just following the thoughts that were planted into your brain. In other words: You are robotized.
Electronic mind reading is about reading your thoughts using invisible radio waves (this can be done from long ranges). Already it has become 'easy' to decode received brain signals into words spoken to oneself without talking.
At the moment they also make progress with decoding images from what you look at (as seen by you through your eyes).
This is not science-fiction but done today illegally by your national secret services on mostly random innocent victims not knowing what is being done to them.
Stalking, Electronic Torture, Shooting with Directed Energy Weapons From the Sky
A video and two victims reporting the horrible details. Like many other victims they can only conclude that the attacks also are coming from military aircraft.
Microwave weaponry systems like the Active Denial System are used in tandem to deliver physical attacks designed to stress targets, torture them physically, and turn their homes into places of extreme distress. Hoping to drive the target from their home or workplaces.
The pain is unbelievable. It involves tones, harmonics, hissing, stabs, blows, voice to skull transmissions, induced dreams (nightmares), burning sensations in the body and head, internal burning sensations inside of the body and head, crawling sensations on the body (phantom touch), electronic rape, induced and unwanted urination or orgasms, holographic inserts, and many other horrible tortures. My thoughts seem to be scanned every second. -
(Carolyn Palit) I thought I was dying. I thought that I would spontaneously combust into flames. Either it came from a base in the hills, or Commander Solo*, or it came from the heavens. It attacked me for two years. -
Some of his attacks are coming from the direction of the houses of the defendants that he has named in a law suit against these kinds of attacks. But . . . mostly . . . the attacks come from . . . "straight up."
More Information about Electronic Weapons Attacks, Including Mind Control and Mind Reading
On the STOPEG.com website www.stopeg.com there is an CBS News video of the Active Denial System (ADS), a microwave laser weapon. Although the DoD wants us to believe this is a safe weapon (that is why they showed it to us), experts agree it is not!
This video shows a big installation, but there are many kinds of laser weapons. Some are very big and mounted in trucks, ships, aircraft, or even in satellites. But there are also much smaller, portable versions, that can be very effective.
Of course military and secret services have equipment based on the most advanced technology available. Their equipment is not available to the public. But now advanced commercial devices are being shown on the internet giving an idea of how easy it must be for the attackers to cook, burn (torture) a person.
One is a portable (hand-held) laser, the S3 Spyder III Arctic laser. Although it may appear not very sophisticated, imagine someone pointing this at your back when you are in a restaurant or at the movies. To look at people through wall take a look at the XAVER 400 Compact, Tactical Through-Wall Imaging System.
Bio-Hacking and Bio-Robotizing
Rohinie Bisesar, the strikingly beautiful and accomplished financial services analyst and York University MBA with no previous criminal record was charged with first-degree murder in the sudden stabbing death of a young woman.
While Rohinie Bisesar is considered by mind-control activists in Canada to be a possible victim of neuro-experimentation, the new frontier of absolute human control being covertly explored by military / Intelligence agencies (as per the accounts of victims, scientists, and whistleblowers), for a long while it was not clear to activists whether her defense attorney, David Connally, had indeed conveyed to Ms. Bisesar that there are others in Canada familiar with the symptoms of neuro-experimentation, sympathetic of her situation, and interested in helping her. Read More: 21st-Century Bio-Hacking and Bio-Robotizing in the Case of Rohinie Bisesar: Breakthrough as Defense Attorney Confirms Her Receipt of Letter from Human Rights Activists
Many targets wonder how they can be attacked so easily when they move to a different location, e.g. a family member, friend, or go to a hotel. The attackers stuff their portable laser weapons and through-wall imaging devices into their suitcases, book rooms close to yours, and often will attack you from two different angles to confuse you.
In case you prevent them to attack the body area the want to attack, e.g. by putting your back against an outside wall of the hotel, they call in military aircraft that will blast you with very high power microwave (HPM) bursts, cooking your inside. (this happened several times to me, last time on July 6, 2011, while staying in a hotel in Westkapelle, Netherlands, the aircraft arriving around 1 am about 15 minutes after they concluded they could not perform the attacks on my back).
Many people have a problem thinking that others can read their mind, their thoughts. Again, the advanced technology used by military and secret services is not available to the public, but today more and more commercial devices are becoming available.
One company delivering a mind reading headset is Emotive, for USD 299,-. With this device you can control your games, your tv set, etc. with you mind! They also have an API (programming interface) to create your own mind reading application. Even rudimentary electro-pulse mind reading technologies are publicly reported in the media
I cannot emphasize enough that not all but many attacks are from the sky. When driving your car they may burn your back (from the sky or from some equipment in your own car) when another car is driving behind you and make it go away when the car goes away.
If they do this every time then you probably will think it has to do with the car behind you. When driving your car, walking outside, riding your bike, they may burn your head and make many people you look at scratch their head.
Sometimes people are part of the sick network but many others may just have been beamed the same way you are, having no clue about what is going on (your attackers want you to attack other people, they don't care about anything because they are psychopaths, murderers. child abusers).
Another warning is for a much more confusing type of attack: electronic mind control.
In this case your attackers will plant thoughts into the brain of people surrounding you. Of course these thoughts relate to your life in one way or the other.
They may even plant your (!) thoughts into the heads of people surrounding you. If you do not know about this then you may start to think that these people can read your mind, which can be very depressing. I wrote several article about electronic mind control, if you are a target and do not know about this capabilities you may want to read this.
If you are hearing voices you may be a mental case but it is also possible that you are a target of (highly illegal) mind control activities by some sick bastards.
In your country secret services including military are developing weapons that make you hear voices and covertly testing these weapons on random human beings or groups of people.
Some terms used to describe this phenomenon:
Voice-to-skull
Microwave hearing
Silent sound
Perhaps the most easy (and cheap) way to attack a person this way is by the Audio Spotlight.
This device makes you hear words etc. spoken by a someone, but the persons around you do ot hear this.
Youtube video on AudioSpotlight, Subvocal Speech and Microwave hearing:
Electronic Harassment and Electronic Torture List
[Published: February 26, 2009. Updated: February 28, 2009, April 11, 2009, June 10, 2009, June 13, 2009, June 25, 2009, September 6, 2009, December 24, 2009]
Almost anybody can become a (temporary) target of these horrible electronic weapons. Please read what can be done so you are prepared. This is not science fiction but happening right now in our 'democratic' society.
Below is a list of all possible attacks by electronic weapons that I know of by experience. I know more attacks exists. Female targets write about sexual attacks, others mention continuous ringing in the ears, etc. I may add these later. I decided to keep this list personal, i.e. in this blog I write down only what has/is being done to me, not what is being done to others.
Electronic Weapons
These attacks are done by the following kind of electronic weapons:
Directed Energy Weapons (laser weapons), like ELF (very low frequency), ultrasonic, lasers, (high power) microwave weapons
Through-wall vision
(Sub-vocal) Mind-reading
Microwave hearing/Silent Sound (letting you hear sounds/things in other ways then hearing by the ear)
On the internet already a lot of symptoms and attacks by these weapons can be found. Most of these lists do not detail these attacks and that is exactly what I am trying to do here. In my opinion it is not enough to read that such a weapon gives you a burning feeling, instead the horrible details must be exposed!
Description of a (continuous) high intensity microwave weapon attack:
This weapon makes your skin really burn like a very heavy sunburn and cooks your inside, you really feel being cooked alive, you are heated like meat in a microwave oven, with intensities that exceed those of a microwave oven.
Gal is coming out of your throat and fluids inside your body evaporate making you instantly burp. In case of high intensity there is also a burning sensation on the other side of the body, where the beam, of approximately 10-30 cm diameter leaves the body.
If they cook you long enough cooked body cells explode inside you, when aimed at your upper body, lung cells explode / are destroyed and reducing lung capacity immediately noticed when walking stairs or running.
The burning sensation and the cooked-inside feeling will go away after 5-30 minutes or 1-2 days depending on the duration and intensity, it may take a day or more to recover from high power microwave bursts with durations of 5-60 seconds (but can you recover from these amounts of irradiation?).
A cup of milk is heated and starts evaporating after 5-10 seconds. The electronic weapons aimed at you can make you burp or fart within 1-3 seconds, hence the intensity of electromagnetic irradiation is not only used to torture a person but murder as well.
Covert and Intended-to-Notice (or Noticed) Electronic Harassment / Torture
Electronic harassment is called covert if the target does not know about these weapons and methods. If you do not know about these weapons you may think you have all the bad luck in the world, you will wonder what strange things are happening to you, to your body, and accept you do not control your life anymore.
If intended-to-notice (or noticed), electronic harassment is torture in its most horrible form. What would you do if your body is made to react every time to events occurring in your life, e.g. by making you burp or fart, your legs are cooked every night, your ankle is cooked during daytime when working behind your computer, your knee is beamed to cause maximum pain, etc.
Some examples:
To delay you:
They make you go the toilet to urinate when you want to leave your house
They cook your legs before running
They burn and cook your body high power to prevent you doing you work
Note that this delaying is often done together with gang stalking methods like cars blocking your road, phone calls when you are to leave your home, etc.
To make things worse:
They make you sneeze extra times when you have a cold
They cook your throat become sore when you have a cold
They attack your eyes until red with blood
The cook your legs after running
They cook or burn where you have pain already
To torture you:
They cook and burn your body everywhere
They cook your family, your children, friends, …
Note that this torture is often done together with gang stalking methods like synchronizing saw machines, honking horns of cars, screaming birds (pigeons, crows), etc.
The Maximum Pain Business, Beyond Imagination Horror and Cruelty Without Evidence
Special methods have been developed to make you think you have a heart problem, erection problem, toothache, etc.
For the ones exposing these horrendous crimes they developed methods to inflict maximum pain, e.g. by cooking such a person alive with a high power microwave weapon, or burning the skin of the target or making the target burp or fart every few minutes to events occurring in the life of the target (including e.g. opening a website on a computer, saving a file, cars passing by the window, etc. ).
Some authors refer to the development and use of these weapons as the pain business. I would like to make a correction, please call it the maximum pain business.
After accepting that there are really such sick and disgusting creatures actually developing and applying these methods and torture, you also have to accept that it is not about just pressing a button, but also about the way how this torture is applied.
Zapping your eyes red to make you look bad, cooking biceps to prevent you from swimming, cooking your throat to prevent you from singing, inducing heart problems and toothaches to prevent you working or sports. More horror, these methods and procedures could not have been highly developed without being tested on humans, on real persons.
And again more horror, these methods are often used with gang stalking (organized stalking) methods.
Like they cook your ankle with insane intensities making your foot very painful, and when you go outside all kinds of people with leg problems are crossing your path, people limping, in a wheelchair, sometimes even someone without a leg.
Or, they start sawing wood somewhere and when the saw enters the wood cook your body with high intensity microwave.
This torture is applied 24/7, not once every hour but more like once every minute/every 5 minutes. Horrible torture that can be called torturing a person to death.
Special Case: The Heart Attack
Damaging your body can be done in several ways. One vital organ is the heart. They can attack the heart very effective with:
Microwave weapons, cooking the heart area slowly
High Power Microwave (HPM) weapons, cooking the heart area in a second
Ultrasonic weapons, pressurizing the heart area
Heart frequency manipulation weapons
These weapons can damage your heart in a split second, you may not survive such a attack, but can also be used to slowly damage your heart. Slowly cook your heart area so will get a strange feeling and in fact your heart is really damaged.
This makes the Heart Attack Gun that the CIA was forced to admit having
look positively archaic: During Senate testimony in 1975 into illegal activities by the CIA, it was revealed that the agency had developed a dart gun capable of causing a heart attack
Then there is also the frequency manipulation attack, your heart may feel pulsing, blobbing like crazy.
Cook heart area from the front, often together with a cook beam from left behind. Slow damage, horrible feeling
Flash your heart with very high power microwave. Instant damage.
Pressurize your chest, even takes your breath away if applied with enough power
Pulsate your body/heart area with low frequencies
These effects will give you a very realistic heart attack or heart problem feeling feeling. Your heart may start pounding very loud, may feel very painful, the heart area may feel strange, cooked.
If applied with enough power, this really damages your heart and heart area. Your heart is cooked like meat in a microwave oven.
Can you recover from these attacks? In general they will not murder you or leave evidence, your heart may feel very painful for several days after they stop their attacks.
It can take weeks until all pain in the area has disappeared. I am not sure about permanent damage caused by these attacks.
Can you die from such an attack? Yes, if the intensity of the beam is high enough your heart can be damaged or temporarily disturbed in such a way that you will die.
How can you recognize a ‘normal’ heart problem from a ‘induced’ heart problem? You yourself are the best judge of what you feel. If you believe something really is wrong with your heart then visit a doctor. If you are certain your heart is attacked then avoid visiting a doctor as this will confirm a heart problem in case you collapse or die, case closed.
Impossible to Protect Yourself
The human body appears to be extremely vulnerable to electromagnetic irradiation of all kind of frequencies. The human body also is a electromagnetic transmitter and sensitive (radio) equipment can pick up and decode the signals that are generated e.g. when speaking, thinking.
In contrast to a knife or a bullet, electromagnetic signals are not blocked by walls, compare your cell phone.
Limited protection is possible using sheet metal, metal plates, water, vacuum, but if you really are a target the attackers increase intensities (if necessary to insane levels), change frequency, attack from different angles etc.
Also remember that these weapons can hit a person without hitting the person sitting next to this person. They can be aimed and the diameter of the beam can be made small enough to hit only the target.
Anybody Can be a Target
Electronic weapons make it very easy to eliminate persons, to get persons (temporarily) out of the way, to murder persons, etc. all without evidence, and most of the time even the target does not know he is zapped, cooked, burned with electronic weapons. The ones owning and controlling this technology now can get everything they want in a very easy way.
They can get their football player into the national team by temporarily cut out the competitor for the same position in the team.
This could be done with other means as well but it is very easy with electronic weapons. Just cook a person’s ankle and foot during the night and the damage is done. To influence a tennis match you could cook a player by heating the body with microwaves (compare microwave oven).
He will just feel overheated and sick and loose the game.
These are just two examples to demonstrate what can be done. You can imagine almost anybody can become a target. Some people because they are more visible then others, because they have something the sick network wants, because they know something the sick network does not want to be exposed, because they are too intelligent for the sick network, ust for personal reasons because may be they made a remark about someone, etc.
The Phoenix Program Continues Today
The Phoenix Program was a program designed, coordinated, and executed by the United States Central Intelligence Agency (CIA), United States special operations forces, US Army intelligence collection units from MACV, special forces operatives from the Australian Army Training Team Vietnam (AATTV), and the Republic of Vietnam's (South Vietnam) security apparatus during the Vietnam War.
The Program was designed to identify and "neutralize" (via infiltration, capture, counter-terrorism, interrogation, and assassination) the infrastructure of the National Liberation Front of South Vietnam (NLF or Viet Cong).
The CIA described it as "a set of programs that sought to attack and destroy the political infrastructure of the Viet Cong". The major two components of the program were Provincial Reconnaissance Units (PRUs) and regional interrogation centers. PRUs would kill or capture suspected NLF members, as well as civilians who were thought to have information on NLF activities.
Many of these people were then taken to interrogation centers where many were allegedly tortured in an attempt to gain intelligence on VC activities in the area. The information extracted at the centers was then given to military commanders, who would use it to task the PRU with further capture and assassination missions.
The program was in operation between 1965 and 1972, and similar efforts existed both before and after that period. By 1972, Phoenix operatives had neutralized 81,740 suspected NLF operatives, informants and supporters, of whom between 26,000 and 41,000 were killed.
Electronic Weapons Can Kill a Person
Besides using electronic weapons to monitor, drive into suicide, cause temporary injuries, they can also be used to kill a person.
Killing is possible by sending wrong signals to the heart making it pulse in abnormal ways, or by increasing intensity and cooking the heart area, damaging the heart slowly. Very high power laser weapons or HPM (= High Power Microwave) weapons can damage your heart in a second.
Although little is known at this time about the effects of long term irradiation, it is not difficult to imagine that this will cause all kinds of diseases as electromagnetic irradiation destroys your DNA (cell with damaged DNA are called cancer). Again all these horrible things can be done, and are done today, without evidence.
How do You Know You are a Target of Electronic Harassment?
It is often very difficult to distinghuish between normal body behaviour and induced body behaviour if there no signs of burning or cooking. For example, would you know the difference between normal diareah and induced diareah?
Yes, you are able to decide what is not normal by comparing your diareah with previous experiences.
It may start and disappear very sudden, may cause other effects like water bubbles leaving your anus, etc. Also, the diareah may be linked to a certain event, like picking up your child, appearance in court, etc.
Always ask yourself what it is you are feeling, did you feel this before? Does it go away when you turn your body 180 degrees? Does it go away when you walk in the streets or drive your car? You are the best judge of what you are feeling.
Your Car May be Tagged
When you are a target you will experience harassment everywhere every time. If you have a car they will tag your car (these are words I learned from a ’so-called target’).
This means they will equip your car with electronic weapons not only to monitor you but also to cook and/or burn your body while driving.
They may also harass the target covert and use the following beams:
Sleep beam, to make the driver very sleepy
Eye beam, slowly cooking they eyes, so tears come out and visibility reduces
Just to confirm, all this is done to cause the (mental or physical) death of the target.
Harassment from (Neighbour) Houses, Cars, Handbags, Airplanes, Satellites
Most of the electronic harassment comes from close neighbor houses. When you walk in the the streets you are probably attacked by electronic weapons (directed energy weapons) from houses (they may be remote controlled or controlled by operator at these locations.
If there are no locations for their equipment, they use these weapons from their cars. You may also be hit from airplanes. This is not difficult to believe if you accept a reach several hundreds of meters. Some targets write about satellites being the source of their electronic harassment. In general I do not believe this is true.
Example of Current State-of-Technology:
You can be hit by very accurate equipment. For example, when you are running on the streets or in the woods you may be ’shot’ with a very high power microwave weapon in your calf from an airplane. The intensity can be such that this causes instant injury.
Your calf is cooked within a split second and your muscles almost instantly tear apart. Making running / walking almost impossible.
Electronic harassment can also be done from small devices carried in e.g. shopping bags in shops or on the street.
You need only a small battery to give the target a single burst that makes him burp or fart. This is enough to depress the target: nowhere safe from this horrible harassment.
Satellites probably play a big role in exchanging information about a target, e.g. you can have a subvocal speech decoding PC in the house next to target, but it is more easy (and safe) to transfer the undecoded information to a central computer system, and return the decoded words. But it may be done on site, PC’s have enough power today to do this decoding themselves.
You May be Attacked by Persons (Family, Friends, co-Workers) Who are Covertly Attacked by Electronic Harassment
The aim of the attackers is to drive the target insane. To speed up things they aim their electronic weapons covertly at family, friends, co-workers, etc. to make them react in several ways to what the target is doing or saying.
Some (easy) methods used to covertly attack other persons:
Scratch beam, to make a person scratch his head
Sneeze beam, to make a person sneeze
Cough beam, to make a person cough
Urge to urinate beam, to make a person go to the toilet
Examples:
They beam persons around the target on the head so everywhere around the target people are scratching their heads
They beam the target’s head very hard and then beam the head of a friend so that this friend will start scratching his head immediately very visible for the target to see
When the target and partner are in the same, then every time the target opens a website on his PC (not visible for the partner), they beam the throat of the partner causing the partner to cough almost immediately
When the target is beamed in the stomach during work, they make a co-worker sneeze at the same time
When the target is beamed in the stomach, they beam her child in the stomach as well, making the child cry and saying it has stomach pain (this is confirmed by multiple victims)
Once again illegal and (beyond imagination) horrible crimes by our national secret services.
Elite and Secret Services Control our Politicians
It is not amazing that these weapons exist, I studied computer science myself, if you have enough money it is not that special. It is also not amazing that there are actually sick and disgusting creatures walking around free applying this kind of electronic harassment to cause the physical or mental death of a person.
What is amazing is that a lot of high ranked politicians and other influential persons are fully aware of the existence and use of these weapons but do not speak out. What does this say about these persons? I believe you can say that the idea we live in a democracy has disappeared completely.
Elite and Secret Services are Trapped by Their Crimes in Vicious Circles of More Violence Against the People of the World
The ones facilitating, outsourcing and performing this cruel electronic harassment and torture is not just a group of people, these attacks are very well designed and applied by people trained to cause maximum pain but leave no evidence.
The ones I am referring to are our secret services, including military. They are tightening their grip on society, not because they have to protect us against the terrorists in the world, but because they are getting more and more afraid what will happen when the truth about them is exposed.
They are trapped in some sort of vicious circle. To maintain themselves they must commit more and more horrible crimes. And to avoid their crimes are exposed they have to perform new horrible crimes, etc. etc.
So here we have the elite, creating wars to maintain themselves, and their armies, the secret services both trapped in their own lies and deceit. And the horror for us, the people of the world is that we will be taken from (created) threat to (created) war because that is the only way out for the (criminal) elite and (criminal) secret services.
People Cookers and Secret Services
I introduced the word people cookers in 2007 for the creatures facilitating, outsourcing, performing electronic harassment and electronic torture. Main reason is of course that people cooking comes closest to what they are doing.
Most of the harassment and torture is done by microwave irration which causes heating of the skin and your inside just like a microwave oven cooks meat.
There are no words to justify these illegal and horrendous crimes. The ones involved are disgusting creatures, an author called them ‘the failed human beings’ and that is just what they are. They were born human, choose the wrong path in life and degenerated into pieces of shit.
I believe people cooking and gang stalking (organized stalking) are the perfect example of how sick our national secret services have become. They now commit the perfect murder, in their language meaning murder without evidence. And they now steal, torture and murder just because it has become so easy to steal, torture and murder.
Electronic Harassment and Electronic Torture List - December 24, 2009
Below is the list of all (most) effects I experienced from these horrible electronic weapons. Few times I may not correctly describe the source of the effects. It is sometimes difficult to point to microwave or ultrasound.
Both can be very damaging. High Power Microwave cooks your body cells while high power ultrasound simply destroys your body cells. But in the end the result is the same, a damaged body.
MIND-READING
Subvocal speech
Special equipment is used to detect muscle contractions like the ones a person uses when speaking out loud. When spoken to itself these muscle movements can be detected by advanced equipment and translated into words and sentences. As most people talk to themselves when ‘thinking’ this resembles mind reading.
How it is applied
They read your subvocal speech and react to it
Feeling
Unbelievable at first, then you get depressed because the last thing you thought was private appears not to be private anymore. Then you accept that you probably are even more popular and watched then the big stars in the world and sometimes use it to deceive the bastards. Horrible torture
Why it is applied
To drive you insane
Seeing through your eyes
Although some targets claim that they can see what you see. I have not (yet) experienced this. But they do everything to suggest that they can do this. E.g. on the highway you are bursted with the burp beam every time a favorite model car passes in the opposite direction. They are looking at you from some camera build inside your car or from another car. They are looking at your eyes to see what you are looking at. I experienced a few times I was bursted BEFORE I saw the favorite car. A lot of research in this area is going on, I will keep you updated.
HEARING VOICES
Voice-to-skull
Special advanced equipment is used to beam voices, or in fact any sound, into your head.
How it is applied
They make you hear voices that you should not hear. For example, they let you hear voices from people far away very clear as if they are standing next to you. This an amazing experience. There are a lot of reports of people who claim they are attacked by voices
Why it is applied
To drive you insane
HEAD
Top of your head beam
The top of your head is very sensitive. They will burn the top with some laser or microwave weapon
How it is applied
They put the beam on your head and wait for you to move
Feeling
Can be very painfull if applied with enough intensity. You cannot do much with this beam on your head. Horrible torture
After effects
If applied with high intensity it may take several days for the painful feeling to disappear
Why it is applied
Prevent you from working, doing your thing
Should you worry
Yes, long term irradition may cause brain damage, tumors
Scratch beam
They just beam your head somewhere. The normal reaction is your will start scratching your head.
How it is applied
Mostly applied when other people can see you. If they do this everytime with the same people they may wonder whats wrong with you. They also apply this and have random people scratch their heads and then burn you
Feeling
Not very painfull, mostly a short pulse, although they may keep the beam on your head and remove it after you start scratchin your head
Why it is applied
Drive you out of your mind, drive you into attacking other people
Headache beam
This beam gives you a headache. It is some kind of high intensity low frequency beam. The headache appears suddenly and also disapears suddenly
Feeling
Can be very painful
Sickness/Alcohol beam
The feeling is that you feel a little bit dizzy, see thing a little foggy.
How it is applied
They may apply this when you drink your first glass of beer, wine, etc. or when you have a cold, or are sensitive to hay fever
Cooking
They put the microwave beamer on your head and your head is heated. They may do this after you drink a glas of wine, but also after you turn on the central heating of your appartment. You will feel hot, sick, slow.
Ear short burst
Your ear is bursted, the idea is to hit your eardrum. With your eardrum cooked/damaged you have a strange feeling.
Ear continous beam
Your ear is beamed for very long time just to present you pain, they want you to move.
Feeling
It appears your eardrum and surrounding area is very sensitive. This is very painful.
Eye blur
Your eye is bursted and you have instant blurred vision. Often your eye will start tearing
How it is applied
Some kind of miocrowave burst, see also Phasr and other similar military weapons used to blind the enemy
Feeling
Not really painfull but you cannot do much as you are used to two eyes.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from working
Should you worry
Yes, this is very damaging for your eyes
Eye sting
Your eye is bursted with some kind of laser beam
Feeling
Like they drive a needle into your eye. Very painful
Why it is applied
Stress discomfort
Just below eye, tremble
They beam at they area below your eye and the flesh below it starts trembling. They can do this in shops and through wall
Burn (beard) hair
They burn away hair at certain locations, e.g. your moustache hair just below your nose holes to create the illusion of a leaking nose
How it is applied
This is just a laser hair removal procedure, like performed in many beauty parlors
Sneeze burst
You are bursted and must sneeze. This is a tinglin sensation that can make you sneeze in an instant
How it is applied
You can turn your head in the other direction or hold your hand before your nose to make sure the attack is caused by electronic weapons
Why it is applied
To make your body react to something
Runny nose
You have a runny nose but do not have a cold. You may start thinking you have some kind of strange cold but you have not. Once you are out of the beam, the runny nose disappears.
How it is applied
I am not sure if this is done only by electronic weapon or by a combination of some drug and electronic weapon
Cough burst
Your throat is bursted with a high intensity burst and you start coughing instantly. This coughing does not look like normal coughing. You will have a sore throat immediately afterwards.
Dry cough
Like something fluid/moisture sticks in your lungs, or sometimes your throat. When you breath you hear/feel a rasping sound. You must cough very hard to throw it out.
Toothache
Using a low frequency beam they induce a toothache, this really is a horrrible feeling. It is like a true toothache but now when you move out of the beam it disappears.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from doing anything, just plain torture
Sore throat
Your throat is sowly cooked and you will almost immediately notice less volume and after some time pain while speaking
How it is applied
They can do this in just one or two hours by aiming a high power beam at your throat.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from speaking loud, prevent you to sing
Blackout beam
This is very high intensity burst on your head. There is no pain but it feels like the result having been hit on the head very hard. You feel a bit dizzy and your ears are ringing
UPPER BODY
On top of shoulder
A very painfull beam on the top of your shoulder
Why it is applied
Just torture
Cook chest/lungs
I call this beam: through-body-beam. You are really cooked by this beam. If applied with enough intensity you will feel a burning sensation on the back (where it enters), then feel the beam cook your insde, then you start burping, then you feel a burning sensation on the other part of your body where the beam leaves your body
How it is applied
This beam can be applied everywhere, form the house next to yours, from cars. When they beam you outside the intensity often is higher as they want to make sure are hit properly
Feeling
You feel like being microwaved. Very painfull, horrible torture
Cooking
They put the microwave beamer on your body for a long time and you have the feeling you are cooked alive which in effect is a very accurate description of what is being done
Feeling
You feel like being cooked alive, horrible torture
Burp beam
This is a low power sophisticated version of the chest/lungs cook beam. It is difficult to locate the source direction.
How it is applied
It takes approx. 2-3 seconds to make you burp, make your body react to events. They also may apply low intensity, so you get an irresistable urge to burp but cannot
Feeling
Horrible torture
Why it is applied
To make you suffer. This applied sometimes once every five minutes, but sometimes also several times a minute to let your body react to events like cars passing your window, etc. Horrible torture.
Heart attack incl. extra beam from left behind
This is a low frequency high power beam aimed at your heart, mostly from a position somewhere in front of you. To maximze the effect they simultaneously beam you from the left behind position with a microwave cook beam.
How it is applied
As they may apply the from behaind beam for a long period your flesh around the heart area may get cooked and the whole area may feel painfiul and stiff
Feeling
This really gives you the feeling of having a heart problem, and in fact you have! The difference is that this one is applied by murderers. Horrible torture
After effects
It may take several days before you recover (if they stop the beam)
Should you worry
Yes, your heart is vital
Heart attack high power burst
This is a very high power burst of very short duration, 1 second or less, that will give you immediately an extremely painful heart (area). This beam is really amazing: I believe it can kill you in an instant
How it is applied
They can do this through wall anytime
Feeling
Horrible torture
After effects
It may take several days before your body recovers and it all feels normal again
This may be done seperate from other heart attacks. Your heart may start feel pulsing funny, the feeling is very massive, it also feels like bubling, like the heart lost control of normal operation and just pulses somewhat
How it is applied
Not only frightening but also very painful
Pressure beam
They put a pressure beam on your chest this will take your breath away and you may think your are having a heart problem. This can have various intensities
Back burning
They burn the skin of your back. This can be low intensity or high intensity. The feeling is you have a sun burn, in case of high intensities it will also color your back a little red.
How it is applied
This almost instant skin cooking. Refer to ADS (Active Denial System) for details
Why it is applied
Present pain. To move you out of the way, to make you leave the swimming pool, etc.
Electric shower
This is an overwhelming effect. This is like a shower but not with water but with electronic pulses.
Heating
The temperature of your body is increased giving you the feeling you have a flu or some kind of illness.
Spleen beam
Beaming in your side gives you the idea you have spleen pain
How it is applied
They often do this during high intensity sport activities. The idea is to make you belive you have real spleen pain and will stop your exercise
ARMS
Biceps
They cook your biceps to reduce their power , make them feel painful when you load them during e.g. swimming. This may be done to prevent you from doing your sports.
muscle weakening in hand
They beam your hands. The result is that you can not hold a pen between thumb and finger like you used to, also you can not put you fingers against each other (like making a cup with your hand). They may do this to prevent you from working or doing your sports e.g. swimming.
LOWER BODY
Stomach cooking
They put a beam on your stomach and the stomach begins to bubble like something is cooking inside.
How it is applied
They often do this at night.
Should you worry
Yes, long term irradition may cause stomach cancer, tumors
Kidney damage
With some kind of ultrasound beam they attack your kidneys. The feeling is like you have been kicked over and over in your sides. This is like the feeling that is described by patients that have their kidney stones crushed by ultrasound.
Intestines cooking, urge to defecate
They cook your intestines and you feel you have to fart but cannot.
Fart beam
They cook your intestines and it will start bubbling. After some time you will have to fart
blind gut attack
they cook the area around your tail bone. After a short period, depending on the intensity this may take 60 seconds or more, you will feel horrible cramps.
Feeling
This pain makes you crawl on the floor. Horrible torture
After effects
It takes at least one hour before the horrible cramps get a litle less painful.
How to detect
With normal cramps you will have other parts of your body react as well, like heavy sweating. In this case there is just intense pain.
Diarreah
They cook your intestines and you have a very strong feeling to go to the toilet. By continously beaming you have very heavy diarreah
Why it is applied
Keep you out of important events, e.g. A lawsuit where you havve to defend yourself
Erection termination
This beam makes your erection go away, if you are a man of course. This can be done in 20-30 seconds. Depending on the direction of the beam your intestines may start bubbling though not very loud
Urge to urinate
They beam your lower body so you will feel the urge to urinate. It is difficult to ignore and there will come a moment you will have to do this when the beam continues.
UPPER LEGS
Block burst
The feeling is that your movement is blocked. You must take care not to fall or make a strange move
KNEE
Short beams
This will cause pain to your knee
High intensity beaming
The put the beamer on your knee and make sure it stays there for hours. The location may vary ut just above the knee cap can cause a lot of pain. This will result in very much pain and a very sensitive knee.
How it is applied
After a few days your knee hurts a lot when walking. They may apply this also when biking to make you think something is wrong with your knee
Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture
LOWER LEGS
Calf cooking
They apply low intensity, low power beam to your legs, e.g. When you are in bed. Your muscles, legs feel stif the next morning. They may start cooking the calfs after you finished running, and after some time before you want to go running to prevent you from running
How it is applied
What happens when you increase load on cooked muscles? They tear apart
Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture
Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports
Calf bursting
This beam is in fact a very high power burst and can cook your calf from hundreds of meters in a split second. If you are running your cooked muscles will tear apart and you have instant injury. See also Heart attack high power burst. You may notice the following feeling: a needle going in and out of your calf within a second
Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture
Why it is applied
Prevent you from runningm, other sports
Shin cooking
They cook the skin of your shin with very high intensities. When you are running, the shin injury is a well-known. They may start cooking the skin of of your shin after you finished running, and after some time (days) before you want to go running to prevent you from running
Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture
Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports
Heel muscle
The cook your heel muscle. This muscle does not contain much nerves so it is difficult to detect before the damage has been done. Then you will think back and remember there was something wrong the previous day or days.
Feeling
Walking can be painful.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports
Ankle
They cook your ankles, just to cause you pain. You feel the beam and it is difficult to keep your leg in the same position because of the pain. This is often a applied for a long period of time, several hours.
Feeling
Very painful
After effects
May take several days to disappear when applied with high intensities
Foot
They beam very hard in the center of your foot
Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture
Foot insane
They burst the center of your foot with max power very short burst beam, only once while walking even in a crowded place. This causes insane pain and you may fall immediately, because the foot is not functioning anymore.
Feeling
Extremely painful, horrible torture
Toes
They pick a single toe and beam it for several days in a row
Feeling
Painful
Toes insane
They burst your toes with with max power very short burst beam, and do this several times. This causes insane pain.
How it is applied
They may do this while riding your bike, horrible torture
Foot block
Ultrasonic beam to block the movement of a foot. If you are not prepared for this block you may fall.
BODY
Shaking
Your whole body starts shaking like being in a aircraft in bad weather. The frequency is around 5 Hz. The intensity may amaze you.
Scratching
They apply a scratch beam to any part of your body. This beam is very hard to resist. Before you know it you may start scratching yourself like crazy
Feeling
Horrible torture
LEG
Tremble apart
Some high power acoustic beamer is aimed at your leg and after some time your leg feels non-cooperative, not part of your body anymore
MOOD
Sleepy feeling
They beam you with a frequency that makes you really feel sleepy. You will start yawning and cannot keep your eyes open. This efect starts very suddenly and often ends very abrupt.
How it is applied
They may also do this by devices built into your car
Nausea
Not a very pleasant feeling but not veru disturbing or damaging
See the world turning
You feel dizzy and see the world turing like when you are very very tired. This effect is not really very real. The moment you are out-of-the-beam you are not turning anymore. Still it is amazing that this can be done.
fatigue attacks
Force awake
With this well-known beam they will keep you awake, prevent you from sleeping. This way they wear you out, may be the next day you have an important meeting or must finish important work.
Sweating, nauseous, vomit feeling
You start sweating suddenly, you feel dizzy, you think you may have to vomit. When applied with enough intensity you will start to vomit, you will need at least 30 minutes to recover a little bit from this attack, but it will take hours before your body is acting a bit like before the attack.
How it is applied
They may do this when you are with a friend. Google: navy vomit beam
Feeling
Horrible torture
SLEEP
Induce dreams
You have strange dreams about things but the dreams are not like dreams you had before. The dreams may refer to very recent events in your life, like a person you met, a movie yu saw, it is another form of reacting to events in your life
How it is applied
Some people in your environment might tell you they have wild dreams that night trying to get you talking about your experience
The only way to save the world is to stop your national secret services. Breaking laws and violating human rights in horrible ways has become a way of life. They are responsible for most problems in your neighborhood, in your city, in your country, in the world. Make them responsible for what they are doing.
Let them account for in detail, force them to open up their organizations for thorough investigations. Stop their funding if they do not co-operate. Replace directors and staff immediately by normal people for starters.
"Smart City" Is Really Government Spying On An Unimaginable Scale
November 12 2025 | From: BlacklistedNews/ Various
Announcement: Apologies for the interruption in service. Due to a series of very strange events everything went offline. Any donations would be very much appreciated.
Columbus, Ohio, actually won $50 million in DOT grant money to turn their city into a "Smart City" calling it "SmartColumbus." The city of Columbus will receive an additional $90 million in pledges from public and private sector partners.
"Smart PGH's" tag line at the end of the above video is chilling, "If It's Not For All, It's Not For Us". As "Smart PGH's" documents reveal, 'smart city' surveillance spies on All of Us.
The City of Pittsburgh sees the confluence of transportation and energy as the key to U.S. Department of Transportation’s (USDOT) Smart City Challenge. To meet the challenge, we will develop an open platform and corresponding governance structure to improve the safety, equity, and efficiency of our transportation network and its interaction with the energy and communications networks.
By building on existing technology deployments and increasing fixed and mobile sensors over a number of major “Smart Spine” corridors that connect with primary commercial centers and amenities, Pittsburgh will collect, analyze, visualize, and act on information to improve mobility for residents.
The non-proprietary nature of our platform allows the City of Pittsburgh and its partners to set an open, national standard for a municipal service delivery platform, which enhances industry and supports innovation.
According to the SCC, 'smart spines' use advanced technology like real-time adaptive traffic signals and vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication at intersections.
"Smart PGH" is working with Uber to spy on customers. (see page 4)
It appears that "smart cities" are part of the government's "Vision Zero" program, see page 6 of SCC's 'Enabling Hierarchy' diagram. Also on page 6, under the subject 'Data Collection Network' they mention, "Social Media Assets" otherwise known as social media spying. (more on that below)
In addition, we [Smart PGH] would like to work with Pittsburgh Bike Share, Uber, Lyft, and others to move towards more robust V2V communications that allow Port Authority buses, City fleet, bike share bicycles, ride-sharing services, etc. to become safer by sensing one another on Pittsburgh’s streets. Bicycle tracking has already begun, Ford Motor Company has given Palo Alto, $1.1 million to equip bicycles with GPS devices.
Joshuah Mello, the city’s chief transportation official, said the main draw of the new smart-bike system, operated by Motivate and sponsored by Ford, is that it will be part of a network growing in Bay Area cities from San Jose to San Francisco, “making it one of the largest systems in the entire world.”
What he should say is, this makes it one of the largest bicycle surveillance systems in the entire world! What follows, are some of the most chilling intrusions of government spying to date. Govt spying on social media.
To address Vision Element #9, SmartPGH will deploy our “Citizens as Sensors” effort aimed at extracting relevant data from social media. Scrubbing these sites and app will provide information on what people are doing in different places across Pittsburgh, data that can be used to infer behavior and data that can detect changes in behavior due to physical modifications made by SmartPGH and the City of Pittsburgh.
Pittsburgh can more easily detect if the modifications it is making are producing the desired changes or if they are leading to unanticipated outcomes or unhappy residents.
For example, changes to the number of check-ins citizens make to restaurants and retail establishments following the parking rate change can provide evidence of how much this change has impacted dining and shopping behaviors, providing valuable feedback not just on residents emotional reactions but also the wider economic impact of such decisions.
"At a different level many users volunteer information to Web 2.0 sites as a convenient way of making it available to friends and relations, irrespective of the fact that it becomes available to all."
Govt to spy on staircases, sidewalks, bicycles, trails, buses and trains.
Moreover, residents utilize the city's unique system of 712 public staircases, 40 miles of on-street bike infrastructure, 31 miles of trails, and numerous sidewalksand on a daily basis.
Companies like Sidewalk Labs, make a profit out of spying on pedestrians.
The Port Authority of Allegheny County operates a comprehensive transit network in the city, which includes 18.4 miles of busway, 26.2 miles of light rail, 72 local bus routes and two funiculars.
Power companies and the govt collaborate to spy on everyone.
Pages 22 & 23:
The City of Pittsburgh is in conversation with Duquesne Light and partner-company DQE Communications regarding the use of their extensive network of dark fiber. Most of the network capacity is currently “dark” and available for use by partners including the City of Pittsburgh.
To make the most of their network, Duquesne Light recently built a wireless communication infrastructure to support the increased data-flow between their electric meters and the company’s centralized operating center.
This effort has evolved into a high-capacity, resilient, wireless network covering the entirety of the City of Pittsburgh and the surrounding 817-square-mile service territory.
The grid of microgirds will spy on everyone's health, electrical and gas usage.
The grid-of-microgrids is designed to connect critical infrastructure like hospitals, universities, and data and telecommunications centers. Other partners in the effort include the UPMC health system, NRG energy, Duquesne Light and People’s natural gas.
Govt spying on Pittsburgh residents is frightening.
PennDOT’s Western Regional Traffic Management Center includes a fully integrated Centralized Software System, a Media Partner room that broadcasts live on-air reports of traffic conditions, and, a state of the art video wall capable of displaying 160 video images.
The center monitors and/or controls ITS devices on 12 freeway corridors, including many within Pittsburgh's limits.
These devices include: 293 CCTV cameras, 37 Highway Advisory Radio transmitter locations, 86 Highway Advisory Radio signs with beacons, 200 Microwave Traffic Detectors, 24 Dedicated Short Range Communication (DSRC) radios, 93 Digital Wave Radar Vehicular Detector units and many more specific ITS-related items.
List of govt agencies spying on residents:
Allegheny County
Penn DOT and the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
Southwestern Pennsylvania Commission
Port Authority of Allegheny County
Pittsburgh Parking Authority
Port of Pittsburgh Commission
Pittsburgh Bike Share
Utilities including energy distribution, water, and natural gas
University Partners, particularly University of Pittsburgh and Carnegie Mellon University
Major freight operators in Pittsburgh
Representatives of the Business and Philanthropic Communities
Citizens and Community Stakeholders Industry partners
The model for the WPRDC is unique because it is designed to be extensible and inclusive, able to host datasets from any municipality, non-profit, or researcher with data to share. By bringing together various levels of government, civil society, and academia around information resources, we have begun to improve our region’s capacity for innovation and evidence-driven policy-making.
The WPRDC’s web resources provide machine-readable data downloads and APIs of key administrative data on topics such as property assessment, building inspection, public health, crime, and asset management.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
Surtracs' Econolite specializes in spying on motor vehicles. They also invented 'autoscope' surveillance cameras in the early 1990's. Fyi, Surtrac's Autoscope Vision (AV) also spies on bicyclists.
AV delivers stop bar vehicle and bicycle detection, advanced vehicle detection, bicycle differentiation, traffic data collection, and HD video surveillance.
Surtrac boasts, about they're newly-developed, full-field-of-view object-feature tracking. In other words, the government can track an individual vehicle or bicyclist throughout an entire city!
There are plans to integrate Surtrac with the Port Authority of Allegheny County bus fleets’ using 'Clever Devices'. (more on that below)
2.Citilog, is a mirror image of Econolite but specializes in spying road sensors that are imbedded in every road, highway tunnel and bridge.
4.Wavetronix, can track an individual vehicles speed, even if they change lanes. Wavertronix also knows the type of vehicle you're driving, watch the video below to find out more.
Energy Follows Thought November 7 2025 | From: Omnithought / Various
We have all heard this phrase but I would like to go into a bit of depth as to what it means to raise it up a bit above a catch phrase or platitude.
It is a fundamental tenet of esoteric thought. Genesis tells us that "In the beginning the Earth was null and void and darkness was upon the deep". The first question that should bring to mind is "what is the deep?"
Comment: This article sounds a bit religious but the message is more a spiritual one, rather than of the 'God' of any given theology.
We’ll get to that in a moment. This nothingness then stirred and God said "Let there be Light", and divided light from the darkness. It was an act of pure spiritual will through the use of the divine mind. We haven’t actually divided the light from the darkness (its obvious source) only the idea has actually been created. A thought either created or accessed by the divine mind.
The mind created the idea before the will was able to manifest it, empowered by the desire to see it manifest. This is "the deep." The astral or desire plane is always associated with liquid and usually water.
It is interesting also that instead of just doing it we see that God crystallized this idea or thought form in a mantra or word of power; "Let there be light," and then created a physical plane change through his desire.
Thus the first manifested result of the omniscient being at the center of our system is organized sound, or vibration, and after that all that will ever be in the world is a product of vibration. The word Logos is used to describe this entity in manifestation and literally means "word".
Now why is any of this important? This first act of creation out of the mind of God is repeated in every other creative act on every level in every plane and it is used by you and I to create our world. We have talked about resonance and how we attract into our reality the things we think about most, but when we conceive of an idea and build a better mouse trap we are the creator in the microcosm.
Nothing is created without first being imagined. There has to be that moment when the creator says “wouldn’t it be cool if…” in this case the rest would be “there was light”. The image making faculty of consciousness is the mind. When we visualize and idea we are creating an image.
The energy and potential of the thought form is based on the ability of the consciousness that created, accessed, or simply organized it. We do this constantly but with little result because we are not very good a focusing our minds. The idea may just pass.
If the desire is strong enough then it is brought into physical “reality”. It is and always has been energy and has simply been organized at different levels until it has fully crystallized. The will of God creates through the love of God as do you and I.
The organizing force in this process of creation is mind. It may be the universal mind or the mind of an individual creator of some level of consciousness like that of a Logos or a human being. The process is the same. Creation is governed by the intelligence of the system.
The third ray of mind or intelligent activity gives birth to the four subsidiary rays of aspect. Only in manifestation are these aspects realized. The trinity itself stands in its potentiality even in the divine plane of Adi as the supposedly un-manifested self.
When we imagine or visualize something we are building in mental matter. Although it is interwoven with desire, another necessary aspect of the process, the mind is always the organizing force. If we are effective at visualizing what we want to “see” come about we will be more effective at bringing it about.
Visualization is an important aspect of meditation because of this. We are learning to create and through training we are taught to visualize in accordance with the things that the teacher see’s and knows as fact. The creative process and the ability to make changes are being used along proven lines and will be improved greatly.
We will eventually find our way but time can be gained through a guided and monitored approach to occult meditation. There are pitfalls that can be avoided on the way.
What we need to keep in mind is that there is a collective human consciousness that is creating all the time as well.
Groups and subgroups of subconscious and super-conscious entities creating in mental and astral matter and this is what decides the directions our in which societies move.
There is a unique way that each nationality approaches life because of its group identity. It is responsible for the beautiful colorations in cultural expression throughout the world and the thought provoking effect that is the result of some one individual swimming upstream.
It is fairly easy for us to create in line with the over-riding dream of our society and the planet herself, but to create something extraordinary requires much more personal power. These are the people we say are on a mission and will not be denied.
Their vision is so clear and the desire so strong that nothing will deter them from seeing is brought to a reality. This is why the training in business can produce, once a redirection of focus is triggered, a student of the spiritual sciences that will excel in these endeavors as well.
This is the reason for goal orientation and all of the attention that gets in business training. We want to be more effective in bringing about change on the physical plane and the only way to do that is to learn to focus our minds and visualize first.
The first creation is not done on the physical plane.
Everything we see in the physical world was first created on the mental plane. The energies were organized by the mind and brought to be through activity fired by desire. Think about the word “emotion” for a moment and how we express ourselves in this area of our lives.
We can be “moved” or “affected” by a person or a situation or even a song.
Emotions are what move us to move. If you want it bad enough you’ll go get it. It is not enough by itself but neither is the mind.
We have to be harmless in our intentions and balance and align all aspects of ourselves to our real purpose, and then we can create true beauty.
Gandhi once said “be the change you want to see in the world”.
Climate Intervention: A Government Cover-Up Of Epic Proportions November 6 2025 | From: WND / Various
A few years ago I addressed how CIA Director John Brennan gave a historic speech to the Council on Foreign Relations, confessing something few thought they would ever hear: the federal government’s explicit and intentional climate intervention via operations like stratospheric aerosol spraying or injections, or SAI.
What I didn’t explain is that SAI is a ginormous federal geo-engineering cover up that is now being exposed, and yet not a single mainstream media outlet has reported on it. Let me explain.
“Albedo modification would work by lacing the atmosphere with tiny particles or aerosols that would reflect sunlight and mimic natural processes.
For example, in 1991 the volcano Mount Pinatubo in the Philippines spewed 20 million tons of sulfur dioxide into the stratosphere, which spans altitudes from 10 to 50 kilometers.
There, the sulfur dioxide produced aerosols that reflected enough sunlight to reduce global temperature by an estimated 0.3°C for 3 years.
Albedo modification might also work by using aerosols to seed cloud formation in a lower atmospheric layer called the troposphere.”
The U.S. Senate pushed the DOE to pursue albedo modification action a couple months before CIA Director Brennan gave his blessing to stratospheric spraying as a government operation that “potentially could help reverse the warming effects of global climate change.”
What’s crazy about all that government endorsement is that the February 2015 NAS report, on which the feds base their entire toxic rain operation;
“Warned explicitly that albedo modification shouldn’t be deployed now because the risks and benefits were far too uncertain.”
What are those risks? Here are just three grave consequences that we know about:
Drought: The team under Chien Wang, a co-author of the NAS study and a senior research scientist at MIT’s Center for Global Change Science and the Department of Earth, concluded that albedo modification would lead;
“To dangerous changes in global weather: Precipitation would also decline worldwide, and some parts of the world would be worse off. Europe, the Horn of Africa, and Pakistan may receive less rainfall than they have historically.”
Loss of blue sky: According to a report by the New Scientist, Ben Kravitz of the Carnegie Institution for Science explained, “Releasing sulphate aerosols high in the atmosphere should in theory reduce global temperatures by reflecting a small percentage of the incoming sunlight away from the Earth.
However, the extra particles would also scatter more of the remaining light into the atmosphere. This would reduce by 20 per cent the amount of sunlight that takes a direct route to the ground, and it would increase levels of softer, diffuse scattered light,” making the sky appear hazier.
Hazards to human health and other earth life: The gravest of all consequences of atmospheric aerosol spraying is that, simply put, what’s sprayed above us settles down upon us and in us, as well as other life on earth.
The U.S. government’s own National Center for Biotechnology Information, or NCBI, released a report in January 2016, the goal of which was “Assessing the direct occupational and public health impacts of solar radiation management with stratospheric aerosols.” The NCBI concluded:
“Our analysis suggests that adverse public health impacts may reasonably be expected from SRM via deployment of stratospheric aerosols.
Little is known about the toxicity of some likely candidate aerosols, and there is no consensus regarding acceptable levels for public exposure to these materials.
There is also little infrastructure in place to evaluate potential public health impacts in the event that stratospheric aerosols are deployed for solar radiation management.”
No wonder the co-author of the study on “Climate Intervention,” Dr. James Fleming, called geo-engineering like SAI: "Untested and untestable, and dangerous beyond belief."
Another colleague and co-author, Dr. Raymond T. Pierrehumbert, the Louis Block professor in geophysical sciences at the University of Chicago, and Sweden’s King Carl XVI Gustafn, chairman in environmental science at Stockholm’s Universitet, took it one step further. He warned;
"The nearly two years’ worth of reading and animated discussions that went into this study have convinced me more than ever that the idea of ‘fixing’ the climate by hacking the Earth’s reflection of sunlight is wildly, utterly, howlingly barking mad.”
(That is why Dr. Pierrehumbert prefers to call albedo modification by the name “albedo hacking.”)
Dr. Pierrehumber added: “The report describes albedo modification frankly as involving large and partly unknown risks. It states outright that albedo modification ‘should not be deployed.'”
So, why are the U.S. Senate and CIA director disregarding the dire and passionate warnings of scientists like Dr. Pierrehumbert and Dr. Fleming by demanding that the Department of Energy proceed with trials on geo-engineering? In the words of Dr. Pierrehumber, are they “wildly, utterly, howlingly barking mad”?
Is it a mere coincidence that the very government agencies that are spraying our stratosphere with toxic chemicals were the actual sponsors of the NAS report? The NAS itself confessed:
“The study was sponsored by the National Academy of Sciences, U.S. intelligence community, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, and U.S. Department of Energy” (italics mine).
Isn’t that like your right hand quoting your left hand so that your right hand can grab what it’s already holding? Is the NAS report another government push and ploy to collaborate and cite “scientific proof” to justify its clandestine climate agenda?
Why else would the CIA and U.S. Senate be proceeding in climate aerosol spraying when the very scientists preparing the study warned, “Stop! Don’t do it! It’s crazy and dangerous!”
The most colossal and tragic of all government cover-ups is the fact that the feds have been waging climate warfare for more than 30 years, lacing our clouds and stratosphere with dangerous nano-particles, including environmental sulfates, black carbon, metallic aluminum and aluminum oxide aerosols.
The truth is, for decades, the feds have been covertly and overtly running sky criminal operations behind (above!) our backs, leaving humans and the rest of the planet life as lab rats of their toxic cocktail fallout.
Geoengineeringwatch.org reported that a 1978 750-page congressional report was recently discovered with a mountain of information going back decades that “confirms the ongoing extensive involvement of our government in climate modification/weather warfare.
This document also confirms the involvement of foreign governments around the globe, even governments that would otherwise have been considered ‘hostile to US interests.'”
Why hasn’t a single mainstream media outlet reported on the CIA and DOE’s march forward with SAI when the scientific community has explicitly and repeatedly warned against it?
Why are geo-engineering researchers being stonewalled by government and media?
And why in hell are watchdogs on both the left and right dodging the feds’ intentional and hazardous climate intervention, when they seek to uncover government cover-ups and conspiracies with the most scant of evidence?
Dane Wigington, the lead researcher for GeoengineeringWatch.org and a fierce fighter for government geoengineering transparency, was absolutely right when he wrote: “How big does the climate engineering elephant in the room need to be before it can no longer be hidden in plain site?
How much more historical proof do we need of the ongoing climate engineering / weather warfare before the denial of the masses crumbles?
When will populations around the globe bring to justice all those responsible for the ongoing and rapidly worsening worldwide weather warfare assault?”
Is it a mere coincidence that, in October 2015, the feds put a universal “gag order” on agency employees in “The National Weather Service,” the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration” and the “U.S. Dept. of Commerce”?
Is it a mere coincidence that the Obama administration spent more taxpayer monies for legal prosecutions of government whistleblowers than all other U.S. presidents combined, resulting in 31 times the jail sentences?
It’s time to blow the lid off the climate bullshit of governments!
That is why my wife, Gena, and I encourage citizens everywhere to do their own research on geo-engineering and then write their government representatives to demand action. We also encourage the support of the Legal Alliance of pro-bono lawyers now amassed as a united front to fight the geo-engineering government cover-up in court.
To read or learn more immediately, I highly recommend the work and website of Dane Wigington. GeoEngineeringWatch.org is loaded with great research on the many facets of climate intervention.
Neuroscience Says Listening To This Song Reduces Anxiety By Up To 65 Percent + The Miracle Of 528 Hz Solfeggio And Fibonacci Numbers November 5 2025 | From: Inc / Various
Sure to both stir your soul and calm your nervous system.
Everyone knows they need to manage their stress. When things get difficult at work, school, or in your personal life, you can use as many tips, tricks, and techniques as you can get to calm your nerves.
So here's a science-backed one: make a playlist of the 10 songs found to be the most relaxing on earth.
Sound therapies have long been popular as a way of relaxing and restoring one's health. For centuries, indigenous cultures have used music to enhance well-being and improve health conditions.
Neuroscientists out of the UK have specified which tunes give you the most bang for your musical buck.
The study was conducted on participants who attempted to solve difficult puzzles as quickly as possible while connected to sensors. The puzzles induced a certain level of stress, and participants listened to different songs while researchers measured brain activity as well as physiological states that included heart rate, blood pressure, and rate of breathing.
According to Dr. David Lewis-Hodgson of Mindlab International, which conducted the research, the top song produced a greater state of relaxation than any other music tested to date.
In fact, listening to that one song - "Weightless" - resulted in a striking 65 percent reduction in participants' overall anxiety, and a 35 percent reduction in their usual physiological resting rates.
Equally remarkable is the fact the song was actually constructed to do so. The group that created "Weightless", Marconi Union, did so in collaboration with sound therapists. Its carefully arranged harmonies, rhythms, and bass lines help slow a listener's heart rate, reduce blood pressure and lower levels of the stress hormone cortisol.
When it comes to lowering anxiety, the stakes couldn't be higher. Stress either exacerbates or increases the risk of health issues like heart disease, obesity, depression, gastrointestinal problems, asthma, and more.
More troubling still, a paper out of Harvard and Stanford found health issues from job stress alone cause more deaths than diabetes, Alzheimer's, or influenza.
In this age of constant bombardment, the science is clear: if you want your mind and body to last, you've got to prioritize giving them a rest. Music is an easy way to take some of the pressure off of all the pings, dings, apps, tags, texts, emails, appointments, meetings, and deadlines that can easily spike your stress level and leave you feeling drained and anxious.
Of the top track, Dr. David Lewis-Hodgson said, "'Weightless' was so effective, many women became drowsy and I would advise against driving while listening to the song because it could be dangerous."
So don't drive while listening to these, but do take advantage of them:
The Question That Fluoridation Promoters Can’t Answer November 4 2025 | From: FluorideAlert / Various[Archivum]
During 2016, I asked this question to many fluoridation promoters and have yet to receive an adequate scientific answer.
I asked it in several audiences in New Zealand and also to promoters at a council hearing in Naples, Florida and at a debate in Cortland, New York with Johnny Johnson and Steve Slott. Neither Johnson nor Slott, otherwise very vocal on promoting fluoridation, had an answer.
“What primary scientific studies (not bogus reviews conducted by pro-fluoridation agencies) can you cite that gives you the confidence to ignore or dismiss the evidence that fluoride damages the brain as documented in over 300 animal and human studies (including 50 IQ studies).”
If proponents cannot provide an adequate scientific answer to this question: fluoridation should be halted immediately.
On Nov 22, 2016, Michael Connett, JD, asked this question to the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), on behalf of FAN, Food & Water Watch, Organic Consumers Association, American Academy of Environmental Medicine, International Academy of Oral Medicine and Toxicology, Moms Against Fluoridation, and several individual mothers, in a petition calling on the EPA to ban the deliberate addition of fluoridating chemicals to the drinking water under provisions in the Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA).
The EPA has 90 days to reply, and if they fail to provide a satisfactory reply then they can be taken to Federal Court.
How you can take this further?
We are requesting that each one of you to ask this question of any promoter of fluoridation – and keep asking it throughout 2017 until you can get an answer. Send that answer to us.
Based on responses we have seen so far we anticipate that there will be no satisfactory answers. In our view, there is no scientific evidence that could justify ignoring the large number of scientific studies that fluoride damages the brain and thus no justification for continuing this unethical and reckless practice of deliberately adding fluoridating chemicals to the drinking water.
This in essence will be our 2017 campaign. Very simple, very direct and very important. We hope that you will support this in two ways: a) ask this showstopper question in as many creative ways as you can and as many times as you can, and b) support FAN financially.
Five More Ways to Take Action:
1. Send a letter-to-the-editor to your local newspapers
The Real Green Glossary: FAQ & The Great “Global Warming / Climate Change” Alarm Is Part Of The WEF’s “Great Reset” November 3 2025 | From: BreakingViews / GlobalResearch / NZPCR / Various
The innovative manipulation and misuse of the English language is the proudest achievement of that new breed of media entertainers - ‘climate change journalists.’
Attuned to a post-modern society where truth is in the eye of the beholder, reportage of climate science is dominated by fudge and misdirection.
Even the Green Prince has become so confused that he is to publish his own Glossary. The UK Telegraph reports:
"The Prince of Wales will on Thursday launch a "green glossary" for farmers after warning that environmental jargon is so obscure that it can harm efforts to combat climate change."
He said it was vital that everyone "speaks the same language”…
The vocabulary being used by NGOs and scientists was “so hard to understand it even appeared to have been deliberately chosen to hide real meanings.”
That is clearly a step forward – but how are non-farmers to cope?
The following FAQ is a first attempt to fill this vacuum:
1. Does “Climate Change” Mean Changes in the Climate?
No. It means dangerous anthropogenic global warming (DAGW); ie a sharp increase in the global mean surface temperature (GMST) arising from changes in the atmosphere caused by human activities.
The term that climate scientists now use for actual experienced long-term changes in temperatures, rainfall, sunshine hours, etc is “climate variation”.
2. What Does “Scientists Say” Mean?
Nothing. There are millions of scientists and they all say different things. When used by a reputable journalist, it should mean the consensus view in Assessment Reports published by the UN-sponsored Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC).
These reports are generally signed off by most of the world’s governments.
Yes. Over the last 50 years, it has been warming at an average rate of 0.12°C per decade. Since the end of the Little Ice Age in about 1850, the GMST has increased by 1.1°C. At present rates of change, it will increase by a further 0.9°Ç by 2100.
4. Is Planetary Warming Unusual?
No. Since the last glaciation, GMST has fluctuated constantly (it is always either warming or cooling). There are known and unknown regular oscillations caused by planetary orbits, the brightness/magnetic activity of the sun, volcanic and tectonic activity, migrations of ocean currents, etc.
The Medieval Warm Period (MWP) was warmer than now but, around 1150 AD, was followed by the Little Ice Age (LIA) which persisted until about 1850.
5. Is Atmospheric Carbon Dioxide Increasing?
Yes. It is currently estimated to be 0.0042% of the atmosphere, or 420 parts-per-million (ppm) and is currently increasing at an average rate of 2 ppm, as a result of increased emissions from human activities.
The atmospheric concentration of CO2 was at a record low of 280 ppm in 1850 and the increase did not have any evident impact on world climate until it exceeded 330 in about 1950.
Check out the third planet to from the left.
You live there. Do you yet see the size of the lie?
Yes. Humans make infinitesimally small contributions in myriad ways, but mainly by increasing natural emissions of greenhouse gases (GHGs) and by land use change.
The extent of the “advanced greenhouse effect” contribution is unproven and highly controversial.
7. Does Nature Contribute to Global Warming?
Yes. The extent of natural variability and forcing is the subject of a thousand opinions but has never been officially assessed. The remit of the IPCC is restricted to human-caused warming.
While the consensus IPCC opinion is that human activities cause “most” observed warming, sceptics believe natural effects are dominant and the human contribution is trivial.
8. Are There Any “Human Footprints”?
No. The IPCC view that “more than half” of recent global warming was anthropogenic is largely based on the expert judgmentof its WG1 lead authors.
They are mainly modellers – who say that the models cannot replicate past temperatures when the human contribution is omitted. Sceptics say the models are neither verified nor validated and have been criticised for “running hot” by the IPCC itself.
No. Climate is local weather averaged over decades, and local weather is not correlated in any way with trend changes in GMST.
On a worldwide scale, GMST trends are not well correlated with the either the frequency or intensity of extreme weather events such as hurricanes, storms, floods, droughts or wildfires.
10. Is Climate Change “An Existential Threat”?
No. This notion is entirely invented by climate campaigners, and dramatised by politicians/news media. Even the worst case IPCC scenario (combined with the least-accurate computerised models) suggest possible future risk of serious inconvenience only.
The latest Assessment Report (AR5) contains no prediction of widespread mortality rates.
11. Can We “Save the Planet”?
No.Planet Earth was formed about 4.3 billion years before the first humans appeared, and it had more atmospheric CO2 and higher temperatures than now for most of that time.
Extensive use of stored fossil fuels began less than a century ago.
Regenerate: Beyond The C02 Narrative
The science and differing perspectives behind CO2's link to climate change can be dizzying.
Beyond that, there is a story that is not being told about our environment, and it's leading to proposing solutions that will likely cause even further damage to our environment. Regenerate reveals this hidden story, and encourages humanity to reconnect with nature.
12. Would “Net Zero by 2050” Solve Global Warming?
No. At least not by any detectable amount. It cannot apply to the largest emitters – China and India – which will produce the majority of global emissions in the next 30 years. But even if the USA (the next largest) somehow achieved this goal, it would avert only 0.137°C by 2100.
This is barely within the margin of error of measurements.
13. Is “Carbon” a Pollutant”?
No. All human animal and plant life is mainly made of carbon (and water).
Plants are fertilised by carbon dioxide and cannot survive if atmospheric CO2 falls below 250 ppm. The earth’s vegetation has increased by about 14% as a result of the recent growth in ppm.
Barry Brill OBE JP LL.M(Hons) M.ComLaw is a former MP and Minister of Energy, Petrocorp director, and chair of the Gas Council, Power NZ, ESANZ, and EMCO. He is presently the Chairman of the New Zealand Climate Science Coalition.
The UN’s COP26 is a grotesque and decadent spectacle.
We are witnessing Versailles levels of extravagance and hypocrisy. From every corner of the globe, the super-rich, the powerful and the full of puffed-up virtue are gathered in Glasgow to pontificate to the rest of us about how much we are harming the planet with all our waste and hubris.
They arrived in their fleets of private jets to bemoan the scourge of air-industry emissions. They are tucking in to five-star meals in between wondering out loud if the little people should eat less meat.
They’ll rest their weary, virtuous heads on plump, silk pillows after long days of discussing how to rein in the material aspirations of the masses.
It is perhaps the most nauseating display of oligarchical conceit of recent times.
The foregoing is unapologetically uplifted from a recent thundering editorial in Spiked. Brendan O’Neill captures the odious dishonesty of the world’s privileged and powerful as they strut their virtue in a groupthink orgy of piety. I recommend that you read it all.
One by one these elitists are competing to heighten the hysteria … “one minute to midnight” … “code red for the planet”… “an existential threat to humanity”… “greatest moral challenge of our time” … “last best hope for the world” … and on … and on … and on.
Hundreds of highly-paid PR flacks in dozens of countries have sweated out these histrionic phrases. The world’s billionaires and high potentates then humbly volunteered to deliver the gold-plated words personally to Glasgow by private jet and chauffeured limousine. And to be seen there.
But why are 400 private jets parked at airports serving Glasgow? Honestly? Why not deliver the words by email – or even by video if the media need visuals? What do they achieve by their swaggering physical presence? After all, everybody knows that this entire convention is a pretentious charade.
Nobody at the convention hall in Glasgow really needs to be convinced that climate action is a good thing. The hall is an echo-chamber of like-minded enthusiasts.
A committee of 25,000 is never going to make any worthwhile decision that was not pre-approved long before the convention began.
It is all theatre. But it is a very expensive performance, and – with Scotland reporting 400 new infections each day – it is a potentially dangerous performance for over 100 countries.
All attendees are exempted from Scotland’s vaccine passport scheme.
(“All animals are equal but some are more equal than others” - Orwell).
The private jets alone will blast 13,000 tonnes of CO2 into the atmosphere, and their ostentatious presence has been branded “rank climate hypocrisy” and the “nadir of carbon inequality”. But they are no more than the visible tip of an iceberg.
Many of their mega-rich owners – Bloomberg, Bejos, Fink, Gates, Soros, Schwab, the Rockefellers, the Rothschilds – are pouring many more billions into lobbying governments everywhere for their favoured climate policies.
There are literally tens of thousands of professional climate activists working on a full-time basis and drawing wages funded by these “philanthropists”. They make up the bulk of the non-delegates at the Glasgow convention. What hope does common sense or moderation have in the face of such an army of propagandists?
Francis Menton believes that, on balance, it’s a good thing we have these annual COPs, saying:
"I can think of no other comparable activities that put on such dramatic and widely-viewed display the immeasurable foolishness and hubris of our political overlords."
Menton points out that no less than 25 COPs have previously ordered the world to reduce its omissions.
They succeeded in delivering the dismal track record shown in this graph:
While every smug and sanctimonious member of the climate elite can readily churn out 10,000 words about the benefits of “net zero carbon by 2050”, none ever seem to mention the costs.
Or who is to pay those costs. [Clue: it’s not them.]
Both New Zealand and UK governments have released modelling as to the likely costs. While admitting that “nobody knows”, the models suggest a figure of about US$11,000 per household per year.
Contrast this with the 68% of Americans who tell opinion surveyors that they are not prepared to pay more than $10 per month to ameliorate climate change.
Where is the self-awareness of elites who instruct us to “do what we say not what we do":
Al Gore, who predicts 20-foot rises in sea levels has bought a 9-bathroom beach front villa in Montecito, California;
Barack Obama, who declared “the moment when the rise of the oceans began to slow” has acquired a waterfront mansion on Martha’s Vineyard;
When John Kerry recently flew in his family’s private jet to Obama’s 60th birthday party, it was the 16th private-jet jaunt his family has taken this year
The Prime Minister of the Maldives, who mimed an underwater cabinet meeting, built an international airport less than 2 metres above mean sea level;
In the knowledge that limiting population is a key tenet of climate alarmists, Boris Johnson is about to have his seventh child;
Jeff Bezos flew into Glasgow in his Gulfstream jet after attending Bill Gates 66th birthday party in the Mediterranean. At the party 50 guests were choppered from private yachts to a beach;
Closer to home, the New Zealand Green Party MPs fly more kilometres than the MPs of any other party.
Minister James Shaw flew no less than 14 bureaucrats to Glasgow (in business class) for no known benefits to taxpayers – shouldering aside hapless MIQ applicants who have been queueing for months to return to their homeland.
This is a movement that allows the descendants of incredibly wealthy banking families to tell the rest of us to wear a cardie rather than turn on the central heating and which invites literal princes to make sad faces about all the flying and meat-eating the oiks are engaging in.
I said it was a modern version of Versailles, but actually it’s worse than that. At least daft bint Marie Antoinette wanted the lower orders to eat cake (she just didn’t realise they didn’t have any).
This new lot actively campaigns against the consumption of the 21st-century equivalent of cake – meat, heat, easy travel. ‘Don’t let them eat cake’ is the cry of the eco-aristocrat.
The Great “Global Warming / Climate Change” Alarm Is Part Of The WEF’s “Great Reset”
If anyone says to you “the weather extremes are a sure sign of global warming”, it’s because they take this information directly from the media and assume it to be fact.
The media get it from government – or government ‘expert advisors’.
The ‘expert advisors’ get it from a computer modelling exercise (e.g. Imperial College London).
The computer modelling exercise gets it from a large financial incentive offered by the corporate conglomerate and bought-out government, with the explicit instruction to produce a result which fills the needs of their combined political goals.
In this case, to magic-up ‘scientific proof’ that [man-made] global warming is real.
The need to have ‘proof’ that this invention is real is arrived at in spite of the fact that global warming’s main proponents know that the idea was dreamed-up at the Club of Rome in 1972 under a widely publicised treatise with the catchy title ‘Limits to Growth’.
Limits to Growth might have appealed to those who oppose neo-liberal capitalist insistence on the necessity for a ‘permanent growth’ economy; but the real intent behind those words is the conditioning of the receiver to take a self imposed pseudo-sacrificial attitude about ‘limitation’.
Ergo, limiting one’s self for the sake of a ‘higher cause’ – saving the natural environment from Global Warming!
This form of conditioning becomes the perfect precept for encouraging naturally concerned citizens to not just embrace cutting back the typical material excesses of their lives, but ultimately the pseudo-saintly renunciation of all material interests.
The ghoulish plan behind Klaus Schwab’s quasi religious Sermon from the Mount WEF:
“You will own nothing and you will be happy.”
Schwab’s psycho-social engineering ‘deep mind experts’ having planned-out the precise stepping stones necessary for a ‘check-mate’ seamless handing-over of all private wealth to the insatiably materialistic elite masters of deception.
A thoroughly odious yet quite brilliant slight of hand.
The great ‘Global Warming’ alarm was raised as a calculated way for leading industrialists, bankers and royalty to ensure their future as the premier influencers and controllers of global affairs.
Blanket controlled media indoctrination, using rampant fear mongering as its key component, is designed to convert public sentiment to the cause.
The elite industrialist club know full well that ‘fear’ makes desperate people turn to their perceived leaders to protect them – and tell them what to do. The historial precedent for this is ubiquitous.
The notion that the climate was dangerously warming had no scientific evidence to back it up. That was cooked-up later under the auspices of the International Panel on Climate Change (IPPC).
It is more than unfortunate that the great majority of green oriented NGO’s also swallowed the bait and, being by then mostly well funded by corporate backed governments, took the money, closed their eyes and minds – and jumped on board – thus embracing the deadly distortion of their original green commitments.
It is now the turn of Klaus Schwab (director of World Economic Forum) to take up the reins handed down to him by earlier representatives of the small but powerful elite that runs planetary affairs via such puppet heads of state as Bush, Cheney, Blair – and other aspiring despots of that time.
Schwab’s job is to ensure that ‘stop global warming’ goals are fully implemented through the channels of The Green New Deal, Great Reset, Fourth Industrial Revolution, Zero Carbon agenda.
He must get this fake-green ball firmly rolling down the road especially designed for it by highly paid technocrats, whose particular bent is to create an ‘inventory of everything’ to make possible the control of all aspects of life on Earth.
These techno’s view the management of the world as an exercise in accounting. A sterile reductionist mind-set closely linked to robotics and the notion that advanced mechanisation and calculation is superior to the creativity of the human mind.
Hence the WEF’s announcement of the forthcoming ‘Internet of Everything’, the 5G powered Smart City surveillance and control grid which forms the centrepiece of The Great Reset agenda.
An authentic vision that bears no resemblance whatsoever to today’s gigantic corporate led Fourth Industrial Revolution, held up by the WEF masters of deception to be the only solution for ‘greening the planet’. What it actually is, of course, is a wholesale corporate / cabal grab for the control of the world’s primary resources and money supply. The word ‘green’ could hardly have been more butchered.
So with this fake green ideology now at the forefront of the central control global planning elite’s blueprint for a brave new world, the drive is on to utilise every opportunity possible to enforce conditions that constrict mankind’s behaviour patterns to fit the cunningly concocted demands of ‘preventing global warming’.
The great Club of Rome scare story, designed specifically to leave a frightened and confused public completely dependent upon the technocrat ‘experts’ coming up with a ‘life saving solution’ to prevent the planet from frying.
Now, ‘the life saving solution’ to the fictional ‘problem’ the technocrats came up with, has to fulfil the hard-wired goals of this small but very powerful elite that forms the shadow government of the planet. A despotic cabal whose intention is to master-mind the future according to a darkly inflated sense of self importance and superiority over the rest of humanity.
The first thing needed to smooth the way for the unfettered display of such rampant megalomania is to ensure the least possible public resistance. Least resistance to the rolling-out of ‘the grand plan’, whose implementation requires – to make it credible – a continuous process of environmental disruption and degradation.
The cause of this disruption can then be pinned on the advance of the ‘catastrophic’ warming’ – to which all solutions must be ‘technological’. Technological in the sense of high tech, robotic, digital and electro magnetic.
Killing at least two birds with one stone is a popular concept within the ranks of New World Order proponents. So it was found that the effects of a general dumbing-down of brain power could be enhanced when combined with individually targeted mind control, hypnosis and torture, all of which had already been well tested via the US MK Ultra programme.
In this program human beings were ruthlessly experimented upon to find at what point they ‘cracked’ and became controllable tools for carrying out the secret operations needed to undermine the orderly functioning of society and to enact psy-ops, false flag events and even – when deemed necessary, murders.
A variation on these same techniques were used behind closed doors during Covid lockdown, especially in care homes, where genocide has become thematic and old people are considered disposable matter in the cause of ‘stopping Covid’.
Mind control is the central weapon of the elite planners. Its presence is ubiquitous in all aspects of daily life – starting with the TV – a particularly vital component of (State) control of the masses, and extending into all mainstream media operations, cell phone technologies, computer programmes, WiFi and advanced military ‘silent’ weaponry.
There is a wafer thin line of distinction between the process and function of mind control, propaganda and straight indoctrination.
All the above are now being deployed to get the joys of Klaus Schwab’s Great Reset, Zero Carbon, Green Deal and 5G Smart Cities firmly installed in the brain cells of culpable human beings, who are also to be induced to hand-over all their private assets ‘for the cause’.
Do not underestimate the mind bending power it takes to get ordinary folk to embrace the notion “You will own nothing and you will be happy”.
It is nothing less than ‘fear of global warming’ that holds the entire Great Reset / Green Deal invention together.
Without this scary message of ‘disaster if we don’t act’ underpinning it, the future of the New World Order’s master control agenda would fall apart at the seams.
Atmospheric Aerosol Geoengineering (Chemtrails), Covid, 5G, The High Auroral Atmospheric Research Program (HAARP), WiFi, GMO, the chemical saturation of household products and especially foods – are all examples of contemporary weapons whose deployment is sold to us as ‘important progressive science’, but whose true purpose is to suffocate the life force that drives human and environmental vigour, natural health and spiritual vibrance.
Right down to the manipulation and degradation of human, animal and plant DNA and the genome of life itself.
At the end of this egregious mono cybernetic intrusion into the divinity of creation is ‘Robotic Man’. The transhumanist singularity omega point. A soulless cyborg ‘inhuman race’ which gets all its instructions through having its neocortex permanently wired to a central super computer.
This is actually the vision of the evolution of humanity that Schwab’s dark controllers have planned-out to be ‘The New Normal’; making the sentient human race largely obsolete by around 2050 – and almost so by 2030 / 2040.
A human race that will by then have been culled down to approximately one quarter of its current number, if all goes according to plan for the psychopathic architects of the Great Reset/New World Order/Green Deal.
It is vital to grasp that the monstrous Covid invention, whose toxic ‘vaccinations’ are a genocide inducing weapon dressed up as ‘protection’, is just one of the cards in the ‘kill and control’ pack.
A significant one, but one whose manifestation is symptomatic of the demonic bag of tricks available to the insentient perpetrators of raw evil.
Corona Virus and Global Warming are First Cousins
They both owe their creation to exactly the same ‘rabbit from a hat’ conjuring trick.
That of applying the art of deception-hypnosis en masse, in order to make people believe that what is unreal is real – what is fake is actual. And they both use the same fascist control mechanisms to achieve their ends.
Now we have put together the disparate parts of this genocide operation called: The Great Reset (forced totalitarian take-over), Green New Deal (fake green fascism), Zero Carbon (no carbon=no life), Fourth Industrial Revolution (completely robotic workplace) we can recognise that each element is actually integral to the overall plan.
Strung together in this way we can finally see the whole diabolical picture.
It is therefore vital to recognise that we can only be effective in our defence of Life on Earth by seeing and acting on this ‘whole picture’. Not being drawn into treating each symptom as a separate and unrelated crises in its own right. Which is precisely what the instigators want us to do, of course.
For a steadily growing number of people, these dark days are actually having the reverse effect than that intended.
They are stimulating the manifestation of great shafts of counteractive light! Suddenly, tens of thousands are finding a commonality of purpose and joining together to take-on the masters of deception, through standing strong for truth, justice and freedom.
It portends a remarkable shift of emphasis in all our lives. One of truly dramatic proportions that heralds the tangible unfolding of a new era for humanity.
An era in which a dissolving of old barriers of race, class, religion and money – ushers in a profound sense of universal brother and sister hood; a great expansion of the spiritual and a new form of worldwide social and economic cooperation.
Cooperation in which shared humanitarian goals steadily replace the divisive and destructive greed of the profit predicated global market place.
This heart-led flowering of humanity is to be the truly defining factor of the great Global Warming / Covid Scam, as the history books will one day relate.
The overwhelming use of fear and deception has provoked the opposite state to come out of hiding and to manifest as what, for its detractors, will be an unendurable counter force – emanating from none less than the energetic source of Creation Itself.
Such an astounding metamorphosis is now underway, and it has taken an extraordinary, blatant manifestation of darkness to ignite the counteractive fire which is now calling forth a great renaissance of the true powers of man.
This is the age of truth, enlightenment and action.
Take your courage in both hands and step forth! Set your sights on nothing less than disarming and dismantling the technocratic top-down total-control system that attempts to enslave you, me and every sentient human being who seeks to remain true to the deepest values of Life.
“Psychiatric medications are among the most widely prescribed and biggest-selling class of drugs in the US.
In 2010, Americans spent $16.1 billion on anti-psychotics to treat depression, bipolar disorder and schizophrenia, $11.6 billion on antidepressants and $7.2 billion on treatment for ADHD, according to IMS Health, which tracks prescription drug sales.”
Psychiatric drugs can cause many horrible side effects, some of which are worse than the original condition they were intended to treat. In fact, there is a very clear link between psychiatric medications and the violent actions of the “mass shooters” over the past few years. In many cases, these drugs are harmful and unnecessary.
Caveat lector: I’m not a doctor, nor do I play one on TV. The contents of this article are not meant to replace medical advice. The data presented is for informational purposes only.
There is a theory that most (and some say all) mental illnesses are caused by nutritional deficiencies. The brain is a miraculous creation that must be properly fueled in order to function correctly. Feeding your brain (and body) empty chemically created calories is akin to putting diesel fuel into a gasoline engine.
It sputters and grinds to a halt, and the contamination must be thoroughly flushed out of the system for it to work properly again. Vehicles come with differently shaped fuel-filler openings, to make it difficult to put in the wrong fuel.
Human beings, unfortunately, are not equipped with this type of mechanism and can therefore stuff anything and everything into their mouths and hope their body recognizes it as fuel.
Back to the Brain:
The brain uses 20-30% of a person’s daily caloric intake for the day. If you don’t consume enough calories, verbal fluency, problem solving ability and motivation are affected first. Then bodily functions are decreased in reverse order of necessity for life.
Your brain requires essential fatty acids to maintain proper function. This is one of the many reasons that extreme low-fat diets are not healthy. Fatty acids are required to maintain connections between neurons.
A lack of N3 (aka Omega-3) fatty acids may cause learning and motor disabilities, and may damage the passage of dopamine and serotonin in the frontal cortex. The most vital EFAs are 3, 6, and 9.
Dopamine and serotonin are both crucial to mental health. Dopamine affects the brain processes that control voluntary movements, emotional responses, and the ability to register pleasure and pain. Serotonin is known as the feel-good neurotransmitter. This chemical is related to the ability to resist impulses.
Serotonin (or lack thereof) plays a major role in things like depression, suicide, impulsive behavior, mood control, and aggression. The basic premise is that if these chemicals are not being properly transported in your brain, your mental health could suffer.
A lack of Vitamin D has been linked to depression, schizophrenia, dementia, Parkinson’s disease, and Alzheimer’s disease. Research has suggested that Vitamin D is in actuality a neuroactive steroid, a chemical that is targeted by certain SSRI antidepressants. A lack of Vitamin D can negatively affect the transport of Dopamine.
The best source of Vitamin D is sunlight absorbed through the skin. This may explain the prevalence of depression in the winter, particularly in regions that receive less direct sunlight.
Niacin (Vitamin B3) is an effective treatment for depression, anxiety, schizophrenia and insomnia. In the textbook Orthomolecular Psychiatry, David Hawkins, M.D. and Linus Pauling, Ph.D. outline the protocol for a niacin regimen for mental health. Although this particular book targets the treatment of schizophrenia, the niacin treatment is the same for other mental health issues.
The body cannot store niacin, so it’s important to take this supplement every day. A great resource for information about Niacin can be found here. Here’s how it works:
“In the brain, low levels of the neurotransmitter serotonin are associated with depression. One of the building blocks of serotonin is the amino acid tryptophan, and one of the building blocks of tryptophan is niacin. Tryptophan also helps the body supply itself with niacin.
If tryptophan is divided between serotonin production and niacin production, serotonin production is likely to be inadequate. Supplemental niacin and tryptophan can improve symptoms of depression."
(Think about it – it isn’t cost effective for the pharmaceutical companies because you can’t patent a plant! Supplements containing tyrosine and phenylalanine are said to help with the transport of serotonin and dopamine, as well.
Other vitamins and minerals that are important to mental health are: Vitamin E, Folate (another B vitamin), Magnesium, Calcium, Zinc, Chromium, B12 and B6.
Eating for Good Mental Health
The first line of defense against mental health issues should always be nutritional. Take a good look at your diet and contemplate the fuel you are putting into your body.
Once you’ve made the required adjustments to your diet, start a food/mood journal. It’s very likely you will begin to see a link between certain foods and your state of mind. Around the holidays or when I’m on vacation, sometimes I’ve found myself in a funk; and, generally speaking, I’ve been eating things I don’t normally consume.
Certain foods seem to trigger this for me, particularly commercial bread products. You may discover that the issue is as much about what you avoid as it is about what you eat.
From a preparedness aspect, we know that if the SHTF, we will be undergoing a lot more stress than we do in our current day to day lives.
This tough time could be anything from a job loss to a natural disaster to an economic collapse. It’s vitally important to stock up on foods that promote good mental health, as well as stockpiling vitamins and supplements that can assist you nutritionally in dealing with stressful situations.
Following are some sources of the most important nutrients for good mental health. I take vitamins, but I take them as a SUPPLEMENT – meaning, I try very hard to meet my nutritional needs with food first and foremost.
The human body is a marvelous creation, and it works better when fueled with food and just “topped up” with vitamins. This list is not meant to be comprehensive – it’s just a starting point for your pantry and garden planning.
Niacin [Which is also helful for addiction recovery]
Meat Spelt Fish Bran (Wheat and Rice) Peanuts Marmite Beans
Vitamin D (There are few food sources of this – the #1 way to get it is synthesized from sunshine)
Eighteen Reasons Why I Don’t Celebrate Halloween November 1 2025 | From: EndOfTheAmericanDream
This year, 64 percent of all Americans [and many others in the West] will celebrate Halloween, but I will not be one of them. For me, it is a wretched, horrible holiday that celebrates the darkest side of humanity, and it is deeply rooted in ancient pagan traditions that would get people thrown in prison if they attempted to duplicate them today.
With each passing year, the sexually suggestive costumes being marketed to our young girls become even skankier, the horror movies become darker and even more demonic, and the number of Americans that participate in occult ceremonies just continues to grow.
In fact, it has been estimated that the number of self-identified witches in the United States is doubling every 30 months. Those that are deeply into the occult take this holiday very seriously, and the dark forces that they are dealing with are very real. So no, I don’t want anything to do with this festival of death. In no particular order, the following are 18 reasons why I don’t celebrate Halloween...
1. I don’t want anyone in my family to observe a holiday that celebrates death, witchcraft and the occult. This year, millions of Americans will participate in activities that could potentially open up a door for demonic activity.
2. The average American spends $74.34 on the holiday. I would rather save the money.
3. Millions of women use Halloween as an excuse to dress like street walkers, and millions of men use Halloween as an excuse to act like sexual predators.
4. Even little girls as young as three years old are being dressed up in sexually provocative costumes. What kind of message does this send to them?
5. Dressing up little children as ghosts, demons and vampires is not healthy for them. In recent years, there has been a trend to make costumes for children as hellish as possible.
7. In ancient Britain, the festival known as Samhain was celebrated on October 31st. It was supposedly a day when dead souls would revisit their old homes. Personally, I don’t want anything to do with contacting the souls of the dead.
8. According to the History Channel, Samhain was also the day when the Druids “gathered to burn crops and animals as sacrifices to the Celtic deities”.
10. According to Wiccans, Halloween is the time when the veil between the living and the dead is considered to be the thinnest. They believe that on this day their god “dies” and is reborn every year on the Winter Solstice. This year the winter solstice falls on December 22nd.
11 In ancient times, the resurrection of the sun god required human and animal sacrifice. The following is what occult expert Bill Schnoebelen says that the Druids would do at this time of the year…
Druids worshiped the sun god, called by names like Bel (Ba’al?) or Chrom. On October 31, they believed that he died and went into the kingdom of the dead, Anwynn. The purpose of Samhain was to insure his return. Even witches admit this involved human sacrifice.
Both animal and human blood were believed to be needed to resurrect Bel on Samhain. Human blood was believed to open the gates of Anwynn and released the spirits for a night. Thus, October 31 came to be associated with ghosts. This is not just history. Samhain is still celebrated by Pagans and is the most solemn ceremony on their “religious calendar”.
12. To this day, animal torture and sacrifice is still practiced on Halloween by occultists. Many animal shelters will not adopt out black cats during the month of October for this very reason.
As a result of their efforts to wipe out “pagan” holidays, such as Samhain, the Christians succeeded in effecting major transformations in it. In 601 A.D. Pope Gregory the First issued a now famous edict to his missionaries concerning the native beliefs and customs of the peoples he hoped to convert.
Rather than try to obliterate native peoples’ customs and beliefs, the pope instructed his missionaries to use them: if a group of people worshipped a tree, rather than cut it down, he advised them to consecrate it to Christ and allow its continued worship.
The idea of trick-or-treating is further related to the ghosts of the dead in pagan, and even Catholic, history. For example, among the ancient Druids, “The ghosts that were thought to throng about the houses of the living were greeted with a banquet-laden table.
At the end of the feast, masked and costumed villagers representing the souls of the dead paraded to the outskirts of town leading the ghosts away.”
As already noted, Halloween was thought to be a night when mischievous and evil spirits roamed freely. As in modern poltergeist lore, mischievous spirits could play tricks on the living - so it was advantageous to “hide” from them by wearing costumes. Masks and costumes were worn to either scare away the ghosts or to keep from being recognized by them.
15. The tradition of carving out a “Jack-O-Lantern” also comes from paganism. The following comes from wicca.com…
Turnips were hollowed out and carved to look like protective spirits, for this was a night of magic and chaos. The Wee Folke became very active, pulling pranks on unsuspecting humans. Traveling after dark was not advised.
And as Bill Schnoebelen has noted, pumpkins eventually replaced turnips, but the meaning remained the same…
Here it’s a pumpkin, but in Europe it was often a turnip, or a skull with a candle in it. This serves two symbols, 1) the lord of the Dead, a “god” just like a Buddha – in short, an idol. 2) The fearsome face represented the god, Samhain, who would drive off less powerful demons that night.
The lights in the Jack-o-Lantern symbolize the “faery fires” or “Will’o the Wisps” which were believed to be the lost souls flitting through the night. They also hearken back to the huge Samhain “balefires” which were lit to help conjure back the god from the darkness.
16. On all Satanic holy days, there are children that get ritually abused. This has been documented repeatedly, and yet most people (including most Christians) don’t want to hear about it.
17. For Satanists, Halloween is one of the most important celebrations of the year. On page 96 of the Satanic Bible, Anton LaVey wrote the following…
“After one’s own birthday, the two major Satanic holidays are Walpurgisnacht (May 1st) and Halloween.”
18. The Scriptures are very clear about this sort of thing. Deuteronomy 18:9-13 says the following:
“When you enter the land the Lord your God is giving you, do not learn to imitate the detestable ways of the nations there. Let no one be found among you who sacrifices his son or daughter in the fire, who practices divination or sorcery, interprets omens, engages in witchcraft, or casts spells, or who is a medium or spiritist or who consults with the dead. Anyone who does these things is detestable to the Lord”.
Four Reasons To Break A Sweat October 31 2025 | From: GreenMedInfo / Various
Your body has a natural, powerful, built-in system for detoxification that doesn't require trendy juice cleanses or expensive protocols. All you have to do is sweat!
While sweating has a host of benefits simply because it’s a result of health-boosting exercise, the act of sweating itself heals the body as well. Whether you’re sitting in a sauna, walking on a warm day, or working out, sweating is a necessary bodily function with powerful healing effects.
Specifically, more studies are emerging lauding the detoxifying abilities of sweat. By clearing out a range of toxins, from persistent organic pollutants (POPs) to heavy metals, sweat plays an essential role in your body’s natural detox function. Let’s look at some of the toxins that are cleared from your body when you sweat:
1. Persistent Organic Pollutants (Solvents, Fumigants, and Insecticides):
A clinical study with 20 participants found that sweat samples contained a range of toxins, including pesticides DDT / DDE, endosulfan, methoxychlor, and endrin. In fact, nearly all parent compounds of pesticides were found in the samples studied, which shows that sweating is an effective way of diminishing your body’s toxic burden.
Additionally, the sweat sample contained some pesticides – including DDT, methoxychlor, and endrin - that were not present in the blood or urine samples collected from the same participant, suggesting that some pesticides are only mobilized and excreted through sweating.
2. Phthalate (Plasticizer):
Phthalate, found in plastic products, is another toxic chemical that is removed through sweat. In one study, researchers evaluated blood, sweat, and urine samples from 20 individuals, and discovered that all subjects had mono(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate (MEHP), a common phthalate, in each of the samples.
The concentrations of this compound in sweat were more than twice as high as urine levels, showing that sweating may be the most effective way of ridding your body of this endocrine-disrupting compound.
3. Heavy Metals;
One study with 20 patients reported that when compared to urine, sweat contained about 24 times more cadmium, 19 times more nickel, 16 times more lead, and almost three times more aluminum. Overall, sweat proved more effective than urine at removing 14 out of the 18 heavy metals studied. It also contained larger quantities of 16 out of the 18 metals than the blood samples did.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Of all the metals, aluminum was found at the highest concentrations in sweat, with zinc, copper, and nickel also occurring at relatively high amounts in the studied samples.
4. Bisphenol A (BPA):
Researchers examined the blood, urine, and sweat of 20 participants for BPA, an endocrine-disrupting toxin found in canned foods and plastic water bottles, among other things. Of the 20 sweat samples collected, 16 contained BPA, while only 14 urine and 2 blood samples tested positive for the toxin.
Not only does this reveal that sweat is the most effective way of removing BPA build-up in the body, it also shows that testing blood or urine for toxicity levels may not present the whole picture.
When it comes time to break a sweat, there are a host of activities that you can choose from. The majority of exercises and sports will get you sweaty: running/brisk walking, swimming, Bikram yoga, tennis, basketball – the list goes on.
A low impact option is spending time in a sauna. When comparing an infrared sauna to a steam sauna, researchers found that the sweat from the infrared sauna contained more bismuth, cadmium, chromium, mercury, and uranium. The steam sauna caused higher levels of arsenic, aluminum, cobalt, copper, manganese, nickel, lead, tin, thallium, and zinc to be excreted.
It’s important to note that hydration is essential in maximizing the health benefits listed above. Sweating has powerful effects on your health, but not hydrating properly during and after sweating will lead to a host of separate health problems.
An easy rehydration guideline to follow is to weigh yourself directly before and after sweating – the weight lost is the amount of water you should drink after to rehydrate yourself. For reference, one pound of water is slightly less than a ½ liter.
Additionally, sweat contains minerals that are essential to keep your body functioning optimally. After activities where you sweat excessively, it’s important to replace the minerals lost, especially zinc, copper, selenium, chromium, and potassium. Coconut water is a great source of potassium, and nuts, seafood, whole grains, and legumes generally contain relatively high levels of zinc, copper, selenium, and chromium.
Next time you feel yourself tempted to stay on the couch instead of going for a run, or opt to stay in the air conditioning instead of spending time in a sauna, think of all the “sweaty” benefits that you’re not getting! Breaking a sweat might seem like pain, but it’s worth it to keep your internal detox systems healthy and well-functioning.
Covert War Between Russia And Khazarian Jewry October 30 2025 | From: Geopolitics / Various
The precursor to the ongoing covert hybrid WW3 has its colorful beginnings in the Kingdom of Khazaria, a Turkic empire which had its epicenter center in what is now known as Ukraine.
Within minutes the false narrative of the Sarin attack in Syria was exposed as a hoax with fake pictures of rescuers with sneeze masks handling gas attack patients. Look in the background and you will probably find that shocked girl, the one crying at Sandy Hook, Boston and Paris, et al.
Comment: Before anyone takes an opportunity to have an anti-semitic hissy-fit - it should be made clear once again that it is the Zionists that hide withihn Judaism and uses it as a cover - that is the problem that we all face.
Khazarians became known to surrounding countries as thieves, murderers, road bandits, and for assuming the identities ["name stealers"] of those travelers they murdered as a normal occupational practice and way of life.
800 AD - The Ultimatum is Delivered by Russia and Other Surrounding Nations
The leaders of the surrounding nations, especially Russia, have had so many years of complaints by their citizens that, as a group, they deliver an ultimatum to the Khazarian king.
They send a communique to the Khazarian king that he must choose one of the three Abrahamic religions for his people, and make it his official state religion and require all Khazarian citizens to practice it, and socialize all Khazarian children to practice that faith.
The Khazarian king was given a choice between Islam, Christianity and Judaism. The Khazarian king chose Judaism, and promised to stay within the requirements laid out by the surrounding confederacy of nations led by the Russian czar.
Despite his agreement and promise, the Khazarian king and his inner circle of oligarchs kept practicing ancient Babylonian black-magic, also known as Secret Satanism.
This Secret Satanism involved occult ceremonies featuring child sacrifice, after “bleeding them out”, drinking their blood and eating their hearts.
As opposed to most peoples today, the remnants of Khazaria don’t let bygones be bygones.
They have been preparing for the big war. They have been infiltrating all of the institutions of the world.
"The deep dark secret of the occult ceremonies was that they were all based on ancient Baal Worship, also known as worship of the Owl.
In order to fool the confederacy of nations led by Russia that were watching Khazaria, the Khazarian king melded these Luciferian black-magick practices with Judaism and created a secret Satanic-hybrid religion, known as Babylonian Talmudism.
This was made the national religion of Khazaria, and nurtured the same evil that Khazaria was known for before.
Sadly, the Khazarians continued their evil ways, robbing and murdering those from surrounding countries who traveled through Khazaria.
Khazarian robbers often attempted to assume their identities after they murdered these visitors, and became masters of disguises and false identities - a practice they have continued even to this very day, along with their child-sacrifice occult ceremonies, which are actually ancient Baal Worship."
Today, they are everywhere, and Russia’s battle is ours, too.
“The truth is incontrovertible. Malice may attack it, ignorance may deride it, but in the end, there it is.”
- Winston Churchill
The current conflict between the US and Russia is due to one simple reason: the Ashkenazim. They have a debt to settle with Russia. Allow us to forward a bit of chronological tables as we delve into the nitty-gritty behind the conflict.
They are a resilient, roaming Turkic people. They have a knack for reinventing themselves. They first surfaced in world annals as the notoriously barbaric Scythians or Sakadeans, depending on regional phonetic.
“Here there is no Gentile or Judahite, circumcised or uncircumcised, barbarian, Scythian, slave or free, but Christ is all, and is in all.”
-
Colossians 3: 11
The word Scythian or Sakadean comes from the word Saka – with its Iranian verbal root Sak, meaning to roam.
The Scythians settled Central Eurasia which they conquered with their Gentile brother Togarmath and various other cousins, expanding across a vast track of land that encompassed but was not limited to parts of present-day Turkey and Iran. Their Gentile brother Riphath along with their uncle Javan’s descendants settled in Greece.
Later on, they reinvented themselves and settled a land they would call Khazaria – from the word Qasar, with its Turkic root Qaz, meaning to roam – following the break-up of the western Turkish Steppe Empire.
Then the country converted en masse to Judaism/Pharisaism, sometime between 740 and 920 AD, just so they could remain independent of the two competing empires of that time, Christianity and Islam.
“Judaism was the most actively proselytizing religion… The most significant mass conversion occurred in the 8th century, in the massive Khazar kingdom between the Black and Caspian seas,”explained Jewish historian Shlomo Sand.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
Then, Sviatoslav I of Kiev destroyed Khazaria around 1048 and absorbed it into Kievan Rus’, a territory that would later become part of the Russian Empire.
In Imperial Russia, the Ashkenazim were kept under tight control and enclosed in the Pale of Settlement. Something the Ashkenazim never forgave Russia.
Biding their time, they nurtured their hatred and plotted their revenge along with a new reinvention.
They became the power behind the heinous Bolsheviks who took over the Russian government in the 1910s, killed 66 million Christians, including 200,000 members of the Christian clergy, and destroyed 40,000 churches.
“You must understand, the leading Bolsheviks who took over Russia were not Russians. They hated Russians. They hated Christians. Driven by ethnic hatred they tortured and slaughtered millions of Russians without a shred of human remorse. It cannot be overstated.
Bolshevism committed the greatest human slaughter of all time.
The fact that most of the world is ignorant and uncaring about this enormous crime is proof that the global media is in the hands of the perpetrators,” explained famed Christian Russian writer Alexandr Solzhenitsyn.
The great majority of these vicious Bolsheviks were Ashkenazi Jews such as Vladimir Lenin, Leon Trosky, Lev Kamenev, Gregory Zinoviev, Yakov Sverdlov, and Grigory Sokolnikov.
They were financed by Ashkenazi bankers from New York and London, such as Rothschild Bank and Jacob Schiff of Kuhn and Loeb & Co., who themselves championed the destructive ideology of the Ashkenazi Karl Marx, and found it profitable to invest in Communism’s disastrous conquest of Russia, while making a few bucks in the process by plundering the country via well placed agents who would later be known as “oligarchs“.
Russia’s entire Soviet Empire collapsed in 1991. Thus the Ashkenazim succeeded in bringing Russia to its knees.
Today, Russia is under fire for the conflict in Ukraine. A conflict that was started by the neocon Ashkenazi Victoria Nuland in the US State Department, with her neocon Ashkenazi husband Robert Kagan working in the background via powerful organizations such as Project for a New American Century, the Brookings Institution, and Council on Foreign Relations.
“Many of the participants in Kiev’s ‘EuroMaidan’ demonstrations were members of Soros-funded NGOs and/or were trained by the same NGOs in the many workshops and conferences sponsored by Soros’ International Renaissance Foundation (IRF), and his various Open Society institutes and foundations.
The IRF, founded and funded by Soros, boasts that it has given ‘more than any other donor organization’ to ‘democratic transformation’ of Ukraine,” wrote William F. Jasper in The New American.
In other words, the Ashkenazim or the Jewish neocons are goading the Russian bear by wagging the American dog. The dog can’t really decline because AIPAC has it by the groin, bribing equally both the Republicans and the Democrats, who are nothing but political whores willing to betray their country and risk the peace of the world.
And remember, AIPAC is controlled by powerful Ashkenazi-American business leaders.
Their sole purpose is to destroy Russia once again by starting a fire in its underbelly, Ukraine. A fire they’re planning to spread into Russia proper via military and economic warfare.
Why? Because Russia has had the gall to rise from its still warm Ashkenazi-induced ashes. And because Russia has had the temerity to arrest their well placed thieving agents known as “oligarchs”, with some fleeing the country.
And because Russia has had the audacity to impede the American war on Syria, which was orchestrated by AIPAC for the benefit of Israel.
After the destruction of Khazaria, the Ashkenazim scattered East and West throughout Europe and reinvented themselves as Errant Jews or Wandering Jews – meaning Roaming (Khazarian / Sakadean or Scythian) Jews. That label had nothing to do with a longing for Palestine but a longing for Khazaria or perhaps a longing for a new land, any new land.
Here’s an excerpt from Wikipedia:
“In 1903 Theodore Herzl presented the British Uganda Program at the Sixth Zionist Congress in Basel.
In the late 1930s, the British Zionist League considered a number of other places where a Jewish homeland could be established. The Kimberley region in Australia was considered until the Curtin government (in office: 1941–1945) rejected the possibility.
With the support of the then Premier of Tasmania, Robert Cosgrove (in office from 1939), Critchley Parker proposed a Jewish settlement at Port Davey, in south west Tasmania. Parker surveyed the area, but his death in 1942 put an end to the idea.
The Jewish Autonomous Oblast set up in the Russian Far East in 1934, represented a Soviet approach to providing a Jewish homeland."
In the wake of World War 2, a great number reluctantly assimilated themselves throughout the Americas. However, the great majority migrated to Palestine where they created many terrorist groups such as the Irgun, the Stern gang, and Haganah.
They terrorized the Palestinian population, killed thousands upon thousands, and forced hundreds of thousands out of their homes and into neighboring Arab countries.
Consequently, they stole Palestine and renamed it Israel in order to reinvent themselves as Hebrews and hoodwink gullible Christians in the West.
“It is certain that there is no ethnic or racial continuum between the Biblical Israelites and the (Ashkenazic) Khazarians who lead the Jewish state,”explained Gilad Atzmon, Jewish writer and musician.
In their adoptive countries outside of Israel, including the US and Europe, the Ashkenazim have become financial and influential powerhouses, not because they’re Jews – at heart the majority of them are really not religious at all and couldn’t care less – but because they’re a shrewd people.
They have learned much from their roaming throughout history, and they assimilate themselves fast and hard. They’re the ultimate Nomads.
Now could it be that, after two successive ideological failures in the forms of Communism and the current slow-motion destruction of Zionism in Israel, somewhere deep inside the minds of die-hard Ashkenazi leaders lies a plan for a new reinvention?
Will that reinvention be the re-conquest of their Khazar Khaganate – a land that is situated deep inside Russia and encompasses Ukraine and Crimea? Is that why Putin suddenly reattached Crimea to Russia?
Could it be that the Ashkenazim’s plan is to take back and re-settle their ancient Khazaria after the Downfall of Apartheid Israel?
Is it why the duly elected President of Ukraine was forcibly removed in order to install a puppet government with a new [then] Prime Minister named Arseniy Yatsenyuk, who according to The Guardian is playing down his Jewish roots (Arseniy Yatsenyuk was recently replaced by another Jew, Volodymyr Groysman)? Will they be okay with just Ukraine? Revenge Round 3? If so, prepare for World War 3.
“I saw the prosperity of the wicked… Their strength is firm… Pride serves as their necklace; Violence covers them like a garment… This is what the wicked are like - always free of concern as they go on amassing wealth... Surely (Lord) You place them on slippery ground… How suddenly they fall and are destroyed,completely swept away by terrors!” - Psalm 73:2,4,6,12,18,19
The Jewish Bolsheviks who took over the Russian government in the 1910s, killed 66 million Christians, including 200,000 members of the Christian clergy, and destroyed 40,000 churches.
World War 1: Britain was losing the war against Germany. The Zionists stepped in and bribed President Wilson to get the US into the war to help them. In return, the Jews asked the British Empire to deed them Palestine to create Israel. Their wish was granted in the form of the Balfour Declaration of 1917, which cost the world 18 million dead.
World War 2: The Zionists fomented that war (just like they’re doing today with Iran and other countries in the Middle East), so that European Jews could feel threatened.
The deception worked as European Jews fled in droves to Palestine and took over the homes of Palestinians, who were evicted at gunpoint and then either massacred or driven out of their land into neighboring Arab countries.
With enough Jews on the ground, Israel was created in 1948 at a cost of 80 million dead.
World War 3: Will the Zionists succeed in bringing the world once again to the brink of disaster to create Greater Israel? If they do, will it instead bring about their downfall? Apartheid Israel is truly a scourge. A cancer that needs to be dealt with.
Appeal: Every conscientious individual should implement a personal boycott of Israel and everything made there.
This ancient practice of “virgin offerings,” which continue even today, is based on Baal Worship, or the Worship of the Owl.
The Worship of the Owl is the key ritual at the Bohemian Grove where most leaders of the United States congregate to plot the direction of their rule.
We have also seen how ISIS destroyed all of the ancient relics in Palmyra, Syria, which included the UNESCO protected Arch of Triumph, or Baal Shamin, “a temple dedicated to worshiping the Phoenician god of storms and rainfall only to find them displayed in New York, UK and recently Saudi Arabia.
"Arch of Baal" Erected Today in New York City
Temple of Baal
A recreation of Palmyra’s Arch of Triumph was unveiled in New York almost a year after Islamic State militants destroyed the original structure.
The 1,800-year-old Roman arch was blown up by the extremist group last October, but a team of archeologists at Oxford University’s Institute for Digital archeology (IDA) set about recreating it, in an act of resistance to Isis’s rampant acts of cultural destruction in Iraq and Syria.
As an aside, recent medical research has found out that injecting blood from teens reverses aging, which should explain why children continue to disappear around the world even today.
"Injecting blood from young people into old mice improves the mice’s brain power and leads to increased physical activity, according to new research. The finding could lead to breakthroughs for people suffering from degenerative conditions such as Alzheimer’s Disease.
The findings, which have yet to be peer-reviewed, were presented at the Society for Neuroscience annual meeting in San Diego, California on Monday, the New Scientist reports."
We don’t have to resort to cannibalism and suck in some amounts of blood from some virgins just to reclaim our youth. Just read the entire linked article, when you have the time, as the real science behind the anti-aging effects is laid in simple terms.
The destruction of the old Baal tower in Palmyra only suggests that some Jewish benefactors of ISIS don’t want the Syrian people to remember that they were once part of the tradition.
The Goyim must be restricted to the religion of subservience, of self-sacrifice, that is fundamentally embedded in the Catholic doctrine, while they, the Rulers of the World, continue to live and worship Baal, the two towers of Hegelian Dialectic, to pit everyone against each other, to divide and conquer the people for all eternity, neither of which should led to enlightenment and the freedom of the individual.
Although Putin can be seen inside Christian churches lighting candles, or even visited the Pope at the height of the efforts to reform the Vatican Bank in the aftermath of the massive resignations of banking CEOs [here], it doesn’t mean that he is already a conscript like the Pope would have wanted him to be. He is just playing politics like any politicians do. But his Oriental indoctrination should play largely into his decision-making, too.
The age-old conflict can only be resolved when one is completely decimated. The ultimate destruction of the world may befall on humanity should they allow the Khazarian Askhenazi Jewry to win. Otherwise, if humanity makes the effort and topple the enemy, only then will man’s horizon could broaden itself and allow the exploration of the unlimited possibilities of his being.
Hero Worship And The Shadow Self October 29 2025 | From: FeelingGoodFeelingGreat / Various
Are you afraid of your own shadow? I’m not talking about the silhouette of yours on the ground; I’m talking about the psychological shadow.
In Jungian psychology, the shadow is the collection of aspects of yourself that you deem unwanted or undesirable and hide deep in the caverns of your subconscious mind.
What we classify as unwanted or undesirable is largely determined by our cultural conditioning. The classic example is the business man whose true passion is art, yet he suppresses this gift because of what his parents and society labeled as favorable or unfavorable.
This happens with all aspects of self we refuse to accept (which can happen consciously or subconsciously).
While the shadow self is often thought of as the “bad” qualities that we refuse to acknowledge within ourselves, the most suppressed qualities are often the best ones. This is what I call the golden shadow.
The Golden Shadow
"Our deepest fear is not that we are inadequate. Our deepest fear is that we are powerful beyond measure. It is our Light, not our Darkness, that most frightens us.”
- Marianne Williamson
Hero worship is an extension of the golden shadow. We suppress our inner greatness and subconsciously project our collective golden shadow onto heroes.
Heroes of all kinds – superheroes, celebrities, athletes, gurus – are thought of as amazing and perfect, while we view ourselves as a lesser “poor little me.”
We put all of our hopes and dreams not in ourselves, but in our favorite athlete, or the president, or a superhero we saw in a movie.
All of the beauty we’ve refused to accept within ourselves is projected onto models and the “beautiful faces” we see on TV. This is all externally projecting our suppressed greatness because somewhere along the line we’ve deemed ourselves unworthy of embodying.
Here’s the truth. We all have greatness within. Yours may not look like Michael Jordan’s (who supposedly isn’t the nicest human being by the way – a testament to the grand deception of celebrity worship). Your greatness may not look like mine either.
But I can guarantee that you have some kind of unique greatness. It’s been there all along, you’ve just refused to acknowledge it.
The Darker the Shadow, The Stronger the Super Powers
Mythological figures like superheroes and omnipotent gods are the projection of a society that feels weak and helpless.
This collective projection comes from a huge “elephant in the room” shadow that we refuse to acknowledge. Our hero myths are created to fill the yearning for the brilliant potential that we’re systematically denying ourselves.
Can we fly and lift giant boulders? Who really knows? But super powers are more metaphorical. We’ve denied our inner gems so vehemently that we subconsciously create external, all-powerful saviors to fill that void and balance the scales.
We’re so afraid to step into our own power that we project it outward instead of owning it.
We cowardly choose work unfulfilling jobs, sit on the couch and watch TV instead of coming to grips with the immense power that lies within. You don’t have to be rich and famous to do this. It all simply comes down to your focus. What are you focusing on? What are you giving energy to?
Accepting your power within could be as simple as having a clear purpose in life, choosing a career you truly love, meditating, being fully present, feeling gratitude, honoring compassion, creating art or anything else where your focus is on cultivating your own gifts instead of focusing on something external.
Once we start doing this, who knows what possibilities will emerge? We know next nothing about the nature of reality, so the (assumed) laws we think we’re subject to might change and/or dissolve as we let go of self-imposed limitations. Anything is possible, but we’re so quick to stubbornly argue FOR our limitations.
We live in prisons that are locked from the inside.
The God Within
As humans, we have a tendency to project our best qualities onto external Gods, creating an external savior complex.
If you view those qualities as something out there, then they become a mere intellectual concept and you relegate yourself to “poor little me.” But if you view those qualities as archetypes WITHIN YOU, the whole game changes.
When you view Buddha or Jesus Christ as men to be worshipped who are more special than you, you’re missing the whole point.
Buddha and Christ are archetypal examples of the “higher” consciousness that exists within all of us.
Yet because we’ve been so conditioned to cast our greatness to the shadows, most people cannot even fathom this concept and argue for their own diminutiveness.
"The kingdom of God is not in the clouds, in some designated point of space; it is right behind the darkness that you perceive with closed eyes.”
- Paramahansa Yogananda
The Heroic Chasm
I’m not saying to never admire anyone else or be an egocentric narcissist. Not at all. When you shine light on your shadow and cultivate love within, only then can you truly love others.
It’s useful to learn from others, but the difference comes in whether or not you choose to embody those qualities you admire.
“It’s cool to imitate, just grow into your own
Don’t let the green grass across the picket fence
Turn you into Mr. Smith without a purpose or a home
Underneath he is a Jedi, on the surface he’s a Clone”
– Jay Electronica
You see, most people admire others, but think “I could never be like that” or something similar that implies inferiority. That’s self-sabotaging victim logic.
A 5’3” man probably won’t become a professional basketball player, but he most certainly has the potential for greatness in other ways. Well that’s not entirely true either. Look at someone like Mugsy Bogues, who actually was a 5’3” professional basketball player.
So it is possible, if you choose to believe in yourself. Sometimes we need to redefine what possible is. “Impossible” is an opinion; a mere imaginary fence created by self-defeating, “poor-me” victims.
If you hear about a successful business person’s morning routine, do you think “I don’t have the discipline for that” and flip to the next channel to distract yourself? Or do you take notes and start applying it towards your own mission in life?
We must bridge the heroic chasm. On one side, you have the idolized hero, and on the other the average person who refuses to acknowledge their own greatness.
The chasm is bridged by learning from “heroes” then EMBODYING those qualities which the heroes represent. If those qualities are not examined, learned and embodied, you just become another passive, “poor little me” for the rest of your life.
The successful athlete continuously embodies and applies the qualities of the people they look up to. The wise person continuously embodies and applies the wisdom of others. The enlightened person continuously embodies an applies the God-like qualities.
How are you going to bridge the heroic gap? Or will you choose to deny your greatness and cowardly feed your shadow with hero worship?
Life to too precious to fritter away by denying your own greatness. Learn from others then cultivate that greatness within. It’s there within all of us.
The Deep State: It Is War, Not Peace That Pays October 28 2025 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various
The Deep State at work: President Eisenhower warned us. He called the “Deep State” at work the “military-industrial complex.” There will always be people in a society who are more willing than others, more prone to bullying, stealing, and making jackasses out of themselves.
As 18th-century political philosopher William Godwin observed, if a government has any legitimate purpose at all, it is to keep these people from doing harm to their fellow human beings.
But over time, these bullies will infest government and its related industries. Then, instead of keeping these pests under control, government gives them authority, even funding a kind of fake-respectability.
Their predations, illusions, and vanities become public policy.
All major industries – media, education, health care and finance – attract these bullies and jackasses. But the Deep State treats them like a manure pile to a herd of pigs.
Soon, they will be rooting and wallowing in the biggest heap of misappropriated resources in all of history.
Today, the Deep State’s agents bark at you to take off your belt and shoes at airports. Try to dig a pond in your backyard, or let your teenage son work on the family farm, and they will make a case of it.
They snoop and spy, looking for secrets they can exploit to bribe you. They tax. They regulate. And they control.
"Ultimately, and the sooner the better, it will require our system and people to reject Trump and those surrounding him - who have already done so much to disgrace the offices they hold and undermine America’s standing in the world.”
But the ones that are out of control are the cabal members themselves and this must be stopped immediately.
This shadowy secret government whose ultimate goal is the implementation of the so-called New World Order, is pulling the strings on the world’s puppet-heads of state and captains of industry.
The term Deep State has recently gained traction, in addition to the use of terms like; shadow government, cabal, Rothschild Khazarian Mafia, The Powers That Be, the Luciferians, Illuminati, Elite; all referencing the same group of hidden Luciferian Satanists that detest and rob people.
The Deep State is an unelected insider-government within in the government. They are not interested in politics, just in money and power, and will continue doing what they are doing, until they cannot do it anymore.
How The Deep State Operates:
A complex web of revolving doors between government, the military-industrial-complex, Wall Street, and Silicon Valley consolidates the interests of defence contractors, banksters, military campaigns, and both foreign and domestic surveillance intelligence, the media, and healthcare, just to name a few.
Money, the economy, and government have all changed since the collapse of the Bretton Woods agreement and the end of gold-backed money.
When on August 15, 1971, President Nixon hammered the last nail in the coffin of honest money by abolishing gold backing for the US-Dollar, the world’s reserve currency.
This was not the only reason for the profound changes that followed. There was also the introduction of Communist China to capitalism, the fall of the Soviet Union, and the rise of the Internet, to name just a few.
After the dissolution of the Soviet Union in 1991, the Deep State faced the biggest threat to its existence: It no longer had a plausible enemy.
Since then, it has put U.S. jackboots on the ground in a takedown of a series of pseudo-enemies – all laughably inferior.
It is War, Not Peace That Pays:
However, with all its firepower, all its superior military technology, and all its trillions of dollars in spending, America hasn’t won a single one of its many wars since the end of the Cold War by way of a clear or honourable victory.
Not one, but then again, that has never been the intention, the only true intention being to turn around money and power, period.
Instead, all wars have led to one fumbled mess after another. Enemies were suddenly promoted into angels; allies morphed into demons.
You’d think this would bring the public to its senses. Maybe all this spending, blustering, and bombing is not really paying off? Maybe it is creating more enemies than it defeats?
But that is just the point: For the common man, a war is little more than a Super Bowl with mortal stakes.
They holler and hoot for the Homeland team. They salute their heroes and hate their enemies, even when they’re not sure who the enemy is.
Those who do the thinking and the plotting, on the other hand, have another agenda. They are just as happy with a defeat as a victory. Victory, and the peace that followed World War II, almost put them out of business. It is war, not peace that pays.
And war pays well, not to mention all the personal liberties that are confiscated with each fabricated war.
The Trillion Dollar Industry:
The U.S. “security” industry has about $1 trillion a year in spending power [2017]. You can buy a lot of votes with that kind of money. The Deep State remains in charge. The fix is always in.
The deep state hides in plain sight and goes far beyond the military-industrial complex.
While most citizens are at least passively aware of the surveillance state and the conspiracy between the government and the corporate heads of Wall Street, few people are aware of how much the intelligence functions of the government have been outsourced to privatised groups that are not subject to oversight or accountability by the public.
The Money Suckers:
Moreover, while Wall Street and the federal government suck money out of the economy, relegating hundreds of millions of people to poverty and incarcerating more people than China – a totalitarian state with four-times more people than the US.
The deep state has, since 9/11, built the equivalent of three Pentagons, a bloated state apparatus that keeps defence contractors, intelligence contractors, and has financed privatised non-accountable NGOs.
Big Business, called Corpocracy aids the deep state. The revolving door between government and Wall Streetmoney allows top firms to offer premium jobs to senior government officials and military yes-men.
Wall Street is the ultimate foundation for the deep state because the incredible amount of money it generates can provide these cushy jobs to those in government after they retire. Nepotism reigns supreme as the revolving door between Wall Street and government facilitates a great deal of domestic strife:
"Bank bailouts, tax breaks, and resistance to legislation that would regulate Wall Street, political donors, and lobbyists.
The senior government officials, ex-generals, and high level intelligence operatives who participate find themselves with multi-million dollar homes in which they spend their retirement years, cushioned by a tidy pile of investments.”
How Did The Deep State Come Into Being?
Although the Deep State is an age-old planned entity, originally it may have been named differently.
Insiders are of the opinion that ultimately it is the offspring of the military-industrial complex, while others say it came into being with the Federal Reserve Act in 1913, when Woodrow Wilson remarked;
"We have come to be one of the worst ruled, one of the most completely controlled and dominated governments in the civilised world, no longer a government by conviction and the vote of the majority, but a government by the opinion and duress of a small group of dominant men.”
This quasi-secret cabal is pulling the strings in Washington, and much of the world is maintained under the pressure of a corporatist ideology that thrives on deregulation, outsourcing, deindustrialization, and financialization, yielding perpetual war and economic imperialism abroad, while consolidating the interests of the oligarchy.
The Deep State is a government within a government that operates off tax dollars but is not constrained by the constitution, nor are its machinations derailed by political shifts.
In this world – where the deep state functions with impunity – it doesn’t matter who is president so long as he or she perpetuates the war on terror, which serves this interconnected web of corporate special interests and disingenuous geopolitical objectives.
"As long as appropriation bills get passed on time, promotion lists get confirmed, black (i.e., secret) budgets get rubber stamped, special tax subsidies for certain corporations are approved without controversy, as long as too many awkward questions are not asked, the gears of the hybrid state will mesh noiselessly”.
Is There Hope For the Future?
For sure there is hope, and the epilogue is imminent. At present, discord and unrest continues to build.
But various groups, establishments, organisations, and portions of the populace from all corners of the political spectrum, including libertarians from both the left and right, whistleblowers and others are beginning to vigorously question and reject the labyrinth of power wielded by the deep state.
Can these groups – can we, the people – overcome the divide and conquer tactics used to quell dissent? That depends on how many of us wake up and unite in the importance of forging a future with freedom and prosperity.
It lies in our own hands. We must all wake up; become and remain positive and motivated to eradicate this Deep State Mafia, once and forever.
Take into consideration; Our Creator has created planet Earth and its people, not to be destroyed by a small group of Mafiosi, ofter referred to as the Deep State.
Eleven Common Symptoms Of The Global Depopulation Slow Kill October 27 2025 | From: WakingTimes / Various
“Maintain humanity under 500,000,000 in perpetual balance with nature.” – The Georgia Guidestones
The full-spectrum global attack on human health is quite obvious to see for anyone who is paying attention and in search of wellness.
So many of the factors that are negatively influencing public heath could easily be prevented or removed from society, yet the decisions of the ruling class continue to ensure that our food supply is toxic, that our environment is compromised, and that our exposure to chemicals and industrial waste is total. Why?
With the stroke of a pen carcinogenic poisons like Monsanto’s Roundup could be banned. Industrial disasters like Fukushima or the Deepwater Horizon could easily get the attention they deserve from world powers, but the will to intervene on behalf of human and environmental health is zero, while the will to intervene militarily in corporate and political affairs is guaranteed.
People are suffering more than ever from a host of chronic conditions and illnesses that can wreck even the healthiest and strongest of us. To be sick is the new normal, and to be healthy is outstanding and unusual.
Concerned citizens are battling grass roots struggles on all fronts, yet, at the top levels of society the corruption, gross negligence, and seeming incompetence continue unabated, ensuring that important decisions always favor the health of corporations and special interests.
With such obvious disregard for life, it would be naive to presume that our national and global leadership have our best interests at heart, and also to assume that any of this could be accidental.
And when we look at comments and statements from some of the world’s most influential people, a dark philosophy is uncovered, and a shocking agenda to depopulate planet earth is revealed. See for yourself:
"The world today has 6.8 billion people. That’s heading up to about nine billion. Now if we do a really great job on new vaccines, health care, reproductive health services, we could lower that by perhaps 10 or 15 percent.”
– Bill Gates
“Frankly I had thought that at the time Roe was decided, there was concern about population growth and particularly growth in populations that we don’t want to have too many of.” – U.S. Supreme Court Justice Ruth Bader Ginsburg
“In order to stabilize world population, we must eliminate 350,000 people per day.”
– Jacques Coustea
“If I were reincarnated I would wish to be returned to earth as a killer virus to lower human population levels.”
– Prince Phillip, the Duke of Edinburgh
“My three main goals would be to reduce human population to about 100 million worldwide, destroy the industrial infrastructure and see wilderness, with it’s full complement of species, returning throughout the world.”
– Dave Foreman, Earth First Co-Founder
“This planet might be able to support perhaps as many as half a billion people who could live a sustainable life in relative comfort. Human populations must be greatly diminished, and as quickly as possible to limit further environmental damage.”
– Professor of Biology at the University of Texas at Austin Eric R. Pianka
“Maintain humanity under 500,000,000 in perpetual balance with nature.”
Make what you will out of these statements, but the fact remains that globally, human health and the environment are in critical condition and there is no sign of relief in sight.
Couple this with the fact that many of the world’s elite do publicly fantasize of culling the human population, and the realization is harsh: we are targets.
Our world simply does not have to be poisoned with chemtrails, radiation leaks, GMO’s, electro-magnetic pollution, frack wells, fluoride, mercury, vaccine adjuvants, depleted uranium, oil spills, antibiotics, endocrine disrupting chemicals, toxic food additives, agro-chemicals, pharmaceuticals, and so much more.
The aggregated, generations long effect of such total contamination is the explosion of a host of bizarre and life-altering illnesses and ‘conditions,’ that chronically sap our energy and vitality, slowly debilitating us, separating us from our power and putting us into the doctor’s office.
The following 11 common symptoms are signs that the global depopulation slow kill is in play and is effective, and that within a couple of generations the human race will no nothing of health, wellness and vitality.
1. Gut and Digestive Issues
The primary attack on the body’s immune system takes place in the digestive system where the body’s natural bacterial defenses live.
Chronic poor digestion, leaky gut syndrome, gastritis, colitis, inflammatory bowel syndrome, candida overgrowth, food sensitivities and other serious issues are become increasingly common, resulting from the consumption of denatured foods laden with chemicals and sugars, GMO poisoning and so on.
Roundup herbicide is known to kill healthy bacteria in the body after being ingested in only residual amounts. Antibiotic overuse and contamination in the water supply means that building a health but biome is nearly impossible.
2. Chronic Fatigue and Low Energy
The body’s natural store of energy is the first thing to become depleted when the body and mind are over-exposed to pollution and stress.
The persistent exposure to toxic foods, poisoned spaces, electromagnetic radiation, psychological attacks, continually forces the body and psyche to be in a state of crisis.
The regular amount of energy needed to perform the ordinary rigors of life is not available, and as a result we become chronically tired, low-energy, lethargic and generally slowed down.
Even when we balance diet, exercise and meditation, maintaining personal energy is difficult, so many people are having to constantly dose themselves with caffeine and so-called energy drinks just to accomplish an ordinary day.
Dietary illnesses such as the sweeping obesity and diabetes epidemics are a sign that the soft kill is greatly impacting public health.
Public relations and social engineering have changed the public’s understanding of what food actually is, and as our consumption of crap corporate foods increases, so do our wastelines and our chances for getting getting chronic disease like diabetes.
Of course, both of these conditions are entirely curable with a proper diet, but in a country where raw milk is illegal, the truth about food and health is rarely spoken in the mainstream.
The maintenance of chronic illness is very profitable for the medical establishment, and obesity is a gateway to many chronic and life-threatening illnesses.
4. Disorientation and Brain Fog
Many people these days suffer from spells of disorientation and fogginess of the mind, without any clear cause or reason as to the mind should be functioning so poorly.
Brain fog is a difficult to identify chronic condition where a person feels disconnected, confused and distant, almost an illness of consciousness.
A spell can last for a day, or it can last for years, often persisting until a person finally isolates the primary cause.
Candida overgrowth, a condition where negative bacteria is being over-produced within the body, is the result of poor diet and a compromised gut biome, and is thought to cause disorientation and brain fog.
5. Chronic Inflammation
Chronic inflammation is part of a biological response to harmful stimuli and is increasingly being recognized as a serious silent killer because of the health problems it trigger.
The purpose of inflammation is to rid the body of any causes of damage or injury and to initiate repair. It is a defense mechanism that being constantly activated primarily consuming by inflammatory foods.
Modern wheat is an example of a food that has been so genetically altered that it now no longer provides nutrition, but rather instead irritates the tissues of the body, causing chronic inflammation, leading to bigger health problems.
6. Allergies
People suffer more seriously from seasonal and random allergy attacks than ever before, and some attacks can be severe enough to temporarily disable a person.
Everyone is watching pollen counts on the nightly news, but allergies simply weren’t this serious a generation ago.
Something has changed in the body and in the environment, and with the omnipresence of chemtrails and geo-engineering projects in the sky, suspicion that the respiratory system is being attacked is warranted.
7. Autism
Autism in children is rising frighteningly and without a precise indication of exactly what is causing it, we should be dramatically erring on the side of caution.
It could be environmental, it could be vaccines, GMO’s, or household chemicals, but something is taking our children. Will autism rates have to get to one-in-two before a Manhattan Project like effort is initiated to end this?
Alternative cures, treatments and therapies are targeted for extermination by the state, and the sick are corralled into risky, expensive treatments that fail to address the root causes of cancer and promote healthier living.
9. Morgellon’s
This strange and scary disease appears to be an infection of sorts by some still unknown type of organic material.
Manifesting as tiny living threads or worms that surface at the skin, irritating the patient, it is believed that no Morgellon’s patient has ever been able to undergo an autopsy due to an attempted global cover up.
The US government just admitted that Americans are overdosed on fluoride when they lowered the recommended amounts to put in public water supplies.
Fluoride is linked to many health problems including cancer and lowered IQ in children, yet the government still forces into just about everyone. Dental fluorosis is a sign of overexposure to fluoride, and a sign of deliberate poisoning.
11. ‘Chemical Imbalances’
Some will disagree, but mental health issues like ADD/ADHD, anxiety, insomnia, and depression can all be cured with proper diet, exercise and supplementation.
In fact, these conditions are fairly new to the human population, and are on the rise, or at least diagnoses are on the rise.
Of course the medical establishment benefits greatly from having more and more patients consuming drugs to remedy mental health issues.
Conclusion
The soft kill is about distracting you from life, debilitating you, and getting you out of the game and into the pharmacy.
It would take very little to eradicate so much of the toxicity from our modern world, but the initiative of the ruling elite is to destroy, contaminate and compromise all that which is most fundamental to life on planet earth. A deliberate soft kill.
Is this an accident, or the global depopulation soft kill strategy working effectively for the world’s elite? What do you think?
Electromagnetic Hypersensitivity From Microwave Technology Medically Proven October 26 2025 | From: ActivistPost / Various
Finally, there’s documented medical proof that electromagnetic hypersensitivity is a real-time health issue that actually can be verified using standard medical procedures and testing capabilities.
An international group of researchers aced it when they published their findings from the clinical study “Metabolic and Genetic Screening of Electromagnetic Hypersensitive Subjects as a Feasible Tool for Diagnostics and Intervention” in the November 2014 issue of Mediators of Inflammation.
“When will utility companies get up to speed on the latest in microwave technology damage to the human body?”
Also, “When will public utility commissions nationwide institute proper procedures to protect consumers from such damage?”
Pennsylvanians currently are being bombarded by non-thermal health problems from public utility companies’ electric, natural gas and water Smart Meters, which operate using microwave technology.
Furthermore, the PA House Consumer Affairs Committee Chair Robert Godshall sits on Opt-Out Bills that will permit electrosensitive consumers and others to keep safe analog meters, which have been in use for decades.
Following below is the Press Release Pennsylvania Smart Meter Awareness (PASMA) released November 19, 2015, which discusses pertinent issues to EHS and Smart Meters.
Medical Studies Conform Electromagnetic Hypersensitivity: Are Utility Smart Meters Causing Health Problems?
Electromagnetic hypersensitivity, or electrosensitivity (EHS), is a condition affecting more and more individuals who are exposed to electromagnetic fields (EMFs) and radiofrequencies (RFs) from radios, televisions, Wi-Fi, “dirty electricity” coming over household wires from utility companies smart meters (SMs), microwaves, photocopiers, plus cell phones and towers.
Worldwide, the numbers of people affected by EMFs and RFs increase exponentially, and add to other environmentally sensitivity-related illnesses such as multiple chemical sensitivity (MCS), chronic fatigue syndrome (CFS), sick building syndrome, Persian Gulf War veteran syndrome, and amalgam disease.
In Pennsylvania, children’s and adults’ health is being harmed by electric, natural gas, and water utility companies’ smart meters!
The World Health Organization (WHO), in a December 2005 Background paper, stated:
“EHS is characterized by a variety of non-specific symptoms that differ from individual to individual. The symptoms are certainly real and can vary widely in their severity. Whatever its cause, EHS can be a disabling problem for the affected individual. [….]
For EHS individuals with long lasting symptoms and severe handicaps, therapy should be directed principally at reducing symptoms and functional handicaps.
This should be done in close co-operation with a qualified medical specialist (to address the medical and psychological aspects of the symptoms) and a hygienist (to identify and, if necessary, control factors in the environment that are known to have adverse health effects of relevance to the patient).
Treatment should aim to establish an effective physician-patient relationship, help develop strategies for coping with the situation and encourage patients to return to work and lead a normal social life."
WHO published online information about that workshop on electromagnetic hypersensitivity in 2004 here
PASMA wants to remind the Pennsylvania state legislature and the PA Public Utility Commission (PUC) that EHS is a harmful health - and even-life-threatening - issue for those affected, which utility companies are remiss about, in understanding that harm, by denying that such effects are medically proven and that SM-caused EHS cannot - and will not - be mediated by replacing AMI SMs with EMF-free analog meters, which were used safely for decades, and which other states’ utility companies are allowing.
The control factor in the environment relevant to many EHS problems is traceable to the installation of smart meters on home properties.
PASMA further wants to point out what the WHO stated at the EMF workshop, which utilities, the PA legislature and PA PUC need to implement: help develop strategies for coping with the situation and encourage patients to return to work and lead a normal social life.
For those EHS individuals impacted by SMs, legal opt-outs from SMs are a necessary ethical and medical exception to PA 129, and must be granted. SM-induced health issues are serious matters, which need to be addressed intelligently by state officials, and very soon, as too many Pennsylvanians cannot lead normal lives due to Smart Meters.
PASMA respectfully directs PA legislators and the PA PUC to clinical studies in the journal Mediators of Inflammation Volume 2014, Article ID 924184, where researchers published their results regarding EHS.
In their clinical study “Metabolic and Genetic Screening of Electromagnetic Hypersensitive Subjects as a Feasible Tool for Diagnostics and Intervention” published as an open access article, they say,
“Till now, no causal relationship between electromagnetic fields exposure and onset of clinical symptoms has been clearly proven. [….]
The profiles of metabolic parameters’ alteration observed in EHS subjects were comparable to those of the “pure MCS” group, though generally less pronounced (Figures 5–8). Similarly to those MCS patients self-reportedly nonelectrosensitive, the EHS cohort showed a highly significant-versus-control decrease in the erythrocyte GST activity and an increase in GPX activity levels (Figure 5), coupled with a marked decrease of GSH levels (Figure 6). [….]
A second parameter proved to be significantly different () between EHS and MCS groups that is the ratio omega-6/omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids in the erythrocyte membrane phospholipid fraction (Figure 7(c)). [….]
Further developments must necessarily include a more objective and standardized classification of individual electromagnetic sensitivity scores, to conclusively assess the proposed parameters as a distinctive and specific panel of disease biomarkers for EHS.
Our findings will hopefully contribute, in combination with the so-far putative genetic-risk factors, a better molecular definition of environmental-borne sensitivity-related illnesses and a tool to discriminate single SRI comorbidities, based on sufficiently proven molecular evidences able to gain clinical consensus."
Smart Meter technology is based on microwaves, which is damaging the health of Pennsylvanians; has to be corrected by the PA legislature and PA PUC, since it’s counter to and, undoubtedly, violates the Nuremberg Code, including the Third Amendment to the U.S. Constitution, which states:
"The right of the people to be secure in their persons… shall not be violated.”
Certainly, Pennsylvania’s children’s and adults’ health status is being compromised and violated 24/7/365 from EMFs, RFs, and the dirty electricity produced by Smart Meters.
The Fundamental Flaw Of ‘Mainstream Economics’ October 25 2025 | From: GoldSurvivalGuide / Various
Hugo Salinas Price casts his eye back a few hundred years to see what is wrong with modern mainstream economics…
Bacon's thinking had a profound influence upon the development of Western civilization, because he founded what is known as the scientific method. All the scientific advances of mankind up to the present day, are based on this method, which is - in a few words - controlled experimentation upon things of the natural (physical) world in order to arrive at a truth. He was the first to outline the bases of the methodology to discover physical truths.
In contrast to his way of approaching reality, we have the example of alchemy, the forerunner of chemistry. For the alchemist, there was not a clear separation between the physical and the spiritual properties of matter.
Francis Bacon, an Englishman, was born in 1561 and died in 1626.
Problems in mainstream economics begin with using Francis Bacon’s scientific methodology to determine human behaviour where conscious choice is involved.
Thus, the alchemist was typically fascinated by the possibility of manipulating the spiritual properties of metals, in order to transmute a metal of very low value, such as lead, into the metal of highest possible value, gold.
Infinite riches would be the prize for discovering that method.
The processes were mysterious and thought to be hidden in codes provided by earlier alchemists. Even the great physicist, Sir Isaac Newton (1642 -1726) still dabbled in alchemy, while doing his enormous work in astronomy.
Logicians tell us that the process of arriving at a truth through prior experimentation is inductive reasoning, where the mind is led into the truth through experiment. If you put a fresh egg into boiling water for, say, 12 minutes, your egg will be a hard-boiled egg.
Repeat this experiment as many times as you want, and you have a physical law: "Fresh egg boiled for 12 minutes produces hard-boiled egg." Such is Physics.
The truth expressed by the aforementioned Law is arrived at through induction.
The huge and unquestioned successes which the world has enjoyed through the application of the scientific method founded by Francis Bacon have led to an overvaluation of the scientific method and to its abuse.
For while this method is the correct method for the investigation of the natural world and knowledge of its characteristics, both down to the sub-atomic level and up to the level of knowing what the landscape of Pluto looks like, it is not the only scientific method of acquiring knowledge.
The other method of acquiring scientific knowledge is not based on prior experimentation and is not based on induction.
I do not know what to call this alternative method of acquiring scientific knowledge - perhaps an indication of the more humble position which it enjoys, in our highly materialistic world.
However, there exist examples of this alternative method of acquiring scientific knowledge:
Logic is not born of experience and experimentation. It is inborn in the human being. Where Bacon's scientific method reveals truths a posteriori, that is to say, after experimentation, Logic is a priori - inborn in us, and exists in us before experience.
The same holds for Mathematics: the science of number is independent of prior experience.
The truths derived from Logic and from Mathematics are a priori, and all further truths arrived at in Logic and in Mathematics are arrived at by an intellectual process which is different from that applied in Bacon's scientific method: they are arrived at by deduction, and not by induction.
There is a third field in which scientific knowledge is obtained through deduction. I refer to Economics. Economics is the study of the Logic of Human Action.
It is an a priori science, whose postulates are arrived at through a deductive process from the initial a priori truth - a truth within each human being - that human beings act; from which we deduce that human beings choose, from which we deduce that the human being prefers one thing to another.
From which I deduce that the reader is preferring to read this article rather than doing something else with his time. And so on and so forth.
Thus Economics is the study of conscious human behavior.
Such is the hold which Bacon's scientific method for the study of the natural world exerts upon mankind, that in our day all "mainstream economists" are trained to study human events through the methodology of induction, which is by its nature based on experiment.
This is highly unfortunate, for induction through experiment is logically inapplicable in the field of human events, because controlled experiment, the foundation of Bacon's scientific method, is impossible when studying how humans behave.
Atoms have no choice, they must always behave in the same manner under similar conditions.
Planets have no choice, they follow their orbits without fail. On the other hand, human choice, whether individual or collective, varies from instant to instant. You, the reader, have the choice to continue reading, or not, for instance.
All true Economics is based on an undeniable fact: humans act, from which we deduce another undeniable fact:
Humans choose.
True Economics applies a different methodology - the methodology of deduction - to the study of human affairs; this methodology is radically different from the methodology which is appropriate for the study of the natural world.
All the present woes, uncertainty, unjustified speculation and enrichment of a few to the detriment of whole nations, the utter madness of ZIRP and now NIRP, the call for the banning of cash, and so on and so forth, all the anomalies which now plague our world are due to the false methodology upon which "mainstream economics" operates.
The High Priests of the Fed and the ECB, of the Central Banks of China, of Russia, of the whole world in fact, are doing nothing more than experimenting upon mankind. They are "Sorcerer's Apprentices" and attempt one policy after another, hoping that the next experiment will provide the success they wish for.
They are all looking at numbers, at graphs, at percentages of change, at trend-lines, at the results of prior experiments in past years, attempting to derive some knowledge of what they must do.
But a posteriori information is useless - it only can show what happened in the past, and not what they desperately need: scientific certainty of what they must do now to achieve the ends which they seek.
"Mainstream Economics" functions on the basis of an inappropriate method. The inductive method cannot apply in the realm of human affairs, where each situation, individual or collective, is unique and not repeatable; no matter how well-intentioned "mainstream economists" may be, their methodology - induction - must fail to solve the problems they face.
In order to de-throne these impostors, it would seem advisable to undercut their presumptuous airs with the argument that they really do not know what they are doing, because they are basing their policies on the wrong methodology and cannot possible achieve any success.
This argument attacks the very foundation upon which "Mainstream Economics" has built its castle.
The most influential and prestigious universities of the world, such as Stanford, Princeton, Yale, Harvard, MIT, and the London School of Economics, are all training would-be economists in the wrong methodology:
In the scientific method which is applicable to the natural world, induction through experimentation, which is, however, utterly useless and counter-productive when applied in the realm of human behavior, where only deduction from a priori knowledge, as taught by the New Austrian School of Economics, is the correct methodology.
All we can expect from these young men and women who will graduate from their studies as "accredited economists" will have to be further chaos and disorder, and further breakdown of prosperity, which will end in the complete impoverishment of humanity.
For more on this subject and the misguided efforts of "Mainstream Economics" I refer to you Ludwig von Mises' fascinating book, "Epístemological Problems of Economics" and to the work of Professor Antal E. Fekete, founder of the New Austrian School of Economics, whose work can be found at www.professorfekete.com.
The Tipping Point Is Here – And It’s All About You October 24 2025 | From: WakingTimes / Various
There’s no question about it. We’re there. And I’m not just talking about the globalist takeover bid they’re hastily and clumsily trying to execute.
The awakening is erupting. Many feel lost and afraid right now all across the spectrum of humanity.
Related: Is The Globalist "Reset" Failing? The Elites May Have Overplayed Their Hand
This deliberate creation of chaos is designed to do just that. However, parallel and simultaneous to their psychotic designs is a massive arousal of the human spirit, spurred on by an arising of conscious awareness and a deep sense of growing personal realization and empowerment.
Most may not recognize these rising seemingly confusing energetic changes as being the creative process at work, but it is.
Awakening is first of all a destructive process, eliminating everything that is unreal and inhibitive of personal development and progress. These two dynamics work concurrently.
When you stand back and observe with washened eyes you’ll see it, and it brings great peace in the midst of these stormy times.
What Price Awakening?
Being awake comes with a price, and it may have been upped a bit or even a lot lately. You’re being worked on.
Letting go and getting the most out of challenging circumstances and conditions is vital to growth. Don’t fight it, whatever you do.
It’s very sad to see unawakened humanity being tossed to and fro without a clue as to what is really going on. But even that is an “engineered” shake up designed by Universe to help every one of us come to our senses and transcend this false reality.
Millions are flocking to alternative news sources to try to make sense of what’s going on, and they’re stumbling on realities they never considered before.
And that’s a wonderful thing. It will cause a lot of pain to make the realizations they’re being presented with but again, that’s alright. Truth comes with a cost – the end of the lies and illusions they had previously based their entire lives on. And it’s an ongoing process.
Many will be forced to enter the “dark night of the soul” whether they want to or not. I can tell you from personal experience that it’s a hell of a lot easier and quicker if you elect to let yourself go through it, and in many ways the sooner you do, if you haven’t already, the better.
What Do We Do?
So what should we do? If we know the truth, we’re responsible not only to share it passionately, but also to live it. This is where it gets even more uncomfortable, but it must be done. The hour is late and the times we are living in are dire.
We have to rise to the occasion. It’s virtually us or them, life or death, truth or lies, freedom or slavery – for not just ourselves but our loved ones, progeny and the entire human race.
That’s what makes this the opportunity of a lifetime, and our marvelous creative Universe is there to meet you if you dare walk the path.
In fact, you’ll even meet your true self, what you’ve been looking and longing for your whole life!
The Tipping Point
I posted two remarkable videos (see here and here) that to me are clear signals that the tide is not just turning, but the tide of humanity awakening is rising quickly.
What we do from here is supremely important as we have a growing array of opportunities for active participation unfolding before us. And there will be more, but waiting to start somewhere is not an option.
The time to activate is now. Let anything that hinders this fall away from your life, whatever the cost. The call for our inner warriors to rise could not be any clearer.
You’ll see these manifestations of the tipping point we’ve reached everywhere if you look. People’s tones are changing, minds are tossed about but exploring new perspectives, truths are being outed like never before.
It’s an amazing time. Don’t stare at the machinations of the powers that shouldn’t be, they’re designed to distract and disempower. This is crucial.
And don’t think Gaia is going to take all this lying down either. We’re talking about a massive energetic change we have the privilege to be a part of. Remember, nature bats last.
Fed Up? Good!
Many are getting fed up with false flags, mass shootings, war drums, complete media bullshit and the fear riddled bloviations of the psychopaths in the news. That’s actually good, and one of the main symptoms of what I’m addressing here.
You’re fed up – you’ve had enough. So turn it off. Just get the essentials from the independent and alternative news to keep an eye on things then turn it off.
Draw on empowering sources that feed your soul and inspire your heart and draw close to supportive loved ones.
Take the exploration of self you’re no doubt being presented with and see where it takes you.
That’s the primary battle at hand. We need to become who we truly are if we’re to finish this out the way we should, could, can and will. But don’t dwell on your own damn ass all day either.
Activate and proliferate the truth and build community and bonds of love with those you’re being called to be with.
We all need this support and strength, and environments where we can be our authentic selves and grow into the full stature of awakened, empowered souls.
Enjoy the ride, but don’t buck at the pain and sacrifices when they present themselves. They’re small fry compared to the glorious new world being birthed in the hearts of our beloved mankind.
The Remedy For True Health & The True Origin Of Vaccines October 23 2025 | From: Sott / Various
As America [and not JUST America... sigh] struggles with a 'legal' drug addiction like no other nation, are we missing something fundamental about how the body realizes true health?
1802 painting of smallpox vaccine inventor Dr. Edward Jenner vaccinating a room full of people who then sprout cows from their bodies. The painting illustrates popular 17th century fears about vaccination. The caption reads “The Cow Pock – or – the Wonderful Effects of the New Inoculation.”
If we look at ancient teachings - those which have been around since well before the fairly new invention of 'modern,' allopathic medicine, which has only been in existence really since the 19th century, and the dawn of 'germ theory, ' instead of relying on the advice of an industry which has grown swollen with greed, might we not discover simple, profound measures to heal the body, once and for all?
We remove limbs and organs with multiple surgeries, blast cells with radiation and chemotherapy, and treat our natural immune system like a four letter word. We give more vaccines than ever, yet somehow various 'germs' and 'super bugs' have taken over. We now have the first generation in history that will likely not outlive its parents.
You might say that modern doctors, with few exceptions, practice medical warfare, instead of true healing. All medical ethics have been abandoned for a Rockefeller-Rothschild-Jesuit influenced poisoned needle. In fact, the origins of vaccination, just one modern medical modus operandi, might shock you.
All Through the Help of a 'Lady'
The history of dumbing down a nation(s) with inoculation is much like the famous tale of the defeat of Troy using a wooden horse. Inoculation was introduced in India using Lady Montague as a smokescreen. Lady Montague wasn't even a doctor. Women doctors did not appear until over 100 years later.
In the year 1717, Lady Mary Wortley Montagu was the smokescreen that the Jesuits used to introduce this religious rite into England. Inoculation or variolation was given the sanction of the Royal Family when two daughters of the Prince of Wales were vaccinated. Barbaric as this religious rite was; it was the human disease of smallpox that was injected into the bloodstream. Inoculation was the foot-in-the-door to prepare the people for something far worse.
Inoculation against smallpox is what led to the 'vaccination generation,' but this disease festered in the unsanitary conditions of poverty - as many illnesses do. Vaccines did not eradicate smallpox, quarantine and the improved and more hygienic living conditions of people is what stopped it from spreading.
Since that time vaccines have been developed to include a host of carcinogens and other ingredients that could only rightly be called toxic waste.
Just Some of the Many Toxic Substances Added to Vaccines Include:
Mercury, which constitutes 49.7% of thimerosal (or thimerosal), realized to be a highly toxic agent. Mercury has strangely been beloved by allopathy ever since its inception; in fact, the 3 main treatments of the early allopaths of the 19th century were bloodletting, surgery and the injection of toxic heavy metals like lead and mercury to purportedly displace disease.
Aluminum, a known neurotoxin. One peer reviewed study suggests, "aluminum in adjuvant form carries a risk for autoimmunity, long-term brain inflammation and associated neurological complications and may thus have profound and widespread adverse health consequences."
Aborted Fetal Cells/Human DNA. This is not a rare occurrence. Former drug company scientist Helen Ratajczak says that over 23 vaccines contain aborted human tissue with an uncanny link to autism. Another study by Dr. Deisher found a connection between the injection of human diploid cells and autism as well.
MSG (monosodium Glutamate) - If just one meal containing MSG can cause serious headaches, what do you think it can do to the body when injected into the bloodstream via a vaccine? Processed glutamic acid can cause brain lesions and neurotoxicity. This adjuvant is added to MMR vaccines and others.
Animal cells. All sorts of animals are used for this, including chickens, pigs, dogs, monkeys, horses, rabbits, cows and more. All these animal cells remain in trace amounts in the vaccine, as admitted by the FDA. Marti Oakley in an article on Activist Post entitled "Vaccines: Human and Animal DNA" points out that:
Cell lines, which can be derived from aborted human babies, can last for decades and are developed from a single type of cell. Yet it is known that after continuous culturing these lines begin to mutate into cancer-causing agents.
If these cell lines do this spontaneously in the lab, what are the chances they are doing the same thing once inside the human body where the culturing never ends? ...
We are being injected via vaccine with bits and pieces of other human beings; with the bits and pieces of other mammals.
Whatever the intended purpose of vaccines was initially, it is apparent that too little is either known or acknowledged regarding the potential adverse side affects from co-mingling the DNA of humans and animals and the potential for viral and bacterial cross-contaminations that can and do occur.
The IARC's 'definite carcinogen' Formaldehyde. This chemical is used as a preservative and biocide, commonly to embalm the dead. Even the US Department of Health says that this substance is highly carcinogenic. It can also cause brain damage and seizures.
Also included are antibiotics, squalene, peanuts (which many people are highly allergic too) and GMOs.
Ironically, Allopathy Inc was created before the first world war when IG Farben of Germany merged with Rockefeller. As Guylaine Lanctot explains in The Medical Mafia:
"Vaccination stimulates the immune system, the body's defense mechanism. Repeated vaccination exhausts the immune system. It gives a false sense of security and, in doing so, it opens the door wide to all kinds of illnesses.
Notably, to those related to AIDS, which can only develop on ripe ground, where the immune system has been disturbed. It causes AIDS to explode. It ensures that the illness flourishes perpetually.
Vaccination leads to social violence and crime. What better way to destabilize a country than to disarm its inhabitants, and reinforce police and military control?
The authorities subtly create situations of panic and fear among the population which, in turn, necessitate the reinforcement of 'protection measures', including forbidding citizens from owning weapons. The authorities then come across as saviours and strengthen their control.
It is certain that, in order to impose a single world army, one must first disarm the citizens of every country. One must therefore create violence, if they are to achieve this disarmament, particularly in the United States where the right to bear arms is guaranteed by the Constitution."
So how exactly do eradicate disease instead of vaccinating ourselves into delirium and oblivion?
The answer is known to Ayurvedic and Chinese medicine practitioners, and to the true healers of ancient times.
When the body is cleared of obstructions and toxins, the immune system can flourish, and fights all manner of microbes, superbugs, and viruses, all on its own.
Translated, this Sanskrit text says we should "eliminate that which is not wholeness, that which is disrupting, by that which is suitable for the self, using procedures and preparations to restore the self, to re-establish prakriti (wholeness - our essential nature) and pacify by that which is conducive to health."
In the West, we concentrate on manifest illness, and try to cure the body after it is well past its most prime ability to cure itself.
In other cultures, dis-ease is handled while it is in its infancy, so that it can never take over the body in various forms of cancer, heart-disease, diabetes and more.
We have between 50-75 trillion cells, and they cannot respirate properly - that is obtain nutrients and expel waste, if they are not given a pure environment. Ayurvedic texts refer to the bioaccumulated environmental toxins, poor dietary habits, and the eventual mixing of toxins with our bodies' cells, three stages of Ama, which does not translate directly into English, but most closely can be thought of as waste or toxicity.
Ama starts in the mind in the Ayurvedic culture, such as the erroneous thinking that leads us to make poor food and lifestyle choices. It later causes us to take up habits that allow toxic substances, both metabolic and environmental to clog up our digestive system, which eventually leads to horrible immunity.
The Root of All Disease
The very basic function of the immune system is to keep 'bad' things out, 'good' things in. If you think of it - this is exactly what the digestive system does when it is working correctly.
Dysbiosis is what happens when the 'bad' bacteria are running the show in your gut, instead of the 'good' bacteria that forms roughly 90% of your immunity.
The standard American Diet (SAD) promotes bad bacteria in the gut instead of good bacteria, and once vaccinations are introduced into this environment, the immune system is often taxed beyond its capacity, leading to chronic disease, neurological failure, and in many cases, complete morbidity.
Simply put, ridding the digestive system of toxins, will restore the proper gut balance, and the body can heal itself from almost anything. This is why the concept of 'saucha' or cleanliness is a cornerstone of all yogic practices, and cleanses, such as Shankha Prakshalana , are carried out with almost religious fervor to protect against disease.
As Jay Pasricha, M.D., director of the Johns Hopkins Center for Neurogastroenterology, reiterates, the gut-brain is hidden within the tissues of your digestive organs:
"The enteric nervous system doesn't seem capable of thought as we know it, but it communicates back and forth with our big brain - with profound results. "
That communication is so profound, it can even cause changes in your mood. Interactions between nerve signals, gut hormones and microbiota - the bacteria that live in the digestive system also signal the immune system to attack foreign invaders, instead of 'go to sleep' or attack the body itself.
Vaccinations were meant to 'dirty' the body and mind. Ancient healing practices were meant to clean them. You can choose your own path to health, but hopefully this information makes the decision to abstain from allopathic medicine a more interesting one.
The Treaty Of 1213 - The Beginning Of The Lie October 22 2025 | From: TruthControl / Various
Once upon a time before the year 1066 the people of England held Allodial title to their land. Not even the king could take the land for not paying a tithe.
William the Conquer came in 1066 and stole the Kings Title and took the land of the people. From William I, 1066, to King John, 1199, England was in dire straits. It was bankrupt.
The King invoked the Law of Mortmain, the dead man's hand, so people couldn't pass their land on to the church or anyone else without the King's permission, (modern day probate?). Without Mortmain the King would lose the land he controlled.
The Vatican didn't like that because the King owed a lot of pounds to the Vatican. (WHY?)
(1). King John refused to accept The Vatican's representative, Stephen Langton, whom Pope Innocent III installed to rule England(religious or in fact?)
(2). In 1208 England was placed under Papal interdict (?). Interdict means a prohibition.
King John was excommunicated and in trying to regain his stature he groveled before the Pope and returned the title to his kingdoms of England and Ireland to the Pope as vassals, and swore submission and loyalty to him. King John accepted Langton as Archbishop of Canterbury, and offered the Pope a vassal's bond of fealty and homage.
Two months later, in July of 1213, King John was absolved of excommunication, at Winchester, by the returned Archbishop of Canterbury, Langton. On October 3, 1213, by treaty, King John ratified his surrender of his kingdoms to the Pope, as Vicar of Christ who claimed ownership of everything and everyone on earth as tradition.
Question 1. Where in the Bible did Jesus give any man this kind of power over all men and land? He didn't. He did not create a religion nor did he create the office of Pope.
Question 2. Can you have a third party break a contract between you and another person under duress..? Don't those of you who are forced into a contract reserve all your rights under modern UCC 1-207 and claim UCC 1-103?
King John
The contract (treaty of 1213) was between two parties. Now the Barons of England would not put up with being slaves anymore so they took to the sword and made King John sign the Magna Charta. So doesn't this act of the Barons violate the principle of natural law, when they created the Magna Charta, as having no force and effect upon a contract between two parties?
Well Pope Innocent III, the other contracting party thought so, for he declared the Magna Charta to be:
". . .unlawful and unjust as it is base and shameful. . .
whereby the Apostolic See is brought into contempt, the Royal Prerogative diminished, the English outraged, and the whole enterprise of the Crusade greatly imperiled."
- Quoted from G.R.C. Davis: Magna Charta. Trustee of the British Museum. London. 1965.
The Pope, in order to introduce strife in England and Ireland that would help him, used Jesus' teachings to his advantage that is verified in the Gospels by two of His Apostles. So St. Levy (Mark 2:14; Luke 5:27), alias Matthew, cites Jesus at Matthew 10::34-36 and Luke 12:49, 51-3. Nothing reveals the antithesis of government and religion more clearly than these facts.
Question 3. What did the contract of 1213 A.D. create? A TRUST or CONTRACT. Only the two parties, the King's heirs and the Pope, can break the contract. For the Trust /Contract cannot be broken as long as there are heirs to both sides of the contract.
At this time in history we now know who controlled the Kings of England and the land of the world. For Now we have the Pope claiming the whole Western Hemisphere besides Europe. The Holy See of Antioch ruled all the easterly side and the Holy See of Alexandria ruled the western side, so there was a conflict (3).
So, on with the story. The King's explorers had come to America to claim dominion over land by deceiving and murdering the natives, the American Indians.
The King operated under the treaty of 1213 and everything was going along okay until the 1770's when the bunch of rogues called the "Founding Fathers" decided they wanted the benefits but not pay the taxes to the King.
They, being lawyers, and professional educated men, didn't know they were still under the Pope's control? Their lies and fraud now would affect the American colonies and the people who lived on the land.
Those common people who fought in the American Revolution were unaware that the 1213 treaty still ruled despite the fact they THOUGHT the Magna Charta was a viable piece of work. (4)
The Declaration of Rights in 1689 declared the Rights of the British subjects in England.
At the end of the English Declaration it stated at Section III "
...that should any of the Rights just mentioned be in violation of the HOLY ALLIANCE (1213 Treaty), ...it is as if this Declaration was never written".
So we know that the English Declaration didn't fly, so what makes you think the 1774 Declaration of Rights in this British Colony would work.
Weren't these people doing the same thing as the Barons did in 1215 A.D. to King John?
A contract is a contract. Look at Article 1, Section 10, Clause 1 of the U.S. Constitution.
Can anyone obligate a contract? Were the "founding fathers" trying to obligate a contract between two parties that still have heirs living today?
Question 4. How important is the "ultimate benefactor", the Pope, The HOLY SEE, in the scheme of things? Move through history till modern times and pull Public Law 88-244, which follows Public Law 88-243 - the institution of the law- merchants Uniform Commercial Code. Are you shocked that the Pope is listed in this Public Law?
Doesn't the United States have an ambassador in the Vatican? Why? Is it a government like all other nations such as France, Japan, Spain or Brazil? The Vatican runs the world, it controls the British Crown.
Is it any wonder they separate man's Church and government?
They don't talk about the Lord Almighty's Church (government) do they. (5)
"Organized churches" are given special tax privileges because the Vatican dictates to the sixty United States trustees through the trust document, the U.S. Constitution created by the 1783 treaty between the King, frontman for the Vatican, and Adams, Hartly, Laurens, & Franklin who were operating for the King and not the people of America. Look at Article VI of the Constitution for the United States for your answer as stated in the "New History of America". (6)
You see we are still under the Pope who rules over all nations as he declared he did back in 1213.
The 1783 Treaty did say in the opening statement quoted exactly as it appears in olde English;
“It having pleafed the Divine Providence to difpofe the hearts of the Moft Serene and Moft Porent Prince, George the Third, by the grace of God, King of the Great Britain, France and Ireland, Defender, of the Faith , Duke of Brunfwick and Laurenberg, Arch-Treafurer and PRINCE ELECTOR OF THE HOLY ROMAN EMPIRE, & C. AND OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, . . .."
(Emphasis added in caps).
"Did you catch the last few words? This is from a King (man) who can supposedly make no claim over the United States of America because he was defeated? The King claims God gave him the almighty power to say that no man can ever own property because it, "goes against the tenets of his church, the Vatican/Holy Roman Empire, because the King is the "Elector of the Holy Roman Empire’"
What about the secret Treaty of Verona, made the 22nd of November, 1822, which shows the power of the Pope and the Vatican's interest in the US Republic?
“The undersigned specially authorized to make some additions to the treaty of the Holy Alliance, after having exchanged their respective credentials, have agreed as follows:
ARTICLE I. The high contracting powers being convinced that the system of representative government is equally as incompatible with the monarchial principles as the maxim of the sovereignty of the people with the divine right, engage mutually, in the most solemn manner to use all their efforts to put an end to the system of representative governments, in what ever country it may exist in Europe, and to prevent its being introduced in those countries where it is not yet known.
ARTICLE 2. As it cannot be doubted that the liberty of the press is the most powerful means used by the pretended supporters of the rights of nations to the detriment of those of princes, the high contracting parties promise reciprocally to adopt all proper measures to suppress it, not only in their own state but also in the rest of Europe.
ARTICLE 3. Convinced that the principles of religion contribute most powerfully to keep nations in the state of passive obedience which they owe to their princes, the high contracting parties declare it to be their intention to sustain in their respective states, those measures which the clergy may adopt with the aim of ameliorating their own interests, so intimately connected with the preservation of the authority of the princes; and the contracting powers join in offering their thanks to the Pope for what he has already done for them, and solicit his constant cooperation in their views of submitting the nations."
Do we have a false God before us and worship him and his church instead of the real Lord, Jesus and his government. The divine right of kings exists in Clinton and every Governor of the states in corporate Union.
Well let me go on record and say that the Lord gave me the same right as the Pope claims was given to him. Am I not a Steward upon the land of the Lord as a mere sojourner, the same as the Pope? Are not you also a Steward?
Did the Lord make a covenant with Adam and Eve to subdue the earth and reign over the animals and to populate the earth? Doesn't that contract still exist? And doesn't it exist with you also?
And we, the true believers in that contract, can we take all the nations (mans) laws in the world and dump them in the ocean to regain our rightful place on this earth under the Lord's Natural Law to thwart the contract between King John and the Pope that appears to defeat the original contract the Lord made with man?
Yes, let us go back to the original contract and destroy the Vatican's control over everybody.
Before 1066 the Pope did not claim all the land as the people claimed the land and didn't pay taxes on it to anybody.
Didn't the Lord say to the people after coming out of Egypt, "why do you want a king when you have me and my contract?"
Which Lord do you want to live under, a Pope, a King, President, Governors, Senators, Representatives, or a real Lord called Jesus Christ. "Christians," are ridiculed and put down because they read the Word of the Lord correctly and could defeat even the best the Pope has to throw at them.
The King James version of the Bible is just that. A version concocted by the King under the guidance of the Pope so as to hide the real truth. I was taught by the church I went to, which is government controlled as it has to be by the treaty of 1213 and reiterated in the 1783 Treaty between The Pope's Elector, King John and the First President of the United States, Sam Huntington and Charles Thompson, Secretary.
I read the passage, when Jesus was on the cross, from a very old manuscript that said;
“Forgive them NOT, for they know what they do."
This is different than what most people believe he said;
"Forgive them for they know not what they do."
Bottom line is that when men write, transcribe, translate, update, and copy over thousands of years they always alter the interpretation, words and insert their own meanings.
You can see this in just the 200 years that our country became separated from England, but still remains a colony under different compact and use of clever wording. But that is another whole subject that you do not know about.
Eminent Domain and Allodial Title:
Why and where did "eminent domain" rear its ugly head? Right after the King's government was formed in America. Eminent domain replaced the Law of Mortmain of England and when government wanted your land they claimed eminent domain thereby destroying that to what people think they have allodial title.
Allodial title only existed in America when the King granted the use of the land to the likes of William Penn, ...
But it could be taken at any time. Are you or were your great, great, great grandfathers ever free to hold land that could never be taken away?
Ask some of today's farmers and see how many lost their farms to the government that belonged to their past family and I'll bet none of the land goes back to the 1789 era. Well it's a wonderful world to live in the end times, isn't it. Read Revelations to see where the false preachers come from.
Does the Vatican come close with a mortal calling himself the "vicar" of Christ?
Here is the definition of vicar in Webster's 1828 American Dictionary of the English Language.
Vicar:
"In a general sense, a person deputed or authorized to perform the functions of another; a substitute in office."
The Pope PRETENDS to be vicar of Jesus Christ on earth.
Pretend; To hold out as a false appearance; to offer something feigned instead of that which is real; To exhibit as a cover for something hidden."
You bet your life the Pope has something to hide. He is no more powerful than You. The King is no more powerful than You. The American President and Governor's are no more powerful than You. You allow THEM run your lives ...WHY.?
Thinkers, you cannot fight the Pope or the King on their contract even though you are affected by the contract. You must go elsewhere for relief. Remember the first contract in history, God with Adam and Eve? You had better because you were a part of it as an heir and it is your saving grace.
Why do you think the "courts of common law" are despised and Government and States are taking action to stop them?
See where the power lies when this happens? Clinton, the Governors, and Congress of the United States and the Legislatures of the several states are only following orders and delegate to the 60 U.S. Trustees, who always show up in bankruptcy generated mostly by IRS actions. Isn't that a starting point?
What do Trustees administer? A trust? The Constitution is a trust, correct? It was created by the 1783 Treaty, correct? It is not the private man's trust contract, correct? Only those entering into the contract are UNDER the constitution and are bound by it, correct?
Look up the definition of "under" in words and phrases and a good dictionary such as Webster's 1828 at Vol. II, 101. I, my dear readers, am not "under" some damn corporate trust (constitution) drafted in secrecy by the King and corporate lawyer esquires (you call them the "Founding Fathers") whom were controlled by the Treaty of 1213, wherein the Vatican still ruled over all. It was never "my constitution" and never will be. The Constitution does not apply to me nor will it ever.
However, some of the states' representatives in 1776 realized that the Constitution was a commercial contract among the Founding Fathers to protect their financial interests in the Americas and in Europe.
The Articles of the Bill of Rights is designed to keep those United States citizens whom are bound by the Constitution (contract) from encroaching upon my natural Law Rights, (With this hint in mind you may discover where the IRS gets its purported power that makes you liable, because you claim to be UNDER the constitution, but they will never admit it because only a few know the real reason and they are not about to tell their agents.
The same goes for any license issued to you by the corporate States. I hope you have read the Supreme Court cases of State and United States cited in my previous books that prove beyond any shadow of a doubt I am correct in my previous two sentences. Yet you always fall back into the trap by claiming citizenship of the United States AND THE STATES.
No! You are not a citizen of the corporate or organic State if you want to be free. You cannot claim it is your constitution and remain free. You cannot claim representatives in the legislatures and remain free. How about your estate? State and Estate come from the same contract.
Webster's 1828 Dictionary defines it;
ESTA'TE, n. 1. In a general sense, fixedness; a condition; now generally written and pronounced state. (6) The general interest of business or government; hence a political body; a commonwealth; a republic.
But in this sense, we now use State.
Get the picture? We are the ryots tenure holding the "estate" of the King called your estate. Belong to a body politic and you are a slave. In my previous books I told the people a "republic" is a fraud, for then you belong to the estate of the King which makes you a law-merchant holding as a trustee the King's land that he is holding in trust for the Vatican.
The States are the "estate " of the Vatican / King cabal with the money changers along for the ride are a full blown consortium which includes the Congress / President / Governors et al. I don't want to drive you crazy, since you might not comprehend all that is here.
Once you know the truth and let go of all you were taught by the government and the preachers you don't become the drowning man grasping at the lies to stay afloat. Have you ever wondered why you were sinking while pleading case law and their constitution to protect you?
(1) (WHY?). Because the Pope claimed all lands as the vicar of Christ and the king owed money from the Vatican that was to be collected by the Church of England. The church reduced their parishioners to mere serfdom. When they died the church got the property and the King, in order to preserve what property he had instituted the law of Mortmain. This prevented the people from willing the land to the Pope. When the pope got wind of this he excommunicated the King. That's the explanation for the Why?
(2) This is a fact that is documented in the English documents of History at the Leeds Library.
(3) The conflict between each of the Holy Sees, one controlling the western front (America) and the other controlling the China side with the dividing line somewhere in Spain and France through Germany. The Pope is the figurehead, remember and the best way to explain it is Congress is Alexandria and the Senate is Antioch.
(4) (Why doesn't the Magna Charta hold more force and effect than a later contract between the king and the Pope? Because the Pope decreed it null and void as it would break the contract he had initiated with the King. The Magna Charta was a contract breaker by third parties and that was a no-no in any law. Besides the Pope owned England and how could the Barons take the land that the King pledged let alone all the surfs that the Pope still controlled through the church of England? He can't and so the Magna Charta was declared Void. Now the Pope, through the front man, The King, could create the other contracts called treaties and no one is the wiser. Remember, the Pope was being controlled by the creditor, The Rothschilds to whom the Pope was indebted.
(5) Why? It is clear as a bell. The "church" of GOD is 'Government of GOD and man created all these religions and made churches for them. They, man, cannot allow the Government of the Lord "Church upon this rock" to get in the way of the government of men, now can they?
(6) "New History of America", by The Informer
People you can read this for yourself in American Council of Christian Laymen: "How Red Is The Federal Council of Churches", Madison, Wisconsin, 1949. Now you may better understand James Montgomery's latest as to why all the declarations, Magna Charta, etc. have no effect. Read on to see why.
See: James Montgomery's - “British Colony III" on the Internet. To further prove what I say that the declared rights were also at the mercy of any previous charters or grants from the king of England you must read section 25 of the 1776 North Carolina Constitution, Declaration of Rights which states;09"
And provided further, that nothing herein contained shall affect the titles or possessions of individuals holding or claiming under the laws heretofore in force, or grants heretofore made by the late King George II, or his predecessors, or the late lords proprietors, or any of them."
Criminal Roots: A Shocking Exposé On The Clinton Family And Their Rise To Power October 21 2025 | From: DCClothesline / Various
Clinton family secrets revealed in shocking and damning essay.
A plethora of controversy and allegations of steamy sexcapades, treasonous business scandals, illicit criminal activity, drug trafficking, and even a number of mysterious deaths has surrounded the Clinton family for years.
In fact, these scandals, many of which have been documented, may be some of the best kept secrets hidden from the American people to this day.
According to an underrated documentary film titled “The Clinton Chronicles”, which contains scores of multiple eyewitness testimonies, the Clinton family is “sick” and may be one of the biggest criminal syndicates to have ever occupied the White House, aside from maybe the Obama Administration.
The film points out just how energetic and inspirational former U.S. President and Governor of Arkansas Bill Clinton was in his younger years before he started trafficking cocaine and successfully laundering drug money from the illicit operations conducted through the Arkansas Development Finance Authority (ADFA) and other channels – to the tune of millions of dollars.
Larry Nichols, former Director of Marketing for the ADFA, was brought in by Clinton in 1988 to help with “loan” operations when he stumbled upon what Bill Clinton had previously touted to Nichols as “the best kept secret in Arkansas” at the time.
Nichols spoke a little about his time at the ADFA, about a month into his employment:
"I was literally working, setting, in the middle of Bill Clinton’s political machine. It was where he made payoffs, where he repaid favors for campaign support. I was in an interesting seat and I knew it.”
Nichols said the ADFA was the “epicenter” of the Clinton’s money laundering operations.
Doc DeLaughter, a former Arkansas police investigator, also came forward in the film, detailing how law enforcement had a grand jury case with witnesses built who would confirm that Dan Lassiter was indeed involved in cocaine trafficking and was one of Clinton’s largest financiers and best friends.
According to Larry Nichols, Dan Lassiter and the Clinton crew would give “piles and piles of cocaine […] ashtray after ashtray full at parties and they were giving it to young girls,” including a 14-year-old girl who eventually became devirginized after the group had a physician place her on birth control.
Nichols also reported that both Bill and Hillary were complicit in the money laundering scheme, which used a state program, the ADFA, that was ostensibly set up “to provide low-interest bond loans to churches, schools, and colleges”. Moreover, Nichols also reported that Bill Clinton’s signature had to be on every single loan, which would theoretically empirically link the former U.S. president to the alleged scandal.
Additionally, Nichols said that both Webb Hubbell and Hillary Clinton, who at the time worked for the Rose Law Firm, had a hand in the illicit operation and even helped get ADFA approved by drafting legislation “Act 1062″ and more.
Interestingly, it turns out Webb Hubbell also received the first loan from the ADFA. Webb Hubbell and Hillary Clinton also did the “audit and evaluation of the loan application” they were employed at Rose Law Firm, according to Nichols.
"The first loan was $2.85 million, and never was a penny of that paid back.”
Nichols also noted that the “same cast of characters” were smuggling in loads of narcotics into Mena, Arkansas back in 1982 as Bill Clinton’s ego and drug use slowly got out of hand. At one point, according to a reporter, Bill Clinton was admitted into the hospital for “sinus problems” related to his “cocaine abuse and overdose”.
One woman even claimed that she “had sex” and did “cocaine” at toga parties” with Clinton’s crew and other prominent members of government and the police department on a number of occasions when Hillary, Bill’s wife, was “nowhere to be found.”
At one point the criminal activity became so blatant that it was said to be commonly known throughout certain circles exactly what had been taking place, people even ended up dead.
Many were awaiting indictments but the Clinton family tentacles were just too long and the path taken by investigators led to nowhere.
As the documentary points out there were two kids who witnessed low-flying aircraft drop narcotics in Mena on several occasions who were later found with their bodies placed on train tracks to be ran over after being killed because:
"They saw something they shouldn’t have seen,”said the mother of one victim.
Their deaths were ruled “accidental” though the victims bodies showed signs of a stab wound and blunt-force trauma which was later proven to have taken place before the two were hit by the train.
“The fact is we know who killed these kids,” said one man who was involved with the case.
Everyone who covered-up the case was promoted by Bill himself. All in all “a total of six people with information about the boys murders were eventually murdered as well,” the film’s narrator said.
Eventually it was discovered by the former head of Arkansas Drug Task Force, Jean Duffy, that “drug trafficking in Arkansas was linked to government officials in frightening proportions” and a “grand jury” was being built.
"Although there was an abundance of evidence and word kept reaching me from members of the grand jury that they were ready to indict, no indictments came” because the U.S. District Attorney at the time blocked all attempts.”
Out of the ten years the smuggling ring was operating not one single load was busted and not one single arrest was made. To top it all off it’s been said that the operations continued for years to come and yet still nothing has really come of it.
All of this seems to only be a small snippet of what the Clinton family has actually had their hands in. In fact, I exposed another one of Bill’s escapades back in January in an article titled “St. James Island exposed: The elites best kept secret, until now.”
Jet-setters from around the world met on private island for ‘orgies’ and other sexual acts with young, sometimes underage, women
If you can name it - it has likely taken place on the lavish private island off the coast of Puerto Rico which boasts a beautifully landscaped plush luxury estate complete with its own helipad, privy only to certain members of the global elite.
Owned by Jeffery Epstein, a wealthy American financier and convicted sex offender, Little St. James Island appears to have been somewhat of a gathering place and is a well desired hangout among key figureheads, actors, and royalty including the likes of former U.S. President Bill Clinton, Kevin Spacey, and Prince Andrew.
However, the people attending the lavish residence are likely not there to discuss “cutting edge scientific and medical research” as the Epstein VI Foundation would like you to believe, but rather to experience full-on sexual encounters with underage girls as young as fourteen.
That’s right, just like a scene out of the Hollywood blockbuster film Eyes Wide Shut, wild parties, prostitution, orgies, and even underage sex all reportedly occur at Little St. James.
Back in 2005 police conducted an 11 month-long undercover investigation into Epstein and his estate after the mother of a 14-year-old girl went to police after suspecting her daughter was paid $300 for at least one sexual act on the island in which she was ordered to strip, leaving on just her panties, while giving Epstein a massage.
Although police found tons of photos of young women on the island and even interviewed eyewitnesses, Epstein was hit with a mere slap on the wrist after “pleading to a single charge of prostitution”. Epstein later served 13-months of his 18-month service in jail.
In 2008, Epstein was hit again, this time with a $50 million civil suit after another victim filed in federal court claiming that she was “recruited” by Epstein to give him a “massage” but was essentially forced into having sexual intercourse with him for $200 which was payable upon completion. The women were coming out of the woodwork.
Now Bill Clinton is back in the press and not for his controversial relationship with Monica Lewinsky, but rather his friendship with Epstein. In fact, flight records indicate that Bill would frequent the island paradise during the 2002 and 2005 era while Hillary, Bill’s wife, was a Senator in New York.
‘I remember asking Jeffrey what’s Bill Clinton doing here kind of thing, and he laughed it off and said well he owes me a favor,’ one unidentified woman said in the lawsuit, which was filed in Palm Beach Circuit Court.
The woman went on to say how orgies were a regular occurrence and that she recalled two young girls from New York who were always seen around the five-house compound but their personal back-stories were never revealed.
“At least one woman on the compound was there unwillingly,” reported the Daily Mail in an article. The woman was allegedly forced to have sex with “politicians, businessmen, royalty, academicians” at the retreat. Just one of “more than 40 women” that have come forth with claims against Epstein, showing the vast scale of the man’s dark operations, which aren’t limited only to Little St. James.
Moreover, Epstein was invited to Chelsea Clinton’s wedding in 2010 amongst 400 other guests, demonstrating his close friendship with the Clinton family.
To top it all off blue blood, “Prince Andrew was allegedly one of the house’s visitors. On Friday, the Duke of York was named in a federal lawsuit filed against Epstein, whom the FBI once reportedly linked to 40 young women. Filed in 2008 in the Southern District of Florida, the $50 million lawsuit claimed Epstein had a:
"Sexual preference and obsession for underage minor girls … gained access to primarily economically disadvantaged minor girls in his home and sexually assaulted these girls,”reported the Washington Post.
They shy away from it. They pretend “it couldn’t be.” They refuse to consider facts. They and their editors parrot “the experts.”
“Government science exists because it is a fine weapon to use, in order to force an agenda of control over the population. We aren’t talking about knowledge here. Knowledge is irrelevant. What counts is: ‘How can we fabricate something that looks like the truth?’
I keep pointing this out: we’re dealing with reality builders. In this case, they make their roads and fences out of data, and they massage and invent the data out of thin air to suit their purposes. After all, they also invent money out of thin air.”
- The Underground, Jon Rappoport
Official science has a stranglehold on major media. It has the force of a State religion. When you stop and think about it, official science is, in a significant sense, a holy church.
Therefore, it is no surprise that the church’s spokespeople would wield power over major information outlets.
These prelates invent, guard, and dispense “what is known.” That was precisely the role of the Roman Church in times past.
And those professionals within the modern Church of Science are severely punished when they leave the fold and accuse their former masters of lies and crimes. They are blackballed, discredited, and stripped of their licenses. At the very least.
Totalitarian science lets you know you’re living in a totalitarian society.
The government, the press, the mega-corporations, the prestigious foundations, the academic institutions, the “humanitarian” organizations say:
“This is the disease. This is its name. This is what causes it. This is the drug that treats it. This is the vaccine that prevents it.”
“This is how accurate diagnosis is done. These are the tests. These are the possible results and what they mean.”
“Here are the genes. This is what they do. This is how they can be changed and substituted and manipulated. These are the outcomes.”
“These are the data and the statistics. They are correct. There can be no argument about them.”
“This is life. These are the components of life. All change and improvement result from our management of the components.”
“This is the path. It is governed by truth which our science reveals. Walk the path. We will inform you when you stray. We will report new improvements.”
“This is the end. You can go no farther. You must give up the ghost. We will remember you.”
We are now witnessing the acceleration of Official Science. Of course, that term is an internal contradiction. But the State shrugs and moves forward.
The notion that the State can put its seal on favored science, enforce it, and punish its competitors, is anathema to a free society.
For example: stating that vaccination is mandatory, in order to protect the vaccinated (who are supposed to be immune) from the unvaccinated. An absurdity on its face.
For example: Announcing that the science of climate change is “settled,” when there are, in fact, huge numbers of researchers who disagree. And then, drafting legislation and issuing executive orders based on the decidedly unsettled science.
For example: Officially approving the release and sale of medical drugs (“safe and effective”) which go on to kill, at a conservative estimate, 100,000 Americans every year. And then refusing to investigate or punish the purveyors of these drug approvals (the FDA).
For example: permitting the widespread use of genetically modified food crops, based on no long-term studies of their impact on human health. And then, arbitrarily announcing that the herbicide, Roundup, for which many of these crops are specifically designed, is non-toxic.
For example: declaring and promoting the existence of various epidemics, when the viruses purportedly causing them are not proven to exist and/or not proven to cause human illness (Ebola, SARS, West Nile, Swine Flu, etc.)
A few of you reading this have been with me since 1988, when I published my first book, AIDS INC., Scandal of the Century. Among other conclusions, I pointed out that HIV had never been shown to cause human illness; the front-line drug given to AIDS patients, AZT, was overwhelmingly toxic; and what was being called AIDS was actually a diverse number immune-suppressing conditions.
Others of you have found my work more recently. I always return to the subject of false science, because it is the most powerful long-term instrument for repression, political control, and destruction of human life.
As I’ve stated on many occasions, medical science is ideal for mounting and launching covert ops aimed at populations - because it appears to be politically neutral, without any allegiance to State interests.
Unfortunately, medical science, on many fronts, has been hijacked and taken over.
The profit motive is one objective, but beyond that, there is a more embracing goal:
On the issue of vaccines, I’ve written much about their dangers and ineffectiveness. But also consider this: the push for mandatory vaccination goes a long way toward creating a herd effect - which is really a social construction.
In other words, parents are propagandized to think of themselves a kind of synthetic artificial “community.”
“Here we are. We are the fathers and mothers. We must all protect our children against the outliers, the rebels, the defectors, the crazy ones who refuse to vaccinate their own children. We are all in this together. They are the threat. The enemy. We are good. We know the truth. They are evil.”
This “community of the willing” are dedicated to what the government tells them. They are crusaders imbued with group-think. They run around promoting “safety and protection.”
This group consciousness is entirely an artifact, propelled by “official science.”
The crusaders are, in effect, agents of the State.
They are created by the State. Androids.
They live in an absurd Twilight Zone where fear of germs (the tiny invisible terrorists) demands coercive action against the individuals who see through the whole illusion.
This is what official science can achieve. This is how it can enlist obedient foot soldiers and spies who don’t have the faintest idea about how they’re being used.
This is a variant on Orwell’s 1984. The citizens are owned by the all-embracing State, but they aren’t even aware of it.
One of my favorite examples of double-think or reverse-think is the antibody test. It is given to diagnosis diseases. Antibodies are immune-system scouts sent out to identify germ-intruders, which can then be wiped out by other immune-system troops.
Prior to 1985, the prevailing view of a positive test was: The patient is doing well; his body detected the germ and dispensed with it. After 1985, the view was suddenly: This is bad news; the patient is sick or he is on the verge of getting sick; he has the germ in his body; it does harm.
Within the medical community, no one (with very few exceptions) raised hell over this massive switch. It was accepted. It was actually good for business. Now, many more people could be labeled “needs treatment,” whereas before, they would have been labeled “healthy.”
While I was writing my first book, AIDS INC., in 1987-8, I wrote the FDA asking about a possible AIDS vaccine. I was told the following: every person given such a vaccine would, of course, produce antibodies against HIV. That is the whole purpose of a vaccine: to produce antibodies.
However, I was informed, patients receiving this vaccine would be given a letter to carry with them, in case they were ever tested for HIV and came up positive. The letter would explain that the antibodies causing the positive test were the result of the vaccine, not the result of “natural” action inside the patient’s body.
In other words, the very same antibodies were either protective against AIDS (good) or indicative of deadly disease (bad).
This was the contradictory and ridiculous and extraordinary pronouncement of official science.
It carries over into every disease for which an antibody test is administered. If a vaccine against disease X is given, it delivers immunity, because it produces antibodies. But if a diagnostic test for disease X reveals the presence of the same antibodies, this is taken a sign of illness.
Extrapolated to a more general level, the Word is: synthetic medical treatment is good; the action of the body to heal itself is incompetent.
This is a type of superstition that would astonish even the most “primitive” societies.
It no longer astonishes me. I see it everywhere in official science. From the medical establishment’s point of view, being alive is a medical condition.
We are now living in a society where an incurable itch to meddle everywhere and at all times is the standard. A new definition of Reality emerges: “That which needs to be monitored and surveilled.”
Russian Scientists Build And Study Pyramids: What They Found Could Change The World October 19 2025 | From: StillnessInTheStorm / Various
The following is a compilation of articles discussing the research on pyramids by Russian Scientists and related works of other researchers there after.
Ever since I heard David Wilcock mention the Russian pyramid studies I was fascinated by this shape and how it seemed to affect reality. It is probably one of the most well recognized elements of megalithic structures, yet how these sites were constructed and what they were originally used for remains a mystery.
Dr. Volodymyr Krasnoholovets is a renowned scientist from the Institute of Physics in the Ukraine, that spent over a decade building and researching many pyramids of varying heights and proportions. The Russian government even endorsed his work, producing a 144ft tall pyramid outside of Moscow.
What he discovered is truly remarkable and has implications that could completely transform society as we know it.
Here is a brief summary of results from one of the articles below:
Immune system of organisms improved (blood leukocyte composition increased).
Improved regeneration of tissue
Seeds stored in the pyramid for 1-5 days showed a 30-100% increase in yield
Soon after construction of the Lake Seliger pyramid a marked improvement of the ozone was noted above the area
Seismic activity near the pyramid research areas are reduced in severity and size
Violent weather also appears to decrease in the vicinity of the pyramids
Pyramids constructed in Southern Russia (Bashkiria) appeared to have a positive effect on oil production with oil becoming less viscous by 30% and the yield of the oil wells increased according to tests carried out by the Moscow Academy of Oil and Gas.
A
study was done on 5000 prisoners who ingested salt and pepper that had been exposed to the pyramid energy field. The test subjects exhibited a greatly reduced violence rate and overall behavior was much improved.
Standard tissue culture tests showed an increase in survival of cellular tissue after infection by viruses and bacteria
Radioactive substances show a decreased level of radiation inside the pyramid
There are reports of spontaneous charging of capacitors
Physicists observed significant changes in superconductivity temperature thresholds and in the properties of semi-conducting and carbon nano materials.
Water inside the pyramid will remain liquid to minus 40 degrees Celsius but freeze instantly if jostled or bumped in any way
With the use of pyramids we could heal the planet from centuries of environmental pollution, vitalize once extinct plant species, heal the body and so on. These are just some of the things we've been able to verify, there are no doubt countless other uses that will be discovered once more extensive research has been done.
Here is a video with David Wilcock (who has collated a remarkable body of work on the subject of pyramid energy in his qorks) discussing the Russian pyramid research:
In January of 2001, a Dr. Volodymyr Krasnoholovets from the Institute of Physics in the Ukraine contacted me. (The Institute of Physics was considered the top military research institute of the former Soviet Union.) This institute helped develop the Russian cruise missiles, remote sensing devices, satellites, space station technology, and other military technology.
Dr. K (as we now call him) identified himself as a senior scientist at that Institute. He told me that in the last 10 years, he and his colleagues were carrying out research in 17 large fiberglass pyramids, built in 8 different locations in Russia and Ukraine. These pyramids varied in size, the largest being 144 feet high and weighing over 55 tons.
I had not been aware of these pyramids but it seemed that people from Russia knew about them. I was told that they are popular tourist attractions and many people visit them.
Dr. K sent me photos of these pyramids along with a comprehensive research article about experiments conducted in them, which he and his colleagues wrote. They asked me to post it on our web site and invited me to collaborate with them in their pyramid research.
Dr. K explained that the Russians and Ukrainians conducted many kinds of experiments using these pyramids that included such fields as medicine, ecology, agriculture, chemistry and physics. What is significant about this research is that it scientifically documents the changes in both biological and non-biological materials that occur as a result of being placed in these pyramids. So I posted their research article on our web site and subsequently appeared on several major radio programs.
Then in February of 2001, the individual who actually financed and built the pyramids in Russia and the Ukraine contacted me directly. He was Alexander Golod, a scientist and now Director of a State Defense Enterprise in Moscow. He found my web site and saw that I was releasing the research carried out in his pyramids.
Alexander does not speak English so most of our communications were carried out through his son, Anatoli. He told me that his father, Alexander, started constructing these pyramids in 1989. The Golod’s wanted to work with me also and to help publicize and continue their research.
Alexander Golod in his office in Moscow
In two month’s time, I was working with both the builders and some of the major researchers of these pyramids.
Alexander had decided to build these pyramids because he believed that they would produce an energy field that could affect biological and non-biological objects.
He even got support from the Russian government for this massive building project and convinced them in 1998 to take a kilo of rocks that had been placed in one of his pyramids on board the MIR space station.
He felt the energy fields they produced would help the space station and possibly the entire world. Let us look at these pyramids.
The largest and most recently built of the pyramids is located about 200 miles northwest of Moscow on Novorizhskoe Highway. It is 144 feet high and was completed in 1999. It weighs about 55 tons and cost over 1 million dollars to build. It is made of fiberglass.
The 144 Foot Tall Pyramid
Notice that the 144 foot tall pyramid has a sharper slope (greater acute angle) than the Great Pyramid of Giza. The Great Pyramid has a slope of about 52 degrees and these pyramids rise at about a 73-degree angle.
The reason Alexander Golod chose this angle was based on experimental designs that also included the mathematical relationship called the Golden Section.
In his prototype experiments, it was determined that no metal should be included in the structure of these pyramids, so fiberglass was chosen since it would be strong enough to also withstand the strong winds that occur in and near Moscow.
When Alexander Golod was asked why he built these pyramids, he replied:
“I have children, I have a grandson, I do it for them. These pyramids are an instrument to make the world a better place to live and benefit mankind”.
Everyone wants a photo in front of the pyramid.
People from all over Russia, including government officials, cosmonauts, and even famous Russian actresses visit this largest pyramid and spend time inside it.
Millions of people have visited this pyramid and on crowded days, you have to wait in line to enter it. Over the New Year’s weekend, they counted 20,000 people in one day.
The next largest pyramid is the 72-foot pyramid, which is located 15 km from lake Seliger (Ostashkov area of Tver region, Russia). It was completed in June of 1997.
It is exactly one half the size of the largest pyramid (144 ft). As mentioned, the design of these pyramids was based on the Golden Section, used by ancient architects to design many structures [see link below the following image].
This would dictate that the pyramid sizes must be built in ratios.
The next (third) largest pyramid is 36 feet high abd it is located in Romenskoey, which is a suburb of Moscow. This is one of the first pyramids built and where the first experiments began.
36 Foot Pyramid
A design factor common to all the pyramids that Golod built is that they must be hollow inside. This design element was determined in experiments using prototype models before the building of the large pyramids. Thus, two important conditions of construction were that the pyramids must have no metal in them and they must be hollow.
Inside the 144 foot pyramid gazing upwards
In October of 1998, crystals that were placed in one of the Russian Pyramids were brought aboard the Russian MIR space station and remained on board for over a year.
Crystals were also brought on the International Space Station for 10 days by cosmonaut Afanasiev. Alexander Golod believed that these crystals would benefit both the space stations and the world.
The Russian MIR space station being visited by a US space shuttle
Future building plans include the construction of a 288-foot pyramid (twice the size of the 144 foot pyramid). They believe that the larger the pyramid, the great the effect it produces.
Alexander Golod with Cosmonaut Georgiy Grechko and G. Lozino-Lozinskiy during construction of the largest pyramid
Soon after the construction of this pyramid near Moscow, botanists noticed extinct flowers starting to grow near it.
It is unknown why this has happened and has mystified botanists.
One of the most interesting observations regarding these pyramids comes from Russian Air Force “Radar” (or “Locator” as they call it).
The first indication that the pyramids were producing strange atmospheric effects was when the 144 foot or largest pyramid was in the process of being built.
The planned pyramid would be composed of 30 main layers or sections of fiberglass.
At the completion of the 11th section, Air Force radar picked up an ion column coming right off the pyramid.
This ion column was very large and in fact was over 1 mile high.
As the pyramid construction continued, the ion column still remained.
At the completion of the pyramid, a special weather balloon was launched to measure this ion column.
The results will be discussed in the next chapter. Construction phases of the 144-foot pyramid.
The image to the left shows the first 11 layers of the 30 completed of the 144-foot pyramid.
Pyramid Research
I read with great interest the report by Bovis describing his discovery of the mummifying power of the shape of the Great Pyramid.
Having been experimenting and measuring bio-energy with the Neurophone and various other instruments described earlier, I began a series of intensive experiments on the shape of the Great Pyramid to see if I could discover its great secrets.
I began by duplicating Bovis’ experiments with pyramids of various dimensions. Using Kirlian photography, GSR, voltage differential, and electrostatic fields, I was able to measure the differences of various pyramids and their effects on living organisms such as plants and people.
The very first experiments were in the area of preserving hamburger meat, liver, eggs, and milk. The first experiments were very encouraging.
It was strange to realize I had taken small pieces of cardboard and made a simple shape that could concentrate some sort of energy that would mummify food without any external power source. My controls all got so bad I had to throw them away.
Bovis and Drbal had indicated in their reports that the energy was focused in the King’s Chamber level bout one third up from the base in the middle of the pyramid.
My own research indicates that the energy is present throughout the pyramid. I was able to mummify food anywhere in the pyramid.
By careful measurement, I was able to determine that the maximum concentration of effect was in the King’s Chamber, but there were effects in the other areas of the whole pyramid.
Further research with various materials of construction revealed further clues as to the nature of the phenomenon we were investigating.
A series of energy measuring machines will be described. Some of these machines measure the effects of the energy on other things, others are esoteric machines which are extremely sophisticated dowsing devices that rely on the human computer as a readout detector.
I have tried various other geometric shapes other than the pyramid and have not had the results obtained with the exact shape of the Pyramid of Gizeh.
Other geometric structures such as cones, icosahedrons, dodecahedrons, tetrahedrons, octahedrons, greater stellated dodecahedrons, etc. all have shape characteristics, but these other shapes do not have any effects demonstrated by the exact pyramid shape to be described.
Pyramid Research Projects
As a result of preliminary research, I began a series of serious research projects on the pyramid itself.
The following is a list of pyramids in tabular form:
The dimensions are based on the exact dimensions of the Pyramid of Gizeh. These are some of the dimensions of pyramids used in my experimental work.
Based on the fact that the Pyramid of Gizeh is the only pyramid in the world that is ventilated, I have also experimented with pyramids with windows in the sides. The windows are holes up to 1/3 of the base length in diameter. The holes do not detract from the function and seem to actually aid the processes going on inside the structure.
The pyramids were made of various materials including cardboard, wood, plaster, Plexiglas, steel, copper, aluminum, cement and combinations of the above materials.
The materials used did not affect the results very much, however the size and orientation was of primary importance. I at first believed the pyramid to work best when it was aligned to true north, however, after very careful research, I discovered the best alignment to be magnetic north, contrary to the alignment of the Great Pyramid.
This leads me to believe the Great Pyramid was built at a time when the earth’s field was aligned to the polar axis. It is not unusual for the poles to shift.
At the time of the writing of this paper, the earth’s magnetic poles are shifting at a rate of 17 feet per month.
In the duplication of Bovis’ experiments, many perishable food items were tried in the pyramids of various shapes and sizes, of different materials, and different orientations, and in different locations in the pyramid itself. The results of these experiments indicate that the best alignment is according to the magnetic axis.
An experiment to determine the validity of this theory was performed by the use of an external permanent magnetic field. This is illustrated in Figure XVI below.
Testing the effects of external magnetic fields on the pyramid
The pyramid was a six inch base cardboard one. The magnets are 5 inch alnico, the fields are on the order of 300 Gauss. With the system described, I was able to get mummification of the foodstuffs with ANY alignment of the set, as long as the pyramid itself was aligned to the magnetic fields as shown. The tables regarding the various food experiments are given in my earlier paper, The Pyramid and Its Relationship to Biocosmic Energy.
My contribution to the field in food mummification is in the discovery that the pyramid will preserve food in any part of the structure as well as in the King’s Chamber as reported by Bovis.
Razor Blades
In the duplication of Drbal’s razor blade sharpener, the following discoveries were made:
Whereas Drbal theorized the crystal structure of the blade reformed, I believe the pyramid prevents a dulling effect due to contamination of the surface by skin oils and acids as well as the chemicals in shaving creams and soaps. I shaved over 200 times with the blade treated in the pyramid.
I also shaved an equal number of times with another blade by rinsing my razor out in pure deionized distilled water after every shave. My razors normally go bad in three or four shaves. There may also be a sharpening effect of a sort by the action of energy discharge from the sharp edges of the blade.
It is well known that any sharp object charged with any energy, whether magnetic, electromagnetic, or electric tends to concentrate and discharge from sharp surfaces and points when placed in a charged system.
From this point on, the experiments to be described are entirely the results of my own discoveries in the field.
Effects of Pyramid Energy on Living Organisms
The effects on the pyramid were tested on plants and human subjects. Measurement of changes in the organism were made by means of Kirlian photography, GSR measurements of acupuncture points, Alpha wave detectors, and subjective responses.
Kirlian Measurements
Kirlian photography ia a technique for recording photographic images of corona discharges and hence, the auras of living creatures.The Kitlian photography images below are representative but not part of the actual studies described in this article.
Several hundred photographs were made of fingerprints and leaves before and after treatment with the pyramid.
Photographs were taken in both color and black and white. The color photographs are particularly striking as they show changes in color as well as changes in brilliance and bioplasmic structure.
The aura or band of energy around the finger is rounder and larger than the aura in the first photo. The fact that the energy content of the picture is larger and the shape is more rounded indicated an increase in aura without any loss of energy.
A more dramatic effect was obtained with a geranium leaf. The leaf had been off the plant for half an hour when the first photo was taken.
The energy field was almost completely gone as the leaf was dying. The best results were obtained when the pyramids were set up outside the building. The reason for this will be described in the next section on theory.
The Kirlian technique can be used to obtain an instant measure of the result of various energy techniques such as Yoga breathing, meditation, and the effects of foods such as natural vs. chemically grown, alcohol vs. Ginseng, ozone vs. oxygen, etc.
Subjective Reports
Several hundred people have sat in the 6 foot base plastic pyramids. The tests were first run on friends who were asked to sit in the pyramid for half an hour and then asked to describe their feelings when they were in the structure. The subjects were given no indication of what to expect.
In all cases, the subjects reported intense heat in the body and a tingling sensation in the hands.
A number of people decided they wanted pyramids of their own. My own body energy has increased since I began sleeping in the pyramid tent. An effect reported by many is a sense of time distortion.
One subject sat in the pyramid for 4 hours and had the subjective impression that 1/2 hour had passed. It had been stated by alpha researchers that a person in the alpha state loses all sense of time and space. This correlates with observed alpha activity in the pyramid.
Meditation
Many of the subjects were interested in psychic phenomena and practice various forms of meditation. ALL subjects who practice meditation have reported a significant increase in the effects of meditation in the pyramid.
This correlates with the theory that the Great Pyramid was built as a meditation chamber to develop psychic powers [although it seems now that there are multiple uses for pyramids].
Animals
No extensive tests have been conducted on animals at this time. There are however, three cases of interest.
A friend of mine placed his pet cat in a pyramid once a day for 1/2 hour. The cat liked the pyramid and began to sleep in it. When the test was begun, the cat had been a voracious meat eater.
After 6 weeks, the cat stopped eating meat and starved rather than eat meat. Subsequent tests indicated that the cat had changed his diet and would only eat fruit and vegetables, cheese and nuts. The animal became a vegetarian! He ate raw vegetables and fruits of all descriptions; canteloupe, avocado, oranges, and watermelon. The same thing happened to another cat as well as my own poodle.
Growth of Plants
A series of tests were run on the effects of pyramid treatments on the growth rate of plants. The test plants were alfalfa sprouts. I had some familiarity with sprouts as I had grown over 2500 pounds of them in the confines of my office!
The sprouts were treated three different ways:
1. treatment of feed water;
2. direct treatment of the plant in the pyramid;
3. treatment of the seed in the pyramid.
In all cases, identical tests were made in an identical volume cubic box as a control structure.
In all cases, the pyramid treated plants grew 2 to 3 times as fast as the controls, were more healthy and lasted longer after harvest.
One California grape farmer used my system on his irrigation system and his grape yield was 2-1/2 times the average yield of his neighbors and the California average.
Water Treatment
The water may be treated in several ways.
It may be placed in the pyramid in a container for a period of time depending on the size of the pyramid and the amount of water treated. I used a 2 foot base pyramid and treated a quart bottle for 1/2 hour.
Another technique is to run water into a spiral coil placed in the pyramid and fashioned into a form of fountain.
Direct Treatment of Sprouts
The pyramid used was a one foot base unit made of clear plexiglass. Four inch holes were cut in the sides for full ventilation. The sprouts were grown entirely in the pyramid.
The controls were grown entirely in a well ventilated equal volume cube.
Treatment of Seeds
The seeds were placed in pyramid for 8 hours.
Results
The water and plant treatments were best, the seed treatment was last. The pyramid grown sprouts lasted over a week without spoilage after harvesting.
The controls on the other hand lasted 24 to 36 hours before spoilage.
Dehydration
Because of the dehydration or mummification of foods in the pyramid, I tried a number of experiments to see if the dehydration rate is accelerated in the pyramid. It is not.
Normal dehydration occurs, the difference being that items placed in the pyramid do not decay while dehydrating. Sprouts grown in the pyramid and left without water 24 hours do not die and decay as the controls do. The controls developed odor and died.
The sprouts in the pyramid dehydrated slightly but did not decay and resumed normal growth when watering was resumed.
Short Term Effects On Foods, Change of Taste
During my original tests on mummification of foods, I used to taste the foods being treated to make sure they were really good. Although there was no sign of decay, I wanted to see how the food tasted as it was undergoing the process of mummification.
I was in for a great surprise! Not only did the foods taste good, they tasted better than they did before they were placed in the structure!
I began experimenting in earnest, and discovered that the pyramid could have an effect on the taste of food even when the food was treated for a surprisingly short duration. I was so impressed by this new discovery that I began a series of double blind tests on the change of taste in foods.
I used several dozen people, and the test was conducted as follows: The foods were all taken from the same source, that is the foods tested were the same food divided in half so the control would be the same as the treated sample except for the treatment.
The samples were then placed in paper cups with numbers on the bottoms. The cups were then divided and recorded in a master file. The ones chosen for the pyramid were then treated for five minutes in the pyramid. The pyramid used for the tests was the 6 inch base ventilated.
The cups of food were then all mixed at random so no one knew which food was which. Taste tests were conducted and 40 out of 48 people chose the foods treated in the pyramid as being more to their liking.
I like hundred percent results, so I interviewed the ones who missed on some of the foods and learned they were either heavy smokers or drinkers. Subsequent interviews with a licensed wine taster confirmed my suspicions that people with certain eating and drinking habits cannot distinguish taste very well.
The foods tested were of all types; sweet, sour, various alcohols, fruits, and tobaccos:
Bitter and sour foods lose their bite, they become milder.
Sweet foods become sweeter.
Coffee loses its bitterness and tastes as if it were acid free.
Fruits increase in their qualities.
Acid tasting pineapple loses its acid taste and becomes as sweet as fresh ripe pineapple picked right out of the field.
Tobacco loses its harshness: Mexican black tobacco loses its harshness and tastes like mild choice Virginia. The most dramatic effects occurred on pipe tobacco, unfiltered cigarettes, and cigars.
One of my associates smokes a very harsh unfiltered brand and uses a crystal type filter cigarette holder. When his cigarettes were treated in the pyramid, he noticed he did not have to change his filter crystal so often. Instead of changing it between every pack, he now has to change it after every three or four packs.
People who had whole cartons of their brands treated with the pyramid came back wanting their new cigarettes treated because they could not stand the harsh taste of their normal brand after smoking pyramid treated cigarettes.
Bananas and other perishables keep longer if they are treated in the pyramid for half an hour after they are purchased.
Controls all turned bad in a short time, and the fruits treated in the pyramids kept fresh up to twice as long as the controls.
Cut flowers take longer to die if they are placed in pyramid treated water. Speaking of water, tests were run on the taste of regular city water treated in the pyramid. The water used to water the plants.
All people who made the tests noticed the pyramid water tasted fresher and had less of a chemical or chlorine taste than the water which was untreated.
To recap; Dr. Alexander Golod, PhD. has been doing Russian pyramid research in the former Soviet Union since 1990. This research involved the construction of over twenty large pyramids in 8 different locations in Russia and the Ukraine.
The pyramids were built in many places including Moscow, Astrakhan, Sochi, Zoporozhye, Voronezh, Belgorod, the Tver Region, Krasnodar, Tolyatti, Uzbekistan, and France.
All the Russian pyramids are made of fiberglass with the largest standing an incredible 144 feet high (44 meters) tall, and weighing in at over 55 tons. Built at cost over 1 million dollars this Russian pyramid is a modern wonder.
Many different experiments are being done using these pyramids. They include studies in medicine, ecology, agriculture, physics, and health sciences. What is significant about this work is that it is being carried out by top scientists in Russia and Ukraine and not fringe elements or unknown inventors.
Some of the amazing pyramid power research being done is showing great promise for all mankind.
A Brief Summary of Pyramid Research Results:
Immune system of organisms improved (blood leukocyte composition increased).
Improved regeneration of tissue
Seeds stored in the pyramid for 1-5 days showed a 30-100% increase in yield
Soon after construction of the Lake Seliger pyramid a marked improvement of the ozone was noted above the area
Seismic activity near the pyramid research areas are reduced in severity and size
Violent weather also appears to decrease in the vicinity of the pyramids
Pyramids constructed in Southern Russia (Bashkiria) appeared to have a positive effect on oil production with oil becoming less viscous by 30% and the yield of the oil wells increased according to tests carried out by the Moscow Academy of Oil and Gas.
A study was done on 5000 prisoners who ingested salt and pepper that had been exposed to the pyramid energy field. The test subjects exhibited a greatly reduced violence rate and overall behavior was much improved.
Standard tissue culture tests showed an increase in survival of cellular tissue after infection by viruses and bacteria
Radioactive substances show a decreased level of radiation inside the pyramid
There are reports of spontaneous charging of capacitors
Physicists observed significant changes in superconductivity temperature thresholds and in the properties of semi-conducting and carbon nano materials.
Water inside the pyramid will remain liquid to minus 40 degrees Celsius but freeze instantly if jostled or bumped in any way
It is interesting to note that results seem to show that increasing the height of the pyramid improves the quality of the results.
Small Russian pyramid complex
So, as you can see from this brief introduction, there is much we have to learn about the natural forces around us.
The Egyptians [et al] knew some of this when they designed the great pyramids at Giza.
However, with modern scientific research techniques it is now becoming possible to gain even more insight and benefit from “Russian Pyramid Power!”
I will, along with others, be conducting personal experiments using scaled down models of these amazing pyramids.
Keep An Even Keel And Your Hand Upon The Wheel October 18 2025 | From:ZenGardner/ Various
It’s a pretty difficult time to navigate that we’re in. The news, views and constant spews are bad enough, but the underlying energetic changes that are hitting us are enormous.
Take the ride gracefully and trust inside yourself. Very profound changes are happening at very deep levels within each of us while all this is playing out on the surface. Let it happen. You’ll be fine, as long as you let it happen and operate from the heart.
But keep your hand upon the wheel.
A Time to Morph
Changes aren’t always easy. Some we accept willingly and others “not so much”. Transition is a moving from one place to another, often implying leaving constructs, unhealthy dependencies and things behind in order to make the leap before us. That’s how it works.
Let go, and go. It’s very simple yet the implications can seem catastrophic. That’s only because of our world view, and most of all our attachments. Attachments to things we think are inseparable from ourselves, or seemingly essential to our existence.
All bollocks. Just let go. Change is an evolving process based on one decision, one choice at a time. As we let go, the new manifests. But I agree, it’s not that easy.
Keeping An Even Keel
Despite these challenges, as well as because of them, we’re compelled to consciously man the helm of our lives as we attempt to maintain control of the ship. At the very least we have to navigate and stay on the look out. “Hey, there are reefs out there and there are calmer seas over there – turn the ship!”
But that’s just the fundamental damage control mode. Real conscious steering keeps in mind the overall direction of the ship even during storms, internal turmoil, and external calamities. There’s a time to use and ride the waves and tides, and a time to exert our will on this mystic, morphic sea.
Both are essential, and finding the balance between, when to execute control and when to let it ride, could be considered a definition of our mission here in this life, something we’re forced to master in these shifting, surging seas.
And again, that’s a good thing. We’re growing into who we truly are.
The Control Dilemma
Taking control is not something we’re used to. We’ve been directed, corralled and channeled almost all of our lives with very little exertion of personal will in the grand scheme of things. Our economy and social structures are already determined, our personalities and attitudes molded by predetermined forces, and our environment is already formulated and controlled.
There’s not a whole lot left with which to move freely about this life as we’ve been repeatedly promised since our options were castrated before we had any choice. The influences are too long to list, but we’re slowly getting it as we continue to wake up, one step against the storm after the other.
Maintaining an even keel is no small task. So much is battering us but maintain it we must. Something very deep arises within each of us during all of this and that’s the birthing process.
The warrior arises – the soul comes alive – and this is the awakening. The answer we’ve all longed for – and it’s within each and every one of us. Steer on – in love, faith and heart felt confidence.
Dear Western Peoples; There Is No Freedom Without Truth October 17 2025 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various
Dwight D. Eisenhower was a five-star general in charge of the Normandy Invasion and a popular two-term President of the United States. Today he would be called a “conspiracy theorist.”
Related: The Atlantic Council: The Marketing Arm Of The Military / Security Complex
Were Ike to be issuing his warning from the White House today, conservative Republicans like Senators Lindsey Graham (R-SC) and Marco Rubio (R-FL) would be screaming at Ike for impugning the motives of “the patriotic industry that protects our freedom.”
“This conjunction of an immense military establishment and a large arms industry is new in the American experience. The total influence - economic, political, even spiritual - is felt in every city, every statehouse, every office of the federal government. We recognize the imperative need for this development.
Yet we must not fail to comprehend its grave implications. Our toil, resources and livelihood are all involved; so is the very structure of our society. In the councils of government, we must guard against the acquisition of unwarranted influence, whether sought or unsought, by the military–industrial complex.
The potential for the disastrous rise of misplaced power exists, and will persist.
We must never let the weight of this combination endanger our liberties or democratic processes. We should take nothing for granted.
Only an alert and knowledgeable citizenry can compel the proper meshing of the huge industrial and military machinery of defense with our peaceful methods and goals so that security and liberty may prosper together.”
-
President Dwight D. Eisenhower
Comment: Eisenhower was a card-carrying member of the cabal, but the statements he made in later years such as the on above indicate that he had reconsidered his actions and was trying to issue a warning.
Dwight D. Eisenhower was a five-star general in charge of the Normandy Invasion and a popular two-term President of the United States. Today he would be called a “conspiracy theorist.”
Were Ike to be issuing his warning from the White House today, conservative Republicans like Senators Lindsey Graham (R-SC) and Marco Rubio (R-FL) would be screaming at Ike for impugning the motives of “the patriotic industry that protects our freedom.”
Neoconservatives such as William Kristol would be demanding to know why President Eisenhower was issuing warnings about our own military-industrial complex instead of warning about the threat presented by the Soviet military.
The presstitute media would be implying that Ike was going a bit senile in his old age, a tactic the presstitutes used against President Reagan as he struggled to end stagflation and the Cold War.
By January 17, 1961, when Eisenhower issued his warning in his farewell address to the American People, it was already too late.
Cold Warriors had had their hooks into the American taxpayer for 15 years after the end of WW II, and the military-industrial complex had replaced “mom and apple pie” as the most venerated and entrenched US interest. The Dulles brothers ran the State Department and CIA and overthrew governments at will. (Read The Brothers)
The military-industrial complex had learned that regardless of the protestations of high-ranking military officers, no cost-overrun, no matter how egregious, went unpaid. Armaments industries and military bases were spread all over the country and were important considerations for every senator and many congressional districts.
The chairmen of House and Senate military appropriations subcommittees and armed services committees were already dependent on campaign contributions from the military-industrial complex and for cushy jobs should they lose an election.
The Cold War was a profitable business that served many, and that is why it lasted so long.
Not to be too literal, the cold war was not all about Siberia, of course
There was never any threat of the Red Army invading Europe. Stalin declared “socialism in one country” and purged the Communist Party of the Trotskyist element that preached world revolution. An accommodation could have been reached, except that for the first time ever the military-industrial complex saw that it could keep the war business going for decades and perhaps forever.
George F. Kennan predicted that should the Soviet Union “sink tomorrow under the waters of the ocean;
”Another adversary would have to be invented. Anything else would be an unacceptable shock to the American economy.”
When the Soviet Union collapsed in 1991, the “Soviet threat” was replaced with the “Muslim threat” and the “War on Terror” took over from the Cold War. Despite a succession of false flag attacks and warnings of a “thirty years war,” a few thousand lightly armed jihadists were an insufficient replacement for the Soviet Union and its thousands of nuclear ICBMs.
It was an uncomfortable notion that the “world’s only superpower” could not dispose of a few [manufactured] terrorists.
So we are back to the Cold War with Russia. The propaganda is fast and furious.
“Putin is the new Hitler.”
“Russia invaded Ukraine.”
"Russia is about to invade the Baltics and Poland.”
“Putin is a corrupt multi-billionaire.”
“Putin is scheming to recreate the Soviet Union.”
Comment: Nothing but crybaby Khazarian Nazi Zionist Mafia tantrum rhetoric - because they are being taken down and they know it - and now everyone can see it.
Vladimir Putin has called; end exposed the corrupt Western faux 'leadership' for who and what they are.
The accusations made towards Putin became headlines despite US military spending being a dozen or more times higher than Russian military spending and the Russian government expressing no hegemonic aspirations.
Eisenhower’s sucessor, John F. Kennedy, realized that the military-security complex was a threat, but he underestimated the threat and paid for it with his life when he stood up to the military-security complex.
In stating this fact I have joined Eisenhower as a conspiracy theorist. (For a hair-raising account of the threat posed to President Kennedy by General Lyman Lemnitzer, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, read chapter three in Richard Cottrell’s book, Gladio, NATO’s Dagger at the Heart of Europe.)
Conspiracies are real. There are many more of them than people are aware.
Many government conspiracies are heavily documented by governments themselves with the official records demonstrating the conspiracies openly available to the public. Just google, for example, Operation Gladio or the Northwoods Project. These conspiracies alone are sufficient to chastise those uninformed Western peoples who go around saying;
”Our government would never kill its own people.”
Perhaps Russian studies provided my introduction to government conspiracies against their own people. I learned that the Tsar’s secret police set off bombs and killed people in order to blame and arrest labor agitators. I was skeptical of this account and wondered if it was a reflection of left-wing bias against Tsarist Russia.
Some years later I asked my colleague, Robert Conquest, at the Hoover Institution at Stanford University if the account was true. He replied that the story is true as is known from the released secret police files that are part of the Hoover Institution’s archives.
False flag attacks are used by governments in order to pursue secret agendas that they cannot publicly acknowledge. If President George W. Bush and Vice President Dick Cheney had said:
”We are going to attack Iraq and a half dozen other countries in order to exercise hegemony over the Middle East, steal their oil, and clear the path for Israel to steal the entirety of the West Bank of Palestine, diverting taxpayers’ resources from serving the American people into the pockets of the armaments industries and spilling the blood of your parents, spouses, children, and siblings, even the American sheeple would have resisted."
Instead, following the famous advice of Hitler’s chief propagandist, they said:
“Our country has been attacked!”
Generally speaking, an observant person with a bit of education can recognize a false flag attack.
However, few people pay attention beyond what the official media says, and the media no longer investigates and questions but simply repeats the official story. Therefore, only a few realize what has really happened, and when these few open their mouths they are discredited as “conspiracy theorists.”
This method of control might be wearing thin. There have been so many false flag “terrorist attacks” in the 21st century that there are now thousands of experts labeled as “conspiracy theorist.”
For example, the 9/11 Truth Movement consists of thousands of high rise architects, structural engineers, demolition experts, nano-chemists, physicists, firefighters and first responders, civilian and military pilots, and former high government officials.
Collectively these experts represent far more knowledge and experience than the 9/11 Commission, which did nothing but write down whatever the government told the commission, NIST, a collection of people whose incomes and careers depend on the government, and the presstitutes who can barely manage arithemetic, much less the mathematics of controlled demolition.
The neoconservatives, who conrolled the George W. Bush regime, called for a “New Pearl Harbor” so that they could begin their wars of conquest in the Middle East.
A “New Pearl Harbor” is what 9/11 gave them. Was this a coincidence or a Gulf of Tonkin or a Reichstag fire or a Tzarist secret police or Operation Gladio bomb?
The charge, “conspiracy theory,” is used to prevent investigation.
9/11 was not investigated. Indeed, as many experts have pointed out, there was a conscious effort to remove and destroy the evidence before it could be investigated. The 9/11 families had to lobby and protest for a solid year before the Bush regime consented to the totally controlled 9/11 Commission.
The Boston Marathon Bombing was not investigated. A scripted story was issued and repeated by the media. The San Bernardino shootings were not investigated. Again, a pre-scripted story took the place of investigation.
The success of false flag attacks in the US led to their use in the UK and France. The Charlie Hebdo affair was not investigated and the official explanation makes no sense. The story has been closed with all the loose ends dangling.
For example, why did a French police official investigating the crime allegedly commit suicide in his police office in the early hours of the morning, and why was his family denied the autopsy report? What happened to this disappeared story?
Why did the police finger a third participant in the attack as the “getaway driver” who had an iron clad alibi? If the police were so totally wrong about this member of the gang, how do we know they are right about the two men they shot to death.
How come alleged perpetrators of “terrorist attacks” are always killed before they can talk?
How come the only story we ever get is what the government says? How can people be so gullible after the Gulf of Tonkin, Operation Gladio, etc.?
Apparently the Charlie Hebdo attack was insufficient for the purpose, and now France has had what is called “the Paris attack,” an even more unbelievable event, evidence for which is missing.
Twenty-four of these contributors do not believe the official story. Does this make them “conspiracy theorists,” or does this make them brave souls who are concerned that Reichstag fire type events are replacing Western civil liberty with fascist police states?
Ask yourself, why are those trying to preserve liberty denounced?
What incentive does contributor A.K. Dewdney, Professor Emeritus at the University of Western Ontario, author of ten books about science and mathematics, have to be a conspiracy theorist?
What incentive does Philip Giraldi, former CIA case officer and Executive Director of the Council for the National Interest, have to be a conspiracy theorist?
What incentive does Anthony Hall, Professor of Globalization Studies at the University of Lethbridge in Alberta, Canada, whose latest book has been endorsed by the American Library Association as “a scholarly tour de force,” have to be a conspiracy theorist?
What incentive does Mujahid Kamran, Vice Chancellor of Punjab University, Lahore, Pakistan, a Fulbright Scholar and recipient of numerous awards, have to be a conspiracy theorist?
What incentive does Stephen Lendman, syndicated columnist and host on the Progressive Radio News Hour, have to be a conspiracy theorist?
What incentive does James Petras, Bartle Professor of Sociology at Binghamton University, have to be a conspiracy theorist?
What incentive does Alain Soral, one of France’s public intellectuals, have to be a conspiracy theorist?
What incentive does Robert David Steele, former CIA Clandestine Services Officer, have to be a conspiracy theorist?
The neocons’ whores in the Western media who call these people “conspiracy theorists” are so stupid and unintelligent as to be unqualified to express any opinion.
Dear Western Peoples, if you wish to be able to walk down the streets of your cities without being accosted by police, demanded to present identity papers, searched, detained indefinitely or assassinated without due process of law, if you wish to be able to express your opinion about “your” government and its use of your tax payments, if you wish to be able to discuss current affairs or your personal affairs without being recorded by the NSA or the equivalent in your own country or by both, if you wish to be able to act on your moral conscience and to protest the violence the West applies to Muslims and others unfavored by powerful Western interests, such as Palestinians, if you wish to live in the freedom that was achieved in the West after centuries of struggle, wake up, find time from less meaningful pursuits to become aware of what is being stolen from you. It is late in the game.
If you do not stand up for truth, you will have no freedom as there is no freedom without truth.
Hidden Truths About The Mainstream News Media October 16 2025 | From: Sott / Various
There is a growing trend of skepticism on the internet right now as people start to call out mainstream media for its honesty (or rather, lack thereof).
It's an important move for people in general, as there are good reasons to question the talking heads that are gifted with such a reach and influence, via a brand whose survival is based upon getting and keeping your attention.
To give someone, or some brand, the authority to tell you what is true, is one of the greatest mistakes a human being can make. Here's why.
Yes, of course, I know I'm about to tell you how to think in this article, being written on a brand you recognize, that survives on getting and keeping your attention. But at least I'm honest about that. I'm not going to attempt to prove that I know everything about every newsroom on the planet. I can only tell you about some of the common things that I have seen, in the newsrooms I have been in.
I worked in television news for 10 years from 2004 to 2015, working for primarily the finance channel of Canada, Business News Network, and since 2011, the now-deceased Sun News Network, which was an attempt at a conservative slanted broadcast in the Canadian market. It was called the 'Fox News North' by many critics, and rightfully so, to some degree.
Through this career, and especially at Sun News Network, I was privy to many off-camera conversations which really helped me see through the illusory idea that, just because you're on TV, you know what you're talking about. In fact, I grew terrified to keep producing it for that reason.
Here's the first thing that many people don't truly understand about the news media. It is biased to those that fund it.
There were many times when we were forced to cut an advertisement or cut a story or remove something from the website because an advertiser didn't want to be associated with it and, as a result, our financial livelihoods were threatened.
TV is literally at the mercy of those that fund it because it's a business. TV, as it is, has no other way to survive except for advertising revenue, which depends on getting and keeping your attention. In effect, news media is a marketing tool for advertisers, and its content is sometimes designed to match the next best product coming out of these advertisers.
The second thing that many people don't really respect is that TV and mainstream news are almost always tied to political or religious agendas. Whether Liberal or Conservative, Republican or Democrat, there are news media outlets designed to serve the flavor of the person watching. This essentially means that the same story will be told two distinctly different ways, to match the audience watching.
This means that the concept of non-media-bias is irrelevant in 2016. The moral idea of non-bias reporting has been thrown out, necessarily, because TV survives off money and that money often comes from large companies who are funding certain political sides, who require their side to win.
News isn't about news anymore, it's a marketing tool for politicians and larger corporations looking to buy votes through fear and buy customers with stupidity.
I can't count the number of times I saw story after story being put out about how bad things are in the world, only to see the supporting political party start to speak about how they are going to solve these issues.
It's like walking up to someone and throwing coffee on them, staining their shirt, knowing full well that your buddy next to you has a shirt to sell to them. It's easy to win an election when you've already primed the people to believe in what you're saying, without ever saying it.
The third thing that plagues the news media is sensationalism, and headlines that polarize audiences. It's important to 'tell it like it is and report the facts,' but often these facts are not fact checked enough and headlines get published that are later apologized for.
One of my favorite games is to re-read the news to tell what actually happened, without the extra, juicy details. As an example, this headline - 'Councillors reject salary freeze for themselves' - could really be read as 'Councillors reject salary freeze.'
Once you start taking out all of the descriptors and judgments, you realise that the world is a lot simpler to look at.
Media can easily make us believe that we should judge each other. I've seen this firsthand. Once you see, hear, or read something enough times, you start to think it's actually true. The truth is, by taking out the judgments, we can re-engage our curiosity instead of instantly activating our condemnation and resentment towards each other and the world.
However, the media is again kept alive by your attention, and the fact is, most of us will pay more attention to things that make us hate than we will pay attention to things that make us love. The media knows this, and it's playing you like a violin, if you're paying attention.
The fourth thing that occurs, almost daily, in the newsrooms is that people are constantly shifting roles. Yesterday, John (as an example) is an expert on social media.
Today, John is now an expert on terrorism, since 8am this morning, and yet, even though John has no expertise in this field whatsoever, he's given the credibility of people who can't see the truth behind the camera. Or in another example, we'll hear from the financial executive coming to tell you how to invest your stocks despite having a bottle of Jack Daniels in his coat pocket and who is himself losing money behind the scenes.
This is a huge challenge in our culture, in my perception, and I'm glad it's slowly being called out. Giving power to a talking head who hates his or her life just as much as you, has no interest in anyone else's well-being except their own, and especially doesn't care about you, and who isn't truly doing what they really love or want to do, is delusional.
Why would you pay attention to the lives of others who don't have your life's best interests in mind? This is like going to a 10 times divorcee for advice on how to stay in a marriage.
And with that said, the fifth thing is that news media rarely actually matters in your life. With all honesty, what does the life of Jian Ghomeshi, for example, have to do with you? Does it really matter to you to know that Miley Cyrus moved in with her boyfriend? Does knowing these things actually help you live a better life?
If there's one thing I am certain of it's this - the more successful you are, the less you care about the lives of anyone except those that you serve, because you're too busy caring about your customers to care about people who aren't invested in your well being. My advice is this:
Reword the headlines so that you see the facts, simply, without editorially presented emotion or judgment. This can keep you from adopting the judgments of someone who might have a life fulfillment level that's way worse than yours.
Never take what is said as the full truth. Investigate for yourself what's really happening and see both sides.
Pay attention to what actually matters to you. If you want to be successful, start paying attention to your own life.
Start telling your own evening news about what you accomplished today. Get interested in yourself and your experience here on this planet, with the time you have. This is the only way to keep yourself sane and out of the clutches of those who want to manipulate your mind for their interests.
Watch only what inspires you and helps you live and express your true calling. It's your choice to watch a worldview that's distorted by distorted people, or engage in creating a worldview that inspires you to act in it. Just because there are 'perceived problems' in the world, doesn't mean you don't have a role in doing something in it.
Cancer Industry Now Admits That Chemo And Radiation Treatments Generate Huge Repeat Business & Repeat Profits October 15 2025 | From: NaturalNews / Various
Second cancers are on the rise in the United States, according to a new study, which found that one in five new cases involve someone who has had the disease before.
The study also found that second cancers, which don’t include reoccurring cancers, but are a completely new type of cancer, have increased 300 percent since the 1970s.
The Western world of medicine is going with their usual explanation, or rather lack thereof, claiming that they are unaware of the reason for the surge but pointing to the fact that people are living longer and are therefore more at risk for the disease. But living into your 80s and 90s shouldn’t guarantee that you’ll get cancer.
While genetics are a factor, other influences such as your environment, the food you eat, the water you drink, the air you breathe, the vaccines you inject and even the kind of medical treatment you receive may contribute much more than your age when it comes to determining your risk for cancer.
Emerging research continues to show that pesticides, heavy metals and hormone mimickers such as BPA and BPS, as well as other environmental contaminants, greatly influence the risk of developing cancer.
A document [PDF] by the American Cancer Society titled “Second Cancers in Adults” admits that second cancers may be caused by cancer treatment.
“Radiation therapy was recognized as a potential cause of cancer many years ago,” according to the ACS, which also admits that most types of leukemia, including acute myelogenous leukemia (AML), chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML) and acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL), can all be caused by radiation.
Most cancers caused by radiation therapy develop within just a few years of being irradiated, with the disease peaking at five to nine years following exposure.
Similarly, chemotherapy drugs have also been linked to different kinds of second cancers, with the most common being myelodysplastic syndrome (MDS) and AML; ALL has also been linked to these cancer drugs.
Cancer Drugs Cause at Least 40,000 Cases of New Cancer each Year in the U.S.
Aside from radiation and chemotherapy, other causes include toxins present in tobacco smoke, and high levels of industrial-type chemicals such as benzene, a carcinogenic petrochemical that is widely used in plastics, synthetic fibers, rubber lubricants, resins, dyes, detergents, drugs and pesticides.
This means that at least 40,000 cancer occurrences may be directly attributed to cancer drugs.
Determining how many people perish from cancer drugs is extremely difficult, as most of the deaths are recorded as being from cancer, and not the treatment.
Remember, the cancer industry is one of the world’s most lucrative businesses, generating $100 billion last year. Those profits are expected to increase at about 8 percent each year over the next three years as more and more Americans will be diagnosed and treated for cancer.
Economics professor Richard Werner – who created the concept of quantitative easing – has documented that central banks intentionally impoverish their host countries to justify economic and legal changes which allow looting by foreign interests.
"The EU should have the power to police and interfere in member states’ national budgets.
...
I am certain, if we want to restore confidence in the eurozone, countries will have to transfer part of their sovereignty to the European level.
...
Several governments have not yet understood that they lost their national sovereignty long ago. Because they ran up huge debts in the past, they are now dependent on the goodwill of the financial markets."
What about America’s central bank… the Federal Reserve? Initially – contrary to what many Americans believe – the Federal Reserve had admitted that it is not really federal.
But – even if it’s not part of the government – hasn’t the Fed acted in America’s interest? Let’s have a look …
Bailed out foreign banks … more than Main Street or the American people. The foreign banks bailed out by the Fed include Gaddafi’s Libyan bank, the Arab Banking Corp. of Bahrain, and the Banks of Bavaria and Korea
Threw money at “several billionaires and tens of multi-millionaires”, including billionaire businessman H. Wayne Huizenga, billionaire Michael Dell of Dell computer, billionaire hedge fund manager John Paulson, billionaire private equity honcho J. Christopher Flowers, and the wife of Morgan Stanley CEO John Mack
Bailed out wealthy corporations, including hedge funds, McDonald’s and Harley-Davidson
Artificially “front-loaded an enormous [stock] market rally”. Professor G. William Domhoff demonstrated that the richest 10% own 81% of all stocks and mutual funds (the top 1% own 35%). The great majority of Americans – the bottom 90% – own less than 20% of all stocks and mutual funds. So the Fed’s effort overwhelmingly benefits the wealthiest Americans … and wealthy foreigninvestors
Is largely responsible for creating the worst inequality in world history
Turned its cheek and allowed massive fraud (which is destroying the economy). Fed chair Greenspan took the position that fraud could never happen. Fed chair Bernanke also falsely stated that the big banks receiving Tarp money were healthy when they were not
Acted as cheerleader in chief for unregulated use of derivatives at least as far back as 1999 (see thisand this), and is now backstopping derivatives loss
Allowed the giant banks to grow into mega-banks, even though most independent economists and financial experts say that the economy will not recover until the giant banks are broken up. For example, Citigroup’s former chief executive says that when Citigroup was formed in 1998 out of the merger of banking and insurance giants, Greenspan told him, “I have nothing against size. It doesn’t bother me at all”
Preached that a new bubble be blown every time the last one bursts
Had a hand in Watergate and arming Saddam Hussein, according to an economist with the U.S. House of Representatives Financial Services Committee for eleven years, assisting with oversight of the Federal Reserve, and subsequently Professor of Public Affairs at the University of Texas at Austin.
Intentionally discouraged banks from lending to Main Street, which has increased unemployment and stalled out the economy
Moreover, the Fed’s main program for dealing with the financial crisis – quantitative easing – benefits the rich and hurts the little guy, as confirmed by former high-level Fed officials, the architect of Japan’s quantitative easing program and several academic economists. Indeed, a high-level Federal Reserve official says quantitative easing is “the greatest backdoor Wall Street bailout of all time”.
Some economists called the bank bailouts which the Fed helped engineer the greatest redistribution of wealth in history.
Tim Geithner – as head of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York – was complicit in Lehman’s accounting fraud, and pushed to pay AIG’s CDS counterparties at full value, and then to keep the deal secret. And as Robert Reich notes,
Geithner was “very much in the center of the action” regarding the secret bail out of Bear Stearns without Congressional approval. William Black pointed out:
"Mr. Geithner as President of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York since October 2003, was one of those senior regulators who failed to take any effective regulatory action to prevent the crisis, but instead covered up its depth”
Indeed, the non-partisan Government Accountability Office calls the Fedcorrupt and riddled with conflicts of interest. Nobel prize-winning economist Joe Stiglitz says the World Bank would view any country which had a banking structure like the Fed as being corrupt and untrustworthy.
The former vice president at the Federal Reserve Bank of Dallas said said he worried that the failure of the government to provide more information about its rescue spending could signal corruption.
"Nontransparency in government programs is always associated with corruption in other countries, so I don’t see why it wouldn’t be here,” he said.
But aren’t the Fed and other central banks crucial to stabilize the economy?
Not necessarily… the Fed caused the Great Depression and the current economic crisis, and many economists – including several Nobel prize winning economists – say that we should end the Fed in its current form.
They also say that the Fed does not help stabilize the economy. For example:
"Thomas Sargent, the New York University professor who was announced Monday as a winner of the Nobel in economics … cites Walter Bagehot, who “said that what he called a ‘natural’ competitive banking system without a ‘central’ bank would be better…. ‘nothing can be more surely established by a larger experience than that a Government which interferes with any trade injures that trade.
The best thing undeniably that a Government can do with the Money Market is to let it take care of itself.’”
When he arrived, he was surprised to find rampant unemployment and poverty among the British working classes… Franklin was then asked how the American colonies managed to collect enough money to support their poor houses. He reportedly replied:
“We have no poor houses in the Colonies; and if we had some, there would be nobody to put in them, since there is, in the Colonies, not a single unemployed person, neither beggars nor tramps.”
In 1764, the Bank of England used its influence on Parliament to get a Currency Act passed that made it illegal for any of the colonies to print their own money. The colonists were forced to pay all future taxes to Britain in silver or gold. Anyone lacking in those precious metals had to borrow them at interest from the banks.
Only a year later, Franklin said, the streets of the colonies were filled with unemployed beggars, just as they were in England. The money supply had suddenly been reduced by half, leaving insufficient funds to pay for the goods and services these workers could have provided.
He maintained that it was “the poverty caused by the bad influence of the English bankers on the Parliament which has caused in the colonies hatred of the English and . . . the Revolutionary War.”
This, he said, was the real reason for the Revolution: “the colonies would gladly have borne the little tax on tea and other matters had it not been that England took away from the colonies their money, which created unemployment and dissatisfaction.”
And things are getting worse … rather than better. As Professor Werner tells Washington’s Blog:
"Central banks have legally become more and more powerful in the past 30 years across the globe, yet they have become de facto less and less accountable.
In fact, as I warned in my book New Paradigm in Macroeconomics in 2005, after each of the ‘recurring banking crises’, central banks are usually handed even more powers.
This also happened after the 2008 crisis. So it is clear we have a regulatory moral hazard problem: central banks seem to benefit from crises.
No wonder the rise of central banks to ever larger legal powers has been accompanied not by fewer and smaller business cycles and crises, but more crises and of larger amplitude."
"Nothing less than to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole.”
This system is to be controlled “in a feudalist fashion by the central banks of the world acting in concert by secret agreements,” central banks that “were themselves private corporations.”
The Human Aura And DNA: How You Choose Your Genes October 13 2025 | From: EnergyFanatics / Various
Every human being has an energy field around their body. Some people call it the aura, or the luminous energy field, or simply the human energy field.
The purpose of this article is not only to prove the existence of the human energy field, but also to explore the function of our DNA, the interaction between DNA and the unified field, and the influence of the human energy field on that relationship.
Ultimately, if the science is indeed correct, this is a first step to health, healing, and possibly human evolution.
“If you want to find the secrets of the universe, think in terms of energy, frequency and vibration.”
- Nikola Tesla
Human Energy Field and DNA – The Origin of Health
In the Western world our doctors go through almost a decade of schooling, and in that time they become masters of human biology, anatomy, and physiology. They become adept at understanding disease, and diagnosing all forms of illness, yet in a large majority of cases, what is their prescription? Drugs or Surgery.
All illness has a spiritual/energetic origin. When you do not cleanse your human energy field your energetic field becomes distorted, stagnant, and impure. It becomes extremely imbalanced and charged with low-energy vibrations which cause disease in mind, and spirit, and eventually in our bodies. But why?
The reason why this occurs is because one of the major functions of our DNA is that it receives and transmits energy. This has been shown to be one of the major functions of ‘junk DNA’ (which make up about 95% of the human genome) which is what it was called before they understood what it was all about, but now it is beginning to be shown as an essential component of our biology and DNA.
One of the new discoveries in DNA as Bruce Lipton talks about is epigenetic control, which means literally “above-genetic” control. Thus the new understanding of DNA is that the genes which our DNA codes is dictated as a response to the environment. In essence we are in a perpetual process of adaptation, which means that we have the potential for continuous evolution in our environment, moreover, spontaneous evolution.
More specifically, what is it that our DNA responds to in order to determine the nature of our environment?
Our DNA does not have eyes, or ears, so it cannot see or hear what is going on. Instead it determines the environment by ‘reading’ the energy. It receives energetic signals from the environment and interacts directly with the information and codes encoded within the unified field, reads them, and then our DNA codes and/or activates the appropriate genes suitable for the environment we are in.
What do you think happens to DNA when the human energy field is all polluted by negative energies? To answer this question, we have to look to water.
Consciousness and Water
Dr. Masaru Emoto from Japan for the last number of years has been doing some truly revolutionary work with water. What he is doing is researching the effects of human thought, emotion, andintention (directed attention) on the structure of water. (The source for this section is The Hidden Messages in Water by Dr. Masaru Emoto, and it is a truly enlightening book.)
His tests involve him sending specific thoughts to water (or getting others to do so), and then he flash freezes that water so that he can take a look at the crystal formed, and examine the relationship between the energy / thought / emotion sent to the water, and the crystals that are formed as a result.
Amazingly he found that when positive thoughts, energies, and words were directed to the water, they formed beautiful, highly coherent crystals.
Whereas when negative, angry, or hateful thoughts and emotions were directed towards the water, or in some cases with words directly, he found that there was no more coherent structure, and that the crystals froze with no sacred geometrical pattern. In other words, there was no coherence.
This work proves two things: (1) That our thoughts and emotions influence reality directly; and (2) That the type of energy matters.
What is going on with these water crystals is that when an individual thinks a certain thought, speaks a certain word, or feels in a certain way, their energy is oscillating the human energy field which restructures the geometric patterns within space according to that energy.
Then the frequency of our energy radiates throughout space (or it is transmitted non-locally – I truly have no idea) and it restructures the field in accordance with our energy, and this restructures the field – the space – around the water molecules because atoms are 99.9999% empty space.
Then when the water is flash frozen, it freezes along the geometric pattern created in the space around its molecules by human thought, emotion, and intention.
As we have seen from the images, the highest emotions of love, kindness, joy, and gratitude create highly coherent geometrical patterns in the field which creates crystals that are truly perfect, beautiful, and harmonic which resonate those emotions within us as we observe them.
Negative energies on the other hand seem to distort the natural structure of the field, vibrating the field in a discordant fashion, which create crystals that radiate a sense of ugliness, imperfection, dis-coherence, and in essence, disease. If it is possible for water crystals to look sick, ill, and literally diseased, it is these ones.
Perception
So if our bodies are 75% water, and if our genes are bio-oscillating crystalline structures which read and interpret energy, and if we are 99.999% space, then how do you think the energies within the human energy field are impacting our DNA, and most relevant of all, our health?
As I said before, the latest, and possibly the cutting edge of genetic sciences is working with epi-genetic control, meaning that our DNA and the genes which are coded are determined by the energy of our environment. Well, what determines our environment?
It is not what is out there which has the greatest impact, it is our perception of what is out there. In other words, what we believe, think, and feel to be true about our environment determines how we perceive our environment.
So if we think the world is negative, it becomes negative to us. But the opposite is also true. If we live in a state of love, happiness, and inner peace, then we perceive our environment to be the same and thus what we attract is much different.
The human energy field directly informs our DNA and is directly responsible for the genes coded, our health, any illness or disease which may appear in our body, and even our intelligence, memory, and ability to heal is directly affected. All aspects of our lives are determined by the quality of our consciousness.
The Phantom DNA Effect
"Another important piece of evidence that helps us to understand really what is going on when our DNA interacts with the unified field and with consciousness is known as the Phantom DNA Effect. It was discovered by Dr. Peter Gariaev who put DNA in a tiny quartz container and zapped it with a mild laser.
He then observed the DNA with equipment so sensitive it could detect a single photon. He found the DNA acted like a sponge, and absorbed the photons storing them in a cork-screw shaped spiral.
After he finished his experiments he removed the quartz vial with the DNA in it and left. Yet to his utter amazement when he returned to his lab he discovered that the machines were still detecting the photons of light spiraling in the same cork-screw spiral as if the DNA was still present, even though he had removed it from the machine! The spiral was visibly for a further 30 days."
I believe that we can safely make these deductions based off of the evidence at hand:
1. The structure of the vacuum, the unified field, actually stores information, energy, and light, which in reality are all the same thing.
2. This strongly suggests that the DNA molecule and structure is resonant with the structure of space-time. In other words its structure is somehow coherent as to cause the field to interact with it in this way once it is charged with energy, in this case a mild laser. Could it be the field responding with the codes necessary for the DNA molecule to adapt to its new environment?
3. This process infers that to some degree the DNA molecule is like a biological computer chip, an interface between our biology and the unified field. It means that an interesting function of DNA is to store light (which is information), and that this structure leaves a particularly strong energetic imprint onto the fabric of space-time. Maybe even that the process of the DNA storing energy activated an energetic construct already present in the unified field.
4. The evidence also suggests that there is communication going on between our DNA which stores energy/information/light, but it also seems that our DNA is not just informing the field and leaving an energetic imprint on the human energy field, but that the field is informing our DNA right back.
As a continually growing body of information related to energetically driven evolution is suggesting, all the codes, imprints, and information may very well be stored directly in the energetic field which creation emanates from; in essence, within light itself.
And when we are young or when our energetic fields are pure and unpolluted, our energy resonates most clearly with the universe in this state causing an unobstructed communication between our consciousness and universal consciousness, and between our DNA and the field.
When this communication is undistributed, we become the epitome of mental, spiritual, and physical health.
If our emotions were negative or incoherent, that would be disrupting the communication between the field and our DNA, and it is this above all which evidence is suggesting is the source of all disease.
The field of intention, conscious awareness, energy, the universal mind, whatever you choose to call the infinite energy density of the vacuum, the fact remains that the energy of space all around us, is infinite.
In other words, it is love, for that is the highest energy that we have a name for.
As Masaru Emoto’s work shows, the more positive, loving, and compassionate the person’s energy, the higher the degree of coherence in the water crystals.
Imagine what these positive energies do to our bodies which are 75% water, and imagine the effect of that highly coherent energy on our DNA. When we align with this energy, with our source, and thus with our higher self, we are embodying this energy which clears all the negativity and energetic disturbance within us manifesting health in mind, body, and spirit.
"Everything is energy and that’s all there is to it. Match the frequency of the reality that you want and you cannot help but get that reality. It can be no other way. This is not philosophy, this is physics.”
1924 Newspaper Article Outlines Six Goals Of The Illuminati October 12 2025 | From: TruthStreamMedia / Various
Of course, these days the concept of the Illuminati is much less a shadowy secret society bent on world domination than a cruel inside joke MTV has played out with borrowed symbolism.
But back in 1924, people were very worried about the Illuminati’s plans to take over the world by destroying it.
Marvin also notes that even though the order of the Illuminati had long since disappeared from public view by the 1920s, he was convinced it was alive and well and “responsible for all the radical efforts so well exemplified in recent years by Lenin and his followers in Russia”. The article goes on to spell it out:
“[Marvin] is assured it is operating in America today, seeking first to create mental attitude of unrest, then distrust, and finally, class hatred.”
The chain of custody for these covert actions lands back in the circle surrounding the likes of scheming and well-connected family dynasties such as Harriman, Bush, Dulles, Rockefeller, Rothschild and other fellow travelers, through covert financier-style foreign policy on behalf of the international banking circles to which they belong.
The same characters built up other despotic regimes, not only during the 20th Century, but throughout their sordid and secret history, as with the Bavarian Illuminati‘s sponsorship of the French Revolution during which it worked to undermine the king and trampled over the masses of society.
The accounts are detailed, but can be traced through time to the order of men who today congregate at Davos, Bilderberg and above, well inside the ring of power of those orchestrating — if no longer in name, then at least in deeds — as the “Illuminati.”
But then again, there are many names; many of the groups are transient. It is a bit of a shell game, after all.
Now fast forward to today and take a look around. Notice anything…?
So You’ve Woken Up… Now What? October 11 2025 | From: ZenGardner / Various
Many people ask about this or something similar so here’s some thoughts on the subject.
I don’t mean to tell anyone what to do, as that’s completely contrary to consciousness and conscious development, but I will share my understandings at this point and my passion for Truth and you can do what you like with it.
“What do you say to people who have woken up but can’t leave the system because of family and friends?”
This and those like it pose a very broad question since we’re all different and need to be led of our own convictions. However, the answer is fundamentally similar in every case.
Do what consciousness tells you.
There’s really no time for fiddling around once you’ve found what you know to be the Truth, which is always something clearly outside the realm of what you’ve been indoctrinated with. It’s always life altering. And if it isn’t, you didn’t hear correctly or it fell on deaf ears. I don’t want to be counted amongst the deaf or unresponsive. Do you?
Especially when you found out that that’s exactly what perpetrates the big lie you found out about–a compliant, non-awake populace.
System Dependence is the Name of the Game
That’s the trouble with the “system”, it teaches dependency, hierarchy, and rote knowledge, where your choices are carefully narrowed down to “acceptable” alternatives within carefully confined parameters.
That’s why people feel like fish out of water when they wake up. They never learned how to truly think freely, nor did they have the knowledge tools. Instead, most everything was reversed, scrambled, confused and filed away in seeming useless obscurity.
The result is not just a marginalization of empowering Truths into the catch-all dustbins of “conspiracy theory” or wing nut stuff, but worse yet, the system does not cultivate original thought or true personal freedom or responsibility.
The real Truth is not an option in such a controlled environment. Oh, you get smatterings of truths, but drawing awake and aware conclusions is not an option to humanity’s would be Controllers.
The Wake Up Starts with a Bang – But You Have to Keep It Going
When someone awakens to the true nature of the manipulated world we live in, as well as the vast resources at our immediate conscious fingertips, it takes some doing to fully realize what that information means, as well as the vast implications on your personal life.
It can hit hard and may need some time to be digested. How it affects each of us individually is really a question of simply putting what we’ve learned into action and trusting the Universe for the consequences.
I don’t think there’s time for much else. In fact, there never has been. If you know the Truth, what are you waiting for?
While many are hoping for some kind of soft-pedaling of any kind of action call, it’s not a set formula. You just find out, and you react. And just that takes some doing, breaking off the rust of your True Self to animate and start to call the shots that were previously hindered by life long programming.
Stages of Development
For me the full wake up took on many stages of development, but the full blown realization of the vast extent of the manipulated lie and its fleshed out intricacies was a head splitting explosion that blew me past the pull of convention’s gravity so fast I’m still grinning from ear to ear as I zip through the universe. Ha!
The point there being, the wake up takes on many forms and evolves. What gives the wake up traction is commitment, putting feet to your realizations.
You think TV’s bad? Turn it off. Banks are a rip off? Get out except for perhaps necessary operating funds if need be. Trapped by the ownership of housing, “might needs”, and all kinds of dumb stuff?
Dump everything you can, if that’s your understanding. Knowing “stuff owns you” is fundamental to consciousness. We all get there, but it depends on our enthusiasm…or “spirit in us”.
How many respond to just that?
Do What You Know or Face Confusion
Until people put into action what they already know, there isn’t gonna be much more to follow for them.
Just a lot of flailing about in frustration because we don’t do what we already know we should do and are looking for excuses or compromised solutions to assuage our guilty conscience and hopefully preserve our personal status quo.
Sad, but true. That also includes getting right with people, making relationships honest, and disengaging from situations of compromise. It takes courage.
Know You Are Nobody - Yet Everybody
All this is a whole lot easier when you realize you are nobody. There’s nothing to defend.
Your old senses of self were the very strings the lying matrix played upon. Get conscious and the sirens of the system don’t affect you except peripherally.
That’s a biggie. Conscious awareness is number one realizing and seeing through the higher level of awareness that is detached from this life’s experiences, and thus free to discern and identify without attachment what your life experience is.
Seeing through those eyes will bring tremendous peace and understanding.
Get Along But Don’t Compromise
Don’t fret the next steps. The universe is so vast and full of infinite possibilities there’s something for everybody. Our job is to find it for ourselves and when we find it, act on it. No, it’s not the “safe” way, or the “accepted” way.
In reality the parasitic system has been sucking you dry and lying to you and everyone you love. You now no longer owe it any allegiance and can and should disengage any and every way you can. No guilt trip necessary. You are doing what is right.
Period. And that is not contingent on relationships, financial security, self image concerns, or what have you.
So get any and all attachments possible out of play. Happily. You are freeing yourself from the spider’s tentacles.
There’s Real Peace in Commitment
When you’ve resolved to go ahead and “make the break” with convention and stand up for what you know is right, it leads to a new lifestyle.
How do you think these wonderful websites were formed of like-minded people who found each other and decided to make an impact with videos, interviews, articles, participation in events, etc?
How were Gandhi, Martin Luther King or other world truth bearers including the present day alternative luminaries birthed from their previous lives?
Something gelled, made total sense, resonated, and they just committed. These truth enthusiasts on the internet also somehow found each other and it clicked.
It’s all about responding to the need and call and openly networking…true response-ability.
The Truth Glasses
I read this fantastic analogy and it’s never escaped me.
Finding out the whole truth is like putting on these amazing truth glasses, much like the movie “They Live”.
Here’s how they work:
1. You gotta want to put them on.
2. You can’t force someone else to put them on.
3. Once they’re on, you can’t take them off.
If you’ve found and put on the glasses, that will make total sense. If you haven’t, keep searching.
Let your heart lead you. In the words of Lao Tsu:
"At the center of your being you have the answer; you know who you are and you know what you want."
- Lao Tsu
Cashless Crisis: “With Digital Payments, Civilization Comes To An End Until Power Is Restored” October 10 2025 | From: FreedomOutpost / Various
As most of the Western world is pushed into abandoning cash and embracing a fully digital cashless grid, it is apparent how vulnerable populations will become in times of crisis.
If the power grid were to go down in a storm or an attack, it is readily apparent that the system of commerce would go down with it; payments would stop and desperate people would line up for help.
Those with their own supplies, barter items and physical commodities will remain the most comfortable, but the very fabric of society could come unglued.
Will they really ban cash when so much could go wrong?
Paul-Martin Foss writes for the Carl Menger Center:
“Cash is being displaced by credit and debit cards, which are themselves beginning to be displaced by new digital currencies and payment systems…
But despite all the advances brought about by the digital revolution, there are still quite a few drawbacks. The most obvious is that it is reliant on electricity. One major hurricane knocking out power, a mid-summer brownout, or a hacker attack on the power grid could bring commerce to a halt.
With cash, transactions are still possible. With digital payments, civilization comes to an end until power is restored. Unless you have food stored or goods with which to barter, you’re out of luck. Just imagine a city like New York with no power and no way to buy or sell anything. It won’t be pretty.
[…]
With digital currencies such as Bitcoin, there is the problem that they are created out of thin air. One bitcoin represents the successful completion of a cryptographic puzzle, but all that means is that some computing power was used up to create a unique electronic file. That’s all it is, just a series of ones and zeros.
There is nothing tangible about Bitcoin and, indeed, if you lose the hard drive on which you stored your bitcoins, those bitcoins are lost forever."
On top of that, the potential for manipulation and the built-in assault of surveillance and tracking is enough to cripple liberties in the world that is cementing its patterns around this new technology.
What happens when online platforms don’t like your speech or your rights? What happens if their policy blocks you from buying something – like a gun – that you have the right to buy, or prevents you from spending your money, potentially freezing your account without notice. Again, the Menger Center makes the point:
“Take a look at PayPal, for instance. PayPal’s terms of service forbid use of the service to buy or sell firearms, firearms parts, or firearms accessories. Many individuals who have used PayPal to sell firearms parts find their accounts frozen or shut down by PayPal.
Similar things have happened to gun stores having their bank accounts frozen or having their credit card payment processors refuse to process…
[…]
Cases such as this will only be more widespread in the future, especially as governments continue to pursue the war on cash. If cash is eliminated and electronic systems become the only way anyone can pay for anything, all it will take is a little bit of government pressure on payment system operators to stop processing payments for X or Y and voila, you can longer buy X or Y.
What good is money in the bank if you can’t use it to buy what you want? In fact, governments may dispense with pressure on payment systems and just monitor transactions as they occur, automatically rejecting payments for goods they don’t want …
Every transaction made electronically can be tracked and traced. If every purchase you make is done electronically, your entire purchase history is open to scrutiny."
The powerful banking lobby, of course, wants a digital cashless system, because it will enrich them with transaction fees and penalties, continue and expand fractional reserve lending, and give them the power to monitor all the transactions, at detailed levels with data for every purchase. But despite this monitoring, money and transactions will not necessarily be more secure.
You cannot “hold” your money, you must be able to access it, and that depends upon authorization of the system. It can be hacked or erased in a split second.
Can you keep the financial system from limiting your rights and invading your privacy?
And how would the rest of the world copeunder the digital grid – perhaps 10x worse than Greece when the ATM's are shut down, the banks closed, the grid off and cash eradicated, while the population is forced under the yoke.
Not only is this grid vulnerable, but it is also becoming unavoidable.
The Wireless Wake Up Call October 9 2025 | From: EMFAnalysis / Various
A 'historical' yet ever-relevant talk on wireless / EMF / smart meter health effects. And it's a real eye-opener.
Jeromy has a Master's degree in Environmental Engineering. As a Silicon Valley tech-enthusiast, he was the last person to expect the debilitating health effects he experienced when 'smart' meters were installed where he lived. There are now thousands upon thousands of others just like him.
It's excellent. And it's stirred up, predictably, the hornet's nest of deniers within industry. This prompted a fiery rebuttal from ABC Producer Maryanne Demasi on Huffington Post.
One thing is fore sure... the conversation is going mainstream.
Protect Your Family from EMF Pollution: TEDx Talk: Wireless Wake-Up Call
On February 6th, I had the opportunity to speak at TEDxBerkeley. The title of my talk was “Wireless Wake-Up Call.” I discussed the health effects related to the explosion in wireless technology the past few years, along with solutions that can help everyone.
Within the presentation, I also talked about how we can develop technology that is much safer for humanity. Here is the video:
Zellerbach Hall on the UC Berkeley campus is an incredible venue. It seats 2,000 people and this event was sold-out. I was the second speaker of the day and the first couple minutes on stage were a bit nerve-racking. As you will see in my opening questions, there was an uncomfortable moment for everyone (it felt like the entire room needed to pause).
It happened when I asked who knew that the fine print in every smart phone owner’s manual says to never put the phone within about 1 inch of the body.
This is a truth that is currently taboo to discuss in our society, so few people know about it.
However, once we got through this moment, the talk soon became fun and was well-received by many in the audience.
TEDxBerkeley hired artists to put each talk into images. It is such an incredible skill to do this in a short amount of time. Every speaker that day gave an amazing talk (it was so much fun to watch the other talks) and each presenter was given the painting of their talk as a gift that evening.
In my talk, I wanted to convey that people are indeed being harmed by this technology and that there is adequate science to show how and why this is happening.
Most importantly though, I provided solutions that every family can utilize today to reduce their exposure and encouraged us all to help society wake-up.
The Top Ten Tricks Used By Corporate Junk Science October 8 2025 | From: WakeUpWorld / Various
Corporate junk science is an all-pervading presence in our society. It’s everywhere.
The scientific journals of the entire world, offline and online, have been flooded with so much fake science that it has, sad to say, become practically impossible for the average person to wade through all of it and sort out the wheat from the chaff.
However, the fake science I am referring to here is not unintentional or sloppy work, which is more of a minor problem in the scheme of things (since it will eventually be corrected with due diligence), but rather the deliberately fraudulent “scientific studies” which are put out by major corporations with a definite agenda in mind – usually establishing a fake scientific basis of “safety” for their products, whether they be vaccines, mobile phones, GMOs, tobacco, fluoride, soda or soft drinks, etc.
It’s nothing more than corporate junk science, and many people, including doctors, scientists and academics, have been taken in hook, line and sinker by it.
It’s time to shine the light on this ugly phenomenon. Science is meant to be about the pursuit of truth and understanding how our world works. It is truly sickening to see the extent to which it has been hijacked to serve corporate interests – to make a tiny, tiny 0.0001% rich at the expense of harming and killing the rest of mankind.
A study published on JAMA entitled “Research Misconduct Identified by the US Food and Drug Administration” found some very disturbing things in its sample of 57 studies that it analyzed:
“Fifty-seven published clinical trials were identified for which an FDA inspection of a trial site had found significant evidence of 1 or more of the following problems: falsification or submission of false information, 22 trials (39%); problems with adverse events reporting, 14 trials (25%); protocol violations, 42 trials (74%); inadequate or inaccurate recordkeeping, 35 trials (61%); failure to protect the safety of patients and/or issues with oversight or informed consent, 30 trials (53%); and violations not otherwise categorized, 20 trials (35%).”
Take a look at this first finding.
It states that 39% which is around 2/5 of studies committed data falsification!
How can we possibly trust medical science when the fraud is so blatant and widespread? And it’s not as though the authors of these studies come out and admit it. The study also found that:
“Only 3 of the 78 publications (4%) that resulted from trials in which the FDA found significant violations mentioned the objectionable conditions or practices found during the inspection.
No corrections, retractions, expressions of concern, or other comments acknowledging the key issues identified by the inspection were subsequently published.”
Another study at PLOS ONE entitled “How Many Scientists Fabricate and Falsify Research? A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Survey Data” concluded that:
“It is likely that, if on average 2% of scientists admit to have falsified research at least once and up to 34% admit other questionable research practices, the actual frequencies of misconduct could be higher than this.”
In light of all of this, if we want the truth, we need to look at the whole structure of how “science” works in the real world. We need to get wise to the methods that are used by unscrupulous groups to further their agenda.
With that in mind, here is a list of the top 10 tricks used by the corporatocracy to pull the wool over your eyes by manipulating science and substituting their fake corporate junk science instead (thanks to Webster Kehr of CancerTutor.com for compiling his instructive list, from which the below points are derived).
1. Substituting Synthetic for Natural Versions of a Nutrient
Those who know a little about nutrition probably realize by now that there is a vast difference between a nutrient found in a food or plant, and its synthetic counterpart artificially made in a lab.
All vitamin C is not created equal; some versions are more equal than others. The same goes for other vitamins.
It also applies to minerals, since some are derived from plant or animal matter (“organic”) whereas others are derived from rock (“inorganic”). The body can’t assimilate inorganic minerals, so all those so-called “natural” supplements full of rock and fossil-derived calcium are useless, and are actually harming your body by causing calcification.
When the corporatocracy wants a result skewed against an unpatentable natural solution and in favor of one of their patentable products, they simply use the synthetic (and less potent) version of that nutrient in the study and “find” that it is ineffective. Corporate junk science at its best!
2. Isolating Nutrients to Remove Their Power of Synergy
Here’s another trick used by corporate junk science.
If it’s trying to “scientifically prove” that a natural substance is ineffective, rather than testing the whole substance, it will isolate certain nutrients from it, declare them the only ones with any health benefit, then find them ineffective.
This is like taking a clove of garlic, declaring that allicin is the only thing in it that could possibly do any good for human health, and then disregarding the whole plant when allicin doesn’t do everything you expected. The same goes for when corporate junk science, intentionally or not, tests the wrong nutrient and declares itself finished with testing.
Nature doesn’t work like this. Plants are complex organisms. Some are composed of hundreds of different phytonutrients which work together synergistically to produce wellness in the human body. Real science would test the whole plant open-mindedly in a variety of ways to try to discover and unlock the secret to its healing potential.
3. Contaminating the Tests
Webster Kehr mentions a case involving laetrile or amygdalin (colloquially called vitamin B17). He writes that the “NIH contaminated an already bogus pill being used in a study. Natural laetrile cannot and has never given a patient the symptoms of cyanide poisoning. It simply is impossible.
The NIH refused to allow an alternative laetrile vendor to supply natural laetrile for the study – so they could create a custom pill for the study. In creating their custom bogus laetrile pill, it was not enough for them to not have any natural laetrile in the pill. A worthless pill would not have given any patient the symptoms of cyanide poisoning.
If corporate junk science can’t prove a natural substance itself is ineffective, then it uses the trick of altering the treatment plan, so that people are getting the correct amount of that substance.
This could be as simple as making the dosage too low or too high, or combining the substance with other foods or drink which disable its healing effects, or heating it, etc. Just like Big Pharma drugs, natural cures require a patient to follow a correct dosage and treatment plan for them to be successful in healing disease.
Mark Twain once said that there are “lies, damn lies and statistics”. Corporate junk science often plays around with the numbers to emphasize one thing and hide another thing.
Big Biotech often does this with their GMO studies, for instance, never allowing a study to exceed 90 days (after which the deleterious effects of GMOs begin to emerge).
Are double blind studies always the gold standard? As Kehr points out, “in many cases, a double blind study makes no sense in the world. For example, how could you do a double blind study comparing a person who refuses all orthodox cancer treatments with someone who goes through chemotherapy?
It is a stupid concept, because after one day a person would know which group they were in… How can you compare chemotherapy to Vitamin C in a double blind study? The chemotherapy group would have intense pain, sickness, their hair will fall out, and so on. The Vitamin C group would have no added pain, no sickness (except perhaps diarrhea), and their hair will not fall out, etc.”
7. Selecting Patients Favorable to the Agenda
The selection protocol in determining which patients to choose for a study is important, because by carefully selecting the patients in a study, you can to a large extent control the outcome of the study. Kehr gives examples of how the Mayo Clinic choose a narrow range of cancers as opposed to Pauling and Cameron when testing the efficacy of vitamin C as a natural cancer treatment.
“In June [2002], the New England Journal of Medicine, one of the most respected medical journals, made a startling announcement.
The editors declared that they were dropping their policy stipulating that authors of review articles of medical studies could not have financial ties to drug companies whose medicines were being analyzed.
The reason? The journal could no longer find enough independent experts.
Drug company gifts and “consulting fees” are so pervasive that in any given field, you cannot find an expert who has not been paid off in some way by the industry.
So the journal settled for a new standard: Their reviewers can have received no more than $10,000 [per year] from companies whose work they judge. Isn’t that comforting?"
9. Controlling the Publicisation of the Results
Most scientists are given contracts by the corporatocracy which contain a clause forbidding them to publicize results that the funders don’t like.
This means that Big Pharma, Bir Agra, Big Biotech or whoever it is has the legal right to suppress the results of any study they don’t like – including being able to stop scientists from submitting such studies to a journal.
10. Controlling the Funding and Hiding the Funders
Science is, to some extent, by the admissions of one of its branches quantum physics, based on the state of the observer. So, it is unsurprising that it can be manipulated by placing the people who have your point of view in control.
An outcome is more likely to be generated when you have people expecting (or subconsciously intending) that result.
On top of this, results can be bought and the true finance behind that bribery can be hidden through front groups, think tanks, shell corporations, fake grassroots (astroturf) organizations and many other means.
The 10 tricks do, of course, exist in addition to the massive category of data falsification, where corporations omit and distort results at will through all sorts of chicanery (e.g. not reporting patients who suffer side effects and instead labeling them as “non-compliant”).
Corporate junk science is like a cancer parasiting off the host and destroying humanity’s attempt for knowledge and objectivity.
The time has come to expose it fully and restore truth.
NWO: Totalitarianism And The Five Stages Of Dehumanization+ Why 2022 Is 1973: Klaus Schwab Is Zbigniew Brzezinski [ Historical but Relevant ] October 7 2025 | From: BrownstoneInstitute / NoMoreFakeNews / Various
Hannah Arendt’s seminal work The Origins of Totalitarianism (1948) makes for sobering reading in the world we see developing around us in the year 2022.
Indeed, we find ourselves in an impasse of epic proportions where the essence of what it means to be human is at stake.
"The totalitarian attempt at global conquest and total domination has been the destructive way out of all impasses. Its victory may coincide with the destruction of humanity; wherever it has ruled, it has begun to destroy the essence of man.”
- Hannah Arendt, The Origins of Totalitarianism, first published 1948
Although it is hard to claim that – at least in the West – we find ourselves once again under the yoke of totalitarian regimes comparable to those we know so well from the 20th century, there is no doubt that we are faced with a global paradigm that brings forth steadily expanding totalitarian tendencies, and these need not even be planned intentionally or maliciously.
As we will come to discuss later, the modern-day drivers of such totalitarian tendencies are for the most part convinced – with the support of the masses – that they are doing the right thing because they claim to know what is best for the people in a time of existential crisis.
Totalitarianism is a political ideology that can easily spread in society without much of the population at first noticing it and before it is too late.
In her book, Hannah Arendt meticulously describes the genesis of the totalitarian movements that ultimately grew into the totalitarian regimes of 20th century Europe and Asia, and the unspeakable acts of genocide and crimes against humanity this ultimately resulted in.
As Arendt would certainly warn us against, we should not be misled by the fact that we do not see in the West today any of the atrocities that were the hallmark of the totalitarian regimes of Communism under Stalin or Mao and Nazism under Hitler.
These events were all preceded by a gradually spreading mass ideology and subsequent state-imposed ideological campaigns and measures promoting apparently “justifiable” and “scientifically proven” control measures and actions aimed at permanent surveillance and ultimately a step-by-step exclusion of certain people from (parts of) society because they posed “a risk” to others or dared to think outside of what was considered acceptable thought.
In his book The Demon in Democracy – Totalitarian Temptations in Free Societies, the Polish lawyer and Member of the European Parliament Ryszard Legutko leaves no doubt that there are worrying similarities between many of the dynamics in Communist totalitarian regimes and modern-day liberal democracies, when he observes:
"Communism and liberal democracy proved to be all-unifying entities compelling their followers how to think, what to do, how to evaluate events, what to dream, and what language to use.”
This is also the dynamics we see at work on many levels of globalized society today. Every reader, but especially politicians and journalists, interested in human freedom, democracy and the rule of law, should carefully read Chapter 11 on “The Totalitarian Movement” in Hannah Arendt’s much-acclaimed book.
She explains how long before totalitarian regimes take actual power and establish complete control, their architects and enablers have already been patiently preparing society – not necessarily in a coordinated way or with that end-goal in mind – for the takeover.
The totalitarian movement itself is driven by the aggressive and at times violent promotion of a certain dominant ideology, through relentless propaganda, censorship, and groupthink. It also always includes major economic and financial interests.
Such a process then results in an ever more omnipotent state, assisted by a host of unaccountable groups, (international) institutions and corporations, that claims to have a patent on truth and language and on knowing what is good for its citizens and society as a whole.
Although there is of course a vast difference between Communist totalitarian regimes of the 21st century that we see in China and North Korea, and Western liberal democracies with their growing totalitarian tendencies, what seems to be the unifying element between the two systems today is thought control and behavioral management of its populations.
This development has been greatly enhanced through what was coined by Harvard professor Shoshana Zuboff as “surveillance capitalism.”
Surveillance capitalism, Zuboff writes, is “[a] movement that aims to impose a new collective order based on total certainty.” It is also – and here she does not mince her words –
"[a]n expropriation of critical human rights that is best understood as a coup from above: an overthrow of the people’s sovereignty.”
The modern state and its allies, whether communist, liberal or otherwise, have – for the above and other reasons – an insatiable desire to collect massive amounts of data on citizens and customers and to use this data extensively for control and influence.
On the commercial side, we have all the aspects of tracking people’s behavior and preferences online, brilliantly explained in the documentary The Social Dilemma, confronting us with the reality that “Never before have a handful of tech designers had such control over the way billions of us think, act, and live our lives.”
At the same time we see in operation the “social credit” system rolled out by the Chinese Communist Party that uses big data and permanent CCTV live footage to manage people’s behavior in public areas through a system of awards and punishments.
The mandatory QR code first introduced in China in 2020 and subsequently in liberal democratic states around the world in 2021, to keep permanent track of people’s health status and as a prerequisite for participating in society, is the latest and deeply troubling phenomenon of this same surveillance capitalism.
Here the dividing line between mere technocracy and totalitarianism becomes almost extinct under the guise of “protecting public health.”
The currently attempted colonization of the human body by the state and its commercial partners, claiming to have our best interests in mind, is part of this troubling dynamic. Where did the progressive mantra “My body, my choice” suddenly go?
So, what then, is totalitarianism? It is a system of government (a totalitarian regime), or a system of increasing control otherwise implemented (a totalitarian movement) – presenting itself in different forms and at different levels of society – that tolerates no individual freedom or independent thought and that ultimately seeks to totally subordinate and direct all aspects of the individual human life.
In the words of Dreher, totalitarianism “is a state in which nothing can be permitted to exist that contradicts a society’s ruling ideology.”
In modern society, where we see this dynamic very much at work, the use of science and technology play a decisive role in enabling totalitarian tendencies to take hold in ways that 20th century ideologues could only have dreamed of.
Furthermore, accompanying totalitarianism in whatever stage, institutionalized dehumanization occurs and is the process by which the whole or part of the population is subjected to policies and practices that consistently violate the dignity and fundamental rights of the human being and that may ultimately lead to exclusion and social or, in the worst case, physical extermination.
In the following, we will look more closely at some of the basic tenets of the totalitarian movement as described by Hannah Arendt and how this enables the dynamics of institutionalized dehumanization that we observe today.
In the conclusion, we will briefly look at what history and human experience can tell us about freeing society from the yoke of totalitarianism and its dehumanizing policies.
The reader must understand that I am in no way comparing or equating the totalitarian regimes of the 20th century and their atrocities to what I see as the increasing totalitarian tendencies and resulting policies today.
Instead, as is the role of a robust academic discourse, we will take a critical look at what we see happening in society today and analyze relevant historical and political phenomena that might instruct us on how we can deal better with the present course of events that, if not corrected, does not bode well for a future of freedom and the rule of law.
1.
The Workings of Totalitarianism
When we speak about “totalitarianism,” the word is being used in this context to describe the whole of a political ideology that can present itself in different forms and stages, but that always has the ultimate goal of total control over people and society.
As described above, Hannah Arendt distinguishes within totalitarianism between the totalitarian movement and the totalitarian regime.
I add to this categorizing what I believe to be an early stage of the totalitarian movement, called “totalitarian tendencies” by Legutko, and that I call ideological totalitarianism in relation to current developments.
For totalitarianism to have a chance of succeeding, Hannah Arendt tells us, three main and closely intertwined phenomena are needed:
The mass movement, the elite’s leading role in steering those masses and the employment of relentless propaganda.
For its establishment and durability totalitarianism depends as a first step on mass support obtained through playing into a sense of permanent crisis and fear in society.
This then feeds the urge of the masses to have those in charge constantly take “measures” and show leadership to ward off the threat that has been identified as endangering the whole of society.
Those in charge can “remain in power only so long as they keep moving and set everything around them in motion.”
The reason for this is that totalitarian movements build on the classical failure of societies throughout human history to create and uphold a sense of community and purpose, instead breeding isolated, self-centered human beings without a clear overarching purpose in life.
The masses following the totalitarian movement are lost themselves and as a result in search of a clear identity and a purpose in life that they do not find in their current circumstances:
"Social atomization and extreme individualization preceded the mass movement (..). The chief characteristic of the mass man is not brutality and backwardness, but his isolation and lack of normal social relationships.”
How familiar this sounds to any person observing modern society.
In an age where social media and whatever else is presented on screens set the tone above all else and where teenage girls fall into depression and increased suicide attempts because of the lack of “likes” on their Instagram account, we indeed see a disconcerting example of this lack of normal relationships that were instead meant to involve in-person encounters leading to profound exchanges.
In Communist societies it is the Party that sets out to destroy religious, social and family ties to make place for a citizen that can be completely subjected by the State and the dictates of the Party, like we see happening in China and North Korea.
In hedonistic and materialistic Western societies this same destruction happens through different means and under the neo-Marxist guise of unstoppable “progress,” where technology and a false definition of the purpose of science erodes the understanding of what it means to be human:
"In fact,” writes Dreher, “this technology and the culture that has emerged from it is reproducing the atomization and radical loneliness that totalitarian communist governments used to impose on their captive peoples to make them easier to control.”
Not only have the smartphone and social media drastically reduced genuine human interaction, as any teacher or parent of schoolchildren can attest to, but the social framework has in recent times further dramatically deteriorated through other major shifts in society.
The ever-growing Big-Tech and government policing of language, opinions, and scientific information in the SARS-CoV-2 pandemic, accompanied by a level of censorship not seen since World War II, has greatly reduced and impoverished the public discourse and seriously undermined trust in science, politics and the community.
In 2020 and 2021, mostly well-meant yet often ill-advised government-imposed Corona measures such as lockdowns, mask-mandates, entry-requirements to public facilities and Corona vaccine mandates have further massively limited the unimpeded human interaction that any society needs to retain and strengthen its social fabric.
All these externally imposed developments contribute from different directions to human beings, especially the young, increasingly and ever more lastingly being deprived of those ‘normal social relationships’ Hannah Arendt speaks of.
Seemingly lacking alternatives, this in turn leads large groups of the population – most of them not even realizing it – into the arms of totalitarian ideologies.
These movements, however, in the words of Arendt, “demand for total, unrestricted, unconditional, and unalterable loyalty of the individual member (..) [since] their organization will encompass, in due course, the entire human race.”
The final goal of totalitarianism, she explains, is the permanent domination of human beings from within, thus involving each and every aspect of life, whereby the masses have to be kept constantly in motion since “a political goal that would constitute the end of the movement simply does not exist.”
Without in any way wishing to downplay the gravity and urgency of these issues in and of themselves, or the need as a society to devise ways to deal with existential threats arising from them, Corona political and media narratives are examples of such an ideological totalitarianism that wants to completely control how human beings think, speak and act in that area of life, whist keeping them in perpetual anxiety through well-planned regular dramatic news updates (One tool being used for this successfully throughout the world is the constant well-rehearsed press conferences by grave-looking ministers in suits behind Plexiglas and flanked by experts and state flags), instrumentalized heartbreaking stories and calls to immediate action (“measures”), dealing with (perceived or real) new threats to their person, to their cause and to society as a whole.
Fear is the main driving force behind keeping this perpetual anxiety and activism going.
Hannah Arendt then goes on to explain what is a disturbing phenomenon of totalitarian movements, it being the enormous attraction it exerts on the elites, the “terrifying roster of distinguished men whom totalitarianism can count amongst its sympathizers, fellow-travelers, and inscribed party members.
This elite believes that what is required for solving the acute problems society is currently faced with is the total destruction, or at least the total redesign, of all that was considered common sense, logic and established wisdom until this point.
When it comes to the Corona crisis, the well-known capacity of the human body to build natural immunity against most viruses it has already encountered is no longer deemed relevant in any way by those imposing vaccination mandates, rejecting foundational principles of human biology and established medical wisdom.
To achieve this total overhaul for the sake of complete control, the elites are willing to work with any people or organization, including those people, called “the mob” by Arendt, whose features are “failure in professional and social life, perversion and disaster in private life.”
A good example of this is the West’s dealings with the Chinese Communist Party.
Although the flagrant corruption and human rights abuses – including the genocidal campaign against the Uyghurs in Xinjiang – perpetrated by this institution of repression throughout history until today are well-documented, as is its role in covering up the 2019 outbreak of the SARS-CoV-2 virus in Wuhan perhaps resulting from a lab leak, most countries in the world have become so dependent on China that they are willing to look the other way and cooperate with a regime that is willing to trample on all that liberal democracy stands for.
Hannah Arendt describes another disturbing element that is part of what she calls the “temporary alliance between the mob and the elite” and that is the willingness of these elites to lie their way into obtaining and retaining power through “the possibility that gigantic lies and monstrous falsehoods can eventually be established as unquestioned facts.”
At this point it is not a proven fact that governments and their allies are lying about statistics and scientific data surrounding Covid-19; however, it is clear that there exist many serious inconsistencies that are not or not sufficiently being dealt with.
Throughout the history of totalitarian movements and regimes the offenders have been able to get away with much because they understood very well what is the primary concern of the simple man or woman going about their daily business of making life work for their families and other dependents, as masterfully expressed by Arendt:
“He [Göring] proved his supreme ability for organizing the masses into total domination by assuming that most people are neither bohemians, fanatics, adventurers, sex maniacs, crackpots, nor social failures, but first and foremost job holders and good family men.”
And: “[n]othing proved easier to destroy than the privacy and private morality of people who thought of nothing but safeguarding their private lives.”
We all long for security and predictability and hence a crisis makes us look for ways to obtain or retain security and safety, and when necessary, most are willing to pay a high price for this, including relinquishing their freedoms and living with the notion that they might not be told the whole truth about the crisis at hand.
It should be no surprise then that considering the potential lethal effect the Coronavirus can have on human beings, our very human fear of death has led most of us to part without much of a fight with the rights and freedoms that our fathers and grandfathers fought so hard for.
Also, as vaccine mandates are introduced around the globe for workers in many industries and settings, the majority is complying not because they themselves necessarily believe they need the Corona vaccine, but only because they want to reclaim their freedoms and keep their jobs so they can feed their families.
The political elites imposing these mandates know this of course and make smart use of it, often even with the best of intentions believing that this is necessary to deal with the crisis at hand.
The most important and ultimate tool used by totalitarian movements in the non-totalitarian society is to establish real control of the masses by winning them over through the use of propaganda:
"Only the mob and the elite can be attracted by the momentum of totalitarianism itself; the masses have to be won by propaganda.”
As Hannah Arendt explains, both fear and science are extensively used to oil the propaganda machine.
Fear is always propagated as directed towards somebody or something external that poses a real or perceived threat to society or the individual.
But there is another even more sinister element that totalitarian propaganda historically uses to cajole the masses into following its lead through fear and that is “the use of indirect, veiled, and menacing hints against all who will not heed its teachings (..)”, all the while claiming the strictly scientific and public benefit nature of its argument that those measures are needed.
Both the deliberate instrumentalization of fear and the constant referral to “follow the science” by political actors and the mass media in the Corona crisis has been extremely successful as a propaganda tool.
This is of course also the case where it concerns the Corona crisis. Even so, she continues, the obsession with science has increasingly characterized the Western world since the 16th century.
She sees the totalitarian weaponization of science, quoting the German philosopher Eric Voegelin, as the final stage in a societal process where “science [has become] an idol that will magically cure the evils of existence and transform the nature of man.”
Science is employed to provide the arguments for the justification of societal fear and for the reasonableness of the far-reaching measures imposed to “confront” and “exterminate” the external danger.
Arendt:
"The scientificality of totalitarian propaganda is characterized by its almost exclusive insistence on scientific prophecy (..)"
How many such prophecies have we not heard since the beginning of 2020 and that have not come to pass?
It is not at all relevant, Arendt continues, whether these “prophecies” would be based on good science or bad science, since the leaders of the masses make it their primary focus to fit reality to their own interpretations and, where deemed necessary, lies, whereby their propaganda is “marked by its extreme contempt for facts as such.”
They do not believe in anything that is related to personal experience or what is visible, but only in what they imagine, what their own statistical models say, and the ideologically consistent system they have built around it.
Organization and single-mindedness of purpose is what the totalitarian movement aims at for obtaining full control, whereby the content of the propaganda (whether fact or fiction, or both) becomes an untouchable element of the movement and where objective reason or let alone public discourse no longer play any role.
Until now, respectful public debate and a robust scientific discourse have not been possible when it comes to the best way to respond to the Corona pandemic.
The elites are keenly aware of this and use it to the advantage of forwarding their agenda, that instead it is radical consistency that the masses long for in times of existential crisis, as it (initially) gives them a sense of security and predictability.
Yet this is also where the great weakness of totalitarian propaganda lies, since ultimately “(..) it cannot fulfill this longing of the masses for a completely consistent, comprehensible, and predictable world without seriously conflicting with common sense.”
Today we see this exacerbated, as I already mentioned above, through a fundamentally flawed understanding and use of science by the powers that be.
Former Harvard Medical School professor Martin Kulldorff, a well-known epidemiologist and biostatistician specializing in infectious disease outbreaks and vaccine safety, notes what is the correct application of science and how this is lacking in the current narrative:
"Science is about rational disagreement, the questioning and testing of orthodoxy and the constant search for truth.”
We are now very far removed from this concept in a public climate where science has been politicized into a truth factory that tolerates no dissent, even if the alternative viewpoint merely outlines the numerous inconsistencies and falsehoods that are part of the political and media narrative.
The moment however, Arendt points out, this system error becomes clear to the participants in the totalitarian movement and its defeat is imminent, they will at once cease to believe in its future, from one day to the other giving up on that for which they were willing to give all the day before.
A striking example of such an overnight abandonment of a totalitarian system is the way in which most apparatchiks in Eastern and Central Europe between 1989 and 1991 turned from hardline career Communists into enthusiastic liberal democrats.
They simply abandoned the system they were so faithfully part of for many years and found an alternative system that circumstances allowed them to now embrace.
Therefore, as we know from the rubble heaps of history, every effort at totalitarianism has an expiry date. The current version will also fail.
In this article I described the process of “dehumanization in 5 steps” and how these human rights’ violations are not generally being perpetrated by ‘monsters,’ but for a large part by ordinary men and women – helped by the passive ideologized masses – who are convinced that what they are doing or participating in is good and necessary, or at least justifiable.
Since March 2020 we have been witnessing the global unfolding of a serious health crisis leading to unprecedented government, media and societal pressure being exerted on whole populations to acquiesce in far-reaching and mostly unconstitutional measures limiting people’s freedoms and in many cases through threats and undue pressure violating their bodily integrity.
During this time, it has become increasingly clear that there are certain tendencies to be seen today that show some similarities to the sort of dehumanizing measures employed as a rule by totalitarian movements and regimes.
Endless lockdowns, police-enforced quarantines, travel restrictions, vaccine mandates, the suppression of scientific data and debate, large-scale censorship, and the relentless deplatforming and public shaming of critical voices are all examples of dehumanizing measures that should have no place in a system of democracy and the rule of law.
We also see the process of increasingly relegating a certain part of the population to the peripheries whilst singling them out as irresponsible and undesired because of the “risk” they pose to others, leading to society gradually excluding them.
The [supposed] President of the United States expressed pointedly what this means in a major live-televised policy speech:
"We’ve been patient, but our patience is wearing thin. And your refusal has cost all of us. So, please, do the right thing. But just don’t take it from me; listen to the voices of unvaccinated Americans who are lying in hospital beds, taking their final breaths, saying, “If only I had gotten vaccinated.” “If only.””
Those peddling political rhetoric today that sets up the “vaccinated” against the “unvaccinated, or vice versa, are going down a very dangerous road of demagoguery that has never ended well in history.
Slavenka Drakulic, in her analysis of what led to the 1991-1999 Yugoslav ethnic conflict, observes: ” (..) in time those ‘Others’ are stripped of all their individual characteristics.
They are no longer acquaintances or professionals with particular names, habits, appearances and characters; instead they are members of the enemy group.
When a person is reduced to an abstraction in such a way, one is free to hate him because the moral obstacle has already been abolished.”
Looking at the history of totalitarian movements eventually leading to totalitarian regimes and their campaigns of state-controlled persecution and segregation, this is what happens.
The first step of dehumanization is the creation and political instrumentalization of fear and the resulting permanent anxiety amongst the population: fear for one’s own life and fear for a specific group in society that is considered to be a threat is constantly being fed.
Fear for one’s own life is of course an understandable and entirely justifiable response to a potentially dangerous new virus. Nobody would like to get sick or die unnecessarily.
We don’t want to catch a nasty virus if it can be avoided. Yet once this fear is being instrumentalized by (state) institutions and media outlets to help them achieve certain objectives, such as for example the Austrian government has had to admit to doing in March 2020 when it wanted to convince the population of the need for a lockdown, fear becomes a potent weapon.
Again, Hannah Arendt brings in her sharp analysis when she observes:
"Totalitarianism is never content to rule by external means, namely, through the state and a machinery of violence; thanks to its peculiar ideology and the role assigned to it in this apparatus of coercion, totalitarianism has discovered a means of dominating and terrorizing human beings from within.”
In his 9 September 2021 speech Biden instrumentalizes for political purposes the normal human fear for the potentially fatal virus and goes on to expand it with fear for ‘unvaccinated people,’ by suggesting that they are per definition responsible not only for their own deaths but potentially for yours too because they are “unnecessarily using” ICU hospital beds.
In this way there has been established a new suspicion and anxiety around a specific group of people in society for what they might do to you and your group.
The creation of fear towards that specific group then turns them into easily identifiable scapegoats for the specific problem that society is facing now, regardless of the facts.
An ideology of publicly justified discrimination based on an emotion present in individual human beings in society has been born.
This is exactly how the totalitarian movements which turned into totalitarian regimes in recent European history started. Even though it is not comparable to the levels of violence and exclusion of 20th century totalitarian regimes, we are today seeing active fear-based government and media propaganda justifying the exclusion of people.
First the “asymptomatic,” then the “unmasked” and now the “unvaccinated” are being presented and treated as a danger and a burden to the rest of society.
How often have we not heard from political leaders during the past months that we are living through the “pandemic of the unvaccinated” and that the hospitals are full of them::
"That’s nearly 80 million Americans not vaccinated. And in a country as large as ours, that’s 25 percent minority. That 25 percent can cause a lot of damage - and they are. The unvaccinated overcrowd our hospitals, are overrunning the emergency rooms and intensive care units, leaving no room for someone with a heart attack, or pancreatitis, or cancer.”
The second step of dehumanization is soft exclusion: the group turned into scapegoats is excluded from certain – though not all – parts of society.
They are still considered part of that society, but their status has been downgraded. They are merely being tolerated whilst at the same time being berated in public for them being or acting differently.
Systems are also put in place that enable the authorities, and thus the public at large, to easily identify who these ‘others’ are.
Enter the “Green Pass” or QR code. In many Western countries this finger-pointing is happening now, especially towards those not vaccinated against the SARS-CoV-2 virus, regardless of the constitutionally protected considerations or medical reasons why individuals may decide against receiving this specific jab.
For example, on November 5, 2021, Austria was the first country in Europe to introduce highly discriminatory restrictions for the “unvaccinated.”
These citizens have been barred from participating in societal life and can only go to work, grocery shopping, church, have a walk or attend to clearly defined “emergencies”.
New Zealand and Australia have similar limitations. Examples are manifold around the world where without proof of Corona vaccination people are losing their jobs and being barred entry into a host of establishments, shops and even churches.
There are also an increasing number of countries barring people from boarding planes without a vaccination certificate, or even forbidding them explicitly to have friends over for dinner at home, like in Australia:
"The message is if you want to be able to have a meal with friends and welcome people in your home, you have to get vaccinated.”
- State premier Gladys Berejiklian of New South Wales, Australia, 27 September 2021
The third step of dehumanization, mostly occurring in parallel with the second step, is executed though documented justification of the exclusion: Academic research, expert opinions and scientific studies widely disseminated through vast media coverage are used to underpin the propaganda of fear and the subsequent exclusion of a specific group; to ‘explain’ or ‘provide evidence’ why the exclusion is necessary for the ‘good of society’ and for everybody to ‘stay safe.’
Hannah Arendt observes that “[t]he strong emphasis of totalitarian propaganda on the “scientific” nature of its assertions has been compared to certain advertising techniques which also address themselves to masses. (..) Science in the instances of both business publicity and totalitarian propaganda is obviously only a surrogate for power.
The obsession of totalitarian movements with “scientific” proofs ceases once they are in power.”
The interesting caveat here is that the science is of course often being used in a biased way, only presenting those studies that fit the official narrative and not the at least equal number of studies, no matter how renowned its authors, that provide alternative insights and conclusions that might contribute to a constructive debate and better solutions.
As mentioned before, here science becomes politicized as a tool for promoting what the leaders of the totalitarian movement have decided should be the truth and the measures and actions based on that version of the truth. Alternative viewpoints are simply censored, as we see the likes of YouTube, Twitter and Facebook engage in on an unprecedented scale.
Not since the end of the Second World War have so many renowned and acclaimed academics, scientists and medical doctors, including Nobel Prize recipients and nominees, been silenced, deplatformed and fired from their positions only because they do not support the official or ‘correct’ line.
They simply desire for a robust public discourse on the question of how best to deal with the issue at hand and thus engage in a common search for truth.
This is the point where we know from history that the ideology of the day has now been formally enshrined and has become mainstream.
The fourth step of dehumanization is hard exclusion: the group that is now ‘proven’ to be the cause of society’s problems and current impasse is subsequently excluded from civil society as a whole and becomes rightless.
Military Insider: They Panicked When They Saw The Future
This was recorded over a decade ago and makes it even more incredible as we see the events described unfold on the planet today.
They no longer have a voice in society because they are deemed not to be part of it anymore. In the extreme version of this, they are no longer entitled to the protection of their fundamental rights.
When it comes to Corona measures imposed by governments worldwide and to varying degrees, in some places we are already seeing developments leaning to this fourth stage.
Even though in scope and severity such measures cannot be compared to those imposed by totalitarian regimes of the past and the present, they do clearly show worrisome totalitarian tendencies that, when unchecked, could eventually grow into something far worse.
In Melbourne, Australia, for example, a euphemistically called “Center for National Resilience” will soon be completed (as one of various such centers) that will act as a permanent facility where people are to be forcibly locked up in quarantine, for example when returning from foreign travel.
The rules and regulations for life in such an already existing internment facility in Australia’s Northern Territory state make for chilling Orwellian reading:
"Chief Health Officer Direction 52 of 2021 sets out what a person must do when in quarantine at the Centre for National Resilience and at Alice Springs Quarantine Facility. This direction is law – every person in quarantine must do what the Direction says. If a person does not follow the Direction, the Northern Territory Police may issue an Infringement Notice with a financial penalty.”
The fifth and final step of dehumanization is extermination, social or physical.
The excluded group is forcefully ejected from society, either by any participation in society being made impossible, or their banishment into camps, ghettos, prisons and medical facilities.
In the most extreme forms of totalitarian regimes that we have seen under Communism and Nazism, but also the ethnic nationalism during the wars in the former Yugoslavia 1991-1999; this then leads to those people being physically exterminated or at least treated as those that are “no longer human.”
They have stopped being part of humanity as far as the totalitarians are concerned.
In the West we have thankfully not reached this final stage of totalitarianism and resulting dehumanization. However, Hannah Arendt gives a stark warning that we should not count on democracy alone being enough of a bulwark against reaching this fifth stage:
"A conception of law which identifies what is right with the notion of what is good for – for the individual, or the family, or the people, or the largest number – becomes inevitable once the absolute and transcendent measurements of religion or the law of nature have lost their authority.
And this predicament is by no means solved if the unit to which the ‘good for’ applies is as large as mankind itself.
For it is quite conceivable, and even within the realm of practical political possibilities, that one fine day a highly organized and mechanized humanity will conclude quite democratically – namely by majority decision – that for humanity as a whole it would be better to liquidate certain parts thereof.”
3. Conclusion: How Do We Liberate Ourselves?
History gives us powerful guidance on how we can throw off the yoke of totalitarianism in whatever stage or form it presents itself; also the current ideological form that most do not even realize is happening.
We can actually stop the retreat of freedom and the onset of dehumanization. In the words of George Orwell “[f]reedom is the freedom to say that two plus two make four. If that is granted, all else follows.”
We live in times where exactly this freedom is under grave threat as a result of ideological totalitarianism, something I have tried to illustrate with how Western societies deal with the Corona crisis, where facts too often seem not to matter in favor of enshrining the latest systemic ideological orthodoxy.
The best example of how freedom can be recovered is how the peoples of Eastern and Central Europe ended the totalitarian reign of Communism in their countries starting in 1989.
It was their long process of rediscovery of human dignity and their nonviolent yet insistent civil disobedience that brought down the regimes of the Communist elite and their allies of the mob, exposing the untruthfulness of their propaganda and the injustice of their policies.
They knew that truth is a goal to attain, not an object to claim and thus requires humility and respectful dialogue.
They understood that a society can only be free, healthy and prosperous when no human being is excluded and when there is always the genuine willingness and openness for a robust public discourse, to hear and understand the other, no matter how different his or her opinion or attitude to life.
They finally retook full responsibility for their own lives and for those around them by overcoming their fear, passivity and victimhood, by learning once again to think for themselves and by standing up to a state assisted by its enablers, that had forgotten its only purpose:
To serve and protect each and every one of its citizens, and not just those it chooses.
All totalitarian efforts always end on the dustheap of history. This one will be no exception.
Why 2022 Is 1973: Klaus Schwab Is Zbigniew Brzezinski
I wrote the following piece five years ago. It describes an elite group - whose globalist goals have been exported to the World Economic Forum (WEF), headed by Klaus Schwab.
They’re still around. But their quiet style has been replaced by the big brassy in-your-face Schwab circus: WE’RE TRANSFORMING THE WORLD. OKAY? WE ADMIT IT. ACHTUNG, BABY.
Let’s revisit the Trilaterals. It’s instructive. There are a few shockers. Here we go:
Who is in charge of destroying borders and separate nations?
One group has been virtually forgotten. Its influence is enormous. It has existed since 1973.
It’s called the Trilateral Commission (TC). Keep in mind that the original stated goal of the TC was to create “a new international economic order.”
In the run-up to his inauguration after the 2008 presidential election, Obama was tutored by the co-founder of the Trilateral Commission, Zbigniew Brzezinski.
In 1969, four years before birthing the TC with David Rockefeller, Zbigniew Brzezinski wrote: “[The] nation state as a fundamental unit of man’s organized life has ceased to be the principal creative force. International banks and multinational corporations are acting and planning in terms that are far in advance of the political concepts of the nation state.”
Goodbye, separate nations.
Any doubt on the question of TC goals is answered by David Rockefeller himself, the founder of the TC, in his Memoirs (2003):
"Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal working against the best interests of the United States, characterizing my family and me as ‘internationalists’ and of conspiring with others around the world to build a more integrated global political and economic structure - one world, if you will. If that is the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it."
Patrick Wood, author of Trilaterals Over Washington, points out there are only 87 members of the Trilateral Commission who live in America. Obama appointed eleven of them to posts in his administration.
For Example:
Tim Geithner, Treasury Secretary
James Jones, National Security Advisor
Paul Volker, Chairman, Economic Recovery Committee
Dennis Blair, Director of National Intelligence
Here is a stunning piece of forgotten history, a 1978 conversation between a US reporter and two members of the Trilateral Commission. (Source: Trilateralism: The Trilateral Commission and Elite Planning for World Management; ed. by Holly Sklar, 1980, South End Press, Pages 192-3).
The conversation was public knowledge at the time.
Anyone who was anyone in Washington politics, in media, in think-tanks, had access to it. Understood its meaning.
But no one shouted from the rooftops. No one used the conversation to force a scandal. No one protested loudly.
The conversation revealed that the entire basis of the US Constitution had been torpedoed, that the people who were running US national policy were agents of an elite shadow group. No question about it.
And yet: official silence. Media silence. The Dept. of Justice made no moves, Congress undertook no serious inquiries, and the President, Jimmy Carter, issued no statements. Carter was himself an agent of the Trilateral Commission in the White House. He had been plucked from obscurity by David Rockefeller, and through elite TC press connections, vaulted into the spotlight as a pre-eminent choice for the Presidency.
The following 1978 conversation featured reporter, Jeremiah Novak, and two Trilateral Commission members, Karl Kaiser and Richard Cooper. The interview took up the issue of who exactly, during President Carter’s administration, was formulating US economic and political policy.
The careless and off-hand attitude of Trilateralists Kaiser and Cooper is astonishing. It’s as if they’re saying, “What we’re revealing is already out in the open, it’s too late to do anything about it, why are you so worked up, we’ve already won…”
Novak: (the reporter): Is it true that a private [Trilateral committee] led by Henry Owen of the US and made up of [Trilateral] representatives of the US, UK, West Germany, Japan, France and the EEC is coordinating the economic and political policies of the Trilateral countries [which would include the US]?
Cooper: Yes, they have met three times.
Novak: Yet, in your recent paper you state that this committee should remain informal because to formalize ‘this function might well prove offensive to some of the Trilateral and other countries which do not take part.’ Who are you afraid of?
Kaiser: Many countries in Europe would resent the dominant role that West Germany plays at these [Trilateral] meetings.
Cooper: Many people still live in a world of separate nations, and they would resent such coordination [of policy].
Novak: But this [Trilateral] committee is essential to your whole policy. How can you keep it a secret or fail to try to get popular support [for its decisions on how nations will conduct their economic and political policies]?
Cooper: Well, I guess it’s the press’ job to publicize it.
Novak: Yes, but why doesn’t President Carter come out with it and tell the American people that [US] economic and political power is being coordinated by a [Trilateral] committee made up of Henry Owen and six others? After all, if [US] policy is being made on a multinational level, the people should know.
Cooper: President Carter and Secretary of State Vance have constantly alluded to this in their speeches. [a lie]
Kaiser: It just hasn’t become an issue.
This interview slipped under the mainstream media radar, which is to say, it was buried.
US (and other nations’) economic and political policy run by a committee of the Trilateral Commission - the Commission created in 1973 by David Rockefeller and his sidekick, Zbigniew Brzezinski.
When Carter won the presidential election (1976), his aide, Hamilton Jordan, said that if after the inauguration, Cy Vance and Brzezinski came on board as secretary of state and national security adviser, “We’ve lost. And I’ll quit.” Lost - because both men were powerful members of the Trilateral Commission and their appointment to key positions would signal a surrender of White House control to the Commission.
Vance and Brzezinski were appointed secretary of state and national security adviser, as Jordan feared. But he didn’t quit. He became Carter’s chief of staff.
Now consider the vast propaganda efforts of the past 40 years, on so many levels, to install the idea that all nations and peoples of the world are a single Collective.
From a very high level of political and economic power, this propaganda op has had the objective of grooming the population for a planet that is one coagulated mass, run and managed by one force. A central engine of that force is the Trilateral Commission.
One planet, with national borders erased, under one management system, with a planned global economy, “to restore stability,” “for the good of all, for lasting harmony.”
And one day in the future, a student would ask his teacher, “What happened to the United States?” And the teacher would say, “It was a criminal enterprise based on individual freedom. Fortunately, our leaders rescued the people and taught them the superior nature of HARMONY AND COOPERATION.”
The NWO Depopulation Agenda Is The Only Explanation Why Expensive Mainstream Medicine Is Lethal October 6 2025 | From: Geopolitics/ Various
When anybody doing research on the multiple attacks against the human body, be it through our drinking water, supposedly breathable air, or even within the pseudo healthcare medical industry itself, the answers would then lead us to our initial conclusion that this is only about economics, or capitalism in general, i.e.:
But, when the researcher begins to consider the following readily observable facts:
Public services are not only unsatisfactory but is outright deadly, e.g. lead poisoning is not only happening in Flint, Michigan, but is far more widespread than the media would like to entertain [here];
Government regulators adapting a policy of “approve first, recall later” in favor of a new drug that has undergone massive clinical test manipulations, making the rich drug companies even richer as the imposed penalties later on are not enough to bring them down but are serving only as added overhead for doing business [here, here];
… that same researcher will then begin to ask far and more broader questions that will hopefully carry him to the real answers, though uncomfortable they may be.
Such broader questions like:
“How can the government regulate if the penalties for violations of its rules don’t serve as deterrence for future wrongdoings?"
"Why the welfare of the people is always the last thing to be considered?"
"Why was the bailout aimed only at rescuing the fate of the bankers and not the homeless people?"
"What would exactly happen if it was the people that was bailed out instead of the bankers, after all, it was their bail out money to begin with?"
"Will the economy shuts down when all the bankers have gone broke?"
"Isn’t it a fact that the direct exchange of goods and services came in first before the banking industry and the illusion of wealth in money were even invented, and therefore, the people can better survive without the latter?"
"In response, why do we need to protest first before the wrongs are corrected, if it is even corrected?"
"Who, if not the government, is there left to protect the people and serve its interest at last?"
"How many can afford to file charges against these erring companies when the victim itself is systematically robbed of his capacity to access event he barest of necessities?"
Again, these are just simple questions that cannot be answered by endlessly describing the nature of the problem itself, as the media always do.
These are the questions that can only be answered logically by considering that perhaps the government is simply not serving the interests of the people who, even if they are actually the ones paying for its existence, are really not in control of the government, but only the Bankers who, as documents and scholarly studies indicate, own every other corporations on the planet.
Here’s Forbes’ acknowledgment and apology about the fact;
“Three systems theorists at the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology in Zurich have taken a database listing 37 million companies and investors worldwide and analyzed all 43,060 transnational corporations and share ownerships linking them.
They discovered that global corporate control has a distinct bow-tie shape, with a dominant core of 147 firms radiating out from the middle. Each of these 147 own interlocking stakes of one another and together they control 40% of the wealth in the network. A total of 737 control 80% of it all.
The top 20 are at the bottom of the post. This is, say the paper’s authors, the first map of the structure of global corporate control.
The #occupy movement will eat this up as evidence for massive redistribution of wealth. The New Scientist talked to one systems theorist who is “disconcerted” at the level of interconnectedness, but not surprised. Such structures occur commonly in biology, things like fungus, lichen and weeds.
Economists say the danger comes when you combine hyperconnection with the concentration of power. The Swiss scientists warn that this can lead to an unstable environment. No Scheisse, Sherlock.”
And if one considers the fact that the government itself has gone from being a Republic into a mere corporation controlled by, and serves, only the Select Few, then all the confusion as to why bad things are happening, and governments can only offer bad behavior and decisions in spite of the fact that it is manned supposedly by the best our society could offer.
The dire situation can only be properly explained if we consider all that’s been laid bare by those who refuse to take part of the greatest murder in the entire history of man, i.e.:
Every human being is reduced into a dead corpse, a corporation that seeks profit in order to survive and a virtual slave that feeds the bigger corporation, i.e. government, with a portion of his profit, i.e. taxes;
Corporate government itself is beholden to still another bigger government, i.e. private central bank, and has to protect all its alter egos and corporate friends, i.e. all other corporation that are serving the same generic purpose, e.g. social engineering, population regulation;
To prevent intellectual dissent, the best minds must be assimilated into a core group of fraternities that extols exclusivity, and therefore, superiority over the rest of our society, and will serve as the breeding ground for future leaders that will later on occupy highest positions in all institutions of indoctrination and control, e.g. United Nations, World Health Organization, the entire school system, the media and the entire government, effectively feeding each of them the taste and illusion of power;
Each potential leader must be inducted into the group through an initiation process, a ritual designed to put him in a very compromised position for easier control later on, i.e. through blackmail and other proven methods.
Indeed, it is more profitable for the bankers to expend attractive compensation and resources on just a few smart, sweet talking crowd rousers than to care for the multitude.
But then it still much wiser to not restrict the full potential of man through the institution of paper currency to limit access to such resources that are already provided for free by Nature. One can only wonder what level of advancements we could have achieve if all resources were made available to the thinking man.
But all those resources are hoarded and rendered unusable by the few who consider oppression as an exercise of power over another, and not an incapacity to understand that all things are One and the Same in Nature.
Power is the ultimate aphrodisiac for the Sociopathic Elite, and your kneeling inside their houses of worship gives them the ultimate and godly satisfaction. Still, this is not enough.
They needed to wipe out those who will attempt to defeat their enterprise. They are actively murdering people who understand the cancer science used in vaccines that are mandated by law and required by your own caring government.
The well-documented depopulation agenda, cloaked inside some benevolent sounding anti-climate change agenda, or the upgraded Agenda 2030, as agreed upon by all United Nations member countries, is the only explanation why mainstream medicine can’t cure while being expensive and outright deadly.
Depopulation agenda is the only stupid rationale why instead of decades of advancements in the realm of science and technology, the quality of life has instead deteriorated to its lowest levels and will continue to deteriorate because the majority refuse to entertain a new and untried system. Related: Agenda 2030 Translator: Decoding The UN’s New ‘Sustainable’ Development Goals
If they are now selling water, soon, every ounce of air will be sold in bottles, too, when the massive chemtrailing is left unabated by passivity that is sure to worsen only by the nano-particulates that go with these government-sanctioned operations.
The depopulation agenda can also be confirmed not just through the obvious, highly questionable behavior of our government, yet also by looking closely at who actually wrote the doctrines being imposed by the United Nations, particularly, the Codex Alimentarius.
“As we gain more insights into the grave dangers of genetically modified crops, fluoride, and vaccines, the impact of this less known document which the United Nations’ Food and Agriculture Organization, through the Codex Alimentarius Commission, wrote in 1963 will become more apparent.
Codex Alimentarius (Latin for “food book”) is a set of guidelines that is promoted to protect the consumers against faulty food products and procedures. But this codex has evolved over the years to include the following policies which will become, or is already, mandatory and binding among all members of the World Trade Organization [WTO]:
GMO food labelling not required;
Banned pesticides, aluminium are among those deadly chemicals classified as food additives;
Codex recommended maximum levels of chemical which are astoundingly high as opposed to the extremely low daily recommended daily allowances for vitamins;
Dietary supplements or natural health foods are to be classified as drugs;
Codex would make vitamins and minerals illegal and not available with a prescription;
Every dairy cow is required to have Monsanto’s recombinant bovine growth hormone and all other animals for food production must be treated with antibiotics, and;
All food should be irradiated
These are just among the more than 4,000 guidelines and regulations promulgated over the years regarding everything man can possibly put into his mouth with the exception of pharmaceuticals.
While the UN-FAO may insists that codex compliance is voluntary, the World Trade Organization made it clear that in cases of trade disputes between two countries, codex compliance takes precedence over the merits of the case.
This clever method of the author having plausible deniability because the mandatory clause is not written in the actual document itself while the other arm, in this case the WTO, trying to enforce it by using as the basis for resolving disputes effectively forces each member nation to be compliant for practical purposes, is a clear indication that both the UN and WTO are long tentacles of the same Giant Octopus that also has interests in Big Pharma.
When a scheme is so huge, who among the maleducated, highly brainwashed members of our society could have a chance of figuring it out? The plot thickens when you consider whose brainchild was the codex.
During the Nuremberg trial, 25 board members, executives, and chemists of the giant chemical manufacturer and poison gas supplier to the Nazi concentration camps, IG Farben, were convicted and sent to jail, but not for long.
In 1951, they were all released and one of them proposed that if war can’t solve the problem of too much people, why not control food.
Fritz den Meer, the executive manager of IG Farben in 1943 and convicted to crimes against humanity, who coined the phrase “Arbeit Mach Frei” which literally means “work sets you free” decorated in entrances of several concentration camps including Auschwitz, submitted this idea to his UN pals which resulted to the creation of a trade commission now known as the Codex Alementarius Commission. For crimes against humanity conviction, he served a very long sentence of six years.”
Another name that should be in everyone’s consciousness by now is Henry Kissinger, who wrote the justification to thin the herd by saying that the population of the world has been reaching critical levels in 1974:
“National Security Study Memorandum 200: Implications of Worldwide Population Growth for U.S. Security and Overseas Interests (NSSM200) was completed on December 10, 1974 by the United States National Security Council under the direction of Henry Kissinger.
It was adopted as official U.S. policy by President Gerald Ford in November 1975. [citation needed] It was originally classified, but was later declassified and obtained by researchers in the early 1990s.
The basic thesis of the memorandum was that population growth in the least developed countries (LDCs) is a concern to U.S. national security, because it would tend to risk civil unrest and political instability in countries that had a high potential for economic development.
The policy gives “paramount importance” to population control measures and the promotion of contraception among 13 populous countries.
This is to control rapid population growth which the U.S. deems inimical to the socio-political and economic growth of these countries and to the national interests of the United States, since the “U.S. economy will require large and increasing amounts of minerals from abroad”, and these countries can produce destabilizing opposition forces against the United States.
It recommends that U.S. leadership “influence national leaders” and that “improved world-wide support for population-related efforts should be sought through increased emphasis on mass media and other population education and motivation programs by the UN, USIA, and USAID.”
…and would have worsened even further wthat ith the implementation of the notorious Trans-Pacific Partnership trade agreement [TPP] that no lawmakers were allowed to discuss outside the boundaries of its pages.
There is more hard evidence we have collected which you may know already, than would fit into this article that should demand concrete action from all of us.
If we choose to not act today, can we therefore blame the corporate government for doing its best to make a profit by keeping the people dumb and as pliable as could be possible?
Or, should we blame ourselves for our collective indifference to the real cause of the problems confronting the very survival of humanity itself even at the presence of many alternative and more viable systemic and technological solutions?
Whoever else are we really waiting for before we take that first step towards our own salvation as a human species if not that same face we always see in the mirror?
Surely, the majority have been massively indoctrinated through the mass media ever since they were born to wait for a hero - an all too fearless, all too wise individual who will save the day and slay them all, sociopaths they are.
But hero worship has not gotten us that far, and it won’t be.
We must rise as an individual awake and aware, and as a collective bonded together by our common aspirations to live in great abundance, harmony through respect upon one another.
This is the only scenario where everyone is motivated, by default, to contribute voluntarily what one is capable of, with the foreknowledge that honor and recognition are the only compensation and reward.
By that time, service rendered in the spirit of mutual cooperation is the only valid currency.
Together, we can drive out all that is Evil, that entity who promised us heaven only when we die, and begin creating heaven here on Earth now that we are still breathing.
The technologies that could make this possible is already here and now, but they have been suppressed.
How Billionaires Use Non-Profits To Bypass Governments And Force Their Agendas On Humanity October 5 2025 | From: PrepareForChange / Various
As wealth becomes concentrated in fewer hands, so does political and social power via foundations and non-profits.
As wealth becomes concentrated in fewer and fewer hands, the billionaire class is increasingly turning to foundations and non-profits to enact the change they would like to see in the world.
Amid the rise of philanthrocapitalism, growing numbers of critics are raising serious questions about whether this outsized influence is doing more harm than good.
In the January issue of the New York Review of Books, veteran journalist Michael Massing noted that, in the past 15 years alone, “the number of foundations with a billion dollars or more in assets has doubled, to more than eighty.”
The philanthropic sector in the United States is far more significant than in Europe, fueled in part by generous tax write-offs, which the U.S. public subsidizes to the tune of $40 billion a year.
As Massing observes, billionaires are not just handing over their money, they have ideas about how it should be used, and their vision often aligns with their own economic interests. For this reason, the philanthropy industry deserves rigorous scrutiny, not a free pass because it is in the service of good.
Massing’s argument followed a study released by the watchdog organization Global Policy Forum, which found that philanthropic foundations are so powerful they are allowing wealthy individuals to bypass governments and international bodies like the United Nations in pursuit of their own agendas.
What’s more, this outsized influence is concentrated in the United States, where 19 out of the top 27 largest foundations are based. These 27 foundations together possess $360 billion, write authors Jens Martens and Karolin Seitz.
Such dramatic wealth accumulation has disturbing implications.
“What is the impact of framing the problems and defining development solutions by applying the business logic of profit-making institutions to philanthropic activities, for instance by results-based management or the focus on technological quick-win solutions in the sectors of health and agriculture?" the report asks.
These questions are not new, as social movements have long raised the alarm about the global impact of the ever-expanding philanthropy sector.
In 2010, the international peasant movement La Via Campesina blasted the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation’s acquisition of Monsanto shares as proof that its role in privatizing the global food supply and exporting big agribusiness, from Africa to North America, should be viewed through a commercial rather than humanitarian lens.
“It is really shocking for the peasant organizations and social movements in Haiti to learn about the decision of the [Gates] Foundation to buy Monsanto shares while it is giving money for agricultural projects in Haiti that promote the company’s seed and agrochemicals,” said Chavannes Jean-Baptiste of the Haitian Peasant Movement of Papaye and Caribbean coordinator of La Via Campesina at the time.
“The peasant organizations in Haiti want to denounce this policy which is against the interests of 80 percent of the Haitian population, and is against peasant agriculture - the base of Haiti’s food production.”
The Gates Foundation more recently fell under scrutiny from the advocacy organization Global Justice Now, which released a report in January raising concerns about the institution’s track record on education, food and health care policies.
“The Gates Foundation has rapidly become the most influential actor in the world of global health and agricultural policies, but there’s no oversight or accountability in how that influence is managed,”said Polly Jones of Global Justice Now.
“This concentration of power and influence is even more problematic when you consider that the philanthropic vision of the Gates Foundation seems to be largely based on the values of corporate America. The foundation is relentlessly promoting big business-based initiatives such as industrial agriculture, private health care and education.
But these are all potentially exacerbating the problems of poverty and lack of access to basic resources that the foundation is supposed to be alleviating.”
Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerberg and his wife, Priscilla Chan, raised eyebrows when they announced they would give away 99 percent of their wealth. As it turned out, this was not a giveaway at all, but a shifting of funds into their own limited liability company (LLC).
Just weeks later, Zuckerberg lashed out at Indian media justice advocates who raised concerns about his company’s efforts to undermine net neutrality protections in their country.
Like many others, Massing is calling for greater transparency, not only for foundations but for think tanks, Hollywood, Silicon Valley and universities. Pointing to the website Inside Philanthropy, whose stated purpose is to “pull back the curtain on one of the most powerful and dynamic forces shaping society,” Massing argues that far greater and better-resourced scrutiny is needed.
“There remains the question of how to pay for all this,” writes Massing, posing: “Is there perhaps a consortium of donors out there willing to fund an operation that would part the curtains on its own world?”
But some argue that we already have all the information we need to be concerned. In December, Vandana Shiva, an ecofeminist and activist, wrote in response to Zuckerberg’s move in India that a:
“Collective corporate assault is underway globally. Having lined up all their ducks, veterans of corporate America such as Bill Gates are being joined by the next wave of philanthro-corporate Imperialists, including Mark Zuckerberg.”
“It is an enclosure of the commons,” she continued, “which are ‘commons’ because they guarantee access to the commoner, whether it be seed, water, information or internet.”
The Esoteric Meaning Of 'As Above, So Below' October 4 2025 | From: Omnithought / Various
“As above, so below, as within, so without, as the universe, so the soul” - Hermes Trismegistus
The term, “As above, so below” was recorded in the Hermetic texts from The Emerald Tablet of Hermes Trismegistus, which states: “That which is Below corresponds to that which is Above, and that which is Above corresponds to that which is Below, to accomplish the miracle of the One Thing.”
In the heavens above, the planet’s energies are that which is so below on earth. We humans who live on the so below are made of these same heavenly energies of that which is as above. Hence, the microcosm is oneself, and the macrocosm is the universe.
Manly P. Hall had said;
"We are the gods of the atoms that make up ourselves, but we are also the atoms of the gods that make up the universe”; and Paracelsus says that man’s spirit comes from the stars, his soul from the planets, his body from the elements. More recently Carl Sagan had said quite simply, “we’re made of star stuff.”
Our immortal souls belong to the Creator like the stars in the heavens. Humans are made of the heavens who are found among the stars and planets.
The heavens on the AS ABOVE is the macrocosm, and we humans on the SO BELOW, the microcosm.
The same chemical energies found in the AS ABOVE stars such as phosphorus, hydrogen, sodium, Sulfur, magnesium, and iron can be found in almost all living organisms including we humans on the SO BELOW.
Like a star that burns bright, we can also burn out and fall like Lucifer. AS ABOVE, SO BELOW. A dying star that once belonged to the Creator becomes ash, just as with the fall of man, his immortal essence also becomes mortal ash.
The as above so below is also the hidden secret biblical alchemical science of the allegorical stories behind the veiling of 666, the beast or Revelation, Lucifer, and Jesus Christ.
John the Baptist said of the coming Antichrist and the Number of the Beast:
"Let him that hath understanding count the number of the beast : for it is the number of a man; and his number is Six hundred threescore and six.”
John was telling us that we are that beast, and the antichrist. 666 is simply the number of man, and this can be proven by modern science.
Lucifer, the fallen angel is the Latin word for the Greek word phosphorus (Greek Φωσφόρος Phōsphoros); a name meaning “Light-Bringer.”
The phosphorus atom is of the nitrogen family, but having that characteristic of firing.
Hence, the term light bringer for this is the very chemical energy that next to calcium, phosphorus is the most abundant mineral in the body used primarily for energy production, growth and the repair of body cells and tissues.
It is the very energy that you need to think, live, create and yes, even have sex with to create babies to further evolve or devolve your family blood line.
God said, let there be light, and there was light.
The very chemical energy known as the Greek phosphorus that makes us human; and like the Latin Lucifer, we too can fall and devolve.
Or we can simply rise above the matrix and become like Jesus; leaving the earthly world behind by dying on the cross on the so below, in order to rise to the heavens on the as above to become spiritual beings who are lights in the world.
Illuminated teachers and angels that guide those people who are less fortunate to do the same.
These truths are the basis of the human science of chemical energies of the as above and so below known as alchemy, and the science of an inner spiritual knowledge called gnosis. Two ancient sciences that are some of the least understood by current humanity.
This selfish ignorance of their pasts that often leads to their early mortality, in which the evolution of their soul is simply not occurring.
Our goal with our lives is to evolve, not devolve. To rise above, not fall below. To love and be loved. Hence, those humans who do not know their pasts, simply never last.
Those who live a lie always die, and those who live by truth never die.
Life is a journey in which we each take our own paths, and find our own truths. To find truth and happiness, we all need to play our own tune in accordance with each of our own chosen paths, spiritual gifts and worldly talents.
Be still, withdraw from the world of illusions and just be yourself.
In a sense, be happy with what the creator has given us and also do not waste our lives by becoming fallen angels doomed to devolve in our own man-made hells for eternity.
If we all play our own tune with these spiritual gifts that we have been given, we can then begin to repair our damaged selves, and then be a light in the damaged dark world that we live in. Find that philosopher’s stone that is within each one of us.
In a sense, create heaven on earth.
As Above, So Below and As Within, So Without...
The Seven Principles of the Universe:
1. Principle of Mentalism: “All is Mind”
2. Principle of Correspondence: “As is above, so is below. As is below, so is above.”
3. Principle of Vibration: “Nothing rests; everything moves; everything vibrates.”
4. Principle of Polarity: “Everything is dual; everything has an opposite, and opposites are identical in nature but different in degree.”
5. Principle of Rhythm: “Everything flows, out and in; the pendulum-swing manifests in everything; the measure of the swing to the right is the measure of the swing to the left- rhythm compensates.”
6. Principle of Cause and Effect: “Every cause has its effect; every effect has its cause.”
7. Principle of Gender: “Everything has its masculine and feminine principles.”
GMO's - A Planned Human Sterility Program October 3 2025| From: GlobalResearch / Various
Severe health risks of Genetically Modified Organisms (GMO) are not new. Studies by scientists among others in France, Germany, Austria, since at least the 1990s, pointing to several levels of health dangers to mankind abound.
A 2015 study released by Egyptian researchers found that rats fed a GMO diet suffer from infertility, among other health issues. In the US similar studies were muzzled by Monsanto and the Monsanto staffed FDA.
In a 2011 paper the Institute for Responsible Technology - IRT refers to 19 animal studies linking GMOs to mostly liver and kidney organ disruption.
In the early 2000 the first Russian studies revealed reduction in fertility and birth defects in hamsters and rats. In a 2013 Russian study, scientist have discovered that mammals that eat GMO foodstuffs have difficulties to reproduce.
The study concluded that “Campbell hamsters that have a fast reproduction rate were fed for two years with ordinary soya beans which are widely used in agriculture and those contain different percentages of GMOs.
Another group of hamsters, the control group, was fed with pure soya [found in Serbia, as 95% of soya in the world is transgenic].”
According to Dr. Alexei Surov, who led the study on behalf of the National Association for Gene Security;
“We selected several groups of hamsters, kept them in pairs in cells and gave them ordinary food as always. We did not add anything for one group, but the other was fed with soya that contained no GMO components, while the third group [was fed] with some content of GMOs and the fourth one with increased amounts of GMOs…..
Originally everything went smoothly. However, we noticed quite a serious effect when we selected new pairs from their cubs and continued to feed them as before. These pairs’ growth rate was slower, and [they] reached their sexual maturity slowly. When we got some of their cubs, we formed the new pairs of the third generation.
We failed to get cubs from these pairs which were fed with GMO foodstuffs. It was proven that these pairs lost their ability to give birth to their cubs."
Sterilization from GMOs is not an accident.
Henry Kissinger, the protégé of the Rockefeller Foundation and one of the driving forces – still today – of the Bilderberg Society, not only is the author of the infamous proclamation in the early seventies:
"Who controls the food supply controls the people; who controls the energy can control whole continents; and who controls money can control the world;"
“Depopulation should be the highest priority of foreign policy towards the Third World."
This is still a (mostly unspoken) key objective of the elite, associated through different semi-secret organizations like the Bilderbergers, the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR), the Trilateral Commission, the British Chatham House, the Economic Forum (Davos), and others.
GMO Seeds
GMOs are based on two strands; one involves insect resistance, the other is herbicide resistant and more dangerous, because it is glyphosate-tolerant.
Glyphosate, known under its trade name ‘Roundup’, is however absorbed in the food fibers and has devastating health effects.
The herbicide is an endocrine-disruptor, a chemical that at certain doses can interfere with the hormone system of mammals.
These disruptions may cause cancer, infertility, miscarriage, birth defects and full sterility by the third generation, as the Russian study clearly demonstrated.
In his eye-opening 2007 book Seeds of Destruction: The Hidden Agenda of Genetic Manipulation, F. William Engdahl points to food control and depopulation as the strategic key objectives of GMOs as put forward by Henry Kissinger already half a century ago.
A less populated Third World will give the US and world elite easier and cheaper access to needed raw materials, allowing the ‘chosen few’ to maintain a lifestyle of exuberant luxury and resources abuse.
“We are leading the world into the sixth mass extinction of life on this planet... Human behavior is undermining the web of life.”
Attempts to retify agreements such as the now-defunct Trans-Pacific Partnership (TPP) agreement always seem to have beeen negotiated behind closed doors.
The chief agricultural negotiator for the US was former Monsanto lobbyist, Islam Siddique.
The two monster trade agreements would have deprived governments from regulating transnational corporations’ activities, to the point where the rights of corporations would have superseded sovereign nations laws.
Corporations would have been able to set up private courts that may rule a country liable for lost profit due to legislation that may interfere with their activities.
Just because the TPP failed - doe not mean similar machinations may still be brewing.
This would particularly apply to biotech agriculture. GMOs could no longer be forbidden by individual countries.
They are integral parts of the two giant trade agreements which the US is attempting to ram down the throats of their ‘partners’ – and may do so in the general realm of vassalage which has been cultivated by Washington’s threat and sledgehammer politics – “You are either with us or you are against us” – and the latter is usually punished with devastating sanctions, if not with death of errant, non-compliant leaders.
The objective of depopulation is alive and well – and being implemented under our eyes; and We, The People, are blinded by the steady drop-by-drop of propaganda that makes us believe that these trade agreements will resolve the world’s food problems, will eliminate famine.
What they will eliminate after a few generations is peoples’ fertility.
This, coupled with the constant and continuous wars on terror and financial assassinations of entire countries (see Greece) by the so-called Bretton Woods Organizations, IMF and World Bank, working hand-in-hand with the FED and Wall Street, may eventually succeed in drastically reducing world population - if We, The People, do not wake up.
Waking up to a new form of agriculture is crucial. Back to nature and earth-friendly farming, as well as away from globalization to the notion of ‘local production for local consumption’.
Russia has a strict ban on GMOs. Russia is producing about 40% of its food by permaculture methods on simple garden plots.
According to Natural Living, 80% of the country’s fruit and berries, and 66% of vegetables and about 50% of the nation’s milk are produced on dacha-type plots.
It is not too late to get away from GMOs, from planned sterility and from depopulating the globe for the benefit of a tyrant elite.
But, We the People, have to wake up, take back the sovereign control of our nations from the vassal leadership which Washington has discretely, almost imperceptibly placed at the helm of the 11 TPP and the 28 TTIP nations by stolen or manipulated elections or outright ‘regime change.'.
The breaking up of the Eurozone and the European Union – both of which are in dire straits – might be the beginning of a new era of self-determination.
Smart Versus Clever Versus Intelligent Versus Wise October 2 2025 | From: MyEnglishTeacher / Various
All these words have a similar or almost the same meaning.
They all describe a person (in some cases also an animal) who is smart in one way or another. The big difference between them is the occasions and situations when you should use them.
Smart means that a person, or animal, is able to solve a problem. You use the word smart to describe someone who can think logically and make a good choice in the situation.
Smart also means that the person, or animal, understands what you’re telling them and can act based on that information.
For example:
I always believed my child was very smart.
That’s a really smart dog. It learned all the tricks in one month.
Smart is used when we want to describe the basic level of intelligence. This requires understanding, reasoning, and then doing an action.
Opposite of Smart
The opposite of smart is stupid.
So, smart describes someone intelligent or someone who is very knowledgeable. It’s the first step to describing intellect.
Intelligent is a step above smart. Intelligent is used to describe people, and some rare animals, that can think on their own, and act on their instincts.
When someone is smart they act based on the information they get. When someone is intelligent they find their own information, come to understand it by themselves, and then make up their mind about what they want to do.
In a way, being intelligent means that a person, or animal, is more independent than when they are smart. This is why an IQ (Intelligence Quotient) test measures intelligence.
Let’s go over some examples:
Most of her students are smart, but she says some of them are so intelligent that they outshine the rest.
When he moved to New York and managed to get a job in one week I was sure he was super intelligent.
Dolphins are some of the most intelligent animals on the planet.
Intelligent describes this higher level of intellect, and it’s just above smart. Being intelligent means being able to do things on your own, and making choices based on what you know and not what people tell you.
Intelligence
Noun
1. The ability to acquire and apply knowledge and skills. "an eminent man of great intelligence"
Similar: intellectual / mental capacity
2. The collection of information of military or political value. "the chief of military intelligence"
Now let’s move on to clever. Unlike smart or intelligent, clever is defined by the situation more than the intellect of a person. When someone, or something, is clever it means they can act quickly in that type of situation.
For example:
Comedians are clever.
My cat is very clever since he’s learned to open the door when we’re not home.
I made a joke yesterday and then Ann was clever enough to add to it. We laughed for hours.
Please stop your clever remarks in class.
Here we can see that clever is mostly defined by the situation. It can also mean that someone is funny. Clever is not used in the same way as smart or intelligent. It does not describe someone’s intellect.
What is the Difference Between Being Smart, Clever, and Intelligent?
John and Jack had a prestigious exam on 24th July.
Jack had been keeping busy and had been a bit lazy so he didn’t study anything till 20th August. But he took very less time in grasping the concepts and got 80% marks in the exam unlike everybody else who started late and performed poorly. Jack is intelligent.
John made a time table for himself one month in advance of the exam. He had other work too but he managed to dedicate at least one hour everyday. He could grasp the concepts as quickly as John but he didn’t stop there. He practised a lot and even solved mock papers. John finally scored 95% marks and topped. John is not just intelligent, John is brilliant.
They both had another exam on 23rd August. Jack now scored 85% and John scored 98%. They are both smarter now as they learnt from the mistakes they made in the paper last time and improved their scores.
Intelligence is something with which you’re born. On the other hand, smart is an earned status, and so is brilliant. When we study and learn, we become smarter in the subject matter. When someone is exceptionally good at something he does, he’s brilliant.
And finally – wise. Wise describes a person who knows many things because of their age. Wise can also describe someone who knows a lot of philosophy.
The most common way to use wise is to describe older people who know a lot of information.
For example:
My grandpa is so wise. He always gives good advice, and he knows a lot of history.
He’s wise for his age. He knows things like an old man would.
This is how we use wise. We describe someone who thinks a lot about a lot of things. We usually expect these people to know a lot of information, but wise doesn’t require them to understand it. Smart and intelligent describe intellect and understanding.
Wise only means that a person remembers a lot of info and that they are probably old.
Unexplainable Discovery: Ancient Indian Mandala Found At Peru’s Nazca Lines October 1 2025 | From: AncientCode / Various The Nazca lines of Peru are, without a doubt, the most enigmatic and mysterious geoglyphs ever discovered on the planet, but the discovery of an Ancient Indian Mandala makes the Nazca lines, even more, mysterious.
Many of us have wondered, together with countless scholars, what the exact purpose of the mysterious lines is… yet no one has been able to fully understand, nor answer, the exact purpose of these mysterious lines.
Were these giant figures meant to be seen from above? Do hey mimic constellations in the sky? What were the ancient’s trying to say to future generations? Were the Nazca lines mere ancient art? If so… why would ancient mankind create art that cannot be fully appreciated from the ground?
These are some of the questions that have been asked for decades, yet no one has been able to answer them. There are over 800 straight lines, 300 geometric figures and 70 animal and plant designs also called biomorphs.
The largest figure found at Nazca stretches about 200 meters across. Interestingly, the Longest glyph found at Nazca goes for 9 miles.
There are some scholars that have discovered curious patterns in the numerous designs and they suggest that the Nazca might be one of the earliest known examples of applied geometry.
According to some claims, scientists from the University of Dresden researched the Nazca lines, measuring the magnetic field and electric conductivity and discovering that electric conductivity was 8000 higher on the Nazca lines than next to them.
But perhaps one of the most enigmatic depictions of Nazca is what is known as the Mandala. Depicted in an extremely remote area, it sits atop an arid mountain plateau, causing confusion among those who have been able to observe it directly.
The Mandala is considered a ritual symbol in Indian religions and represents the universe.
Today, the mandala has become a generic term used to describe any diagram, chart or geometrical pattern that represents the cosmos. The Mandala also symbolizes the notion that life is, in fact, a never ending cycle. But what is it doing in Peru? Who created it… and for what purpose?
The Mandala at Nazca seems to have been carved with extreme precision and detail, created on the ground measuring around 180 feet across, with an inner circle of the same diameter. In addition, several other smaller circles, approximately 20 feet in diameter are etched in the landscape along with a series of strategically placed holes.
The Ancient Hindus were among the first people on the planet to use a Mandala spiritually, but the most famous Mandala most of us know are in fact made by Buddhists.
In Ancient Sanskrit, mandala means ‘circle’, even though the depiction of the symbol may be dominated by a set of squares or triangles, the mandala as a whole is a concentric creation.
Archeologists today have failed to understand, or even ask, how an ancient symbol, that originated half-way around the world, got to a remote, arid mountain near Nazca.
Interestingly, according to some local legends, the mysterious Incan creator god Viracocha, commissioned the Nazca Lines and glyphs in the past. These lines are said to be created by the Viracocha himself. He was the great teacher God of the Andes.
Viracocha was one of the most important deities in the Inca pantheon and seen as the creator of all things or the substance from which all things are created, and intimately associated with the sea.
According to the myth recorded by Juan de Betanzos, Viracocha rose from Lake Titicaca (or sometimes the cave of Pacaritambo) during the time of darkness to bring forth light.
You can see many more examples of Naca lines images on a simple image search.
3. Silicon Valley Algorithm Manipulation
Julian Assange On The War On Free Speech: “Everyone Else Must Take My Place” & Julian Assange Is Guilty Only Of Revealing The Evil Soul Of US Imperialism
How A Small Scientific Elite Dictates Government Policy 
Les, 60yo. Fire Chief, several hours after his booster. Suffered aortic rupture.
Tucker Carlson on Fauci Resignation
Gobekli Tepe in Eastern Turkey
The Hijacked Environmental Movement Fallacy #1: Carbon Dioxide is a Poison
Solution: Get Informed Before You Demonstrate
The Influencers of our Beliefs
The Ongoing Destruction Of The Minds Of Children & The Mass Dumbing Down Of Humanity Is Now Confirmed By Scientists
The people cookers - cooking people like a microwave oven cooks meat
(1). King John refused to accept The Vatican's representative, Stephen Langton, whom Pope Innocent III installed to rule England(religious or in fact?) 
Tim Geithner, Treasury Secretary
Smart
CURRENT AFFAIRS
.jpg)
In the late 1800’s, John Keely made an effort to tap the "luminiferous aether" with his handmade magnetic devices in order to produce clean, cheap electricity. Same story with him as with Tesla, the oil baron families move in to take a controlling interest.
Meat
Human Energy Field and DNA – The Origin of Health
(which listed him as the “Senator from Alaska” although he was not a Senator and he apparently wasn’t from Alaska either, plus Alaska didn’t even become a state officially until 1959).
for detailed information and also Webster Tarpley’s 
and perhaps also the Isaacson/Thomas book 
for an unbelievable account of the behind the scenes power play by acting world architects in the lead up to and aftermath of WWII reordering.
‘s sponsorship of the 
during which it worked to undermine the king and trampled over the masses of society.
